Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Product
Title
PartNumber
DC240/255/265/
460/470
DT65/DP65
AgentServiceManual
701P22840
Status
Date
Re-Issue
May2003
(Supercedes701P22160November2002)
CHANGEHIGHLIGHTS:
StatusIndicatorRAPs
Chain5
Revised05-100RAP,05-CRAP,05-MRAPtoincludeDocumentInputTraySideGuides
Kit,PL2.1A.
05-102RAPAddedcheckoutofRegistrationGate
05-ARAPAddedreferencetotheDADFCounterbalanceHingeKitPL2.1B.
Chain707-BRAP-the4InputIIOCPWBisnowspared.
Chain808-115RAPmodifiedduetoachangeinsparingstrategyofHCFFeedSprings
Chain10
AllreferencestoGP42CSEFuserRebuild/ReturnProcessarenolongerNASGonly.
NumerousRAPsmodifiedtoreflectPartsListchanges
Chain12CMFF12-761RAPand12-762RAPupdatedperengineeringfeedback.
Chain1414-335RAPmodifiedperengineeringfeedback
Chain12CMFF12-761RAPand12-762RAPupdatedperengineeringfeedback.
OtherFaultsRAPsOF-6RAPrevisedwithupdatedMFFfaultmessages.
RepairsandAdjustments
AddedREP12.13.204-BarExitDriveShaftandREP12.13.21CompilerEntranceSensor,
S46.
PartsList
Revisedtoincludenewsparesthroughout.
GeneralProceduresandinformation
InformationforthefollowingIOTTagshasbeenadded123,139,140,141,and278.
Informatio0nforthefollowingMFFTagshasbeenadded:M022,M023,M024,M027,M028,
andM029.
GP42,CSEFuserRebuild/ReturnProcessisnowforNASGandXEandXEshippinginformationhasbeenadded
DocumentCentre
240/255/265/460/470
DT65/DP65
DocumentCentre240/255/265
460/470
DT65/DP65
XeroxDocumentCentre240/255/265/460/470
DT65/DP65ServiceDocumentation
701P22840
May2003
ForSelf-ServiceofXeroxDC240/255/265/460/470DT65/DP65Products
DC240/255/265/460/470
WhileXeroxhastriedtomakethedocumentationaccurate,Xeroxwillhavenoliabilityarising
outofanyinaccuraciesoromissions.
AgentServiceManual
DocumentCentre240/255/265/460/470ServiceDocumentation
701P22840
May2003
Preparedby:
WARNING
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not
installedandusedinaccordancewiththeinstructionsdocumentation,maycauseinterferencetoradiocommunications.Ithasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywiththelimits
foraClassAcomputingdevicepursuanttosubpartJofpart15ofFCCrules,whichare
designedtoprovidereasonableprotectionagainstsuchinterferencewhenoperatedina
commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to
causeinterferenceinwhichcasetheuser,athisownexpense,willberequiredtocorrecttheinterference.
XeroxCorporation
GlobalKnowledgeandLanguageServices
800PhillipsRoad-Bldg.845-17S
Webster,NewYork14580
2003byXeroxCorporation.Allrightsreserved.Xeroxandallidentifyingnumbersusedin
connectionwiththeXeroxproductsmentionedinthispublicationaretrademarksoftheXerox
Corporation.
***XeroxPrivateData***
AllservicedocumentationissuppliedtoXeroxexternalcustomersforinformationalpurposes
only.Xeroxservicedocumentationisintendedforusebycertified,product-trainedservicepersonnelonly.Xeroxdoesnotwarrantorrepresentthatitwillnotifyorprovidetosuchcustomer
anyfuturechangetothisdocumentation.Customerperformedserviceofequipment,ormodules,components,orpartsofsuchequipmentmayaffectwhetherXeroxisresponsibletofix
machine defects under the warranty offered by Xerox with respect to such equipment. You
shouldconsulttheapplicablewarrantyforitstermsregardingcustomerorthird-partyprovided
service.
Xerox
DiagnosticNavigator isatrademarkoftheXeroxCorporation.
AdobeisaregisteredtrademarkofAdobeSystems,Inc.
AppleTalkisaregisteredtrademarkofAppleComputer,Inc.
Microsoft,MS-DOSareregisterdtrademarks,andWindows isatrademarkofMicrosoft
Corporation.
Novell,NetWare,PConsole,andNPrintareregisteredtrademarkofNovell,Inc.
PostScriptisaregisteredtrademarkofAdobeSystems,Inc.
SectionName
Introduction
About This Documentation..............................................................................................
Organization....................................................................................................................
How To Use This Documentation ...................................................................................
Additional Product Safety Information.............................................................................
Tag Usage.......................................................................................................................
Translated Warnings .......................................................................................................
iii
iii
iv
vi
vii
viii
V0.042
May 2003
1
Introduction
Introduction
May 2003
2
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Organization
Introduction
This section should always be used to start and complete the service call. This section is
used to identify a suspected problem. The procedures will either direct you to a RAP or
identify a faulty component or subassembly.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
iii
Introduction
This section contains the RAPs and CDs and other diagnostic aids for troubleshooting image
defect problems. RAPs associated with image defect symptoms all contain the prefix "IQ" to
differentiate them from the rest of the failure symptoms. If a Xerographic fault code is present,
diagnostics of that failure should be done using the appropriate RAP in the Status Indicator
RAPs section. This section also contains image quality specifications and image defect samples.
Section 4: REPAIR/ADJUSTMENTS PROCEDURES
The SCP-02, Introduction to Call Flow, is intended to provide a systematic approach to the
entire call. SCP-03, Initial Actions, identifies the recommended steps to be done to get a "snapshot" of the machine condition. SCP-04, Corrective Actions, describes the recommended process for diagnosing and repairing the failure, and SCP-07, Final Actions, describes what
precautions are recommended to ensure that the machine is in the best possible condition
when the call is completed.
This section contains the Component Locational drawings and all repair and adjustment procedures for the Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470.
The System Fault Analysis Procedure creates a systematic for diagnosing the cause of the failure when it may not be apparent, or when there are conflicting or ambiguous symptoms. It is
important that this procedure be used in order to ensure that the correct symptom is being
diagnosed.
This section contains special checkout procedures used when troubleshooting or repairing the
machine. Also included in this section are text versions of the PWS Diagnostic routines and
various reference documentation.
The RAP/CD number is identical to the fault code generated by the machine and displayed on the UI Fault screens or on the PWS, with the exception that the fault code
extension may (00-000.XX) may not appear in the RAP title.
The first pair of digits in a RAP/CD number identify the functional area (chain) to which the
fault code refers.
The 100 series faults (XX-100) refer to document or paper jam faults. 200 series faults
(XX-200) refer to timing faults. 300 series faults refer to control faults.
The 500 series (XX-500), are reserved for status messages, that is, messages that are
displayed on the UI Display Panel. RAPs are not written for status codes.
The 700 series faults are reserved for non-shutdown faults. These faults are logged in the
error log, but do not appear in the Last 40 Faults. These faults will not normally impact
the customer, but may be useful in diagnosing machine problems.
RAPs/CDs number with a chain followed by an alpha character (05-A), are assigned by
GKLS (Service Education). The machine software cannot identify these failures, therefore cannot assign a fault code.
RAPs/CDs with OF followed by an alpha character are assigned by GKLS (Service Education). These faults do not fall into one particular chain. Examples are OF-1, Noise RAP
and OF-6 Status Messages.
Introduction
Plug/Jack locational drawings, PWB drawings, and the IIOC PWB locational drawings.
They are accessible through the table of contents, but would normally be accessed by a
hotlink within the RAP or procedure.
SPECIFICATION
+5 VDC
+12 VDC
May 2003
iv
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
This symbol is used to refer to notes which are found on the same page of a circuit
diagram. A note is used whenever it is necessary to highlight an operating or maintenance procedure, a practice, condition, or statement.
SPECIFICATION
-12 VDC
+24 VDC
+36 VDC
This symbol, example (PL2.1), refers to the Parts List exploded view page where the
part can be found.
4.
Adjustment
This symbol refers to an adjustment procedure in the Repair/Adjustments section.
Parts List
H/L SPECIFICATIONS
+5 VDC
+24 VDC
5.
6.
Commoning Point
This symbol is used to refer to a location in the machine wiring where more than two
wires a connected together at a single point.
Model Distinction
If different parts or actions exist because of different models, the model distinction (40ppm,
55ppm, or 65ppm, NASG (USCO), XE, FX) will identify the appropriate part or action.
Reference Symbology
The following reference symbols are used throughout the Document Centre 240/255/265/460/
470 Service Documentation.
1.
Example 1). 3.1 VDC is measured (40ppm) or 5.2 VDC is measured (55ppm and 65ppm)
Some procedures utilize the ability of the browser to display or hide parts of a procedure that
are pertinent. This is possible due to the ability of the PWS to read the machine configuration.
If the machine is not connected to a machine, some configuration values can be set manually
using the Book Configuration.
Flag
This symbol indicates a reference point into a circuit diagram from a RAP.
2.
Note
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
v
Introduction
CAUTION
Certain components in this product are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
The plug is the disconnect device. It is necessary to unplug the copier to remove all
power. Do not depend on the On/Off switch.
WARNING
CAUTION
Improper operation may result in machine damage.
NOTE: Hints or other information that may assist the user.
Use of controls, adjustments and/or performance or procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous light exposure.
CAUTION
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone gas. The amount of ozone produced
does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area.
NOTE: This is a Class 1 Laser Product (XE Only)
Introduction
May 2003
vi
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Tag Usage
This symbol
Tags
If different parts or actions exist because of a modification, the Tag number will identify the
appropriate part or action.
indicates that a surface can be hot. Use caution when reaching in the machine to avoid touching the hot surfaces.
Tag Symbols
This symbol
is used to show a particular part or area of a figure which has been modified by the Tag number
within the circle.
Danger label indicates where electrical currents travel when the machine is closed and operating. Use caution when reaching in the machine.
This symbol
is used to show a particular part or area of a figure which has not been modified by the Tag
number within the circle.
This symbol
is used to show a Tag change has not modified an area of the terminal.
The following safety icons are displayed on the machine:
This symbol
May 2003
vii
Introduction
Translated Warnings
Introduction
May 2003
viii
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Publication Information
WARNING
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions documentation, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class A computing device pursuant to subpart J of part 15 of FCC rules, which are
designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in
a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause interference in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to correct the interference.
DANGER: Cet quipement gnre, utilise et peut mettre des frquences radio, et, s'il
n'est pas install et utilis selon les recommandations du manuel d'instructions, peut
causer des interfrences aux communications radio. Il a t test et jug conforme aux
limites des systmes de catgorie A, conformment la partie 15 de l'alina J des rglements FCC, tablis pour protger contre de telles interfrences pendant le fonctionnement en milieu commercial. Dans une zone rsidentielle, il peut causer des
interfrences; dans ce cas, l'utilisateur devra corriger le problme ses propres frais.
Introduction
DANGER: Dans l'tape suivante, la carte de distribution sera dconnecte de l'alimentation LVPS ce qui mettra hors d'tat le contact d'arrt instantan. Il faut dbrancher le
cble d'alimentation pour dconnecter la carte de distribution de l'alimentation LVPS.
01-C No 36 VDC Output From LVPS
WARNING
In the following step, P13 will be disconnected from the Distribution PWB which will disable the Instant OFF Switch. If it is necessary to switch the power OFF while P13 is disconnected from the Distribution PWB, the Power Cord must be unplugged from the wall
plug.
DANGER: Dans l'tape suivante, la prise P13 sera dconnecte de la carte de distribution ce qui mettra hors d'tat le contact d'arrt instantan. Il faut dbrancher le cble
d'alimentation pour dconnecter la prise P13 de carte de distribution.
9. Marking
09-318 Light 87.5% Patch Fault
WARNING
Switch off the machine power and unplug from the wall outlet.
WARNING
WARNING
Switch off the machine power and unplug from the wall outlet.
WARNING
The plug is the disconnect device. It is necessary to unplug the copier to remove all
power. Do not depend on the On/Off switch.
DANGER: La mise hors tension se fait avec la prise de courant. Il faut dbrancher le
copieur pour l'isoler compltement. Ne pas se contenter du contact Marche/Arrt.
WARNING
Use of controls, adjustments and/or performance or procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous light exposure.
DANGER: Des vrifications, utilisations ou rglages non spcifis dans ce manuel peuvent vous exposer de dangereux rayons laser.
AVVERTENZA:
WARNING
Switch off the machine power and unplug from the wall outlet.
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cble d'alimentation de la prise
murale.
12C. Multi-Function Finisher
12-114 LE Late to the Compiler Entrance Sensor RAP
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
VORSICHT:
AVISO:
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
1. Standby Power
01-A DC Voltage Checkout Procedure
WARNING
In the following step, the Distribution PWB will be disconnected from the LVPS which
will disable the Instant OFF Switch. If it is necessary to switch the power OFF while the
Distribution PWB is disconnected from the LVPS, the Power Cord must be unplugged
from the wall plug.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
May 2003
ix
Introduction
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
12-124 Unexpected Sheet at the Top Tray Exit Sensor RAP
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
WARNING
WARNING
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
DANGER: Faire attention en excutant ces tests. Les sous-ensembles du module de
finition multifonction (MFF) sont actionns brusquement avec force, et peuvent causer
des blessures. Certains tests peuvent faire une pause avant de redmarrer. S'assurer
que le test est termin avant de manipuler le matriel.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
12-126 Lead Edge Late to the Buffer Module Entrance Sensor RAP
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
12-230/231 Main Tray Elevator Fault RAP
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
DANGER: Faire attention en excutant ces tests. Les sous-ensembles du module de
finition multifonction (MFF) sont actionns brusquement avec force, et peuvent causer
des blessures. Certains tests peuvent faire une pause avant de redmarrer. S'assurer
que le test est termin avant de manipuler le matriel.
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
Introduction
May 2003
x
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
WARNING
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
12-761 MFF DC Power RAP
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
12-239 4 Bar Home Fault RAP
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
12-765 Finisher Noise RAP
WARNING
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
DANGER: Faire attention en excutant ces tests. Les sous-ensembles du module de
finition multifonction (MFF) sont actionns brusquement avec force, et peuvent causer
des blessures. Certains tests peuvent faire une pause avant de redmarrer. S'assurer
que le test est termin avant de manipuler le matriel.
12-241/242 Compiler Tamper Fault RAP
WARNING
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
DANGER: Faire attention en excutant ces tests. Les sous-ensembles du module de
finition multifonction (MFF) sont actionns brusquement avec force, et peuvent causer
des blessures. Certains tests peuvent faire une pause avant de redmarrer. S'assurer
que le test est termin avant de manipuler le matriel.
12-800 LE Late to Booklet Entrance Sensor RAP
WARNING
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
DANGER: Faire attention en excutant ces tests. Les sous-ensembles du module de
finition multifonction (MFF) sont actionns brusquement avec force, et peuvent causer
des blessures. Certains tests peuvent faire une pause avant de redmarrer. S'assurer
que le test est termin avant de manipuler le matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
12-801 TE Late to Booklet Entrance Sensor RAP
WARNING
WARNING
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
12-804 LE Late to the Crease Exit Sensor RAP
WARNING
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
xi
Introduction
Stay clear of the Crease Blade and the associated mechanical hardware. The Crease
Blade comes on quickly and with great force. When working within the Crease Blade
Assembly area, switch off the power in order to avoid personal injury.
DANGER: Rester l'cart du couteau de pliage et de la visserie associe. Le couteau de
pliage est actionn brusquement avec une grande force. En travaillant dans cette zone,
dbrancher la machine pour viter toute blessure.
ate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
DANGER: Faire attention en excutant ces tests. Les sous-ensembles du module de
finition multifonction (MFF) sont actionns brusquement avec force, et peuvent causer
des blessures. Certains tests peuvent faire une pause avant de redmarrer. S'assurer
que le test est termin avant de manipuler le matriel.
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
12-807 TE Late to Booklet Exit Sensor RAP
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
DANGER: Faire attention en excutant ces tests. Les sous-ensembles du module de
finition multifonction (MFF) sont actionns brusquement avec force, et peuvent causer
des blessures. Certains tests peuvent faire une pause avant de redmarrer. S'assurer
que le test est termin avant de manipuler le matriel.
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
WARNING
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
DANGER: Faire attention en excutant ces tests. Les sous-ensembles du module de
finition multifonction (MFF) sont actionns brusquement avec force, et peuvent causer
des blessures. Certains tests peuvent faire une pause avant de redmarrer. S'assurer
que le test est termin avant de manipuler le matriel.
12-810/812 Booklet Backstop Fault RAP
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
WARNING
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operIntroduction
WARNING
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
DANGER: Faire attention en excutant ces tests. Les sous-ensembles du module de
May 2003
xii
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
finition multifonction (MFF) sont actionns brusquement avec force, et peuvent causer
des blessures. Certains tests peuvent faire une pause avant de redmarrer. S'assurer
que le test est termin avant de manipuler le matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
12-823 Lead Edge Late to the Tri-Fold Jam Sensor RAP
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
2. User Interface
REP 02-1 User Interface Assembly
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
Image Quality
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 02-3 UI LCD Module (With Tag #082 Only)
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
Switch off the machine power and unplug from the wall outlet.
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cble d'alimentation de la prise
murale.
Repairs-Adjustments
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
3. Machine Run Control
REP 03-1 SCAM PWB
1. Standby Power
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 01-2 AC Distribution Panel
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 03-3 Accessory PWB
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
May 2003
xiii
Introduction
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 03-4 Main Control PWB (Atlanta '96-to-'96 or Gold-to-Gold) (without Tag 077)
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 03-5 Rotation SRAM SIMM (without Tag 077)
REP 03-11 Main Control PWB (Atlanta Platinum-to-Platinum) (With Tag 077 Only)
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 03-6 EPC DRAM SIMM (without Tag 077)
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 03-7 NVM RAM Chip (without Tag 077)
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 03-8 Main Control PWB: Upgrade from Atlanta '96 (without Tag 015) to Atlanta Gold
(Installing Tag 015)
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 03-9 EPC SDRAM DIMM (With Tag 077 Only)
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
Introduction
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
WARNING
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 04-2 Fuser Drive Motor
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 04-3 Developer Gear Bracket
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
May 2003
xiv
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
Perform the following steps with the DADF raised. Otherwise, the DADF can spring up
unexpectedly when its weight is reduced by the removal of parts, possibly causing
machine damage or personal injury.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 04-6 Developer Drive Belt
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
5. Document Transportation
DANGER: Suivre les tapes avec le chargeur automatique DADF en position souleve.
Sinon le DADF risque de se soulever brutalement quand son poids baissera du fait du
dmontage de certains de ses lments, risquant ainsi de provoquer des blessures ou
des dtriorations.
REP 05-5 DADF Registration Deskew Assembly
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
Perform the following steps with the DADF raised. Otherwise, the DADF can spring up
unexpectedly when its weight is reduced by the removal of parts, possibly causing
machine damage or personal injury.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 05-2 DADF Assembly
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The DADF is heavy and awkward to lift. Ensure that you have a firm, balanced grip on
the DADF before lifting it.
DANGER: Le chargeur automatique DADF est lourd et difficile soulever. S'assurer de
saisir le DADF fermement et de manire quilibre avant de le soulever.
REP 05-3 DADF Top Cover Assembly
WARNING
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
DANGER: Suivre les tapes avec le chargeur automatique DADF en position souleve.
Sinon le DADF risque de se soulever brutalement quand son poids baissera du fait du
dmontage de certains de ses lments, risquant ainsi de provoquer des blessures ou
des dtriorations.
REP 05-6 Document Input Tray Assembly
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 05-7 DADF Exit Shaft
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrio-
May 2003
xv
Introduction
ration au matriel.
WARNING
Perform the following steps with the DADF raised. Otherwise, the DADF can spring up
unexpectedly when its weight is reduced by the removal of parts, possibly causing
machine damage or personal injury.
DANGER: Suivre les tapes avec le chargeur automatique DADF en position souleve.
Sinon le DADF risque de se soulever brutalement quand son poids baissera du fait du
dmontage de certains de ses lments, risquant ainsi de provoquer des blessures ou
des dtriorations.
Perform the following steps with the DADF raised. Otherwise, the DADF can spring up
unexpectedly when its weight is reduced by the removal of parts, possibly causing
machine damage or personal injury.
DANGER: Suivre les tapes avec le chargeur automatique DADF en position souleve.
Sinon le DADF risque de se soulever brutalement quand son poids baissera du fait du
dmontage de certains de ses lments, risquant ainsi de provoquer des blessures ou
des dtriorations.
6. ROS Imaging
REP 06-1 ROS
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 06-2 ROS Polygon Motor (With Tag #057 Only)
WARNING
WARNING
Perform the following steps with the DADF raised. Otherwise, the DADF can spring up
unexpectedly when its weight is reduced by the removal of parts, possibly causing
machine damage or personal injury.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: Suivre les tapes avec le chargeur automatique DADF en position souleve.
Sinon le DADF risque de se soulever brutalement quand son poids baissera du fait du
dmontage de certains de ses lments, risquant ainsi de provoquer des blessures ou
des dtriorations.
7. Paper Supply
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 07-1 Paper Feed Drives Plate
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 07-3 HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 07-4 Bypass Tray Assembly
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 07-5 HCF Elevator Motor
WARNING
Introduction
WARNING
May 2003
xvi
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
ration au matriel.
REP 08-5 HCF Feeder
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 07-6 Bypass Input Tray
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 08-6 HCF Paper Handling Baffle
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 07-9 HCF PWB
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 08-7 Registration Sensor (S2)
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
8. Paper Transportation
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 08-2 Registration Transport Assembly
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
9. Marking
REP 09-1 Xerographic Module
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 08-3 HCF/Bypass Tray Feed Motor
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 09-2 Developer Housing
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 08-4 Bypass Tray Feeder
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 09-3 BTAC Sensor
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrio-
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
xvii
Introduction
WARNING
ration au matriel.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 09-4 Toner Dispenser
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 09-5 Photoreceptor Drive Module
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 09-6 Charge HVPS
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 09-7 Developer HVPS
WARNING
Any Film Remover on the contacts must be completeley dry before the machine power
is switched on. Otherwise, a fire may result.
DANGER: S'assurer que tout rsidu de "Film Remover" sur les contacts est compltement sec avant de mettre la machine sous tension, afin d'viter tout risque d'incendie.
REP 09-13 Donor Roll Cleaning Procedure
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 09-8 Transfer/Detack HVPS
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
10. Print Transport and Fusing
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioIntroduction
WARNING
Be sure to reinstall the PFT Clip. The PFT Clip is required for safety, to prevent the PFT
from being removed accidentally.
DANGER: S'assurer de rinstaller le clip du transport pr-four. Ce clip est requis pour
May 2003
xviii
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
Support the Stacker Tray when removing the Stacker Drive Motor, and then lower the
tray gently. Otherwise, the Stacker Tray will drop quickly, possibly causing damage or
personal injury.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
Take care not to cut yourself on the top edge of the left frame opening in the next step.
This edge has not been deburred on frames built before June 8, 1998, and may be sharp.
DANGER: Lors de l'tape suivante, faire attention de ne pas se couper sur le bord
suprieur de l'ouverture de gauche du bti. Sur les btis fabriqus avant le 8 juin 1998,
ce bord n'est pas barb et peut tre tranchant.
WARNING
Take care not to cut yourself on the top edge of the left frame opening in the next step.
This edge has not been deburred on frames built before June 8, 1998, and may be sharp.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
DANGER: Lors de l'tape suivante, faire attention de ne pas se couper sur le bord
suprieur de l'ouverture de gauche du bti. Sur les btis fabriqus avant le 8 juin 1998,
ce bord n'est pas barb et peut tre tranchant.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 12-5 Fixed Stapler
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 12-6 Nip 1 Drive Shaft
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 12-2 Stacker Drive Motor
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical haz-
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
V0.042
May 2003
xix
Introduction
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 12-9 Disk Baffle Assembly
Do not attempt the following step (unhooking the bottom two docking hooks) without
first having performed the previous step (deactivating the spring-loading of the right
castors). (Refer to the WARNING above.)
DANGER: Ne pas commencer l'tape suivante (dverrouillage des deux crochets du
bas) sans avoir effectu l'tape prcdente (blocage des roulettes de droite). Se rfrer
la note de scurit ci-dessus.
REP 12-13 Nip 1/2 Drive Belt
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 12-10 Disk Drive Motor
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 12-14 Nip 3/4 Drive Belt
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 12-11 Disk Shaft
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 12-15 Finisher Lubrication
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 12-12 Finisher Assembly (Undocking the Finisher)
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 12-16 Finisher Top Tray Back Wall
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
Use extreme care in performing the following three steps. If all four Finisher docking
hooks are unhooked from the IOT while the right castors' spring-loading is still active,
the Finisher will become extremely unstable. The top of the Finisher will then tend to tilt
to the left while the bottom rolls to the right, possibly resulting in the Finisher falling
and causing equipment damage or personal injury.
DANGER: Faire trs attention lors des trois tapes suivantes. Si les quatre crochets de
verrouillage du module de finition sont dcrochs de l'imprimante alors que les roulettes de droite sont encore libres, le module de finition deviendra trs instable. Le haut
du module aura tendance basculer vers la gauche alors que le bas roulera vers la
droite, risquant ainsi d'entraner sa chute, donc aussi des risques de blessure et de
dtrioration.
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 12-18 Stapler Lead-In Baffle
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 12-20 Stacker Tray Drive Belts
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrio-
Introduction
May 2003
xx
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
ration au matriel.
WARNING
Support the Stacker Tray when removing the Stacker Drive Motor, and then lower the
tray gently. Otherwise, the Stacker Tray will drop quickly, possibly causing damage or
personal injury.
DANGER: Soutenir le magasin de rception lors du dmontage de son moteur puis le
descendre lentement. Sinon le magasin risque de tomber brutalement et de causer des
blessures ou dtriorations.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
ADJ 12.02.02 Booklet Stapler Anvils
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
If the Stacker Drive Motor was not already removed, support the Stacker Tray when
removing the Stacker Drive Belt Clamps, and then lower the tray gently. Otherwise, the
Stacker Tray will drop quickly, possibly causing damage or personal injury.
DANGER: Si le moteur du magasin de rception n'est pas encore dpos, soutenir ce
magasin lors du dmontage des brides de maintien de la courroie d'entranement puis
le descendre lentement. Sinon le magasin risque de tomber brutalement et de causer
des blessures ou dtriorations.
REP 12-22 Fixed-Stapler Safety Gate
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
ADJ 12.02.06 Crease Roll Gate
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
ADJ 12.02.07 Booklet Maker Drawer Alignment
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 12-23 Moving-Stapler Safety Gate
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 12-24 Tamper Cable
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
ADJ 12.04.02 Tri-Fold Second Crease Position
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
May 2003
xxi
Introduction
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.02.02 Crease Blade
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.02.03 Crease Rolls
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.02.04 Crease Roll Motor (M68)
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.02.05 Crease Roll Gears
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.02.06 Crease Blade Motor (M67)
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
Introduction
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
May 2003
xxii
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.02.13 Booklet Backstop Belt and Drive Belt
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.02.15 Booklet Stapler (Rear)
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.02.16 Booklet Stapler (Front)
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.03.01 Booklet Exit Sensor (S73)
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.04.01 Tri-Folder Assembly
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
xxiii
Introduction
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.06.01 Top Cover
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.07.01 Eject Housing Assembly
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.07.02 Compiler Flapper Home Sensor (S40)
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.07.03 Compiler Flappers
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.07.04 Eject Shaft Drive Belt
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
Introduction
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
May 2003
xxiv
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.12.02 Main Stapler Position Motor (M43)
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.12.03 Main Stapler
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.13.01 Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.13.02 Nip 3 or 4 Drive Shaft
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.13.03 Nip 5 Drive Shaft
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
xxv
Introduction
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.13.09 Buffer Nip Motor (M30)
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.13.10 Buffer Entrance Nip Motor (M31)
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.13.11 Compiler Eject Motor (M40)
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.13.12 4 Bar Position Motor (M45)
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.13.13 4 Bar Exit Motor (M41)
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
Introduction
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
May 2003
xxvi
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.13.21 Compiler Entrance Sensor S46
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.13.16 Buffer Gate Solenoid (L33) or Trail Edge Clamp Solenoid (L30)
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
14. Scanning
REP 14-1 Image Module, Scanner Video Cable Kit
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.13.17 Top Tray Diverter Solenoid L40
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 14-2 Illumination Lamp Module
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.13.18 Compile Belts
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 14-3 Scanner Cleaning Procedure
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
DANGER: La machine doit tre mise hors tension et le cordon d'alimentation du MFF
dbranch, pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel. La mise sur
Arrt de la machine ne coupe pas l'alimentation du MFF.
REP 12.13.20 4-Bar Exit Drive Shaft
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 14-5 Scanner Top Frame
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
xxvii
Introduction
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
Take care not to cut yourself on the edges of the Scanner Top Frame. These edges can
be sharp -- especially the inside edges.
DANGER: Faire attention de ne pas se couper sur les bords du haut du bti du scanner,
ces bords pouvant tre tranchants, en particulier les bords intrieurs.
REP 14-6 Scanner Main Cover
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 16-4 Token Ring PWB or Image Processing Accelerator (IPA) PWB or 100 Mb Ethernet
PWB (240/255/265 Only)
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 14-8 Illumination Lamp Power Supply
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 16-5 PCI Bus Adapter PWB (240/255/265 Only)
WARNING
WARNING
It is extremely important to ensure that all power is removed from the machine before
servicing the Illumination Lamp Power Supply. Otherwise, severe machine damage and
possible personal injury could occur due to electrical arcing.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: Il est trs important de s'assurer que la machine est totalement hors tension
avant d'intervenir sur l'alimentation de la lampe d'exposition. Sinon, de srieux dgts
peuvent survenir la machine ainsi que des risques d'accident provoqus par des
arcages lectriques.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
16 - ESS.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 16-8 Image Processing Accelerator (IPA) PWB, 460/470
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
REP 16-2 ESS PWB
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazIntroduction
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
May 2003
xxviii
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: Chaque fois que la machine devra tre dplace de la gauche vers la droite
ou inversement sur de la moquette, il est recommand de vous faire aider d'une deuxime personne. La force requise pour cette tche risque d'tre trop importante pour une
personne seule.
GP42 CSE Fuser Rebuild/Return Process for NASG
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the power cord disconnected, to avoid the
electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
WARNING
Allow the Fuser to cool sufficiently to avoid burning yourself while working on the
Fuser.
14. Scanning
DANGER: Lors de toute intervention sur le four, laisser celui-ci se refroidir suffisamment pour viter des brlures.
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
DANGER: La machine doit tre dbranche pour viter toute blessure ou toute dtrioration au matriel.
Copier/Printer Procedures
WARNING
WARNING
Whenever possible, push forward, away from the front of your body (not sideways) to
move the machine. This method uses your body's strongest muscles, minimizing the
risk of personal injury.
DANGER: Autant que possible, poussez la machine droit devant vous (et non de ct)
pour la dplacer. Cette mthode permet d'utiliser au mieux votre force musculaire et
minimisera les risques d'accident.
Use caution when running these tests. Subsystems in the Multi-Function Finisher operate forcefully and rapidly and can cause injury. Some tests may pause and restart. Be
sure the test is completed before handling the hardware.
DANGER: Faire attention en excutant ces tests. Les sous-ensembles du module de
finition multifonction (MFF) sont actionns brusquement avec force, et peuvent causer
des blessures. Certains tests peuvent faire une pause avant de redmarrer. S'assurer
que le test est termin avant de manipuler le matriel.
WARNING
Any time that the machine must be moved in the end-to-end direction (left-to-right or
right-to-left) on carpet, it is recommended that you get help from a second person. The
force required for this task can exceed the recommended maximum for a single person.
DANGER: Chaque fois que la machine devra tre dplace de la gauche vers la droite
ou inversement sur de la moquette, il est recommand de vous faire aider d'une deuxime personne. La force requise pour cette tche risque d'tre trop importante pour une
personne seule.
WARNING
Any time that the machine must be moved in the end-to-end direction (left-to-right or
right-to-left) on carpet, it is recommended that you get help from a second person. The
force required for this task can exceed the recommended maximum for a single person.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
xxix
Introduction
Introduction
May 2003
xxx
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-7
1-9
1-10
May 2003
1-1
May 2003
1-2
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Service Call Procedures are a guide for performing any service on the Document Centre 240/
255/265/460/470 machine. The procedures are designed to be used with the Document Centre
240/255/265/460/470 Service Documentation.
Introduction to Call Flow shows the relationship of actions performed during a service call. The
functions in Call Flow correspond to service documentation sections as follows:
Initial Actions
Gather information about the call and the machine condition from the customer and from
machine observation.
Corrective Actions
Initial Actions
Initial Actions are performed to gather information about the condition of the machine, the problem that caused the service call, and login procedures.
Diagnose and repair all problems. Use PWS Diagnostics and/or SCP-04 Corrective
Actions.
Go to Subsystem Checks.
Corrective Actions
Subsystem Checks
Corrective Actions are activities that are required to correct the problem that caused the service call and any secondary problems identified in the Initial Actions.
Subsystem Checks
Subsystem Checks are performed to classify faults that are not identified.
Go to Final Actions
Final Actions
This section is to check the total operation of the system, reset service related files, and find
additional troubleshooting information.
Perform Final Actions to clear the service call with the customer as closed or incomplete.
Final Actions
Final Actions verify machine operation and return it to the customer. Administrative activities
are also performed in the Final Actions.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
1-3
SCP-01, SCP-02
The purpose of the Initial Actions section of Service Call Procedures is to help organize the
service call. Customer input, machine observation, and the PWS are used to gather the information about the service call and the condition of the printer/copier. Make note of symptoms,
error codes, or other information concerning the problem that the operator may provide. This
information may help identify an intermittent or unusual problem.
Perform the System Fault Analysis RAP to correct the primary problem. If secondary problems
have been identified, perform this RAP again to help identify additional corrective actions.
Primary Maintenance Activities - Are all activities related to the customers description of the
reason for the call (UM). Primary activities include performing the Corrective Action for the reason for the call and any active faults related to the reason for the call.
If experiencing problems reloading machine software, and the software upgrade instructions dont help, go to GP28.
Secondary Maintenance Activities - Are all activities identified during the service call which are
not related to the primary activity but may lead to a future UM or negatively affect customer satisfaction. This could be a high incidence of a particular fault code in the fault history, IQ defects
noticed while running samples, or other malfunctions discovered during the service call.
Initial Actions
Check the following:
Procedure
Y
Procedure
1.
Check that the customer(s) have performed the appropriate call avoidance actions.
2.
If available, ask the operator(s) to describe or demonstrate the problem, if possible to verify the problem.
3.
a.
Try to determine the specific information regarding the job that was being run at the
time the problem occurred. Also, question the customer as to any other machine
problems that may be occurring at this time.
b.
c.
Determine if any machine features have been disabled due to malfunctions and if
the machine is running in degraded mode.
d.
If the problem is the result of improper operator action, refer the operator to the reference manual or to other customer support documentation.
e.
Refer to the machine service log. Evaluate the recent service actions and possible
relevance to the current problem.
Connect the PWS (Portable Workstation) to the machine with the PWS Serial Cable
(GP1 ) Switch on the PWS power.
b.
c.
Serial port connector on the Laptop and the machine PWS port connector are OK.
d.
If the above checks are OK, refer to the 19-A, PWS Lost Communications RAP.
4.
Access the machine service log and check for any previous actions that may be relevant
to the call. Check the meters for customer printer credits. Record the printer/copier credits
in the Service Log.
5.
There is a configuration error message window that appears when communication is established to the machine.
Y
N
Select [Faults/Counters tab , Faults]. View the Last 40 faults. Note any patterns,
especially the most recent events that might be associated with the customer complaint.
Determine whether there are unclearable messages (such as Call for Service), frequent shutdowns, or jams. The primary customer complaint is paper jams, document jams, a call for service message, and/or machine shutdowns/statuses.
Y
N
There is a UI problem.
6.
7.
8.
SCP-03, SCP-04
May 2003
1-4
C
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Y
N
Check the machine model and determine if the machine is connected to a
network. The machine is a LP or ST model, or a DocuTech 65, and is
connected to a network.
Y
N
Go to the Table 1 Other Problems Table.
NOTE: If 03-348 faults are appearing in the Last 40 fault list, go to that RAP first.
Go to the OF-9 Configuration Problem RAP.
Send service. If a part is broken, go to OF-10 Broken Part RAP. If the part is not covered in this
RAP, repair as necessary.
A
B
V0.042
Enter PWS Diagnostics. Select [Faults/Counters tab , Faults]. Observe the Last 40
faults and associate the most likely fault with the customer complaint. Give higher
priority to faults that begin with the lowest chain number. After the most likely fault is
selected, go to Status Indicator RAPs to access the RAP for that fault.
D
May 2003
1-5
H
Service Call Procedures
SCP-04
H
The machine is a DocuTech 65.
Y
N
Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults]. View the Last 40 faults.
Check for 03-331 or 03-332 faults, either the most recent event or a
high number of 03-331 or 03-332 faults in the log. 03-331 or 03332 faults are occurring.
Y
N
Enter [ESS/Network tab , ESS Test Jobs]. Select [Power On/
Demo] (default) [Start Job].
The Power On/Demo job completes successfully.
Y
N
Enter [ESS/Network tab , ESS Error Log]. Select [All]
[Retrieve]. View the ESS Faults.
Check for 16-XXX Faults. 16-0XX or 16-1XX faults are
occurring.
Y
N
Go to 16-B, ESS Boot RAP.
E
NOTE: If 03-348 faults are appearing in the Last 40 fault list, go to that RAP first.
Go to the OF-9 Configuration Problem RAP.
If a part is broken, go to OF-10 Broken Part RAP. If the part is not covered in this RAP, repair as
necessary.
If no faults are occurring that seem related to the customer complaint, go to the
OF-6 Status Message RAP.
D
E
Service Call Procedures
SCP-04
May 2003
1-6
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
GO TO
PROBLEM DESCRIPTION
GO TO
Print/Copy Damage
Print/Copy Damage
Document Damage
Document Damage
Unusual Noise
Unusual Noise
Configuration Problems
Configuration Problems
Request For Off Switch Won't 01-E Request For Off Switch
Work
Does Not Switch Off Machine
RAP
Dead Copier/Printer
UI Display Continuously
Changes from a Close the
Front Door back to normal
status screen
Request For Off Switch Won't 01-E Request For Off Switch
Work
Does Not Switch Off Machine
RAP
Dead Copier/Printer
UI Display Continuously
Changes from a Close the
Front Door back to normal
status screen
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
1-7
SCP-04, SCP-05
v.
Inspect the Document Glass (CVT and manual), clean if needed. If the underside of the
glass is contaminated, perform the RIS Cleaning Procedure REP 14-3.
2.
Observe the Lamp Power Supply. The 3 right hand LEDs on the Lamp Power supply
should be on. If any of the 3 LEDs are not on, go to 14-A Illumination Checkout RAP.
3.
Check the Document Glass Pad PL 2.1A Item 8, for contamination or damage. Clean or
replace as required.
4.
Load 10 fresh sheets of 8.5 X 11 inch (A4), paper in the Document Input Tray in portrait orientation (LEF).
b.
Ensure that the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper and that
the paper is inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input Tray.
c.
In DADF Document Timing, select [IIT tab , DADF Document Timing Test].
d.
Check the test results for Lead Edge At Q1. If the test results indicate all the feed
times are between High and Jam Time, do the following:
e.
i.
Check the DADF Feeder Cartridge PL 2.2 Item 4, for wear or contamination.
ii.
In DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests, select [Feed Clutch and Nudger Solenoid],
then [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests]. If the Feed
Clutch and Nudger Solenoid test fails, replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL
2.2 Item 2
g.
5.
Check the test results for Time Over Q4. If the test results indicate all the times are
between High and Jam Time, do the following
i.
Ensure the 3-Arm Sheet Separators are in place and move freely without binding. Replace the Left CVT Baffle PL 2.4 Item 5 if necessary.
ii.
In NVM Read/Write, check the following locations listed in Table 1. Ensure the NVM values are within the ranges listed. Enter [NVM tab , NVM Read/Write].
If the values are not within range, perform ADJ 14-2, IIT Registration and Magnification.
Check the test results for Lead Edge At Q2. If the test results indicate all the feed
times are between High and Jam Time, do the following
i.
f.
h.
In DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests, select [Exit Clutch and Inverter Clutch], then
[Start Test].Enter [IIT tab , DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests]. If the Exit Clutch and
Inverter Clutch test fails, replace the DADF Exit Shaft PL 2.2 Item 9.
ii.
iii.
Check the test results for Lead Edge At Q3. If the test results indicate all the feed
times are between High and Jam Time, do the following
i.
Ensure the Right CVT Baffle is closing correctly and the foam pads are present
and are not damaged.
ii.
Ensure the Idler Roll moves freely and the tension spring is in place. Replace
the Right CVT Baffle PL 2.4 Item 6 if required.
Check the test results for Lead Edge At Q4. If the test results indicate all the feed
times are between High and Jam Time, do the following
i.
Ensure the CVT Ski, are in place and move freely without binding.
ii.
Ensure the CVT Drive ON Glass Roll moves freely up and down without binding.
iii.
iv.
Ensure the Left CVT Baffle is closing correctly and the foam pads are present
and are not damaged. Ensure the Idler Rolls move freely and the tension
springs are in place. Replace the Left CVT Baffle PL 2.4 Item 5 if necessary.
SCP-05
May 2003
1-8
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Name (ID)
Value
Scan Service
Scan Service
Image Processing
Image Processing
Image Processing
75 and 200
Image Processing
50 and 200
Procedure
On the UI, select [Machine Status], [Supplies]. Check the projected End of Life for the
Paper Feed Roll Cartridges. If any are less than 30 days, replace them (this can vary
depending on customer machine usage). If any are replaced, reset the counter using
GP6, Life Counter Reset.
Also check the projected End of Life for the Xerographic and Fuser CRUs. Replace or
rebuild either CRU if within 20K of End of Life. For the Fuser CRU go to (GP42 CSE
Fuser Rebuild/Return Process for NASG). If any are replaced, reset the counter using
GP6, Life Counter Reset.
Clean the Platen Glass with Lens and Mirror Cleaner, 43P81.
Determine if the customer is having difficulty opening any of the IOT Paper Trays.
Go to OF-10 Broken Part RAP to resolve this problem.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
1-9
SCP-05, SCP-06
Procedure
1.
Verify that the repairs have been successful. Be sure to exercise the machine in the correct mode(s) for a thorough verification of the repairs.
2.
Perform the SCP-06, Every Call Activities if you have not already done so.
3.
4.
Notify the customer that the machine has been repaired. Leave an image quality sample
of the Customer Letter, if applicable.
5.
If applicable, make a note of the printer credits and enter the credit information on the
Credit Labels or Meter Cards.
6.
7.
8.
Ensure that the MRD is in the floppy drive on the PWS, so that the NVM data will be
saved. Answer Yes to the prompt "Do you want to save NVM data?".
9.
When the Close Machine Communications window appears, select [Exit and Clear
Counters].
NOTE: If the Call is incomplete, select [Exit Diagnostics].
10. If the Start Print button was activated during diagnostics, when the message appears "Do
you wish to reset the machine?", select [Yes].
11. Close Case Server (releases machine from Diagnostic mode).
12. Final Check. Ensure that the printer and the service area are clean before leaving.
13. Close out the service call.
SCP-07
May 2003
1-10
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2-7
2-9
2-9
2-11
2-12
2-15
2-17
2-21
2-23
2-25
2-25
2. User Interface
02-300/302/304/306/308 UI Failures..............................................................................
02-309/364 UI Power On Self Test Failure ....................................................................
02-312/704 UI Application Software Checksum Incorrect...............................................
02-320/380 UI Communication Failures..........................................................................
02-390/391 UI Communication Failures..........................................................................
02-705/706 UI Diagnostic Test Failure............................................................................
02-707/715 UI Diagnostic Test Failure............................................................................
02-709/712 UI Diagnostic Test Failure............................................................................
02-711 RAM Space Fault ................................................................................................
02-A Unable to Select A Machine Feature At The User Interface...................................
02-B All LEDs On The User Interface Are Blinking .........................................................
02-C Nothing Is Visible On The User Interface (Dark Display) .......................................
02-D The User Interface Is Too Bright Or Too Dim.........................................................
02-E The User Interface is Exhibiting Strange Behavior .................................................
02-F The UI Continuously Displays the Boot-Up Screen ................................................
02-G The UI Continuously Displays A PO/PO Message.................................................
2-27
2-27
2-28
2-28
2-29
2-29
2-30
2-30
2-31
2-32
2-32
2-33
2-37
2-40
2-41
2-41
2-43
2-45
2-48
2-50
2-50
2-51
2-51
2-52
2-52
2-53
2-53
2-54
2-54
2-57
2-60
2-62
May 2003
2-1
2-64
2-65
2-66
2-66
2-70
2-71
2-71
2-72
2-72
2-73
2-73
2-74
2-77
2-77
2-79
2-82
2-85
2-87
2-87
2-88
2-90
2-90
2-91
2-91
2-92
2-94
2-96
2-98
2-100
2-102
2-104
2-106
2-106
2-107
2-107
2-108
2-108
2-110
2-111
2-112
2-114
2-116
2-118
2-120
2-122
2-124
2-124
03-841 IIOC Module W1A1 Failed The IIOC Controller Test ..........................................
03-A Common SCB Circuit RAP .....................................................................................
03-B Common CRUM Communication Failure RAP .......................................................
03-C IIOC Bus 0 Module Pin Configuration ....................................................................
03-D IIOC Bus 1 Module Pin Configuration ....................................................................
03-E IIOC Bus 2 Module Pin Configuration.....................................................................
03-F Continuous Resets RAP .........................................................................................
03-G Main Control PWB RAP .........................................................................................
03-H Foreign Accessory RAP .........................................................................................
03-J Checksum Error RAP ..............................................................................................
03-K Atlanta Gold And Atlanta Platinum Main Control PWBs .........................................
03-L IOT Wont Boot RAP ...............................................................................................
2-125
2-127
2-129
2-131
2-132
2-132
2-133
2-134
2-138
2-140
2-140
2-141
2-143
2-150
2-154
2-161
2-164
2-171
5. Document Transportation
05-100 Document LE Late to Input Tray Exit Sensor RAP .............................................
05-102 Document LE Late to the DADF Registration Gate Sensor RAP........................
05-103 Document TE Late to DADF Registration Gate Sensor RAP .............................
05-104 Document LE Late to CVT Start of Scan Sensor RAP .......................................
05-106 Document LE Late to DADF Exit/Invert Sensor RAP..........................................
05-107 Document TE Late to DADF Exit/Invert Sensor RAP .........................................
05-108 Document LE Late to Input Tray Exit Sensor (Pass 2 or 3) RAP........................
05-109 Document LE Late to Input Tray Exit Sensor (Pass 2 or 3) RAP........................
05-110 Document LE Late to DADF Registration Gate Sensor (Pass 2 or 3) RAP ........
05-310 DADF Raised During Document Feed RAP .......................................................
05-325 DADF Cover Opened During Document Feed RAP ...........................................
05-330 DADF IIOC Internal Turnaround Failure RAP.....................................................
05-331 DADF IIOC Chain RAP .......................................................................................
05-340 DADF Nudger Solenoid IIOC Failure RAP..........................................................
05-345 DADF Feed Clutch IIOC Failure RAP .................................................................
05-350 DADF Registration Gate Solenoid IIOC Failure RAP .........................................
05-355 DADF Exit Clutch IIOC Failure RAP ...................................................................
05-360 DADF Inverter Clutch IIOC Failure RAP .............................................................
05-365/375 DADF Feed Motor Fault RAP ......................................................................
05-370/380 CVT Motor Fault RAP ..................................................................................
05-A DADF Fault Entry RAP ...........................................................................................
05-B DADF Document Damage RAP .............................................................................
05-C DADF Misfeed RAP................................................................................................
05-D DADF Image Distortion RAP ..................................................................................
05-E DADF Document Size Sensing RAP ......................................................................
05-F DADF Registration and Skew RAP.........................................................................
05-G Document Output Stacking RAP............................................................................
05-H DADF Unclearable Status RAP..............................................................................
05-J DADF Interlock Switch RAP ....................................................................................
05-K Document Feeder Top Cover Sensor RAP ............................................................
Status Indicator RAPs
2-226
2-227
2-230
6. ROS Imaging
06-310/311/312/313/314/315 Polygon Motor Faults .......................................................
06-320/330 Laser Not On Fault.......................................................................................
06-340 No Start of Scan Fault.........................................................................................
06-341 Start of Scan Not Within Window Fault ...............................................................
06-350/360/370 Laser Control Fault................................................................................
06-380 ROS Interlock Fault.............................................................................................
06-385 ROS Configuration Mis-match Fault ...................................................................
2-233
2-237
2-242
2-242
2-243
2-246
2-249
7. Paper Supply
2-177
2-179
2-180
2-181
2-185
2-187
2-188
2-189
2-189
2-190
2-191
2-192
2-192
2-195
2-197
2-199
2-200
2-203
2-205
2-207
2-211
2-212
2-212
2-214
2-216
2-219
2-220
2-220
2-224
2-225
2-251
2-254
2-254
2-255
2-256
2-257
2-257
2-259
2-261
8. Paper Transportation
08-101.01/.02/.03/.04 IOT Paper Tray Misfeed...............................................................
08-101.05 Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) Misfeed ........................................................................
08-101.06 Tray 6 (HCF) Misfeed.....................................................................................
08-105.01/.02/.03/.04 IOT Paper Tray Jam.....................................................................
08-105.05 Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) Jam..............................................................................
08-105.06 Tray 6 (HCF) Jam ..........................................................................................
08-110 Registration Transport Jam.................................................................................
08-115 Registration Transport Jam.................................................................................
08-120 Registration Transport Jam.................................................................................
08-701 Misfeed From Any Paper Tray ............................................................................
08-705 Modified Feed Timing Boundary .........................................................................
08-706 False TE transition of the Wait Station Sensor ...................................................
08-710 Vertical Transport Entrance Jam From Any Paper Tray .....................................
08-A Lead Edge Misregistration RAP..............................................................................
08-B Top Edge Misregistration RAP ...............................................................................
08-C Skewed Image RAP ...............................................................................................
08-D "Check Tray X" Message RAP ...............................................................................
08-E Paper Feed Drives Plate Jumper RAP ...................................................................
2-263
2-266
2-268
2-269
2-271
2-273
2-274
2-277
2-281
2-284
2-284
2-285
2-285
2-286
2-286
2-290
2-292
2-293
9. Marking
09-210 No Photoreceptor Seam Detected RAP..............................................................
09-215 Multiple Photoreceptor Seams Detected RAP ....................................................
09-220 No Machine Clock on Main Control PWB ...........................................................
09-300 BTAC Offset Voltage Low Fault ..........................................................................
09-302 BTAC Offset Voltage High Fault .........................................................................
09-304 BTAC Loop Counter Fault...................................................................................
09-306 BTAC Max Read Fault ........................................................................................
09-310 No Patch RAP .....................................................................................................
May 2003
2-2
2-295
2-297
2-298
2-303
2-306
2-309
2-312
2-313
V0.042
2-316
2-319
2-320
2-320
2-325
2-329
2-330
2-331
2-332
2-333
2-334
2-337
2-338
2-340
2-340
2-341
2-341
2-343
2-345
2-347
2-349
2-353
2-357
2-361
2-365
2-369
2-373
2-376
2-381
2-381
2-386
2-390
2-392
2-395
2-399
2-400
2-405
2-406
2-410
2-411
2-413
2-415
2-417
2-418
2-423
2-425
2-426
2-428
2-429
2-429
2-431
2-438
2-439
2-445
2-447
2-448
2-448
2-449
2-451
2-452
2-453
2-453
2-458
2-461
2-462
2-462
2-467
2-469
2-471
2-471
2-472
2-472
2-474
2-475
2-476
2-477
2-477
May 2003
2-3
2-479
2-480
2-483
2-486
2-489
2-493
2-496
2-499
2-502
2-504
2-507
2-508
2-510
2-512
2-514
2-516
2-519
2-522
2-526
2-530
2-535
2-540
2-542
2-544
2-544
2-547
2-549
2-551
2-553
2-556
2-559
2-559
2-560
2-562
2-563
2-571
2-574
2-576
2-579
2-580
2-583
2-584
2-587
2-589
2-591
2-591
2-594
2-597
2-597
2-599
14. Scanning
14-300 Scanner Calibration Failed..................................................................................
14-312 Scanner Configuration Mismatch........................................................................
14-313 Scanner AGC Loop Not Settled ..........................................................................
14-314 / 315 / 316 / 317 / 318 / 319 / 320 Scanner Calibration Failed............................
14-325 Start of Scan Not Sensed ...................................................................................
14-335 Scan Carriage Encoder Not Sensed...................................................................
14-340 No Motor Done Signal.........................................................................................
14-345/347 12 VDC Not Sensed.....................................................................................
14-350 Scanner Video Cable Failure ..............................................................................
14-700 Illumination Lamp Output Is Too Low .................................................................
14-702 Scanner Calibration Failed..................................................................................
14-703/704 Scanner Calibration Failed...........................................................................
14-705 / 706 / 714 / 715 Scanner Calibration Failed.......................................................
14-710 NVM Value Out Of Range (High or Low) ............................................................
14-712 Scanner Calibration Failed..................................................................................
14-713 Scanner Calibration Failed..................................................................................
14-716 Scanner Lamp Stability Fault ..............................................................................
14-A Illumination Checkout RAP .....................................................................................
14-B Scanner Noise RAP................................................................................................
14-C Scanner Loop Faults RAP......................................................................................
14-D Illumination Lamp Filaments Not Lit RAP ...............................................................
Status Indicator RAPs
2-603
2-605
2-605
2-606
2-606
2-608
2-611
2-611
2-612
2-612
2-613
2-613
2-615
2-616
2-616
2-617
2-619
2-622
2-626
2-627
2-629
16. ESS
16-A ESS Fault Codes RAP............................................................................................
16-B ESS Boot RAP........................................................................................................
16-C ESS Software Verification and Repair RAP ...........................................................
16-781.19 Memory Error for Network Scanning RAP ....................................................
16-785.19 IPA PWB Missing or Defective RAP .............................................................
16-786.19 IPA PWB Missing or Defective RAP .............................................................
16-787.19 Memory Error for LAN FAX RAP...................................................................
2-631
2-645
2-655
2-655
2-656
2-656
2-657
2-659
2-664
2-666
2-668
2-669
2-670
2-671
2-672
2-674
2-675
2-679
2-684
2-689
2-694
2-697
2-701
2-703
2-706
2-707
2-707
2-708
2-708
2-709
2-709
2-710
2-710
2-711
2-711
2-712
21. RDT
21-300 Main Controller PWB Cannot Communicate with Modem RAP ..........................
21-304 No RDT Dial Tone at Modem RAP ....................................................................
21-308 Modem Blacklist Fault RAP.................................................................................
21-708 Host Modem Doesn't Answer RAP ....................................................................
21-712 No Carrier After Answer RAP..............................................................................
21-716/720 Problems After Connect RAP.......................................................................
21-724 Lost Session After Login RAP.............................................................................
21-728 Modem Failed to Disconnect RAP .....................................................................
21-732 Host Cancellation RAP.......................................................................................
May 2003
2-4
2-713
2-713
2-714
2-714
2-715
2-715
2-716
2-716
2-717
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2-717
2-718
22 . System Faults
22-300.04 Scheduling Table Missing RAP......................................................................
22-300.05 Image Complete Not Received RAP..............................................................
22-300.10 Decompresser End of Record RAP ...............................................................
22-300.16 Real Time Clock Overflow RAP .....................................................................
22-301.04 Initial State Scheduling Error RAP .................................................................
22-301.05 Scan Resources Not Available RAP ..............................................................
22-302.04 Current State Scheduling Error RAP .............................................................
22-303.04 Shifted Proposal Invalid RAP .........................................................................
22-303.05 Document Too Large RAP .............................................................................
22-304.04 Schedule Missing RAP ..................................................................................
22-305.04 Dead Cycle Error RAP ...................................................................................
22-306.04 Rejection Error RAP.......................................................................................
22-307.04 Reschedule Error RAP...................................................................................
22-308.04 Execution State Error RAP ............................................................................
22-309.04 No Except Timeout Error RAP ......................................................................
22-310.04 Compound Service Image Sequence Error RAP ..........................................
22-311.04 Proposal Response Timeout Error RAP ........................................................
22-312.04 Sync Information Error RAP...........................................................................
22-313.04 Missing Sync Error RAP ................................................................................
22-314.04 Module Registration Error RAP......................................................................
22-315.04 Module Completion Fault RAP.......................................................................
22-316.04 Job Requires Paper Tray That Does Not Exist RAP......................................
22-317.04 Job Requires IOT Capability That Does Not Exist RAP.................................
22-318.04 Job Requires Finisher Capability That Does Not Exist RAP ..........................
22-319.04 IOT Cycle Down/Cycle Up Loop Detected RAP ............................................
22-330.xx List Jobs Request Timed Out .........................................................................
22-700.04 Module Timeout Error RAP............................................................................
22-701.04 Module Completion Error RAP.......................................................................
22-750.04 Output Device Configuration Error RAP ........................................................
22-750.17 Accessory Card Configuration Error RAP ......................................................
22-751.04 Bypass Tray (SMH) or HCF Configuration Error RAP ...................................
22-751.17 ESS Configuration Error RAP ........................................................................
22-752.17 EP-SV / EP-Lyzer Configuration Error RAP...................................................
22-754.17 UI Configuration Error RAP............................................................................
22-755.17 RDT Configuration Error RAP........................................................................
22-756.17 Scanner Configuration Error RAP ..................................................................
22-757.04 Mark Service Configuration Problem RAP.....................................................
2-719
2-719
2-722
2-723
2-723
2-724
2-724
2-725
2-725
2-727
2-727
2-727
2-727
2-728
2-728
2-729
2-729
2-730
2-730
2-731
2-731
2-732
2-732
2-733
2-733
2-734
2-734
2-735
2-735
2-736
2-736
2-737
2-737
2-738
2-738
2-739
2-739
2-776
2-779
2-781
2-787
2-801
2-807
2-809
2-817
2-827
2-827
2-829
2-832
2-741
2-748
2-752
2-757
2-759
2-760
2-761
2-764
2-773
May 2003
2-5
May 2003
2-6
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Check for a broken, bent, or missing actuator on the Front Door, and check for a
bent or damaged Front Door PL 7.2 Item 1. Repair or replace as required.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-7
01-301
01-301
May 2003
2-8
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The HCF/Bypass Top Cover or Bypass Tray Top Cover was opened in print mode. This fault
code is not declared when the cover is opened in the standby mode.
The Front Door Interlock Switch or a Side Interlock Switch opened in print mode. This fault
code is not declared when those switches are opened in the standby mode.
Initial Actions
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Trays] [Bypass Tray Top Cover Interlock] and [Start
Monitor]. Observe the PWS as you open and close the HCF/Bypass Top Cover. Enter [Copier
Sys tab , Component Control].
Ensure the Front Door, and the left side input device, and the right side output device are fully
closed and latched.
NOTE: The HCF/Bypass has two electrical devices (a switch and a sensor) which actuate
almost simultaneously when the HCF Top Cover is opened and closed. The switch is used to
interlock the +24 VDC to the HCF components. The sensor is used for the cover open/closed
detection, and is checked in Component Control. If you listen for the switch actuation during
the Component Control check of the sensor, it may not happen at the exact time the PWS display changes because the PWS responds to the state of the sensor, and not the switch. If a difference in actuation points exists between the switch and sensor, that alone does not mean the
switch or sensor is defective. Be sure to follow this RAP completely.
The PWS display indicates the sensor actuates and deactuates as the cover is opened
and closed.
Y
N
The machine has an HCF.
Y
N
Replace the Bypass Tray Assembly PL 4.3 Item 1.
If the machine does not have a Tray 5 (Bypass Tray), ensure the Knockout Panel (PL 7.2 Item
7) is installed securely and the latches are fully engaged in the Left Side Cover.
If the problem continues, use this RAP to isolate the problem.
Machines w/o TAG 120, Input Device Safety Interlock PL 1.5 Item 4.
Machines w/o TAG 114, Output Device Safety Interlock PL 1.5 Item 4.
If the machine has only a Bypass Tray, replace the Bypass Tray Assembly PL 4.3 Item 1.
If the machine has an HCF, replace the HCF Elevator Motor PL 4.2B Item 9. If the problem continues, replace the HCF PWB PL 4.2B Item 10.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-9
01-305, 01-310
01-310
May 2003
2-10
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault code 01-705 is declared when the temperature inside the IOT exceeds the normal
operating temperature during cycle up, run, or cycle down modes.
Fault code 01-710 is declared when the temperature inside the IOT exceeds the normal
operating temperature while the IOT is in standby.
Initial Actions
NOTE: The machine specification for maximum ambient temperature is 90 degrees fahrenheit.
An over temperature fault may occur if the ambient temperature at the customers site is
greater than 90 degrees fahrenheit.
The ROS/Developer Cooling Fan PL 9.1 Item 6 (65 ppm machines only).
If necessary, replace the filters in the NOHAD Filter Kit PL 9.1 Item 1.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-11
01-705/710
NOTE: 36 VDC will NOT be available with the Distribution PWB disconnected
because the IOT interlock circuit is open.
This procedure should be performed if any DC Voltage from the Low Voltage Power Supply is
missing. The purpose of the procedure is to determine the state of the Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) and identify the most appropriate RAP to diagnose the problem.
Procedure
Prepare to measure the outputs of the LVPS.
Switch the power OFF, wait 10 seconds, then switch the power ON. (This ensures the
machine is not in the Power Saver mode, all outputs of the LVPS are enabled, and all
faults are reset.)
Remove the back cover of the IOT and open the card cage to gain access to the test
points on the LVPS.
Attach the (-) meter lead to the metal case of the LVPS.
Identify the type of LVPS installed in the machine. If the machine has Tag 011, a Venray
LVPS is installed. If the machine does not have Tag 011, a Zytec LVPS is installed.
Refer to Figure 1 (Venray LVPS, with Tag 011) or Figure 2 (Zytek LVPS, w/o Tag 011) to
identify the LVPS test point locations.
Measure the voltage at each test point listed in Table 1 and make a record of each voltage
measurement.
Switch the power OFF and disconnect the Power Cord from the wall outlet.
Connect A10P42 to the LVPS at J2, and A10P43 to the LVPS at J3.
Connect the Power Cord to the wall outlet, and switch the power ON.
Measure the voltage at each test point listed in Table 1 and make another
record of each voltage measurement.
Disconnect the Distribution PWB from the J4 on the LVPS. REP 01-1
Disconnect 2P45 from J5 on the LVPS ( P45/J5).
Connect the Power Cord to the wall outlet, and switch the power ON.
Measure the voltage at each test point listed in Table 1 and make another
record of each voltage measurement.
01-A
Switch the power OFF and disconnect the Power Cord from the wall outlet.
The wires in A10P43 are associated with three LVPS outputs and all wires go to
the Card Cage (Main Control PWB). Refer to Table 3 and go to the indicated
wirenet drawings to check the wires for a short circuit to DC Com.
Switch the power ON, then measure the voltage at each test point listed in Table 1
and make another record of each voltage measurement.
A
B
Status Indicator RAPs
CAUTION
Locate the AC input connector P41 at the left side of the LVPS
In the following step, the Distribution PWB will be disconnected from the LVPS
which will disable the Instant OFF Switch. If it is necessary to switch the power
OFF while the Distribution PWB is disconnected from the LVPS, the Power
Cord must be unplugged from the wall plug.
WARNING
( P41).
A
May 2003
2-12
Switch the power OFF and disconnect the Power Cord from the wall outlet.
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: Ensure ALL connectors are connected to the Distribution PWB at this
time. If any connectors are not connected, the results of the following check
could be erroneous.
Connect the Power Cord to the wall outlet, and switch the power ON.
Measure the voltage at each test point listed in Table 1 and make another
record of each voltage measurement.
The LVPS outputs are correct and the problem cannot be duplicated. Operate the
machine in order to identify any other problems.
NOTE: With the Distribution PWB connected to the LVPS, the red Instant OFF
Switch, behind the Front Door, will again be functional.
All voltages listed in the table are correct (except 36 VDC).
Y
N
Go to the 01-D RAP.
Measure the voltage at each test point listed in Table 1 and make another
record of each voltage measurement.
Measure the voltage at each test point listed in Table 1 and make another
record of each voltage measurement.
Measure the voltage at each test point listed in Table 1 and make another
record of each voltage measurement.
A
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-13
01-A
01-A
May 2003
2-14
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Voltage Specification
+36V
36V
+24V
24V
-12V
-12V
+24V ES
24 PSV
+5 VES
5.15 PSV
+5V
5.15V
+12V
+12V
+12V ES
N/A
Voltage
Pin(s)
Wirenet
Figure 29
+24 VDC
Figure 29
Pin(s)
Wirenet
Figure 29
Procedure
Determine if the AC line voltage is correct for the market region.
Switch the power OFF, then unplug the Power Cord from the wall outlet.
Set the meter to measure AC voltage, then measure the voltage at the wall outlet.
Compare the voltage measurement to the voltage specification for the machine model
and the market region as listed in the Product Specifications .
Voltage
Pin(s)
+5 VDC (ES)
240/255/265
8, 9, 10, 11, 12
+5 VDC (ES)
460/470
8, 9, 10, 11, 12
Figure 22
Figure 23
-12 VDC
240/255/265
-12 VDC
460/470
Measure the voltage at the end of the Power Cord that plugs into the AC Distribution
Panel.
(w/o ESS)
(with ESS)
Pin(s)
Wirenet
+5 VDC
240/255/265
1, 2, 3
Figure 9
+5 VDC
460/470
1, 2, 3
+12 VDC
240/255/265
+12 VDC
460/470
Figure 22
Observe the meter while actuating the Power ON/OFF Switch to the ON position.
-12 VDC
240/255/265
The resistance changes from infinity to 0 ohms when the switch is actuated.
Y
N
Go to Flag 4 and check for an open or short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Power ON/OFF Switch PL 1.1A Item 4.
-12 VDC
460/470
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-15
01-A, 01-B
Go to Flag 2 and check the wire "Request for Off (L)" for a short circuit to DC COM.
Go to Flag 1 and check the wire "Instant OFF Switch Actuated (L)" for a short circuit to DC
COM.
If all of the wires are good, replace the LVPS PL 1.2A Item 3.
01-B
May 2003
2-16
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Procedure
Ensure the Front Door Interlock Switch and Side Interlock Switches (w/o TAG 114 and TAG
120) are closed and actuated.
If the machine does not have a Tray 5 (Bypass Tray), ensure the Knockout Panel (PL 7.2 Item
7) is installed securely and the latches are fully engaged in the Left Side Cover.
Ensure the (-) meter lead is still attached to the metal case of the LVPS.
Measure the voltage at the LVPS test point marked INT-IN.
The voltage is 24 VDC.
Y
N
Measure the voltage at the LVPS test point marked INT-OUT.
The voltage is 24 VDC.
Y
N
Switch the power OFF.
WARNING
In the following step, P13 will be disconnected from the Distribution PWB
which will disable the Instant OFF Switch. If it is necessary to switch the power
OFF while P13 is disconnected from the Distribution PWB, the Power Cord
must be unplugged from the wall plug.
CAUTION
Removal and/or installation of electrical components with power switched ON could
damage those components. To ensure the power is switched OFF while P13 is disconnected from the Distribution PWB, the Power Cord must be unplugged from the
wall plug.
Disconnect P13 from J13 on the Distribution PWB ( P/J13).
Switch the power ON, then measure the voltage at J13, pin 8.
The voltage is 24 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the LVPS PL 1.2A Item 3.
If the problem continues, replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
Go to Flag 1 (Figure 1) and check for a short circuit to DC Com.
Go to Flag 1 (Figure 1) and check for an open circuit.
Check for +24 VDC. Measure the voltage at the +24V test point on the LVPS.
The voltage is +22.8 to 25.2 VDC.
Y
N
Go to the 01-D RAP.
Switch the power ON, then measure the voltage at the LVPS test point marked +36V.
Disconnect B2P1 from J2 on the SCAM PWB ( B2P1/J2) (Fuser Drive Motor).
Disconnect B1P1 from J4 on the SCAM PWB ( B1P1/J4) (Developer Drive Motor).
Disconnect P20 from J10 on the SCAM PWB ( P20/J10) (Charge HVPS and Transfer/
Detack HVPS).
Switch the power ON, then measure the voltage at the LVPS test point marked +36V.
Reconnect B2P1 to J2 on the SCAM PWB.( B2P1/J2) (to Fuser Drive Motor)
Reconnect B1P1 to J4 on the SCAM PWB.( B1P1/J4) (to Developer Drive Motor)
Switch the power ON, then measure the voltage at the LVPS test point marked +36V.
Disconnect all 36 VDC loads, then measure the 36 VDC output from the LVPS.
Disconnect B2P1 from J2 on the SCAM PWB. ( B2P1/J2) (to Fuser Drive Motor)
Switch the power ON, then measure the voltage at the LVPS test point marked +36V.
The voltage is in the range of 34.2 to 37.8 VDC.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-17
01-C
A
Y
N
The Fuser Drive Motor is OK. Continue to isolate the defective motor.
Disconnect A1B1P1 from J3 on the SCAM PWB. ( A1B1P1/J3) (to the Photoreceptor Drive Motor)
Switch the power ON, then measure the voltage at the LVPS test point marked
+36V.
Switch the power ON, then measure the voltage at the LVPS test point marked +36V.
Switch the power ON, then measure the voltage at the LVPS test point marked +36V.
01-C
May 2003
2-18
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-19
01-C
01-C
May 2003
2-20
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Perform the following tasks:
All LVPS outputs are OK with all outputs disconnected, but some or all LVPS outputs are missing with the Distribution PWB connected to the LVPS at J4. This problem can be caused by a
faulty Distribution PWB, or a shorted output connected to the Distribution PWB.
Measure the voltage at each test point listed in Table 1 and make a record of each voltage
measurement.
Entry to this RAP is only from the 01-A DC Voltage Checkout Procedure.
Procedure
Perform the following tasks:
Switch the power OFF, then unplug the Power Cord from the wall outlet.
Disconnect all connectors from the Distribution PWB, then connect the Distribution PWB
to the LVPS at J4.
Connect the following connectors to the Distribution PWB: P3 to J3; P7 to J7; P11 to J11.
Connect the Power Cord to the Wall outlet, then switch the power ON.
Measure the voltage at each test point listed in Table 1 and make a record of each voltage
measurement.
Measure the voltage at each test point listed in Table 1 and make a record of each voltage
measurement.
Switch the power OFF, then unplug the Power Cord from the wall outlet.
Connect the following connectors to the Distribution PWB: P2 to J2, and P8 to J8.
Connect the Power Cord to the wall outlet, then switch the power ON.
Measure the voltage at each test point listed in Table 1 and make a record of each voltage
measurement.
Connect the following connectors to the Distribution PWB: P12 to J12; P15 to J15.
Measure the voltage at each test point listed in Table 1 and make a record of each voltage
measurement.
Switch the power OFF, then unplug the Power Cord from the wall outlet.
Connect the following connectors to the Distribution PWB: P4 to J4, P13 to J13, and P14
to J14.
Connect the Power Cord to the wall outlet, then switch the power ON.
Measure the voltage at each test point listed in Table 1 and make a record of each voltage
measurement.
Measure the voltage at each test point listed in Table 1 and make a record of each voltage
measurement.
NOTE: With P13 connected to the Distribution PWB, the red Instant OFF Switch, behind the
Front Door, will again be functional.
All voltages listed in the table are correct (except 36 VDC).
Y
N
The wires in P4, P13, and P14 are associated with the +5 VDC LVPS output. Refer to
Table 2 and go to the indicated wirenet drawings to check the wires for a short circuit to
DC Com.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
May 2003
2-21
01-D
B
The LVPS outputs are OK and the problem cannot be duplicated. Operate the machine in order
to identify any other problems.
Table 1 Wirenets for P2 and P8
Pin(s)
Destination
Wirenet
Figure 12
P2
Figure 20
P8
1, 2
P8
1, 2
P2
Figure 19
Destination
Wirenet
Figure 12
P4
Figure 20
P13
Figure 11
P13
Figure 19
P14
1, 11
Figure 11
P14
1, 11
Figure 19
Wirenet
P10
Pin(s)
9
P10
P10
10
P10
10
P10
12
Figure 29
Destination
Wirenet
IIOC Bus 0
Figure 29
Destination
Wirenet
IIOC Bus 0
Figure 29
P7
IIOC Bus 1
Figure 29
P11
IIOC Bus 2
Figure 29
Destination
Wirenet
P12
15
Figure 11
P12
15
Figure 19
P12
17
Figure 29
P15
3, 11
P15
3, 11
Figure 19
P15
Figure 29
Wirenet
P10
Pin(s)
7
Figure 11
P10
Figure 19
01-D
May 2003
2-22
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Procedure
Check the operation of the (red) Instant OFF Switch.
The machine can be switched off with the (red) Instant OFF Switch.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
If the problem continues, replace the LVPS PL 1.2A Item 3.
Switch the power ON. In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the
[Type 1] and [Type 2] tests. Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
The tests pass.
Y
N
Go to the RAP for the indicated fault code.
Access the connector on the back of the Power ON/OFF Switch. Check the voltage on pin 1.
The voltage is in the range of +5.05 to +5.25 VDC with the switch not actuated.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2 and check the wire for an open circuit.
If the wire is good, replace the Power ON/OFF Switch PL 1.1A Item 4 (the contacts are
always closed).
If the problem continues, replace the IIOC PWB W8A2 PL 1.5 Item 2.
The voltage goes to 0 VDC when the switch is actuated to the OFF position.
Y
N
Go to Flag 3 and check the wire for an open circuit.
If the wire is good, replace the Power ON/OFF Switch PL 1.1A Item 4
Go to Flag 2 and check the wire for an open circuit.
If the wire is good, replace the IIOC PWB W8A2 PL 1.5 Item 2.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-23
01-E
01-E
May 2003
2-24
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The machine does not respond to the (red) Instant OFF Switch. Pressing that switch does not
result in the machine power being switched off.
The Left Side Interlock Switch senses when either the Bypass Tray Assembly, or the
HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly, or the Left Side Cover is correctly mounted on the IOT.
The Right Side Interlock Switch senses when either the OCT, or the High Capacity Disk
Finisher, or the Mailbox is correctly mounted on the IOT.
If either switch is opened in Standby mode, the following message is displayed on the UI:
"Either a tray 6 cover or an output tray door is open."
Procedure
Examine the input device (left side) and the output device (right side) to ensure the devices are
mounted securely and the Interlock Switches are actuated correctly.
If the problem continues, go to the 01-310 RAP and diagnose the Interlock Switch circuit.
Procedure
Check the operation of the (white) Power ON/OFF Switch.
The machine can be switched off with the (white) Power ON/OFF Switch.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
If the problem continues, replace the LVPS PL 1.2A Item 3.
Access the connector on the back of the (red) Instant OFF Switch. Check the voltage on pin 2.
The voltage is in the range of +5.05 to +5.25 VDC with the switch not actuated.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1 and check the GRN wire for an open circuit.
The voltage goes to 0 VDC when the switch is actuated to the OFF position.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1 and check the BLU wire for an open circuit.
If the wire is good, replace the Instant OFF Switch PL 1.1A Item 2.
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-25
01-F, 01-G
01-G
May 2003
2-26
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
02-300/302/304/306/308 UI Failures
02-300: The User Interface RAM failed during the User Interface Power On Self Test.
02-302: The User Interface Self Test detected a Flash Rewrite failure.
02-309: The User Interface Button Test and/or the Touch Area Test failed during the User
Interface Power On Self Test. The User Interface is operating in a degraded mode.
02-304: The User Interface VRAM failed during the User Interface Power On Self Test.
02-306: The User Interface Self Test detected a Flash Erase failure.
02-308: The User Interface Self Test detected a Flash Download failure.
02-364: The User Interface Self Test Boot Checksum was incorrect during the User Interface Power On Self Test. This fault causes all User Interface LED indicators to blink on
and off, and the User Interface is inoperative.
Procedure
Procedure
Replace the UI Control Panel Assembly PL 1.1A Item 1. Be sure to follow REP 02-1 and
ensure the UI software is compatible with the Main Control PWB software.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replace the UI Control Panel Assembly PL 1.1A Item 1. Be sure to follow REP 02-1 and
ensure the UI software is compatible with the Main Control PWB software.
May 2003
2-27
02-300/302/304/306/308, 02-309/364
02-312: The User Interface Application Software Checksum was incorrect during the
Power On Self Test. This fault causes all User Interface LED indicators to blink on and off.
02-320: User Interface Data Time Out Error. The UI does not receive the requested data
from the Main Control PWB within the specified time.
02-704: The User Interface Application Software Checksum was incorrect during the User
Interface Diagnostic Test.
Procedure
Reload or upgrade the UI software to the correct level, using the appropriate software release
kit.
Initial Actions
02-320 - Check to see if the LVPS Fan Filter is dirty and is restricting air flow to cool the
LVPS. The LVPS can shut down due to a thermal cutout and generate a 02-320 fault. (PL
9.1, item 13, Machine Cooling and Filters).
Procedure
Go to the 03-347 User Interface Communication RAP.
02-312/704, 02-320/380
May 2003
2-28
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
02-390: During powerup all configurable services have not achieved a stable state after 5
minutes from powerup.
02-705: The Audio Tone test failed during the User Interface Diagnostic Test. The fault
counter increments once for each occurrence of this fault.
02-391: All services that UI is waiting for in the registry do not appear even though the
Atlanta / UI sync occurred.
02-706: A VRAM failure was detected during the User Interface Diagnostic Test. The fault
counter increments once for every third occurrence of this fault.
Initial Actions
Procedure
DC470: If a 03-382 fault is also present suspect a communication failure between the MFF and
the IOT.
Replace the UI Control Panel Assembly PL 1.1A Item 1. Be sure to follow REP 02-1 and
ensure the UI software is compatible with the Main Control PWB software.
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On to clear the fault.
The problem continues
Y
N
Return to Call Flow.
Replace the UI Control Panel Assembly PL 1.1A Item 1. Be sure to follow REP 02-1 and
ensure the UI software is compatible with the Main Control PWB software.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-29
02-390/391, 02-705/706
02-707: The Button Test failed during the User Interface Diagnostic Test. The fault counter
increments once for each occurrence of this fault.
02-709: The Touch Area Test failed during the User Interface Diagnostic Test. The fault
counter increments once for each occurrence of this fault.
02-715: An LED failure was detected during the User Interface Diagnostics Test. The fault
counter increments once for each occurrence of this fault.
02-712: A pixel failure was detected during the User Interface Diagnostics Test. The fault
counter increments once for each occurrence of this fault.
Procedure
Procedure
Replace the UI Control Panel Assembly PL 1.1A Item 1. Be sure to follow REP 02-1 and
ensure the UI software is compatible with the Main Control PWB software.
Replace the UI Control Panel Assembly (with TAG 082) PL 1.1A Item 1. Be sure to follow REP
02-1 and ensure the UI software is compatible with the Main Control PWB software.
02-707/715, 02-709/712
May 2003
2-30
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2.
Enter the password, then press [Enter]. (The default password is 1111, but it can be
changed by the customer.)
3.
4.
5.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-31
02-711
2.
Enter the password, then press [Enter]. (The default password is 1111, but it can be
changed by the customer.)
3.
4.
5.
Select the [User Interface Button Test] and follow the directions on the User Interface.
6.
Select the [Touch Area Test] and follow the directions on the User Interface.
NOTE: Before using this RAP, it is important to verify ALL LEDs are blinking, and not just
TWO LEDs. The blinking of only two LEDs represents a different problem and will be accompanied by a fault code. If only two LEDs are blinking, use the RAP for the associated fault code.
Procedure
Replace the UI Control Panel Assembly PL 1.1A Item 1. Be sure to follow REP 02-1 and
ensure the UI software is compatible with the Main Control PWB software.
02-A, 02-B
May 2003
2-32
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Later version, access the bottom side of the User Interface (Figure 3) (REP 02-1). Check the
LEDs, CR3 and CR4, on the User Interface PWB.
Early version, CR2 is blinking and CR1 is on steady. Later version, CR4 is blinking and
CR3 is on steady.
Y
N
Go to the 02-C 5VDC Checkout Procedure.
(04April2002)
There are five reasons why the machine may exhibit this problem.
The machine is switched on and the fans are running correctly, but the UI display is dark.
The machine has entered Power Saver Mode 1, where power is removed from most subsystems, but the LVPS remains switched on. Touching any button on the UI should
restore the machine power and cause the Fuser to warm up.
The machine has entered Power Saver Mode 2, where the power is automatically
switched off after being in Power Saver Mode 1 for a period of time. In this condition,
power is switched on using the Power On/Off switch on the right side of the machine.
The machine has developed a malfunction which prevents the power from being switched
on.
The machine (ST) has shut-off while coming out of Power Save Mode because there is an
overload on the (12VDC ES) output of the LVPS, caused by both hard drives starting up
at the same time. The machine can be powered on again and this problem may occur
again when coming out of Power Save Mode. This problem can occur with LVPS,
105K16168 and earlier.
NOTE: There are two versions of the User Interface PWB. The early version has the Backlight
Power Supply mounted next to the UI PWB while the later version has the Power Supply
mounted on the UI PWB.
Early version, access the bottom side of the User Interface (Figure 2) (REP 02-1). Check the
LEDs, CR1 and CR2, on the User Interface PWB.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-33
02-C
02-C
May 2003
2-34
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
R65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-35
02-C
02-C
May 2003
2-36
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Return to Service Call Procedures.
2.
Enter the password, then press [Enter]. (The default password is 1111, but it can be
changed by the customer.)
3.
4.
5.
2.
Enter the password, then press [Enter]. (The default password is 1111, but it can be
changed by the customer.)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.
3.
Adjust the potentiometer until the brightness of the User Interface is acceptable. If
necessary, scrape off the glyptol coating on the potentiometer.
May 2003
2-37
02-D
R65
02-D
May 2003
2-38
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-39
02-D
Scrambled messages.
Extraneous sounds.
Erratic display.
E
3.
4.
Initial Actions
If the only problem is the User Interface is dim, go to the 02-D RAP.
If the only problem is the User Interface is dark (the display is blank, and no image is visible), and/or the machine appears to be switched off, go to the 02-C RAP.
If the only problem is the User Interface indicates the Front Door is being repetitively
opened and closed, go to the 03-809 RAP.
2.
3.
An error code is displayed on the User Interface or some LEDs are blinking.
Y
N
Using Customer Tools, perform a soft boot of the User Interface by performing the
following steps:
1.
2.
Enter the password, then press [Enter]. (The default password is 1111, but it
can be changed by the customer.)
3.
4.
5.
Button Test
Touch Test
LED Test
Sound Test
5.
4.
Replace the UI Control Panel Assembly PL 1.1A Item 1. Be sure to follow REP 02-1
and ensure the UI software is compatible with the Main Control PWB software.
If only TWO LEDs on the User Interface are blinking, check for a fault code and go to the
appropriate RAP. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
Inform the operator that the function/language selected is not available.
A
B
C
D
E
Status Indicator RAPs
02-E
1.
2.
May 2003
2-40
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The boot-up screen (The Document Center logo) is displayed continuously, and a series of
dots is slowly displayed in a horizontal line. After five minutes, a UI Communication fault will be
displayed.
Procedure
Go to the 03-347 Control Panel Communication Fault RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-41
02-F, 02-G
02-F, 02-G
May 2003
2-42
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
N
Go to Flag 3 and check the wires for an open circuit. Repair or replace as necessary.
The Main Control PWB is unable to communicate with the SCAM PWB.
Fault Code 03-301 indicates the Main Control PWB cannot communicate with the Developer Motor and Fuser Motor processor on the SCAM PWB.
Fault Code 03-305 indicates the Main Control PWB cannot communicate with the Photoreceptor Motor and Analog processor on the SCAM PWB.
With the [Communication Test 2] still running, measure the voltage between TH13 (-) and
TH39 (+) on the SCAM PWB.
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
With the [Communication Test 2] still running, measure the voltage between GND (-) and
P2-5 (+) on the Distribution PWB.
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 4 and check the wires for an open circuit. Repair or replace as necessary.
Check the harness from the Distribution PWB J2 to the SCAM PWB J6.
The harness is securely connected.
Y
N
Connect the harness. Run copies/prints to ensure the problem is corrected.
Connect the meter to measure DC voltage between TH13 (-) and TH41 (+) on the SCAM PWB.
In [Copier Sys tab , Communications Test], select [SCB], and [Reset Test].
The voltage is within the range of 4.9 to 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Measure the voltage at TH13 (-) and TH20 (+) on the SCAM PWB.
The voltage is within the range of 4.9 to 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Measure the voltage at P2-3 (-) and P2-4 (+) on the Distribution PWB.
The voltage is within the range of 4.9 to 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. Repair or replace as necessary.
Connect the meter to measure DC voltage between GND (-) and TH4 (+) on the Distribution PWB. In [Copier Sys tab , Communications Test], select [SCB], and [Communication
Test 2].
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2 and check the Distribution Cable for an open circuit.
If the circuit is OK, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
With the [Communication Test 2] still running, measure the voltage between GND (-) and
TH46 (+) on the Distribution PWB.
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
Go to Flag 5 and check the Distribution Cable for an open circuit.
If the circuit is OK, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
In [Copier Sys tab , Communications Test], select [SCB], and [Communication Test 2]. With the
[Communication Test 2] running, measure the voltage between GND (-) and P2-7 (+) on the
Distribution PWB.
The voltage is within the range of 4.9 to 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 6 and check the wire for an open circuit. Repair or replace as necessary.
With the [Communication Test 2] still running, measure the voltage between GND (-) and TH37
(+) on the Distribution PWB.
The voltage is within the range of 4.9 to 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
Go to Flag 7 and check the Distribution Cable for an open circuit.
If the circuit is OK, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
With the [Communication Test 2] still running, measure the voltage between GND (-) and
P2-6 (+) on the Distribution PWB.
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
With the [Communication Test 2] still running, measure the voltage between TH13 (-) and
TH40 (+) on the SCAM PWB.
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-43
03-301/305
03-301/305
May 2003
2-44
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The Main Control PWB cannot communicate with the ROS Control Module.
Connect the meter to measure DC voltage between P10-8 (-) and P10-2 (+) on the Distribution PWB.
In [Copier Sys tab , Communications Test], select [SCB], and [Communication Test 1].
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
If the problem continues, replace the ROS PL 5.2 Item 3.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G
RAP.
Check the Fault Log for 03-312, 03-313, and 03-314 faults. Enter [Faults/Counters tab ,
Faults].
03-312, 03-313, and 03-314 faults are logged in addition to the 03-311 fault.
Y
N
Go to the 03-311 ROS Communication Fault Isolation Procedure.
With the [Communication Test 1] still running, measure the voltage between P10-8 (-) and
P10-1 (+) on the Distribution PWB.
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 and check the wiring for an open circuit.
The wiring associated with Flag 3 and Flag 4 checks OK.
Y
N
Repair the wiring.
Switch the Power Off. Disconnect connector P72 from the ROS. Switch the Power On.
The 03-312, 03-313, and/or 03-314 faults occur again.
Y
N
Go to the 03-311 ROS Communication Fault Isolation Procedure.
Go to the 03-A, Common SCB Circuit RAP.
Go to Flag 4 (Figure 2). Check for an open or intermittent circuit, especially P/J4-1 at the Distribution PWB. The ROS, Finisher, and TEER Sensor share an SCB receive line on the Distribution PWB. When 5VDC is missing to the Finisher and TEER Sensor, the receive line is held
low, preventing ROS communication.
N
Go to Flag 2 and check the wiring for a short or open circuit.
The wiring associated with Flag 2 checks OK.
Y
N
Repair the wiring.
May 2003
2-45
03-311
03-311
May 2003
2-46
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-47
03-311
B
Y
Fault Code 03-312 indicates the Main Control PWB cannot communicate with the Finisher (Nodes 16 and 17).
Fault Code 03-313 indicates the Main Control PWB cannot communicate with the Finisher (Nodes 18 and 19).
Fault Code 03-314 indicates the Main Control PWB cannot communicate with the Finisher (Nodes 20 and 21).
N
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
With the [Communication Test 1] still running, measure the voltage between J4-2 (-)
and J4-3 (+) on the Distribution PWB.
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open circuit. Repair or replace as necessary.
Check the Fault Log for 03-311 faults. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
03-311 faults are logged in addition to the 03-312 through 03-314 faults.
Y
N
Connect the meter to measure DC voltage between J1-2 (-) and J1-5 (+) on the Finisher
Controller PWB. In [Copier Sys tab , Communications Test], select [SCB], and [Reset
Test].
The voltage is within the range of 4.9 to 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between J1-2 (-) and J1-1 (+) on the Finisher Controller PWB.
The voltage is within the range of 4.9 to 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between P4-2 (-) and P4-1 (+) on the Distribution PWB.
The voltage is within the range of 4.9 to 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
In Communications Test, select [SCB], and [Communication Test 1]. Enter [Copier Sys tab
, Communications Test]. With the [Communication Test 1] running, measure the voltage
between J4-2 (-) and J4-3 (+) on the Distribution PWB.
The voltage is within the range of 4.9 to 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 3 and check the wire for an open circuit. Repair or replace as necessary.
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
Switch the power Off. Disconnect P72 from the ROS. Switch the power On.
The 03-312, 03-313, and/or 03-314 fault(s) still occur.
Y
N
Replace the ROS PL 5.2 Item 3.
Go to the 03-A, Common SCB Circuit RAP.
Go to Flag 4 and check the wires for an open circuit. Repair or replace as necessary.
Connect the meter to measure DC voltage between J1-2 (-) and J1-4 (+) on the Finisher Controller PWB.
In Communications Test, select [SCB], and [Communication Test 1]. Enter [Copier
Sys tab , Communications Test].
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC.
Y
N
With the [Communication Test 1] still running, measure the voltage between J42 (-) and J4-4 (+) on the Distribution PWB.
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
Go to Flag 1 and check the wire for an open circuit. Repair or replace as necessary.
With the [Communication Test 1] still running, measure the voltage between J1-2 (-)
and J1-3 (+) on the Finisher Controller PWB.
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC.
A
B
Status Indicator RAPs
03-312/313/314
May 2003
2-48
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-49
03-312/313/314
The download of applications software from the Main Control PWB to the SCVM failed.
Procedure
Procedure
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
03-321, 03-322
May 2003
2-50
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Failure of SCVM applications to return a calibration complete to the Main Control PWB.
The wall clock, a function of the Main Control PWB, does not increment.
Procedure
Procedure
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-51
03-323, 03-325
The Main Control PWB cannot communicate with the ESS PWB. Status 03-563 is declared.
The Main Control PWB will attempt to reestablish communication with the ESS PWB for five
minutes. If communication is not reestablished within five minutes, fault code 03-332 will be
declared.
Fault Code 03-331 was active for five minutes and the Main Control PWB was unable to reestablish communication with the ESS PWB during that time.
Procedure
CAUTION
Procedure
CAUTION
Enter this RAP only from Service Call Procedures.
This fault is usually caused by the ESS, not the Main Control PWB. Service Call Procedures
contains the troubleshooting steps required to differentiate between those two components. If
you did not enter this RAP from Service Call Procedures, go there now (SCP-04).
Switch the power OFF, wait 10 seconds, then switch the power ON.
The fault continues after the PO/PO.
Y
N
Enter [ESS/Network tab , ESS Error Log]. Select [All] [Retrieve]. View the ESS Faults.
16-XXX faults are occurring.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures (SCP-04).
This fault is usually caused by the ESS, not the Main Control PWB. Service call Procedures
contains the troubleshooting steps required to differentiate between those two components. If
you did not enter this RAP from Service call Procedures, go there now (SCP-04).
Switch the power OFF, wait 10 seconds, then switch the power ON.
The fault continues after the PO/PO.
Y
N
Enter [ESS/Network tab , ESS Error Log]. Select [All] [Retrieve]. View the ESS Faults.
16-XXX faults are occurring.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures (SCP-04).
Go to 16-A, ESS Fault Code RAP.
An 03-331 or 03-332 is an indication that the ESS is not operating correctly. Go to the 16-B,
ESS Boot RAP.
An 03-331 or 03-332 is an indication that the ESS is not operating correctly. Go to the 16-B,
ESS Boot RAP.
03-331, 03-332
May 2003
2-52
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Procedure
Check the Last 40 Faults for instances of 03-312, 03-313, or 03-314 faults. Enter [Faults/
Counters tab , Faults].
An 03-312, 03-313, or 03-314 fault is logged.
Y
N
This fault is usually caused by electrical noise. Use the following list to identify and eliminate potential sources of electrical noise.
Check the last 40 Faults for instances of 03-301 or 03-305 faults. Enter [Faults/Counters tab ,
Faults].
An 03-301 or 03-305 fault is logged.
Y
N
With power off, ensure all connectors are firmly seated on the Distribution PWB,
SCAM PWB, and the Main Control PWB.
NOTE: When making voltage measurements in this RAP, connect the (-) meter lead to
the metal case of the LVPS, unless instructed otherwise.
Check the voltage at TH20 on the SCAM PWB.
The voltage is within the range of +5.05 to +5.25 VDC.
Y
N
Go to the 01-A RAP.
If the problem continues, replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-53
03-335, 03-336
The system detects a reset of the Main Control PWB because the watch-dog timer timed out or
the application software wrote to an illegal address.
Procedure
Check the last 40 Faults for instances of 03-311 faults. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
An 03-311 fault is logged.
Y
N
This fault is usually caused by electrical noise. Use the following list to identify and eliminate potential sources of electrical noise.
With power off, ensure all connectors are firmly seated on the Distribution PWB,
SCAM PWB, and the Main Control PWB.
Initial Actions
If a Multi-Function Finisher is installed:
Ensure the MFF Power Cord is connected to the AC wall outlet or adapter box and there
is AC power at the wall outlet.
Check the LEDs on the IOT/MFF interface PWB and on the MFF control PWB. If the
LEDs CR2 and CR3 on the IOT/MFF interface PWB Figure 1 are flashing and the LEDs
D405, D402, and D401 on the MFF Control PWB Figure 2 are not lit or flashing, go to 12761 MFF DC Power RAP.
If the MFF LVPS is not operating, communication faults may occur. If you suspect the
MFF LVPS is not operating, go to 12-761 MFF DC Power RAP.
Procedure
Perform a PO/PO in order to reset the fault.
The fault resets (clears) after the PO/PO.
Y
N
Ensure all connectors to the Main Control PWB are fully seated. If any connector is not
fully seated, re-seat the connector, clear the fault(s), then run copies to determine if the
problem is solved.
The problem still occurs.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
There are other fault codes in the Active Faults list.
Y
N
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Go to the RAP for the other fault code. If there is more than one other fault code, go to the
RAP for the lowest number fault code.
Return to Service Call Procedures.
03-337, 03-338
May 2003
2-54
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-55
03-338
03-338
May 2003
2-56
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Repair or replace as necessary.
May 2003
2-57
03-340
t703032a
03-340
May 2003
2-58
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
t703033a
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-59
03-340
03-341
May 2003
2-60
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-61
03-341
03-342
May 2003
2-62
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-63
03-342
Procedure
Go to 05-331 DADF IIOC RAP.
03-343
May 2003
2-64
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
D
There is an apparent problem in the Bus 2 IIOC harness to the Finisher or OCT.
Repair the harness, or replace the Finisher or OCT, as appropriate.
Enabled Decurler PL 6.1A Item 4 and the Decurler IIOC Harness PL 1.6 Item 3.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
A
B
V0.042
May 2003
2-65
03-345
Fault code 03-347 was active for over 30 seconds. Status 03-520 is declared.
The Main Control PWB cannot communicate with the UI PWB. Status 03-521 is declared.
The Main Control PWB will attempt to reestablish communication with the UI PWB for 30 seconds. If communication is not reestablished within 30 seconds, fault code 03-346 will be
declared.
Procedure
Go to the 03-347 RAP.
NOTE: The UI will not display this fault because of the communication problem with the main
Control PWB. This fault can be viewed only with the PWS.
03-346, 03-347
May 2003
2-66
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
With the Communications Test running, the voltage is between 2.5 and 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Check the harness between the Distribution PWB and the Control Panel Assembly for an
open or short circuit. (Flag 3)
A
Measure the voltage between J2-4 (-) and J4-1 (+) on the Control Panel PWB.
With the Communications Test running, the voltage is between 2.5 and 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the UI Control Panel Assembly PL 1.1A Item 1. Be sure to follow REP 02-1 and
ensure the UI software is compatible with the Main Control PWB software.
Connect the (-) meter lead to the metal case of the LVPS. Connect the (+) meter lead to J13-9
on the Distribution PWB. (Refer to Figure 1.)
With the Communications Test running, the voltage is between 2.5 and 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Check the harness between the Distribution PWB and the Control Panel Assembly for an
open or short circuit. (Flag 2)
Connect the (+) meter lead to TH 50 on the Distribution PWB. (Refer to Figure 1.) Check the UI
RX signal at the Distribution PWB.
With the Communications Test running, the voltage is between 2.5 and 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
Check the Distribution Cable for an open or short circuit (Flag 1).
If the Distribution Cable is good, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-67
03-347
03-347
May 2003
2-68
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-69
03-347
A
NOTE: If the machine has TAG 077, ensure the EPC SDRAM DIMM in location #1 is populated
before running the Rotation Memory Test (REP 03-9). If the SDRAM DIMM is not installed in
location #1, the test will fail.
Machines without TAG 077 have an Atlanta Gold (or earlier) Main Control PWB.
Machines with TAG 077 have an Atlanta Platinum Main Control PWB.
For machines without TAG 077, check the Auto Segmentation PWB, the Accessory PWB,
the Rotation SRAM SIMM, the EPC DRAM SIMM, and the NVM RAM Chip.
For machines with TAG 077, check the Accessory PWB, the EPC SDRAM DIMM, and the
Software/NVM Module.
Run the Rotation Memory Test in the Diagnostic Navigator. (Select Self Tests, Video and
Controls POST, Main Controller Tests (1), then Rotation Memory Test.) Enter [Self Tests
tab , Video and Controls POST].
The Rotation Memory Test passes.
Y
N
The machine has TAG 077.
Y
N
Replace the Rotation SRAM SIMM PL 1.4A Item 5.
Run the Rotation Memory Test again.
The Rotation Memory Test passes.
Y
N
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Return to Service Call Procedures.
If any connector or PWB is not fully seated, correct the problem, then switch the power ON and
check for the 03-348 fault.
The 03-348 fault occurs again.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Check the low voltage inputs to the Main Control PWB listed in Table 1. (Connect the (-) meter
lead to the metal case of the Low Voltage Power Supply.)
The voltages are in specification.
Y
N
Go to the 01-A DC Voltage Checkout Procedure.
Replace the EPC SDRAM DIMM PL 1.4B Item 5 (or PL 1.4C Item 6 if a 460/470
machine).
Run the Rotation Memory Test again.
The Rotation Memory Test passes.
Y
N
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Return to Service Call Procedures.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Run the EPC Memory Test in Diagnostic Navigator. (Select Self Tests, Video and Controls
POST, Main Controller Tests (1), then EPC Memory Test.) Enter [Self Tests tab , Video and
Controls POST].
NOTE: Ignore any message displayed when the screen is initially displayed. The test must be
run before the messages will be reliable.
P/J
Pin
Voltage Specification
+5 VDC (ES)
P1/
J13
12
For machines without TAG 077, replace the EPC DRAM SIMM PL 1.4A Item 6.
For machines with TAG 077, replace the EPC SDRAM DIMM PL 1.4B Item 5.
For 460/470 machines, replace the EPC SDRAM DIMM PL 1.4C Item 6.
+5 VDC
P2/J7
+12 VDC
P2/J7
7
5, (DC460/470)
-12 VDC
P2/J7
8
6, DC460/470)
A
Status Indicator RAPs
03-348
May 2003
2-70
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The Main Control PWB cannot communicate with the SCSI Expansion PWB.
The VCM and IPM Loop Back Test fails when the Autosegmentation PWB is connected, but
passes when the Autosegmentation PWB is bypassed.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-71
03-349, 03-352
The Main Control PWB cannot communicate with the Scanner in the IIT.
A Main Control PWB Power-On Self-Test (POST) failure was detected during the NVM Integrity Test.
Without TAG 077, replace the NVM RAM Chip PL 1.4A Item 8.
03-354, 03-355
May 2003
2-72
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
03-370: The IOT control software cannot obtain the data required to continue operation.
03-371: The HCF/Bypass Tray control software cannot obtain the data required to continue operation.
03-372: The Bypass Tray control software cannot obtain the data required to continue
operation.
03-374: The Finisher control software cannot obtain the data required to continue operation.
03-375: The OCT control software cannot obtain the data required to continue operation.
Procedure
These faults are job-related and do not represent a hardware failure. If any of these faults happen, it is usually a transitory event and the software should recover without customer or CSE
intervention. If any of these faults occur frequently, collect data about the job type and function
programming, and forward that information to the DC265 Software Change Control Board.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-73
03-360, 03-370/371/372/374/375
Initial Actions
If a Multi-Function Finisher is installed:
Ensure the MFF Power Cord is connected to the AC wall outlet or adapter box and there
is AC power at the wall outlet.
Check the LEDs on the IOT/MFF interface PWB and on the MFF control PWB. If the
LEDs CR2 and CR3 on the IOT/MFF interface PWB Figure 1 are flashing and the LEDs
D405, D402, and D401 on the MFF Control PWB Figure 2 are not lit or flashing, go to 12761 MFF DC Power RAP.
If the MFF LVPS is not operating, communication faults may occur. If you suspect the
MFF LVPS is not operating, go to 12-761 MFF DC Power RAP.
03-377
May 2003
2-74
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-75
03-377
03-377
May 2003
2-76
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The Main Control PWB cannot communicate with the Distribution PWB at Power-Up.
This fault is declared due to a Serial Control Bus (SCB) Harness break, a bad SCB transmit or
SCB transmit not acknowledged.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
If the problem continues, the IOT Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G
RAP.
May 2003
2-77
03-380 , 03-381
03-381
May 2003
2-78
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
If a Multi-Function Finisher is installed:
Ensure the MFF Power Cord is connected to the AC wall outlet or adapter box and there
is AC power at the wall outlet.
Check the LEDs on the IOT/MFF interface PWB and on the MFF control PWB. If the
LEDs CR2 and CR3 on the IOT/MFF interface PWB Figure 1 are flashing and the LEDs
D405, D402, and D401 on the MFF Control PWB Figure 2 are not lit or flashing, go to 12761 MFF DC Power RAP.
If the MFF LVPS is not operating, communication faults may occur. If you suspect the
MFF LVPS is not operating, go to 12-761 MFF DC Power RAP.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-79
03-382
03-382
May 2003
2-80
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-81
03-382
Initial Actions
If a Multi-Function Finisher is installed:
Ensure the MFF Power Cord is connected to the AC wall outlet or adapter box and there
is AC power at the wall outlet.
Check the LEDs on the IOT/MFF interface PWB and on the MFF control PWB. If the
LEDs CR2 and CR3 on the IOT/MFF interface PWB Figure 1 are flashing and the LEDs
D405, D402, and D401 on the MFF Control PWB Figure 2 are not lit or flashing, go to 12761 MFF DC Power RAP.
If the MFF LVPS is not operating, communication faults may occur. If you suspect the
MFF LVPS is not operating, go to 12-761 MFF DC Power RAP.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
03-383
May 2003
2-82
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-83
03-383
03-383
May 2003
2-84
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The system detects that Automatic Software Upgrade was not completed. Only machines with
19.02.xx software and later can have this fault cone.
1.
2.
3.
Move the Run-Time Data window out of the way of the Xerographic Diagnostics window.
4.
When the Results box in Xerographic Diagnostics window displays, Xerographic Set-Up
Passed, [Close] the Run-Time Data window and [Exit] the Xerographic Diagnostics routine.
May 2003
2-85
Select the [NVM tab , IOT Variable NVM Initialization], answer [No] to the confirmation to
download NVM.
2.
Select the Category: [Xerographics], and select [Start]. Answer [Yes] to the confirmation
to continue.
3.
Select [OK] to dismiss the notification to power off and power on the machine, but do not
power off and on the machine at this time.
NOTE: You will be instructed to power off and power on the machine later, after you have
made the required NVM changes.
4.
Open the Front Door of the machine, observe the Bar Code Label (Figure 1) on the front
of the ROS, and record the following numbers from the label
a.
From under the third bar code, record the three digits that appear after the letter L
this is the (imageFastScanReg).
b.
From under the second bar code, record the four or five digits that appear after the
letter H, this is the (hallPeriodRef).
c.
From under the second bar code, record the number (a zero, decimal point, and four
digits) that appear between the letter H, this is the (exposureCallibration).
2.
3.
4.
Select the [Machine] menu and select [Download] or select the Download Icon from the
menu bar.
5.
A dialog box appears asking if you want to initiate download. Select [Yes] and wait for the
download to complete.
6.
7.
Scroll or [Search] to location 723 (imageFastScanReg), double click and change the
value to the number recorded earlier.
8.
Scroll or [Search] to location 729 (hallPeriodRef), double click and change the value to
the number recorded earlier.
9.
Scroll or [Search] to location 793 (exposureCalibration), double click and change the
value to the number recorded earlier.
10. If this is a High Altitude machine (with Tag# 297 and above 4000 ft. (1200 m)): Scroll (or
[Search] to location 841 (machineAltitude), double click and change the value to the altitude, in feet, at which the machine is installed.
NOTE: To convert meters to feet, multiply the number of meters by 3.
11. Scroll or [Search] to location 870 (openLoopEnabled), double click and change the value
to (0) zero.
12. Exit the NVM Tool (select the [File] menu and select [Exit]).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
03-390
ROS Serial#
Part#
Exposure Calibration
(preceded by the letter E)
(NVM 793)
03-390
May 2003
2-86
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The System detects that power was lost due to the user selecting the Red Power Off button,
Input Power lost during power-up, or power lost while coming out of Power Saver mode.
Procedure
Ensure that the user does not unplug the machine or select the Red Power Off Button during
machine power-up.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
IIOC Bus 0 failed the IIOC Controller Test. This fault code indicates a failure of the Bus Controller Chip on the Main Control PWB.
Procedure
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
May 2003
2-87
03-777, 03-800
A
The presence of all of the listed faults indicates a failure of the portion of IIOC Bus 0 which is
powered by +24VDC (ES).
Perform the following corrective actions:
Check the connection of IIOC Bus 0 (P1) to the Distribution PWB (J1) ( P/J1). Reconnect
or repair as necessary.
Toner Dispenser Motor (Part of the Dry Ink Dispenser) PL 5.1B Item 4.
If the problem continues, replace the Bus 0 (ES) IIOC Harness PL 1.5 Item 10.
03-801
May 2003
2-88
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-89
03-801
IIOC Module A7A1 failed the IIOC Controller Test. This IIOC Module controls the Elevator
Motors for Tray 1 and Tray 2.
IIOC Module A7A2 failed the IIOC Controller Test. This IIOC Module controls the Paper Size
Sensing Switches in Tray 1.
Check the Last 40 Faults for the presence of each of the following faults: 03-803, 03-804, 03805, 03-806, and 03-807. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
ALL of the listed faults are logged.
Y
N
Replace the Tray 1/2 Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4.
Check the Last 40 Faults for the presence of each of the following faults: 03-803, 03-804, 03805, 03-806, and 03-807. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
ALL of the listed faults are logged.
Y
N
Replace the Tray 1/2 Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4.
The presence of all of the listed faults indicates a failure of the portion of IIOC Bus 0 which is
powered by +24VDC (not ES).
Perform the following corrective actions:
The presence of all of the listed faults indicates a failure of the portion of IIOC Bus 0 which is
powered by +24VDC (not ES).
Perform the following corrective actions:
Check the connection of IIOC Bus 0 (P3) to the Distribution PWB (J3) ( P/J3). Reconnect
or repair as necessary.
If the problem continues, replace the Bus 0 IIOC Harness PL 1.5 Item 3.
If the problem continues, replace the Bus 0 IIOC Harness PL 1.5 Item 3.
03-803, 03-804
May 2003
2-90
Check the connection of IIOC Bus 0 (P3) to the Distribution PWB (J3) ( P/J3). Reconnect
or repair as necessary.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
IIOC Module A7A3 failed the IIOC Controller Test. This IIOC Module controls the Paper Size
Sensing Switches in Tray 2.
IIOC Module A7A4 failed the IIOC Controller Test. This IIOC Module controls the Stack Height
Sensors and the Nudger Solenoids for Tray 1 and Tray 2.
Check the Last 40 Faults for the presence of each of the following faults: 03-803, 03-804, 03805, 03-806, and 03-807. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
ALL of the listed faults are logged.
Y
N
Replace the Tray 1/2 Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4.
Check the Last 40 Faults for the presence of each of the following faults: 03-803, 03-804, 03805, 03-806, and 03-807. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
ALL of the listed faults are logged.
Y
N
Replace the Tray 1/2 Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4.
The presence of all of the listed faults indicates a failure of the portion of IIOC Bus 0 which is
powered by +24VDC (not ES).
Perform the following corrective actions:
The presence of all of the listed faults indicates a failure of the portion of IIOC Bus 0 which is
powered by +24VDC (not ES).
Perform the following corrective actions:
Check the connection of IIOC Bus 0 (P3) to the Distribution PWB (J3) ( P/J3). Reconnect
or repair as necessary.
If the problem continues, replace the Bus 0 IIOC Harness PL 1.5 Item 3.
If the problem continues, replace the Bus 0 IIOC Harness PL 1.5 Item 3.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-91
Check the connection of IIOC Bus 0 (P3) to the Distribution PWB (J3) ( P/J3). Reconnect
or repair as necessary.
03-805, 03-806
Check the connection of IIOC Bus 0 (P3) to the Distribution PWB (J3) ( P/J3). Reconnect
or repair as necessary.
If the problem continues, replace the Bus 0 IIOC Harness PL 1.5 Item 3.
03-807
May 2003
2-92
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-93
03-807
N
Replace the IIOC PWB W25A1 PL 1.5 Item 2.
You can be directed to this RAP from the 22-757.04 RAP (Mark Service Configuration Error),
or as a result of IIOC Module W25A1 failing the IIOC Controller Test. This IIOC module is
present only on 55 ppm machines, and is required for electronic validation that the machine is
a 55 ppm machine.
NOTE: The W25A1 IIOC module is on 55 ppm machines only. It is located just to the
right of W8A3, shown on Component Locator Drawing 14 (IIOC PWB W8A3). It is
also the same part number as W8A3, shown on Parts List 1.5, Item 2.
Go to the 03-C IIOC Bus 0 Module Pin Configuration to check the pin connections
from the IIOC Housing to the IIOC PWB.
If a component has an open or short circuit, replace the component. (Go to the top of this
RAP for the PL links.) If the wiring has an open or short circuit, repair the wiring.
The presence of all of the listed faults indicates a failure of the portion of IIOC Bus 0 which is
powered by +24VDC (ES).
Perform the following corrective actions:
Check the connection of IIOC Bus 0 (P1) to the Distribution PWB (J1) ( P/J1). Reconnect
or repair as necessary.
If the problem continues, replace the Bus 0 (ES) IIOC Harness PL 1.5 Item 10.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
03-808
May 2003
2-94
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-95
03-808
C
A Type 1 test failure indicates the energizing voltage through an output component
was not sensed by the IIOC PWB.
Check the output components and the associated wiring for an open circuit or a
short circuit to DC COM.
Toner Bottle Motor (Part of the Dry Ink Dispenser) PL 5.1B Item 4.
Refer to Flag 4, Flag 5, Flag 6, and Flag 7 for the Power On Relay.
If a component has an open or short circuit, replace the component. (Go to the top of
this RAP for the PL links.) If the wiring has an open or short circuit, repair the wiring.
Check the Last 40 Faults for the presence of each of the following faults: 03-801, 03-809, 03811, 03-812, and 03-813. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
ALL of the listed faults are logged.
Y
N
NOTE: Shorted output components can cause an IIOC PWB to go into thermal overload
which usually results in a cycling OFF/On condition of the PWB as it goes through the
states of ''overload', 'reset', 'overload', 'reset', etc. The cycling frequency increases as the
temperature of the IIOC PWB increases.
For IIOC Module W8A1, thermal overload could manifest itself with a cycling of the Control Panel to indicate the Front Door is being repetitively opened and closed. Also, Relay
K1 can be heard to energize and de-energize at the same rate as the cycling of the Front
Door indicator or message.
The Front Door indicator or message shows the door being repetitively opened
and closed.
Y
N
The use of this RAP assumes the IIOC Controller Test has failed, and you know
whether the failure is a Type 1 or Type 2. If you do not know the failure type, enter
[Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests], select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run
the [Type 1] and [Type 2] tests.
The 03-809 fault code occurred after the Type 1 test.
Y
N
A Type 2 test failure indicates the energizing voltage through the output component was not gated to zero by the IIOC PWB.
Check the output components and the associated wiring for a short circuit
across the load.
Refer to Flag 4, Flag 5, Flag 6, and Flag 7 for the Power On Relay.
03-809
Check the connection of IIOC Bus 0 (P1) to the Distribution PWB (J1) ( P/J1). Reconnect
or repair as necessary.
If the problem continues, replace the Bus 0 (ES) IIOC Harness PL 1.5 Item 10.
May 2003
2-96
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-97
03-809
B
If a component has an open or short circuit, replace the component. (Go to the top of this
RAP for the PL links.) If the wiring has an open or short circuit, repair the wiring.
LVPS Cooling Fan/Duct PL 9.1 Item 2 and PWB Cooling Fan/Duct PL 9.1 Item 3.
The presence of all of the listed faults indicates a failure of the portion of IIOC Bus 0 which is
powered by +24VDC (ES).
Perform the following corrective actions:
Check the connection of IIOC Bus 0 (P1) to the Distribution PWB (J1) ( P/J1). Reconnect
or repair as necessary.
If the problem continues, replace the Bus 0 (ES) IIOC Harness PL 1.5 Item 10.
Refer to Flag 2 for the LVPS Cooling Fan/Duct and the PWB Cooling Fan/Duct.
Refer to Flag 2 for the LVPS Cooling Fan/Duct and the PWB Cooling Fan/Duct.
03-811
May 2003
2-98
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-99
03-811
A
The presence of all of the listed faults indicates a failure of the portion of IIOC Bus 0 which is
powered by +24VDC (ES).
Perform the following corrective actions:
Check the connection of IIOC Bus 0 (P1) to the Distribution PWB (J1) ( P/J1). Reconnect
or repair as necessary.
If the problem continues, replace the Bus 0 (ES) IIOC Harness PL 1.5 Item 10.
03-812
May 2003
2-100
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-101
03-812
B
If a component has an open or short circuit, replace the component. (Go to the top of this
RAP for the PL links.) If the wiring has an open or short circuit, repair the wiring.
The presence of all of the listed faults indicates a failure of the portion of IIOC Bus 0 which is
powered by +24VDC (ES).
Perform the following corrective actions:
Check the connection of IIOC Bus 0 (P1) to the Distribution PWB (J1) ( P/J1). Reconnect
or repair as necessary.
If the problem continues, replace the Bus 0 (ES) IIOC Harness PL 1.5 Item 10.
A
B
Status Indicator RAPs
03-813
May 2003
2-102
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-103
03-813
IIOC Module W20A1 failed the IIOC Controller Test. This IIOC module is present only on FX
machines, and is used to increment two mechanical billing meters.
NOTE: The W20A1 IIOC module is on FX machines only. It is located just to the right
of W8A3, shown on Component Locator Drawing 14 (IIOC PWB W8A3). It is also the
same part number as W8A3, shown on Parts List 1.5, Item 2.
Go to the 03-C IIOC Bus 0 Module Pin Configuration to check the pin connections
from the IIOC Housing to the IIOC PWB.
If a component has an open or short circuit, replace the component. (Go to the top of this
RAP for the PL links.) If the wiring has an open or short circuit, repair the wiring.
N
Replace the IIOC PWB W20A1 PL 1.5 Item 2.
The presence of all of the listed faults indicates a failure of the portion of IIOC Bus 0 which is
powered by +24VDC (ES).
Perform the following corrective actions:
Check the connection of IIOC Bus 0 (P1) to the Distribution PWB (J1) ( P/J1). Reconnect
or repair as necessary.
If the problem continues, replace the Bus 0 (ES) IIOC Harness PL 1.5 Item 10.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
03-815
May 2003
2-104
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-105
03-815
IIOC Bus 1 failed the IIOC Controller Test. This fault code indicates a failure of the Bus Controller Chip on the Main Control PWB.
IIOC Module A8A3 failed the IIOC Controller Test. This IIOC Module controls the Elevator
Motors for Tray 3 and Tray 4.
Procedure
Procedure
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Replace the Tray 3/4 Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4.
03-820, 03-823
May 2003
2-106
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
IIOC Module A8A2 failed the IIOC Controller Test. This IIOC Module controls the Paper Size
Sensing Switches in Tray 3.
IIOC Module A8A1 failed the IIOC Controller Test. This IIOC Module controls the Paper Size
Sensing Switches in Tray 4.
Procedure
Procedure
Replace the Tray 3/4 Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4.
Replace the Tray 3/4 Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-107
03-824, 03-825
IIOC Module A8A4 failed the IIOC Controller Test. This IIOC Module controls the Stack Height
Sensors and the Nudger Solenoids for Tray 3 and Tray 4.
IIOC Module A8A5 failed the IIOC Controller Test. This IIOC Module controls the Wait Station
Sensors and the Feed Motor for Tray 3 and Tray 4.
Procedure
Procedure
Replace the Tray 3/4 Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4.
Replace the Tray 3/4 Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4.
03-826, 03-827
May 2003
2-108
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-109
03-827
IIOC Module A4W1A1 failed the IIOC Controller Test. This IIOC module is a part of the
Inverter.
Procedure
Replace the Inverter PL 6.2A Item 2.
03-828
May 2003
2-110
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
IIOC Module A4W1A2 failed the IIOC Controller Test. This IIOC module is a part of the Inverter.
Procedure
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-111
03-829
If the wiring is good, replace the HCF Elevator Motor Assembly PL 4.2B Item 9.
If the problem continues, replace the HCF PWB PL 4.2B Item 10.
The presence of all of the listed faults indicates a failure of IIOC Bus 1 within the HCF/Bypass
Tray Assembly. Replace the HCF PWB PL 4.2B Item 10.
If the problem continues, replace the HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly PL 4.2A Item 1.
03-831
May 2003
2-112
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-113
03-831
If the problem is on a machine which has a Bypass Tray/HCF combination, the following components are suspect for this failure.
Procedure
The machine has an HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly.
Y
N
Replace the Bypass Tray Assembly PL 4.3 Item 1.
Replace the HCF PWB PL 4.2B Item 10.
If the problem continues, replace the HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly PL 4.2A Item 1.
03-832
May 2003
2-114
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-115
03-832
An IIOC controller for the Bypass Tray and/or HCF failed the IIOC Controller Test.
If the problem is on a machine which has only a Bypass Tray, the following component is suspect for this failure.
If the problem is on a machine which has a Bypass Tray/HCF combination, the following components are suspect for this failure.
Bypass Tray Solenoid, part of the Bypass Tray Feeder PL 4.2B Item 4.
If a component has an open or short circuit, replace the component. (Go to the top of this
RAP for the PL links.) If the wiring has an open or short circuit, repair the wiring.
The presence of all of the listed faults indicates a failure of IIOC Bus 1 within the HCF/Bypass
Tray Assembly. Perform the following actions.
If the problem continues, replace the HCF/Bypass tray Assembly PL 4.2A Item 1.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
03-833
May 2003
2-116
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-117
03-833
If the problem is on a machine which has a Bypass Tray/HCF combination, the following components are suspect for this failure.
If the problem continues, replace the HCF PWB PL 4.2B Item 10.
If the problem continues, replace the HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly PL 4.2A Item 1.
The presence of all of the listed faults indicates a failure of IIOC Bus 1 within the HCF/Bypass
Tray Assembly. Perform the following actions.
If the problem continues, replace the HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly PL 4.2A Item 1.
03-834
May 2003
2-118
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-119
03-834
On machines without TAG 022 or with TAG 040, module W21A1 is connected to the
Enabled Decurler.
On machines with TAG 022 and without TAG 040, module W21A1 is connected to a
Resistor Plug at connector P2.
Procedure
With TAG 022 and without TAG 040, replace the Resistor Plug PL 6.1A Item 7.
Without TAG 022 or with TAG 040, replace the Enabled Decurler PL 6.1A Item 4.
If the problem continues, replace the IIOC PWB W21A1 PL 1.6 Item 1.
03-835
May 2003
2-120
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-121
03-835
Initial Actions
Ensure IOT TAG 112 Convenience Stapler Harness Kit is installed. This kit was designed to
help decrease failures of W3A1 by isolating the static created by the Convenience Stapler
Cord.
Procedure
The use of this RAP assumes the IIOC Controller Test has failed, and you know whether the
failure is a Type 1 or Type 2. If you do not know the failure type, enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC
Controller Tests], select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and [Type 2] tests.
The 03-836 fault code occurred after the Type 1 test.
Y
N
Type 2 test failures indicate the energizing voltage through the output component was not
gated to zero by the IIOC PWB.
Check the output components and the associated wiring for a short circuit across the
load.
03-836
May 2003
2-122
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-123
03-836
An IIOC controller on the HCF PWB failed the IIOC Controller Test.
IIOC Bus 2 failed the IIOC Controller Test. This fault code indicates a failure of the Bus Controller Chip on the Main Control PWB.
Procedure
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
If the problem continues, replace the HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly PL 4.2A Item 1.
03-837, 03-840
May 2003
2-124
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
OCT Offset Motor (Part of the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly PL 8.1 Item 1.
OCT IIOC PWB W1A1 (Part of the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly PL 8.1 Item 1.
Procedure
The use of this RAP assumes the IIOC Controller Test has failed, and you know whether the
failure is a Type 1 or Type 2. If you do not know the failure type, enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC
Controller Tests], select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and [Type 2] tests.
The 03-841 fault code occurred after the Type 1 test.
Y
N
A Type 2 test failure indicates the energizing voltage through the output component was
not gated to zero by the IIOC PWB.
Check the output components and the associated wiring for a short circuit across the
load.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-125
03-841
03-841
May 2003
2-126
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G
RAP.
The purpose of this procedure is to check the SCB circuitry that is common to the ROS and the
Finisher in the event the Main Control PWB cannot communicate with both the ROS and the
Finisher.
With the [Communication Test 1] running, measure the voltage at TH44 on the Distribution PWB.
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
Main Control PWB PL 1.4A Item 1 (without TAG 077) or PL 1.4B Item 1 (with TAG 077) or
PL 1.4C Item 1 (on 460/470s).
Go to Flag 3 and check the Distribution Cable for an open circuit. If the circuit is open,
replace the Distribution Cable PL 1.2A Item 9.
If the Distribution Cable checks OK, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03G RAP.
Procedure
Switch the power Off. Disconnect connector P72 from the ROS. Switch the power On.
The machine problem continues.
Y
N
Replace the ROS PL 5.2 Item 3.
Switch the power Off. Reconnect the ROS connector P72. Check the Distribution Cable connections at the Main Control PWB and the Distribution PWB.
The cable is securely connected.
Y
N
Connect the cable. Run copies/prints to ensure the problem is corrected.
Switch the power On. Set the meter to measure DC volts. Connect the meter leads to P4-2 (-)
and P4-1 (+) at the Distribution PWB.
The voltage is within the range of 4.9 to 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
Connect the meter leads to P10-8 (-) and P10-7 (+) at the Distribution PWB.
The voltage is within the range of 4.9 to 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
Connect the meter leads to P10-8 (-) and P10-2 (+) at the Distribution PWB. In Communications Test, select [SCB], and [Reset Test]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Communications Test].
The voltage is within the range of 4.9 to 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Connect the (-) meter lead to the metal case of the LVPS. Connect the (+) meter lead to
TH38 (+) on the Distribution PWB. In Communications Test, select [SCB] and [Communication Test 1], and observe the voltage measurement. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Communications Test].
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2 and check the Distribution Cable for an open circuit. If the circuit is
open, replace the Distribution Cable PL 1.2A Item 9.
A
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-127
03-A
03-A
May 2003
2-128
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
If the problem continues, go to Flag 2 and check for an open on both the Fuser Module
CRUM clock and Xerographic Module CRUM clock lines. Repair or replace as necessary.
If no open is found, go to Flag 3 and check for an open on both the Fuser Module CRUM
data and Xerographic Module CRUM data lines. Repair or replace as necessary.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-129
03-B
03-B
May 2003
2-130
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Procedure
Within Bus 0, each IIOC PWB is uniquely controlled by the matrix of pins which touch the PWB
from the IIOC Housing. (Refer to Figure 1.)
The five large pins in the IIOC Housing make the connection of the IIOC harness to the
IIOC PWB. All five large pins must touch the IIOC PWB.
The seven small pins in the IIOC Housing are the programming pins. Each IIOC module
has a unique address, determined by which programming pins are bent down into the
IIOC Housing and DO NOT touch the IIOC PWB.
Module
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-131
03-C
Procedure
Procedure
Within Bus 1, each IIOC PWB is uniquely controlled by the matrix of pins which touch the PWB
from the IIOC Housing. (Refer to Figure 1)
Within Bus 2, each IIOC PWB is uniquely controlled by the matrix of pins which touch the PWB
from the IIOC Housing. (Refer to Figure 1)
The five large pins in the IIOC Housing make the connection of the IIOC harness to the
IIOC PWB. All five large pins must touch the IIOC PWB.
The five large pins in the IIOC Housing make the connection of the IIOC harness to the
IIOC PWB. All five large pins must touch the IIOC PWB.
The seven small pins in the IIOC Housing are the programming pins. Each IIOC module
has a unique address, determined by which programming pins are bent down into the
IIOC Housing and DO NOT touch the IIOC PWB.
The seven small pins in the IIOC Housing are the programming pins. Each IIOC module
has a unique address, determined by which programming pins are bent down into the
IIOC Housing and DO NOT touch the IIOC PWB.
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
A14A1
W21A1
Status Indicator RAPs
03-D, 03-E
Module
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
A7A1 (Finisher)
W1A1 (OCT)
May 2003
2-132
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Procedure
NOTE: When making voltage measurements in this RAP, connect the (-) meter lead to the
metal case of the LVPS, unless instructed otherwise.
Check the voltage at the +5V test point on the LVPS.
The voltage is within the range of 4.9 to 5.4 VDC.
Y
N
Go to the 01-A DC Voltage Checkout Procedure to diagnose the problem.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-133
03-F
CAUTION
The NVM Chip can be installed incorrectly which will result in an apparent failure of
the Main Control PWB. When moving the NVM Chip from the old MCB to the new
MCB, be sure to install it in the manner described in repair procedure REP 03-7.
NOTE: You should use this RAP only when directed here from another RAP.
The purpose of this RAP is two-fold.
First, this RAP will ensure the low voltages to the Main Control PWB are correct BEFORE
replacing the PWB.
Second, replacement of the Main Control PWB may not always be successful because
the NVM chip which will be transferred from the old Main Control PWB to the new Main
Control PWB may be corrupted. This RAP provides additional troubleshooting steps to
follow when that situation occurs.
The problem is resolved and the machine operates correctly with the new Main
Control PWB.
Y
N
Install a new NVM RAM Chip PL 1.4A Item 8.
CAUTION
The NVM Chip can be installed incorrectly which will result in an apparent failure of the Main Control PWB. Be sure to install the new NVM Chip in the manner described in repair procedure REP 03-7.
Procedure
The machine appears to operate normally after the NVM RAM chip is
replaced and the NVM values are reloaded.
Y
N
The new Main Control PWB is apparently defective. Replace the Main
Control PWB again PL 1.4A Item 1.
CAUTION
The NVM Chip can be installed incorrectly which will result in an apparent
failure of the Main Control PWB. When moving the NVM Chip from the old
MCB to the new MCB, be sure to install the NVM Chip in the manner
described in repair procedure REP 03-7.
Go to the procedure for Main Control PWB (460/470 - Atlanta Platinum 360 NLX).
The problem is the machine time of day clock is not maintaining the correct time.
Y
N
Check to see if the machine has the Electronic Hole Removal (EHR) PWB TAG 296
installed.
If the Electronic Hole Removal (EHR) PWB is installed, switch the power Off, remove
the PWB, then switch the power On.
If the machine does NOT have TAG 296, answer Yes to the following statement.
The NVM Chip can be installed incorrectly which will result in an apparent failure of
the Main Control PWB. When moving the NVM Chip from the old MCB to the new
MCB, be sure to install it in the manner described in repair procedure REP 03-7.
Before replacing the Main Control PWB, ensure the machine is NOT in power saver
mode, then check the low voltage inputs to the Main Control PWB listed in Table 1. (Connect the (-) meter lead to the metal case of the Low Voltage Power Supply.)
The voltages are in specification.
Y
N
Go to the 01-A DC Voltage Checkout Procedure.
The problem is resolved and the machine operates correctly with the new Main
Control PWB.
Y
N
Install a new NVM RAM Chip PL 1.4A Item 8.
CAUTION
The NVM Chip can be installed incorrectly which will result in an apparent failure of the Main Control PWB. Be sure to install the new NVM Chip in the manner described in repair procedure REP 03-7.
A
B
Status Indicator RAPs
03-G
The machine appears to operate normally after the NVM RAM chip is
replaced and the NVM values are reloaded.
Y
N
The new Main Control PWB is apparently defective. Replace the Main
Control PWB again PL 1.4A Item 1.
A
May 2003
2-134
E
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
E
CAUTION
The NVM Chip can be installed incorrectly which will result in an apparent
failure of the Main Control PWB. When moving the NVM Chip from the old
MCB to the new MCB, be sure to install the NVM Chip in the manner
described in repair procedure REP 03-7.
Return to Service Call Procedures.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-135
03-G
H
Y
If the Electronic Hole Removal (EHR) PWB is installed, switch the power Off, remove
the PWB, then switch the power On.
If the machine does NOT have TAG 080, answer Yes to the following statement.
N
The new Main Control PWB is apparently defective. Replace the Main
Control PWB again PL 1.4B Item 1.
Before replacing the Main Control PWB, ensure the machine is NOT in power saver
mode, then check the low voltage inputs to the Main Control PWB listed in Table 1. (Connect the (-) meter lead to the metal case of the Low Voltage Power Supply.)
The voltages are in specification.
Y
N
Go to the 01-A DC Voltage Checkout Procedure.
The problem is the machine time of day clock is not maintaining the correct time.
Y
N
Switch the power Off. Remove the Electronic Hole Removal (EHR) PWB, then switch the
power On.
The problem continues with the EHR PWB removed.
Y
N
Replace the Electronic Hole Removal PWB PL 1.4C Item 3.
Before replacing the Main Control PWB, ensure the machine is NOT in power saver
mode, then check the low voltage inputs to the Main Control PWB listed in Table 1. (Connect the (-) meter lead to the metal case of the Low Voltage Power Supply.)
The voltages are in specification.
Y
N
Go to the 01-A DC Voltage Checkout Procedure.
The machine has an ESS.
Y
N
Replace the Main Control PWB PL 1.4C Item 1, following the procedure in REP 034.
The problem is resolved and the machine operates correctly with the new Main
Control PWB.
Y
N
Install a new Software/NVM Module PL 1.4C Item 5.
The machine appears to operate normally after the Software/NVM Module
is replaced and the NVM values are reloaded.
Y
N
The new Main Control PWB is apparently defective. Replace the Main
Control PWB again PL 1.4C Item 1.
03-G
I
May 2003
2-136
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
I
Y
N
Replace the Main Control PWB PL 1.4C Item 1, following the procedure in REP 034.
The problem is resolved and the machine operates correctly with the new Main
Control PWB.
Y
N
Install a new Software/NVM Module PL 1.4C Item 5.
The machine appears to operate normally after the Software/NVM Module
is replaced and the NVM values are reloaded.
Y
N
The new Main Control PWB is apparently defective. Replace the Main
Control PWB again PL 1.4C Item 1.
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Return to Service Call Procedures.
P/J
Pin
Voltage Specification
+5 VDC (ES)
P1/J13
12
+5 VDC
P2/J7
+12 VDC
P2/J7
7
5, (DC460/470)
-12 VDC
P2/J7
8
6, (DC460/470)
EHR PWB
Tag
Atlanta Gold
015
160K59430
or
160K64130
296
Atlanta Platinum
077
160K64610
080
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-137
03-G
When the problem is solved, remove the tool and reconnect the Foreign Interface Cable.
The Xerox machine does not function correctly when a foreign accessory is connected.
The following terms are associated with the connection of a foreign accessory to a Xerox
machine.
Foreign Interface Cable - The wire harness which connects the Foreign Accessory to
the Xerox machine Foreign Interface Port. The Foreign Interface Cable is part of the Foreign Accessory, and is NOT maintained by Xerox.
Foreign Interface Port - The electrical connector on the Xerox machine to which the Foreign Interface Cable is connected.
Foreign Interface Tool (600T2127) - An electronic tester which plugs into the Foreign
Interface Port in place of the Foreign Interface Cable. The tool indicates, via the blink of
an LED, the occurrence of a Copy Count signal.
Program 5 copies of 1 original, then press Start. Observe the LED on the tool while the
machine is making the copies.
The LED blinks 5 times (once for each copy).
Y
N
Check which level of software is installed in the IOT. (On the UI, select [Machine Status],
then select [Machine Details].)
Version 1.12 Software (Tag 029) (or higher) is installed.
Y
N
Install Version 1.12 Software (TAG 029), or higher version, if available.
After installing the software, allow the machine to come to Ready. Program 5 copies
of 1 original, then press Start. Observe the LED on the tool while the machine is
making the copies.
The LED blinks 5 times (once for each copy).
Y
N
Replace the Accessory PWB.
Initial Actions
In order to service a machine with a foreign accessory, use one of the following options.
The CSE must use the Foreign Interface Tool 600T2127 in order to enable the operation
of the Xerox machine without the foreign accessory.
Alternatively, the CSE can request the customer to set up an account on the foreign
accessory in order to enable the making of copies during the service call.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03G RAP.
When the problem is solved, remove the tool and reconnect the Foreign Interface Cable.
Procedure
The problem is solved. Remove the tool and reconnect the Foreign Interface Cable.
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Enter the password, then press [Enter]. (The default password is 1111, but it can be
changed by the customer.)
From the next two screens, select [Auditron Administration], then [Authentication Mode].
The External Auditron should be the active selection. If necessary, select [External
Auditron], then select [Save].
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
When the problem is solved, remove the tool and reconnect the Foreign Interface Cable.
Select [Exit Tools], then operate the machine to determine if the problem still exists.
The Xerox machine still does not function correctly when the foreign accessory is connected.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
The foreign interface circuits of the copier are functioning correctly. Remove the tool and
reconnect the Foreign Interface Cable. Advise the customer the machine is functioning correctly and the problem is associated with the Foreign Accessory device or its cable.
Disconnect the Foreign Interface Cable at P7 on the Card Cage. Connect the Foreign Interface
Tool 600T2127 to P7.
With the tool in place, the machine is in the "Ready" or enabled mode.
Y
N
Replace the Accessory PWB.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
03-H
May 2003
2-138
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-139
03-H
2.
If the software is corrupted, you will NOT get a checksum error. When the machine boots
up, the Run Time software reads all of the checksums from memory and validates them
against stored checksum values. If the values are different, the machine boots up into a
software installation mode. Therefore, incorrect checksums caused by corrupted software
will never be seen by the CSE.
If there is a valid checksum error, it is because different levels of software are installed in
the machine. (For example, the Boot Loader could be at Version 1.12, but the Boot Sector
could be at Version 1.0.) In all cases, checking the displayed checksum value against the
checksum table in PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS will reveal which version of software is
installed for any software module.
Software checksum errors are normally seen only after a software upgrade. When a checksum
error occurs, follow the procedure in this RAP.
Procedure
Make a record of the software checksums displayed in the Diagnostic Navigator. Enter [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration].
Compare those checksums to the data in the IOT Checksums table in Product Specifications
The checksum for each module is correct for the software version being installed on
the machine.
Y
N
Reload the software. Be sure to correctly answer all prompts and select the correct version of software.
The checksums are correct after reloading software.
Y
N
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
If an Atlanta Gold Main Control PWB (Tag 015) fails, or if a component on that PWB fails,
replace the failed component with a like component per the information on PL 1.4A in the
EDOC.
If an Atlanta Platinum Main Control PWB (Tag 077) fails, or if a component on that PWB
fails, replace the failed component with a like component per the information on PL 1.4B
in the EDOC.
If an Atlanta Platinum 360 NLX Main Control PWB on a 460/470 machine fails, or if a
component on that PWB fails, replace the failed component with a like component per the
information on PL 1.4C in the EDOC.
03-J, 03-K
May 2003
2-140
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CAUTION
ATLANTA PLATINUM REQUIRES RELEASE 5.08 (17.08.65) SOFTWARE. If you must
replace an Atlanta Gold PWB with an Atlanta Platinum PWB, do NOT use any other software
version until a newer software version that supports the Atlanta Platinum PWB is announced
and released to the field.
Table 1 summarizes the unique spares and service information needed to be understood by
CSE's in order to service this new configuration.
Initial Actions
DC460/470 If you have just installed a Smart Tray Finisher and you receive the following
message during boot-up: Not Ready - Configuration Mismatch exists, Automatic Configuration detected an unrecoverable hardware problem, go to 12-700, Finisher Configuration
Error RAP.
DC460/470 - An intermittent boot problem seen as dots across the UI Screen may occur
on machines with Controller PWB 160K73823). To resolve this problem install (TAG 118 Controller PWB 160K73824) and ensure that you also have (L19.01.503) or later software
installed.
Atlanta Platinum
Tag Number
015
077
PL 1.4A, Item 1
PL 1.4B, Item 1
PL 1.4B, Item 4
PL 1.4A, Item 6
N/A
Procedure
N/A
PL 1.4B, Item 5
PL 1.4A, Item 8
N/A
1.
Software/NVM Module
N/A
PL 1.4B, Item 6
2.
Ensure that the EPC DRAM SIMMS (or EPC SDRAM DIMM w/TAG 077) are present.
Green
Red
3.
Observe the LED on the lower left corner of the Main Control PWB (it may be obstructed
by the Accessory PWB, but if the LED is on, the light will be visible).
NOTE: On machine without Tag 077 (Atlanta Platinum) the LED is green, with Tag 077,
the LED is red.
The EPC DRAM SIMMS (or EPC SDRAM DIMM w/TAG 077) are present on the Main Control PWB.
Y
N
The EPC DRAM SIMMS (or EPC SDRAM DIMM w/TAG 077) must have been removed
from the machine. Inform the customer. Install new EPC DRAM SIMMS PL 1.4A Item 2
(or PL 1.4B Item 5 w/TAG 077) or PL 1.4C Item 6 (on 460/470).
Observe the LED. The LED is blinking about once per second (answer NO if blinking
slower).
Y
N
Observe the LED. The LED is On.
Y
N
The LED is off. There may be a power problem. Check all of the connectors on
the Main Control PWB, especially at J13 and J7. Inspect the harness from these
connectors back to the LVPS. Ensure that they are connected correctly and not damaged. If OK, go to the 01-A, Voltage Checkout RAP.
Go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
This is the normal state for the LED. Re-assess the first question of this RAP. If there is no
doubt that the machine will not boot, no error codes are present on the UI Display, and the
PWS won't connect, go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-141
03-K, 03-L
03-K, 03-L
May 2003
2-142
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: In some versions of machine software, the Last 40 fault list refers to the 04-201 as
Main Drive Motor 1 Fault.
A Developer Drive Motor motion system hardware failure was detected.
Encoder feedback from the Developer Drive Motor was not detected, or the encoder feedback
detected was incorrect.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Observe the Developer Drive Motor. The motor energizes briefly in Component Control.
Y
N
CAUTION
Failure to wait 10 seconds after the machine power has been turned off before disconnecting the motor connector from the SCAM PWB will result in damage to the motor.
Waiting at least 10 seconds before disconnecting the motor from the SCAM PWB will
allow the LVPS output voltages to fully dissipate.
For more information, go to: Motor Control and Fault Declaration in the Principles of Operation
section of this manual.
Do the following:
Action
04-201 Only
Do the following:
Disconnect B1P1/J4 on the SCAM PWB.
Check the Last 40 Faults for an 04-201 fault. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
An 04-201 fault occurred after reconnecting B1P1.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Measure the voltage between J4 - 2 (-) and J4 -1 (+) on the SCAM PWB.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then [Output
On].
Measure the voltage between TH13 (-) and TH38 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-) and
TH38 (+) on TAG 108 MSCAM PWB).
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The voltage drops to less than +3 VDC when the Developer Drive Motor energizes.
Y
N
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
CAUTION
Disconnect B1P1/J4 on the SCAM PWB and switch the power [ON].
Measure the voltage between TH13 (-) and TH36 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-) and
TH36 (+) on TAG 108 SCAM PWB).
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then [Output
On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The voltage drops to less than +3 VDC when the Developer Drive Motor energizes.
Y
N
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6 .
Failure to wait 10 seconds after the machine power has been turned off before disconnecting
the motor connector from the SCAM PWB will result in damage to the motor. Waiting at least
10 seconds before disconnecting the motor from the SCAM PWB will allow the LVPS output
voltages to fully dissipate.
Measure the voltage between J4 -4 (-) and J4 -3 (+) on the SCAM PWB.
The voltage is +5 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6 .
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Measure the voltage between TH13 (-) and TH37 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-) and TH37
(+) on TAG 108 SCAM PWB).
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC when the Developer Drive Motor energizes.
May 2003
2-143
04-201
N
Replace the Developer Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 1.
Disconnect P21/J1 on the SCAM PWB and switch the power [On].
Measure the voltage between P21 -1 (-) and P21 -2 (+) on the connector.
04-201
May 2003
2-144
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-145
04-201
TH28
TH30
TH32
TH33
TH13
TH34
TH35
TH36
TH37
TH38
04-201
May 2003
2-146
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-147
04-201
04-201
May 2003
2-148
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH28
TH30
TH13
TH32
TH33
TH34
TH35
TH36
TH37
TH38
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-149
04-201
Connect the meter leads to TH13 (-) and TH38 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13
(-) and TH38 on TAG 108 SCAM PWB).
NOTE: In some versions of machine software, the Last 40 fault list refers to the 04-202 as
Main Drive Motor 1 Load Fault.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then
[Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The PWM duty cycle is less than 85% when the Vertical Transport is removed.
Y
N
Do the following to measure the PWM duty cycle:
The PWM duty cycle for the Developer Drive Motor was greater than 95% for a duration of
more than 100 ms. when the Developer Drive Motor was energized.
Remove the Registration Transport Assembly (REP 08-2) and switch the
power [ON].
Connect the meter leads to TH13 (-) and TH38 (+) on the SCAM PWB (
TH13 (-) and TH38 on TAG 108 SCAM PWB).
For more information, go to: Motor Control and Fault Declaration in the Principles of Operation
section of this manual.
Remove drive from the Developer Housing by removing the Developer Drive Belt.
On the Fluke meter select AC voltage. Press the Hz button twice to select % duty cycle.
Press the PEAK MIN MAX button.
Connect the meter leads to TH13 (-) and TH38 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-) and
TH38 on TAG 108 SCAM PWB).
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then [Output
On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The PWM duty cycle is less than 85% when the Registration Transport is
removed.
Y
N
Replace the Developer Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 1.
If the problem continues, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Replace the Registration Transport Assembly PL 4.1A Item 8 .
Replace the Vertical Transport PL 4.1A Item 7.
PWM duty cycle is less than 85% when the Developer Drive Belt is removed.
Y
N
Do the following to measure PWM duty cycle:
Remove the Duplex Transport (REP 10-2) and switch the power [ON].
On the Fluke meter select AC voltage. Press the Hz button twice to select % duty
cycle. Press the PEAK MIN MAX button.
Connect the meter leads to the SCAM PWB at TH13 (-) and TH38 (+) ( TH13 (-)
and TH38 on TAG 108 SCAM PWB).
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The PWM duty cycle is less than 85% when the Duplex Transport is removed.
Y
N
Do the following to measure the PWM duty cycle:
Remove drive from the Developer Housing by removing the Developer Drive Belt and
switch the power [ON].
In Diagnostic Navigator, select the [Copier System] tab. In Component Control, select
[IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab ,
Component Control].
Remove the Vertical Transport (REP 08-1) and switch the power [ON].
After approximately 10 seconds, select [Developer Drive Motor], [Output Off], then [Exit].
On the Fluke meter select AC voltage. Press the Hz button twice to select %
duty cycle. Press the PEAK MIN MAX button.
A
B
Status Indicator RAPs
04-202
May 2003
2-150
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
N
Check the Developer Collector Tube. The Developer Collector Tube is clogged.
Y
N
Replace the Developer Housing PL 5.1B Item 1.
Remove the Duplex Transport (REP 10-2) and switch the power [ON].
In Diagnostic Navigator, select the [Copier System] tab. In Component Control, select
[IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab ,
Component Control].
After approximately 10 seconds, select [Developer Drive Motor], [Output Off], then [Exit].
Remove the Vertical Transport (REP 08-1) and switch the power [ON].
In Diagnostic Navigator, select the [Copier System] tab. In Component Control, select
[IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab ,
Component Control].
After approximately 10 seconds, select [Developer Drive Motor], [Output Off], then [Exit].
Remove the Registration Transport Assembly (REP 08-2) and switch the power [ON].
In Diagnostic Navigator, select the [Copier System] tab. In Component Control, select
[IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab ,
Component Control].
After approximately 10 seconds, select [Developer Drive Motor], [Output Off], then [Exit].
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-151
04-202
TH28
TH30
TH32
TH33
TH34
TH13
TH35
TH36
TH37
TH38
04-202
May 2003
2-152
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH28
TH30
TH13
TH32
TH33
TH34
TH35
TH36
TH37
TH38
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-153
04-202
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
In Component Control, select [IOT General], [Photoreceptor Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Observe the Photoreceptor Drive Motor. The motor energizes briefly in Component Control.
Y
N
CAUTION
Failure to wait 10 seconds after the machine power has been turned off before disconnecting the motor connector from the SCAM PWB will result in damage to the motor.
Waiting at least 10 seconds before disconnecting the motor from the SCAM PWB will
allow the LVPS output voltages to fully dissipate.
In Faults, select [Last 40 Faults]. Make a note of all Drive Motor (04-2XX) faults, and
Xerographic (09-7XX) faults, that are listed in the Last 40 Faults. Enter [Faults/Counters
tab , Faults].
Do the following:
04-205 Only
Measure the voltage between TH13 (-) and TH33 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-) and
TH33 (+) on the TAG 108 SCAM PWB).
In Component Control, select [IOT General], [Photoreceptor Drive Motor], then [Output
On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The voltage drops to less than +3 VDC when the Photoreceptor Drive Motor energizes.
Y
N
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
CAUTION
Do the following:
Disconnect A1B1P1/J3 on the SCAM PWB.
Check the Last 40 Faults for an 04-205 fault. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
An 04-205 fault occurred after reconnecting A1B1P1.
04-205
Measure the voltage between J3 -2 (-) and J3 -1 (+) on the SCAM PWB.
Measure the voltage between TH13 (-) and TH34 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-) and
TH34 (+) on the TAG 108 SCAM PWB).
In Component Control, select [IOT General], [Photoreceptor Drive Motor], then [Output
On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The voltage drops to less than +3 VDC when the Photoreceptor Drive Motor energizes.
Y
N
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6 .
Failure to wait 10 seconds after the machine power has been turned off before disconnecting
the motor connector from the SCAM PWB will result in damage to the motor. Waiting at least
10 seconds before disconnecting the motor from the SCAM PWB will allow the LVPS output
voltages to fully dissipate.
Switch the power [OFF].
Disconnect A1B1P1/J3 on the SCAM PWB and switch the power [ON].
Faults in Last 40
May 2003
2-154
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC when the P/R Drive Motor energizes.
Y
N
Replace the Photoreceptor Drive Module PL 5.1A Item 2.
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Disconnect P21/J1 on the SCAM PWB and switch the power [On].
Measure the voltage between P21 -1 (-) and P21 -2 (+) on the connector.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-155
04-205
04-205
May 2003
2-156
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH28
TH30
TH32
TH33
TH34
TH13
TH35
TH36
TH37
TH38
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-157
04-205
04-205
May 2003
2-158
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-159
04-205
TH28
TH30
TH13
TH32
TH33
TH34
TH35
TH36
TH37
TH38
04-205
May 2003
2-160
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The PWM duty cycle for the Photoreceptor Drive Motor was greater than 80% for a duration of
more than 100 ms. when the Photoreceptor Drive Motor was energized.
For more information, go to: Motor Control and Fault Declaration in the Principles of Operation
section of this manual.
On the Fluke meter select AC voltage. Press the Hz button twice to select % duty cycle.
Press the PEAK MIN MAX button.
Connect the meter leads to TH13 (-) and TH33 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-) and
TH33 (+) on the TAG 108 SCAM PWB).
In Diagnostic Navigator, select the [Copier System] tab. In Component Control, select
[IOT General], [Photoreceptor Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab ,
Component Control].
The PWM duty cycle is 40% to 80% with the Xerographic Module removed.
Y
N
Replace the Photoreceptor Drive Module PL 5.1A Item 2.
If the problem continues, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
In Diagnostic Navigator, select the [Copier System] tab. In Component Control, select
[IOT General], [Photoreceptor Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab ,
Component Control].
After approximately 10 seconds, select [Photoreceptor Drive Motor], [Output Off], then
[Exit].
May 2003
2-161
04-206
TH28
TH30
TH32
TH33
TH13
TH34
TH35
TH36
TH37
TH38
04-206
May 2003
2-162
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH28
TH30
TH13
TH32
TH33
TH34
TH35
TH36
TH37
TH38
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-163
04-206
CAUTION
NOTE: In some versions of machine software, the Last 40 fault list refers to the 04-210 as
Main Drive Motor 2 Fault.
A Fuser Drive Motor motion system hardware failure was detected.
Failure to wait 10 seconds after the machine power has been turned off before disconnecting
the motor connector from the SCAM PWB will result in damage to the motor. Waiting at least
10 seconds before disconnecting the motor from the SCAM PWB will allow the LVPS output
voltages to fully dissipate.
Do the following:
Encoder feedback from the Fuser Drive Motor was not detected, or the encoder feedback
detected was incorrect.
For more information, go to: Motor Control and Fault Declaration in the Principles of Operation
section of this manual.
In Faults, select [Last 40 Faults]. Make a note of all Drive Motor (04-2XX) faults, and
Xerographic (09-7XX) faults, that are listed in the Last 40 Faults. Enter [Faults/Counters
tab , Faults].
Reinstall the original Fuser Module if it was replaced with a different one for troubleshooting.
Check the Last 40 Faults for an 04-210 fault. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
An 04-210 fault occurred after reconnecting B2P1.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Do the following:
Faults in Last 40
Action
04-210 Only
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Observe the Fuser Jam Clearance Knob. The Fuser Jam Clearance Drive Knob rotates
briefly. (This indicates the Fuser Motor energizes briefly in Component Control.)
Y
N
CAUTION
Failure to wait 10 seconds after the machine power has been turned off before disconnecting the motor connector from the SCAM PWB will result in damage to the motor.
Waiting at least 10 seconds before disconnecting the motor from the SCAM PWB will
allow the LVPS output voltages to fully dissipate.
Do the following:
Disconnect B2P1/J2 on the SCAM PWB and switch the power [ON].
Measure the voltage between J2 -2 (-) and J2 -1 (+) on the SCAM PWB.
Measure the voltage between J2-4 (-) and J2-3 (+) on the SCAM PWB.
The voltage is +5 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Measure the voltage between TH13 (-) and TH32 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-) and
TH32 (+) on the TAG 108 SCAM PWB).
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control]
The voltage drops to less than +3 VDC when the Fuser Drive Motor energizes.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
04-210
B
May 2003
2-164
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
Y
N
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Measure the voltage between TH13 (-) and TH30 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-) and
TH30 (+) on the TAG 108 SCAM PWB).
In Diagnostic Navigator, select the [Copier System] tab. In Component Control, select
[IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The voltage drops to less than +3 VDC when the Fuser Drive Motor energizes.
Y
N
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6 .
Replace the Fuser Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 3
Measure the voltage between TH13 (-) and TH28 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-) and TH28
(+) on the TAG 108 SCAM PWB).
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter
[Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC when the Fuser Drive Motor energizes.
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 3.
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6 .
Disconnect P21/J1 on the SCAM PWB and switch the power [On].
Measure the voltage between P21 -1 (-) and P21 -2 (+) on the connector.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-165
04-210
04-210
May 2003
2-166
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH28
TH30
TH32
TH33
TH13
TH34
TH35
TH36
TH37
TH38
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-167
04-210
04-210
May 2003
2-168
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-169
04-210
TH28
TH30
TH13
TH32
TH33
TH34
TH35
TH36
TH37
TH38
04-210
May 2003
2-170
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: In some versions of machine software, the Last 40 fault list refers to the 04-211 as
Main Drive Motor 2 Load Fault.
On the Fluke meter select AC voltage. Press the Hz button twice to select % duty
cycle. Press the PEAK MIN MAX button.
The PWM duty cycle for the Fuser Drive Motor was greater than 95% for a duration of more
than 100 ms. when the Fuser Drive Motor was energized.
Connect the meter leads to TH13 (-) and TH30 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-) and
TH30 (+) on the TAG 108 SCAM PWB).
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output
On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
For more information, go to: Motor Control and Fault Declaration in the Principles of Operation
section of this manual.
The PWM duty cycle is less than 85% when the Decurler Drive Belt is removed.
Y
N
Do the following to measure the PWM duty cycle:
Remove the Fuser Module and close the IOT Front Door.
On the Fluke meter select AC voltage. Press the Hz button twice to select % duty cycle.
Press the PEAK MIN MAX button.
Connect the meter leads to TH13 (-) and TH30 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-) and
TH30 (+) on the TAG 108 SCAM PWB).
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Remove the Prefuser Transport (REP 10-1) and switch the power [ON].
On the Fluke meter select AC voltage. Press the Hz button twice to select %
duty cycle. Press the PEAK MIN MAX button.
Connect the meter leads to TH13 (-) and TH30 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13
(-) and TH30 (+) on the TAG 108 SCAM PWB)
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The PWM duty cycle is less than 85% when the Prefuser Transport Assembly
is removed.
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 3 .
If the problem continues, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
The PWM duty cycle is less than 85% when the Fuser Module is removed.
Y
N
Check for the installation of a Decurler (a Decurler is required on machines with an
OCT). A Decurler is installed.
Y
N
Do the following to measure the PWM duty cycle:
Remove the Prefuser Transport (REP 10-1) and switch the power [ON].
On the Fluke meter select AC voltage. Press the Hz button twice to select %
duty cycle. Press the PEAK MIN MAX button.
Connect the meter leads to TH13 (-) and TH30 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13
(-) and TH30 (+) on the TAG 108 SCAM PWB)
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
On the Fluke meter select AC voltage. Press the Hz button twice to select % duty cycle.
Press the PEAK MIN MAX button.
The PWM duty cycle is less than 85% when the Prefuser Transport Assembly
is removed.
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 3 .
If the problem continues, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Connect the meter leads to TH13 (-) and TH30 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-) and
TH30 (+) on the TAG 108 SCAM PWB)
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The PWM duty cycle is less than 85% after replacing the Fuser Module.
Y
N
Reinstall the original Fuser Module.
Replace the Inverter PL 6.2A Item 2.
Return to Service Call Procedures.
May 2003
2-171
04-211
Remove the Fuser Module and close the IOT Front Door.
On the Fluke meter select AC voltage. Press the Hz button twice to select % duty cycle.
Press the PEAK MIN MAX button.
Connect the meter leads to TH13 (-) and TH30 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-) and
TH30 (+) on the TAG 108 SCAM PWB)
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The PWM duty cycle is less than 85% when the Fuser Module is removed.
Y
N
Do the following to measure the PWM duty cycle:
Remove the Prefuser Transport (REP 10-1) and switch the power [ON].
On the Fluke meter select AC voltage. Press the Hz button twice to select % duty
cycle. Press the PEAK MIN MAX button.
Connect the meter leads to TH13 (-) and TH30 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-)
and TH30 (+) on the TAG 108 SCAM PWB)
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output
On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The PWM duty cycle is less than 85% when the Prefuser Transport Assembly is
removed.
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 3 .
If the problem continues, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Remove the Fuser Module and close the IOT Front Door.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
After approximately 10 seconds, select [Fuser Drive Motor], [Output Off], then [Exit].
Connect the meter leads to TH13 (-) and TH30 (+) on the SCAM PWB ( TH13 (-) and
TH30 (+) on the TAG 108 SCAM PWB)
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output
On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
After approximately 10 seconds, select [Fuser Drive Motor], [Output Off], then [Exit].
Replace the Fuser Module and close the IOT Front Door.
Remove the Prefuser Transport (REP 10-1) and switch the power [ON].
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser D rive Motor], then [Output
On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
After approximately 10 seconds, select [Fuser Drive Motor], [Output Off], then [Exit].
The PWM duty cycle is less than 85% after replacing the Fuser Module.
Y
N
Reinstall the original Fuser Module.
Replace the Inverter PL 6.2A Item 2.
Do the following:
04-211
Remove the Decurler Drive Belt and switch the power [ON].
May 2003
2-172
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser D rive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
After approximately 10 seconds, select [Fuser Drive Motor], [Output Off], then [Exit].
Do the following:
C
Reinstall the original Fuser Module.
Replace the Inverter PL 6.2A Item 2.
Do the following:
Remove the Prefuser Transport (REP 10-1) and switch the power [ON].
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser D rive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
After approximately 10 seconds, select [Fuser Drive Motor], [Output Off], then [Exit].
Remove the Prefuser Transport (REP 10-1) and switch the power [ON].
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser D rive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
After approximately 10 seconds, select [Fuser Drive Motor], [Output Off], then [Exit].
Remove the Fuser Module and close the IOT Front Door.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
After approximately 10 seconds, select [Fuser Drive Motor], [Output Off], then [Exit].
Replace the Fuser Module and close the IOT Front Door.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output
On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
After approximately 10 seconds, select [Fuser Drive Motor], [Output Off], then [Exit].
May 2003
2-173
04-211
TH28
TH30
TH32
TH33
TH13
TH34
TH35
TH36
TH37
TH38
04-211
May 2003
2-174
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH28
TH30
TH13
TH32
TH33
TH34
TH35
TH36
TH37
TH38
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-175
04-211
04-211
May 2003
2-176
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Read the value displayed for Pass 1 Feeds (Scan). The value for Pass 1 Feeds is
greater than or equal to 100,000.
Y
N
Do the following:
The lead edge of the document was late to the Input Tray Exit Sensor.
Initial Actions
If the Document Feeder does not feed all documents due to one or more documents
being kicked back into the Document Input Tray, go to 05-C DADF Misfeed RAP.
Load a fresh sheet of 8.5 X 11 in (A4), paper in the Document Input Tray in
portrait orientation (LEF).
Open the DADF Top Cover. Ensure the DADF Paper Feed Roll Drive Coupling is fully
engaged. If the drive coupling is being disengaged by the operator during jam clearance,
install the Feed Roll Cartridge Release Lever Kit PL 2.2 Item 12.
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper and
the paper is inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input
Tray.
Check the document path entrance (right side of Document Input Tray) for obstructions
including foreign objects.
In DADF Sensor Tests, select [DADF Document Path Sensors Test] from
the Test Selection dropdown menu. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Sensor Tests].
If the customer has a Document Centre 240/255/265, and they are having problems when
feeding curled originals, install the Document Input Tray Side Guides Kit, PL 2.1A .
The results of the DADF Document Path Sensors Test indicate the Document Loaded Sensor passed (a check mark next to the sensor name).
Y
N
Check the flag actuator for the Document Loaded Sensor. The actuator
is free from damage, and is free to block and unblock the Document
Loaded Sensor.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 and reset the Life
Counter for the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
In Faults, select [Last 40 Faults]. Note any 05-340, 05-345, 05-365, or 05-370 faults listed
in the Last 40 Faults that occurred when the power was switched on.
An 05-340, 05-345, 05-365, or an 05-370 fault occurred when the power was switched on.
Y
N
The Last 40 Faults list indicates the 05-100 faults are intermittent.
Y
N
In DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests, select [Feed Clutch Nudger Solenoid], then [Start
Test]. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests].
The results indicate the Feed Clutch Nudger Solenoid test passed.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 Item 2and reset the Life Counter
for the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Ensure the DADF Top Cover is closed and the DADF is closed (lowered).
In IIT Motor Tests, select [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , IIT Motor Tests].
Load a fresh sheet of 8.5 X 11 in (A4), paper in the Document Input Tray in
portrait orientation (LEF).
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper and
the paper is inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input
Tray.
In DADF Sensor Test, select [DADF Document Path Sensors Test] from
the Test Selection dropdown menu, then select [Start]. Enter [IIT tab ,
DADF Sensor Tests].
The results of the DADF Document Path Sensors Test indicate the DADF
Registration Gate Sensor passed (a check mark next to the sensor name).
Y
N
Replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 and reset the Life Counter for
the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Go to Flag 2. Check wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component
Replace the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 2.2 Item 4 and reset the Life
Counter for the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Run the job that caused the failure.
In Diagnostic Navigator, select the [Faults/Counters] tab. Select the [Counters Display] button. In [Counters Display], select the [Diagnostic Data] tab.
Do the following:
Check the test results for the Feed Motor. The results of the IIT Motor Tests indicate the Feed Motor passed.
Y
N
In IIT Motor Test, select [Feed Motor], then [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , IIT Motor
Tests].
Check the test results for the CVT Drive Belts. The results of the IIT Motor
Tests indicate the CVT Drive Belts passed.
Y
N
Replace the Exit Clutch Drive Belt PL 2.3 Item 5 and the CVT/Reg Roll
Drive Belt PL 2.3 Item 6.
A
B
V0.042
A
May 2003
2-177
B
Status Indicator RAPs
05-100
A
The problem continues after replacing the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge.
Y
N
DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge replaced, return to Service Call Procedures.
Do the following:
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper and the
paper is inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input Tray.
In DADF Sensor Tests, select [DADF Document Path Sensors Test] from the
Test Selection dropdown menu. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Sensor Tests].
The results of the DADF Document Path Sensors Test indicate the Document
Loaded Sensor passed (a check mark next to the sensor name).
Y
N
Check the Document Loaded Sensor Actuator PL 2.2 Item 8 for the Document
Loaded Sensor. The actuator free from damage, and is free to block and
unblock the Document Loaded Sensor.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 and reset the Life Counter for
the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
C
Go to the 05-M Intermittent Document Jam RAP
An 05-340 or an 05-345 fault occurred when the power was switched on.
Y
N
An 05-370 fault occurred when the power was switched on.
Y
N
Go to the 05-365/375 DADF Feed Motor Fault RAP.
Go to the 05-370/380 CVT Motor Fault RAP.
An 05-340 fault occurred when the power was switched on.
Y
N
Go to the 05-345 DADF Feed Clutch IIOC Failure RAP.
Go to the 05-340 DADF Nudger Solenoid IIOC Failure RAP.
Do the following:
Load a fresh sheet of 8.5 X 11 in (A4), paper in the Document Input Tray in portrait orientation (LEF).
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper and the
paper is inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input Tray.
In DADF Sensor Tests, select [DADF Document Path Sensors Test] from the
Test Selection dropdown menu, then select [Start]. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Sensor Tests].
The results of the DADF Document Path Sensors Test indicate the DADF Registration Gate Sensor passed (a check mark next to the sensor name).
Y
N
Replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 and reset the Life Counter for the
DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Go to Flag 2. Check wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
Remove the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 Item 2 (REP 05-4). Check the Retard
Bracket Spring.
The Retard Bracket Spring is seated correctly in the retaining cup.
Y
N
Reinstall the DADF Feeder Assembly (REP 05-4). Ensure the Retard Bracket Spring
is seated correctly in the retaining cup.
A
C
Status Indicator RAPs
05-100
May 2003
2-178
Initial Actions
If the 05-102 jams are intermittent, go to the 05-M Intermittent Document Jam RAP.
Load a fresh sheet of 8.5 X 11 in (A4), paper in the Document Input Tray in portrait orientation (LEF).
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper, and the paper is
inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input Tray.
In DADF Sensor Tests, select [DADF Document Path Sensors Test] from the Test Selection dropdown menu, then select [Start]. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Sensor Tests].
The results of the DADF Document Path Sensors Test indicate the CVT Start of Scan
Sensor passed (a check mark next to the sensor name).
Y
N
Check the document path between the Input Tray Exit Sensor and the DADF Registration
Gate Sensor for obstructions. The document path between the Input Tray Exit Sensor and the DADF Registration Gate Sensor is free from obstructions.
Y
N
Remove the obstruction that is blocking the document path.
Ensure the Registration Gate is connected to the DADF Registration Gate Solenoid
and the Registration Gate moves freely without binding.
The DADF Take Away Roll Idler for binding, contamination, or damage.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-179
05-102
The trail edge of the document is late to the DADF Registration Gate Sensor
Initial Actions
Open the DADF Top Cover. Ensure the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 2.2 Item 4 is
seated correctly.
Ensure the DADF Top Cover is closed and the DADF is closed (lowered).
In IIT Motor Tests, select [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , IIT Motor Tests].
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper, and the paper is
inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input Tray.
Observe the sheets as they feed from the Document Input Tray. The paper is multi-sheet
feeding from the Document Input Tray.
Y
N
The jam is occurring when feeding 11 x 17 inch (A3) documents, or when feeding
8.5 x 14 inch paper, SEF.
05-103
Check the test results for the CVT Motor. The results of the IIT Motor Test indicate the CVT
Motor passed.
Y
N
In IIT Motor Tests, select [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , IIT Motor Tests].
Check the test results for the CVT Drive Belts. The results of the IIT Motor Tests indicate the CVT Belts passed.
Y
N
Replace the Exit Clutch Drive Belt PL 2.3 Item 5 and the CVT/Reg Roll Drive Belt PL
2.3 Item 6.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
Check the Document Restack Guide. The Document Restack Guide is in the correct
position and is free from damage.
Y
N
Ensure the Document Restack Guide is in the correct position and that it moves
freely to rest on the documents in the Document Output Tray.
Replace the Document Restack Guide PL 2.1A Item 9, if necessary.
Do the following:
If the above checks are good, replace the DADF Assembly PL 2.1A Item 1 and reset
the Life Counter for the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
In DADF Clutch Solenoid Tests, select [Exit Clutch and Inverter Clutch], then [Start Test]. Enter
[IIT tab , DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests].
The test results indicate the Exit Clutch AND the Inverter Clutch passed.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Exit Shaft PL 2.2 Item 9.
N
Check for IOT Tag 048. The machine has Tag 048 installed.
Y
N
Install TAG 048.
Replace the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 2.2 Item 4 and reset the Life Counter for
the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper, and the paper is
inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input Tray.
Check for 05-103 jams. A 05-103 jam occurs after replacing the DADF Paper Feed Roll
Cartridge.
Y
N
DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge replaced, return to Service Call Procedures.
Remove the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 Item 2 (REP 05-4). Check the Retard Bracket
Spring.
The Retard Bracket Spring is missing or damaged.
Y
N
Do the following:
Reinstall the DADF Feeder Assembly (REP 05-4). Ensure the Retard Bracket Spring
is seated correctly in the retaining cup.
B
May 2003
2-180
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper, and the paper
is inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input Tray.
The lead edge of the document is late to the CVT Start of Scan Sensor.
Check for 05-103 jams. A 05-103 jam occurs after reinstalling the DADF Feeder
Assembly.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 Item 2.
Replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 Item 2.
Ensure the DADF Top Cover is closed and the DADF is closed (lowered).
In IIT Motor Tests, select [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , IIT Motor Tests].
Check the test results for the CVT Motor. The results of the IIT Motor Tests indicate the
CVT Motor passed.
Y
N
In IIT Motor Tests, select [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , IIT Motor Tests].
Check the test results for the CVT Drive Belts. The results of the IIT Motor Tests indicate the CVT Drive Belts passed.
Y
N
Replace the Exit Clutch Drive Belt PL 2.3 Item 5 and the CVT/Reg Roll Drive Belt PL
2.3 Item 6.
Remove the DADF Main Cover.
Check the CVT/Reg Roll Drive Belt PL 2.3 Item 6. The CVT/Reg Roll Drive Belt is
worn, damaged, or broken.
Y
N
Replace the CVT Motor PL 2.3 Item 3.
Replace the Exit Clutch Drive Belt PL 2.3 Item 5 and the CVT/Reg Roll Drive Belt PL 2.3
Item 6.
In DADF Clutch Solenoid Tests, select [DADF Registration Gate Solenoid], then [Start Test].
Enter [IIT tab , DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests].
The results of the DADF Registration Gate Solenoid Test indicate the DADF Registration
Gate passed.
Y
N
In Component Control, select [Document Handler/Scanner], [CVT SOS Sensor], [Start
Monitor], [Copier Sys tab , Component Control]. Block and unblock the CVT Start of Scan
Sensor (Q3) with a sheet of paper.
The display indicates the state of the CVT Start of Scan Sensor changed.
Y
N
Go to the CVT Start of Scan Sensor Check.
Replace the DADF Registration Deskew Assembly PL 2.1B Item 6.
Do the following:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-181
Load a fresh sheet of 8.5 X 11 in (A4), paper in the Document Input Tray in portrait orientation (LEF).
05-103, 05-104
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper, and the paper is
inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input Tray.
In DADF Sensor Tests, select [DADF Document Path Sensors Test] from the Test Selection dropdown menu, then select [Start]. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Sensor Tests].
The results of the Document Path Sensors Test indicate the DADF Exit/Invert Sensor
passed (indicating the document made it past the CVT Start of Scan Sensor).
Y
N
Go to the 05-104 Document path checkout
Check the foam pads on the Right CVT Baffle. The foam pads are present, free from
damage, and are in the correct position on the Right CVT Baffle.
Y
N
Replace the Right CVT Baffle PL 2.4 Item 6.
N
Check the document path between the DADF Registration Gate Sensor and the CVT
Start of Scan Sensor for obstructions. The document path between the DADF Registration Gate Sensor and the CVT Start of Scan Sensor is free from obstructions.
Y
N
Remove the obstruction that is blocking the document path.
Check the Right CVT Baffle. The Right CVT Baffle is damaged or warped.
Y
N
Check the following:
Measure the voltage between P/J12 -13 (-) and P/J12 -14 (+) on the Distribution PWB.
Observe the meter while blocking and unblocking the CVT Start of Scan Sensor. The
voltage goes from +5 VDC to 0 VDC to +5 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the wire for an open circuit.
If the wire is good, replace the DADF PWB PL 2.3 Item 4.
Measure the voltage between the machine frame (-) and TH15 (+) on the Distribution
PWB.
Observe the meter while blocking and unblocking the CVT Start of Scan Sensor. The
voltage goes from +5 VDC to 0 VDC to +5 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
Replace the Distribution Cable PL 1.2A Item 9.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G Main
Control PWB Replacement RAP.
Replace the CVT Start of Scan Sensor PL 2.1B Item 3.
05-104
May 2003
2-182
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-183
05-104
TH15
05-104
May 2003
2-184
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: The DADF may have two CVT Skis, three CVT Skis, or a single CVT
Ski.
The lead edge of the document was late to the DADF Exit/Invert Sensor.
Manually rotate the CVT Drive on Glass Roll and the CVT Skis. The
Drive on Glass Roll and the CVT Skis move freely without binding.
Y
N
Replace the CVT Drive On Glass Kit PL 2.4 Item 7.
Initial Actions
If the 05-106 jams are intermittent, go to the 05-M Intermittent Document Jam RAP.
Do the following:
In Faults, select [Last 40 Faults]. Note any 05-355 faults listed in the Last 40 Faults that
occurred when the power was switched on.
Ensure the DADF Top Cover is closed and the DADF is closed (lowered).
In IIT Motor Tests, select [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , IIT Motor Tests].
Check the belt that drives the CVT Drive-on-Glass Roll The belt that
drives the CVT Drive-on-Glass Roll is damaged or missing.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 2.2 Item 4 and
reset the Life Counter for the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer
to GP6.
Check the test results for the CVT Motor. The results of the IIT Motor Tests indicate
the CVT Motor passed.
Y
N
In IIT Motor Tests, select [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , IIT Motor Tests]
Check the test results for the CVT Drive Belts The results of the IIT Motor Tests
indicate the CVT Belts passed.
Y
N
Replace the Exit Clutch Drive Belt PL 2.3 Item 5 and the CVT/Reg Roll Drive
Belt PL 2.3 Item 6.
Load a fresh sheet of 8.5 X 11 in (A4), paper in the Document Input Tray in portrait
orientation (LEF).
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper, and the paper
is inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input Tray.
In DADF Sensor Tests, select [DADF Document Path Sensors Test] from the Test
Selection dropdown menu, then select [Start]. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Sensor Tests].
The results of the DADF Document Path Sensors Test indicate the DADF Exit/Invert
Sensor passed (a check mark next to the sensor name).
Y
N
Observe the position of the paper. The paper exits the Document Feeder document path into the Document Output Tray.
Y
N
Raise the Document Feeder.
A
B
V0.042
CVT
Raise the Document Feeder to access the CVT Drive on Glass Roll and the CVT Skis.
NOTE: The DADF may have two CVT Skis, three CVT Skis, or a single CVT Ski.
Manually rotate the CVT Drive on Glass Roll and the CVT Skis. The
Glass Roll and the CVT Skis move freely without binding.
Y
N
Replace the CVT Drive On Glass Kit PL 2.4 Item 7.
A
May 2003
2-185
CVT
Drive
on
D
Status Indicator RAPs
05-106
D
In Component Control, select [Document Handler/Scanner], [CVT Motor] then [On Open
Loop]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Observe The CVT Drive on Glass Roll. The CVT Drive on Glass Roll is turning when
the CVT Motor energizes.
Y
N
Observe the Left CVT Roll. The Left CVT Roll is turning when the CVT Motor
energizes.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Assembly PL 2.1A Item 1 and reset the Life Counter for the
DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Check the belt that drives the CVT Drive-on-Glass Roll. The belt that drives the
CVT Drive-on-Glass Roll is damaged or missing.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Assembly PL 2.1A Item 1 and reset the Life Counter for the
DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Replace the CVT Drive On Glass Kit PL 2.4 Item 7.
Check the idler on the Left CVT Baffle. The idler on the Left CVT Baffle is damaged or
is binding.
Y
N
Check the idler on the Right CVT Baffle. The idler on the Right CVT Baffle is
damaged or is binding.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Assembly PL 2.1A Item 1 and reset the Life Counter for the
DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Ensure the DADF Exit Roll Idler is in the correct position and moves freely.
Ensure the Left CVT Roll Idler is in the correct position and moves freely.
The check of the Left CVT Baffle and the idlers is good.
Y
N
Replace the Left CVT Baffle PL 2.4 Item 5 if necessary.
Replace the DADF Exit Clutch PL 2.2 Item 13
If the problem continues, replace the DADF Exit Shaft PL 2.2 Item 9.
Go to the 05-355 DADF Exit Clutch IIOC Failure RAP.
05-106
May 2003
2-186
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Ensure the Document Restack Guide is attached correctly to the bottom of the Document Input Tray, is not damaged, and rests on the top of the documents as they are
stacked in the Document Output Tray. Replace the Document Restack Guide PL
2.1A Item 9 , if it is damaged.
The trail edge of the document was late to the DADF Exit/Invert Sensor.
Initial Actions
If the 05-107 jams are intermittent, go to the 05-M Intermittent Document Jam RAP.
Replace the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 2.2 Item 4 and reset the Life Counter for the
DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Load a sheet of 8.5 X 11 in (A4), paper in the Document Input Tray in portrait orientation
(LEF).
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper, and the paper is
inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input Tray.
In DADF Sensor Tests, select [DADF Document Path Sensors Test] from the Test Selection dropdown menu, then select [Start]. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Sensor Tests].
The results of the DADF Document Path Sensors Test indicate the DADF Exit/Invert
Sensor passed (a check mark next to the sensor name).
Y
N
Remove the following to access the DADF Exit/Invert Sensor:
Do the following:
Load 10 sheets of 8.5 X 11 in (A4), paper in the Document Input Tray in portrait orientation
(LEF).
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper, and the paper is
inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input Tray.
Observe the paper as it is fed from the Document Input Tray. The paper is multi-sheet feeding from the Document Input Tray.
Y
N
Do the following:
Check the surface of the Document Output Tray for obstructions, damage, or contamination. If the Document Output Tray is damaged, replace the Document Glass
Cover/Document Output Tray PL 2.1A Item 7.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-187
05-107
Load a fresh sheet of 8.5 X 11 in (A4), paper in the Document Input Tray in portrait orientation (LEF).
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper and the paper is
inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input Tray.
In the DADF Sensor Tests, select [DADF Document Path Sensors Test] from the Test
Selection dropdown menu, then select [Start]. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Sensor Tests].
The results of the DADF Document Path Sensors Test indicate the Input Tray Exit Sensor passed (a check mark next to the sensor name).
Y
N
Remove the DADF Top Cover Assembly.
Go to Flag 1. Check wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
Check the document invert path between the DADF Exit Invert Sensor and the Input Tray Exit
Sensor for obstructions. The document invert path between the DADF Exit Invert Sensor
and the Input Tray Exit Sensor is free from obstructions.
Y
N
Remove the obstruction that is blocking the document invert path.
Check the following:
05-108
May 2003
2-188
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The lead edge of the document was late to the Input Tray Exit Sensor on the second or third
pass, and the sheet was not detected at the DADF Exit/Invert Sensor after the DADF Inverter
Clutch was energized.
The lead edge of the document was late to the DADF Registration Gate Sensor, on the second
or third pass.
Initial Actions
In DADF Clutch Solenoid Tests, select [Exit Clutch and Inverter Clutch], then [Start Test] [Start
Test]. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests].
The results of the Exit Clutch and Inverter Clutch Test indicate the Exit Clutch and the
Inverter Clutch passed.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Exit Shaft PL 2.2 Item 9
If the 05-109 jams are intermittent, Go to the 05-M Intermittent Document Jam RAP.
In Faults, select [Last 40 Faults]. Note any 05-360 faults listed in the Last 40 Faults that
occurred when the power was switched on.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-189
05-109, 05-110
05-310
May 2003
2-190
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Ensure the DADF Top Cover is closed (The message 'The Document Feeder is
cover open' is not displayed on the User Interface).
In DADF Sensor Tests, select [DADF Top Cover Test] from the Test Selection dropdown menu. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Sensor Tests].
Observe the PWS while the opening and then closing the Document Feeder Top Cover.
The results of the DADF Top Cover Test indicate the Document Feeder Top Cover
Sensor passed.
Y
N
Check the Document Feeder Top Cover Sensor Actuator. The actuator for the
Document Feeder Top Cover Sensor is damaged or missing
Y
N
Open then close the Document Feeder Top Cover. The Document Feeder
Top Cover is closing correctly.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Top Cover Assembly PL 2.1B Item 2.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-191
05-325
The Control Logic has detected the IIOC Internal (SCVM local) Turnaround Test has failed.
The Control Logic has detected the IIOC Turnaround Test has failed for the entire IIOC Bus 4
(DADF)
The machine frame (-) and P/J1 -7 (+) on the DADF PWB.
The machine frame (-) and P/J1 -8 (+) on the DADF PWB.
The machine frame (-) and P/J1 -9 (+) on the DADF PWB.
The following voltages are measured: +0.25 VDC to +4.75 VDC at P1-7 (SID), +0.25
VDC to +4.75 VDC at P1-8 (SOD), and approximately 2.7 VDC at P1-9 (CLK).
Y
N
Switch off the power.
Disconnect P/J1 from the DADF PWB, and switch the power [ON].
Measure the voltage between:
The following voltages are measured: +0.25 VDC to +4.75 VDC at P1-7 (SID),
+0.25 VDC to +4.75 VDC at P1-8 (SOD), and approximately 2.7 VDC at P1-9
(CLK).
Y
N
Measure the voltage between:
The machine frame (-) and P/J12 -12 (+) on Distribution PWB.
The machine frame (-) and P/J12 -11 (+) on Distribution PWB.
The machine frame (-) and P/J12 -10 (+) on Distribution PWB.
The following voltages are measured: +0.25 VDC to +4.75 VDC at J12-12
(SID), +0.25 VDC to +4.75 VDC at J12-11 (SOD), and approximately 2.7
VDC at J12-10 (CLK).
Y
N
Switch off the power.
Disconnect P/J12 on the Distribution PWB, and switch the power [ON].
Measure the voltage between:
The machine frame (-) and P/J12 -12 (+) on the connector.
The machine frame (-) and P/J12 -11 (+) on the connector.
The machine frame (-) and P/J12 -10 (+) on the connector.
05-330, 05-331
May 2003
2-192
E
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
E
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go
to the 03-G Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
Go to Flag 1. Check the DADF Harness for a short circuit.
Replace the DADF Harness PL 2.3 Item 2 if required.
Ensure the DADF Top Cover is closed and the DADF is closed (lowered).
In IIT Motor Tests, select [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , IIT Motor Tests].
Check the test results for the CVT Motor. The results of the IIT Motor Tests indicate the
CVT Motor passed.
Y
N
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G Main Control PWB Replacement
RAP.
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-193
05-331
05-331
May 2003
2-194
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 Item 2 and switch the power [ON].
Reset the Life Counter for the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
05-340 and 05-345 faults occur after connector P/J 5 is connected securely.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the DADF PWB PL 2.3 Item 4.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-195
05-340
05-340
May 2003
2-196
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 Item 2 and switch the power [ON].
Reset the Life Counter for the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
05-340 and 05-345 faults occur after connector P/J 5 is connected securely.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the DADF PWB PL 2.3 Item 4.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-197
05-345
05-345
May 2003
2-198
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Do the following:
Replace the DADF Registration Deskew Assembly PL 2.1B Item 6 and switch the power
[ON].
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-199
05-350
Replace the DADF Exit Shaft PL 2.2 Item 9 and switch the power [ON].
05-355 and 05-360 faults occur after connector P/J is connected securely.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Perform the DADF Ground Checkout GP44 , and correct any problems found.
If the problem continues, replace the DADF PWB PL 2.3 Item 4.
05-355
May 2003
2-200
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-201
05-355
05-355
May 2003
2-202
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replace the DADF Exit Shaft PL 2.2 Item 9 and switch the power [ON].
05-355 and 05-360 faults occur after connector P/J 2 is connected securely.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Perform the DADF Ground Checkout GP44 , and correct any problems found.
If the problem continues, replace the DADF PWB PL 2.3 Item 4.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-203
05-360
05-360
May 2003
2-204
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Do the following:
Ensure the DADF Top Cover is closed and the DADF is closed (lowered).
In IIT Motor Tests, select [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , IIT Motor Tests].
B
In Component Control, select [All Outputs Off]. Select [Exit Clutch], [Output On], [Feed
Motor], and [On Open Loop]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Observe the Feed Motor when the Exit Clutch energizes. The Feed Motor runs freely
without binding.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Exit Shaft PL 2.2 Item 9.
Go to Figure 1. Check the circuit of the DADF Feed Motor for an intermittent condition.
Check the test results for the Feed Motor. The results of the IIT Motor Tests indicate the
Feed Motor passed.
Y
N
In IIT Motor Tests, select [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , IIT Motor Tests].
Check the test results for the CVT Motor. The results of the IIT Motor Tests indicate
the CVT Motor passed.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wire for a short circuit or an open circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
Main Control PWB PL 1.4A Item 1 PL 1.4B Item 1 (Machines with TAG 077).
Before replacing the Main Control PWB. Go to the 03-G Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
Do the following:
Manually rotate the Feed Motor (CCW as viewed from the rear), by turning the Registration Roll Drive Gear. The Feed Motor turns freely without binding.
Y
N
Check the Registration Roll Shaft for binding. The check of the Registration Roll
shaft is good.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Registration Deskew Assembly PL 2.1B Item 6.
Replace the DADF Feed Motor PL 2.2 Item 7.
Do the following:
Observe the Feed Motor when the Feed Clutch energizes. The Feed Motor runs freely
without binding.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 Item 2 and reset the Life Counter for
the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
A
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-205
05-365/375
05-365/375
May 2003
2-206
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Manually rotate the CVT Motor (CCW as viewed from the rear). The
Motor turns freely without binding.
Y
N
Check the following for binding:
CVT
05-380 The CVT Motor did not provide a Motor Done signal.
Each Registration Roll and each Registration Roll Idler. Replace the
DADF Registration Deskew Assembly PL 2.1B Item 6, if necessary.
The Right CVT Roll. Replace the DADF Assembly PL 2.1A Item 1, if
necessary.
Check the IOT Change Tag Matrix. IOT TAG 084 has been marked off.
Y
N
Go to 05-N DADF CVT Motor Ground Checkout.
If the DADF Assembly is replaced, reset the Life Counter for the
DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
The Right CVT Idler. Replace the Right CVT Baffle PL 2.4 Item 6, if
necessary.
The Drive on Glass Roll. Replace the CVT Drive On Glass Kit PL 2.4
Item 7, if necessary
Continuity is measured between the CVT Motor frame and the machine frame.
Y
N
Remove the CVT Motor and reform the small ground tab on the Ground Bracket to ensure
contact with the CVT Motor frame.
The Left CVT Roll. Replace the DADF Assembly PL 2.1A Item 1, if
necessary.
Do the following:
Do the following:
Switch the power [OFF] and remove the DADF Main Cover.
Check for continuity between the CVT Motor frame and the machine frame.
Ensure the DADF Top Cover is closed and the DADF is closed (lowered)
In IIT Motor Tests, select [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , IIT Motor Tests].
If the DADF Assembly is replaced, reset the Life Counter for the
DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Check the test results for the CVT Motor. The results of the IIT Motor Tests indicate the
CVT Motor passed.
Y
N
In IIT Motor Tests, select [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , IIT Motor Tests].
Check the test results for the RIS Motor. The results of the IIT Motor Tests indicate
the RIS Motor failed (an indication the CVT and RIS Motor Common Feedback Leg
failed).
Y
N
In IIT Motor Tests, select [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , IIT Motor Tests].
Check the test results for the Feed Motor. The results of the IIT Motor Tests indicate the Feed Motor passed.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wire for an open circuit or a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
Main Control PWB PL 1.4A Item 1 PL 1.4B Item 1 (Machines with TAG
077).
Before replacing the Main Control PWB. Go to the 03-G Main Control PWB
Replacement RAP.
Raise the Document Feeder.
Manually rotate the CVT Motor (CCW as viewed from the rear). The CVT Motor
turns freely without binding.
Y
N
Remove the Exit Clutch Drive Belt and the CVT/Reg Roll Drive Belt from the
CVT Motor pulley.
A
B
V0.042
The Left CVT Idler. Replace the Left CVT Baffle PL 2.4 Item 5, if necessary.
Measure the voltage between P1/J8 -4 (-) and P1/J8 -5 (+) on the DADF PWB.
In Component Control, select [Document Handler/Scanner], [CVT Motor], then
[Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The voltage drops to less than +1.0 VDC when the CVT Motor energizes.
A
May 2003
2-207
D
Status Indicator RAPs
05-370/380
A
Y
N
Measure the voltage between P/J12 -8 (-) and P/J12 -7 (+) on the Distribution PWB. The voltage drops to less than +1.0 VDC when the CVT
Motor energizes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 4. Check the CVT Motor Encoder feedback circuit for an
open condition.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
E
Go to Flag 7. Check the wires for an open circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the CVT Motor PL 2.3 Item 3.
Measure the voltage between P/J12 - 13 (-) on the Distribution PWB and P87/J14 17 (+) on the Main Control PWB. The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC when
the CVT Motor energizes.
Y
N
Make one of the following checks:
Before replacing the Main Control PWB. Go to the 03-G Main Control
PWB Replacement RAP.
Measure the voltage between P1/J8 -4 (-) and P1/J8 -6 (+) on the DADF PWB.
In Component Control, select [Document Handler/Scanner], [CVT Motor], then
[On Open Loop]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The voltage is approximately +5 VDC when the CVT Motor energizes.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between P/J12 - 13 (-) and P/J12 -6 (+) on the Distribution PWB. The voltage is approximately +5 VDC when the CVT
Motor energizes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are
good, replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G Main Control
PWB Replacement RAP.
Observe the CVT Motor. The CVT Motor runs in the forward direction (counter
clockwise as viewed from the rear).
Y
N
Go to Flag 6 and Flag 7. Check the circuit for the CVT DIR signal for a short.
Go to Flag 5. Check the CVT Motor Encoder feedback circuit for an open
condition.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
Go to Flag 1. Check the SCVM Share PWM signal, including the Distribution PWB, for a
short circuit or an open circuit.
If the check of the SCVM Share PWM circuit is good, the Main Control PWB may have
failed. Go to the 03-G Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
Go to Figure 2. Check the circuit of the CVT Motor for an intermittent condition.
Go to Flag 6. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good,
replace the DADF PWB PL 2.3.
In Component Control, select [Document Handler/Scanner], [CVT Motor], then
[On Open Loop].
Measure the voltage between P1/J8 -4 (-) and P1/J8 -6 (+) on the DADF PWB.
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The voltage drops to less than +3 VDC when the CVT Motor energizes.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between P/J12 - 13 (-) and P/J12 -5 (+) on the Distribution PWB. The voltage drops to less than +3 VDC when the CVT
Motor energizes.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
Go to Flag 8. Check the wires for an open circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the DADF PWB PL 2.3.
A
B
D
E
Status Indicator RAPs
05-370/380
May 2003
2-208
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Ground Bracket
Retainer
DADF PWB
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-209
05-370/380
05-370/380
May 2003
2-210
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
If a 22-300.05 fault is displayed in the Last 40 Faults, go to the 22-300.05 Image Complete Not
Received RAP.
Initial Actions
Open the DADF Top Cover. Ensure the DADF Paper Feed Roll Drive Coupling is fully
engaged. If the drive coupling is being disengaged during jam clearance, install the Feed
Roll Cartridge Release Lever Kit PL 2.2 Item 12.
If the customer has a Document Centre 240/255/265, and they are having problems when
feeding curled originals, install the Document Input Tray Sides Guide Kit PL 2.1A.
Action
The paper supply tray is incorrect when Go to the 05-E DADF Document Size Sensing RAP.
Auto Paper Tray is selected.
The original documents are smeared, Go to the 05-B DADF Document Damage RAP.
nicked, dog-eared creased, torn, or the
image is damaged, by components in
the DADF document path.
A document is partially ejected into the Check the DADF Exit/Invert Sensor for contaminaDocument Output Tray and no jam is
tion.
declared.
The Document Feeder will not run
when documents are in the Document
Input Tray.
The image on the output copies is mis- Go to the 05-A Registration/Skew Check Procedure.
registered or skewed.
V0.042
Action
The Document Feeder does not feed all Go to the 05-C DADF Misfeed RAP.
documents from the Document Input
Tray due to one or more documents
being kicked back into the Document
Input Tray.
The message, The Document Feeder is Go to the 05-J DADF Interlock Switch RAP.
raised, is displayed on the UI when the
Document Feeder is lowered.
The image on the output copies exhibits Go to the 05-A Image Check Procedure.
one of the following defects: incorrect
magnification, blur, poor resolution,
ragged lines, deformed image, or a thin
black line on the trail edge that runs IB
to OB.
Problem
May 2003
2-211
05-A
The documents are smeared, nicked, dinged, dog-eared creased, torn, or the image is damaged by components in the DADF document path.
Initial Actions
Ensure the documents the customer is using are not damaged, stapled, and they meet the size
and paper weight requirements for the Document Feeder.
Check all idlers in the Document Feeder document path. Ensure the idlers are not binding, and they are positioned correctly.
Check the 2 sided (Sides Imaged) selection used when the damage occurred. The damage
occurs on 1 to 2 sided, 2 to 2 sided, or 2 to 1 sided copy selections.
Y
N
Place the a stack of 5 sheets of paper in the Document Input Tray. Program a 1 to 1 job.
Press the Start button. Observe the sheets as they are feeding from the Document Input
Tray The documents are skewing as they are feeding from the Document Input
Tray.
Y
N
Check the DADF Inverter Gate for correct operation. Replace the DADF Registration
Deskew Assembly PL 2.1B Item 6 if required.
Replace the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 2.2 Item 4 and reset the Life Counter for
the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
If the problem continues, replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 Item 2 and reset the
Life Counter for the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Check the following:
The DADF Inverter Gate for correct operation. Replace the DADF Registration Deskew
Assembly PL 2.1B Item 6 if required.
The plastic baffle on the Feeder Assembly that guides the inverted documents to the
Takeaway Roll is not damaged or deformed. Replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2
Item 2 if required.
Document lead edge nicks or dings may be caused by one of the following:
The DADF Take Away Roll Idler is not contacting the DADF Take Away Roll.
Ensure the DADF Top Cover PL 2.1B Item 2, is closing correctly.
The Right CVT Baffle, is not seated correctly when the Document Feeder is
lowered. If the foam pads are missing, damaged, or not in the correct position,
replace the Right CVT Baffle PL 2.4 Item 6.
The Left CVT Baffle, is not seated correctly when the Document Feeder is lowered. Replace the Left CVT Baffle PL 2.4 Item 5, if necessary.
N
In DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests, select [DADF Registration Gate Solenoid], then [Start
Test]. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests].
The results of the DADF Registration Gate Solenoid Test indicate the DADF Registration Gate passed.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Registration Deskew Assembly PL 2.1B Item 6.
If the DADF Feeder Assembly is replaced, reset the Life Counter for the DADF Paper
Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Ensure the Document Restack Guide is attached correctly to the bottom of the Document
Input Tray, is not damaged, and rests on top of the documents as they are stacked in the
Document Output Tray.
Replace the Document Restack Guide PL 2.1A Item 9 if it is damaged.
The document damage is dog-ears.
05-B, 05-C
May 2003
2-212
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
When a document or documents are placed in the Document Input Tray and the Start button is pressed, the documents will not feed, and a blank sheet will be delivered to the output device.
The Document Feeder does not feed all documents due to one or more documents being
kicked back into the Document Input Tray.
The problem of document kickback continues after replacing the DADF Paper
Feed Roll Cartridge.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 Item 2.
Initial Actions
If the Document Feeder does not feed all documents due to one or more documents
being kicked back into the Document Input Tray, replace the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 2.2 Item 4 and reset the Life Counter for the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge.
Refer to GP6.
If the customer has a Document Centre 240/255/265, and they are having problems when
feeding curled originals, install the Document Input Tray Side Guides Kit PL 2.1A.
Check for IOT Tag 048. The machine has Tag 048 installed.
Y
N
Install TAG 048.
If not already done, replace the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 2.2 Item 4 and
reset the Life Counter for the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
A
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-213
05-C
A
Perform IIT Registration and Magnification. Go to ADJ 14-2.
Check the copies for correct magnification. The horizontal (lead edge to trail edge) magnification is incorrect.
Y
N
The vertical (top edge to bottom edge) magnification is incorrect.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
The image quality defect is incorrect magnification which may cause a thin black line
on the trail edge that runs IB to OB on all the copies.
Y
N
The image quality defect is poor resolution or blurred image.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Assembly PL 2.1A Item 1 and reset the Life Counter for the
DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Do the following:
In Diagnostic Navigator, select the [NVM] tab. Using [NVM Tool], search for the location indicated in Table 1.
Compare that value to the value for Hall Period Reference located on the ROS bar
code label. The Hall Period Ref number is the 4 or 5 digit number that is preceded by
the letter H under the second bar code (Figure 1).
Use [NVM Tool] to reset the value to the value indicated on the ROS bar code label.
NOTE: The DADF may have two CVT Skis, three CVT Skis, or a single CVT Ski.
Check the CVT Drive On Glass Kit and the CVT Skis. The CVT Drive on Glass Roll
and the CVT Skis are free from damage and move freely without binding.
Y
N
Replace the CVT Drive On Glass Kit PL 2.4 Item 7.
Replace the DADF Assembly PL 2.1A Item 1 and reset the Life Counter for the DADF
Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
The horizontal (lead edge to trail edge) magnification is incorrect.
Y
N
The vertical (top edge to bottom edge) magnification is incorrect.
Y
N
Do the following:
In Diagnostic Navigator, select the [NVM] tab. Using [NVM Tool], search for the
location indicated in Table 1.
Compare that value to the value for Hall Period Reference located on the ROS
bar code label. The Hall Period Ref number is the 4 or 5 digit number that is
preceded by the letter H under the second bar code (Figure 1).
Use [NVM Tool] to reset the value to the value indicated on the ROS bar code
label.
Do the following:
Ensure the DADF Top Cover is closed and the DADF is closed (lowered).
In IIT Motor Tests, select [Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , IIT Motor Tests].
Check the test results for the CVT Motor. The results of the IIT Motor Test indicate
the CVT Motor passed.
Y
N
Replace the CVT Motor PL 2.3 Item 3.
Replace the DADF Assembly PL 2.1A Item 1 and reset the Life Counter for the DADF
Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
05-D
B
May 2003
2-214
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
Go to the 05-E DADF Document Size Sensing RAP.
Part #
ROS Serial #
Exposure Calibration
470 DC/ST
Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRef Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRefGb
460 DC/ST
Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRef Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRefGb
255/265 DC/ST
N/A
240 DC/ST
N/A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-215
05-D
A
The results of the DADF Input Tray Guides Test indicate the Side Guide Sensor 2
passed.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
The magnification is incorrect when Auto Reduce/Enlarge is selected on the User Interface.
The incorrect paper supply tray is selected when Auto is selected for the paper tray.
The image on the output copies is cropped (the trail edge of the image is deleted).
Do the following:
For additional information, go to: Document Size Sensing in the Principles of Operation section
of this manual.
Initial Actions
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides in the Document Input Tray move freely
and contact the edge of the documents.
Ensure the documents in the Document Input Tray are the same size front to rear.
The customer may be using a document that is a different size than the document sizes
that are set in Tools. Go to GP30 , to ensure the document sizes are set correctly for the
size document(s) the customer is using.
In DADF Sensor Tests, select [DADF Input Tray Sensors Test] from the Test Selection
dropdown menu. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Sensor Tests]
Depress the switch actuators, in the surface of the Document Input Tray, one at a time.
The results of the DADF Input Tray Sensors Test indicate the Input Tray Sensor 1
passed.
Y
N
Go to Flag 3. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
The results of the DADF Input Tray Sensors Test indicate the Input Tray Sensor 2
passed.
Y
N
Go to Flag 4. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
Do the following:
In DADF Sensor Tests, select [DADF Input Tray Guides Test] from the Test Selection
dropdown menu, then select [Start]. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Sensor Tests]
Slide the Document Input Tray side guides in to the end of their travel, then slide them out
to the end of their travel.
The results of the DADF Input Tray Guides Test indicate the Side Guide Sensor 1
passed.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
A
Status Indicator RAPs
05-E
May 2003
2-216
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-217
05-E
05-E
May 2003
2-218
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides in the Document Input Tray move freely
and contact the edge of the documents.
Ensure the documents in the Document Input Tray are the same size front to rear.
Remove, then reinstall the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge, to verify the DADF Paper
Feed Roll Cartridge is seated correctly. Ensure the DADF Paper Feed Roll Drive Coupling
is fully engaged.
Check the original documents. If the originals have a dog-eared corner, a torn corner, or
dark image on the lead edge or trail edge, instruct the customer to use the document
glass.
A
In DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests, select [DADF Registration Gate Solenoid], then [Start Test].
Enter [IIT tab , DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests].
The results of the DADF Registration Gate Solenoid Test indicate the DADF Registration
Gate passed.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Registration Deskew Assembly PL 2.1B Item 6.
Do the following:
Observe the sheets as they are feeding from the Document Input Tray.
The documents are skewing as they are feeding from the Document Input Tray.
Y
N
Remove the DADF Main Cover.
Open and close the DADF Top Cover and observe each Registration Roll Idler. Each
Registration Roll Idler moves freely and contacts the Registration Roll when the
DADF Top Cover is closed.
Y
N
Check the spring that rests against the shaft of the Registration Roll Idler. Ensure
that it is not damaged or missing.
Replace the DADF Registration Deskew Assembly PL 2.1B Item 6 if necessary.
Go to ADJ 05-1 DADF Skew Adjustment.
The DADF Skew can be resolved by performing the adjustment.
Y
N
Replace the DADF Assembly PL 2.1A Item 1 and reset the Life Counter for the
DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
The DADF Inverter Gate for correct operation. Replace the DADF Registration
Deskew Assembly PL 2.1B Item 6 if required.
The plastic baffle on the Feeder Assembly that guides the inverted documents to the
Takeaway Roll is not damaged or deformed. Replace the DADF Feeder Assembly
PL 2.2 Item 2 if required.
If the DADF Feeder Assembly is replaced, reset the Life Counter for the DADF
Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Perform the following checks if not previously done:
Inspect the drive rolls and all black-colored surfaces for contamination.
Inspect the drive rolls and all black-colored surfaces for contamination.
The Document Feeder drive components are free from contamination.
Y
N
Go to REP 05-1, DADF Cleaning Procedure.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-219
05-F
The documents are rolling over as they enter the Document Output Tray or the documents are
stacking poorly in the Document Output Tray.
The message on the User Interface indicates there is a document jam in the Document Feeder
when no document is present.
Initial Actions
The problem is the documents are rolling over as they enter the Document Output Tray
Y
N
Check the Document Restack Guide, attached to the bottom of the Document Input
Tray. The Document Restack Guide is attached correctly to the Document Input
Tray.
Y
N
Ensure the Document Restack Guide is attached correctly.
Clean the Document Glass that is located on the right side of the IOT (the portion of the
document glass under the Document Feeder).
Ensure the Input Tray Exit Sensor, the DADF Registration Gate Sensor, and the CVT
Start of Scan Sensor, are free of paper dust.
Ensure the DADF Exit/Invert Sensor, and the reflectance area of the sensor, are free of
paper dust.
Check the Document Restack Guide for damage. The Document Restack Guide is
attached to the Document Input Tray, is free from damage, and rests on top of the
documents as they are stacked in the Document Output Tray.
Y
N
Replace the Document Restack Guide PL 2.1A Item 9.
Measure the resistance between machine frame and the metal bar on the DADF Static
Eliminator.
There is continuity between the DADF Static Eliminator and the machine frame.
Y
N
Ensure the braid connector for the DADF Static Eliminator is connected.
The DADF Static Eliminator is worn or damaged.
Y
N
Check the surface of the Document Output Tray for damage or contamination.
If the Document Output Tray is damaged, replace the Document Glass Cover/Document Output Tray PL 2.1A Item 7.
Check the condition of the customers documents. Ensure the customer is not using documents
with excessive curl.
Open then close the DADF Top Cover. The state of the DADF Top Cover Sensor
changes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 5. Check the wires for a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
A
Status Indicator RAPs
05-G, 05-H
May 2003
2-220
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Open then close the DADF Top Cover. The state of the DADF Top Cover Sensor
changes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 5. Check the wires for a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-221
05-H
05-H
May 2003
2-222
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-223
05-H
NOTE: When checking for a short circuit in the DADF Interlock Switch circuit, ensure
the DADF is open.
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit and a short circuit.
There is an open circuit or a short circuit in the DADF Interlock Switch circuit.
Y
N
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
05-H, 05-J
May 2003
2-224
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-225
05-J, 05-K
Remove the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Reinstall the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Ensure the DADF Paper Feed Roll Drive Coupling is fully engaged.
Listen for noise as the sheets are feeding from the Document Input Tray.
after reinstalling the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Do the following:
Replace the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 2.2 Item 4 and reset the Life Counter for
the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Listen for noise as the sheets are feeding from the Document Input Tray. The noise occurs
after replacing the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge
Y
N
DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge replaced, return to Service Call Procedures.
In Component Control, select [Document Handler/Scanner], [DADF Exit Clutch], [Output On],
[CVT Motor], then select [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the CVT Motor energizes. The noise occurs when the DADF Exit
Clutch and the CVT Motor are energized.
Y
N
In Component Control, select [Document Handler/Scanner], [All Outputs Off], [DADF
Feed Motor], then select [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the DADF Feed Motor energizes. The noise occurs when the
DADF Feed Motor energizes.
Y
N
In Component Control, select [Document Handler/Scanner], [Feed Clutch], then
[Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Feed Clutch energizes. The noise occurs when the
Feed Clutch energizes.
Y
N
In Component Control, select [Document Handler/Scanner], [Feed Clutch],
[Output Off], [Inverter Clutch], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Inverter Clutch energizes. The noise occurs when
the Inverter Clutch energizes.
Y
N
In Component Control, select [Document Handler/Scanner], [All Outputs
Off], [DADF Registration Gate Solenoid], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier
Sys tab , Component Control].
A
05-K, 05-L
May 2003
2-226
D
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
D
Listen for noise when the DADF Registration Gate Solenoid energizes.
The noise occurs when the DADF Registration Gate Solenoid energizes.
Y
N
In Component Control, select [Document Handler/Scanner], [All Outputs Off], [Nudger Solenoid], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab
, Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Nudger Solenoid energizes. The noise
occurs when the Nudger Solenoid energizes.
Y
N
The Document Feeder noise is intermittent. Return to Service
Call Procedures.
Replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 Item 2 and reset the Life
Counter for the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Replace the DADF Registration Deskew Assembly PL 2.1B Item 6.
Check the DADF Exit Shaft PL 2.2 Item 9.
Use this procedure to diagnose the intermittent document jams listed below:
Initial Actions
If the customer has a Document Centre 240/255/265, and they are having problems when
feeding curled originals, install the Document Input Tray Side Guides Kit PL 2.1A.
For intermittent 05-104, 05-106, and 05-107 jams, check the DADF Exit Clutch. If the part number on the clutch body is 121E10382 or lower, replace DADF Exit Clutch, PL 2.2 Item 13. If the
part number is 121E10383 or higher, continue with the RAP.
The DADF Top Cover Assembly PL 2.1B Item 2 including the DADF Take Away Roll
Idler
The Left CVT Baffle PL 2.4 Item 5 including the DADF Exit Roll Idler.
The Right CVT Baffle PL 2.4 Item 6 including the Right CVT Roll Idler.
The DADF Exit Shaft PL 2.2 Item 9 including the DADF Exit Clutch PL 2.2 Item 13.
Do the following:
Load 10 fresh sheets of 8.5 X 11 in (A4), paper in the Document Input Tray in portrait orientation (LEF).
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper and the paper is
inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input Tray.
In DADF Document Timing Test, select [Start]. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Document Timing
Test].
Check the test results for Lead Edge At Q1 (Input Tray Exit Sensor), Lead Edge At Q2 (DADF
Registration Gate Sensor), Lead Edge At Q3 (CVT Start of Scan Sensor), and Lead Edge At
Q4 (DADF Exit/Invert Sensor). One or more of the DADF document path sensors have
feed times that are all between High and Jam Time.
Y
N
Check the test results for Time Over Q4 (DADF Exit/Invert Sensor). The test results for
Time Over Q4 (DADF Exit/Invert Sensor) indicate all the feed times are between
High and Jam Time.
Y
N
Check one of the following:
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: If the customer also complains of chattering noise in this area, replace the DADF Exit
Clutch PL 2.2 Item 13.
May 2003
2-227
For intermittent 05-100 jams, go to Flag 2 in Figure 1. Check the circuit of the
Input Tray Exit Sensor, for an intermittent condition.
For intermittent 05-102 jams, go to Flag 1 in Figure 2. Check the circuit of the
DADF Registration Gate Sensor, for an intermittent condition.
For intermittent 05-106 jams, go to Flag 1 in Figure 4. Check the circuit of the
DADF Exit/Invert Sensor, for an intermittent condition.
B
Status Indicator RAPs
05-L, 05-M
B
Do the following:
Ensure each 3-Arm Sheet Separator is in place and moves freely without binding.
Replace the Left CVT Baffle PL 2.4 Item 5 if necessary.
In DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests, select [Feed Clutch and Nudger Solenoid], then [Start
Test]. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests]. If the Feed Clutch Nudger Solenoid
test fails, replace the DADF Feeder Assembly PL 2.2 Item 2
Check the test results for Lead Edge At Q1 (Input Tray Exit Sensor). The test results for
Lead Edge At Q1 (Input Tray Exit Sensor) indicate all the feed times are between High
and Jam Time
Y
N
Check the test results for Lead Edge At Q2 (DADF Registration Gate Sensor). The test
results for Lead Edge At Q2 (DADF Registration Gate Sensor) indicate all the feed
times are between High and Jam Time
Y
N
Check the test results for Lead Edge At Q3 (CVT Start of Scan Sensor). The test
results for Lead Edge At Q3 (CVT Start of Scan Sensor) indicate all the feed
times are between High and Jam Time
Y
N
Do the following
Ensure the CVT Skis, are in place and move freely without binding.
Ensure the CVT Drive on Glass Roll moves freely up and down without
binding.
Replace the CVT Drive On Glass Kit PL 2.4 Item 7, if necessary.
Ensure the Left CVT Baffle is closing correctly. Ensure the Idler Rolls
move freely and the tension springs are in place. Replace the Left CVT
Baffle PL 2.4 Item 5 if necessary.
Do the following
Ensure the Right CVT Baffle is closing correctly and the foam pads are present
and are not damaged.
Ensure the Right CVT Roll Idler moves freely and the tension spring is in place.
Replace the Right CVT Baffle PL 2.4 Item 6 if required.
Do the following
Ensure the DADF Top Cover Assembly PL 2.1B Item 2 is closing correctly.
Check the DADF Take Away Roll and the DADF Take Away Roll Idler for contamination.
In DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests, select [DADF Registration Gate Solenoid], then
[Start Test]. Enter [IIT tab , DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests]. If the DADF Registration
Gate Solenoid test fails, replace the DADF Registration Deskew Assembly PL 2.1B
Item 6
Do the following:
Check the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 2.2 Item 4, for wear or contamination.
If the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge is replaced, reset the Life Counter for the DADF
Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
05-M
May 2003
2-228
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-229
05-M
Procedure
Check for the presence of the following CVT Motor Grounding Kit components:
All the CVT Motor Ground Kit components are present and installed correctly.
Y
N
Do the following:
Ensure all components of the CVT Motor Grounding Kit (TAG 084) are installed correctly.
Mark off IOT Tag 084 on the IOT Change Tag Matrix.
Make 50 copies of the hard copy test pattern 82E12191 (11") or 82E12320 (A4).
Do the following:
Ensure all components of the CVT Motor Grounding Kit (TAG 084) are installed correctly.
Mark off IOT Tag 084 on the IOT Change Tag Matrix.
Make 75 copies of the hard copy test pattern 82E12191 (11") or 82E12320 (A4).
In Faults, select [Last 40 Faults]. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults]. A 05-370 fault
occurred.
Y
N
Check the DADF magnification (refer to Magnification [DADF Mode]) The magnification is correct.
Y
N
Go to IQ-15.
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Go to the 05-370/380 CVT Motor Fault RAP
Continuity is measured between the CVT Motor frame and the machine frame.
Y
N
Remove the CVT Motor and reform the small ground tab on the Ground Bracket to ensure
contact with the CVT Motor frame.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
05-M, 05-N
May 2003
2-230
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Mark off IOT Tag 084 on the IOT Change Tag Matrix. Go to the appropriate RAP (05-370/380
or IQ-15).
Ground Bracket
CVT Motor
Retainer
Shield
(black side)
DADF PWB
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-231
05-N
05-N
May 2003
2-232
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 06-310, indicates that the ROS Polygon Motor did not start after 3 attempts.
Fault Code, 06-311, indicates that the ROS Polygon Motor did not reach minimum operating speed after 3 attempts.
Fault Code, 06-312, indicates that the ROS Polygon Motor did not reach the control
speed after 3 attempts.
Fault Code, 06-313, indicates that the ROS Polygon Motor fell below the operating speed.
Fault Code, 06-314, indicates that the ROS Polygon Motor does not reach minimum operating speed in the allotted times after 3 attempts.
Fault Code, 06-315, indicates that the Polygon Motor cannot reach or maintain simmer
speed.
N
Replace the ROS Assembly PL 5.2 Item 3.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-233
06-310/311/312/313/314/315
06-310/311/312/313/314/315
May 2003
2-234
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part #
ROS Serial #
Exposure Calibration
(NVM 793)
Figure 2 ROS Bar Code Label
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-235
06-310/311/312/313/314/315
36V
+36V
24V
+24V
-12V
24 PSV
+24 VES
INT-OUT
Interlock Outp
Interlock Inpu
RMT-OFF
ES#1
ES#2
INT-IN
+5 VES
+5V
5.15V
+12V
+12V
-12V
+12 VES
5.15 PSV
Product
470 DC/ST
Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRef Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRefGb
460 DC/ST
Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRef Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRefGb
255/265 DC/ST
N/A
240 DC/ST
N/A
06-310/311/312/313/314/315
May 2003
2-236
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 06-320, indicates that Laser A does not come on.
Fault Code, 06-330, indicates that Laser B does not come on.
N
Go to Flag 1. Check for an open circuit. If necessary, replace the ROS Power Harness PL
1.5 Item 8.
Initial Actions
Ensure that the ROS External Cooling Fan connector is seated securely.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-237
06-320/330
06-320/330
May 2003
2-238
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part #
ROS Serial #
Exposure Calibration
(NVM 793)
Figure 2 ROS Bar Code Label
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-239
06-320/330
36V
+36V
24V
+24V
-12V
24 PSV
+24 VES
INT-OUT
Interlock Outp
Interlock Inpu
RMT-OFF
ES#1
ES#2
INT-IN
+5 VES
+5V
5.15V
+12V
+12V
-12V
+12 VES
5.15 PSV
06-320/330
May 2003
2-240
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-241
06-320/330
Fault Code, 06-340, indicates that no SOS pulses were seen at Start Print.
Fault Code, 06-341, indicates that the SOS pulses were not seen within the detection window
at Start Print.
09-380
09-382
09-384
09-386
06-340, 06-341
May 2003
2-242
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 06-350, indicates that the Laser Bias did not converge at Start Print.
Fault Code, 06-360, indicates that the Laser Level did not converge.
Fault Code, 06-370, indicates that the Laser A or B Level fell out of range during run.
This will
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-243
06-350/360/370
Part #
ROS Serial #
Exposure Calibration
(NVM 793)
Figure 1 ROS Bar Code Label
06-350/360/370
May 2003
2-244
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
ROS
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-245
06-350/360/370
Initial Actions
Ensure that the Xerographic Module is correctly and fully inserted in the machine.
06-380
May 2003
2-246
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-247
06-380
ROS
06-380
May 2003
2-248
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
Incorrect IOT Software installed. Go to Table 1, ROS Compatibility Chart, and check that
the Software installed is compatible with the ROS, and that the IOT NVM Values are correct.
Incorrect ROS (hardware) installed. Speed and Type does not match IOT configuration. Go to
Table 1, ROS Compatibility Chart and determine which ROS is compatible with the IOT configuration. Check ROS part number, PL 5.2, and replace with correct Type and Speed. Refer to
Figure 1 ROS Bar Code Label to determine which ROS you have in the machine.
Product
Procedure
The ROS was replaced.
Y
N
The IOT software was upgraded.
Y
N
The IOT configuration was changed.
Y
N
Machine NVMs corrupted. Initialize IOT NVMs. Go to Table 1, and ensure that
the NVM values for the ROS are set correctly.
DC470
ROS
Type
NVM Name
FA /
new
GB /
old
NVM
Loc
NVM Values
Min
Nom
Max
HallPeriodRef
FA
1397
9194
9243
9284
SimmerSpeed
FA
1291
9244
12000
12014
HallPeriodRef
GB
729
8924
8964
8999
SimmerSpeed
GB
1398
8970
11650
11670
Software
Release
L00.19.02
and later
any
Part #
ROS Serial #
Exposure Calibration
(NVM 793)
Figure 1 ROS Bar Code Label
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-249
06-385
06-385
May 2003
2-250
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The Stack Height Sensor senses the Paper Tray is not in the feed position after the Tray Elevator Motor has been on for 7 seconds.
Initial Actions
Check that the Stack Height Sensor actuator flag on the rear of the paper tray is seated correctly and move freely without binding. If the actuator is damaged or missing, replace the
Paper Tray PL 4.1A Item 1.
If the problem continues, use this RAP.
Remove as many Paper Trays as necessary to gain access to the paper size switches on the
Paper Feed Drives Plate. In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Trays], then select each
paper size sensing switch for each tray and observe the PWS while actuating and deactuating
each switch. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The signal level changes state as each switch is actuated and deactuated.
Y
N
Replace the Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4.
Check the condition and position of the switch actuators at the rear of the Paper Tray to ensure
they actuate the appropriate paper size switches. If the actuators are damaged, bent, or missing, replace the Paper Tray PL 4.1A Item 1.
Remove the Paper Tray which experiences the fault. Check the drive couplings between
the Paper Feed Drive Plate and the Paper Tray.
A coupling is damaged.
Y
N
Manually rotate the coupling on the Paper Tray.
The tray raises when the coupling is turned.
Y
N
Replace the Paper Tray PL 4.1A Item 1.
Remove another Paper Tray which is functioning correctly and install that tray in the
place of the malfunctioning tray.
The substitute tray works correctly in place of the malfunctioning tray.
Y
N
Do the following:
The display indicates the state of the Stack Height Sensor changed
Y
N
Go to Flag 1 for Tray 1, Flag 3. for Tray 2, Flag 5 for Tray 4, or Flag 7 for
Tray 4. Check the circuit of the Tray x Stack Height Sensor.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
A
B
V0.042
May 2003
2-251
07-202.01/202.02/202.03/202.04
07-202.01/202.02/202.03/202.04
May 2003
2-252
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-253
07-202.01/202.02/202.03/202.04
The Stack Height Sensor senses Tray 6 is not in the feed position after the HCF Tray Elevator
Motor has been on for 15 seconds.
Use this RAP to identify paper tray problems and the action to take if the problem occurs.
Procedure
Initial Actions
Check the installation and coupling of the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge.
Verify the paper guides (2), located on each side panel inside in the HCF paper loading
area, are set to the correct size (8 1/2" x 11" or A4)
The following are Paper Tray. problems an explanation of each problem, and the action to take
if the problem occurs. If a Paper Tray (07-XXX) fault code is displayed, go to the appropriate
RAP for the fault code.
Table 1 Paper Tray Problems
Problem
Action
Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) and Tray 6 (HCF) are not available for selection. No fault code is displayed.
The paper size displayed on the User Interface for Go to the 07-B RAP.
one or more paper trays does not match the paper
size loaded in the paper tray.
An IOT Paper Tray Will Not Fully Close.
In Component Control, select [HCF Elevator Motor] and [HCF Elevator Direction] to run the
HCF Elevator down for approximately 10 seconds, then stop the motor. Enter [Copier Sys tab ,
Component Control].
The Stack Height Switch input is now high.
Y
N
Replace the HCF Feeder PL 4.2A Item 3.
If the problem continues, replace the HCF PWB PL 4.2A Item 10.
Replace the HCF Elevator Motor PL 4.2B Item 9.
If the problem continues, replace the HCF PWB PL 4.2A Item 10.
07-202.06, 07-700
May 2003
2-254
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Drive the tray up and down several times to ensure the problem is corrected.
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Initial Actions
Ensure the HCF has Tags TAG H002 and TAG H005 installed (kit number 605K09161).
Procedure
Check that the IOT Front Door is fully closed
The IOT Front Door is fully closed and Tray 6 will still not go down.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Check the Tray 6 Door Interlock Switch for binding.
The Tray 6 Door Interlock Switch actuator moves freely.
Y
N
Replace the HCF Door Interlock Switch PL 4.2A Item 4.
Check Tray 6 for obstructions or binding which would prevent the tray from going down. Be
sure to remove the rear HCF Cover. (REP 07-7) and check if the elevator harness is caught on
the Top Cover Interlock mechanism.
An obstruction or binding was found.
Y
N
Ensure the jumper on the HCF PWB is installed correctly. Refer to REP 07-9.
The jumper is installed correctly.
Y
N
Install the jumper correctly.
In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and
[Type 2] tests. Look for codes 03-831 through 03-837. Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
The tests pass.
Y
N
Go to the RAP for the fault code. (03-831 RAP) (03-832 RAP) (03-833 RAP) (03-834
RAP) (03-835 RAP) (03-836 RAP) (03-837 RAP)
Observe the UI while opening and closing the paper stack cover on the HCF.
The message, Close Tray 6 cover to raise the tray to feed position, is displayed
when the cover is open, and is not displayed when the cover is closed.
Y
N
Replace the HCF Door Interlock Switch PL 4.2A Item 4.
If the problem continues, replace the HCF PWB PL 4.2B Item 10.
Replace the HCF Elevator Motor PL 4.2B Item 9.
If the problem continues, replace the HCF PWB PL 4.2B Item 10.
The obstruction or binding can be removed.
Y
N
Replace the HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly PL 4.2A Item 1.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-255
07-A
A
The paper size sensing problem is resolved. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Pull out the paper tray which is sensing the incorrect paper size.
Ensure the side guides are touching the edge of the paper.
. The displayed paper size matches the actual paper size loaded in the paper tray.
Y
N
Remove another Paper Tray which is sensing paper size correctly and install that
tray in the place of the malfunctioning tray.
The substitute tray senses the paper size correctly in place of the malfunctioning tray.
Y
N
Replace the 4 Input IIOC PWB PL 1.6 for the tray position which does not
sense the paper size correctly.
If the problem continues, replace the Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4
for the tray position which does not sense the paper size correctly.
If the problem occurs only on small size papers in Trays 1-4, the machine may need
TAG 063. If necessary, install TAG 063 PL 4.1C Item 2.
If the retrofit is installed, and the problem continues, replace the malfunctioning
Paper Tray PL 4.1A Item 1.
The paper size sensing problem resolved. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Select [More] in the Paper Supply column on the UI.
The "Tray Type" for Tray 5 is "Fully Adjustable"
Y
N
Change the Tray Type for Tray 5 in Tools:
In the second Tray Settings screen, select [Tray 5] and [Change Description].
Do the following:
Place the paper back in Tray 5 and ensure the side guides are touching the edge of the
paper.
The displayed paper size matches the actual paper size loaded in Tray 5.
Y
N
Replace the Bypass Input Tray PL 4.2B Item 7.
If the problem continues, replace the HCF PWB PL 4.2B Item 10.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
07-B
May 2003
2-256
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Procedure
This fault happens when the drive couplings on the Paper Feed Drives Plate and the Paper
Tray do not engage when the tray is pushed in. The problem can be corrected with the following action.
Initial Actions
Pull out the Paper Tray enough to observe the drive coupling at the left rear of the tray.
Place a finger under the Nudger Roll of the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge, and rotate the
Nudger Roll in order to turn the drive coupling. (Any movement of more than a few
degrees of rotation Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4 is enough to solve the problem.)
Ensure the Paper Feed Roll cartridge is installed correctly. Customers can unlatch the cartridge during jam clearance actions.
Procedure
Check the User Interface .
The message Tray 6 contains too much paper is displayed when Tray 6 is in the down
position and the tray is not over-filled.
Y
N
The HCF Elevator Motor may not be running at the correct speed or torque. Replace the
HCF Elevator Motor PL 4.2B Item 9.
Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests], select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the
[Type 1] and [Type 2] tests.
The test fails with an 03-833 fault.
Y
N
Go to Flag 4. Check the circuit of the HCF Solenoid for an intermittent condition.
Repair the wiring or replace the defective component:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-257
07-C, 07-D
07-D
May 2003
2-258
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Procedure
Test the IOT Paper Heater in the following manner.
Remove all paper trays from the IOT and locate the heater openings at the right side of
the paper tray area.
Breathe (exhale) closely into the bottom of the heater in order to activate the humidity
sensor. The heater fan should switch on.
Continue to breathe (exhale) into the bottom of the heater as necessary to keep the fan
running for at least one minute.
After approximately one minute of continuous operation, heated air comes out of the
heater vent nearest the Tray 4 location.
Y
N
Replace the IOT Paper Heater Kit PL 1.2B Item 9.
The heater is functioning normally. Reinstall the paper trays.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-259
07-E
07-E
May 2003
2-260
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Procedure
Check the operation of the HCF Paper Heater. Switch the machine power off, then wait five
minutes for the HCF Paper Heater to warm up.
After five minutes, the HCF Paper Heater is warm.
Y
N
Check the voltage to the HCF Paper Heater.
Disconnect the HCF Paper Heater harness from the connector at the side of the IOT
(under the HCF Assembly).
Measure the AC voltage at the IOT connector with the machine power still switched
off.
The voltage is correct for the operating company (115VAC in USCO and XCL;.
220VAC in XE;. or 100VAC in FX)
Y
N
Check the voltage at the AC Distribution Panel.
Measure the AC voltage at P5 with the machine power still switched off.
The voltage is correct for the operating company (115VAC in NASG and XCL;.
220VAC in XE;. or 100VAC in FX)
Y
N
Replace the HCF Heater Relay in the AC Distribution Panel PL 1.2B Item 1.
Check the wiring and the fuse from connector J110 to connector P5.
If necessary, replace the fuse PL 1.2B Item 8.
Replace the HCF Paper Heater PL 4.2A Item 9.
The heater is functioning normally.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-261
07-F
07-F
May 2003
2-262
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Check for and remove any obstructions in the paper path for the tray not feeding correctly.
Check the installation of the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge in the tray not feeding correctly.
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in the tray not feeding correctly, making sure the
paper is loaded correctly and the side guides are set correctly. Ensure there are no
obstructions in the paper path between the paper tray and the Vertical Transport.
If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in the tray not feeding correctly, making sure the paper is loaded correctly and the Tray Paper Guides are set correctly.
If the customer is experiencing 08-101 jams while feeding heavyweight (greater than 32
lb. (120 gsm)) paper from Trays 1-4, have them open the tray then close the tray. When
the Tray x Information dialog box is displayed on the UI, select [Change Description].
Ensure the 'Stock Type' is set to [Heavyweight]. Select [Save], then select [Confirm].
Return the substitute tray to its original position. Replace the Paper Feed Drives
Plate PL 4.1A Item 4 for the tray position with the misfeeding problem.
In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and
[Type 2] tests. Look for codes 03-806 or 03-807 (Tray 1 and Tray 2) or codes 03-826 or
03-827 (Tray 3 and Tray 4). Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
The tests pass.
Y
N
Replace the Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4 for the misfeeding tray.
Check for, and remove obstructions in the paper path between the Vertical Transport
and the misfeeding tray.
Clean and reseat the Wait Station Sensor for the jamming tray. Ensure the sensor
wires do not obstruct the paper path.
If the customer has not already done this, install a new Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL
4.1A Item 3 in the misfeeding tray. Ensure the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge is installed
correctly. Reset the Life Counter for the new cartridge (GP6).
Load a fresh supply of the same kind of paper that was misfeeding and make
copies/prints from that tray.
B
Check the Paper Specifications table in General Procedures to determine if the customer's paper meets the specifications for use in this machine.
The customer's paper meets the specifications in the table.
Y
N
Advise the customer the paper does not conform to the machine specifications.
Replace the Upper Guide Assembly PL 4.1A Item 6 for the misfeeding tray.
If the problem continues, replace the Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4 for the misfeeding tray.
This problem will occur if the wire harness connections to the Wait Station Sensors are
swapped.
The wire colors going to the Tray 1 Wait Station Sensor are Yellow, Green, and Blue.
The wire colors going to the Tray 2 Wait Station Sensor are Brown, Red, and Orange.
The wire colors going to the Tray 3 Wait Station Sensor are Yellow, Green, and Blue.
The wire colors going to the Tray 4 Wait Station Sensor are Brown, Red, and Orange.
Check the wire harness connections for the Wait Station Sensors for the misfeeding trays.
The Wait Station Sensors are connected correctly.
Y
N
Connect the sensors correctly. If the problem continues, replace the Paper Feed Drives
Plate PL 4.1A Item 4 for the misfeeding tray.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Trays], [Tray x Wait Station Sensor] and [Monitor
Input]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Block and unblock the Tray x Wait Station Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display indicates the state of the Tray x Wait Station Sensor changed.
May 2003
2-263
08-101.01/.02/.03/.04
N
Go to the appropriate flag.
Go to Flag 1. Check the circuit of the Tray 1 Wait Station Sensor, PL 4.1A Item 13.
Go to Flag 2. Check the circuit of the Tray 2 Wait Station Sensor, PL 4.1A Item 13.
Go to Flag 3. Check the circuit of the Tray 3 Wait Station Sensor, PL 4.1A Item 13.
Go to Flag 4. Check the circuit of the Tray 4 Wait Station Sensor, PL 4.1A Item 13.
This problem will also occur if the Paper Feed Drives Plate jumper configuration is incorrect.
For a 40 ppm IOT, there should be a jumper on IIOC PWB A7A5 on Paper Drives Plate
(Trays 1 and 2), IIOC PWB A8A5 on Paper Tray Drives Plate (Tray 3 and 4).
Check the jumper configuration for the Paper Feed Drives Plate for the misfeeding trays (Figure 2). The jumper configuration is correct.
Y
N
Go to the 08-E RAP.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Trays], [Tray x Feed Motor] and [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The Tray 1/2 Feed Motor (Tray 3/4 Feed Motor) energizes in component control
Y
N
If the problem is occurring with Tray 1 or Tray 2, go to Flag 5. Check the circuit of the Tray
1/2 Feed Motor.
If the problem is occurring with Tray 3 or Tray 4, go to Flag 6. Check circuit of the Tray 3/
4 Feed Motor.
Repair the wiring or replace the defective component:
Check the Paper Feed Drive Belt on the back of the Paper Feed Drives Plate. Ensure the
Paper Feed Drive Belt is installed correctly. Replace the Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item
4 for the misfeeding tray if necessary.
08-101.01/.02/.03/.04
May 2003
2-264
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-265
08-101.01/.02/.03/.04
Initial Actions
Ensure this
jumper is in
place for a 40
ppm machine,
but not in place
for a 55ppm or
65 ppm
machine.)
Check for and remove any obstructions in the Tray 5 paper path.
Check the installation of the Tray 5 Paper Feed Roll Cartridge and ensure the coupling is
engaged and that the pin is engaged in the fork.
Ensure the paper size loaded in the tray matches the paper size displayed on the User
Interface.
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in Tray 5, making sure the paper is loaded correctly (arrow down/seam side down), the Paper Guides are set correctly, and the stack is
below the 'Max Fill' line.
If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in Tray 5, making sure the
paper is loaded correctly, the Paper Guides are set correctly, and the stack is below the
'Max Fill' line.
Check for, and remove obstructions in the Bypass Tray paper path.
Clean and reseat the Bypass Tray Wait Sensor in the Bypass Tray Feeder PL 4.2B
Item 4.
If the customer has not already done this, install a new Paper Feed Roll Cartridge
(PL 4.2B Item 6) in the misfeeding tray. Ensure the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge is
installed correctly and the coupling is engaged and that the pin is engaged in the
fork. Reset the Life Counter for the new cartridge (GP6).
Load a fresh supply of the same kind of paper that was misfeeding. Ensure the
paper size displayed on the Control Panel matches the size paper loaded in the
Bypass Tray.
Check the Paper Specifications table in General Procedures to determine if the customer's paper meets the specifications for use in this machine.
The customer's paper meets the specifications in the table.
Y
N
Advise the customer the paper does not conform to the machine specifications.
The machine also has an HCF.
Y
N
Replace the Bypass Tray Assembly PL 4.3 Item 1.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
08-101.01/.02/.03/.04, 08-101.05
May 2003
2-266
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
The machine also misfeeds from the HCF (08-101.06 faults).
Y
N
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Trays]. Select [Bypass Tray Wait Sensor]
and [Start Monitor]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Block and unblock the Bypass Tray Wait Sensor several times. The display indicates the state of the Bypass Tray Wait Sensor changes when the sensor is
blocked and unblocked.
Y
N
Replace the following parts, one at a time, until the problem is solved.
Replace the following parts, one at a time, until the problem is solved.
In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and
[Type 2] tests. Look for codes 03-832 or 03-833 or 03-834. Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC
Controller Tests].
The tests pass.
Y
N
Go to the RAP for the fault code (03-832 RAP) (03-833 RAP) (03-834 RAP).
Replace the HCF/Bypass Tray Feed Motor PL 4.2B Item 8.
If the problem continues, replace the HCF PWB PL 4.2B Item 10.
Go to the 08-110 RAP.
HCF
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-267
08-101.05
B
Y
The lead edge of a sheet fed from Tray 6 arrived late at the HCF Wait Sensor.
Initial Actions
Check for and remove any obstructions in the Tray 5/6 paper path.
Check the installation of the Tray 6 Paper Feed Roll Cartridge and ensure the coupling is
engaged, and the pin is engaged in the fork.
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in Tray 6, making sure the paper is loaded correctly, the Paper Guides are set correctly, and the stack is below the 'Max Fill' line.
If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in Tray 6, making sure the
paper is loaded correctly (arrow down/seam side down), the Paper Guides are set correctly, and the stack is below the 'Max Fill' line.
(240/255/265) Ensure the HCF has been retrofitted with TAG H007.
Clean and reseat the HCF Wait Sensor in the Bypass Tray Feeder PL 4.2B Item 4.
If the customer has not already done this, install a new Paper Feed Roll Cartridge
(PL 4.2B Item 6) in Tray 6. Ensure the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge is installed correctly, the coupling is engaged, and the cartridge pin is engaged in the fork. Reset
the Life Counter for the new cartridge (GP6).
Load a fresh supply of the same kind of paper that was misfeeding.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Trays]. Select the [HCF Wait Sensor] and [Start
Monitor]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Block and unblock the HCF Wait Sensor several times. The display indicates the state
of the HCF Wait Sensor changes when the sensor is blocked and unblocked.
Y
N
Replace the Bypass Tray Feeder PL 4.2B Item 4. (This feeder contains the HCF
Wait Station Sensor).
If the problem continues, replace the HCF PWB PL 4.2B Item 10. If the problem continues, replace the HCF/Bypass Tray Feed Motor PL 4.2B Item 8.
Check the Last 40 Faults for 08-110.06 faults and/or 07-202.06 faults. Enter [Faults/Counters
tab , Faults].
08-110.06 faults and/or 07-202.06 faults are logged.
Y
N
Perform the following actions:
N
Replace the following parts, one at a time, until the problem is solved.
A
B
Status Indicator RAPs
08-101.06
May 2003
2-268
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The fault code suffix identifies the tray from which the sheet was fed:
.01 = Tray 1
.02 = Tray 2
.03 = Tray 3
.04 = Tray 4
Initial Actions
Check for and remove any obstructions in the paper path for the tray not feeding correctly.
Ensure there are no obstructions in the paper path between the paper tray and the Vertical Transport.
Check the physical installation of the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge in the tray not feeding
correctly and ensure the coupling is engaged.
If this is a new machine install, or the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge was recently replaced,
ensure the Life Counter is reset to 0 in the tray not feeding correctly (GP6).
If this problem occurs only when feeding pre-drilled papers, a hole in the paper may be
aligned with a paper path sensor. Try rotating the paper in the tray, or feeding the paper
from a different tray.
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in the tray not feeding correctly, making sure the
paper is loaded correctly and the Paper Guides are set correctly.
If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in the tray not feeding correctly, making sure the paper is loaded correctly and the Paper Guides are set correctly.
HCF
NOTE: If more than one tray is misfeeding, diagnose only one tray at a time.
Perform the following actions:
Figure 1 08-101.06 RAP Component Locations
Check for, and remove obstructions in the paper path between the Vertical Transport
and the misfeeding tray.
Clean and reseat the Wait Station Sensor for the jamming tray. Ensure the sensor
wires do not obstruct the paper path.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-269
08-101.06, 08-105.01/.02/.03/.04
If the customer has not already done this, install a new Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL
4.1A Item 3 in the misfeeding tray. Ensure the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge is installed
correctly. Reset the Life Counter for the new cartridge (GP6).
Load a fresh supply of the same kind of paper that was misfeeding and make
copies/prints from that tray.
Replace the Upper Guide Assembly PL 4.1A Item 6 for the misfeeding tray.
If the problem continues, replace the Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4 for the misfeeding tray.
N
Replace the Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4 for the misfeeding tray.
This problem will also occur if the Paper Feed Drives Plate jumper configuration is incorrect.
For a 40 ppm IOT, there should be a jumper on IIOC PWB A7A5 on Paper Drives Plate
(Trays 1 and 2), IIOC PWB A8A5 on Paper Tray Drives Plate (Tray 3 and 4).
Check the Paper Specifications table in General Procedures to determine if the customer's paper meets the specifications for use in this machine.
The customer's paper meets the specifications in the table.
Y
N
Advise the customer the paper does not conform to the machine specifications.
Check the [Last 40 Faults] for occurrences of 08-101.0X faults. Enter [Faults/Counters tab ,
Faults].
08-101.0X faults are logged.
Y
N
Check the jammed sheets for damage such as nicks, dings, dog-ears, etc. The sheets
show some form of damage.
Y
N
Observe the sheets as they feed out of the Paper Tray. The sheets are skewed.
Y
N
In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1]
and [Type 2] tests. Look for codes 03-806 or 03-807 (Tray 1 and Tray 2) or
codes 03-826 or 03-827 (Tray 3 and Tray 4). Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
The tests pass.
Y
N
Go to the RAP for the fault code. (03-806 RAP) (03-807 RAP) (03-826
RAP) (03-827 RAP).
Check the jumper configuration for the Paper Feed Drives Plate for the misfeeding trays (Figure 1). The jumper configuration is correct.
Y
N
Go to the 08-E RAP.
Return the substitute tray to its original position. Replace the Upper Guide Assembly
PL 4.1A Item 6 for the misfeeding tray.
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Remove the tray with the jamming problem and set aside. Remove another tray
which feeds correctly and install that tray in the place of the misfeeding tray.
Make copies/prints from that tray.
08-105.0X faults occur from the substitute tray.
Y
N
Return the substitute tray to its original position.
Replace the Paper Tray Assembly PL 4.1A Item 1 which exhibits the jamming problem.
Replace the Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4 for the tray position with the
misfeeding problem.
In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and
[Type 2] tests. Look for codes 03-806 or 03-807 (Tray 1 and Tray 2) or codes 03-826 or
03-827 (Tray 3 and Tray 4). Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
The tests pass.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
08-105.01/.02/.03/.04
May 2003
2-270
D
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
D
Go to the 08-C Skewed Image RAP.
Ensure this
jumper is in
place for a 40
ppm machine,
but not in place
for a 55 ppm or
65 ppm
machine.)
Initial Actions
Check for and remove any obstructions in the Tray 5 paper path.
Check the physical installation of the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge (Bypass Tray) and
ensure the coupling is engaged and the pin is engaged in the fork.
Ensure the paper size loaded in the tray matches the paper size displayed on the User
Interface. This fault will always occur if the physical paper size is longer than what
is displayed on the User Interface.
If running plain paper, turn over and reload the stack of paper in Tray 5, making sure the
paper is loaded correctly, the Paper Guides are set correctly, and the stack is below the
'Max Fill' line.
If running hole-punched paper, check for TAG H004. If not installed, order and install TAG
H004. If the problem continues, try running from a different tray.
If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in Tray 5, making sure the
paper is loaded correctly, the Paper Guides are set correctly, and the stack is below the
'Max Fill' line.
Check for, and remove obstructions in the Bypass Tray paper path.
Ensure that the Duplex Transport is mated and latched correctly with the Registration
Transport Assembly (front and rear).
Sheets fed from the HCF/Bypass Tray are pulled into the IOT by a drive roll on the Registration Transport Assembly and an idler roll on the Duplex Transport. Ensure the Duplex
Transport idler roll is seated correctly on the Registration Transport Assembly drive roll
and the spring is attached correctly. (Refer to REP 10-2.)
Clean and reseat the Bypass Tray Wait Sensor in the Bypass Tray Feeder PL 4.2B Item
4.
If the customer has not already done this, install a new Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.2B
Item 6 in the misfeeding tray. Ensure the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge (Bypass Tray) is
installed correctly. Reset the Life Counter for the new cartridge (GP6).
Load a fresh supply of the same kind of stock that was misfeeding. Ensure the paper
size displayed on the Control Panel matches the size paper loaded in the Bypass Tray.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-271
08-105.01/.02/.03/.04, 08-105.05
A
The machine also has an HCF.
Y
N
Clean the Bypass Tray Wait Sensor. If the problem continues, replace the Bypass Tray
Assembly PL 4.3 Item 1.
Paper Feed Roll Cartridge (Bypass Tray)
In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and [Type 2]
tests. Look for codes 03-832 or 03-833 or 03-834. Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
The tests pass.
Y
N
Go to the RAP for the fault code. (03-832 RAP) (03-833 RAP) (03-834 RAP).
Replace the HCF/Bypass Tray Feed Motor PL 4.2B Item 8.
If the problem continues, replace the HCF PWB PL 4.2B Item 10.
If the problem continues, replace the Bypass Tray Feeder PL 4.2B Item 4.
If the problem continues, replace the Registration Transport Assembly PL 4.1A Item 8.
HCF
08-105.05
May 2003
2-272
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Check for and remove any obstructions in the Tray 5/6 paper path.
Check the physical installation of the Tray 6 Paper Feed Roll Cartridge and ensure the
coupling is engaged, and the pin is engaged in the fork.
If this is a new machine install, or the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge (HCF) was recently
replaced, ensure the Tray 6 Life Counter is reset to 0 (GP6).
Ensure the paper size loaded in the tray matches the paper size displayed on the User
Interface.
If this problem occurs only when feeding pre-drilled papers, a hole in the paper may be
aligned with a paper path sensor. Try running plain paper, or feeding the paper from a different tray. If the problem still occurs, the machine may need TAG H004.
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in Tray 6, making sure the paper is loaded correctly, the Paper Guides are set correctly, and the stack is below the 'Max Fill' line.
If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in Tray 6, making sure the
paper is loaded correctly, the Paper Guides are set correctly, and the stack is below the
'Max Fill' line.
The sheet fed from the HCF and was under the HCF Wait Station Sensor when the jam
was declared.
Y
N
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control]. Select [IOT Paper Trays]. Select the [HCF
Wait Sensor] and [Start Monitor].
Block and unblock theHCF Wait Sensor several times. The display indicates the state
of the HCF Wait Sensor changes when the sensor is blocked and unblocked.
Y
N
Replace the following, one-at-a-time, until the problem is corrected:
NOTE: A High Capacity Feeder with product code CTH is not designed to operate with Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470. Ensure an HCF with product code H4D or NF4 is installed.
Sheets fed from the HCF/Bypass Tray are pulled into the IOT by a drive roll on the Registration Transport Assembly and an idler roll on the Duplex Transport. Ensure the Duplex
Transport idler roll is seated correctly on the Registration Transport Assembly drive roll
front and rear. (Refer to REP 10-2.)
Clean and reseat the HCF Wait Station Sensor in the Bypass Tray Feeder PL 4.2B Item 4.
Check the Paper Specifications table in General Procedures to determine if the customer's paper meets the specifications for use in this machine.
If the customer has not already done this, install a new Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.2B
Item 6 in the misfeeding tray. Ensure the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge (HCF) is installed correctly. Reset the Life Counter for the new cartridge (GP6).
Load a fresh supply of the same kind of paper that was misfeeding.
In Diagnostic Navigator, select [NVM tab , NVM Tool] and initiate an NVM download. In
NVM Tool, select service [Mark Service], module [HCFwithCovers]. Check the following
NVM locations:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-273
08-105.06
The fault code suffix identifies the tray from which the sheet was fed:
Initial Actions
Obtain a supply of fresh paper from a new ream (8.5 x 11 in, 20 lb or A4, 80 gsm). Load
the paper in any tray that exhibited the jamming problem.
Check the Paper Specifications table to determine if the paper the customer is using is
listed. Enter Product Specifications . If the paper the customer is using is not listed in the
table, advise the customer the paper does not conform to the machine specifications
If the problem continues after performing the above actions, follow the procedure in the RAP.
Check the following list for specific symptoms. If any symptom exists, perform the indicated
action.
Check the jammed sheets for damage such as nicks, dings, or dog ears. If the sheets are
damaged, go to the OF-2 Print Damage RAP.
Observe the sheets for skew as they feed into the Registration Transport Assembly. If the
sheets are skewed, go to the 08-C Skewed Image RAP.
HCF
This problem will also occur if the Paper Feed Drives Plate jumper configuration is incorrect.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
08-105.06, 08-110
May 2003
2-274
D
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Check the Drives Plate jumper for the trays that exhibit the jamming problem. Refer to REP 07-1 for specific information. The jumper configuration is correct (installed on a 40 ppm IOT; removed on a 55 ppm or 65
ppm IOT).
Y
N
Make the jumper configuration correct. Run copies to ensure the
problem is solved.
E
If the problem continues, replace the HCF PWB PL 4.2B Item 10.
Go to the 08-105.06 RAP.
Clean the Registration Sensor and ensure it is seated correctly in the Registration Transport Assembly.
If the problem continues, replace the Registration Transport Assembly PL 4.1A Item 8.
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4 for the misfeeding
trays.
Clean the Registration Sensor and ensure it is seated correctly in the Registration Transport Assembly.
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and
[Type 2] tests. Look for fault codes 03-811 or 03-812. Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
The tests pass.
Y
N
Go to the RAP for the fault code.
Do the following:
RAP 03-811, IIOC PWB W8A4 Failed The IIOC Controller Test.
In the [Paper] tab, select [IOT Paper Path Setup]. Select [SMH Feed
Time], [8.5 x 11] or [A4], then select [Start Job].
RAP 03-812, IIOC PWB W8A5 Failed The IIOC Controller Test.
Do the following:
In the [Paper] tab, select [IOT Paper Path Setup]. Select [Duplex Feed Time], [8.5 x
11] or [A4], then select [Start Job].
A
B
V0.042
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Registration Sensor] and [Monitor Input].
Block and unblock the Registration Sensor with a sheet of paper.
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The display indicates the state of the Registration Sensor changed.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the circuit of the Registration Sensor for a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component.
In [Faults/Counters tab , Faults], select [Fault Counters]. Filter by Chain [08]. Check
the value for 08-105.06.
There is a count of over 100 for 08-105.06.
Y
N
Replace the HCF/Bypass Tray Feed Motor PL 4.2B Item 8.
E
May 2003
2-275
08-110
08-110
May 2003
2-276
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The lead edge of a sheet arrived late at the Registration Sensor (S2) in the Registration Transport Assembly.
The fault code suffix identifies the tray from which the sheet was fed:
N
If the problem is feeding 2- or 4-hole drilled paper from any IOT paper tray,
install TAG 066 (PL 4.1A Item 18).
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
The jams occur from all IOT Paper Trays.
Y
N
The jams occur from more than one IOT Paper Tray.
Y
N
Replace the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge for the tray with the jamming
problem. Reset the Life Counter for the new cartridge (GP6).
Initial Actions
Ensure the Area 2 Handle is securely snapped in place. If the handle is damaged, replace
the Registration Transport Handle Kit PL 4.1B Item 3.
If this problem occurs only when feeding pre-drilled papers, a hole in the paper may be
aligned with a paper path sensor. Try rotating the paper in the tray, or feeding the paper
from a different tray.
Ensure that the paper that is jamming meets the machine spec. Check the Paper Specifications table to determine if the paper is listed. Enter Product Specifications
If not already done, ensure that a new Paper Feed Roll Cartridge is installed.
If the customer is experiencing 08-115 jams while feeding heavyweight (greater than 32
lb. (120 gsm)) paper from Trays 1-4, have them open the tray then close the tray. When
the Tray x Information dialog box is displayed on the UI, select [Change Description].
Ensure the 'Stock Type' is set to [Heavyweight]. Select [Save], then select [Confirm].
The jams occur from both trays which share the same Paper Feed
Drives Plate: [Tray 1 and Tray 2] OR [Tray 3 and Tray 4].
Y
N
Check the following:
Check the jammed sheets for damage such as nicks, dings, or dog ears. If the sheets are
damaged, go to the OF-2 Print Damage RAP.
Ensure that the Duplex Transport is mated correctly with the Registration Transport
Assembly.
Sheets fed from the HCF/Bypass Tray are pulled into the IOT by a drive roll on the Registration Transport Assembly and an idler roll on the Duplex Transport. Ensure the Duplex
Transport idler roll is seated correctly on the Registration Transport Assembly drive roll.
(Refer to REP 10-2.)
Observe the sheets for skew as they feed into the Registration Transport Assembly. If the
sheets are skewed, go to the 08-C Skewed Image RAP.
Ensure the idler balls press against the Vertical Transport belt
so that paper does not slip between the balls and the belt.
NOTE: The paper feed timing for a pair of trays (Trays 1 and 2, or Trays 3
and 4) will be incorrect if their Paper Feed Motor runs at the wrong speed.
The motor speed is slower for 40 ppm IOT's than for 55 ppm or 65 ppm
IOT's. If a 40 ppm machine is configured for 55 ppm or 65 ppm, the sheets
can be fed fast enough so the lead edge of a second or subsequent sheet
can overtake the trail edge of a previous sheet before arriving at the Wait
Station Sensor. If that occurs, the trail edge of the previous sheet will not
be detected and an 08-105.0X fault will be declared.
This problem will also occur if the Paper Feed Drives Plate jumper configuration is incorrect.
A
B
V0.042
Check the Drives Plate jumper for the trays that exhibit the jamming problem. The jumper configuration is correct (Figure 2).
Y
N
Go to the 08-E RAP.
A
May 2003
2-277
E
Status Indicator RAPs
08-115
E
Replace the Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4 for the misfeeding
trays.
The HCF/Duplex Baffle is seated correctly on the Duplex Transport and is free
from damage.
Y
N
Replace the HCF/Duplex Baffle PL 6.2B Item 8 if necessary.
Ensure the Vertical Transport receives drive from the Developer Drive
Motor, and there is no binding or slipping of the Vertical Transport belt.
Ensure the idler balls press against the Vertical Transport belt so that
paper does not slip between the balls and the belt.
If the machine has an HCF, ensure the following HCF Tags are installed:
TAG H002 (Mylar harness shield added to HCF/Bypass Tray Feed Motor)
Ensure the Duplex Transport is seated correctly on the Registration Transport. Run several duplex copies.
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
If the problem is feeding lightweight papers with the HCF, it may also be necessary
to install TAG H112 (HCF Feed Improvement Kit for Lightweight Paper) PL 4.2B Item
20).
TAG H002 and TAG H005 are installed, and TAG H007 or TAG H112 is installed,
and the problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
If the machine has an HCF, ensure the correct feeder spring is installed. Refer to
Optimizing the Tray 6 Nip Force.
The correct spring is installed for the customers applications and the problem
continues.
Y
N
Install the correct spring.
Install a new Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.1A Item 3 in the problem tray. Reset
the Life Counter for the new cartridge (GP6). Run copies to determine if the problem
is resolved.
08-115 jams still occur when feeding with the new Paper Feed Roll Cartridge.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
RAP 03-811, IIOC PWB W8A4 Failed The IIOC Controller Test.
RAP 03-812, IIOC PWB W8A5 Failed The IIOC Controller Test.
08-115
May 2003
2-278
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
N
In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and
[Type 2] tests. Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
The test fails with a 03-836 fault.
Y
N
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Registration Sensor] and [Monitor
Input]. Block and unblock the Registration Sensor with a sheet of paper.
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The display indicates the state of the Registration Sensor changed.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the circuit of the Registration Sensor, for an open circuit or
a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component.
The spring in the HCF Feed Improvement Kit (low force) PL 4.2B Item 20 will improve the
performance of lightweight papers, i.e. 16lb-18lb (60gsm). This spring should be used if
the customer runs a high percentage of lightweight papers.
The spring in the HCF Feed Improvement Kit (nominal force) PL 4.2B Item 11 is the
spring to use for all other papers, especially 20lb (80gsm). This spring is recommended
for customers who feed a wide range of papers from the HCF.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-279
08-115
08-115
May 2003
2-280
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Ensure the Area 2 Handle is securely snapped in place. If the handle is damaged, replace
the Registration Transport Handle Kit PL 4.1B Item 3.
Ensure the paper the customer is using meets specifications. Refer to the Paper Specifications table in General Procedures.
If the problem is 08-120.05 (paper was fed from the Bypass Tray) ensure the paper size
loaded in the tray matches the paper size displayed on the User Interface. This fault is
likely to occur if the physical paper size is longer than what is displayed on the User Interface.
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in the tray the customer was using when the jam
occurred.
If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in the tray the customer was
using when the jam occurred.
If the problem continues after performing the above actions, use the RAP.
Check the jammed sheets for damage such as nicks, dings, or dog ears. If the
sheets are damaged, go to the OF-2 Print Damage RAP.
Observe the sheets for skew as they feed into the Registration Transport Assembly.
If the sheets are skewed, go to the 08-C Skewed Image RAP.
If the jams are intermittent, check the finished copy/print image for skew. If the
printed image is skewed more than +/- 5 mm, replace the Registration Transport
Assembly PL 4.1A Item 8.
May 2003
2-281
C
Status Indicator RAPs
08-115, 08-120
A
Y
N
Check the location of the jammed sheet.
The jammed sheet is stopped between the Prefuser Transport (PFT)
and the registration rolls (over the S2 sensor).
Y
N
Replace the Registration Transport Assembly PL 4.1A Item 8.
Ensure the PFT is seated correctly and paper is not stubbing on the
lead edge of the PFT.
Remove the Fuser Drive Motor and inspect the Drive Gear for wear
or damage. Replace the Fuser Drive Gear PL 7.1 Item 5 or the Fuser
Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 3, as appropriate
After you have observed the Registration Idler Rolls, select [All
Outputs Off].
A
B
C
D
E
F
Status Indicator RAPs
08-120
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor] and [Output
On].
Select the [Registration Clutch], then make alternate selections of [Output On] and
[Output Off].
Observe the Registration Transport Assembly to ensure the Registration Rolls start
and stop with the cycling of the clutch.
After you have observed the Registration Rolls, select [All Outputs Off].
Do the following:
F
If the problem continues, replace the Registration Transport
Assembly PL 4.1A Item 8.
Do the following:
If the problem continues, replace the Registration Transport Assembly PL 4.1A Item
8.
Go to the 08-115 RAP.
Do the following.
If there are 09-xxx faults in the fault history, go to the appropriate RAP.
If there are 10-100 faults in the fault history, go to the 10-100 RAP.
May 2003
2-282
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-283
08-120
The lead edge of the sheet was not detected by the Tray Wait Station Sensor.
Software automatically modifies feed timing as components age in order to maintain optimum
feeder performance. This fault indicates the automatic adjustment has reached its limit and the
paper feed components in the appropriate tray should be serviced.
Procedure
Go to the 08-101.01/.02/.03/.04 RAP.
Initial Actions
Check for 08-115 Faults. Go to the 08-115 RAP.
Procedure
The problem is in one of the IOT Paper Trays.
Y
N
The problem is in the Bypass Tray.
Y
N
Replace the following parts, one at a time, until the problem is solved.
HCF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.2B Item 6. Reset the Life Counter for the
new cartridge (GP6).
Replace the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.2B Item 6 in the Bypass Tray.
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
The machine also has an HCF.
Y
N
Replace the following parts, one at a time, until the problem is solved.
Bypass Tray Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.2B Item 6. Reset the Life Counter
for the new cartridge (GP6).
Replace the following parts, one at a time, until the problem is solved.
Bypass Tray Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.2B Item 6. Reset the Life Counter for
the new cartridge (GP6).
Replace the following parts, one at a time, until the problem is solved.
08-701, 08-705
Replace the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.1A Item 3 in the tray experiencing the problem. Reset the Life Counter for the new cartridge (GP6).
Replace the Paper Tray Assembly PL 4.1A Item 1 experiencing the problem.
Replace the Paper Feed Drives Plate PL 4.1A Item 4 for the tray experiencing the problem.
May 2003
2-284
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Procedure
Go to the 08-105.01/.02/.03/.04 RAP.
Procedure
Check the last 40 Faults for 08-115.06 faults and 08-120.98 faults. Enter [Faults/Counters tab ,
Faults].
Check the fault counters for a high occurrence of 08-706 faults. Enter [Faults/Counters tab ,
Counters Display].
Take one of the following actions
If there are 08-115.06 faults in the Last 40 Faults, go to the 08-115 RAP.
If there are 08-120.98 faults in the Last 40 Faults, go to the 08-120 RAP.
If there are 08-115.06 and/or 08-120.98 faults in the Last 40 Faults and a high occurrence
of 08-706 faults in counters, go to the 08-105.06 RAP.
If there are no 08-115.06 or 08-120.98 faults in the Last 40 Faults, return to Service Call
Procedures.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-285
08-706, 08-710
Initial Actions
NOTE: Top edge registration on the 2nd side of duplex copies relies on the Top Edge Electronic Registration (TEER) Sensor in the Duplex Transport to measure the exact position of the
outboard edge of the paper in the Duplex Transport paper path. Software uses the TEER Sensor data to delay or advance the timing of the ROS so the 2nd side will be placed correctly with
respect to the edge of the paper.
Have the customer select [Image Adjustment] and [No Shift.] on the UI, and then run
some copies. If those selections correct the misregistration problem, return to Service
Call Procedures
Ensure the Area 2 Handle is securely snapped in place. If the handle is damaged, replace
the Registration Transport Handle Kit PL 4.1B Item 3.
Initial Actions
Ensure the Area 2 Handle is securely snapped in place. If the handle is damaged, replace
the Registration Transport Handle Kit PL 4.1B Item 3.
Have the customer select [Image Adjustment] and [No Shift] on the UI, and then run some
copies. If those selections correct the misregistration problem, return to Service Call Procedures
Verify the Side 1 and Side 2 skew is in specification. Go to the 08-C RAP to diagnose IOT
skew problems.
Check Side 1 and Side 2 of the prints for folded-over corners (dog-ears) on the lead
edge of the prints. If the prints are dog-eared, remove the obstruction in the paper path.
Check for undersized paper (5.5 x 8.5 in [A5]) oriented SEF. When run SEF, this paper is
too narrow to be detected by the TEER Sensor. Continue in this RAP only if the Top Edge
Registration problem occurs with 8.5 x 11 in (A4) letter-size paper (or larger).
In TEER Diagnostics, select [Group 2 Tests], [Print Test], Print count [5]. Select the
suspect tray, then select [Start].
Repeat for all other trays including the Bypass Tray (Tray 5) and the HCF (Tray 6).
Check the 4th and 5th print (refer to Figure 1). Top edge misregistration occurs.
Y
N
Go to the 08-B Intermittent Misregistration Checkout Procedure.
The problem occurs from all paper trays.
Y
N
Check the paper size displayed on the User Interface for each of the paper trays.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
08-A, 08-B
May 2003
2-286
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
The paper size displayed on the User Interface for each paper tray matches the
paper size loaded in the paper tray.
Y
N
Go to the 07-B Paper Size Sensing RAP.
The problem is with Tray 1 - 4.
Y
N
Check the IOT Entrance Baffle at the left end of the Duplex Transport. Ensure
that the baffle is installed and seated correctly. Check for any obstructions or
damage such as a broken finger.
The Entrance Baffle is OK.
Y
N
Repair replace the IOT Entrance Baffle as necessary PL 6.1B Item 8.
The problem is with the Bypass Tray.
Y
N
Replace the following items until the problem is resolved.
A
C
V0.042
D
The direction and amount of image shift is approximately the same on all the
prints.
Y
N
Go to the 08-B Variable Misregistration Checkout Procedure.
Perform ADJ 8-1B and run internal test pattern 17. Check Side 1 of the prints.
The problem continues after performing the adjustment.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the Registration Transport Assembly. PL 4.1A Item 8.
In TEER Diagnostics, select [Group 1 Tests], [Communications Test], then [Start]. Enter
[Paper tab, TEER Diagnostic].
In TEER Diagnostics, select [Group 1 Tests], [Communications Test], then [Start]. Enter
[Paper tab, TEER Diagnostic].
May 2003
2-287
08-B
Check the results of all 10 tests. 10-7xx TEER faults are displayed in the test results window.
Y
N
In TEER Diagnostics, select [Group 2 Tests], [Print Test], Print count [5]. Select the
suspect tray, then select [Start]. Enter [Paper tab, TEER Diagnostic].
F
Upper Guide Assembly PL 4.1A Item 6.
Repeat the Group 2 test for the tray selected 4 more times.
Check the data in column 2 for each of the 5 tests (Refer to Table 1). The
between the highest value and the lowest value is greater than 3 mm.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
difference
In TEER Diagnostics, select [Group 2 Tests], [Print Test], Print count [5], [Tray
4], then select [Start]. Enter [Paper tab, TEER Diagnostic].
Check the data in column 2 for each of the 5 tests (Refer to Table 1). The
difference between the highest value and the lowest value is greater than 3 mm.
Y
N
Replace the Registration Transport Assembly PL 4.1A Item 8.
Replace the following items until the problem is resolved.
In TEER Diagnostics, select [Group 2 Tests], [Print Test], Print count [5], [HCF], then
select [Start]. Enter [Paper tab, TEER Diagnostic].
Check the data in column 2 for each of the 5 tests (Refer to Table 1). The
difference
between the highest value and the lowest value is greater than 3 mm.
Y
N
In TEER Diagnostics, select [Group 2 Tests], [Print Test], Print count [5], [HCF]
or [Tray 2], then select [Start]. Enter [Paper tab, TEER Diagnostic].
NOTE: If the problem is occurring in Tray 1 or Tray 2 run the Group 2 test using
Tray 4. If the problem is occurring in Tray 3 or Tray 4 run the Group 2 test using
Tray 2.
Check the data in column 2 for each of the 5 tests (Refer to Table 1). The
difference between the highest value and the lowest value is greater than 3 mm (24
pixels).
Y
N
Replace the Vertical Transport PL 4.1A Item 7.
Replace the following items until the problem is resolved.
E
F
Status Indicator RAPs
08-B
May 2003
2-288
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: Go to the RAP for the fault with the lowest number first if more than one of these faults
occurred.
top edge of paper
Column 2
(Side 2 at Duplex TEER Sensor)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
top edge
registration measurement
NOTE: The measurements in column 2 is the number of mm or pixels the center of the paper is
from the center of the paper path (8 pixels is equal to 1 mm). A negative measurement (-x.xxx)
indicates the paper is inboard from the center of the paper path. A positive measurement
(x.xxx) indicates the paper is outboard from the center of the paper path.
lead edge
of paper
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-289
08-B
Make sure that the Paper Tray side guides are in the correct position (Trays 1-5).
The paper path between the Registration Transport Assembly and the
HCF/Duplex Baffle for obstructions.
The surface of the HCF Paper Handling Baffle PL 4.2B Item 2 for nicks or
contamination.
If necessary, run several 2-sided prints to determine if the skew occurs on Side 1 and Side 2.
The skew occurs on Side 1 and Side 2 of the prints
Y
N
The skew occurs on the second side of two-sided prints.
Y
N
Make prints from all 4 IOT Paper Trays, the Bypass Tray (Tray 5) and the HCF (Tray
6).
The skew occurs from all IOT Paper Trays, Tray 5 and Tray 6.
Y
N
The skew occurs from Tray 5 and/or Tray 6 only.
Y
N
Ensure the HCF/Duplex Baffle (part of the Duplex Transport PL 6.1A Item 2) is
seated correctly and is free from damage.
Ensure the Registration Transport Assembly has free play (Refer to REP 08-2,
Replacement)
Ensure the HCF/Duplex Baffle (part of the Duplex Transport PL 6.1A Item 2) is
seated correctly and is free from damage.
NOTE: A No response means the skew does not occur on paper fed
from Tray 5 and/or Tray 6 but occurs from one or more IOT paper trays.
The Inverter Exit Roll PL 6.3 Item 7 for glazing and wear.
The prints show some form of damage, such as nicks, corner folds, etc.
Y
N
Do the following:
08-C
Remove then reinstall the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.2B Item 6
in Tray 6.
If the problem continues, replace the Registration Transport Assembly PL 4.1A Item
8.
A
B
C
D
Status Indicator RAPs
Do the following:
Perform adjustment procedure ADJ 8-2. Check if the skew is still present after performing the
adjustment.
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures
Check that the amount of skew is equal from all trays and is less than 1.5mm. The
of skew is equal from all trays and less than 1.5mm.
Y
N
Go to the IOT Skew Diagnostic Procedure.
If the skew is occurring from Tray 6 only do the following. Check for skew
after performing each action listed.
Initial Actions
May 2003
2-290
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Skew occurs on paper fed from the tray in its new position.
Y
N
Return the Paper Tray to its original position.
Make the following checks on the components adjacent to the Paper Tray:
The prints show some form of damage, such as nicks, corner folds, etc.
Y
N
Run several copies from Tray 6 and observe the paper buckle at the Registration Transport Assembly.
Measure the height of the paper buckle. Refer to GP41 Measuring the Height of the Paper
Buckle. The buckle height is between 20 mm and 30 mm.
Y
N
Check for obstructions between the Upper Guide PL 4.1A Item 14 and the
Lower Guide PL 4.1A Item 5.
Check the idlers on the Upper Guide PL 4.1A Item 14, for wear
A component in the Paper Tray is causing skew. Do the following, checking for skew after
performing each action listed.
Ensure the Preregistration Nip Solenoid Gate Spring PL 6.1A Item 10 on the
Duplex Transport is not damaged or missing.
Ensure the Preregistraion Gate Link PL 6.1A Item 11 on the Duplex Transport is
not damaged and is attached to the Preregistration Gate.
Remove then reinstall the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.1A Item 3.
Check the Paper Tray Feed Head PL 4.1A Item 17, for damage and obstructions.
If the problem continues, replace the Paper Tray Assembly PL 4.1A Item 1.
Do the following:
Check the paper path at the top of the Vertical Transport for obstructions.
Ensure the Vertical Transport is mounted correctly to the Registration Transport Assembly. Refer to REP 08-1.
Check the idlers on the Upper Guide - Tray 1 PL 4.1A Item 14 (Tray 1), for wear.
Ensure the Registration Transport Assembly has free play (Refer to REP 08-2,
Replacement)
If the problem continues, replace the Registration Transport Assembly PL 4.1A Item 8.
Go to OF-2 Print Damage RAP.
May 2003
2-291
08-C
Initial Actions
Check that the Stack Height Sensor actuator flag on the rear of the paper tray is seated
and not stuck.
Procedure
Clear all jobs in the queue.
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Ensure this
jumper is in
place for a 40
ppm machine,
but not in place
for a 55ppm or
65 ppm
machine.)
The Check Tray X message occurs from a pair of trays (both Trays 1 and 2, or both
Trays 3 and 4).
Y
N
Perform a soft PO/PO using the switch on the right side of the IOT.
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
The "X" in the description represents the tray number in which the misfeed occurred.
This problem will also occur if the Paper Feed Drives Plate jumper configuration is incorrect.
For a 40 ppm IOT, there should be a jumper on IIOC PWB A7A5 on Paper Drives Plate
(Trays 1 and 2), IIOC PWB A8A5 on Paper Tray Drives Plate (Tray 3 and 4).
Check the jumper configuration for the Paper Feed Drives Plate for the misfeeding trays (Figure 1). The jumper configuration is correct.
Y
N
Go to the 08-E RAP.
Perform a soft PO/PO using the switch on the right side of the IOT.
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Go to the 08-101.01/.02/.03/.04 RAP.
08-D
May 2003
2-292
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
For a 40 ppm IOT, there should be a jumper on IIOC PWB A7A5 on Paper Drives Plate
(Trays 1 and 2), IIOC PWB A8A5 on Paper Tray Drives Plate (Tray 3 and 4).
Procedure
Do the following
Correct the jumper configuration. Refer to REP 07-1 for specific information.
NOTE: If the jumper is missing from a 40 ppm IOT, it will be necessary to replace the
Paper Feeder PWB PL 4.1A Item 12.
In [NVM tab , NVM Read/Write], select [Mark Service], ensure that the following NVM
variables are set to 0.
For Tray 1/2 Drives Plate, ensure the value in location 110 and location 111 is set to
[0].
For Tray 3/4 Drives Plate, ensure the value in location 112 and location 113 is set to
[0]
When the values have been modified, exit NVM Read/Write and exit Diagnostic Navigator.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-293
08-E
08-E
May 2003
2-294
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
If any of the following faults occur, go to the RAP for those faults:
BTAC Faults (09-310, 09-320)
Ensure the Raster Output Scanner Video Cable is correctly connected at the ROS and
the Main Control PWB.
DC460/470 - 09-210 faults along with 14-325 and 14-335 faults can be caused by electrical noise. Electrical noise can be caused by a defective Illumination Lamp, PL 3.2 Item 7
or a poor Lamp Cable connection at the Illumination Lamp Power Supply PL 3.2 Item 5.
Check connection at the Illumination Lamp Power Supply and check the Illumination
Lamp for black ends or a burned out filament and replace as required.
Ensure the BTAC Sensor brackets are not bent and the BTAC Sensor is correctly positioned on the Developer Housing. Repair as necessary.
Make copies/prints to check for the fault. The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
F
Check/perform the following:
A
B
V0.042
Inspect the Developer HVPS Contact Springs on the Developer for damage/dirt
May 2003
2-295
B
Status Indicator RAPs
09-210
B
Repair or replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
Clean
Clean Shaft
(especially discolored area)
09-210
May 2003
2-296
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Ensure the machine has been powered off/on at least once before continuing.
good
Replace the Developer Housing PL 5.1B Item 5. If the problem continues, replace the
SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Return to Service Call Procedures.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-297
09-215
Go to the 04-205.
Go to the 01-A, Voltage Checkout RAP.
09-220
May 2003
2-298
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-299
09-220
SCAM PWB
Distribution PWB
09-220
May 2003
2-300
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH10
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-301
09-220
TH41
09-220
May 2003
2-302
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Ensure that all covers are installed and no stray light is hitting the BTAC Sensor.
Select [Output On]. The voltage measured between TH44 (+) and TH14 (-) on the SCAM
PWB is 0.5 0.1 VDC.
Y
N
Select [Output Off]. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2. Check the wire for an open or short circuit.
Remove the Developer Housing and check the pins in P/J50 especially pin 1 which supplies BTAC Ground.
If OK, replace the BTAC Sensor PL 5.1B Item 3.
Select [Output Off]. Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-303
09-300
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH10
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
09-300
May 2003
2-304
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-305
09-300
Initial Actions
Ensure that all covers are installed and no stray light is hitting the BTAC Sensor.
Ensure that all covers are installed and no stray light is hitting the BTAC Sensor.
If the Developer Housing was recently removed and re-installed, remove the Developer
Housing and check the pins in P/J50 especially pin 1 which supplies BTAC Ground.
In [Copier Sys tab , Component Control], select [IOT General] [BTAC Reset].
Select [Output On]. (Keep the component on until instructed to switch the output off) The
voltage measured between TH44 (+) and TH14 (-) on the SCAM PWB is 0.5 0.1 VDC.
Y
N
The voltage measured between TH45 (+) and TH14 (-) on the SCAM PWB is 5.0
0.5 VDC.
Y
N
Select [Output Off]. Switch off the machine Power. Disconnect P25/J5 from the
SCAM PWB. Switch on the machine power. In [Copier Sys tab , Component Control], select [IOT General] [BTACS Reset].
Select [Output On]. The voltage measured between TH45 (+) and TH14 (-) on
the SCAM PWB is 5.0 0.5 VDC.
Y
N
Select [Output Off]. Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Select [Output Off]. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2. Check the wires for a short circuit.
If OK, replace the BTAC Sensor PL 5.1B Item 3.
Select [Output Off]. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2. Check the wires for an open or short circuit.
If OK, replace the BTAC Sensor PL 5.1B Item 3.
Select [Output Off]. Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
09-302
May 2003
2-306
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-307
09-302
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH10
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
09-302
May 2003
2-308
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Check the fault history for any ROS faults (06-XXX). If any are indicated, go to the appropriate RAP.
If black prints are occurring, go to the IQ-17, IOT Black Prints RAP.
Check with customer and ensure that all covers are in place and no stray light is entering
the machine.
Check for an obstruction between the BTAC Sensor and the P/R Belt (such as paper
stuck in the Xerographic Module). Remove or repair as necessary.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-309
09-304
09-304
May 2003
2-310
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH10
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-311
09-304
Initial Actions
Ensure that all machine covers are in place and that no stray light is hitting the BTAC Sensor.
09-306
May 2003
2-312
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 09-310, indicates that no process control patches were detected. The 12% and
50% patch raw reads are both within 8 bits of the clean belt read.
Charge HVPS
NOTE: Ignore any other parts that are in the Parts to Replace message
that are not in the list above.
Initial Actions
If any arcing faults are occurring, go to that RAP. (09-384 , 09-380 , 09-382)
The parts to replace message includes one or more from the above
list.
Y
N
Go to the 09-310 Without Exerciser Procedure.
A
B
V0.042
Developer Housing
ROS
BTAC Noise
If this has occurred more than once, the Detack HVPS may have failed. Go to the 09-E,
Detack HVPS Checkout RAP.
May 2003
2-313
09-310
P/R Grounding (Xerographic Module) - Remove the Xerographic Module and inspect the
P/R Ground strip located on the IB side. Ensure it is not damaged or contaminated.
Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1 if necessary. If the Xerographic Module
is heavily contaminated, check the Developer Housing for leakage. Replace as necessary
Developer Housing PL 5.1B Item 5.
Video from Image Processing getting to ROS. Ensure the Raster Output Scanner Video
Cable PL 1.2A Item 4 is seated correctly at the ROS and at the Main Control PWB. Run
[Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics] [VCM_Loop Test] and if the machine is an ST or
DC model, run the [SCVM Digital Test]. If either test fails, go to the 03-G, Main Control
PWB Replacement RAP.
2 Large
Screws (this
Side
NOTE: Do not run the SCVM Digital Test on a LP machine, the test will fail. This is normal, since the SCVM function is not enabled on a LP machine.
Developer Housing getting correct drive. Ensure the drive belt is not slipping, and the
developer mag and donor rolls are turning. Replace the Developer Housing PL 5.1B Item
5 if necessary.
Developer AC Enable from SCAM to Developer HVPS. Go to the 09-G, Developer HVPS
Checkout RAP.
If the problem continues, replace the Developer Housing PL 5.1B Item 5 if necessary.
If the problem continues, the Photoreceptor Drive Module may have a backer bar problem. Replace the Photoreceptor Drive Module PL 5.1A Item 2
09-310
May 2003
2-314
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-315
09-310
09-312
May 2003
2-316
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-317
09-312
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH10
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
09-312
May 2003
2-318
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
If any 09-210, Charge Faults, or 09-306 faults are occurring, fix them first.
Developer Housing
Charge HVPS
BTAC Noise
NOTE: Ignore any other parts that are in the Parts to Replace message that are
not in the list above.
The parts to replace message includes one or more from the above list.
Y
N
Go to the 09-F, Xerographic Electrical Noise Checkout.
The Xerographic Exerciser is displaying a Parts to Replace message. There
may be a single item, or several on the list. The first item is the main suspect,
but make a note of the other items for possible future reference.
May 2003
2-319
09-314
Fault Code, 09-316, indicates the 0% patch is out of range. 0% patch raw read is greater than
4.5v.
Fault Code, 09-318, indicates the 87.5% patch is light. Three consecutive 87.5% relative
reflectance readings greater than the 87.5% target plus 5 units.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
If any 09-210, Charge Faults, or 09-306 faults are occurring, fix them first.
Ensure that Tag 086 is installed (L17.8.64 or later software). This level of software has
improved process control software that decreases the likelihood of having 09-318 faults.
Go to Flag 1. Inspect the ground wire connected to the BTAC Sensor Assembly.
Ensure there is a good connection to ground. If OK, go to step 2.
Check pin 1 of P/J50. Ensure that it has not been bent due to strain on the connector.
Suspect electrical noise problem. Go to the 09-F, Xerographic Electrical Noise Checkout.
Refer to Figure 2. Clean the Donor Roll shaft where the bias makes contact. Use
Film Remover to clean the shaft.
Check for a reoccurrence of the problem. The problem continues.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select [Exerciser], then [Start Test].
Observe the test results. The test passed.
Y
N
There is a message that indicates the ROS A/B Test failed.
Y
N
The test failed with a fault code.
Y
N
Check the parts to replace message against the following list:
Toner Dispenser
A
Status Indicator RAPs
09-316, 09-318
May 2003
2-320
Developer Housing
ROS
BTAC Noise
E
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
E
NOTE: Ignore any other parts that are in the Parts to Replace message that are not in the list above.
The parts to replace message includes one or more from the
above list.
Y
N
Go to the 09-318 Without Exerciser Procedure Procedure.
The Xerographic Exerciser is displaying a Parts to Replace message. There may be a single item, or several on the list. The first item
is the main suspect, but make a note of the other items for possible
future reference.
Go to the RAP listed below for the part that was the first one listed in
the Xerographic Exerciser parts to replace message.
A
NOTE: When checking the NVM values below and comparing them to the ROS bar code, be
sure the numbers are entered exactly as they are on the label. For instance, the Exposure Calibration value always begins with a decimal point. If the decimal point is incorrect, the Exposure will be incorrect and 09-318 faults may occur.
In Diagnostic Navigator, select [NVM tab , NVM Tool]. Search for the location 793 Exposure
Calibration (Figure 3). The value matches the value indicated on the ROS bar code label.
Y
N
Reset this value to its correct value as noted on the ROS bar code label. The Exposure
Calibration number is the number that is preceded by the letter E under the second bar
code. Run Xerographic Setup. Figure 3
In Diagnostic Navigator, select [NVM tab , NVM Tool]. Search for the location indicated in Table
1.
The value is between 8784 and 9147 (65 and 55ppm) or 14281 and 14864 (40ppm).
Y
N
Use [NVM tab , NVM Tool] to reset the value to the default values, 8964 (65 and 55ppm)
or 14567 (40ppm). Send service to reset this value to its correct value as noted on the
ROS bar code label. The Hall Period Ref number is the 4 or 5 digit number that preceded
by the letter H under the second bar code. Run Xerographic Setup. Figure 3
If the values above are correct and the problem is still occurring, return to the beginning of the
RAP and answer NO to the statement about a new ROS.
WARNING
Switch off the machine power and unplug from the wall outlet.
Possible poor contact between the Developer Housing and the Developer HVPS. This
contact is made by a pair of compression springs (Developer HVPS Contact Springs) on
the inboard end of the Developer Housing which push directly against the pads of the
Developer HVPS. On most machines, the two springs are covered by a small plastic
shield to prevent them from being damaged.
Check the following:
Remove the Developer Housing from the machine. See Figure 2 and clean the
Donor Roll Shaft contact area with Scotch Brite, (43P74) or Pumice Paper (43P46).
Examine the two high voltage springs to determine if they are bent or snagged.
Check the plastic shield that covers them for damage. The shield is spring loaded,
and it should move in and out smoothly without catching on the two high voltage
springs.
If OK, access the Developer HVPS. With the machine power off, wiggle the Developer HVPS slightly to improve the contact of the springs to the HVPS.
F
May 2003
2-321
09-318
F
Y
N
The problem was corrected by improving the HVPS contact. Return to Service Call
Procedures.
Refer to Figure 2. Clean the Donor Roll shaft where the bias makes contact. Use Film
Remover to clean the shaft.
Check for a reoccurrence of the problem. The problem continues.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern]. Select [Step Wedge]. Make 5 prints.
Observe the prints for overall density. The prints are dark.
Y
N
Go to the 09-M Jumping Gap Checkout RAP. Perform that procedure. Return here
when complete.
Check for a reoccurrence of the fault. The fault continues.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select [Set-Up], then [Start Test].
When the set-up completes, run some test pattern prints to try to reproduce the
fault. The fault occurs.
Y
N
Done. Set-Up has corrected the problem. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Go to Flag 1. Check for continuity between the BTAC Shield and machine frame.
Continuity is measured.
Y
N
Repair/replace as necessary.
Go to the 09-C Toner Dispenser Checkout RAP.
The ROS may be incorrectly positioned. Check for a correct installation of the ROS REP
06-1.
Observe the ROS. The ROS is installed correctly.
Y
N
Re-install the ROS correctly REP 06-1.
Figure 1 09-318 RAP Circuit Diagram
09-318
May 2003
2-322
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Clean
Clean Shaft
(especially discolored area)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-323
09-318
Part #
ROS Serial #
Exposure Calibration
(NVM 793)
470 DC/ST
Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRef Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRefGb
460 DC/ST
Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRef Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRefGb
255/265 DC/ST
N/A
240 DC/ST
N/A
09-318
May 2003
2-324
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 09-320, indicates the 87.5% patch is dark. Three consecutive 87.5% relative
reflectance readings greater than the 87.5% target minus 5 units.
Initial Actions
Ensure that TAG 086 is installed (L17.8.64 or later software). This level of software has
improved process control software that decreases the likelihood of having 09-320 faults.
Developer Housing
BTAC Noise
Charge HVPS
NOTE: Ignore any other parts that are in the Parts to Replace message that are not in the list above.
The parts to replace message includes one or more from the
above list.
Y
N
Go to the 09-320 Without Exerciser Procedure Procedure.
The Xerographic Exerciser is displaying a Parts to Replace message. There may be a single item, or several on the list. The first item
is the main suspect, but make a note of the other items for possible
future reference.
Go to the RAP listed below for the part that was the first one listed in
the Xerographic Exerciser parts to replace message.
A
B
V0.042
May 2003
2-325
09-320
When the set-up completes, run some test pattern prints to try to reproduce the fault. The
fault occurs.
Y
N
Done. Set-Up has corrected the problem. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Possible poor contact between the Developer Housing and the Developer HVPS. This contact
is made by a pair of compression springs (Developer HVPS Contact Springs) on the inboard
end of the Developer Housing which push directly against the pads of the Developer HVPS. On
most machines, the two springs are covered by a small plastic shield to prevent them from
being damaged.
Check the following:
Remove the Developer Housing from the machine. See Figure 2 and clean the Donor
Roll Shaft contact area with Scotch Brite, (43P74) or Pumice Paper (43P46). Examine
the two high voltage springs to determine if they are bent or snagged. Check the plastic
shield that covers them for damage. The shield is spring loaded, and it should move in
and out smoothly without catching on the two high voltage springs.
If OK, access the Developer HVPS. With the machine power off, wiggle the Developer
HVPS slightly to improve the contact of the springs to the HVPS.
09-320
May 2003
2-326
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Clean
Clean Shaft
(especially discolored area)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-327
09-320
Part #
ROS Serial #
Exposure Calibration
(NVM 793)
470 DC/ST
Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRef Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRefGb
460 DC/ST
Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRef Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRefGb
255/265 DC/ST
N/A
240 DC/ST
N/A
09-320
May 2003
2-328
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 09-324, indicates the background value is greater than 10.
Initial Actions
Ensure that TAG 086 is installed (L17.8.64 or later software). This level of software has
improved process control software that decreases the likelihood of having 09-318 faults.
Refer to Figure 1. Clean the Donor Roll shaft where the bias makes contact. Use Scotch Brite ,
(43P74) or Pumice Paper (43P46) to clean the shaft.
Check for a reoccurrence of the problem. The problem continues.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Developer Housing
Charge HVPS
BTAC Noise
Perform a cleaner stress test. Select [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern]. Select [IQ Test #4] [Start
Job]. The blank prints at the end of the job are clean with no smears, background, or
residual image.
Y
N
Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
Go to the 09-A Charge Checkout RAP. If the problem continues, replace the Developer Housing PL 5.1B Item 5.
Clean
NOTE: Ignore any other parts that are in the Parts to Replace message that are
not in the list above.
The parts to replace message includes one or more from the above list.
Y
N
Go to the 09-324 Without Exerciser Procedure Procedure.
The Xerographic Exerciser is displaying a Parts to Replace message. There
may be a single item, or several on the list. The first item is the main suspect,
but make a note of the other items for possible future reference.
Go to the RAP listed below for the part that was the first one listed in the Xerographic Exerciser parts to replace message.
Clean Shaft
(especially discolored area)
May 2003
2-329
09-324
C
Go to the 09-L, ROS Checkout RAP.
Initial Actions
Ensure that TAG 086 is installed (L17.8.64 or later software). This level of software has
improved process control software that decreases the likelihood of having 09-330 faults.
Developer Housing
Charge HVPS
BTAC Noise
Toner Dispenser
NOTE: Ignore any other parts that are in the Parts to Replace message that are
not in the list above.
The parts to replace message includes one or more from the above list.
Y
N
Go to the 09-330 Without Exerciser Procedure Procedure.
The Xerographic Exerciser is displaying a Parts to Replace message. There
may be a single item, or several on the list. The first item is the main suspect,
but make a note of the other items for possible future reference.
Go to the RAP listed below for the part that was the first one listed in the Xerographic Exerciser parts to replace message.
A
B
C
Status Indicator RAPs
09-330
May 2003
2-330
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
Go to the RAP for that fault code.
Initial Actions
Ensure that TAG 086 is installed (L17.8.64 or later software). This level of software has
improved process control software that decreases the likelihood of having 09-332 faults.
Toner Dispenser
Developer Housing
Charge HVPS
BTAC Noise
NOTE: Ignore any other parts that are in the Parts to Replace message that are
not in the list above.
The parts to replace message includes one or more from the above list.
Y
N
Go to the 09-332 Without Exerciser Procedure Procedure.
The Xerographic Exerciser is displaying a Parts to Replace message. There
may be a single item, or several on the list. The first item is the main suspect,
but make a note of the other items for possible future reference.
Go to the RAP listed below for the part that was the first one listed in the Xerographic Exerciser parts to replace message.
May 2003
2-331
09-332
Fault Code, 09-334, indicates the tone up loop was exceeded in Xero Set-Up.
Remove the Developer Housing from the machine. See Figure 1 and clean the Donor Roll
Shaft contact area with Scotch Brite, (43P74) or Pumice Paper (43P46). Examine the two
high voltage springs to determine if they are bent or snagged. Check the plastic shield
that covers them for damage. The shield is spring loaded, and it should move in and out
smoothly without catching on the two high voltage springs.
If OK, access the Developer HVPS. With the machine power off, wiggle the Developer
HVPS slightly to improve the contact of the springs to the HVPS.
Xerographic Module (Ground) (Cleaner) (P/R Belt), go to the 09-J, Xerographic Module Checkout RAP
Check the connectors on the Rear of the ROS for correct mating.
Clean
Clean Shaft
(especially discolored area)
09-334
May 2003
2-332
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 09-336, indicates the tone down loop was exceeded in Xero Set-Up.
Remove the Developer Housing from the machine. See Figure 1 and clean the Donor Roll
Shaft contact area with Scotch Brite, (43P74) or Pumice Paper (43P46). Examine the two
high voltage springs to determine if they are bent or snagged. Check the plastic shield
that covers them for damage. The shield is spring loaded, and it should move in and out
smoothly without catching on the two high voltage springs.
If OK, access the Developer HVPS. With the machine power off, wiggle the Developer
HVPS slightly to improve the contact of the springs to the HVPS.
Xerographic Module (Ground) (Cleaner) (P/R Belt), go to the 09-J, Xerographic Module Checkout RAP
Clean
Clean Shaft
(especially discolored area)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-333
09-336
WARNING
Fault Code, 09-338, indicates the electrostatic setup failed to achieve image quality limits.
Switch off the machine power and unplug from the wall outlet.
Initial Actions
If the problem is occurring with a new Xerographic Module, pull the unit out slightly and push
back in completely and re-latch.
Remove the Developer Housing from the machine. See Figure 1 and clean the
Donor Roll Shaft contact area with Scotch Brite, (43P74) or Pumice Paper (43P46).
Examine the two high voltage springs to determine if they are bent or snagged.
Check the plastic shield that covers them for damage. The shield is spring loaded,
and it should move in and out smoothly without catching on the two high voltage
springs.
If OK, access the Developer HVPS. With the machine power off, wiggle the Developer HVPS slightly to improve the contact of the springs to the HVPS.
Enter [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select [Set-Up], then [Start Test].
Check for occurrence of the 09-338. The problem continues.
Y
N
The problem was corrected by improving the HVPS contact. Return to Service Call
Procedures.
In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select [Set-Up], then [Start Test].
If the problem continues, go to the RAP for the 09-xxx fault code that was in the fault log
before the 09-338.
The problem began after a Xerographic Module was replaced.
Y
N
The problem began after a Developer Housing was replaced.
Y
N
The problem began after a Photoreceptor Drive Module was replaced.
Y
N
The problem occurred after a ROS was replaced. In Diagnostic Navigator,
select [NVM tab , NVM Tool]. Check the value for location 793 (expCalibration).
Figure 2.
NOTE: When checking the NVM values below and comparing them to the ROS
bar code, be sure the numbers are entered exactly as they are on the label. For
instance, the Exposure Calibration value always begins with a decimal point. If
the decimal point is incorrect, the Exposure will be incorrect and 09-338 faults
may occur.
The value matches the value indicated on the ROS bar code label.
Y
N
Reset this value to its correct value as noted on the ROS bar code label.
The Exposure Calibration number is the number that is preceded by the
letter E under the second bar code. In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], run Xerographic Setup after resetting the NVM value. Figure 3
In Diagnostic Navigator, select [NVM tab , NVM Tool]. Search for the location
indicated in Table 1.
The value is between 8784 and 9147 (65 and 55ppm) or 14281 and 14864
(40ppm).
A
Status Indicator RAPs
09-338
May 2003
2-334
C
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Y
N
Use [NVM tab , NVM Tool] to reset the value to the default values, 8964
(65 and 55ppm) or 14567 (40ppm). Send service to reset this value to its
correct value as noted on the ROS bar code label. The Hall Period Ref
number is the 4 or 5 digit number that preceded by the letter H under the
second bar code. Figure 3
If the values above are correct and the problem is still occurring, ensure the
Raster Output Scanner Video Cable is connected correctly at both ends. If the
problem continues, return to the beginning of the RAP and answer NO to the
statement about a new ROS.
C
Check the following:
Remove the Developer Housing from the machine. See Figure 1 and clean the
Donor Roll Shaft contact area with Scotch Brite, (43P74) or Pumice Paper
(43P46). Examine the two high voltage springs to determine if they are bent or
snagged. Check the plastic shield that covers them for damage. The shield is
spring loaded, and it should move in and out smoothly without catching on the
two high voltage springs.
If OK, access the Developer HVPS. With the machine power off, wiggle the
Developer HVPS slightly to improve the contact of the springs to the HVPS.
If the problem continues, return to the RAP from which directed here.
There may be a problem with the installation of the Photoreceptor Drive Module. Check
for correct installation. If OK, replace the Photoreceptor Drive Module PL 5.1A Item 2.
Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
Clean
Clean Shaft
(especially discolored area)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-335
09-338
Part #
ROS Serial #
Exposure Calibration
(NVM 793)
470 DC/ST
Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRef Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRefGb
460 DC/ST
Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRef Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRefGb
255/265 DC/ST
N/A
240 DC/ST
N/A
09-338
May 2003
2-336
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Xerographic Module (Ground) (Cleaner) (P/R Belt), go to the 09-J, Xerographic Module Checkout RAP
Clean Shaft
(especially discolored area)
Remove the Developer Housing from the machine. See Figure 1 and clean the Donor Roll
Shaft contact area with Scotch Brite, (43P74) or Pumice Paper (43P46). Examine the two
high voltage springs to determine if they are bent or snagged. Check the plastic shield
that covers them for damage. The shield is spring loaded, and it should move in and out
smoothly without catching on the two high voltage springs.
If OK, access the Developer HVPS. With the machine power off, wiggle the Developer
HVPS slightly to improve the contact of the springs to the HVPS.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-337
09-344
The previous Xerographic Module was functional when replaced and is still available.
Y
N
Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1. If problem continues, check the
following:
Xerographic Module DC Drawer Connector is not damaged and is mating correctly. PL 1.6 Item 6
09-350
May 2003
2-338
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-339
09-350
Fault Code, 09-351, indicates the machine run control detects the Maximum Print Volume
Value is less than Print Count and/or the Maximum Pixel Usage Value less than Pixel Usage.
Fault Code, 09-352, indicates that an inappropriate Xerographic Module has been detected in
the machine.
09-351, 09-352
In [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select the [System] tab. Ensure the Market
Region is correct for this machine.
Ensure the correct Fuser Module part number was installed for the machine market
region and service plan (sold, non-sold). Refer to PL 6.2A Item 1 for the correct Fuser
Module part numbers. To change the Service Plan, use GP16.
May 2003
2-340
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 09-353, indicates the machine run control detects the Xerographic Module was
previously initialized on a machine of a different configuration. Either a Xerographic Module
was initialized on a DC/ST and then installed in a LP/Docutech 65 or it was initialized on a LP/
Docutech 65 and then installed on a DC/ST.
Fault Code, 09-354, indicates that a Xerographic Module has been detected in the machine
without a CRUM.
Initial Actions
Switch the machine power off, wait 10 seconds. Switch the machine power back on. See if the
problem continues.
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit. If OK, replace the Distribution PWB
PL 1.5 Item 7.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-341
09-353, 09-354
09-354
May 2003
2-342
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Switch the machine power off, wait 10 seconds. Switch the machine power back on. See if the
problem continues.
If the Xerographic Module is manufactured by Xerox, the CRUM is internal to the Fuser
Module.
Check for the installation of TAG XXX (the In-Line CRUM Harness).
Tag xxx is installed.
Y
N
Install the In-Line CRUM Harness Kit 98S04279.
Replace the In-Line CRUM Harness 162K57260.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-343
09-355
09-355
May 2003
2-344
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-345
09-358
09-358
May 2003
2-346
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
If using an interlock cheater while troubleshooting a fault, ensure that you remove the
cheater to clear the fault from the UI screen.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-347
09-360/362
09-360/362
May 2003
2-348
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Ensure the Left and Right Side Interlock Switches are closed.
09-372
09-374
09-376
04-210
One or more of those faults occurred at the same time as the 09-370.
Y
N
+34 to +38 VDC is measured between TS2 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Transfer HVPS.
Y
N
Switch off the machine power. Disconnect P66 ( P66/J1) from the Transfer HVPS.
Switch on the machine power.
Measure the voltage between P66-1 (+) and P66-2 (-). +34 to +38 VDC is measured between P66-1 and P66-2.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wiring for an open circuit.
If OK, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Replace the Transfer/Detack HVPS PL 1.2A Item 6.
Measure the voltage between TH7 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB.
Less than 1 VDC is measured.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TH6 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB.
+12 1 VDC is measured.
Y
N
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Go to Flag 2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If OK, replace the Transfer/Detack
HVPS PL 1.2A Item 6 .
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Suspect 36 VDC open, shorted, or bad LVPS. Go to the 09-D +36 VDC Checkout RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-349
09-370
09-370
May 2003
2-350
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-351
09-370
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH10
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
09-370
May 2003
2-352
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Ensure the Left and Right Side Interlock Switches are closed.
09-370
09-374
09-376
04-210
One or more of those faults occurred at the same time as the 09-372.
Y
N
+34 to +38 VDC is measured between TS2 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Detack HVPS.
Y
N
Switch off the machine power. Disconnect P65 from the Detack HVPS. Switch on the
machine power.
Measure the voltage between P65-1 (+) and P65-2 (-). +34 to +38 VDC is measured between P65-1 and P65-2.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wiring for an open circuit.
If OK, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Replace the Transfer/Detack HVPS PL 1.2A Item 6.
Measure the voltage between TH5 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB.
Less than 1 VDC is measured.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TH3 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB.
+12 1 VDC is measured.
Y
N
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Go to Flag 2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If OK, replace the Transfer/Detack
HVPS PL 1.2A Item 6.
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Suspect 36 VDC open, shorted, or bad LVPS. Go to the 09-D +36 VDC Checkout RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-353
09-372
09-372
May 2003
2-354
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TS4
TS3
TS2
TS1
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-355
09-372
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH10
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
09-372
May 2003
2-356
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Ensure the Left and Right Side Interlock Switches are closed.
09-370
09-372
09-376
04-210
One or more of those faults occurred at the same time as the 09-374.
Y
N
+34 to +38 VDC is measured between TS2 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Charge HVPS.
Y
N
Switch off the machine power. Disconnect P67 from the Charge HVPS. Switch on
the machine power.
Measure the voltage between P67-1 (+) and P67-2 (-). +34 to +38 VDC is measured between P67-1 and P67-2.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wiring for an open circuit.
If OK, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Replace the Charge HVPS PL 1.2A Item 5.
Measure the voltage between TH11 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB.
Less than 1 VDC is measured.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TH10 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB.
+12 1 VDC is measured.
Y
N
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Go to Flag 2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If OK, replace the Charge HVPS
PL 1.2A Item 5.
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Suspect 36 VDC open, shorted, or bad LVPS. Go to the 09-D +36 VDC Checkout RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-357
09-374
09-374
May 2003
2-358
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TS4
TS3
TS2
TS1
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-359
09-374
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH10
TH11
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
09-374
May 2003
2-360
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Ensure the Left and Right Side Interlock Switches are closed.
09-370
09-372
09-374
04-210
One or more of those faults occurred at the same time as the 09-376.
Y
N
+34 to +38 VDC is measured between TS2 (+) on the Developer HVPS and
machine frame (-).
Y
N
Switch off the machine power. Disconnect P64 from the Developer HVPS. Switch on
the machine power.
Measure the voltage between P64-1 (+) and P64-2 (-). +34 to +38 VDC is measured between P64-1 and P64-2.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wiring for an open circuit.
If OK, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Replace the Developer HVPS PL 1.2A Item 7.
Measure the voltage between TH16 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB.
Less than 1 VDC is measured.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TH15 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB.
+12 1 VDC is measured.
Y
N
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Go to Flag 2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If OK, replace the Developer HVPS
PL 1.2A Item 7.
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Suspect 36 VDC open, shorted, or bad LVPS. Go to the 09-D +36 VDC Checkout RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-361
09-376
09-376
May 2003
2-362
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH10
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-363
09-376
TS10
TS9
TS8
TS7
TS6
TS5
TS4
TS3
TS2
TS1
09-376
May 2003
2-364
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
Select [Start].
Measure the voltage between TH8 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The
is less than 1.0 VDC.
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Go to Flag 1. Check the wire for an open circuit.
If OK, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
voltage
CAUTION
This test will not stop automatically. Do not leave machine unattended with this routine running.
Select the Stop button on the PWS when measurements are completed.
NOTE: Wait 20 seconds before making any measurements, to allow all of the drives and outputs to activate.
In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select [Power Supply Tests] [Transfer HVPS Test].
Select [Start]. Measure the voltage between TS3 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Transfer HVPS. Refer
to the PWS for the correct value for Transfer Output Current. The value measured is equal
to the value on the PWS ( 0.6 VDC).
Y
N
The voltage is less than the specified range.
Y
N
The voltage is higher. Select [Stop]. Replace the Transfer/Detack HVPS PL 1.2A
Item 6.
Select [Stop].
Measure the voltage between TS2 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Transfer HVPS. The voltage
is 36.0 2.0 VDC.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TH1 (+) and TH2 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The voltage is 36.0 2.0 VDC.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between P21/J1-4 (+) and P21/J1-3 (-) at the SCAM
PWB. The voltage is 36.0 2.0 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 4. Check the wires for an open circuit.
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6
Go to Flag 5.
Check for an open circuit. The circuit is OK.
Y
N
Repair the wiring.
Replace the Transfer/Detack HVPS PL 1.2A Item 6.
A
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-365
09-380
09-380
May 2003
2-366
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH10
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-367
09-380
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
09-380
May 2003
2-368
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
Select [Stop Test]. Replace the Transfer/Detack HVPS PL 1.2A Item 6. If the problem continues, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Fault Code, 09-382, indicates that a Detack Corotron current or voltage is high.
Measure the voltage between TS4 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Detack HVPS. Set the DMM to read
AC voltage. Refer to the PWS for the correct value for Detack AC Output Current. The value
measured is equal to the value on the PWS ( 0.5 VAC) for Detack AC Output.
Y
N
Select [Stop Test]. Replace the Transfer/Detack HVPS PL 1.2A Item 6.
Set the DMM to read DC voltage. Measure the voltage between TH5 (+) and TH47 (-) on the
SCAM PWB. The voltage is 5.0 0.3 VDC.
Y
N
Select [Stop Test]. Go to Flag 2.
Check the wire for a short circuit. The wire is OK.
Y
N
Repair the wiring.
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Select [Stop Test]. The Transfer/Detack HVPS is OK.
In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select [Power Supply Tests] [Detack HVPS Test].
Select [Start]. Measure the voltage between TS3 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Detack HVPS. Refer
to the PWS for the correct value for Detack DC Output Current. The value measured is
equal to the value on the PWS ( 1.1 VDC) for Detack DC Output.
Y
N
The voltage is less than the specified range.
Y
N
The voltage was higher than the specified range. Select [Stop Test]. Replace the
Transfer/Detack HVPS PL 1.2A Item 6.
Select [Stop Test].
Measure the voltage between TS2 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Detack HVPS. The voltage
is 36.0 2.0 VDC.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TH1 (+) and TH2 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The voltage is 36.0 2.0 VDC.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between P21/J1-4 (+) and P21/J1-3 (-) at the SCAM
PWB. The voltage is 36.0 2.0 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 4. Check the wires for an open circuit.
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Go to Flag 5.
Check for an open circuit. The circuit is OK.
Y
N
Repair the wiring.
Replace the Transfer/Detack HVPS PL 1.2A Item 6.
A
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-369
09-382
09-382
May 2003
2-370
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH10
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-371
09-382
TS4
TS3
TS2
TS1
09-382
May 2003
2-372
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
If a 09-310 fault is also occurring, troubleshoot the 09-384 first.
In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select [Power Supply Tests] [Charge HVPS
Test] [Start].
Measure the voltage between TH12 (+) and TH9 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The voltage
is +5.0 0.5 VDC.
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Go to Flag 1. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground.
B
Ensure the machine is on and in a standby condition.
Measure the voltage between TH12 (+) and TH9 (-) on the SCAM PWB. +0.7 VDC or
less is measured.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wire for an open circuit.
May 2003
2-373
09-384
09-384
May 2003
2-374
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH9
TH10
TH11
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-375
09-384
A
Measure the voltage between TS10 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Developer HVPS. Refer to the
PWS screen for the value for Mag DC Output. The voltage measured is equal to the value
on the PWS ( .15 VDC) for Mag DC Output.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TS4(+) and TS9 (-) on the Developer HVPS. Refer to the
PWS screen for the value for Mag DC Reference. The voltage measured is equal to
the value on the PWS ( 0.1 VDC) for Mag DC Reference.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TH19 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The
voltage measured is equal to the value on the PWS ( 0.1 VDC) for Mag DC Reference.
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Go to Flag 8. Check the wire for a short circuit to machine frame.
If OK, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Select [Stop]. Go to Flag 8. Check the wire for a open circuit.
NOTE: Wait 20 seconds before making any measurements, to allow all of the drives and outputs to activate.
In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select [Power Supply Tests] [Developer HVPS].
Select [Start]. Measure the voltage between TH15 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB.
Less than 1.0 VDC is measured.
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Measure the voltage between TH16 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The voltage is
5.0 0.3 VDC.
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Go to Flag 2. Check the wire for a short circuit to machine frame. If OK,
replace the Developer Housing PL 5.1B Item 5. If the problem continues, replace the
Developer HVPS PL 1.2A Item 7.
Measure the voltage between TS6 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Developer HVPS. Refer to the PWS
screen for the value for Donor DC Output. The voltage measured is equal to the value on
the PWS ( .23 VDC) for Donor DC Output.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TS3 (+) and TS9 (-) on the Developer HVPS. Refer to the
PWS screen for the value for Donor DC Reference. The voltage measured is equal to
the value on the PWS ( 0.1 VDC) for Donor DC Reference.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TH21 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB. Refer to
the PWS screen for the value for Donor DC Reference. The voltage measured is
equal to the value on the PWS ( 0.1 VDC) for Donor DC Reference.
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Go to Flag 5. Check the wire for a short circuit. If OK, replace the
SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
09-386
B
May 2003
2-376
Deselect Peak Hold on the DMM. Measure the voltage between TS5 (+) and TS9 (-) on
the Developer HVPS. Refer to the PWS screen for the value for Donor AC Reference.
The voltage measured is equal to the value on the PWS ( .1 VDC) for Donor AC
Reference.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TH18 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The
voltage measured is equal to the value on the PWS ( .1 VDC) for Donor AC
Reference.
C
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
C
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Go to Flag 7. Check the wire for a short circuit to machine frame.
If OK, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-377
09-386
09-386
May 2003
2-378
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH10
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-379
09-386
TS10
TS9
TS8
TS7
TS6
TS5
TS4
TS3
TS2
TS1
09-386
May 2003
2-380
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: Only 265DC machines built for the FX market have a Toner Bottle Sensor.
Fault Code, 09-880, occurs when the Toner Bottle Sensor does not detect toner in the bottle.
The fault will clear if the Front Door is open/closed, the machine power is switched off/on, or a
09-870 is detected.
Fault Code, 09-870, occurs when the Toner Bottle Sensor does not detect toner in the bottle
after an 09-880 was cleared and the Toner Bottle motor has run for 40 seconds. The fault will
clear when toner is detected.
Initial Actions
Ensure the Toner Bottle has been replaced (that it does have toner in it).
If using an interlock cheater while troubleshooting a fault, ensure that you remove the
cheater to clear the fault from the UI screen.
In standby mode,
measure the voltage between TS3 (+) and TS1 (-) (Pin Current Monitor) on the Charge
HVPS. The voltage is 0.0 VDC
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TH10 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The voltage
is 12.0 1.0 VDC
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check for a short circuit. If OK, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Replace Charge HVPS PL 1.2A Item 5.
Measure the voltage between TH11 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The voltage is
less than 1.0 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If OK, replace the Charge HVPS PL 1.2A
Item 5.
In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select [Power Supply Tests] [Charge HVPS Test].
CAUTION
This test will not stop automatically. Do not leave machine unattended with this routine running.
Select the Stop button on the PWS when measurements are completed.
NOTE: Wait 20 seconds before making any measurements, to allow all of the drives and outputs to activate.
Select [Start]. Measure the voltage between TS4 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Charge HVPS. On the
PWS, refer to the Grid Output voltage value. The voltage measured is equal to the value (
0.3 VDC) on the PWS for the Grid Output.
Y
N
Continue with the [Charge Test].
Measure the voltage between TS3 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Charge HVPS. On the PWS,
refer to the Pin Current Output value. The voltage measured is equal to the value (
0.2 VDC) on the PWS for the Pin Current Output.
Y
N
The voltage is less than 1.8 VDC.
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Replace Charge HVPS PL 1.2A Item 5
Select [Stop].
Measure the voltage between TS2 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Charge HVPS. The
voltage is 36 2 VDC.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TH1 (+) and TH2 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The
voltage is 36 2 VDC.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between J1-4 (+) and J1-3 (-) on the SCAM PWB.
The voltage is 36 2 VDC.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-381
D
Status Indicator RAPs
09-870/880, 09-A
A
Y
E
Measure the resistance between P67/JI-6 and machine frame. Less
ohms is measured.
Y
N
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
N
Go to the 01-A Voltage Checkout RAP.
than
100
Measure the voltage between P67/JI-1 (+) and P67/JI-2 (-) on the Charge
HVPS. The voltage is 36 2 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 3. Check the wires for an open circuit.
The Xerographic Module has already been replaced in an effort to solve this problem.
Y
N
Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
Run machine to see if problem is corrected. The problem is now resolved.
Y
N
Replace the Charge HVPS PL 1.2A Item 5
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open or short circuit. If OK, replace the
Charge HVPS PL 1.2A Item 5.
A
E
Status Indicator RAPs
09-A
May 2003
2-382
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-383
09-A
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH9
TH10
TH11
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
09-A
May 2003
2-384
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TS4
TS3
TS2
TS1
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-385
09-A
CAUTION
This test will not stop automatically. Do not leave machine unattended with this routine running.
Select the Stop button on the PWS when measurements are completed.
NOTE: Wait 20 seconds before making any measurements, to allow all of the drives and outputs to activate.
In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select [Power Supply Tests] [Transfer HVPS Test].
Select [Start]. Measure the voltage between TS3 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Transfer HVPS. Refer
to the PWS for the correct value for Transfer Output Current. The value measured is equal
to the value on the PWS ( 0.35 VDC for 40ppm) or ( 0.5 VDC for 65ppm or 55ppm).
Y
N
The voltage is less than the specified range.
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Replace the Transfer/Detack HVPS PL 1.2A Item 6.
Select [Stop].
Measure the voltage between TS2 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Transfer HVPS. The voltage
is 36.0 2.0 VDC.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
09-B
N
Measure the voltage between TH1 (+) and TH2 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The voltage is 36.0 2.0 VDC.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between P21/J1-4 (+) and P21/J1-3 (-) at the SCAM
PWB. The voltage is 36.0 2.0 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 4. Check the wires for an open circuit.
voltage
May 2003
2-386
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-387
09-B
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH10
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
09-B
May 2003
2-388
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-389
09-B
This procedure is used in conjunction with the Xerographic Exerciser whenever the Toner Dispenser is identified as a part to replace. The Exerciser may see a failure in the Toner Dispenser
that is caused by a wiring or IIOC problem.
N
The Xerographic Exerciser was unsuccessful in determining the cause. Return the RAP
which directed you here (original fault) and perform the RAP as if the Exerciser had
passed.
Choose the next part the Xerographic Exerciser identified from the list below and go to the indicated RAP:
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control]. Select [Copier Sys | IOT Paper Path | Fuser
Fan]. Select [Output On]. Let run for several minutes.
Select [Output Off], enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests]. Select [IOT] [Type 1],
then [Start].
09-C
May 2003
2-390
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-391
09-C
Initial Actions
Ensure the Side Interlock Switches are closed.
Check the Left Side Cover Upper Knockout. This is a filler cover that fits over the opening
in the Left Side Cover.
Check the Left Side Cover Upper Knockout for damaged latches. If the latches are damaged, the Left Side Safety Interlock Switch will not be reliably actuated.
If the latches are damaged, replace the Left Side Cover Upper Knockout PL 7.2 Item 7
(48E3664).
When installing a new Knockout panel, press the latches down to guide them into their
mating holes in the Left Side Cover.
09-D
May 2003
2-392
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-393
09-D
36V
+36V
24V
+24V
-12V
24 PSV
+24 VES
INT-OUT
Interlock Outp
Interlock Inpu
RMT-OFF
ES#1
ES#2
INT-IN
+5 VES
+5V
5.15V
+12V
+12V
-12V
+12 VES
5.15 PSV
09-D
May 2003
2-394
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
N
Measure the voltage between TH1 (+) and TH2 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The voltage is 36.0 2.0 VDC.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between P21/J1-4 (+) and P21/J1-3 (-) at the SCAM
PWB. The voltage is 36.0 2.0 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 4. Check the wires for an open circuit.
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6
Go to Flag 5.
Check for an open circuit. The circuit is OK.
Y
N
Repair the wiring.
Replace the Transfer/Detack HVPS PL 1.2A Item 6.
Measure the voltage between TS4 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Transfer HVPS. Set the DMM to
read AC voltage. Refer to the PWS for the correct value for Detack AC Output Current. The
value measured is equal to the value on the PWS ( .35 VAC) for Detack AC Output.
Y
N
Select [Stop Test]. Replace the Transfer/Detack HVPS PL 1.2A Item 6.
Set the DMM to read DC voltage. Measure the voltage between TH5 (+) and TH47 (-) on the
SCAM PWB. The voltage is 5.0 0.3 VDC.
Y
N
Select [Stop Test]. Go to Flag 2.
Check the wire for a short circuit. The wire is OK.
Y
N
Repair the wiring.
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Select [Stop Test]. The Transfer/Detack HVPS is OK.
In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select [Power Supply Tests] [Detack HVPS Test].
Select [Start]. Measure the voltage between TS3 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Detack HVPS. Refer
to the PWS for the correct value for Detack DC Output Current. The value measured is
equal to the value on the PWS ( 1.1 VDC) for Detack DC Output.
Y
N
The voltage is less than the specified range.
Y
N
Select [Stop Test]. Replace the Transfer/Detack HVPS PL 1.2A Item 6.
Select [Stop Test].
Measure the voltage between TS2 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Detack HVPS. The
is 36.0 2.0 VDC.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
voltage
May 2003
2-395
09-E
09-E
May 2003
2-396
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH10
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-397
09-E
TS4
TS3
TS2
TS1
09-E
May 2003
2-398
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Go to Flag 1. Inspect the ground wire connected to the BTAC Sensor Assembly. Ensure
there is a good connection to ground. If OK, go to step 2.
2.
With your meter check pin 1 of P/J50. Ensure that it has not been bent due to strain on
the connector.
3.
Replace the Developer Housing PL 5.1B Item 5. If the problem continues, go to step 4.
4.
5.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-399
09-F
Select [Start]. Measure the voltage between TH15 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB.
Less than 1.0 VDC is measured.
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
This procedure will check out the Developer HVPS. It is an On-Site procedure.
Initial Actions
Check the following:
Ensure the Left and Right Side Interlock Switches are closed.
If 09-370, 09-372, 09-374, and 09-376 faults are occurring, go to the 09-D +36 VDC
Checkout RAP.
Measure the voltage between TH16 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The voltage is
5.0 0.3 VDC.
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Go to Flag 2. Check the wire for a short circuit. If OK, replace the Developer
Housing PL 5.1B Item 5. If the problem continues, replace the Developer HVPS PL 1.2A
Item 7.
Measure the voltage between TS6 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Developer HVPS. Refer to the PWS
screen for the value for Donor DC Output. The voltage measured is equal to the value on
the PWS ( .23 VDC) for Donor DC Output.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TS3 (+) and TS9 (-) on the Developer HVPS. Refer to the
PWS screen for the value for Donor DC Reference. The voltage measured is equal to
the value on the PWS ( 0.1 VDC) for Donor DC Reference.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TH21 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB. Refer to
the PWS screen for the value for Donor DC Reference. The voltage measured is
equal to the value on the PWS ( 0.1 VDC) for Donor DC Reference.
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Go to Flag 5. Check the wire for a short circuit to machine
ground. If OK, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Select [Stop]. Go to Flag 5. Check the wire for a open circuit.
Select [Stop]. Replace the Developer HVPS PL 1.2A Item 7.
Measure the voltage between TS10 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Developer HVPS. Refer to the
PWS screen for the value for Mag DC Output. The voltage measured is equal to the value
on the PWS ( .15 VDC) for Mag DC Output.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TS4(+) and TS9 (-) on the Developer HVPS. Refer to the
PWS screen for the value for Mag DC Reference. The voltage measured is equal to
the value on the PWS ( 0.1 VDC) for Mag DC Reference.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TH19 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The
voltage measured is equal to the value on the PWS ( 0.1 VDC) for Mag DC Reference.
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Go to Flag 8. Check the wire for a short circuit to machine
ground. If OK, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Select [Stop]. Go to Flag 8. Check the wire for a open circuit.
NOTE: Wait 20 seconds before making any measurements, to allow all of the drives and outputs to activate.
In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select [Power Supply Tests] [Developer HVPS].
09-G
May 2003
2-400
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Measure the voltage between TS7 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Developer HVPS. Refer to the PWS
screen for the value for Donor AC Output. The voltage measured is equal to the value on
the PWS ( .23 VDC) for Donor AC Output.
Y
N
Deselect and reselect the Peak Hold function on the DMM.
Measure the voltage between TS8 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Developer HVPS. Refer to the
PWS screen for the value for Mag AC Output. The voltage measured is equal to the
value on the PWS ( .50 VDC) for Mag AC Output.
Y
N
Deselect Peak Hold on the DMM. Measure the voltage between TH17 (+) and
TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The voltage is less than 1 VDC.
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Go to Flag 3. Check the wire for an open circuit. If OK, replace
the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6. If the problem continues, replace the Developer
HVPS PL 1.2A Item 7.
N
The Xerographic Exerciser was unsuccessful in determining the cause. Return the RAP
which directed you here (original fault) and perform the RAP as if the Exerciser had
passed.
Choose the next part the Xerographic Exerciser identified from the list below and go to the indicated RAP:
Select [Stop]. Measure the voltage between TH17 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM
PWB. +18 1.5 VDC is measured.
Y
N
Go to Flag 3. Check the wire for an open circuit. If OK, replace the Developer
HVPS PL 1.2A Item 7.
Replace the Developer HVPS PL 1.2A Item 7.
Deselect Peak Hold. Measure the voltage between TS5 (+) and TS9 (-) on the Developer HVPS. Refer to the PWS screen for the value for Donor AC Reference. The voltage measured is equal to the value on the PWS ( .1 VDC) for Donor AC Reference.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between TH18 (+) and TH47 (-) on the SCAM PWB. The
voltage measured is equal to the value on the PWS ( .1 VDC) for Donor AC
Reference.
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Go to Flag 7. Check the wire for a short circuit to machine
ground. If OK, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Select [Stop]. Go to Flag 7. Check the wire for a open circuit.
Select [Stop]. Replace the Developer HVPS PL 1.2A Item 7.
Use the Peak Hold function on the DMM.
Measure the voltage between TS8 (+) and TS1 (-) on the Developer HVPS. Refer to the PWS
screen for the value for Mag AC Output. The voltage measured is equal to the value on the
PWS ( .50 VDC) for Mag AC Output.
Y
N
Select [Stop]. Replace the Developer HVPS PL 1.2A Item 7.
Select [Stop]. If this RAP was not entered because of a Xerographic Exerciser failure message,
the Developer HVPS checks out OK. Return to the RAP that indicated this checkout should be
performed. If this RAP was performed because of an Exerciser failure, continue.
Another Part was identified in the Xerographic Exerciser as failed.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-401
09-G
09-G
May 2003
2-402
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH10
TH12
TH14
TH15
TH16
TH17
TH18
TH19
TH41
TH42
TH21
TH44
TH45
TH46
TH47
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-403
09-G
TS10
TS9
TS8
TS7
TS6
TS5
TS4
TS3
TS2
TS1
09-G
May 2003
2-404
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Check for any 09-358 faults. If occurring, go to that RAP (09-358).
Check the Developer Collector Tube. Ensure that it is correctly connected to the
Developer Housing and the Developer Collector.
Repair or replace the Developer Collector PL 5.1B Item 8 or the Developer Collector Tube
PL 5.1B Item 7 as necessary.
If the Developer Housing became bound due to a clogged tube or bottle and caused
motor faults, replace the Developer Housing PL 5.1B Item 5.
If no problems were found, return to the procedure that sent you here.
Go to Flag 1, check for an open circuit.
If OK, replace the Developer Collector Sensor
PL 5.1B Item 9. If the problem continues, replace the IIOC PWB W3A1 PL 1.5.
If the Developer Housing became bound and caused motor faults, replace the Developer
Housing PL 5.1B Item 5.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-405
09-H
B
Remove the Xerographic Module from the machine. In [Copier Sys tab , Component Control], select [IOT General] [Photoreceptor Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Observe the Cleaner Brush Drive Shaft (Figure 2). The Cleaner Brush Drive Shaft
rotates when the motor is energized.
Y
N
Select [Output Off]. Replace the Photoreceptor Drive Module PL 5.1A Item 2.
Select [Output Off]. Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
Check for reoccurrence of the fault/defect. The fault and/or defect is still occurring.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Another Part was identified in the Xerographic Exerciser as failed.
Y
N
The Xerographic Exerciser was unsuccessful in determining the cause. Return the
RAP which directed you here (original fault) and perform the RAP as if the Exerciser
had passed.
Choose the next part the Xerographic Exerciser identified from the list below and go to the
indicated RAP:
Choose the next part the Xerographic Exerciser identified from the list below
and go to the indicated RAP:
Choose the next part the Xerographic Exerciser identified from the list below and go
to the indicated RAP:
09-J
C
May 2003
2-406
D
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path] [CRU Blower] [Output On].
Check the Xerographic Blower. Ensure that it is working. The blower is working.
Y
N
40PPM: Go to the OF-4, Noise, Odor, Heat, and Dirt RAP to diagnose the CRU
Blower circuit.
65PPM or 55PPM: Go to the OF-5, Noise, Odor, Heat, and Dirt RAP to diagnose the CRU Blower circuit.
Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1 and replace the Developer Housing PL
5.1B Item 5.
Inspect the Photoreceptor Drive Module for any signs of obvious malfunction. Ensure the Drive
Rolls are not damaged. Repair/replace as necessary Photoreceptor Drive Module PL 5.1A
Item 2.Whether the Photoreceptor Drive Module is replaced or not, replace the Xerographic
Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
If belt damage continues to be a problem, replace the Photoreceptor Drive Module PL 5.1A
Item 2.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-407
09-J
Ground Contact
Ground Strip
area
Air Manifold
09-J
May 2003
2-408
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Cleaner Brush
Drive Shaft
Xerographic
Blower
(CRU Blower)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-409
09-J
Clean
Select [Output Off]. Perform REP 09-13 Donor Roll Cleaning Procedure or replace the Donor
Roll PL 5.1B item 19.
Recheck for the original fault or defect. The fault or defect is still occurring.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the Developer Housing, PL 5.1B Item 4. After the Developer Housing has been
replaced, recheck for the original fault or defect. The fault or defect is still occurring.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Clean Shaft
(especially discolored area)
09-K
May 2003
2-410
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
This procedure is used in conjunction with the Xerographic Exerciser whenever the ROS is
identified as a part to replace.
XRU 09-J
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-411
09-L
09-L
May 2003
2-412
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in the tray the customer was using when the jam
occurred
If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in the tray the customer was
using when the jam occurred.
If 10-100.99 jams are occurring when using lightweight paper (less than 20 lb [80 gsm]),
install the Light Weight Paper Duplex Kit PL 6.1A Item 2, TAG 298.
Clear the jam. Ensure the Fuser/Inverter Drawer and the Prefuser Transport (refer to the
replacement procedure REP 10-1) are fully seated. Install the interlock cheater. Make one copy
and observe the Prefuser Transport belts and the Fuser Jam Clearance Knob.
The Fuser Jam Clearance Knob is turning before the jam occurs.
Y
N
Ensure the Fuser Module is correctly installed on the Inverter and the Fuser Drive Gear,
PL 7.1 Item 5, is fully meshed with the drive gear on the Fuser Drive Motor when the
drawer is fully seated. Inspect the Fuser Drive Gear for excessive wear.
If necessary, replace the Fuser Drive Gear (part of the Fuser Drive Gear Kit PL 7.1 Item
15) and/or the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
If the problem continues, replace the Fuser Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 3.
The PreFuser Transport belts are moving before the jam occurs.
Y
N
Pull out the Fuser/Inverter Drawer (Handle 3) in order to check the Prefuser Transport
(PFT) drive gears.
The PFT gears are functional and they engage correctly.
Y
N
Replace the component(s) with the defective gear.
Remove the Fuser Module and the Xerographic Module to gain access to the underside
of the Prefuser Transport.
Clean the face of the PFT Sensor (located on the Prefuser Transport between the second
and third Prefuser Transport belts)
Attempt to run copies/prints to determine if reseating the Fuser Module corrected the
problem.
The problem continues after reseating the Fuser Module.
Y
N
Run enough copies/prints to verify problem is corrected. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Make copies/prints in order to create the jam condition. Pull out the Fuser/Inverter Drawer
(Handle 3) and check the location of the jammed sheet.
The lead edge of the sheet is located under Area 3A (the PreFuser Transport).
Y
N
Clear the jam, paying attention to the location of the sheet.
The lead edge of the sheet is in the Xerographic Module.
Y
N
The sheet is jammed in the Registration Transport. Go to the 08-120 RAP.
A
B
V0.042
It is possible to install the Fuser Module incorrectly which causes the Prefuser Transport
(PFT) to be pushed up as the Fuser Module is pushed into the machine, resulting in disengagement of the PFT drive gears. Pull out the Fuser/Inverter Drawer (Handle 3). Check
the four corners of the Fuser Module cover and ensure the cover is fully seated on the
module. Reseat the module on the drawer. Observe the PFT as you firmly push in the
Fuser/Inverter Drawer.
The PFT gears remain engaged as the Fuser/Inverter Drawer is pushed in and
seated.
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
If the problem continues, replace the Prefuser Transport PL 6.1A Item 1.
Check the [Last 40 Faults] for instances of 09-370, 09-372, 09-380, or 09-382 faults.
Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
Any of the listed faults are logged.
Y
N
Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
B
Go to the RAP for the fault code. (09-370) (09-372) (09-380) (09-382)
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [PFT Vacuum Fan], and [Output On].
May 2003
2-413
10-100
The sheet of paper is held against the PFT Transport Belts when the PFT Vacuum Fan
energizes.
Y
N
Replace the Prefuser Transport PL 6.1A Item 1.
In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and [Type 2]
tests. Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
The tests fail with an 03-812 code.
Y
N
Replace the Prefuser Transport PL 6.1A Item 1.
Go to the 03-812 RAP.
10-100
May 2003
2-414
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The lead edge of a sheet from the Fuser arrived late at the Inverter Entrance Sensor PL 6.3
Item 6.
The fault code suffix identifies whether the job is simplex or duplex:
In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and
[Type 2] tests. Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
The tests fail with an 03-828 or 03-829 code.
Y
N
Replace the Inverter PL 6.2A Item 2.
Initial Actions
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in the tray the customer was using when the Finisher jam occurred
If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in the tray the customer was
using when the Finisher jam occurred.
Clear the jam. Ensure the Fuser/Inverter Drawer is fully seated. Install the interlock cheater.
Make one copy and observe the Prefuser Transport belts and the Fuser Jam Clearance Knob.
The Fuser Jam Clearance Knob was turning before the jam occurred.
Y
N
Ensure the Fuser Module is correctly installed on the Fuser/Inverter Drawer and the Fuser
Drive Gear, PL 7.1 Item 5, is fully meshed with the drive gear on the Fuser Drive Motor
when the drawer is fully seated.
Do the following:
Inspect the Drive Gear on the back of the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1 for damage.
It is possible to install the Fuser Module incorrectly which causes the (PFT) to be pushed
up as the Fuser Module is pushed into the machine, resulting in disengagement of the
PFT drive gears. Pull out the Fuser/Inverter Drawer (Handle 3). Check the four corners of
the Fuser Module cover and ensure the cover is fully seated on the module. Reseat the
module on the drawer. Observe the PFT as you firmly push in the Fuser/Inverter Drawer.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Inverter Entrance Sensor], and [Monitor
Input]. Remove the jammed sheet of paper.
Inspect the Fuser Drive Gear PL 7.1 Item 5on the Fuser Drive Motor for damage.
A
V0.042
B
May 2003
2-415
10-101
B
The PFT gears remain engaged as the Fuser/Inverter Drawer is pushed in and
seated.
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
If the problem continues, replace the Prefuser Transport PL 6.1A Item 1.
Attempt to run copies/prints to determine if reseating the Fuser Module corrected the
problem.
A 10-101 fault occurs again.
Y
N
Run enough copies/prints to verify problem is corrected. Return to Service Call Procedures.
C
C
Replace the Prefuser Transport PL 6.1A Item 1.
If the problem continues, replace the Fuser Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 3.
In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and [Type 2]
tests. Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
The tests fail with an 03-812 code.
Y
N
Replace the Prefuser Transport PL 6.1A Item 1.
Go to the 03-812 RAP.
10-101
May 2003
2-416
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: After correcting the cause of the skew it may still be necessary to troubleshoot
the 10-105 fault, but the skew problem must be solved first.
The trail edge of a sheet to be inverted arrived late at the Inverter Entrance Sensor (S4).
The fault code suffix identifies whether the job is simplex or duplex:
B
Go to the 08-C Skewed Image RAP.
Clear the jammed sheet. Ensure the Stripper Finger Baffle is seated correctly. Make another
copy/print to determine if the problem is solved.
A 10-105 fault occurs again.
Y
N
Run enough copies to ensure the problem is corrected. If 10-105 faults occur again,
replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
Initial Actions
Clean the Inverter Entrance Sensor and the Inverter Exit Sensor.
Ensure the Inverter Entrance Sensor PL 6.3 Item 6 and the Inverter Exit Sensor PL 6.3
Item 6 are mounted correctly. If the sensor cannot be seated correctly due to a broken
mount, replace the sensor.
If the problem continues after cleaning the sensors and ensuring the sensors are seated correctly, use this RAP.
Check the Inverter Entrance Gate PL 6.3 Item 12 for dislodged fingers.
May 2003
2-417
10-105
The lead edge of an inverted sheet going to the Exit Baffle or Decurler arrived late at the
Inverter Exit Sensor (S5).
The fault code suffix identifies whether the job is simplex or duplex:
Do the following:
Initial Actions
If the 10-115 jams are intermittent, go to the 10-115 Intermittent Diagnostic Procedure.
Clean the Inverter Entrance Sensor and the Inverter Exit Sensor.
Ensure the Inverter Entrance Sensor PL 6.3 Item 6 and the Inverter Exit Sensor PL 6.3
Item 6 are mounted correctly. If the sensor cannot be seated correctly due to a broken
mount, replace the sensor.
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in the tray the customer was using when the jam
occurred
If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in the tray the customer was
using when the jam occurred.
NOTE: This fault can be caused by NVM corruption. If this RAP does not identify the cause of
this fault, then it may be necessary to reload the NVM from the MRD.
Make copies/prints in order to create the jam condition. Pull out the Fuser/Inverter Drawer
(Handle 3) and check both the position of the jammed sheet in the Inverter and the position of
the image on the sheet. (Use the trail edge of the sheet for the checks, because the lead edge
could be twisted or damaged as a result of the jam.)
Either the sheet or the image is significantly skewed.
Y
N
In Faults, select [Last 40 Faults]. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
A 12-102 fault occurred when the 10-115 fault occurred.
Y
N
In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and
[Type 2] tests. Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
The tests fail with an 03-828 or 03-829 code.
Y
N
Check for obstructions in the Inverter which would prevent normal paper movement.
An obstruction was found and removed.
Y
N
Open Paper Trays 1 and 2. Check Area 3E for sheets of paper.
One or more sheets were found in area 3E.
Y
N
Do the following:
10-115
Check the Close Nip Link PL 6.3 Item 2 and the Reversing Baffle PL 6.3 Item 4 for damage.
Ensure the Feed/Reverse Roll Idler PL 6.3 Item 14 is not damaged or missing, and is seated correctly.
Ensure the Close Nip Solenoid Spring and the Reverse Drive
Solenoid Spring are not broken.
Clear the sheets from Area 3E. Run enough copies to ensure the problem
is corrected.
If the problem continues, do the following:
A
B
C
D
E
Status Indicator RAPs
If the problem continues after performing the above actions, use this RAP.
Check the Inverter Drive Assembly PL 6.3 Item 17. It should pivot
freely without binding.
Run enough copies to ensure the problem is corrected. If 10-115 faults occur
again, check the Duplex Gate PL 6.3 Item 12 for damage.
Go to the RAP for the fault code. (03-828) (03-829)
Go to the 12-102 RAP.
NOTE: After correcting the cause of the skew it may still be necessary to troubleshoot the 10115 fault, but the skew problem must be solved first.
Go to the 08-C Skewed Image RAP.
Check the number of copies since the Inverter or Feed/Reverse Roll has been replaced.
The Feed/Reverse Roll is glazed or the number of copies since the Inverter or Feed/
Reverse Roll has been replaced is greater than 2.5 million.
May 2003
2-418
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
N
Load 65 lb. (175 gsm) or 110 lb. (200 gsm) paper (use the largest paper size available) in
Tray 1. When the Tray 1 information dialog box is displayed on the UI, select [Change
Description]. Ensure the Stock Type is set to [Heavyweight]. Select [Save], then select
[Confirm].
Program a job with the following attributes:
2 - 2 Sided
50 copies
Check the position of both Duplex Guides (Figure 2). The Top edge of the
Duplex Guides should not be visible.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-419
10-115
10-115
May 2003
2-420
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-421
10-115
1
Remove Paper Trays 1 through 4.
2
Remove the Paper Tray 2 Rail.
3
Reinstall the Paper Tray 2 Rail. Ensure
the top edge of the Duplex Guides are
under the metal inverter pan.
NOTE: If the top of the Duplex Guides
are not under the metal inverter pan,
paper extending downward from the
inverter will catch on the top of the
Duplex Guides,
10-115
May 2003
2-422
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: After correcting the cause of the skew it may still be necessary to troubleshoot the
10-120 fault, but the skew problem must be corrected first.
The lead edge of a not inverted sheet arrived late at the Inverter Exit Sensor (S5).
The fault code suffix identifies whether the job is simplex or duplex:
B
Go to the 08-C Skewed Image RAP.
Initial Actions
Clean the Inverter Entrance Sensor and the Inverter Exit Sensor.
Ensure the Inverter Entrance Sensor PL 6.3 Item 6 and the Inverter Exit Sensor PL 6.3
Item 6 are mounted correctly. If the sensor cannot be seated correctly due to a broken
mount, replace the sensor.
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in the tray the customer was using when the jam
occurred
If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in the tray the customer was
using when the jam occurred.
If the problem continues after performing the above actions, use this RAP.
Check the Inverter Exit Roll Idler and the spring for damage and correct
position.
Check the Inverter Entrance Gate PL 6.3 Item 13 for dislodged or damaged fingers, and damage to the main portion of the gate.
May 2003
2-423
10-120
10-120
May 2003
2-424
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Ensure the paper the customer is using meets specifications. Refer to the Product Specifications , Paper Specifications Table in General Procedures.
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in the tray the customer was using when the jam
occurred.
If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in the tray the customer was
using when the jam occurred.
If the problem continues after performing the above actions, use this RAP.
NOTE: Intermittent operation of the Transport Drive Motor and/or incorrect Nip 1/2 Drive Belt
tension in the Finisher may cause intermittent 10-125 and 10-126 faults.
Obstructions
Remove the Upper Rear Cover and the Lower Rear Cover of the Finisher.
Observe the Transport Drive Motor . The Transport Drive Motor rotates.
Y
N
Go to the 12-AR Transport Drive Motor Checkout.
D
Check the Inverter/Fuser Drive by rotating the Fuser Jam Clearance Knob and
observing the Inverter Drive gears.
The Inverter drive gears rotate.
Y
N
Pull out the Inverter/Fuser Drawer and check the Inverter Drive Gear.
The Inverter Drive Gear is damaged or worn
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
jammed
The Nip 1/2 Drive Belt PL 8.3 Item 10 for correct tension and damage.
The pulley on the Nip 1 Drive Shaft PL 8.4 Item 2 for damage.
The actuator for the Finisher Entrance Sensor PL 8.3 Item 15 for wear (See
Figure 1). Replace the sensor if the check indicated excessive wear.
The Outboard Gate Bushing PL 6.3 Item 19 and the Inboard Gate
Bushing PL 6.3 Item 20 on the Duplex Gate for damage or wear.
May 2003
2-425
10-125
The trail edge of an inverted sheet going to the output device was not detected by the Inverter
Exit Sensor (S5).
The fault code suffix identifies whether the job is simplex or duplex:
Initial Actions
Ensure the paper the customer is using meets specifications. Refer to the Product Specifications , Paper Specifications Table in General Procedures.
NOTE: Intermittent operation of the Transport Drive Motor and/or incorrect Nip 1/2 Drive Belt
tension in the Finisher may cause intermittent 10-125 and 10-126 faults.
Check the jammed sheets for damage such as nicks, dings, or dog-ears.
The jammed sheets are damaged.
Y
N
Check the jammed sheet for a skewed image.
Check the image on the jammed sheets. The image is skewed.
Y
N
Program a 1-2 sided job, 10 copies.
A 10-127 fault occurs.
Y
N
Check the exact location of the jammed sheet.
The lead edge of the sheet is in Area 5 or Area 5B of the Finisher.
Y
N
Check the Inverter/Fuser Drive by rotating the Fuser Jam Clearance Knob
and observing the Inverter Drive gears.
The Inverter drive gears rotate.
Y
N
Pull out the Fuser/Inverter Drawer and check the Inverter Drive Gear.
The Inverter Drive Gear is damaged or worn.
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
Replace the Inverter Drive Gear PL 6.2C.
A Decurler is installed
Y
N
Check the Exit Baffle for the following:
Obstructions
10-125, 10-126
May 2003
2-426
E
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
E
Go to 10-A Decurler Checkout Procedure.
Do the following:
Remove the Upper Rear Cover and the Lower Rear Cover of the Finisher.
The Nip 1/2 Drive Belt PL 8.3 Item 10 for correct tension and damage.
The pulley on the Nip 1 Drive Shaft PL 8.4 Item 2 for damage.
The actuator for the Finisher Entrance Sensor for wear (See Figure 1).
Replace the sensor if the check indicated excessive wear
The Inverter Exit Roll PL 6.3 Item 7 for glazing and cracking.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-427
10-126
C
Check the Exit Baffle for the following:
Obstructions
The fault code suffix identifies whether the job is simplex or duplex:
Initial Actions
Ensure the paper the customer is using meets specifications. Refer to the Product Specifications , Paper Specifications Table in General Procedures.
An obstruction between the Duplex Gate PL 6.3 Item 12 and the Finisher.
The Outboard Gate Bushing PL 6.3 Item 19 and the Inboard Gate Bushing PL
6.3 Item 20 on the Duplex Gate for damage or wear.
Check the jammed sheets for damage such as nicks, dings, or dog-ears.
The jammed sheets are damaged.
Y
N
Check the image on the jammed sheets.
The image is skewed.
Y
N
Program a job with the following attributes:
2-sided
Quantity of 10
Obstructions
The Outboard Gate Bushing PL 6.3 Item 19 and the Inboard Gate
Bushing PL 6.3 Item 20 on the Duplex Gate for binding.
A
B
C
Status Indicator RAPs
10-127
May 2003
2-428
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The lead edge of a sheet to be inverted arrived early at the Inverter Exit Sensor (S5).
Software received a value of less than 5 from the Thermistor, which indicates the circuit is
open.
The fault code suffix identifies whether the job is simplex or duplex:
Procedure
If the customer has not already done so, PO/PO and reseat the electrical connections of the
Fuser Module.
The occurrence of this fault normally means the Inverter Entrance Gate failed to divert the
paper into the Inverter.
Check for obstructions in the Inverter which would prevent movement of the Inverter
Entrance Gate.
Ensure the Inverter Exit Sensor is seated correctly in its mounting holes.
If there are no obstructions, and the sensor is seated correctly, replace the Inverter PL
6.2A Item 2.
Reinstall the original Fuser Module if it was replaced with a different one for troubleshooting.
Measure the resistance of the thermistor circuit between P26-1 and P26-2 (Flag 1).
The resistance is between 1K Ohms (thermistor hot) and 20K Ohms (thermistor cold).
Y
N
Go to Flag 1 and check the wiring of the FUSER TEMP signal and the FUSER REF signal
for an open circuit (greater than 20K ohms) or a short circuit (less than 1K ohms). Carefully inspect the physical condition of both halves of the Fuser Module DC Drawer Connector, PL 1.6 Item 6, and replace if necessary.
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-429
10-130, 10-300
10-300
May 2003
2-430
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
03-340 faults are logged.
Y
N
Go to the 03-809 RAP.
Go to the 03-340 RAP.
Wait for the machine to warm up and come to Ready, or declare the fault again.
10-301 is declared again.
Y
N
The problem was solved by the PO/PO and/or reseating the Fuser Module. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Check the AC line voltage with the machine switched on.
The voltage is greater than the minimum allowable voltage for the market region.
(Refer to the Product Specifications for specific voltages.)
Y
N
Inform the customer the line voltage is too low.
Select [NVM] [NVM Tool] [Mark Service] [F2IOT] or [F1IOT]. Check the Fuser NVM values in
locations 502 through 521, and locations 546 through 548. Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool].
NOTE: Select [F2IOT] for 55 PPM and 65 PPM machines, or [F1IOT] for 40 PPM machines.
The Current Value is the same as the Nominal Value for each location.
Y
N
Reset the value(s) to the correct number using [NVM tab , NVM Tool].
Exit Diagnostics for the NVM changes to take effect.
10-301 is declared again.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Switch the power Off, wait 10 seconds, then switch the power On in order to reset the
control logic.
10-301 is declared again.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
Go to GP42 CSE Fuser Rebuild/Return Process, before replacing the Fuser Module.
If the problem continues, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
Go to GP42 CSE Fuser Rebuild/Return Process, before replacing the Fuser Module.
If the problem continues, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
May 2003
2-431
10-301
C
Measure the resistance of the Fuser Heat Lamp by measuring across the outside terminals of
the AC Connector.
The resistance is less than 10 ohms.
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
Reinstall the Fuser Module, and firmly seat the Fuser/Inverter Drawer. Switch the power On
and install the Interlock Cheater. Visually check for Fuser Heat Lamp operation.
The lamp is on (steady, not pulsating).
Y
N
Check the [Last 40 Faults] for instances of 03-340, 03-809 and/or 10-303 faults. Enter
[Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
03-340 and/or 03-809 faults are logged.
Y
N
10-303 faults are logged.
Y
N
Check the IOT Change Tag Matrix.
TAG 105, Flicker Control, is installed.
Y
N
Measure the continuity between P1-7and P1-8 on the Fuser Module connector.
Continuity is measured between P1-7 and P1-8.
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
Connect the meter leads from TH24 to TH27 on the SCAM PWB.
Monitor the voltage for 4 minutes.
The voltage goes to +5 VDC after 4 minutes (indicating the correct
SCAM PWB control signal for the Fuser SSR)
Y
N
Go to Flag 2 on Figure 3. Check the wires for an open circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Replace the AC Distribution Panel PL 1.2A Item 1.
Do the following:
Switch the power [OFF].
Switch the power [OFF]. Reconnect P27 to the SCAM PWB and switch the
power [ON]. Measure the voltage between TH53 and TH13 on the SCAM
PWB
10-301
F
The voltage measured is +5 VDC.
Y
N
Switch the power [OFF] and disconnect the Power Cord. Go to Flag 2 on
Figure 2. Check the Flicker Control DC Harness PL 1.2A Item 12 for an
open circuit or a short circuit.
If the harness is good, replace the Flicker Control PWB PL 1.2A Item 11.
Replace the Flicker Control PWB PL 1.2A Item 11.
Go to the 10-303 On-Site Diagnostic Procedure (XE).
Switch the power Off, wait 10 seconds, then switch the power On in order to reset the
control logic.
10-301 is declared again.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Measure the voltage between TH53 and TH13. The voltage measured is +5
VDC.
Y
N
Replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
D
E
F
Status Indicator RAPs
The Current Value is the same as the Nominal Value for each location.
Y
N
Reset the value(s) to the correct number using [NVM tab , NVM Tool].
Exit Diagnostics for the NVM changes to take effect.
10-301 is declared again.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
May 2003
2-432
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-433
10-301
10-301
May 2003
2-434
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-435
10-301
TH13
TH53
TH24
10-301
May 2003
2-436
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
AC Connector
P1-8
P1-7
P1-1
P1-3
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-437
10-301
Procedure
Check the following items as possible causes of the fault.
Damaged or dirty Fuser AC Connector (which causes a reduction of the actual AC voltage
applied to the fuser heat rod).
High moisture paper (which takes more heat out of the fuser than dry paper).
The machine may be operating in a cold environment. The minimum ambient temperature
for reliable machine operation is 50 F / 10 C.
Select [NVM] [NVM Tool] [Mark Service] [F2IOT] or [F1IOT]. Check the Fuser NVM values
in locations 502 through 521, and locations 546 through 548. Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool].
NOTE: Select [F2IOT] for 55 PPM and 65 PPM machines, or [F1IOT] for 40 PPM
machines.
The Current Value should be the same as the Nominal Value for each location. If necessary, reset the value(s) to the correct number.
The Fuser Module may be defective. If necessary, replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item
1.
Go to GP42 CSE Fuser Rebuild/Return Process, before replacing the Fuser Module.
10-302
May 2003
2-438
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
N
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
The Control Logic has detected the Fuser has reached the overtemperature limit.
Connect the meter leads from TH24 to TH13 on the SCAM PWB.
Monitor the voltage for 4 minutes.
The voltage goes to +5 VDC after 4 minutes (indicating the correct SCAM PWB control signal for the Fuser SSR)
Y
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the wires for a short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the SCAM PWB PL 1.5 Item 6.
Switch the power Off, then unplug the Power Cord from the wall outlet.
Set the meter to measure AC voltage, then measure the voltage at the wall outlet.
Compare the voltage measurement to the voltage specification for the machine model
and the market region as listed in the Product Specifications .
Inform the customer the AC input power is not in specification. DO NOT connect the
power cord to the wall outlet until the problem is corrected.
Replace the AC Distribution Panel PL 1.2A Item 1. The over-voltage condition damaged components within the AC Distribution Panel.
Set the meter to measure AC voltage, then measure the voltage at the wall outlet.
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1. The over-voltage condition significantly
shortened the life of the Fuser.
Compare the voltage measurement to the voltage specification for the machine model
and the market region as listed in the Product Specifications .
Do the following:
Check the DC Drawer Connector, PL 1.6 Item 6, and the Fuser Module DC Connector PL
6.2B Item 3, for damage.
Inform the customer the AC input power is not in specification. DO NOT connect the
power cord to the wall outlet until the problem is corrected.
Replace the AC Distribution Panel PL 1.2A Item 1. The over-voltage condition damaged components within the AC Distribution Panel.
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1. The over-voltage condition significantly
shortened the life of the Fuser.
The DC Drawer Connector and the Fuser Module DC Connector are free from damage.
Y
N
Replace the DC Drawer Connector, PL 1.6 Item 6, and/or the Fuser Module DC Connector PL 6.2B Item 3.
Firmly push in the Fuser/Inverter Drawer. Switch the power On.
In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and [Type 2]
tests. Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
The tests fail with an 03-xxx code.
Y
N
Select [NVM] [NVM Tool] [Mark Service] [F2IOT] or [F1IOT]. Check the Fuser NVM values
in locations 502 through 521, and locations 546 through 548. Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool].
The Current Value is the same as the Nominal Value for each location.
Y
N
Reset the value(s) to the correct number using [NVM tab , NVM Tool].
Exit Diagnostics for the NVM changes to take effect.
10-303 is declared again.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
Measure the continuity between P1-7 and P1-8 on the Fuser Module.
Continuity is measured between P1-7 and P1-8.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Do the following:
Check the DC Drawer Connector, PL 1.6 Item 6, and the Fuser Module DC Connector PL
6.2B Item 3, for damage.
The DC Drawer Connector and the Fuser Module DC Connector are free from damage.
Y
N
Replace the DC Drawer Connector, PL 1.6 Item 6, and/or the Fuser Module DC Connector PL 6.2B Item 3.
Firmly push in the Fuser/Inverter Drawer. Switch the power On.
In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and [Type 2]
tests. Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
The tests fail with an 03-xxx code.
Y
N
Select [NVM] [NVM Tool] [Mark Service] [F2IOT] or [F1IOT]. Check the Fuser NVM values
in locations 502 through 521, and locations 546 through 548. Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool].
The Current Value is the same as the Nominal Value for each location.
B
May 2003
2-439
10-303
B
Y
N
Reset the value(s) to the correct number using [NVM tab , NVM Tool].
Exit Diagnostics for the NVM changes to take effect.
10-303 is declared again.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
10-303
May 2003
2-440
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-441
10-303
10-303
May 2003
2-442
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-443
10-303
TH13
TH53
TH24
TH27
10-303
May 2003
2-444
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The DC Drawer Connector, PL 1.6 Item 6, may be damaged and not mating correctly.
The Fuser Module DC Connector PL 6.2B Item 3, may be damaged and not mating
correctly.
P1-8
P1-7
P1-1
P1-3
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-445
10-303, 10-350
10-350
May 2003
2-446
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Procedure
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
Go to GP42 CSE Fuser Rebuild/Return Process, before replacing the Fuser Module.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-447
10-351
Fault Code, 10-353, indicates the Fuser Module was previously initialized on a machine of a
different configuration. Either the Fuser Module was initialized on a DC/ST and then installed in
a LP/Docutech 65 or it was initialized on a LP/Docutech 65 and then installed on a DC/ST.
Procedure
No action needs to be taken for this fault code.
In Diagnostic Navigator, select the [Configuration] tab. Select [System, Imaging, and IOT
Configuration], then select the [System] tab. Ensure the Market Region is correct for this
machine.
Ensure the correct Fuser Module part number was installed for the machine market
region and service plan (sold, non-sold). Refer to PL 6.2A Item 1 for the correct Fuser
Module part numbers.
10-352, 10-353
May 2003
2-448
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Ensure the DC Drawer Connector PL 1.6 Item 6, is not damaged and is mating correctly.
Ensure the Fuser Module DC Connector PL 6.2B Item 3, is not damaged and is mating correctly.
Ensure the Fuser Module is seated correctly on the Fuser/Inverter Drawer, and the
drawer is fully seated in the machine.
Check for an open circuit at Flag 1. If the wiring is OK, replace the Distribution PWB
PL 1.5 Item 7.
The DADF may not be grounded correctly. Go to GP44 DADF Ground Checkout.
If the DADF is grounded correctly, check all the connectors on the Distribution PWB. Ensure
they are seated correctly and there are no loose pins or damage. If the connectors are good,
replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-449
10-354
10-354
May 2003
2-450
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
If the Fuser Module is manufactured by Xerox, the CRUM is internal to the Fuser Module.
If the Fuser Module is of competitive manufacture, it does not have an internal CRUM.
When a competitive CRU is used, the machine must have an In-Line CRUM Bypass Harness installed, which is an in-line wiring harness with two CRUM chips: one for the Xerographic Module and the other for the Fuser Module.
Check for the installation of the In-Line CRUM Harness (See Figure 1 for the location of the
harness).
The In-Line CRUM Bypass Harness is installed.
Y
N
Install the CRUM Enablement Kit PL 1.2A Item 10.
Replace the CRUM Enablement Kit PL 1.2A Item 10.
P60/
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-451
10-355
Procedure
Ensure that the correct Decurler (TAG 279) is installed in the machine. Refer to PL 6.1D for the
correct Decurler part number.
The correct Decurler is installed
Y
N
Install the TAG 279 Decurler PL 6.1D.
Do the following:
Select [NVM] [NVM Tool] [Mark Service] [<All>]. Check the value in location 529 Exit
Decurler Config Type. Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool].
Using [NVM tab , NVM Tool], Ensure the NVM value in location 529 is set to one of the following:
0 if no Decurler is installed
10-357/358
May 2003
2-452
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The Enabled Decurler rolls did not separate within 650 ms after the control logic generated the
'Decurler Home' signal.
For information on the operation of the Exit Decurler (TAG 279), select More Information.
The Decurler does not match the expected configuration or is malfunctioning.
NOTE: With Tag 022, the Decurler is disconnected, and it is expected the fault logs will be full
of 10-705 faults. If the machine being serviced has Tag 022 (the Decurler is disconnected),
ignore 10-705 faults because they will constantly occur with the Decurler disconnected.
Check the Decurler electrical and mechanical connections. The Decurler is plugged in.
Y
N
Connect the Decurler. Make copies/prints to ensure the problem is corrected. Return to
Service Call Procedures.
In IIOC Controller Tests, select [IIOC Self Tests] and [IOT], then run the [Type 1] and [Type 2]
tests. Enter [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
The tests fail with an 03-835 fault code.
Y
N
Remove the Rear Cover in order to observe the Decurler/OCT Drive Bracket and related
mechanical parts. In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor],
and [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The Decurler Drive Belt and the clutch and gears on the Decurler/OCT Drive
Bracket are turning.
Y
N
Exit Component Control. Switch the machine power Off. Isolate the problem to one
of the following parts:
Check the Decurler Drive Belt for damage, wear, correct tension and routing.
Check the Decurler/OCT Drive Bracket for damage and one-way clutch operation.
Check the Fuser Drive Motor for damaged gears or the pulley that drives the
Decurler Drive Belt, and for correct operation of the Decurler Drive Belt Idler.
A one-way clutch transmits the drive through the Decurler/OCT Bracket. Observe the
gear at the back of the bracket which transmits the drive to the Decurler Clutch.
The Decurler Clutch is receiving drive from the Decurler/OCT Drive Gear.
Y
N
Exit Component Control. Replace the Decurler/OCT Drive Bracket PL 7.1 Item 4.
Replace the Decurler PL 6.1A Item 4.
Decurler PL 6.1D.
The drive gear on the Decurler Cam Drive Motor for damage.
May 2003
2-453
10-705, 10-706
A
Check the position of the Decurler Position Sensor.
The sensor is in the correct position.
Y
N
Reseat the Decurler Position Sensor in the correct position.
If the sensor cannot be reseated due to a broken mount, replace the Decurler Position
Sensor PL 6.1D.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Decurler Position Sensor], then [Monitor
Input].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The display indicates the state of the sensor changed.
Y
N
Go to Flag 3. Check the circuit of the Decurler Position Sensor for a short circuit or an
open circuit.
Repair the wiring or replace the defective component:
Decurler PL 6.1D.
Decurler PL 6.1D.
10-706
May 2003
2-454
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-455
10-706
P5
P4
Decurler Home Sensor
P3
Decurler Position
Sensor
Decurler Gate
Solenoid
10-706
May 2003
2-456
P137
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Value in Mark
Service Location 529 Valid with the following Output Devices
Multi-Function Finisher
Multi-Function Finisher
Disk Finisher
Disk Finisher
Old Decurler
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-457
10-706
Switch the power [Off] and remove the Xerographic Module to gain access to P/
J116.
Ensure all machine covers are in place and the Front Door is closed.
10-720, 03-312, 03-313, and 03-314 faults occur after reseating the connector.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Go to the 03-A Common SCB Circuit RAP.
10-720
May 2003
2-458
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-459
10-720
10-720
May 2003
2-460
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: Ignore these faults unless you have a problem with top edge registration.
NOTE: For duplex TEER systems using early versions of firmware, faults will not be logged in
[Last 40 Faults], This will be true for most 240/255/265/460/470 machines (upgrades made
starting March 2001 time frame). In these cases the [Fault Counters] must be checked and
used to determine if TEER faults have been and/or are occurring.
10-722: The TEER Sensor LEDs did not illuminate, or the TEER Sensor photosensors did
not sense light during the TEER calibration.
10-724: Indicates the TEER Sensor sensed light when the LEDs were off.
10-726: During calibration, the center LED in the TEER Sensor is switched on and the
photosensors are 'read' to determine the electrical 'center' of the photosensor array. This
failure indicates the 'center' of the photosensor array is too far out of range for TEER Sensor to be reliable.
10-730: Excess transitions have been seen or the LED(s) have reached maximum intensity during calibration, indicating the TEER sensor is dirty.
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the Duplex TEER PWB Kit PL 6.1B Item 20. In TEER Diagnostics, select [Group 1
Tests], [Communications Test], TEER unit [Duplex], then [Start]. Enter [Paper tab, TEER Diagnostic]
Check the test results window 10-722, 10-724, 10-726, 10-730, or 10-732 faults were
declared.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures
Replace the Duplex Transport PL 6.1A Item 2.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
NOTE: This fault will not cause the software to use default readings. The readings taken
by the TEER Sensor will be used.
10-732: Reset fault. Indicates the TEER Sensor has failed or there was a static charge
build-up.
Software will use the default value for duplex top edge registration until there is a successful
calibration of the Duplex TEER Sensor.
This procedure must be performed On-Site.
Ensure the Duplex TEER Sensor is not blocked by a piece of paper or other object.
Ensure all machine covers are in place and the Front Door is closed.
Switch the power [Off] then switch the power [On] (upon power up the Duplex TEER Sensor will attempt to calibrate).
In TEER Diagnostics, select [Group 1 Tests], [Communications Test], TEER unit [Duplex], then
[Start]. Enter [Paper tab, TEER Diagnostic].
Check the test results window. 10-722, 10-724, 10-726, 10-730, or 10-732 faults were
declared.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Clean the TEER Sensors and LEDs. In TEER Diagnostics, select [Group 1 Tests], [Communications Test], TEER unit [Duplex], then [Start]. Enter [Paper tab, TEER Diagnostic].
NOTE: The Duplex TEER Sensor can be easily cleaned with a cotton swab inserted into the
access hole at front left side of Duplex Transport.
Check the test results window. 10-722, 10-724, 10-726, 10-730, or 10-732 faults were
declared.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-461
NOTE: Ignore these faults unless you have a problem with top edge registration.
Initial Actions
Software reads the TEER Sensor output for each duplex sheet. A 10-728 or 10-734 fault is
declared when the output of the TEER Sensor is not in the range of expected results (>9mm)
or paper is not present when reading is taken (Lead edge late to TEER sensor).
Software will use the default value for duplex top edge registration for each sheet associated
with this fault.
Excessive curl may cause 10-125, 10-126, and 12-113 jams. For machines equipped with a
TAG 279 Decurler, go to GP49 Exit Decurler to increase the amount of decurling.
Procedure
A TAG 279 Decurler is installed (460/470 only).
Y
N
Do the following:
Initial Actions
Do the following:
Ensure there are no obstructions in the Deculer paper path and Finisher entrance.
Ensure the Paper Tray side guides are in the correct position.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output
On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in the tray the customer was using when the fault
occurred. If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in the tray the customer was using.
The Decurler Drive Belt moves while the Fuser Drives Test is running.
Y
N
Check the following components to determine why the belt is not moving.
If the problem continues after performing the above actions, use this RAP.
Check the Decurler Drive Belt PL 7.1 Item 7 for damage, wear, correct tension
and routing.
Check the Decurler/OCT Drive Bracket PL 7.1 Item 4 for damage and one-way
clutch operation.
Check the Fuser Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 3 for damaged gears or the pulley
that drives the Decurler Drive Belt, and for correct operation of the Decurler
Drive Belt Idler.
In Faults, select [Fault Counters] and/or [Last 40 Faults]. Note all 10-728, 10-734, and 08115.99 faults that are listed in the Fault Counters / Last 40 Faults and occurred approximately the same time.
NOTE: For duplex TEER systems using early versions of firmware, faults will not be
logged in [Last 40 Faults], This will be true for most 240/255/265/460/470 machines
(upgrades made starting March 2001 time frame). In these cases the [Fault Counters]
must be checked and used to determine if TEER faults have been and/or are occurring.
Remove, turn over, and reload the paper in the paper tray. Run copies/prints to determine
if the jams still occur.
The paper jams in the Decurler nip after flipping the paper or running different
paper
Y
N
The problem is paper related. Check the paper curl. If excessive, replace the paper
with a new ream that meets the specification and has not been opened.
Faults in Last 40
Action
10-728 Only
10-734 Only
Do the following:
Ensure there are no obstructions in the Deculer paper path and Finisher entrance.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The Decurler Drive Bracket rotates while the Fuser Drive Motor is running.
Y
N
Check the following components to determine why the belt is not moving.
Check the Decurler Drive Belt PL 7.1 for damage, wear, correct tension and routing.
Check the pulley on the Decurler Drive Bracket PL 7.1 for damage.
Check Fuser Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 3 for damaged gears or the pulley that drives
the Decurler Drive Belt, and for correct operation of the Decurler Drive Belt Idler.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
May 2003
2-462
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Check the drive gear on the Decurler Drive Bracket for damage.
The drive gear is free from damage.
Y
N
Replace the Decurler Drive Bracket PL 7.1.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Decurler Sol/ Clutch Reset], then [CycleOutput].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Observe the Decurler Gate Solenoid. The Decurler Gate Solenoid energizes in Component Control.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the circuit of the Decurler Gate Solenoid for an open circuit.
Switch the power [Off] and undock the Finisher. Manually actuate the Decurler Gate, moving it
between the upper position and the lower position.
The Decurler Gate moves between the upper position and the lower position freely without binding.
Y
N
If the Solenoid is the source of binding, replace the Decurler Gate Solenoid PL 6.1D.
If the solenoid is not binding, replace the Decurler PL 6.1D.
The Decurler is mounted correctly to the IOT Frame and the drive gear on the Decurler is
meshing correctly with the gear on the Decurler Drive Bracket.
Y
N
Ensure the Decurler is mounted correctly to the IOT Frame.
Replace the Decurler PL 6.1D.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-463
10-A
P5
P4
Decurler Home Sensor
P3
Decurler Position
Sensor
Decurler Gate
Solenoid
P137
10-A
May 2003
2-464
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-465
10-A
10-A
May 2003
2-466
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The lead edge of a sheet is late to the OCT Tray Full Sensor.
N
An 10-115 fault occurred when the 12-101.60 fault occurred.
Y
N
Go to the 10-120 Inverter Exit Jam RAP.
Go to the 10-115 Inverter Exit Jam RAP.
(11Jan2001)
Switch the power [Off] and remove the Offsetting Catch Tray.
Ensure the connector for the Dual Decurler is plugged into the Decurler. Refer
to Figure 2.
Reinstall the Offsetting Catch Tray and Switch the power [On].
Enter Tools.
Exit Tools.
Make copies and check for 12-101.60 faults. A 12-101.60 fault occurs.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Clear all paper from the Catch Tray, the Offsetting Catch Tray paper path, and the IOT
paper path.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
The Offsetting Catch Tray Drive Rolls rotate when the Fuser Motor energizes.
Y
N
Observe the gears on the Decurler/OCT Drive Bracket.
The Decurler/OCT
Bracket is turning when the Fuser Drive Motor energizes.
Y
N
Check the following:
Drive
Inspect the OCT drives. Replace the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly PL 8.1 Item 1, if
necessary.
Enter Tools.
The Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly Drive Rolls for contamination, wear, and damage.
The Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly Idlers for contamination, wear, damage, and correct
tension.
Exit Tools.
If any of the drive rolls are damaged or worn, or if the idlers are damaged, worn, or have the
incorrect tension, Replace the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly PL 8.1 Item 1.
Make copies and check for 12-101.60 faults. A 12-101.60 fault occurs.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Go to the 12-101 OCT Checkout Procedure.
An 10-101 fault occurred when the 12-101.60 fault occurred.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-467
12-101.60
12-101.60
May 2003
2-468
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
Go to 03-841 IIOC Module W1A1 Failed The IIOC Controller Test
Do the following:
Switch the power [Off], then switch the power [On] to reset the Control Logic.
NOTE: Leave the OCT Offset Motor energized in Component Control in order
to make the next check.
Observe the Offsetting Catch Tray when the OCT Offset Motor energizes.
The Catch Tray moves when the OCT Offset Motor energizes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
The check of the wiring at Flag 2 is good.
Y
N
Replace the OCT IIOC Harness PL 8.1 Item 2.
Replace the OCT IIOC PWB PL 8.1 Item 3.
If the problem continues, Replace the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly PL
8.1 Item 1.
Observe the movement of the Offsetting Catch Tray when the OCT Offset
Motor energizes. The Catch Tray offsets to the front position and to the
rear position at a constant rate of speed.
Y
N
Replace the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly PL 8.1 Item 1.
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
The check of the wiring at Flag 1 is good.
Y
N
Replace the OCT IIOC Harness PL 8.1 Item 2.
Replace the OCT IIOC PWB PL 8.1 Item 3.
If the problem continues, replace the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly PL 8.1
Item 1.
Go to 03-841 IIOC Module W1A1 Failed The IIOC Controller Test.
A
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-469
12-213.60
12-213.60
May 2003
2-470
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Use this RAP to identify Offsetting Catch Tray problems and the action to take if the problem
occurs.
Ensure the mounting hook for the Offsetting Catch Tray is attached correctly to the IOT frame,
the Catch Tray is seated correctly on the Offsetting Catch Tray, and the Offsetting Catch Tray is
closed securely.
The problem of incorrect stacking in the Offsetting Catch Tray continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Go to the 12-D OCT Stacking RAP.
The prints or sets of prints are not stacking correctly in the Catch Tray.
Ensure the mounting hook for the Offsetting Catch Tray is attached correctly to the IOT frame,
the Catch Tray is seated correctly on the Offsetting Catch Tray, and the Offsetting Catch Tray is
closed securely.
The problem of jams continues after ensuring the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly and
the Catch Tray are installed correctly and closed securely.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Problem
Action
There are streaks or smudges on the image. The Go to the 12-B OCT Print Damage RAP.
paper is nicked, dogeared, torn, or dinged.
The Catch Tray is full with no message on the UI Go to the 12-G OCT Tray Status RAP.
indicating the Catch Tray is full. The message on
the UI indicates the Catch Tray is full when the
Catch Tray is not full.
A static problem in the Offsetting Catch Tray may If you suspect static is causing a problem
cause one or more of the problems listed below: in the Offsetting Catch Tray, Go to 12-H
OCT Static Checkout.
A
Remove the source of the contamination.
May 2003
2-471
12-A, 12-B
The sets of copies are not being offset in the Offsetting Catch Tray.
The copies or sets of copies are not stacking correctly in the Offsetting Catch Tray.
Initial Actions
(11Jan2001)
If the problem occurred immediately after installing the Offsetting Catch Tray, have the customer perform the following:
Initial Actions
Ensure that all packing material is removed from the Offsetting Catch Tray.
Check the air flow at the customer's site. Excessive air flow may cause poor stacking in the Offsetting Catch Tray.
Ensure the Offsetting Catch Tray connector is connected securely to P69 on the IOT.
If the problem occurred immediately after installing the Offsetting Catch Tray, have the customer perform the following:
Procedure
In Faults, select [Last 40 Faults]. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
Check for 12-213 OCT Offset Motor Faults. There is a 12-213 OCT Offset Motor Fault in
the Last 40 Faults.
Y
N
Go to the 12-J Output Device Configuration for Third Party Service. If the problem continues after configuring the output device, replace the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly PL
8.1 Item 1.
Ensure that all packing material is removed from the Offsetting Catch Tray.
Ensure the Offsetting Catch Tray connector is connected securely to P69 on the IOT.
Ensure the mounting hook for the Offsetting Catch Tray is attached correctly to the IOT
frame, and the Catch Tray is seated correctly on the Offsetting Catch Tray.
Close the Offsetting Catch Tray securely and switch the power [On].
Switch the power [Off] and remove the Offsetting Catch Tray.
Ensure the connector for the Dual Decurler is plugged into the Decurler. Refer to Figure 2.
Reinstall the Offsetting Catch Tray and Switch the power [On].
Enter Tools.
Exit Tools.
Make copies and observe the sheets as they are stacked in the Offsetting Catch Tray
The problem of poor stacking continues.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
12-C, 12-D
May 2003
2-472
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Enter Tools.
Exit Tools.
Make copies and observe the sheets as they are stacked in the Offsetting Catch Tray The
problem of poor stacking continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Go to the 12-D OCT Checkout Procedure
vertical
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-473
12-D
Make copies and observe the sheets as they are stacked in the Offsetting Catch Tray
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
(11Jan2001)
Initial Actions
Check the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly paper path and the Catch Tray for obstructions.
Ensure the mounting hook for the Offsetting Catch Tray is attached correctly to the IOT
frame, the Catch Tray is seated correctly on the Offsetting Catch Tray, and the Offsetting
Catch Tray is closed securely.
Check each OCT Stacking Finger. The OCT Stacking Fingers are free from damage.
Y
N
Replace the damaged OCT Stacking Finger PL 8.1 Item 9.
Check the prints in the Offsetting Catch Tray. The prints are stacked incorrectly in the
Catch Tray or are stacked higher than the output drives of the Offsetting Catch Tray
Assembly.
Y
N
Run the [Paper tab , Fuser Drives Test].
The Fuser Drives Test passes.
Y
N
The Dual Decurler may not be installed correctly, or the Decurler setting may incorrect, causing the paper to be late to the OCT.
Do the following:
Switch the power [Off] and remove the Offsetting Catch Tray.
Ensure the connector for the Dual Decurler is plugged into the Decurler. Refer
to Figure 2.
Reinstall the Offsetting Catch Tray and Switch the power [On].
Enter Tools.
Exit Tools.
Clear all paper from the Offsetting Catch Tray, the Offsetting Catch Tray paper path, and
the IOT paper path.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly Drive Rolls rotate when the Fuser Motor energizes.
Y
N
Observe the gears on the Decurler/OCT Drive Bracket.
The Decurler/OCT Drive
Bracket is turning when the Fuser Drive Motor energizes.
Y
N
Check the following:
Inspect the OCT drives. Replace the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly PL 8.1 Item 1,if necessary.
Check the following:
The Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly Drive Rolls for contamination, wear, and damage.
The Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly Idlers for contamination, wear, damage, and correct
tension.
If any of the drive rolls are damaged or worn, or if the idlers are damaged, worn, or have the
incorrect tension, Replace the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly PL 8.1 Item 1.
Make copies and observe the sheets as they are stacked in the Offsetting Catch
Tray The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Go to 12-E OCT Checkout Procedure.
The Decurler setting may be incorrect, causing the paper to be late to the OCT.
Do the following:
Enter Tools.
Exit Tools.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
12-E
May 2003
2-474
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Remove the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly and switch the power [On].
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise in the Offsetting Catch Tray when the Fuser Drive Motor energizes. The
noise occurs when the Fuser Drive Motor energizes with the Offsetting Catch Tray
Removed.
Y
N
Perform the following:
Ensure the connector for
the Dual Decurler is
plugged in.
Reinstall the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly and switch the power [On].
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output
On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise in the Offsetting Catch Tray when the Fuser Drive Motor energizes.
The noise occurs when the Fuser Drive Motor energizes.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-475
12-E, 12-F
Initial Actions
Check the air flow at the customer's site. Excessive air flow may cause poor stacking in the Offsetting Catch Tray and a false Offsetting Catch Tray full status message.
vertical
Go to the 12-J Output Device Configuration for Third Party Service. If the problem continues
after configuring the output device, go to the 12-H OCT Static Checkout RAP.
12-G
May 2003
2-476
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
If the Static Eliminator in the Offsetting Catch Tray or the Static Eliminator on the Dual Decurler
is damaged, worn, or not connected securely to the machine frame, the Offsetting Catch Tray
may exhibit one or more of the problems listed below:
Do the following:
Paper handling problems in the Offsetting Catch Tray (prevalent in environments where
the relative humidity is equal to or less than 25%).
Disconnect the Offsetting Catch Tray connector, P69 from the IOT.
When the Configuration Details screen is displayed on the UI, select [Yes] to accept
Output Device: None
After the machine completes the seft-test and is in the ready condition, switch the power
[Off].
Static
When the Configuration Details screen is displayed on the UI, select [Yes] to accept
Output Device: Offsetting Catch Tray.
Check the Static Eliminator on the Decurler for damage and wear. The Static Eliminator is
free from damage and wear.
Y
N
Replace the Decurler PL 6.1A Item 4.
Ensure there is continuity between the Static Eliminator on the Offsetting Catch Tray and the
frame of the IOT. Check the following:
The grounding clip on the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly for damage. Replace the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly PL 8.1 Item 1 if necessary.
The grounding clip on the Offsetting Catch Tray Assembly for corrosion.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-477
12-H, 12-J
12-H, 12-J
May 2003
2-478
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Do the following:
Disconnect the P3 from the Finisher Controller PWB, and switch the power
[On].
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-479
12-100
Do the following:
A 12-101 fault may be declared as the primary fault when the problem is actually in the IOT. If
the machine has a history of 10-101 or 10-115 faults, troubleshoot the cause of the IOT faults.
Initial Actions
If the 12-101 Fault occurred when the Top Tray of the Finisher was full, the Top Tray Full
Sensor may have failed. Go to 12-AJ. Finisher Top Tray Status RAP.
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in the tray the customer was using when the Finisher jam occurred.
If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in the tray the customer was
using when the Finisher jam occurred.
the Nip 1/2 Drive Belt PL 8.3 Item 10 for damage, wear, and correct
tension.
The pulley on the Nip 1 Drive Shaft PL 8.4 Item 2 for damage and
wear.
The pulley on the Nip 2 Drive Shaft PL 8.4 Item 2 for damage and
wear.
The pulley on the Transport Drive Motor PL 8.5 Item 14 for damage
and wear.
the Nip 1/2 Idler and the Dual Idler for damage and wear
Check the Finisher Diverter Gate. Ensure it is not obstructing the Finisher
Paper path.
If the Finisher Diverter Gate cannot be reseated correctly on the Finisher Transport Baffle, replace the Finisher Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item 11.
Go to 12-AF Finisher Noise RAP.
Do the following to gain access to the Finisher components.
Raise the Finisher Transport Baffle (Handle 5) to the jam clearance position.
Check the actuator of the Finisher Entrance Sensor The flag actuator for the Finisher
Entrance Sensor, is free from damage, and moves freely to block and unblock the
Finisher Entrance Sensor.
Check the Nip 1 Idlers for excessive wear and/or contamination. Ensure
the idlers are in the correct position. Install the Transport Baffle Idler Kit PL
8.3 Item 30, if necessary.
12-101
The Inverter Exit Roll, the Duplex Gate and the Inverter Exit Roll
Idler, on the Inverter.
Open the Finisher Top Cover Door and cheat the Finisher Interlock Switch.
Observe the Transport Drive Motor . The Transport Drive Motor rotates.
Y
N
Go to the 12-AR Transport Drive Motor Checkout.
A
B
C
D
Status Indicator RAPs
D
Ensure the mounting hooks for the Finisher are engaged in the IOT frame.
A
May 2003
2-480
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Y
N
Replace the Finisher Entrance Sensor PL 8.3 Item 15.
Check the actuator of the Finisher Entrance Sensor for excessive wear. See Figure 3.
The actuator is free from excessive wear.
Y
N
Replace the Finisher Entrance Sensor PL 8.3 Item 15.
Check the position of the Finisher Entrance Sensor. The Finisher Entrance Sensor is
seated correctly.
Y
N
Reseat the Finisher Entrance Sensor.
If the sensor cannot be reseated due to a broken mount, replace the Finisher
Entrance Sensor PL 8.3 Item 15.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Finisher Entrance Sensor], then [Start Monitor].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
NOTE: In Component Control, the state of the Finisher Entrance Sensor may transition
several times due to sensor actuator bounce. The machine run time software is designed
to filter these multiple sensor transitions.
Actuate the Finisher Entrance Sensor by manually moving the flag actuator. The state
of the Finisher Entrance Sensor changed.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between SIGNALGND (-) and TH72 (+) on the Finisher Controller PWB.
Place a piece of paper on the actuator of the Finisher Entrance Sensor and lower the
Finisher Transport Baffle. Observe the meter while the Finisher Entrance Sensor is
actuated. The voltage is 0 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Finisher Entrance Sensor PL 8.3 Item 15.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-481
12-101
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
TH72
12-101
May 2003
2-482
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The trail edge of the sheet is late leaving the Finisher Entrance Sensor.
Initial Actions
If the 12-102 Fault occurred when the Top Tray of the Finisher was full, the Top Tray Full
Sensor may have failed. Go to 12-AJ. Finisher Top Tray Status RAP.
Raise the Finisher Transport Baffle (Handle 5) to the jam clearance position.
Check the actuator of the Finisher Entrance Sensor The flag actuator for the Finisher
Entrance Sensor, is free from damage, and moves freely to block and unblock the Finisher Entrance Sensor.
Y
N
Replace the Finisher Entrance Sensor PL 8.3 Item 15.
Check the actuator of the Finisher Entrance Sensor for excessive wear. See Figure 3.
The actuator is free from excessive wear.
Y
N
Replace the Finisher Entrance Sensor PL 8.3 Item 15.
The Finisher Entrance Sensor is seated correctly
Y
N
Reseat the Finisher Entrance Sensor.
If the sensor cannot be reseated, replace the Finisher Entrance Sensor PL 8.3 Item 15.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Finisher Entrance Sensor], then [Start Monitor]. Block
and unblock the Finisher Entrance Sensor by manually moving the flag actuator.
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
NOTE: In Component Control, the state of the Finisher Entrance Sensor may transition several
times due to sensor actuator bounce. The machine run time software is designed to filter these
multiple sensor transitions.
The state of the Finisher Entrance Sensor changed.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between SIGNALGND (-) and TH72 (+) on the Finisher Controller
PWB.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-483
12-101, 12-102
A
Place a piece of paper on the actuator of the Finisher Entrance Sensor and lower the Finisher Transport Baffle. Observe the meter while the Finisher Entrance Sensor is actuated. The voltage is 0 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Finisher Entrance Sensor PL 8.3 Item 15.
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
Check the Finisher Diverter Gate. The Finisher Diverter Gate is in the correct position
(not blocking the lower paper path when the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid is deenergized).
Y
N
If the Finisher Diverter Gate cannot be reseated correctly on the Finisher Transport Baffle,
replace the Finisher Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item 11.
Check the following:
The Nip 2 Idlers on the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12 for damage, wear, and contamination.
The Nip 3 Idlers and Nip 4 Idlers on the Finisher Transport Baffle for damage, wear, and
contamination. Install the Transport Baffle Idler Kit PL 8.3 Item 30, if necessary.
The Nip 2 Drive Rolls on the Nip 2 Drive Shaft PL 8.4 Item 2 for damage, wear, and contamination.
The Nip 3 Drive Rolls (Nip 3 Drive Shaft) and the Nip 4 Drive Rolls (Nip 4 Drive Shaft) on
the Top Module Assembly PL 8.3 Item 1 for wear, contamination, damage.
NOTE: A component in the IOT paper path may slow the paper enough to cause 12-101 or 12102 faults in the Finisher.
If no problems are found in the Finisher, check the following in the IOT:
The Inverter Exit Roll, the Duplex Gate and the Inverter Exit Roll Idler, on the Inverter.
12-102
May 2003
2-484
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
TH72
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-485
12-102
Initial Actions
If the 12-105 Fault occurred when the Top Tray of the Finisher was full, the Top Tray Full Sensor may have failed. Go to 12-AJ Finisher Top Tray Status RAP.
Check the flag actuator for the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor. The flag actuator for the Top
Tray Paper Path Sensor is free from damage and moves freely to block and unblock the
sensor.
Y
N
Replace the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor PL 8.4 Item 3.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Top Tray Paper Path Sensor], then [Start Monitor].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Block and unblock the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor by manually moving the actuator. The
state of the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor changes.
Y
N
Observe the state of the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor when the sensor is not actuated
The state of the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor is high.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the wire for a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid]. Select [Output On],
and then [Output Off], several times to cycle the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid.
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Status Indicator RAPs
12-102, 12-105
May 2003
2-486
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Observe the operation of the Finisher Diverter Gate. The Finisher Diverter Gate opens
then closes when the solenoid is cycled.
Y
N
Switch the power [Off]. Manually move the Finisher Diverter Gate up and down.
The Finisher Diverter Gate moves freely without binding.
Y
N
Check the Finisher Diverter Gate for the source of binding. Replace the Finisher
Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item 11 if necessary.
If the return spring on the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid is damaged, replace the Finisher
Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item 11.
The mounting tabs for the Finisher Diverter Gate are securely snapped in the correct
position.
the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid Heat Cover is securely snapped in the correct
position.
The Finisher Diverter Gate mounting tabs and the solenoid heat cover are in the
correct position.
Y
N
If the Finisher Diverter Gate mounting tabs or the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid
heat cover are broken or damaged, replace the Finisher Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item
11.
Do the following;
Measure the voltage between P/J4 -13 (-) and P/J4 -12 (+) on the Finisher Controller PWB.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The voltage is +24 VDC when the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid energizes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the circuit of the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid for a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component
The mounting tabs for the Finisher Diverter Gate are securely snapped in the correct position.
The Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid Heat Cover is securely snapped in the correct position
If the Finisher Diverter Gate mounting tabs or the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid heat cover
are broken or damaged, replace the Finisher Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item 11.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-487
12-105
12-105
May 2003
2-488
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
If the wires are good, replace the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor PL 8.4 Item
3.
The lead edge of a sheet is late to the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor.
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
Failure of the Finisher Diverter Gate is one cause of 12-106 paper jams. For more information,
go to: Paper Transport in the Principles of Operation section of this manual.
Do the following:
Initial Actions
Open the Finisher Top Cover Door and cheat the Finisher Interlock Switch.
If the 12-106 Fault occurred when the Top Tray of the Finisher was full, the Top Tray Full Sensor may have failed. Go to 12-AJ. Finisher Top Tray Status RAP.
Observe the Nip 3 Drive Shaft. The Nip 3 Drive Shaft rotates when the Transport
Drive Motor energizes.
Y
N
Check the following:
Open the Finisher Top Cover Door. Observe the position of the actuator for the Top Tray
Paper Path Sensor.
The tip of the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor actuator is below the top surface of the
Finisher Transport Baffle.
Y
N
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Top Tray Paper Path Sensor], then [Start
Monitor]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Block and unblock the sensor by manually moving the actuator. The state of the
Top Tray Paper Path Sensor changes.
Y
N
Measure the voltage between P/J4-13 (-) and P/J4-12 (+) on the Finisher
Controller PWB.
The pulley on the on the Nip 3 Drive Shaft (part of the Top Module Assembly PL 8.3 Item 1) for damage and wear.
the Nip 3/4 Idler (part of the Top Module Assembly PL 8.3 Item 1) for damage and wear.
Ensure the Nip 3 Idlers are from damage and rotate freely. Install the Transport
Baffle Idler Kit PL 8.3 Item 30, if necessary.
Check the Nip 3 Drive Rolls on the Nip 3 Drive Shaft (Part of Top Module
Assembly PL 8.3 Item 1) for excessive wear.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid]. Select [Output On],
and then [Output Off], several times to cycle the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid.
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Observe the operation of the Finisher Diverter Gate. The Finisher Diverter Gate opens
then closes when the solenoid is cycled.
Y
N
Switch the power [Off]. Manually move the Finisher Diverter Gate up and down.
The Finisher Diverter Gate moves freely without binding.
Y
N
Check the Finisher Diverter Gate for the source of binding. Replace the Finisher
Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item 11 if necessary.
Check the following:
Block the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor with a piece of paper.
Check the voltage when the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor is blocked. The voltage is 0 VDC when the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor is blocked.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the harness for an for an open circuit.
A
B
V0.042
The Nip 3/4 Drive Belt PL 8.3 Item 2 for damage, wear, and correct tension.
Do the following:
Check the actuator of the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor for excessive wear. See Figure 3.
The actuator is free from excessive wear.
Y
N
Replace the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor PL 8.4 Item 3.
The flag actuator for the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor is not damaged and moves
freely to block and unblock the sensor.
Y
N
Replace the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor PL 8.4 Item 3.
The mounting tabs for the Finisher Diverter Gate are securely snapped in the correct
position.
the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid Heat Cover is securely snapped in the correct
position.
The Finisher Diverter Gate mounting tabs and the solenoid heat cover are in the
correct position.
E
May 2003
2-489
12-106
E
Y
N
If the Finisher Diverter Gate mounting tabs or the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid
heat cover are broken or damaged, replace the Finisher Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item
11.
Do the following;
Measure the voltage between P/J4 -13 (-) and P/J4 -12 (+) on the Finisher Controller
PWB.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The voltage is +24 VDC when the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid energizes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the circuit of the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid for a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component
The mounting tabs for the Finisher Diverter Gate are securely snapped in the correct position.
The Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid Heat Cover is securely snapped in the correct position
If the Finisher Diverter Gate mounting tabs or the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid heat cover
are broken or damaged, replace the Finisher Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item 11.
If the return spring on the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid is damaged, replace the Finisher
Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item 11.
12-106
May 2003
2-490
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-491
12-106
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
12-106
May 2003
2-492
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The trail edge of a sheet is late leaving Top Tray Paper Path Sensor.
Initial Actions
Ensure the Finisher Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item 11 is seated correctly and is not
obstructing the paper path.
If the 12-107 Fault occurred when the Top Tray of the Finisher was full, the Top Tray Full
Sensor may have failed. Go to 12-AJ. Finisher Top Tray Status RAP.
Perform the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor Mounting Tab Procedure.
TAG F032 has been installed in manufacturing. Mark of Tag 32 on the Finisher Change
Tag Matrix then go to 12-107 On-Site Diagnostic Procedure.
Go to the 12-107 On-Site Diagnostic Procedure.
NOTE: Finisher TAG F032 is a new Finisher bracket the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor Mounting
Tab is attached to and is at the correct angle, so the sensor does not bounce as the paper goes
across it.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-493
B
Status Indicator RAPs
12-106, 12-107
B
Check the Top Tray Full Sensor Actuator. The actuator is free from damage, and
moves freely to block and unblock the sensor.
Y
N
Replace the Top Tray Full Sensor Actuator PL 8.4 Item 6.
In Component Control, select [Top Tray Full Sensor], then [Start Monitor].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Block and unblock the Top Tray Full Sensor by manually moving the actuator. The state
of the Top Tray Full Sensor changes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the circuit of the Top Tray Full Sensor.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component.
8.
Check the position of the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor actuator. The actuator should be
flush or slightly above the surface of the Finisher Transport Baffle (Figure 3). If the actuator is not in the correct position, repeat steps 5-7.
NOTE: Ensure the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor is not dislodged from the tab.
9.
When the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor actuator is in the correct position, reinstall the two
screws in the 5a Baffle.
Do the following:
Open the Finisher Top Cover Door and cheat the Finisher Interlock Switch.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Transport Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Observe the Nip 4 Drive Shaft. The Nip 4 Drive Shaft is turning.
Y
N
Check the pulley on the Nip 4 Drive Shaft (Part of Top Module Assembly PL 8.3 Item
1) for damage and wear.
Do the following:
Ensure the Nip 4 Idlers are free from damage and rotate freely. Install the Transport
Baffle Idler Kit PL 8.3 Item 30, if necessary.
Check the Nip 4 Drive Rolls on the Nip 4 Drive Shaft (Part of Top Module Assembly
PL 8.3 Item 1) for excessive wear.
Figure 1 12-107 RAP Circuit Diagram
2.
3.
Remove the two 5.5mm (T20 torx) screws that secure the metal 5a Baffle (Exit Baffle) to
the Finisher frame. A 5.5mm wrench or socket may be required to remove the screws.
4.
5.
Locate the tab where the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor is mounted. Move the tab clockwise approximately 10 degrees (Figure 2).
NOTE: Moving the bracket too much will cause the sensor actuator to bind on the Exit
Baffle.
6.
7.
Ensure the Finisher Transport Baffle (labeled 5) is in the correct position against the Exit
Baffle.
12-107
May 2003
2-494
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Figure 2 Moving the tab for the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-495
12-107
Observe the Front Bale Arm and the Rear Bale Arm. The Front Bale Arm and the Rear
Bale Arm raise and lower freely without binding when the Disk Shaft is rotated.
Y
N
Do the following:
The Disk Home Sensor was not activated within the allotted time after the Disk Motor energized during initialization.
The Disk Home Sensor was not activated within the allotted time after the Disk Motor energized for sheets less than 9 inches.
The Disk Home Sensor was not deactivated within the allotted after the command to send the
Disk home, for sheets greater than 9 inches.
For more information, go to: Disk Loading and Disk Drives in the Principles of Operation section of this manual.
Initial Actions
Ensure the customer has not sent a job to the Finisher that exceeds capacity of the Stapler. Refer to Finishing in Table 6.
The 12-108 fault may be cleared by cycling the Finisher Interlock Switch. Open then close
the Finisher Top Cover Door.
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in the tray the customer was using when the Finisher jam occurred. If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in the tray
the customer was using when the Finisher jam occurred.
Ensure the Bale Arms are not hitting the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12
as they raise and lower.
Check each Bale Arm Spring PL 8.5 for damage. Be sure each spring is
installed correctly.
Check the Front Bale Arm and the Rear Bale Arm for damage and wear.
Replace the Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1 if necessary.
Check all four Disk Fingers. If any of the Disk Fingers are damaged or broken, install the
Disk Fingers Kit PL 8.3 Item 31.
The Disk Home Sensor is seated correctly.
Y
N
Reseat the Disk Home Sensor.
If the sensor cannot be reseated due to a broken mount, replace the Disk Home Sensor
PL 8.3 Item 4.
Go to Flag 2. Check the circuit of the Disk Home Sensor.
Remove any obstructions including foreign objects, from the Stacker Tray.
Manually rotate the Top Module Assembly by turning the Disk Drive Gear counter
clockwise as viewed from the rear of the Finisher.
Ensure the Disk Fingers are not hitting The Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item
12.
Do the following:
Measure the voltage at the Finisher Controller PWB at P2 -8 (+) and P2 -11 (+).
Manually rotate the Disk Shaft by turning the Disk Drive Gear counter clockwise as
viewed from the rear of the Finisher.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
12-108
B
May 2003
2-496
C
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
C
One or both of the +24 VDC outputs to the Disk Motor are shorted to the Finisher frame.
Y
N
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires in the harness for a short circuit to the Finisher
Frame. One or both of the wires are shorted to the Finisher frame.
Y
N
Replace the following:
Do the following:
Switch the power [Off] and Disconnect P/J2 from the Finisher Controller PWB.
Measure the resistance at the following pins on P2:
From P2 -7 to P2 -8
From P2 -8 to P2 -9
The resistance measured is greater than 0 ohms but less than 10 ohms.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for a short circuit or an open circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Disk Drive Motor PL 8.3 Item 6.
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
Check the following for binding:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-497
12-108
12-108
May 2003
2-498
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Observe the Stacker Tray Drive Motor. The Stacker Tray Drive Motor turns when the Stack
Height/Elevator Function Test runs.
Y
N
Do the following:
Connect the meter leads to the Finisher Controller PWB at P/J10 -9 (-) and P/J10 10 (+).
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Stacker Tray Up] then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Check each Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamp PL 8.5 Item 7 (front) and PL 8.3 Item 7
(rear) for damage.
Check the Stacker Tray Drive Pulley PL 8.3 Item 9 for damage.
Ensure each Stacker Tray Drive Belt is mounted correctly on the Stacker Tray Drive
Pulley.
To gain access to Finisher components, undock the Finisher from the IOT (REP 12-12).
Manually raise and lower the Rear Bale Arm by rotating the Disk in the process direction.
Observe the actuator on the Rear Bale Arm. The Rear Bale Arm move freely and the actuator for the Stack Too High Sensor is free from damage.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-499
12-108, 12-200
N
Replace the Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1.
Stack Height Sensor /Stack Too High Sensor PL 8.5 Item 10.
Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1 (if the harness cannot be repaired).
12-200
May 2003
2-500
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-501
12-200
B
The Stack Height Sensor/Stack Too High Sensor is free from damage (the body of
the sensor should be at a 90 degree angle in relation to the base of the sensor).
Y
N
Replace the Stack Height Sensor/Stack Too High Sensor PL 8.5 Item 10.
Go to Flag 1. Check the circuit of the Stack Too High Sensor for an open circuit or a short
circuit.
Replace the defective component.
Do the following:
Stack Height Sensor /Stack Too High Sensor PL 8.5 Item 10.
Remove any obstructions including foreign objects, from the Stacker Tray.
Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1 (if the harness cannot be repaired).
Do the following:
Check the position of the Disk Shaft Actuator (refer to Figure 3).
Do the following:
Open the Finisher Top Cover Door to deactuate the Finisher Interlock Switch.
Observe the Rear Bale Arm as the Disk Shaft is rotating. The Rear Bale Arm is not damaged and raises and lowers freely.
Y
N
Check the Rear Bale Arm components on the Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1 for
binding.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Stack Too High Sensor], then [Start Monitor].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Block and unblock Stack Too High Sensor by manually raising and lowering the Rear Bale
Arm.
Move the actuator until the Disk Shaft rests in the rounded notch of the actuator.
Do the following:
Go to Flag 2 (Figure 2). Check the circuit of Stacker Tray Rear Upper Limit Switch and the
Stacker Tray Upper Limit Switch for an open circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component.
Check the position of the Stack Height Sensor /Stack Too High Sensor. The sensor is
seated correctly.
Y
N
Reseat the Stack Height Sensor /Stack Too High Sensor.
If the sensor cannot be reseated in the correct position, replace the Stack Height
Sensor /Stack Too High Sensor PL 8.5 Item 10.
A
B
Status Indicator RAPs
12-201
May 2003
2-502
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-503
12-201
The Stack Too High Sensor failed to unblock 1000 ms after the Stacker Tray Drive Motor energizes to drive the Stacker Tray down.
End of Disk
Shaft
For more information, go to: Stacker Tray Drives and Stack Height Sensing in the Principles of
Operation section of this manual.
Initial Actions
Check the Stacker Tray of the Finisher for obstructions that may be preventing the Stacker Tray
from moving down. If an obstruction was found, remove the obstruction and run the job again.
If the problem was not caused by an obstruction that was blocking the Stacker Tray, follow the
procedure.
Remove any obstructions that may be preventing the Stacker Tray from lowering.
2 sheets
2 staples
5 copies
Observe the sheets as they enter the Stacker Tray. Greater than one sheet of paper is on
top of the Finisher Set Separator when the fault occurs.
Y
N
Empty the Stacker Tray.
In Disk Finisher Stack Height / Elevator Function Tests, select [Single Cycle].
Enter [Finishing tab, Finisher Tests].
Observe the Stacker Tray Drive Motor. The Stacker Tray Drive Motor turns when
Stack Height / Elevator Function Test is run.
Y
N
The Stacker Tray is level from front to rear.
Y
N
Check the Stacker Tray Drive Belts. The Stacker Tray Drive Belts are free
from damage.
Y
N
Replace the front and rear Stacker Tray Drive Belt PL 8.3 Item 8.
Do the following:
A
Status Indicator RAPs
12-201, 12-202
May 2003
2-504
Check the front and rear Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamp PL 8.3 Item 7 for
damage.
Check the Stacker Tray Drive Pulley PL 8.3 Item 9 for damage.
Ensure each Stacker Tray Drive Belt PL 8.3 Item 8 is mounted correctly
on the Stacker Tray Drive Pulley.
C
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
C
Do the following:
Connect the meter leads to the Finisher Controller PWB at P/J10 -10 (-) and
P/J10 -9 (+).
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Stacker Tray Up] then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Observe the operation of the Finisher Set Separator and the Set Separator Solenoid. The Set
Separator Solenoid energizes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1 in Figure 2. Check wires for a short circuit or an open circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component.
Finisher Set Separator PL 8.5 Item 19 (PL 8.5 Item 13 For Document Centre 460/
470 with a Smart Tray Finisher installed).
NOTE: A Smart Tray Finisher is identified by the serial number NF3xxxxxx.
Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1 (if the harness cannot be repaired).
If the Finisher Set Separator does not rest on the top of the set in the Stacker Tray, the operation of the Set Separator is intermittent, replace the Finisher Set Separator PL 8.5 Item 19 (PL
8.5 Item 13 For Document Centre 460/470 with a Smart Tray Finisher installed).
Resistance should be detected if the Kicker mechanism is not damaged. Forcing the
Kicker to move if resistance is detected will cause damage to the mechanical components
of the Kicker.
The Kicker moves freely to the eject position (out) and to the home position (in).
Y
N
To gain access to Finisher components, undock the Finisher from the IOT (REP 1212).
Manually raise and lower the Rear Bale Arm by rotating the Disk. Observe the actuator for the Stack Too High Sensor on the Rear Bale Arm. The Rear Bale Arm
move freely and the actuator for the Stack Too High Sensor is free from damage.
Y
N
Replace the Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1.
Check the position of the Stack Height Sensor /Stack Too High Sensor. The sensor
is seated correctly.
Y
N
Reseat the Stack Height Sensor/Stack Too High Sensor.
If the sensor cannot be reseated in the correct position, replace the Stack
Height Sensor /Stack Too High Sensor PL 8.5 Item 10.
Go to Flag 2. Check the circuitry of the Stack Too High Sensor for a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component.
Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1 (if the harness cannot be repaired).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-505
12-202
12-202
May 2003
2-506
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Check the Stacker Tray of the Finisher for obstructions that may be preventing the Stacker Tray
from offsetting. If an obstruction was found, remove the obstruction and run the job again. If the
problem was not caused by an obstruction that was blocking the Stacker Tray, follow the procedure.
In the Diagnostic Navigator, select [Finishing] tab, [Finisher Tests], then select the
[Main Tray Offset / Position] tab.
Observe the Stacker Tray. The Stacker Tray moves when the Stacker Tray Offset
Motor energizes.
Y
N
Remove the bottom portion of the Stacker Tray.
Check the Stacker Tray offset drive components for binding, damage, and wear.
Replace the Stacker Tray PL 8.2 Item 16 if required.
Remove the bottom portion of the Stacker Tray to gain access to the Stacker Tray Offset
Sensor.
The Stacker Tray Offset Sensor is seated in the correct position.
Y
N
Reseat the Stacker Tray Offset Sensor.
If the sensor cannot be reseated due to a broken mount, replace the Stacker Tray PL
8.2 Item 16.
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component.
Service Tray Assembly PL 8.4 Item 1 (if the harness cannot be repaired).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-507
12-202, 12-203
Initial Actions
Open then close the Finisher Top Cover Door.
If the fault cannot be cleared by opening and then closing the Finisher Top Cover Door, follow
the procedure.
Open the Finisher Top Cover Door to open the Finisher Interlock Switch.
Open the Finisher Top Cover Door to open the Finisher Interlock Switch.
Check the Tamper Arm Gear Rack for wear and damage (Finishers without
TAG F029).
Check the Tamper Arm Drive Cable for wear and damage (Finishers with TAG
F029)
Check the Tamper Ball Slide for wear, damage, or obstructions including loose
staples.
Ensure the Tamper Ball Slide is secured to the frame of the Service Tray
Assembly.
Check the Tamper Arm for wear and damage. Ensure it is secured to the
Tamper Ball Slide.
The Tamper components are free from damage and wear, and are secured correctly as described above.
Y
N
If any of the Tamper components are damaged or worn, replace the Service
Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1.
Replace the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12.
Check the Finisher Change Tag Matrix for TAG F029.
The Finisher Tag Matrix indicates Tag 029 is installed.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
12-203, 12-204
May 2003
2-508
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
Y
N
Switch the power [Off]. Disconnect P5 from the Finisher Controller PWB.
Measure the resistance at the following pins on P5:
From P5 -4 to P5 -5
From P5 -6 to P5 -7
If the Tamper does not move freely after removing the obstruction from the
Tamper Ball Slide, replace the Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1.
Switch the power [Off]. Disconnect P5 from the Finisher Controller PWB.
Measure the resistance at the following pins on P5:
On machines without TAG 114, cheat the Right Side Interlock Switch.
From P5 -6 to P5 -7
From P5 -4 to P5 -5
Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1 (if the harness cannot be repaired).
NOTE: An abnormal sound or vibration is an indication the Tamper Motor is not operating
correctly, the Ball Slide mounting screws for the Tamper are loose, or there are obstructions such as staples in the ball slide.
Check the Tamper Ball Slide mounting screws. The Tamper Ball Slide mounting
screws are loose.
Y
N
Check the Ball Slide for obstructions including staples. The Tamper Ball Slide is
free from obstructions.
Y
N
Remove the obstruction from the Tamper Ball Slide.
B
C
V0.042
May 2003
2-509
12-204
Initial Actions
The 12-205.01 fault may be cleared by cycling the Finisher Interlock Switch. Open then close
the Finisher Top Cover Door.
Verify the fault has been cleared by programming and printing a job with the following
attributes:
2 sheets
1-sided
1 staple
Check the position and movement of the Canard Wing. The Canard Wing moves freely
without binding and is in the correct position on the Moving Stapler.
Y
N
Reseat the Canard Wing in the correct position. If the Canard Wing is damaged or cannot
be reseated correctly, replace the Moving Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Moving Stapler Interlock Switch], then [Start Monitor].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The state of the Moving Stapler Interlock Switch is low (not actuated).
Y
N
Exit diagnostics to clear the fault.
Check for obstructions in the Moving Stapler mechanism that may be causing the Moving
Stapler Safety Gate to stay in the down position. There is an obstruction in the Moving Stapler Safety Gate mechanism.
Y
N
Replace the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12.
Clear the obstruction.
Program a job for 10 stapled sets of 2 sheets.
Check the operation of the Moving Stapler after clearing the obstruction. A
fault occurs after the clearing the obstruction
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
12-205.01
12-204, 12-205.01
May 2003
2-510
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Moving Stapler Intlk Switch], then [Start Monitor].
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Select [Moving Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid], [Output On], then [Output Off] to lower and
raise the Moving Stapler Safety Gate.
Observe the state of the Moving Stapler Interlock Switch when the Moving Stapler Safety Gate
is lowered and then raised. The display indicates the state of the Moving Stapler Interlock
Switch goes from low to high to low.
Y
N
Do the following:
Switch the power [Off]. Disconnect P9 from the Finisher Controller PWB. Switch the
power [On].
May 2003
2-511
12-205.01
The Fixed Stapler Interlock Switch failed to open 200 ms after the Fixed Stapler Safety Gate
Solenoid de-energizes. The Stacker Tray is unavailable.
For more information, go to: Stapling in the Principles of Operation section of this manual.
The 12-205.02 fault may be cleared by cycling the Finisher Interlock Switch. Open then close
the Finisher Top Cover Door.
Verify the fault has been cleared by programming and printing a job with the following
attributes:
1-sided
2 staples
Switch the power [Off]. Disconnect P9 from the Finisher Controller PWB. Switch the
power [On].
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Fixed Stapler Interlock Switch], then [Start
Monitor].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Initial Actions
2 sheets
NOTE: The Fixed Stapler in the Finisher is also referred to as Stapler 2 in User Interface messages.
N
Do the following:
12-205.02
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Fixed Stapler Intlk Switch], then [Start Monitor].
Select [Fixed Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid], [Output On], then [Output Off] to lower and
raise the Fixed Stapler Safety Gate.
Observe the state of the Fixed Stapler Interlock Switch when the Fixed Stapler Safety Gate is
lowered and then raised. The display indicates the state of the Fixed Stapler Interlock
Switch goes from low to high to low.
Status Indicator RAPs
12-205.02
May 2003
2-512
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-513
12-205.02
C
Check the Moving Stapler Gear Rack for damage or obstructions. If the gear rack is
damaged, replace the Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1.
Do the following:
For more information, go to: Stapling in the Principles of Operation section of this manual.
Initial Actions
Open then close the Finisher Top Cover Door.
If the fault cannot be cleared by opening and then closing the Finisher Top Cover Door, follow
the procedure.
Do the following:
To gain access to the Finisher components, undock the Finisher from the IOT (REP 1212). Do not disconnect J15 from P69.
On machines without TAG 114, cheat the Right Side Interlock Switch.
The resistance measured is greater than 0 ohms but less than 20 ohms.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Moving Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Stapler Position Front], [Output On]. Select [Stapler Position Rear], then [Output On].
the Moving Stapler Ball Slide for damage or obstructions including loose staples.
the Moving Stapler drive gears for damage or obstructions including loose staples.
Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1 (if the harness cannot be repaired.
The Moving Stapler drive components are free from damage or obstructions.
Y
N
Clear the obstruction. If any of the components are damaged, replace the Moving Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3.
A
B
C
Status Indicator RAPs
12-206
May 2003
2-514
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-515
12-206
The head of the Moving Stapler was not detected in the home position by the Moving Stapler
Home Sensor before the staple cycle began. The Stacker Tray will be unavailable.
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Moving Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3.
Initial Actions
The 12-207.01 fault may be cleared by cycling the Finisher Interlock Switch. Open then close
the Finisher Top Cover Door.
Verify the fault has been cleared by programming and printing a job with the following
attributes:
2 sheets
1-sided
2 staples
81/2 x 11 in or A4 paper
2 copies
The resistance measured is greater than 0 ohms but less than 20 ohms.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Moving Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3.
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
Do the following:
Measure the voltage between SIGNALGND (-) and TH42 (+) on the Finisher Controller
PWB.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Moving Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid], [Output
On], [Cycle Moving Stapler Once], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component
Control].
The voltage changes when the Moving Stapler Clinch Motor energizes.
12-207.01
May 2003
2-516
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-517
12-207.01
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
12-207.01
May 2003
2-518
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The head of the Fixed Stapler was not detected in the home position by the Fixed Stapler
Home Sensor before the staple cycle began. The Stacker Tray will be unavailable.
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Fixed Stapler PL 8.5 Item 2
Initial Actions
The 12-207.02 fault may be cleared by cycling the Finisher Interlock Switch. Open then close
the Finisher Top Cover Door.
Verify the fault has been cleared by programming and printing a job with the following
attributes:
2 sheets
1-sided
2 staples
81/2 x 11 in or A4 paper
2 copies
The resistance measured is greater than 0 ohms but less than 20 ohms.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Fixed Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3.
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
Do the following:
Measure the voltage between SIGNALGND (-) and TH51 (+) on the Finisher Controller
PWB.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Fixed Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid], [Output
On], [Cycle Fixed Stapler Once], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Measure the voltage between SIGNALGND and TH51 on the Finisher Controller. The voltage changes when the Fixed Stapler Clinch Motor energizes.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-519
12-207.02
12-207.02
May 2003
2-520
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-521
12-207.02
The Moving Stapler Interlock Switch fails to actuate 60 ms after the Moving Stapler Safety Gate
Solenoid energizes.
Observe the Moving Stapler Safety Gate. The Moving Stapler Safety Gate is lowered
and then raised when the Moving Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid energizes and then
deenergizes.
Y
N
The Moving Stapler Safety Gate is damaged.
Y
N
Do the following:
NOTE: The Moving Stapler in the Finisher is also referred to as Stapler 1 in User Interface
messages.
Initial Actions
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in the tray the customer was using when the Finisher jam occurred. If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in the tray
the customer was using when the Finisher jam occurred
Ensure the customer has not sent a job to the Finisher that exceeds capacity of the Stapler. Refer to General Information/Specifications, Product Specifications, Capabilities.
The 12-208.01 fault may be cleared by cycling the Finisher Interlock Switch. Open then
close the Finisher Top Cover Door.
A 12-208.01 fault may occur if the Stacker Tray is not level. Go to the Stacker Tray Levelling Procedure. Ensure the Stacker Tray is level
2 sheets
1-sided
1 staple
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Moving Stapler Interlock Switch], [Start Monitor],
[Moving Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid], [Output On], then [Output Off]. Enter [Copier Sys
tab , Component Control].
The state of the Moving Stapler Interlock Switch changed.
Y
N
Switch the power [Off]. Manually raise and lower the Moving Stapler Safety Gate.
The Moving Stapler Safety Gate raises and lowers freely without binding.
Y
N
Remove the Disk Baffle Assembly (REP 12-9).
Check the following for binding:
Check the position of the bracket for the Stapler Lead-In Baffle (Figure 3).
The mounting bracket for the Stapler Lead-In baffle is positioned against the frame
of the Moving Stapler.
Y
N
Replace the Moving Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3.
Do the following:
To gain access to the Finisher components, undock the Finisher from the IOT (REP
12-12). Do not disconnect J15 from P69.
On machines without TAG 114, cheat the Right Side Interlock Switch.
12-208.01
Measure the voltage between P3 -7 (-) and P3 -6 (+) on the Finisher Controller PWB.
The voltage is +24 VDC when the Moving Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid
energizes.
Y
N
Replace the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12.
If the problem continues, replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item
16.
Verify the fault has been cleared by programming and printing a job with the following
attributes:
The gears on the Moving - Stapler Safety Gate (part of the Disk Baffle
Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12).
The Moving Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid (part of the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12).
May 2003
2-522
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Check the actuator for the Moving Stapler Interlock Switch (located on the
Moving - Stapler Safety Gate).
2 sheets
1-sided
1 staple
10 sets
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-523
12-208.01
12-208.01
May 2003
2-524
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-525
12-208.01
Initial Actions
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in the tray the customer was using when the Finisher jam occurred. If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in the tray
the customer was using when the Finisher jam occurred
Ensure the customer has not sent a job to the Finisher that exceeds capacity of the Stapler. Refer to General Information/Specifications, Product Specifications, Capabilities.
The 12-208.02 fault may be cleared by cycling the Finisher Interlock Switch. Open then
close the Finisher Top Cover Door.
A 12-208.02 fault may occur if the Stacker Tray is not level. Go to the Stacker Tray Levelling Procedure. Ensure the Stacker Tray is level
Verify the fault has been cleared by programming and printing a job with the following
attributes:
2 sheets
1-sided
2- staples
To gain access to the Finisher components, undock the Finisher from the IOT (REP
12-12). Do not disconnect J15 from P69.
On machines without TAG 114, cheat the Right Side Interlock Switch.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Fixed Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid], [Output On], [Fixed Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid], then [Output Off]. Enter [Copier Sys
tab , Component Control].
Figure 3 Correct position of the mounting bracket for the Stapler Lead-In Baffle
Observe the Fixed Stapler Safety Gate. The Fixed Stapler Safety Gate is lowered and
then raised when the solenoid energizes and then deenergizes.
Y
N
The Fixed Stapler Safety Gate is damaged.
Y
N
Do the following:
A
Status Indicator RAPs
12-208.01, 12-208.02
May 2003
2-526
Measure the voltage between P3 -5 (-) and P3 -4 (+) on the Finisher Controller PWB.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Fixed Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
C
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
The voltage is +24 VDC when the Fixed Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid
energizes.
Y
N
Replace the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12.
If the problem continues, replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item
16.
Go to Flag 3. Check wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12.
E
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
Go to Flag 1. Check the circuit of the Fixed Stapler Interlock Switch for an intermittent
condition.
Replace the defective component.
The gears on the Fixed - Stapler Safety Gate (part of the Disk Baffle
Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12).
The Moving Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid (part of the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12).
2 sheets
1-sided
2 staples
10 sets
Check the actuator for the Fixed Stapler Interlock Switch (located on the
Fixed - Stapler Safety Gate).
May 2003
2-527
12-208.02
12-208.02
May 2003
2-528
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-529
12-208.02
The Moving Stapler Home Sensor fails to block within 500 ms after the Moving Stapler Clinch
Motor energizes.
2 sheets
1-sided
2 staples
81/2 x 11 in or A4 paper
5 copies (the first few sets may not contain any staples).
The Moving Stapler Interlock Switch is deactuated after the staple cycle begins due to bounce
of the Moving Stapler Safety Gate.
NOTE: The Moving Stapler in the Finisher is also referred to as Stapler 1 in User Interface
messages.
In Faults, select [Last 40 Faults]. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults]. A 12-209.01 fault
occurs after reinstalling the Staple Cartridge in the Moving Stapler.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Initial Actions
The 12-209.01 fault may be cleared by cycling the Finisher Interlock Switch. Empty the
Stacker Tray, open then close the Finisher Top Cover Door.
A 12-209.01 fault may occur if the Stacker Tray is not level. Go to the Stacker Tray Levelling Procedure. Ensure the Stacker Tray is level
Do the following:
Verify the fault has been cleared by programming and printing a job with the following
attributes:
2 sheets
1-sided
2 staples
81/2 x 11 in or A4 paper
5 copies (the first few sets may not contain any staples).
In Component Control, select [Stacker Tray Down] then [Output On], to lower the
Stacker Tray.
2 sheets
1-sided
2 staples
81/2 x 11 in or A4 paper
5 copies (the first few sets may not contain any staples).
In Faults, select [Last 40 Faults]. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults]. A 12-209.01 fault
occurs after replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Moving Stapler.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Do the following:
Check the position of the bracket for the Stapler Lead-In Baffle (Figure 5).
The mounting bracket for the Stapler Lead-In Baffle is positioned against the frame
of the Moving Stapler.
Y
N
Replace the Moving Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3.
Observe the Moving Stapler. The Moving Stapler Clinch Motor energizes to cycle
the Moving Stapler.
Y
N
Do the following:
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [Stacker Tray Down] then [Output On], to lower the
Stacker Tray.
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Remove the Staple Cartridge from the Moving Stapler. Clear any jammed staples
Ensure the Driver Bar on the Staple Cartridge is in the correct position (refer to Figure 3) and the first staple is in the correct position and the staple is not damaged
(refer to Figure 4).
A
Status Indicator RAPs
12-209.01
Reinstall the Staple Cartridge and Exit [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
On the Fluke meter select DC voltage. Press the MIN MAX button to select
the RECORD mode. Press PEAK MIN MAX button once to select the RECORD
MAX mode.
Measure the voltage between P7 -6 (-) and P7 -5 (+) on the Finisher Controller
PWB.
May 2003
2-530
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
Y
N
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
If the problem continues, replace the Moving Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3.
Measure the voltage from the SIGNALGND (-) and TH42 (+) on the Finisher Controller PWB.
The voltage changes when the Moving Stapler Clinch Motor energizes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Moving Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3.
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
The Moving Stapler Safety Gate is not keeping the Moving Stapler Interlock Switch actuated
when the Moving Staple Clinch Motor is operating. Replace the Moving - Stapler Safety Gate
PL 8.3 Item 26.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-531
12-209.01
12-209.01
May 2003
2-532
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-533
12-209.01
12-209.01
May 2003
2-534
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
1.
Ensure the customer has not sent a job to the Finisher that exceeds capacity of the
Stacker Tray. Refer to Finishing. in Table 6
2.
Ask the customer if anything was inserted into the Stapler when a set was being compiled.
3.
The 12-209.02 fault may be cleared by cycling the Finisher Interlock Switch. Empty the
Stacker Tray, open then close the Finisher Top Cover Door.
4.
A 12-209.02 fault may occur if the Stacker Tray is not level. Go to the Stacker Tray Levelling Procedure. Ensure the Stacker Tray is level
Verify the fault has been cleared by programming and printing a job with the following
attributes:
2 sheets
1-sided
2 staples
81/2 x 11 in or A4 paper
5 copies (the first few sets may not contain any staples).
Figure 5 Correct position of the mounting bracket for the Stapler Lead-In Baffle
2 sheets
1-sided
2 staples
81/2 x 11 in or A4 paper
5 copies (the first few sets may not contain any staples).
In Faults, select [Last 40 Faults]. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults]. A 12-209.02 fault
occurs after power off and power on.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [Stacker Tray Down] then [Output On], to lower the
Stacker Tray.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-535
12-209.01, 12-209.02
Measure the voltage between P7 -12 (-) and P7 -11 (+) on the Finisher Controller PWB.
Ensure the Driver Bar on the Staple Cartridge is in the correct position (refer to Figure 3) and the first staple is in the correct position and the staple is not damaged
(refer to Figure 4).
Reinstall the Staple Cartridge and Exit [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Remove the Staple Cartridge from the Fixed Stapler. Clear any jammed staples.
2 sheets
1-sided
2 staples
81/2 x 11 in or A4 paper
5 copies (the first few sets may not contain any staples).
In Faults, select [Last 40 Faults]. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults]. A 12-209.02 fault
occurs after the Staple Cartridge is reinstalled in the Fixed Stapler.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [Stacker Tray Down] then [Output On], to lower the
Stacker Tray.
Replace the Staple Cartridge in the Fixed Stapler.
2 sheets
1-sided
2 staples
81/2 x 11 in or A4 paper
5 copies (the first few sets may not contain any staples).
Measure the voltage between SIGNALGND (-) and TH51 (+) on the Finisher Controller PWB.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Fixed Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid], [Output On], [Cycle Fixed Stapler Once], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The voltage changes when the Fixed Stapler Clinch Motor energizes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Fixed Stapler PL 8.5 Item 2.
In Faults, select [Last 40 Faults]. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults]. A 12-209.02 fault
occurs after replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Fixed Stapler.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Fixed Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid], [Output On], [Cycle Fixed Stapler Once], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Observe the Fixed Stapler. The Fixed Stapler Clinch Motor energizes to cycle the
Fixed Stapler.
Y
N
Do the following:
On the Fluke meter select DC voltage. Press the MIN MAX button to select
the RECORD mode. Press PEAK MIN MAX button once to select the RECORD
MAX mode.
A
B
Status Indicator RAPs
12-209.02
May 2003
2-536
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-537
12-209.02
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
12-209.02
May 2003
2-538
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-539
12-209.02
Procedure
This is an On-Site service call.
Y
N
Go to the 12-210 Remote Diagnostic Procedure.
Go to the 12-210 On-Site Diagnostic Procedure.
Check the Stacker Tray Lower Limit Switch. The Stacker Tray Lower Limit Switch is actuated by the Stacker Tray Front Bracket.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the circuitry of the Stacker Tray Lower Limit Switch for an open circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component.
Check the position of the Stacker Tray Full Sensor. The Stacker Tray Full Sensor is seated
correctly.
Y
N
Reseat the Stacker Tray Full Sensor.
If the sensor cannot be reseated due to a broken mount, replace the Stacker Tray Full
Sensor PL 8.5 Item 2.
Go to Flag 1. Check the circuit of the Stacker Tray Full Sensor for a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component.
12-210
May 2003
2-540
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-541
12-210
The voltage is +24 VDC when the Top Tray Offset Motor energizes.
Y
N
Switch the power [Off]. Disconnect P4 from the Finisher Controller PWB.
Measure the resistance between P4 -11(-) and P4 -10 (+) on the connector.
The Top Tray Offset Sensor does not transition to unblocked 1000 ms after the Top Tray Offset
Motor energizes.
Initial Actions
Check the Top Tray of the Finisher for obstructions that may be preventing the Top Tray
from offsetting.
If an obstruction was found, remove the obstruction and run the job again.
If the problem was not caused by an obstruction that was blocking the Top Tray, follow the
procedure in this RAP.
NOTE: The resistance measured varies with the position of the motor
armature in the Top Tray Offset Motor at the time the measurement is
taken. A value of less than 35 Ohms is an indication of a short circuit.
The resistance is 35 to 200 Ohms.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Top Module Assembly PL 8.3 Item
1.
Place 2 sheets of the same size paper the customer was using when the fault occurred
into the Document Input Tray.
Check the Top Tray Offset Drive Gear for wear or damage. Replace the Top Module
Assembly PL 8.3 Item 1 if necessary.
Check the position of the Top Tray Offset Sensor PL 8.4 Item 1. The Top Tray Offset
Sensor is seated in the correct position.
Y
N
Reseat the Top Tray Offset Sensor.
If the sensor cannot be reseated due to a broken mount, replace the Stapler Position
Home Sensor PL 8.5 Item 4.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Top Tray Offset Sensor], [Start Monitor], [Top
Tray Offset], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The state of the Top Tray Offset Sensor changes.
Y
N
Check for contamination of the Top Tray Offset Sensor The Top Tray Offset Sensor is free from contamination.
Y
N
Remove the source of the contamination.
The Finisher Top Tray offset components are free from binding.
Y
N
Replace the Top Module Assembly PL 8.3 Item 1, if necessary.
Measure the voltage between P4 -11 (-) and P4 -10 (+)on the Finisher Controller PWB.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Top Tray Offset Motor], then [Output
On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
A
B
C
Status Indicator RAPs
12-213
The Back Wall of the Finisher Top Tray may have become dislodged from the Top Module
Assembly frame during operation of the Finisher or during installation of the Finisher Top
Tray.
Go to REP 12-16.
Return to Service Call Procedures.
May 2003
2-542
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-543
12-213
The Kicker Home Sensor was not actuated in the allowed time after the Kicker Motor energized.
The Stacker Tray has been moved greater than 2 mm off position. The occurs if the tray is
bumped out of position
Initial Actions
Check the Stacker Tray for obstructions that may be preventing the tray from offsetting.
Procedure
Go to the 12-315 RAP.
On the Fluke meter select DC voltage. Press the MIN MAX button to select
the RECORD mode. Press PEAK MIN MAX button once to select the RECORD
MAX mode.
Measure the voltage between P6 -5 (-) and P6 -4 (+) on the Finisher Controller
PWB.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Kicker On], then [Output On]. Enter
[Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
12-214, 12-220
May 2003
2-544
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Replace the Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1 if necessary.
Go to the 12-AP Finisher Static Checkout RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-545
12-220
12-220
May 2003
2-546
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The Stack Too High Sensor is blocked when the Stack Height Sensor is unblocked.
For more information, go to: Stacker Tray Drives and Stack Height Sensing in the Principles of
Operation section of this manual.
Stack Height
Sensor actuator
Initial Actions
Switch the power [Off] then switch the power [On] to attempt to clear the fault.
Stack Height
Sensor
Check the Stack Height Sensor actuator (located on the Rear Bale Arm).
The actuator for the Stack Height Sensor is broken.
Y
N
Check the Stack Too High Sensor for contamination.
The Stack Too High Sensor is free from contamination.
Y
N
Remove the source of the contamination.
Rear Bale
Arm
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Stack Too High Sensor], then [Start Monitor].
Block and unblock Stack Too High Sensor by manually raising and lowering the Rear
Bale Arm.
Stack Height Sensor /Stack Too High Sensor PL 8.5 Item 10.
Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1 (if the harness cannot be repaired).
Go to Flag 3. Check the circuit of Stack Height Sensor for an open circuit.
Replace the defective component.
Stack Height Sensor /Stack Too High Sensor PL 8.5 Item 10.
Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1 (if the harness cannot be repaired).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-547
12-222
12-222
May 2003
2-548
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
If the problem occurs again, check the following:
Intermittent actuation of the Stapler Access Door Interlock Switch by the Stapler Access
Door.
Go to Flag 2. Check the circuit of the Stapler Access Door Interlock Switch for an intermittent open condition.
For more information, go to: Finisher Power and Interlocks in the Principles of Operation section of this manual.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Stapler Access Door Interlock Switch], then
[Start Monitor]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The actuator on the Stapler Access Door Interlock Switch PL 8.5 Item 12
The actuator for the Stapler Access Door Interlock Switch, located on the Finisher frame.
The actuator located on the Stapler Access Door PL 8.5 Item 12 that actuates
the Interlock Switch.
The Stapler Access Door Interlock components are free from damage.
Y
N
Replace the component or components that are damaged.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-549
12-307
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH49
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
12-307
May 2003
2-550
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Finisher Interlock Switch], then [Start Monitor].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The snap fit for the door pin on the Finisher Top Cover PL 8.2 Item 7.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-551
12-309
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
12-309
May 2003
2-552
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The Stacker Tray Offset Motor does not provide encoder feedback to the Finisher Controller
PWB.
Initial Actions
Check the Stacker Tray of the Finisher for obstructions that may be preventing the Stacker Tray
from offsetting. If an obstruction was found, remove the obstruction and run the job again. If the
problem was not caused by an obstruction that was blocking the Stacker Tray, follow the procedure.
Remove any obstructions that may be preventing the Stacker Tray from offsetting, including foreign objects in the Stacker Tray and paper jammed between the Stacker Tray and
the Stacker Tray Front Bracket.
In the Diagnostic Navigator, select [Finishing] tab, [Finisher Tests], then select the [Main
Tray Offset / Position] tab.
Select [Continuous Cycle], [Mode 2], then select [Start].
Measure the voltage between SIGNALGND (-) and TH6 (+) on the Finisher Controller
PWB.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Stacker Tray Offset (Open loop)], then [Output
On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
N
Go to Flag 2. Check the wires an a short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Tray PL 8.2 Item 16.
If the problem continues, replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
For Document Centre 460/470 with a Smart Tray Finisher installed, do the following:
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Stacker Tray Offset (Open loop)], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
For Document Centre 460/470 with a Smart Tray Finisher installed, do the following:
Measure the voltage between SIGNALGND (-) and TH6 (+) on the Finisher Controller
PWB.
In the Diagnostic Navigator, select [Finishing] tab, [Finisher Tests], then select the [Main
Tray Offset / Position] tab.
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC when the Stacker Tray Offset Motor energizes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 5. Check the wires for an open circuit.
Go to Flag 4. Check the wire for an open circuit or a short circuit.
If the wire is good, replace the Stacker Tray PL 8.2 Item 16.
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
Measure the voltage between SIGNALGND (-) and P12 -8 (+) on the Finisher Controller PWB.
The voltage is approximately +14.5 VDC.
A
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-553
12-310
12-310
May 2003
2-554
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-555
12-310
C
If the problem continues, replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
Go to Flag 1 and to Flag 2. Check the wires an open circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Tray PL 8.2 Item 16.
Initial Actions
Check the Stacker Tray of the Finisher for obstructions that may be preventing the Stacker Tray
from offsetting including foreign objects in the Stacker Tray and paper jammed between the
Stacker Tray and the Stacker Tray Front Bracket.
Measure the voltage between J6 -1 (-) and J6 -3 (+) on the Finisher Controller PWB.
The voltage is +5 VDC.
Y
N
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
If the problem continues, replace the Stacker Tray PL 8.2 Item 16.
If an obstruction was found, remove the obstruction and run the job again. If the problem was
not caused by an obstruction that was blocking the Stacker Tray, follow the procedure.
Do the following:
Measure the voltage between SIGNALGND (-) and TH6 (+) on the Finisher Controller
PWB.
In the Diagnostic Navigator, select [Finishing] tab, [Finisher Tests], then select the [Main
Tray Offset / Position] tab. Select [Continuous Cycle], [Mode 2], then select [Start]. Select
the [Continue] button when displayed to continue the test. Enter [Finishing tab, Finisher
Tests].
The voltage is approximately +2.5 VDC when the Stacker Tray Offset Motor energizes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 5. Check the wires for an open circuit.
Go to Flag 4. Check the wire for an open circuit or a short circuit.
If the wire is good, replace the Stacker Tray PL 8.2 Item 16.
In the Diagnostic Navigator, select [Finishing] tab, [Finisher Tests], then select the [Main
Tray Offset / Position] tab.
12-315
May 2003
2-556
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-557
12-315
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
12-315
May 2003
2-558
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Automatic configuration has detected a Smart Tray configuration Finisher installed on an IOT
with software version 07.19.0.056 or lower.
The Smart Tray configuration Finisher, serial number NF3xxxxxx, is not designed to operate
with IOT software versions 7.00 (07.19.0.027), 7.01 (07.19.0.028), or 7.02 (07.19.0.056).
Perform one of the following two actions:
Reinstall a non Smart Tray Finisher if available and switch the power [On].
NOTE: If a 6UPxxxxxx Finisher is not available, cheat the Right Side Interlock
Switch (machines without TAG 114) and accept the configuration of no output
device.
Install the Smart Tray configuration Finisher and switch the power [On].
If installing a new Finisher, enter the Tamper setting for the new Finisher, in Tools on the UI:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Select [More].
Select [Configuration and Setup], and select [Close] to dismiss the warning message
Open the Finisher Top Cover Door and read the tamper value from the label on the inside
of the door.
May 2003
2-559
12-323, 12-700
Select [Close] and select [Reboot]. After the machine resets, it will come up no longer in
Tools.
Initial Actions
If the problem is identified as poor stacking, mis-stapled sets, or poor set registration of thin
stapled sets, go to GP30 to program the Finisher settings for thin stapled sets. If the problem
continues, go to the table below to identify the correct procedure for correcting the problem.
Procedure
The following are Finisher problems an explanation of each problem, and the action to take if
the problem occurs. If a Finisher fault code is displayed, go to the appropriate RAP for the fault
code.
Table 1 Finisher Problems
Problem
Action
Install the Finisher Paper Cooling and Stacking Kit PL 8.7 TAG
F109.
11 x 17 in (A3) paper is being folded in half as it is com- Go to the 12-AC Finisher Misregispiled in the Stacker Tray.
tration RAP.
The print damage is dog-ears, nicks, tears, dings, wrin- Go to the OF-2 Paper Damage RAP.
kles, or roller marks.
The Pause Resume Switch (Elevator Switch Button) is Go to the 12-AM Pause Resume
not operating correctly.
Switch RAP.
There is abnormal sound or vibration when the Finisher Go to the 12-AF Finisher Noise RAP.
is operating.
The Stacker Tray is oscillating up and down.
12-700, 12-AA
May 2003
2-560
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Problem
Action
Problem
Action
The Stacker Tray is full with no message on the User Go to the 12-AH Finisher Stacker
Interface indicating the Stacker Tray is full, or the mes- Tray Status RAP.
sage on the User Interface indicates the Stacker Tray
is full when the Stacker Tray is not full.
The Finisher Top Tray is full with no message on the
User Interface indicating the Top Tray is full, or the
message on the User Interface indicates the Finisher
Top Tray is full when the Top Tray is not full.
In-set misregistration
Dog-ears
A message to close the Stapler Access Door is disGo to the 12-307 Stapler Access
played on the User Interface, when the Stapler Access Door Interlock Switch RAP.
Door is closed.
A message to close the Finisher Top Cover Door is dis- Go to the 12-309 Finisher Interlock
played on the User Interface, when the Finisher Top
Switch RAP.
Cover Door is closed.
The message displayed on the User Interface indicates
the Staple Cartridge needs to be replaced when the
Staple Cartridge is installed correctly and the Staple
cartridge contains greater than 19 staples. There is no
message displayed on the User Interface when the
Staple Cartridge contains less than 19 staples.
Landscape stapling options are not available for selec- Go to the 12-AH Finisher Stacker
tion (Smart Tray Finisher Only).
Tray Status RAP.
NOTE: A Smart Tray Finisher is identified by the serial
number NF3xxxxxx.
When the Stacker Tray becomes full and the operator
is directed to remove copies from the tray, the tray
does not raise after the copies are removed.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-561
12-AA
The print damage is dog-ears, nicks, tears, dings, wrinkles, or roller marks.
Entry to this RAP is only from the OF-2 Paper Damage RAP.
If the Nip 4 Idlers are damaged, install the Transport Baffle Idler Kit PL 8.3 Item 30.
Check the prints in the Finisher Top Tray. The print damage is roller marks or creases on
the prints.
Y
N
Check the damaged prints. The print damage is dog-ears.
Y
N
The print damage is nick, dings, or tears on the lead edge.
Y
N
Program and print a job with the following attributes:
Check the paper size displayed on the User Interface for each of the paper trays.
The paper size displayed for each paper tray matches the paper size loaded in the paper
tray.
Y
N
Go to the 07-B Paper Size Sensing RAP.
2 staples
5 copies
Go to ADJ 12-1, Tamping. If the problem continues after performing the Tamper
Setup, Replace the Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1.
Check the following components that may be causing the Finisher Diverter Gate to
obstruct the Finisher paper path:
Check the prints in the Finisher Top Tray. The print damage is creases in the process direction.
Y
N
Check the following:
2 sheets
Observe the sheets as they are being compiled in the Stacker Tray. The
Tamper Arm is 'over tamping' the sets.
Y
N
Check the Retractable Registration Edge for damage. Replace the Moving
Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3, if necessary.
The heat cover for the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid is snapped firmly in
place.
The return spring for the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid is not damaged or
broken.
the snap fit for the Finisher Diverter Gate is snapped firmly in place on the Finisher Transport Baffle.
Check the Nip 1 Idlers, Nip 3 Idlers, and the Nip 4 Idlers for binding and correct position.
If the Nip 1 Idlers, the Nip 3 Idlers, or the Nip 4 Idlers are damaged, install the Transport Baffle Idler Kit PL 8.3 Item 30.
Check the following for contamination or damage. Remove the source of the contamination or replace the part indicated.
The Front Registration Edge on the Moving Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3 for damage.
If the Nip 1 Drive Rolls are damaged, Replace the Nip 1 Drive Shaft PL 8.4 Item 2.
The Middle Registration Edge on the Fixed Stapler PL 8.5 Item 2 for damage.
If the Nip 1 Idlers are damaged, install the Transport Baffle Idler Kit PL 8.3 Item 30.
If the Nip 3 Drive Rolls (on the Nip 3 Drive Shaft), are damaged, replace the Top
Module Assembly PL 8.3 Item 1.
The Rear Registration Edge on the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12 for
damage.
If the Nip 3 Idlers are damaged, install the Transport Baffle Idler Kit PL 8.3 Item 30.
If the Nip 4 Drive Rolls (on the Nip 4 Drive Shaft), are damaged, replace the Top
Module Assembly PL 8.3 Item 1.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
12-AB
B
May 2003
2-562
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The Canard Wing and the Stapler Lead-In Baffle PL 8.5 Item 15 on the Moving Stapler for damage.
The Nip 1 Idlers, Nip 3 Idlers, and Nip 4 Idlers on the Finisher Transport Baffle for
binding. Install the Transport Baffle Idler Kit PL 8.3 Item 30, if necessary.
The stapled or unstapled sets of prints are stacked incorrectly in the Stacker Tray, or in the Finisher Top Tray.
The Nip 2 Idlers on the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12 for binding.
The Nip 4 Idlers for correct position. Install the Transport Baffle Idler Kit PL 8.3 Item
30, if necessary.
Check the prints in the Finisher Top Tray. The print damage is creases in the process
direction.
Y
N
Check the following for contamination or damage. Remove the source of the contamination or replace the part indicated.
There are misregistered sheets in the stapled or unstapled sets of prints delivered to the
Stacker Tray or to the Finisher Top Tray.
11 x 17 in (A3) paper is being folded in half as it is compiled in the Stacker Tray.
Initial Actions
Check the air flow at the customer's site. Excessive air flow may cause poor stacking,
resulting in misregistration.
If the Nip 1 Drive Rolls are damaged, Replace the Nip 1 Drive Shaft PL 8.4 Item 2.
Check the Stacker Tray and the Finisher Top Tray for obstructions.
If the Nip 1 Idlers are damaged, install the Transport Baffle Idler Kit PL 8.3 Item 30.
If the Nip 2 Drive Rolls (on the Nip 2 Drive Shaft), are damaged, Replace the Nip 2
Drive Shaft PL 8.4 Item 2.
Turn over and reload the stack of paper in the tray the customer was using when the Finisher jam occurred.
If the Nip 2 Idlers are damaged, install the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12.
If the problem continues, load fresh paper from a new ream in the tray the customer was
using when the Finisher jam occurred.
The Nip 1 Idlers on the Finisher Transport Baffle. Install the Transport Baffle Idler Kit PL
8.3 Item 30, if necessary.
The Nip 2 Idlers on the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12.
Misregistration may occur if the Stacker Tray is not level. Go to the Stacker Tray Levelling
Procedure. Ensure the Stacker Tray is level
2 sheets
2 staples
5 copies
Observe the operation of the Finisher Set Separator as the sets are being compiled
and ejected into the Stacker Tray. The Finisher Set Separator rests on top of the
ejected sets.
Y
N
Check for strip of black adhesive film on the surface of the foam strip (located
where the Set Separator rests on the surface of the Stacker Tray).
A strip of black adhesive film is installed.
Y
N
Install the Finisher Set Separator Kit PL 8.5 Item 19.
Do the following:
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-563
C
Status Indicator RAPs
12-AB, 12-AC
Observe the operation of the Finisher Set Separator and the Set Separator
Solenoid. The Set Separator Solenoid energizes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check wires for a short circuit or an open circuit.
Replace the defective component.
Finisher Set Separator PL 8.5 Item 19 (PL 8.5 Item 13 For Document
Centre 460/470 with a Smart Tray Finisher installed).
NOTE: A Smart Tray Finisher is identified by the serial number
NF3xxxxxx.
B
Inform the customer the Stacker Tray can reliably stack a maximum of 80 2-15 sheet stapled sets. Go to GP30 . Ensure the maximum number of sets that will be sent to the
Stacker Tray before the unload message is displayed is set to 80 or less.
Check the copies/prints in the Finisher Top Tray. The sheets are dog-eared.
Y
N
Check the Finisher Top Tray The Finisher Top Tray is installed correctly on the Top
Module Assembly.
Y
N
Remove then reinstall the Finisher Top Tray.
Replace the Finisher Top Tray PL 8.2 Item 3 if it cannot be reinstalled correctly due
to damage.
Check the job the customer is sending to the Top Tray. The job is greater than 200
copies/prints on 5.5 x 8.5 in (A5) paper.
Y
N
Check the Top Tray Static Eliminator for wear and damage. The Top Tray Static
Eliminator is damaged or worn.
Y
N
Check the Top Tray Full Sensor Actuator. The actuator is free from damage,
and moves freely to block and unblock the Top Tray Full Sensor.
Y
N
Replace the Top Tray Full Sensor Actuator PL 8.4 Item 6.
If the Finisher Set Separator does not rest on the top of the set in the Stacker
Tray, check the mechanical components of the Finisher Set Separator for binding or damage.
Replace the Finisher Set Separator PL 8.5 Item 19 (PL 8.5 Item 13 For Document Centre 460/470 with a Smart Tray Finisher installed), if required.
NOTE: A Smart Tray Finisher is identified by the serial number NF3xxxxxx.
Do the following:
Manually raise and lower both the Front Bale Arm and the Rear Bale Arm
(resistance should be felt when raising either of Bale Arms).
NOTE: No resistance is an indication the Bale Arm springs are broken or missing
The Bale Arm check is good.
Y
N
Check each Bale Arm Spring PL 8.5 for damage. Be sure each spring is
installed correctly.
The problem is set to set misregistration.
Y
N
Go to the 12A-C In-Set Registration Checkout Procedure.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Stacker Tray Offset (Open Loop)], then
[Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Observe the operation of the Stacker Tray. The tray moves smoothly.
Y
N
Check the Stacker Tray drives for binding.
12-AC
Check the Collapsable Kicker Arm. Ensure it is not missing and moves to the collapsed position and back freely.
A
B
Status Indicator RAPs
D
May 2003
2-564
the Nip 1 Drive Rolls for damage and wear. Replace the Nip 1 Drive Shaft
PL 8.4 Item 2, if necessary.
The Nip 3 Drive Rolls (on the Nip 3 Drive Shaft) and the Nip 4 Drive Rolls
(on the Nip 4 Drive Shaft) for damage and wear. Replace the Top Module
Assembly PL 8.3 Item 1, if necessary.
F
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
the Nip 1 Idlers, the Nip 2 Idlers, and the Nip 3 Idlers for binding and correct position. Replace the Transport Baffle Idler Kit PL 8.3 Item 30, if necessary.
K
Replace the defective component.
Finisher Set Separator PL 8.5 Item 19 (PL 8.5 Item 13 For Document Centre 460/470 with a Smart Tray Finisher installed).
NOTE: A Smart Tray Finisher is identified by the serial number
NF3xxxxxx.
If the Finisher Set Separator does not rest on the top of the set in the
Stacker Tray, check the mechanical components of the Finisher Set Separator for binding or damage. Replace the Finisher Set Separator PL 8.5
Item 19 (PL 8.5 Item 13 For Document Centre 460/470 with a Smart Tray
Finisher installed), if required.
Determine where the problem is occurring. The problem is occurring in the Finisher Top
Tray.
Y
N
Do the following:
In the Diagnostic Navigator, select [Finishing] tab, [Finisher Tests], then select the
[Main Tray Offset / Position] tab.
Do the following:
Manually raise and lower both the Front Bale Arm and the Rear Bale Arm
(resistance should be felt when raising either of Bale Arms).
Observe the [Faults] window. There are 12-214 or 12-315 faults displayed in the faults
window.
Y
N
The customer is sending greater than 80 2-15 sheet stapled sets to the Stacker
Tray.
Y
N
Program and print a job with the following attributes:
2 sheets
2 staples
5 copies
NOTE: No resistance is an indication the Bale Arm springs are broken or missing
The Bale Arm check is good.
Y
N
Check each Bale Arm Spring PL 8.5 for damage. Be sure each spring is
installed correctly.
The problem is set to set misregistration.
Y
N
Go to the 12A-C In-Set Registration Checkout Procedure.
Observe the operation of the Finisher Set Separator as the sets are being compiled and ejected into the Stacker Tray. The Finisher Set Separator rests on
top of the ejected sets.
Y
N
Check for strip of black adhesive film on the surface of the foam strip
(located where the Set Separator rests on the surface of the Stacker Tray).
The strip of plastic adhesive film is installed.
Y
N
Install the Finisher Set Separator Kit PL 8.5 Item 19.
Do the following:
moves
smoothly
Check the Collapsable Kicker Arm. Ensure it is not missing and moves to the
collapsed position and back freely.
Observe the operation of the Finisher Set Separator and the Set Separator Solenoid. The Set Separator Solenoid energizes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check wires for a short circuit or an open circuit.
G H
V0.042
Do the following:
G
May 2003
2-565
I
Status Indicator RAPs
12-AC
I
Inform the customer the Stacker Tray can reliably stack a maximum of 80 2-15 sheet
stapled sets. Go to GP30 . Ensure the maximum number of sets that will be sent to
the Stacker Tray before the unload message is displayed is set to 80 or less.
Check the job the customer is sending to the Top Tray. The job is greater than 200
copies/prints on 5.5 x 8.5 in. (A5) paper.
Y
N
Check the Top Tray Static Eliminator for wear and damage. The Top Tray Static
Eliminator is damaged or worn.
Y
N
Check the Top Tray Full Sensor Actuator. The actuator is free from damage,
and moves freely to block and unblock the Top Tray Full Sensor.
Y
N
Replace the Top Tray Full Sensor Actuator PL 8.4 Item 6.
Inform the customer the Top Tray can reliably stack a maximum of 200 sheets of 5.5 x 8.5
(A5) paper.
A component in the IOT is causing dog-ears. Go to OF-2, Paper Damage RAP.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Top Tray Full Sensor], then [Start
Monitor]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Actuate the Top Tray Full Sensor by manually moving the actuator. The state
of the Top Tray Full Sensor changed.
Y
N
Flag 1. Check the wires for a short circuit or an open circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component
the Nip 1 Drive Rolls for damage and wear. Replace the Nip 1 Drive Shaft
PL 8.4 Item 2, if necessary.
The Nip 3 Drive Rolls (on the Nip 3 Drive Shaft) and the Nip 4 Drive Rolls
(on the Nip 4 Drive Shaft) for damage and wear. Replace the Top Module
Assembly PL 8.3 Item 1, if necessary.
L
M N
Status Indicator RAPs
12-AC
Check the center portion of the Disk Baffle Assembly between the Disk Fingers. The
center portion of the Disk Baffle Assembly is bent into the paper path.
Y
N
Program a job to send 11 x 17 in (A3) paper to the Stacker Tray. Check the copies as
they are being compiled in the Stacker Tray.
The sheets are being folded in half as they are compiled in the Stacker Tray.
Y
N
Open, then close the Finisher Top Cover Door.
Program and print a job with the following attributes:
the Nip 1 Idlers, the Nip 2 Idlers, and the Nip 3 Idlers, for binding and correct position. Replace the Transport Baffle Idler Kit PL 8.3 Item 30, if necessary.
Check the copies/prints in the Finisher Top Tray. The sheets are dog-eared.
Y
N
Check the Finisher Top Tray The Finisher Top Tray is installed correctly on the Top
Module Assembly.
Y
N
Remove then reinstall the Finisher Top Tray.
Replace the Finisher Top Tray PL 8.2 Item 3 if it cannot be reinstalled correctly due
to damage.
O
May 2003
2-566
2 sheets
1-sided
1 staple
81/2 x 11 in or A4 paper
5 copies
Q
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
O
Observe the sets as they are entering the Stacker Tray. The Tamper Arm
contacts the edge of the prints as they are being compiled in the Stacker
Tray.
Y
N
Perform ADJ 12-1, Tamping.
The problem continues after performing the Tamper Setup.
Y
N
Return to Call Flow.
Q
Go to the 12-AP Finisher Static Checkout RAP
Do the following:
On machines without TAG 114, cheat the Right Side Interlock Switch.
Check the Retractable Registration Edge for damage. replace the Moving
Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3, if required.
Observe the prints as they are entering the Stacker Tray. The
sticking to the Disk Baffle Assembly.
Y
N
Check the following:
prints
are
The Nip 1 Drive Rolls on the Nip 1 Drive Shaft PL 8.4 Item 2, for wear
or contamination.
The Nip 2 Drive Rolls on the Nip 2 Drive Shaft PL 8.4 Item 2, for wear
or contamination.
the Nip 1 Idlers on the Finisher Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item 11 for
binding, correct position, and contamination.
The Nip 2 Idlers on the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12 for binding, correct position, and contamination.
May 2003
2-567
12-AC
12-AC
May 2003
2-568
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-569
12-AC
adhesive film
Figure 4 Correct position of the mounting bracket for the Stapler Lead-In Baffle
12-AC
May 2003
2-570
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The sheets within the stapled set are not registered correctly.
The staples are not in the correct vertical (cross process) position in the set.
The staples are not in the correct horizontal (process) position in the set.
The problem continues after performing the Staple Cartridge Checkout Procedure.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the Staple Cartridge and resend a stapled job to the Finisher.
Check the stapled sets of prints. The problem continues after replacing the Staple
Cartridge.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
The customer is attempting to staple a set that exceeds 50 sheets of 20 lb (80 gsm)
paper, or equivalent thickness, or the programmed job is greater than 50 stapled sets
that contain 2 to 10 copies per set.
Y
N
The staples are missing or clinched incorrectly.
Y
N
Check the paper size displayed on the User Interface for each of the paper trays.
Check the Stapler Lead-In Baffle on the Moving Stapler. The Stapler Lead-In Baffle is
in the correct position (slightly above the edge of the Stapler Access Door).
Y
N
Ensure the Stapler Lead-In Baffle is in the correct position.
If the Stapler Lead-In Baffle cannot be positioned correctly, replace the Stapler LeadIn Baffle PL 8.5 Item 15.
NOTE: If the paper size in the paper tray is different from what is displayed on the
User Interface, the staples may be placed in the incorrect position.
The paper size displayed for each paper tray matches the paper size loaded in
the paper tray.
Y
N
Go to the 07-B Paper Size Sensing RAP.
The harness for the Moving Stapler is attached securely to the Service Tray
Assembly, and the harness does not interfere with the movement of the stapler.
Y
N
Ensure the harness for the Moving Stapler is attached securely to the Service
Tray Assembly.
Check the position and movement of the Canard Wing. The Canard Wing moves freely
without binding and is in the correct position on the Moving Stapler.
Y
N
Reseat the Canard Wing in the correct position. If the Canard Wing is damaged or
cannot be reseated correctly, replace the Moving Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3.
Check the Moving Stapler Gear Rack for any contamination or obstructions, including stray staples.
If the source of the binding cannot be removed, replace the Service Tray Assembly
PL 8.5 Item 1.
5 copies
The unformed staple roll may be wound too tightly or the Driver Bar may be out of position.
Do the following:
If the sheets within the stapled set are not registered correctly, or both staples in a 2 stapled set
are not in the correct position, Go to the 12-AC Finisher Misregistration RAP.
2 staples
Initial Actions
5 sheets
Collated
5 copies
Observe the sets as they are compiled and ejected into the Stacker Tray.
10 sheets
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
May 2003
2-571
12-AD
Observe the sets as they are being compiled. The Retractable Registration Edge contacts the edge of the prints as they are being compiled in the Stacker Tray.
Y
N
Do the following:
To gain access to the Finisher components, undock the Finisher from the IOT
(REP 12-12). Do not disconnect J15 from P69.
On machines without TAG 114, cheat the Right Side Interlock Switch.
C
NOTE: A Smart Tray Finisher is identified by the serial number
NF3xxxxxx.
Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1 (if the harness cannot be repaired).
If the Finisher Set Separator does not rest on the top of the set in the Stacker Tray,
check the mechanical components of the Finisher Set Separator for binding or damage. Replace the Finisher Set Separator PL 8.5 Item 19 (PL 8.5 Item 13 For Document Centre 460/470 with a Smart Tray Finisher installed), if required.
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Moving Stapler Empty Sensor], then [Start
Monitor]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The state of the Moving Stapler Empty Sensor is high (an indication of an empty
Staple Cartridge).
Y
N
Go to the 12-AK Moving Stapler Status RAP.
Replace the Moving Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3.
The Retractable Registration Edge is raised and lowered when the solenoid
actuates and de-actuates.
Y
N
Check the Retractable Registration Edge for binding. replace the Moving Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3, if required.
Check the Retractable Registration Edge for damage. Replace the Moving Stapler
PL 8.5 Item 3, if required.
The customer's programmed job is greater than 50 stapled sets that contain 2 to 10 copies per set.
Y
N
Inform the customer the stapling capacity of the Finisher is 50 sheets of 20 lb (80 gsm)
paper, or equivalent thickness. refer to Finishing. in Table 6
Inform the customer they can program the Finisher settings for thin stapled sets (refer to GP30
).
Observe the operation of the Finisher Set Separator. The Finisher Set Separator rests
on top of the ejected sets.
Y
N
Check for a strip of black adhesive film on the surface of the foam strip (located
where the Set Separator rests on the surface of the Stacker Tray).
A strip of black adhesive film is installed.
Y
N
Install the Finisher Set Separator Kit PL 8.5 Item 19.
Do the following:
Observe the operation of the Finisher Set Separator and the Set Separator Solenoid. The Set Separator Solenoid energizes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check wires for a short circuit or an open circuit.
Replace the defective component.
Finisher Set Separator PL 8.5 Item 19 (PL 8.5 Item 13 For Document Centre 460/470 with a Smart Tray Finisher installed).
A
B
C
Status Indicator RAPs
12-AD
May 2003
2-572
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
adhesive film
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-573
12-AD
The staples are not in the correct vertical (cross process) position in the set.
B
Program and print a job with the following attributes:
5 sheets
Collated
5 copies
Observe the operation of the Finisher Set Separator. The Finisher Set Separator rests
on top of the ejected sets.
Y
N
Check for a strip of black adhesive film on the surface of the foam strip (located
where the Set Separator rests on the surface of the Stacker Tray).
A strip of black adhesive film is installed.
Y
N
Install the Finisher Set Separator Kit PL 8.5 Item 19.
Initial Actions
If the sheets within the stapled set are not registered correctly, or both staples in the set are not
in the correct position, Go to the 12-AC Finisher Misregistration RAP.
Do the following:
Ask the customer about the job they were doing when the problem occurred. A job that meets
the following conditions may cause stapling problems:
Sets that exceeds 50 sheets of 20 lb (80 gsm) paper, or equivalent thickness. refer to Finishing. in Table 6
Greater than 50 stapled sets that contain 2 to 10 copies per set. refer to Finishing. in
Table 6
Observe the operation of The Finisher Set Separator and the Set Separator Solenoid. The Set Separator Solenoid energizes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check wires for a short circuit or an open circuit.
Replace the defective component.
The customer is attempting to staple a set that exceeds 50 sheets of 20 lb (80 gsm)
paper, or equivalent thickness, or the programmed job is greater than 50 stapled sets
that contain 2 to 10 copies per set.
Y
N
Check the paper size displayed on the User Interface for each of the paper trays.
Finisher Set Separator PL 8.5 Item 19 (PL 8.5 Item 13 For Document Centre 460/470 with a Smart Tray Finisher installed).
NOTE: A Smart Tray Finisher is identified by the serial number
NF3xxxxxx.
NOTE: If the paper size in the paper tray is different from what is displayed on the User
Interface, the staples may be placed in the incorrect position.
The paper size displayed for each paper tray matches the paper size loaded in the
paper tray.
Y
N
Go to the 07-B Paper Size Sensing RAP.
Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1 (if the harness cannot be repaired).
If the Finisher Set Separator does not rest on the top of the set in the Stacker Tray,
check the mechanical components of the Finisher Set Separator for binding or damage. Replace the Finisher Set Separator PL 8.5 Item 19 (PL 8.5 Item 13 For Document Centre 460/470 with a Smart Tray Finisher installed), if required.
The unformed staple roll may be wound too tightly or the Driver Bar may be out of position.
Do the following:
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Fixed Stapler Empty Sensor], then [Start
Monitor]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The state of the Fixed Stapler Empty Sensor is high (an indication of an empty Staple Cartridge).
Y
N
Go to the 12-AL Fixed Stapler Status RAP.
The problem continues after performing the Staple Cartridge Checkout Procedure.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the Staple Cartridge and send a stapled job (2-Staples) to the Finisher.
Check the stapled sets of prints. The problem continues after replacing the Staple
Cartridge.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
A
B
Status Indicator RAPs
12-AE
May 2003
2-574
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
N
Inform the customer the stapling capacity of the Finisher is 50 sheets of 20 lb (80 gsm)
paper, or equivalent thickness. refer to Finishing. in Table 6
Inform the customer they can program the Finisher settings for thin stapled sets (refer to GP30
)
adhesive film
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-575
12-AE
B
Y
Initial Actions
Ensure the Finisher Noise Reduction Pad Kit PL 8.6 Item 1, is installed.
N
Do the following:
Do the following:
The noise occurs with the Nip 1/2 Drive Belt removed.
Y
N
Do the following:
Open the Finisher Top Cover Door and cheat the Finisher Interlock Switch.
The noise occurs with the Nip 3/4 Drive Belt removed.
A
B
Status Indicator RAPs
12-AF
Do the following:
Remove the Nip 1/2 Drive Belt, and switch the power [On].
The noise occurs when the Finisher Transport Baffle is in the jam clearance
position.
Y
N
Replace the Finisher Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item 11.
The Nip 1 Idlers on the Finisher Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item 11.
The Nip 2 Idlers on the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12.
May 2003
2-576
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Fixed Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid], [Output On], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Replace the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12, if the noise occurs.
If the noise occurs, check the Stacker Tray PL 8.2 Item 16.
Replace the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12, if the noise occurs.
If the noise occurs, check the Disk Drive Motor PL 8.3 Item 6.
If the noise occurs, replace the Finisher Set Separator PL 8.5 Item 19 (PL
8.5 Item 13 For Document Centre 460/470 with a Smart Tray Finisher
installed).
If the noise occurs, replace the Staple Cartridge. If the problem continues, replace
the Fixed Stapler PL 8.5 Item 2.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Transport Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter
[Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The noise occurs when the Transport Drive Motor energizes.
Y
N
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Tamper In/Out], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier
Sys tab , Component Control].
The noise occurs when the Tamper Motor energizes.
Y
N
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Stapler Position Front], [Output On], [All
Outputs Off], [Stapler Position Rear], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The noise occurs when the Stapler Position Motor energizes.
Y
N
The noise is in one of the following. Check each component listed using Component Control.
C
D
V0.042
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Stacker Tray Offset], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Retractable Reg. Edge Solenoid], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
if the noise occurs, replace the Service Tray Assembly PL 8.5 Item 1.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Transport Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter
[Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Open the Finisher Top Cover Door and cheat the Finisher Interlock Switch.
May 2003
2-577
12-AF
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Transport Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter
[Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The noise occurs when the Finisher Transport Baffle is in the jam clearance position.
Y
N
Replace the Finisher Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item 11.
The Nip 1 Idlers on the Finisher Transport Baffle PL 8.3 Item 11.
The Nip 2 Idlers on the Disk Baffle Assembly PL 8.3 Item 12.
Do the following:
Remove the Nip 3/4 Drive Belt, and switch the power [On].
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Transport Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter
[Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The noise occurs with the Nip 3/4 Drive Belt removed.
Y
N
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Transport Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Remove the Nip 1/2 Drive Belt, and switch the power [On].
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Transport Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter
[Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The noise occurs with the Nip 1/2 Drive Belt removed.
Y
N
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Transport Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
F
Status Indicator RAPs
12-AF
May 2003
2-578
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A message to clear the jam in the Finisher is displayed on the User Interface, when no
paper is jammed in the Finisher.
A message to close the Finisher Top Cover is displayed on the User Interface, when the
Finisher Top Cover is closed.
A message to close the Stapler Access Door is displayed on the User Interface, when the
Stapler Access Door is closed.
The message, Finisher Main Tray not available, remove any obstructions, is displayed on
the User Interface.
E
Go to Flag 1. Check the circuit of the Finisher Entrance Sensor for a short
circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component.
Initial Actions
Ensure the Finisher paper path is clear of all paper, including small pieces that may have been
left in the Finisher after clearing a jam.
Go to Flag 2. Check the circuit of the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor for a short
circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component
Do the following:
The message, Finisher Main Tray not available, remove any obstructions, is displayed
on the User Interface.
Y
N
Do the following:
Open the Finisher Top Cover Door. The message on the User Interface indicates the
Finisher Top Cover Door is open.
Y
N
Go to Flag 3. Check the circuit of the Finisher Interlock Switch for a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component.
A
B
V0.042
Ensure the Finisher connector J15 is securely connected to P69 on the IOT.
Dock the Finisher to the IOT and switch the power [On].
The message on the User Interface indicates the Finisher Top Cover Door is open.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Go to the 12-309 Finisher Interlock Switch RAP.
Go to the 12-AT Stacker Tray Upper Limit Switch RAP.
May 2003
2-579
12-AG
The Stacker Tray is full with no message on the User Interface indicating the Stacker Tray
is full, or the message on the User Interface indicates the Stacker Tray is full when the
Stacker Tray is not full.
Landscape stapling options are not available for selection (Smart Tray Finisher only).
When the Stacker Tray becomes full and the operator is directed to remove copies from
the tray, the tray does not raise after the copies are removed.
Check the Stack Height Sensor /Stack Too High Sensor. The Stack Height Sensor/Stack
Too High Sensor is free from damage (the body of the sensor should be at a 90 degree
angle in relation to the base of the sensor).
Y
N
Replace the Stack Height Sensor/Stack Too High Sensor PL 8.5 Item 10.
Check the Finisher Change Tag Matrix
The Finisher Tag Matrix indicates TAG F027 is installed.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the circuit of the Stacker Tray Full Sensor for an open circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component.
Go to Flag 1. Check the circuit of the Stacker Tray Full Sensor for an open circuit. The check
of the Stacker Tray Full Sensor is good.
12-AG, 12-AH
May 2003
2-580
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
N
Repair the harness or replace the defective component.
Go to Flag 3. Check the circuit of the Finisher Empty Sensor (located in the Stacker Tray) for
an open circuit or a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-581
12-AH
12-AH
May 2003
2-582
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Check the air flow at the customer's site. Excessive air flow may cause poor stacking, resulting
in a false Finisher Top Tray status message.
5 sheets
Collated
5 copies
Observe the sheets as they are stacked in the Finisher Top Tray. The trail edge of the sheet
entering the Finisher Top Tray is slow to settle on the stack of paper in the tray.
Y
N
Check the Top Tray Full Sensor Actuator. The actuator is not damaged, and moves
freely to block and unblock the Top Tray Full Sensor.
Y
N
Replace the Top Tray Full Sensor Actuator PL 8.4 Item 6.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Top Tray Full Sensor], then [Start Monitor]. Enter
[Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Block and unblock the Top Tray Full Sensor by manually moving the flag actuator. The
state of the Top Tray Full Sensor changes.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component
If the problem occurs again, Go to Flag 1. Check the circuit of the Top Tray Full Sensor PL
8.4 Item 1 for an intermittent condition.
Check the vertical surface (back wall) of the Finisher Top Tray. The vertical surface of the
Finisher Top Tray is free from damage.
Y
N
Replace the Top Module Assembly PL 8.3 Item 1.
Go to the 12-AP Finisher Static Checkout RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-583
12-AJ
Block the Moving Stapler Empty Sensor by pushing up on the white actuator in the Moving Stapler. The voltage is 0 VDC when the Moving Stapler Empty Sensor is blocked.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Moving Stapler PL 8.5 Item 3.
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
Press the Pause Resume Switch to lower the Stacker Tray and open the Stapler Access
Door.
NOTE: The Stacker Tray will raise 30 seconds after the Pause Resume Switch is actuated unless the Stapler Access Door is open.
Remove the Staple Cartridge from the Moving (front) Stapler and set aside. Remove the
functioning Staple Cartridge from the Fixed (rear) Stapler and install it in the Moving Stapler.
Check the message on the User Interface. A message to Replace Staple Cartridge 1 is displayed on the User Interface.
Y
N
Do the following
Press the Pause Resume Switch to lower the Stacker Tray and open the Stapler
Access Door.
NOTE: The Stacker Tray will raise 30 seconds after the Pause Resume Switch is
actuated unless the Stapler Access Door is open.
Switch the power [Off]. Disconnect P7 from the Finisher Controller PWB and
switch the power [On].
12-AK
May 2003
2-584
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-585
12-AK
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
12-AK
May 2003
2-586
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Block the Fixed Stapler Empty Sensor by pushing up on the white actuator in the Fixed Stapler. The voltage is 0 VDC when the Fixed Stapler Empty Sensor is blocked.
Y
N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the Fixed Stapler PL 8.5 Item 2.
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
Press the Pause Resume Switch to lower the Stacker Tray and open the Stapler Access
Door.
NOTE: The Stacker Tray will raise 30 seconds after the Pause Resume Switch is actuated unless the Stapler Access Door is open.
Remove the Staple Cartridge from the Fixed (rear) Stapler and set aside. Remove the
functioning Staple Cartridge from the Moving (front) Stapler and install it in the Fixed Stapler.
Check the message on the User Interface . A message to Replace Staple Cartridge 2 is
displayed on the User Interface .
Y
N
Do the following
Press the Pause Resume Switch to lower the Stacker Tray and open the Stapler
Access Door.
NOTE: The Stacker Tray will raise 30 seconds after the Pause Resume Switch is
actuated unless the Stapler Access Door is open.
Switch the power [Off]. Disconnect P7 from the Finisher Controller PWB and
switch the power [On].
May 2003
2-587
12-AL
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
12-AL
May 2003
2-588
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Disconnect P/J11 on the Finisher Controller PWB and switch the power [On].
Measure the voltage between SIGNALGND (-) and TH50 (+) on the Finisher Controller PWB.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-589
12-AM
TH6
TH42
TH40
TH44
TH45
SIGNALGND
TH51
TH53
TH69
TH66
TH50
12-AM
May 2003
2-590
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
If any of the 2 Static Eliminators in the Finisher or the Static Eliminator on the Dual Decurler/
Exit Baffle are damaged, worn, or not connected securely to the machine frame, the Finisher
may exhibit one or more of the problems listed below:
In-set misregistration
Dog-ears.
Intermittent electrical problems caused by static eliminator brush fibers contacting electrical components.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-591
12-AN, 12-AP
A
Y
N
Remove the Decurler and install the Exit Baffle Kit PL 6.1A Item 6 (TAG 040).
If the problem continues, ensure there is continuity between the Finisher frame and
the IOT frame. Check the mounting hooks on the Finisher for corrosion if there is not
continuity between the Finisher frame and the IOT frame
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Check the Finisher Change Tag Matrix.
TAG F112, Finisher Active Static Eliminator is installed.
Y
N
Install TAG F112, Static Eliminator Kit (PL 8.3 Item 22).
B
Check the Finisher Change Tag Matrix.
TAG F112, Finisher Active Static Eliminator is installed.
Y
N
Install TAG F112, Static Eliminator Kit (PL 8.3 Item 22).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2. Check the circuit of the Finisher Active Static Eliminator for an open
circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2. Check the circuit of the Finisher Active Static Eliminator for
an open circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
Check the Static Eliminator on the Exit Baffle for damage and wear. The Static Eliminator is free from damage and wear.
Y
N
Replace the Exit Baffle PL 6.1A Item 6.
Ensure there is continuity between the Finisher frame and the IOT frame. Check the
mounting hooks on the Finisher for corrosion if there is not continuity between the Finisher frame and the IOT frame.
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Check the Finisher Change Tag Matrix
TAG F112, Finisher Active Static Eliminator is installed
Y
N
Install TAG F112, Static Eliminator Kit (PL 8.3 Item 22).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2. Check the circuit of the Finisher Active Static Eliminator for an
open circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the defective component:
B
Status Indicator RAPs
12-AP
May 2003
2-592
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-593
12-AP
N
Switch the power [Off]. Disconnect P2 from the Finisher Controller PWB.
Check for a short circuit between:
Entry to this checkout is only from the 12-101, 12-102, 12-106, or 12-107 RAP
Procedure
One or both of the +24 VDC outputs to the Transport Drive Motor are shorted
to the Finisher frame.
Y
N
The +24 VDC outputs for the Transport Drive Motor may be shorting to the
mounting hook for the Finisher Controller PWB. Check the back of connector
J2.
The back of connector J2 is contacting the mounting hook for the Finisher Controller PWB.
Y
N
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16.
Incorrect tension on the Nip 1/2 Drive Belt and on the Nip 3/4 Drive Belt may cause binding of
the Transport Drive Motor. Do the following:
Remove the Finisher Rear Cover and the Upper Rear Cover.
Loosen the T20 idler screw on the Nip 1/2 Idler and on the Nip 3/4 Idler 1/4 turn.
Ensure the idlers move freely (this will allow the idlers to apply the correct tension to the
drive belts).
Tighten the T20 idler screw on the Nip 1/2 Idler and on the Nip 3/4 Idler.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Transport Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Replace the Finisher Controller PWB PL 8.3 Item 16. Ensure the back of connector J2 does not make contact with the mounting hook for the Finisher Controller PWB.
Go to Flag 2. Check the wires in the harness for a short circuit to the Finisher
Frame. One or both of the wires are shorted to the Finisher frame.
Y
N
Replace the following:
Remove the Nip 1/2 Drive Belt and the Nip 3/4 Drive Belt.
Manually rotate the Transport Drive Motor Counter Clockwise (as viewed from the rear of
the Finisher). The Transport Drive Motor rotates freely without binding.
Y
N
Replace the Transport Drive Motor PL 8.5 Item 14.
Do the following:
the Nip 3 Drive Shaft, The Nip 4 Drive Shaft and the Nip 3/4 Idler, on the Top Module
Assembly.
Switch the power [Off]. Disconnect P2 from the Finisher Controller PWB.
Measure the resistance between the following pins on connector P2:
The Top Module Assembly PL 8.3 Item 1, if the Nip 3 Drive Shaft, the Nip 4
Drive Shaft, or the Nip 3/4 Idler is binding.
The Finisher, if the Nip 1/2 Idler or the Dual Idler, is binding.
The Finisher frame (-) and P2 -2 (+) on the Finisher Controller PWB.
The Finisher frame (-) and P2 -5 (+) on the Finisher Controller PWB.
P2 -1 and P2-2
P2 -2 and P2 -3
P2 -4 and P2 -5
P2 -5 and P2 -6
12-AR
May 2003
2-594
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-595
12-AR
12-AR
May 2003
2-596
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The message, Finisher Main Tray not available, remove any obstructions, is displayed on the
User Interface. The message cannot be cleared.
Check the position of the Disk Shaft Actuator (refer to Figure 1).
Move the actuator until the Disk Shaft rests in the rounded notch of the actuator.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-597
12-AS, 12-AT
12-AT
May 2003
2-598
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Entry to this checkout is only from the 12-AA or the 12-AC RAP
Procedure
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Transport Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Observe the Cooling Fans. One or Two of the Cooling Fans are operating.
Y
N
Do the following:
Disconnect P2 from J13 on the Finisher Controller PWB and switch the power [On].
Measure the voltage between the Finisher frame (-) and J13-2 (+) on the Finisher
Controller PWB.
In Component Control, select [Finisher], [Transport Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-599
12-AT, 12-AU
12-AU
May 2003
2-600
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
J13
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P2
May 2003
2-601
12-AU
12-AU
May 2003
2-602
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
D
14-300 faults still occur after replacing the Image Module.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
The control system did not detect a signal at the AGC patch, which indicates the Illumination
Lamp is not lit or there is a failure in the video path. Scanning is disabled with this fault.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
The AGC Patch is the white patch on the underside of the clip on the outboard (front) end of
the Image Module.
In Video Path Diagnostics, select [SCVM Digital Test] and [Start Test], then
observe the results of the test. Enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics].
The test passes.
Y
N
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Visually check the Illumination Lamp for signs of aging, such as dark ends or a yellowed
surface.
The Illumination Lamp appears to be good.
Y
N
Replace the Illumination Lamp Module PL 3.2 Item 7.
Reset the counter for the Illumination Lamp using the [IIT tab , Lamp Life Reset]
routine.
Ensure the lamp filaments are lit after the Lamp Module is replaced and the
machine is switched on. If the filaments are not lit, go to the 14-D RAP.
If background is present after replacing the Module, burn-in the Lamp for 15
minutes using [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Check the fault counters for 14-712, 14-713, 14-714, and 14-715 faults. Enter [Faults/
Counters tab , Counters Display]
At least one of the listed faults is logged.
Y
N
In Scanner Tests, select [Lamp Operation] and [Start], then observe the results of the
test. Enter [IIT tab , Scanner Tests].
The [Results] window has the message: Lamp turn on passed.
Y
N
Go to the 14-A Illumination Checkout RAP.
This is a call back for 14-300 faults and/or black copies.
Y
N
The machine has a TAG 015 Main Control PWB installed.
Y
N
Replace the Scanner Video Cable PL 3.2 Item 4.
14-300 faults still occur after replacing the Scanner Video Cable.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1.
A
B
V0.042
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Go to the 14-300 Intermittent Checkout Procedure.
Go to the RAP for the counted fault. If more than one fault is counted, go to the RAP for
the fault with the highest count.
Check the NVM value in Scan Service, location 20 (lampoffset). Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool].
If the [Current Value] is 0, change the [Current Value] to be the same as the [Previous
Value].
If the [Current Value] is a value other than 0, do NOT change the [Current Value].
If the machine does NOT have TAG 077, answer Yes to the following statement.
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Intermittent 14-300 faults can be caused by the Illumination Lamp or the Illumination Lamp
Power Supply. Raise the Document Glass Cover and observe LED2 (24VLMP) on the Illumination Lamp Power Supply ( Figure 1).
LED2 (24VLMP) is on.
Y
N
Go to the 14-A Illumination Checkout RAP.
Visually check the Illumination Lamp for signs of aging, such as dark ends or a yellowed surface.
May 2003
2-603
14-300
Reset the counter for the Illumination Lamp using the [IIT tab , Lamp Life Reset] routine.
Ensure the lamp filaments are lit after the Lamp Module is replaced and the machine
is switched on. If the filaments are not lit, go to the 14-D RAP.
If background is present after replacing the Module, burn-in the Lamp for 15 minutes
using [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Check the fault counters for 14-712, 14-713, 14-714, and 14-715 faults. Enter [Faults/Counters
tab , Counters Display]
At least one of the listed faults is logged.
Y
N
In Scanner Tests, select [Lamp Operation] and [Start], then observe the results of the test.
Enter [IIT tab , Scanner Tests].
The [Results] window has the message: Lamp turn on passed.
Y
N
Go to the 14-A Illumination Checkout RAP.
Switch the power [On]. Make several scans to ensure the problem is corrected.
The problem continues after seating the connectors.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the Illumination Lamp Power Supply PL 3.2 Item 5. Make several scans to ensure the
problem is corrected.
The problem continues after replacing the Illumination Lamp Power Supply.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
One of the following components may have an intermittent problem. Replace the items listed
one at a time in the order they are listed until the problem is resolved:
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Go to the 14-300 Intermittent Checkout Procedure.
Go to the RAP for the counted fault. If more than one fault is counted, go to the RAP for the
fault with the highest count.
14-300
May 2003
2-604
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The control system has detected the Scanner and the Main Control PWB have an incompatible
configuration. Scanning is disabled.
The Scanner AGC Loop has not settled within 10 seconds after initialization. Scanning is disabled.
Procedure
This fault is encountered only after a part is changed or the software is upgraded. Perform the
following actions.
In Scanner Lamp Profile, select [Lamp On], then [Start], then observe the results of the test.
Enter [IIT tab , Scanner Lamp Profile].
The Lamp Profile checks OK. (The green line stays within the indicated range.)
Y
N
Go to the 14-A Illumination Checkout RAP.
If the Main Control PWB is the Atlanta Gold configuration, ensure the jumper on the PWB
is set to the correct machine type: F1 or F2. Refer to REP 03-4.
If the Scanner or the Main Control PWB was just replaced, ensure the part number of the
new part is correct for the machine configuration.
If the software has just been upgraded, ensure the software version is correct for the
machine configuration.
In Scanner Tests, select [AGC Tab Test] and [Start], then observe the results of the test. Enter
[IIT tab , Scanner Tests].
The AGC Tab Test passes.
Y
N
Do the following:
Remove the Scanner Assembly REP 14-4. Clean or repair the AGC Tab.
In Scanner Tests, select [AGC Tab Test] and [Start], then observe the results of the
test. Enter [IIT tab , Scanner Tests].
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-605
14-312, 14-313
14-314: The Dark Loop is not settled within 10 seconds after initialization. Scanning is disabled.
14-315: The Offset Loop, First In First Out (FIFO) Number 1, is not settled within 10 seconds after initialization. Scanning is disabled.
14-316: The Offset Loop, First In First Out (FIFO) Number 2, is not settled within 10 seconds after initialization. Scanning is disabled.
14-317: The Full Scale D/A Loop, First In First Out (FIFO) Number 1, is not settled within
10 seconds after initialization. Scanning is disabled.
14-318: The Full Scale D/A Loop, First In First Out (FIFO) Number 2, is not settled within
10 seconds after initialization. Scanning is disabled.
14-319: The Full Scale A/D Loop, First In First Out (FIFO) Number 1, is not settled within
10 seconds after initialization. Scanning is disabled.
14-320: The Full Scale A/D Loop, First In First Out (FIFO) Number 2, is not settled within
10 seconds after initialization. Scanning is disabled.
May 2003
2-606
C
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
C
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G
RAP.
B
Return to Service Call Procedures.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-607
14-325
N
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
Move the Scan Carriage by turning the Scan Carriage Motor by hand.
Observe the PWS to determine if there is a change of state as the flag on the Image Module passes through the PSOS Sensor.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
14-335
Measure the voltage between P15-4 (-) and P15-5 (+) on the Distribution PWB. In Component
Control, select the [Scan Carriage Motor] and [Cycle Output]. Observe the meter while the
motor is switched on. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The voltage is less than 0.5 VDC with the motor running.
Y
N
With the motor still running, measure the voltage between TP GND (-) and P5-1 (+) on the
Distribution PWB.
The voltage is less than 0.5 VDC with the motor running.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution Cable PL 1.2A Item 9.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G
RAP.
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
With the motor still running, measure the voltage between P15-4 (-) and P15-7 (+) on the Distribution PWB.
The voltage is less than 5.0 VDC with the motor running.
Y
N
With the motor running, measure the voltage between TP GND (-) and P5-10 (+) on the
Distribution PWB.
The voltage is less than 5.0 VDC with the motor running.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution Cable PL 1.2A Item 9.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G
RAP.
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
With the motor still running, measure the voltage between P15-4 (-) and P15-6 (+) on the Distribution PWB.
The voltage toggles between 5.0 VDC and less than 0.5 VDC with the motor running.
Y
N
With the motor still running, measure the voltage between TP GND (-) and P5-2 (+) on the
Distribution PWB.
The voltage toggles between 5.0 VDC and less than 0.5 VDC with the motor running.
Y
N
Replace the Distribution Cable PL 1.2A Item 9.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G
RAP.
Replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5 Item 7.
B
May 2003
2-608
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
Switch the power [Off]. Remove the Document Glass. Manually move the Scan Carriage to
check for binding.
The scan carriage binds.
Y
N
Replace the Scan Carriage Motor PL 3.2 Item 6.
Replace the Scanner Assembly PL 3.1 Item 1.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-609
14-335
14-335
May 2003
2-610
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The Scan Carriage Motor does not provide a 'Motor Done' signal.
Fault Code 14-345 indicates +12 VDC is not detected by the Main Control PWB.
Fault Code 14-347 indicates -12 VDC is not detected by the Main Control PWB.
Ensure all connectors to the Distribution PWB and the Main Control PWB are fully seated. If
any connector is not fully seated, reseat the connector, clear the fault(s), then run copies to
determine if the problem occurs again.
The problem occurs again.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Check the [Last 40 Faults] for 14-335 faults. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
14-335 faults are logged.
Y
N
Replace the Scan Carriage Motor PL 3.2 Item 6.
Go to the 14-335 RAP and diagnose that problem.
Connect the (-) meter lead to the metal case of the LVPS.
Connect the (+) meter lead to the test point labeled -12V.
Connect the (-) meter lead to the metal case of the LVPS.
Connect the (+) meter lead to the test point labeled +12V.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-611
14-340, 14-345/347
Fault Code 14-350 indicates the scanner video cable is disconnected or has failed. Scanning is
disabled.
The Illumination Lamp output is less than 35% of the original output.
Switch the power [Off]. Disconnect, then reconnect the Scanner Video Cable at the Main Control PWB and the Image Module. Switch the power [On].
The 14-350 fault occurs again.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Reset the counter for the Illumination Lamp using the [IIT tab , Lamp Life Reset] routine.
Ensure the lamp filaments are lit after the Lamp Module is replaced and the machine is
switched on. If the filaments are not lit, go to the 14-D RAP.
If background is present after replacing the Module, burn-in the Lamp for 15 minutes
using [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Switch the power [Off]. Replace the Scanner Video Cable PL 3.2 Item 4. Switch the power
[On].
The 14-350 fault occurs again.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
14-350, 14-700
May 2003
2-612
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The Dark Offset step made too many iterations during the Scanner Calibration.
14-703: The Scanner failed to calibrate because the pixel gain was too high.
14-704: The Scanner failed to calibrate because the pixel gain was too low.
With these faults, the Scanner is operating in the degraded mode and some print quality problems may be observed.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
In Video Path Diagnostics, select [SCVM Digital Test] and [Start Test], then observe the
results of the test. Enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics].
The test passes.
Y
N
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1.
14-702 faults still occur after replacing the Image Module.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Check the [Last 40 Faults] for 14-712, 14-713, 14-714, or 14-715 faults. Enter [Faults/Counters
tab , Faults].
14-712, 14-713, 14-714, or 14-715 faults are logged.
Y
N
Check the IOT Tag Matrix for TAG 077.
The machine has Tag 077 installed.
Y
N
In Scanner Lamp Profile, select [Lamp Off], then [Start], then observe the results of
the test. Enter [IIT tab , Scanner Lamp Profile].
The Lamp Profile checks OK. (The green line is flat at the 'MIN' level on the
graph.)
Y
N
The machine has a TAG 015 Main Control PWB installed.
Y
N
Replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1.
14-703 or 14-704 faults still occur after replacing the Image Module.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
In Video Path Diagnostics, select [SCVM Digital Test] and [Start Test], then
observe the results of the test. Enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics].
The test passes.
Y
N
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-613
D
Status Indicator RAPs
14-702, 14-703/704
A
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
E
Replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1.
14-703 or 14-704 faults still occur after replacing the Image Module.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
In Scanner Lamp Profile, select [Lamp Off], then [Start], then observe the results of the
test. Enter [IIT tab , Scanner Lamp Profile].
The Lamp Profile checks OK. (The green line is flat at the 'MIN' level on the graph.)
Y
N
Replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1.
14-703 or 14-704 faults still occur after replacing the Image Module.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
In Video Path Diagnostics, select [SCVM Digital Test] and [Start Test], then
observe the results of the test. Enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics].
The test passes.
Y
N
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
In Scanner Lamp Profile, select [Lamp On], then [Start], then observe the results of the
test. Enter [IIT tab , Scanner Lamp Profile].
The Lamp Profile checks OK. (The green line stays within the indicated range.)
Y
N
One or more points of the Lamp Profile (the green line) exceed a high or low
limit (the black lines) on the graph.
Y
N
Send service to perform the Scanner Cleaning Procedure REP 14-3. After the
cleaning, perform the [IIT tab , Scanner Calibration].
The problem continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Perform the [IIT tab , Scanner Calibration].
The problem continues after the calibration.
Y
N
The problem cannot be reproduced at this time, but there may be an intermittent
problem in the system. The two suspect components are the Image Module PL 3.2
Item 1 and the Main Control PWB PL 1.4B Item 1. Replacement of these components without a consistent, repeatable failure is at the discretion of the district.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
In Video Path Diagnostics, select [SCVM Digital Test] and [Start Test], then observe
the results of the test. Enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics].
The test passes.
Y
N
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
A
B
E
Status Indicator RAPs
14-703/704
A
May 2003
2-614
F
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Go to the RAP for the counted fault. If more than one fault is counted, go to the RAP for the
fault with the highest count.
14-705: The Scanner failed to calibrate because the pixel offset was too high. One or
more of the pixels is higher than the desired level and cannot be adjusted lower. Scanning
is disabled.
14-706: The Scanner failed to calibrate because the pixel offset was too low. One or more
of the pixels is lower than the desired level and cannot be adjusted higher. Scanning is
disabled.
14-714: The Scanner failed to calibrate because the dark gain is at the minimum and the
darkest pixel is too low after adjusting dark pixel offset. Scanning is disabled.
14-715: The Scanner failed to calibrate because the dark gain is at the maximum and the
highest pixel is too high when the darkest pixel is at minimum (dark pixel offset). Scanning
is disabled.
Procedure
Go to the 14-C Scanner Loop Faults RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-615
The Control Logic senses a failure to calibrate the Scanner with the overall gain at maximum.
The brightest pixel cannot be raised to an acceptable level. With this fault, the Scanner is operating in the degraded mode and some print quality problems may be observed.
Procedure
Perform a PO/PO to clear this fault.
14-710, 14-712
May 2003
2-616
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
Go to the 14-A Scanner Loop Faults RAP.
Check the Fault Counters for 14-700, 14-714 or 14-715 faults. Enter [Faults/Counters tab ,
Counters Display].
At least one of the listed faults is counted.
Y
N
In Scanner Lamp Profile, select [Lamp Off], then [Start], then observe the results of the
test. Enter [IIT tab , Scanner Lamp Profile].
The Lamp Profile checks OK. (The green line is flat at the 'MIN' level on the graph.)
Y
N
Replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G
RAP.
The Control Logic senses a failure to calibrate the Scanner with the overall gain at minimum.
The brightest pixel is at too high a level and cannot be adjusted lower. With this fault, the Scanner is operating in the degraded mode and some print quality problems may be observed.
In Scanner Lamp Profile, select [Lamp On], then [Start], then observe the results of the
test. Enter [IIT tab , Scanner Lamp Profile].
The Lamp Profile checks OK. (The green line stays within the indicated range.)
Y
N
Replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G
RAP.
The problem cannot be reproduced at this time, but there may be an intermittent problem
in the system. The two suspect components are the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1 and the
Main Control PWB PL 1.4B Item 1. Replacement of these components without a consistent, repeatable failure is at the discretion of the district.
Go to the 14-A Scanner Loop Faults RAP.
Initial Actions
Have the customer check the prints made when this fault code is displayed. If the prints have
bands from lead edge to trail edge and one of the bands is a band of no image approximately
5/8 inch wide from lead edge to trail edge, a sensor in the Image Module is defective. Send
service to replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
In Scanner Lamp Profile, select [Lamp On], then [Start], then observe the results of
the test. Enter [IIT tab , Scanner Lamp Profile].
The Lamp Profile checks OK. (The green line stays within the indicated range.)
Y
N
Replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1.
14-713 faults still occur after replacing the Image Module.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Go to the 14-A Illumination Checkout RAP.
The machine has a TAG 015 Main Control PWB installed.
Y
N
Replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1.
14-713 faults still occur after replacing the Image Module.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-617
C
Status Indicator RAPs
14-712, 14-713
C
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
In Video Path Diagnostics, select [SCVM Digital Test] and [Start Test], then observe the
results of the test. Enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics].
The test passes.
Y
N
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Go to the 14-C Scanner AGC Loop Faults RAP.
Check the Fault Counters for 14-714 or 14-715 faults. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Counters
Display].
At least one of the listed faults is counted.
Y
N
In Scanner Lamp Profile, select [Lamp Off], then [Start], then observe the results of the
test. Enter [IIT tab , Scanner Lamp Profile].
The Lamp Profile checks OK. (The green line is flat at the 'MIN' level on the graph.)
Y
N
Replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1.
14-713 faults still occur after replacing the Image Module.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
In Scanner Lamp Profile, select [Lamp On], then [Start], then observe the results of the
test. Enter [IIT tab , Scanner Lamp Profile].
The Lamp Profile checks OK. (The green line stays within the indicated range.)
Y
N
Replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1.
14-713 faults still occur after replacing the Image Module.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Go to the 14-A Illumination Checkout RAP.
Go to the 14-C Scanner AGC Loop Faults RAP.
14-713
May 2003
2-618
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
C
Go to the 14-A Illumination Checkout RAP.
Raise the Document Glass Cover and check the LEDs on the Illumination Lamp Power
Supply (Figure 1).
LED3 (24VHTR) is on.
Y
N
Switch the power [Off].
Remove the Document Glass Frame.
Disconnect the Illumination Lamp ribbon cable A1DS1P1 from J4 on the Illumination
Lamp Power Supply.
Measure the resistance between Pin 4 and Pin 5 of A1DS1P1. Go to Flag 2.
The resistance is 10 to 14 ohms.
Y
N
Replace the Illumination Lamp Module PL 3.2 Item 7.
Reset the counter for the Illumination Lamp using the [IIT tab , Lamp Life
Reset] routine.
Ensure the lamp filaments are lit after the Lamp Module is replaced and
the machine is switched on. If the filaments are not lit, go to the 14-D RAP.
If background is present after replacing the Module, burn-in the Lamp for
15 minutes using [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
In Video Path Diagnostics, select [SCVM Digital Test] and [Start Test], then observe the
results of the test. Enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics].
The test passes.
Y
N
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
If the covers were not in place before the fault occurred, replace the covers then switch
the IOT power [Off]. Wait at least one minute, then switch the IOT power [On]. (These
steps are necessary to force the Illumination Lamp through a warm-up and calibration
cycle.)
The 14-716 fault continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Check the operation of the Scanner Cooling Fan.
The Scanner Cooling Fan is running.
Y
N
Raise the Document Glass Cover and check the LEDs on the Illumination Lamp
Power Supply (Figure 1).
LED3 (24VHTR) is on.
Y
N
Switch the power [Off]. Check the +24VDC (PS) and +24 VDC RET lines
between the LVPS and the Illumination Lamp Power Supply for an open circuit.
Go to Flag 1. Repair or replace as necessary.
Check the electrical connections to the Scanner Cooling Fan. If the fan is correctly
connected, replace the Scanner Cooling Fan PL 9.1 Item 10. Now perform the [IIT
tab , Scanner Calibration].
The fault continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
A
B
V0.042
Replace the Scanner Dust Filter (part of the NOHAD Filter Kit) PL 9.1 Item 1.
In [IIT tab , Scanner Calibration], perform the [Full] Calibration.
The 14-716 fault occurs after the calibration.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Go to the 14-A Illumination Checkout RAP.
If the covers were not in place before the fault occurred, replace the covers then switch the IOT
power [Off]. Wait at least one minute, then switch the IOT power [On]. (These steps are necessary to force the Illumination Lamp through a warm-up and calibration cycle.)
The 14-716 fault continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Check the operation of the Scanner Cooling Fan.
The Scanner Cooling Fan is running.
Y
N
Raise the Document Glass Cover and check the LEDs on the Illumination Lamp Power
Supply (Figure 1).
LED3 (24VHTR) is on.
D
May 2003
2-619
14-716
D
Y
N
Switch the power [Off]. Check the +24VDC (PS) and +24 VDC RET lines between
the LVPS and the Illumination Lamp Power Supply for an open circuit. Go to Flag 1.
Repair or replace as necessary.
Check the electrical connections to the Scanner Cooling Fan. If the fan is correctly connected, replace the Scanner Cooling Fan PL 9.1 Item 10. Now perform the [IIT tab , Scanner Calibration].
The fault continues.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Go to the 14-A Illumination Checkout RAP.
Figure 1 Illumination Lamp Power Supply LEDs
Raise the Document Glass Cover and check the LEDs on the Illumination Lamp Power Supply
(Figure 1).
LED3 (24VHTR) is on.
Y
N
Switch the power [Off].
Remove the Document Glass Frame.
Disconnect the Illumination Lamp ribbon cable A1DS1P1 from J4 on the Illumination
Lamp Power Supply.
Measure the resistance between Pin 4 and Pin 5 of A1DS1P1. Go to Flag 2.
The resistance is 10 to 14 ohms.
Y
N
Replace the Illumination Lamp Module PL 3.2 Item 7.
Reset the counter for the Illumination Lamp using the [IIT tab , Lamp Life Reset]
routine.
Ensure the lamp filaments are lit after the Lamp Module is replaced and the
machine is switched on. If the filaments are not lit, go to the 14-D RAP.
If background is present after replacing the Module, burn-in the Lamp for 15
minutes using [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
14-716
May 2003
2-620
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-621
14-716
Procedure
A1DS1P1
Check the [Last 40 Faults] for 14-700 faults. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults].
At least one 14-700 fault is logged.
Y
N
Go to the 14-A Illumination System Diagnostics.
Replace the Illumination Lamp Module PL 3.2 Item 7.
Pin 4
Pin 5
Reset the counter for the Illumination Lamp using the [IIT tab , Lamp Life Reset] routine.
Ensure the lamp filaments are lit after the Lamp Module is replaced and the machine is
switched on. If the filaments are not lit, go to the 14-D RAP.
If background is present after replacing the Module, burn-in the Lamp for 15 minutes
using [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
A
Status Indicator RAPs
14-716, 14-A
May 2003
2-622
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Y
N
Switch the power [Off]. Check the +24VDC (PS) and +24 VDC RET. lines between
the LVPS and the Illumination Lamp Power Supply for an open circuit. Go to Flag 2.
Repair the wiring or replace the Scanner IOT Harness PL 3.2 Item 10.
B
The Illumination Module Cable (A1DS1P1) was reseated on a previous service call.
Y
N
Perform the following tasks:
Ensure the lamp filaments are lit after the Lamp Module is replaced and the
machine is switched on. If the filaments are not lit, go to the 14-D RAP.
If background is present after replacing the Module, burn-in the Lamp for 15
minutes using [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Unplug, then reseat the Illumination Module Cable (A1DS1P1) at the Illumination
Lamp Power Supply.
Switch the power [On] and allow the system to warm up.
Reset the counter for the Illumination Lamp using the [IIT tab , Lamp Life Reset]
routine.
Ensure the lamp filaments are lit after the Lamp Module is replaced and the
machine is switched on. If the filaments are not lit, go to the 14-D RAP.
If background is present after replacing the Module, burn-in the Lamp for 15
minutes using [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
If the problem continues, replace the Illumination Lamp Power Supply PL 3.2 Item 5.
Run copies to determine if the problem is corrected.
The problem is corrected.
Y
N
Replace the Scanner Video Cable PL 3.2 Item 4. Run copies to determine if the
problem is corrected
The problem is corrected.
Y
N
Replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1.
If the problem continues, the Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03G RAP.
Check the Lamp Enable and Lamp Enable Return lines for continuity. Go to Flag 3.
If the wiring is defective, repair the wiring or replace the Scanner IOT Harness PL 3.2 Item
10.
If the wiring is OK, replace the Illumination Lamp Power Supply PL 3.2 Item 5.
Move the scan carriage in order to view the filaments at both ends of the Illumination Lamp.
Observe the filaments. Both filaments are glowing.
Y
N
Go to the 14-D RAP.
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-623
14-A
14-A
May 2003
2-624
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-625
14-A
Procedure
There are two known causes of scanner noise.
A1DS1P1
One cause of scanner noise is the Glass Glide at the rear of the Image Module. Noise can
be caused as the Glass Guide rubs against the underside of the Document Glass and the
metal edge of the scanner frame.
To eliminate this noise, replace the Glass Glide (PL 3.2 Item 2). If a replacement part is
not available, swap the rear Glass Glide with a front Glass Glide.
The other cause of scanner noise is one or both Illumination Lamp sockets on the Illumination Lamp Module rub against the underside of the scanner frame.
To eliminate this noise, remove the Illumination Lamp Module (REP 14-2) and reform the
ends downward so the sockets do not rub against the underside of the scanner frame.
Reinstall the Illumination Lamp Module.
Pin 4
Pin 5
14-A, 14-B
May 2003
2-626
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
This RAP is used to troubleshoot the following fault codes: 14-314, 14-315, 14-316, 14-317,
14-318, 14-319, 14-320, 14-705, 14-706, 14-714, 14-715. Scanning is disabled when any of
those faults occur.
Connect the (-) meter lead to the metal case of the LVPS.
Connect the (+) meter lead to J7 pin 8 on the Main Control PWB.
Connect the (-) meter lead to the metal case of the LVPS.
Connect the (+) meter lead to J7 pin 1 on the Main Control PWB.
NOTE: In the following step, you are required to access P2/J7 on the Main Control
PWB. On machines with TAG 015 Main Control PWB (Atlanta Gold), the Accessory
PWB must be removed in order to access J7. Refer to REP 03-3 in order to remove
the Accessory PWB. After the PWB is removed, and the machine power is switched
[On], ignore any faults caused by the removal of the Accessory PWB.
A
B
V0.042
In Video Path Diagnostics, select [SCVM Digital Test] and [Start Test], then observe
the results of the test. Enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics].
The test passes.
Y
N
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Connect the (+) meter lead to J7 pin 7 on the Main Control PWB.
Connect the (-) meter lead to the metal case of the LVPS.
A
May 2003
2-627
B
Status Indicator RAPs
14-C
A
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Connect the (+) meter lead to J7 pin 1 on the Main Control PWB.
NOTE: In the following step, you are required to access P2/J7 on the Main Control PWB.
The Accessory PWB must be removed in order to access J7. Refer to REP 03-3 in order
to remove the Accessory PWB. After the PWB is removed, and the machine power is
switched [On], ignore any faults caused by the removal of the Accessory PWB.
Connect the (+) meter lead to J7 pin 7 on the Main Control PWB.
Connect the (-) meter lead to the metal case of the LVPS.
C
Measure the +5.25 VDC power at the Main Control PWB.
Connect the (-) meter lead to the metal case of the LVPS.
Connect the (+) meter lead to J7 pin 8 on the Main Control PWB.
14-C
May 2003
2-628
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Reset the counter for the Illumination Lamp using the [IIT tab , Lamp Life Reset] routine.
Ensure the lamp filaments are lit after the Lamp Module is replaced and the machine
is switched on. If the filaments are not lit, continue in this RAP.
If background is present after replacing the Module, burn-in the Lamp for 15 minutes
using [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
A
Perform the Scanner Cleaning Procedure REP 14-3. Reassemble the scanner and run prints
to determine if problem is corrected.
The problem is corrected.
Y
N
Check the scanner video harness, which is part of the Image Module, for a secure connection and continuity.
The harness is OK.
Y
N
Replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 1.
The Main Control PWB may have failed. Go to the 03-G RAP.
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Reseat the Illumination Module Cable on the Illumination Power Supply. Switch the power [On]
and allow the system to begin to warm up. Observe the filaments in the Illumination Lamp.
The filaments are glowing.
Y
N
Replace the Illumination Lamp Power Supply PL 3.2 Item 5.
A1DS1P1
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 8
Pin
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-629
14-D
14-D
May 2003
2-630
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
C
Done. The ESS Software Verification Tool has repaired/replaced the corrupt file(s).
Verify the problem is corrected and return to Service Call Procedures.
NON-SHUTDOWN- The ESS has many non-shutdown faults that can occur during operation. In most cases, these faults have no impact to the observable operation of the ESS or
printer. Often, conditions that trigger a fault are temporary, and the ESS will recover and
continue. These faults may be helpful to Field Engineering if difficult to diagnose problems
need to be escalated. If these problems persist, they often lead to a shutdown fault.
Shutdown faults (faults that are of the format 16-0XX.XX or 16-1XX.XX) are better indications of more serious problems and should be looked at first if printer operation becomes
abnormal.
16-781.19
16-785.19
16-786.19
16-787.19
For all shutdown faults (16-0XX.XX or 16-1XX.XX), go to the 16-A Shutdown Fault Procedure .
For non-shutdown faults, go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Procedure. For a description of
the faults, refer to Table 1 for shutdown faults and Table 2 for non-shutdown faults.
The problem occurs on one particular job from one particular client
The problem occurs when printing with one PDL (Postscript or HP-PCL) and the other
PDL is OK
D
May 2003
2-631
H
Status Indicator RAPs
16-A
D
Y
N
There is a problem with the client. Check the client configuration. If the problem continues, reload the client driver software.
D
E
F
G
Status Indicator RAPs
16-A
ESS Disk Drive / Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 4 and ESS Hard
Disk Drive Ribbon Cable PL 1.3A Item 8
Have the system administrator check the network configuration on the client
(compare to working client).
Have the system administrator ensure the client has the required resources.
Have the system administrator reload the print driver on the client.
If the problem continues, have the customer call the Customer Support Center.
Run ESS Memory Test. Use GP25 , Running the ESS Memory Test.
Observe the test results. The test passes.
Y
N
(255/265) Replace the ESS DRAM SIMMS PL 1.3B Item 2.
(460/470) Replace the ESS DRAM DIMM PL 1.3C Item 2.
ESS Disk Drive / Image Disk Drive PL 1.3C Item 4 and ESS Hard
Disk Drive Ribbon Cable PL 1.3C Item 11
Try to re-create the problem. The problem can be re-created on the other
printer.
Y
N
Check the ESS software version for both printers
The printer with the problem has an older version of software.
Y
N
Reload the ESS Software. If the problem continues, escalate the service call.
Observe the results of the test. If no results are returned, the test
passed. If a memory address is listed, the test failed. The
test
failed.
Y
N
(255/265) Replace the following, one-at-a-time, until the problem is corrected
ESS Disk Drive / Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 4 and ESS Hard Disk Drive Ribbon
Cable PL 1.3A Item 8
ESS Disk Drive / Image Disk Drive PL 1.3C Item 4 and ESS Hard Disk Drive Ribbon
Cable PL 1.3C Item 11
May 2003
2-632
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
No action should normally be taken on non-shutdown faults that are referred to this procedure.
If these faults seem related to a customer complaint, perform the 16-A Shutdown Fault Procedure .
Table 1 Shutdown Faults Table
Fault Code
Description
Action
16-000
16-001
16-002
16-003
16-004
16-005
16-006
16-007
16-008
16-009
16-010
16-011
Fault Code
Description
Action
16-022
16-023
16-024
16-025
16-026
16-027
16-028
16-029
No acknowledgment to
RPC message
16-030
16-031
16-032
16-033
16-034
16-035
16-036
16-037
Unable to open file for write Go to the 16-A Shutdown Fault Procedure
16-038
16-039
16-040
16-012
16-013
16-014
16-041
16-015
16-042
16-016
16-043
16-044
16-017
16-045
16-018
16-046
16-019
16-048
Cannot set ESS client bind- Go to the 16-A Shutdown Fault Procedure
ing
16-115.28
16-020
16-150.09
16-021
V0.042
May 2003
2-633
16-A
Fault Code
Description
Fault Code
Description
16-150.14
16-601.35
16-150.19
16-601.46
16-150.26
16-601.47
16-150.90
16-601.66
16-150.92
16-151.09
16-602.07
16-151.14
16-602.09
16-151.26
16-602.35
16-151.90
16-602.38
16-152.14
16-602.66
16-152.19
Unable to register as an
RPC server
16-603.46
16-152.26
Fault service could not open Go to the 16-A Shutdown Fault Procedure
fault log
16-603.66
16-153.09
16-153.14
16-604.14
16-153.19
16-604.38
16-154.19
Could not register with Reg- Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proistration Service
cedure
16-155.19
16-605.07
Unable to register with Reg- Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proistration Service
cedure
16-156.19
16-605.66
16.605.XX
16-606.XX
Action
Fault Code
Description
Action
16-600.07
16-607.XX
16-600.35
16-608.XX
16-600.46
16-608.26
16-600.66
16-608.38
16-601.26
16-608.66
16-A
May 2003
2-634
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Description
Action
Fault Code
Description
16-609.XX
16-612.46
16-609.07
16-613.09
DC synchronization error
16-610.07
16-613.19
16-610.19
16-614.09
16-610.26
16-614.19
16-610.35
16-615.35
16-610.90
16-615.46
16-610.92
16-615.66
16-610.99
16-615.90
16-611.07
16-616.35
16-611.09
16-616.38
16-611.14
16-616.46
16-611.19
16-619.14
16-611.26
16-619.19
16-611.38
16-619.26
16-611.46
16-619.46
16-611.47
Unable to unregister Regis- Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Protration service due to RPC cedure
failure
16-620.07
16-611.66
16-620.14
16-611.99
16-620.19
16-612.09
16-620.35
16-612.14
16-620.38
16-612.35
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-635
Action
16-A
Description
Fault Code
Description
Action
16-620.46
16-623.35
16-623.47
16-624.46
16-625.35
16-625.46
16-625.66
16-620.92
16-620.99
Action
16-621.07
16-625.90
16-621.35
16-626.47
16-621.47
16-628.07
16-621.66
16-628.35
16-621.99
16-628.46
16-622.07
16-629.26
16-622.09
Unable to unregister as
RPC service during shutdown
No acknowledgement to
RPC message OR Fault
Service call to PWC callback failed
16-622.14
Unable to unregister as
RPC service during shutdown
16-629.46
No acknowledgement to
RPC message
16-629.92
16-622.19
Unable to unregister as
RPC service during shutdown
No acknowledgement to
RPC message
16-630.26
16-622.26
Fault Service to unregister Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proas RPC service during shut- cedure
down
16-630.35
16-630.38
16-622.35
Unable to unregister as
RPC service
16-630.46
16-622.38
Unable to unregister as
RPC service
16-630.47
16-622.46
Unable to unregister as
RPC service
16-630.99
16-622.66
Unable to unregister as
RPC service during shutdown
16-631.19
16-A
May 2003
2-636
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Description
Action
Fault Code
Description
Action
16-631.46
16-643.47
16-633.19
16-644.26
16-634.46
Unable to specify shutdown Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proroutine during initialization cedure
16-644.47
Unable to read from file OR Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault ProSW Verify get data failed
cedure
16-635.07
16-645.26
16-635.35
16-645.46
16-635.46
16-645.47
16-635.99
16-646.26
16-636.99
16-649.35
16-637.26
16-650.35
16-637.38
Unable to open file for write Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Procedure
16-651.35
16-637.47
16-652.38
16-639.38
16-653.38
16-639.46
16-654.38
16-640.35
RPC send
16-655.38
16-640.46
16-656.38
16-641.00
Cannot log fault to ESS fault Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Prolog
cedure
16-658.07
16-641.26
Cannot log fault to ESS fault Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Prolog
cedure
16-672.09
16-641.46
Cannot log fault to ESS fault Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proservice
cedure
16-700
Unknown attribute
requested
16-642.46
16-700.66
Unknown attribute
requested
16-642.47
16-707.00
16-643.19
16-709.00
16-643.26
16-710.00
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-637
16-A
Fault Code
Description
Action
Fault Code
Description
Action
16-710.35
16-751.35
16-716.00
16-751.38
Unknown attribute
16-728.00
16-751.46
16-730.00
Unable to create client han- Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Prodle failure
cedure
16-751.47
16-730.35
Unable to create client han- Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Prodle failure
cedure
16-751.92
16-750.07
Message received from DM Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Pronot processed correctly fail- cedure
ure
16-752.07
Queue service library initial- Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proization failed
cedure
16-752.09
16-750.09
16-752.14
16-750.14
16-752.19
16-750.19
Invalid Online/Offline
request
16-752.26
16-750.26
16-752.35
16-750.35
Queue service library initial- Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proization failed
cedure
16-752.46
16-750.38
16-752.47
16-750.46
16-752.92
16-750.47
16-753.09
16-750.90
Number of services
attempts to go below zero
16-753.14
16-750.92
16-753.19
16-751.07
16-753.26
16-751.09
Registration service
receives unrequested ENS
notification
16-753.35
Unable to change EJS state Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proto offline
cedure
16-751.14
16-753.46
16-751.19
16-753.47
16-751.26
16-753.90
16-A
May 2003
2-638
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Description
Action
Fault Code
Description
Action
16-753.92
16-756.35
16-754.09
16-756.46
16-754.14
16-756.47
16-754.19
16-757.09
16-754.26
16-757.14
16-754.35
16-757.19
16-754.46
16-757.26
16-754.47
16-757.35
16-754.90
16-757.46
16-754.92
16-757.47
16-755.09
Unable to register
requested service
16-758.09
16-755.14
16-758.14
16-755.19
16-758.19
Invalid job control error error Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Procedure
16-755.26
16-758.26
16-755.35
16-758.46
16-755.46
16-758.47
16-755.47
16-759.09
16-755.90
16-759.19
16-756.09
Unable to register
requested service
16-759.26
16-756.14
RPC creation error: unable Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proto create RPC communica- cedure
tion to client services
Unrecognized service id
Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Prorequesting fault information cedure
16-759.46
16-759.47
16-756.26
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-639
16-A
Description
Action
Fault Code
Description
16-760.09
16-765.19
Action
16-760.14
16-765.46
16-760.19
ESS initializing
16-765.47
16-760.26
16-766.09
16-766.19
DM admin error
16-760.46
Processes are in an
unknown state
16-766.46
16-760.47
16-766.47
No servers responded
16-760.99
16-767.09
16-761.09
16-767.19
16-761.19
16-767.46
16-761.26
16-768.09
16-761.46
16-768.19
16-761.47
16-768.46
16-762.09
16-768.47
16-762.19
DC Platform Manager
comm error
16-769.09
16-762.46
16-769.19
16-763.09
16-769.46
16-763.19
16-769.47
16-763.46
16-770.09
16-763.47
Invalid permission
16-770.19
16-764.09
16-770.46
16-764.17
16-770.47
16-764.19
Set-up of the SIGALRM sig- Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Pronal failed
cedure
16-771.09
16-764.46
16-771.19
16-765.09
16-A
May 2003
2-640
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Description
Action
Fault Code
Description
16-771.46
16-782.09
ESS configuration synchro- Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Pronization process death
cedure
16-771.47
16-782.47
16-772.09
16-783.09
Unable to send
sc_proc_disable
16-772.19
Failure to set ESS Platform Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Promanager service state
cedure
16-783.47
16-772.47
16-784.09
16-773.09
ESS Print service surrogate Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proprocess death
cedure
16-784.47
SESS IPX test receive fail- Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proure
cedure
16-773.19
16-785.09
16-774.09
16-785.47
SESS IPX test bad data in Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proreceive
cedure
16-774.19
16-786.47
16-775.19
16-787.47
SESS Apple test zip failure Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Pro- network unreachable
cedure
16-776.09
16-788.47
16-776.19
16-789.47
16-777.09
ESS completed job log ser- Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Provice/SPI process death
cedure
16-790.47
16-777.19
16-791.47
16-778.09
16-792.47
16-778.19
16-793.47
16-779.09
16-794.47
16-779.47
16-795.47
16-780.09
ESS authentication SPI pro- Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Process death
cedure
16-796.47
16-780.47
16-797.47
16-781.09
16-798.47
16-781.47
16-799.47
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-641
Action
16-A
Description
Fault Code
Description
Action
16-800.47
16-821.47
16-801.47
SESS NetBIOS test oem x Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Pro(unusual network problem) cedure
16-822.47
16-802.47
16-823.47
16-803.47
SESS NetBIOS test cannot Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proinit token ring
cedure
16-824.47
16-804.47
16-825.47
16-805.47
16-826.47
SESS Apple test zip failure Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Pro- system error
cedure
16-806.47
16-827.47
SESS Apple test zip failure Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Pro- invalid parameters
cedure
16-807.47
16-828.47
SESS Apple test zip failure Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Pro- no router found
cedure
16-808.47
16-829.47
SESS Apple test zip failure Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Pro- unknown zip error
cedure
16-830.47
16-809.47
GetNetData IP Diagnostic - Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Profailed to get default router. cedure
16-831.47
16-810.47
GetNetData IP Diagnostic - Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Profailed to get subnet mask.
cedure
16-832.47
16-811.47
GetNetData IP Diagnostic - Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Profailed to get local devices. cedure
16-833.47
16-812.47
16-834.47
16-813.47
16-835.47
16-814.47
16-836.47
16-815.47
16-837.47
GetNetData - Diagnostic
Name not found
16-816.47
16-838.47
16-817.47
16-839.47
16-818.47
16-840.47
16-819.47
16-841.47
16-820.47
16-842.47
16-A
Action
May 2003
2-642
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Description
Action
Fault Code
Description
Action
16-843.47
16-865.47
16-844.47
16-866.47
SESS NETBIOS test com- Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Promand canceled.
cedure
16-845.47
16-867.47
16-846.47
16-868.47
16-847.47
16-869.47
SESS NETBIOS test no lis- Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proten in remote computer
cedure
16-848.47
16-870.47
SESS NETBIOS test illegal Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proname number.
cedure
16-849.47
16-871.47
SESS NETBIOS test can- Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Pronot find name or no answer. cedure
16-850.47
16-872.47
SESS NETBIOS test name Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Proin use.
cedure
16-851.47
16-873.47
16-852.47
16-874.47
16-853.47
Failed to get last reset time Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Procedure
16-875.47
16-854.47
16-977.35
16-855.47
16-978.35
16-856.47
16-979.35
16-857.47
16-980.35
16-858.47
16-981.35
16-859.47
16-982.35
16-860.47
16-983.35
16-861.47
16-984.35
16-862.47
16-985.35
16-863.47
SESS NETBIOS test illegal Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Probuffer length.
cedure
16-986.35
16-864.47
SESS NETBIOS test illegal Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Prolocal session number.
cedure
16-987.35
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-643
16-A
Description
Action
16-988.35
16-989.35
16-990.35
16-991.35
16-992.35
16-993.35
Unable to get admin. name Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Profrom data store for promote cedure
16-994.35
16-995.35
Request to DM to Cancel
Job Failed
16-996.35
16-997.35
Unable to get admin. name Go to the 16-A Non-Shutdown Fault Profrom data store
cedure
16-998.35
16-999.35
16-A
May 2003
2-644
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Ensure the IOT and the Main Control PWB are functioning before entering this RAP. Ensure
that Call Flow and the SCP-04, System Fault Analysis has been performed.
NOTE: Some machines may have the ESS Hard DIsk located in a Removable Disk Drive.
These are machines that have special security requirements. The ESS Disk Drive and Image
DIsk Dive is located in a DIsk Carrier which is external to the machine. The Drive(s) can be
removed and secured when the machine is not in use. The Disk Carrier is connected by cable
to the Machine. Some steps in the RAP are different if the machine has this option.
Ensure the Removable Disk Drive is plugged in to the wall outlet, and the wall outlet has
the correct voltage (the green LED on the front of the Drive Enclosure indicates power is
available).
Ensure the Removable Drive was powered up correctly. The power for the Removable
Disk Drive should be switched on first, with a constant 0 on the seven segment display
before the machine power is switched on.
Ensure the cables in the rear of the Drive Enclosure are correctly connected.
Ensure the number on the Disk Carrier matches the number in the Drive Enclosure.
Testing /pci/isa@b/nvram@i74
Testing /pci/isa@b/rtc@i74
NOTE: Failures in these tests WILL prevent the ESS from booting
If the machine has the Removable Disk Drive option, ensure the following:
C
Go to the 16-B Removable Disk Drive Troubleshooting.
Check for a Selftest failed message on the next line after any of the above. A failure is
indicated.
Y
N
Look for the line Trying. . . , hdisk Booting
Check the POST results for a cannot open boot device message. A cannot open
boot device is indicated (answer No if an fsck or boot file problem is indicated).
Y
N
POST indicated a fsck or boot file problem.
Y
N
Look at the following lines:
NOTE: If you see the message BAD DEST PORT 111. . . dropping
msg can be ignored, it is not a problem.
All of the above installed successfully.
Y
N
Check the interface between the ESS PWB / Main Control PWB.
Carefully inspect the interconnections of these PWBs. Ensure the
PWB's are positioned correctly and the mating connectors are correctly mated. Refer to REP 16-2 for more information.
The PWB's are connected correctly.
Y
N
Repair as necessary. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Refer to GP23 to access the alternate boot menu. Select option 2),
Reset ESS Configuration Files. When complete, select option b),
Boot SCSI Disk.
D
May 2003
2-645
H
Status Indicator RAPs
16-B
Testing /pci/isa@b/c11283@i900
Testing /pci/isa@b/parallel@i3bc
Main Control PWB (Use 03-G Main Control PWB Replacement RAP)
Testing /pci/isa@b/z8536@i844
Main Control PWB (Use 03-G Main Control PWB Replacement RAP)
J
If the above does not correct the problem, replace the following,
one-at-a-time, until the problem is resolved.
Observe the POST results. The above drivers now install OK.
Y
N
Ensure the Main Control PWB is functioning correctly. If the IOT
is OK, go to the 16-C, ESS Software Verification RAP.
If the ESS Software verify does not correct the problem, replace
the following, one-at-a-time, until the problem is resolved.
Testing /pci/isa@b/z85230@i840
Testing /pci/isa@b/floppy@i3f0
Testing /pci/isa@b/serial@i2f8
Testing /pci/isa@b/serial@i3f8
The POST did not detect any ESS hardware problems. Return
to the RAP from which directed.
Check for a Selftest failed message on the next line after any of the
above. A failure is indicated.
Y
N
NOTE: The message(s) Lowlevel SCSI: device 2: selection timed out can be ignored, it is not a problem.
Run ESS Memory Test. Use GP35 , Running the ESS Memory Test.
Observe the test results. The test passes.
Y
N
Replace the indicated ESS DRAM SIMMS PL 1.3B Item 2.
***********
**********
ESS
System
is
'OPERATIONAL'
From the Alternate Boot Tool (see GP23 ), run the ESS Software Verify test.
A message is displayed the routine can't be run or the routine
stops before it is complete.
Y
N
A message is displayed on the PWS indicating that ESS
Software must be reloaded.
Y
N
A message was displayed indicating that a repair was
made.
Y
N
No problem was detected with the ESS Software.
Reload ESS Software.
D
E
F
G I
J
Status Indicator RAPs
16-B
May 2003
2-646
I
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
I
Any of these failures will not prevent the ESS from booting. There may be
a failure of some feature or function to work. Ensure the failure is pertinent
to the main reason for service. The following defines what features those
self-tests control:
Testing /pci/ethernet The Ethernet controller on the ESS
PWB. If the printer won't connect to the ethernet network and Echo
Test fails, the PWB should be replaced.
Replace the ESS Disk Drive / Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 4 and ESS Hard
Disk Drive Ribbon Cable PL 1.3A Item 8.
Switch the machine power off/on to reboot the ESS. Observe the POST results
again. A hard disk drive failure is indicated.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Refer to GP23 to access the alternate boot menu. Select option 1) Check and
Repair SCSI Disk.
A message indicates the disk is defective or the disk can't be repaired.
Y
N
The repair completed. Select option b) Boot SCSI Disk.
Observe the POST results again. The POST fails again.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Refer to GP23 to access the alternate boot menu. Select option 1), Check
and Repair SCSI Disk. When complete, select option b), Boot SCSI
Disk.
Observe the POST results again. The POST fails again.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
D
E
V0.042
M
May 2003
2-647
16-B
M
Replace both of the ESS DRAM SIMMS PL 1.3B Item 2.
Check the ESS Hard Disk Power Cable and Data Cable. Check for good connections at the Card Cage Riser PWB and at the ESS Hard Disk. If OK, replace the following, one-at-a-time until the problem is resolved:
Switch off the machine power. Use GP38 , Getting POST Results, to prepare the PWS to connect to the ESS and read the POST results. Switch on the machine power.
Activity is seen in the AltBoot terminal window (info from ESS is displayed on screen).
Y
N
Close the terminal window. Switch off the machine power. Start the AltBoot tool again,
switch on the machine power. Repeat the previous check one more time to ensure it is
repeatable. If it continues, replace the following in order one-at-a-time until the problem is
resolved:.
ESS Hard Disk Power Cable PL 1.3C Item 10 and ESS Hard Disk Data Cable
PL 1.3C Item 11
Refer to GP23 to access the alternate boot menu. Select option 4), Reset ESS
Configuration Files. When complete, select option b), Boot SCSI Disk.
Observe the ESS boot again. The Atlanta to ESS Connection PASSED.
Y
N
Ensure the Main Control PWB is functioning correctly. If the IOT is OK, go to
the 16-C, ESS Software Verification RAP.
If the ESS Software verify does not correct the problem, replace the following,
one-at-a-time, until the problem is resolved.
After a couple of minutes a banner message appears on the screen which indicates
the Atlanta to ESS connection Test PASSED.
Y
N
Switch off the machine power. Check the interface between the ESS PWB / Main
Control PWB and the Riser PWB. Carefully inspect the interconnections of these
PWBs. Ensure the PWB's are positioned correctly and the mating connectors are
correctly mated. Refer to REP 16-2 for more information.
The PWB's are connected correctly.
Y
N
Repair as necessary. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Check the ESS Hard Disk Power Cable for a short circuit. If it looks OK, replace the ESS
Hard Disk Drive PL 1.3C Item 3. If the problem continues, replace the ESS Hard Disk
Power Cable PL 1.3C Item 10.
16-B
May 2003
2-648
Main Control PWB (Use 03-G Main Control PWB Replacement RAP)
P
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P
Done. Notify the Systems Administrator the printer will have to be reinstalled on the
network. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Q
Reload the ESS Software.
Verify the IOT is operational. Ensure the IOT comes up normally and that prints
can be printed from the PWS.
If the above does not correct the problem, replace the following, one-at-a-time, until
the problem is resolved.
Main Control PWB (Use 03-G Main Control PWB Replacement RAP)
ESS Hard Disk Power Cable PL 1.3C Item 10 and ESS Hard Disk Data Cable PL
1.3C Item 11
Run ESS Memory Test. Use GP35 , Running the ESS Memory Test.
Observe the test results. The test passes.
Y
N
Replace the indicated ESS DRAM DIMM PL 1.3C Item 2.
Observe the LEDs on the front of the Drive Enclosure. The green LED on the front of the
Drive Enclosure is ON.
Y
N
Ensure the Removable Drive Module is switched on and plugged into the wall outlet, with
correct voltage available. If the wall outlet is OK, replace the Drive Enclosure.
From the Alternate Boot Tool (see GP23 ), run the ESS Software Verify test.
A message is displayed that the routine can't be run or the routine stops before it
is complete.
Y
N
A message is displayed on the PWS indicating that ESS Software must be
reloaded.
Y
N
A message was displayed indicating that a repair was made.
Y
N
No problem was detected with the ESS Software. Reload ESS Software.
Done. The ESS Software Verification Tool has repaired/replaced the corrupt
file(s). Verify the problem is corrected and return to Service Call Procedures.
Reload the ESS Software.
N
Q
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Check the Removable Drive SCSI Cable at the back of the Removable Drive and at the Main
Control PWB for good connections. The connections look OK.
Y
N
Repair or replace the Removable Drive SCSI Cable as necessary PL 1.1B Item 7.
Swap the two SCSI cables. Use the ESS cable for the Image Disk and the Image DIsk cable
for the ESS. The ends will have to be reversed to enable the connectors to mate.
Check for a reoccurrence of the fault. The problem still occurs with a different cable.
Y
N
Replace the Removable Drive SCSI Cable PL 1.1B Item 7 (if swapped to the Image Disk
Removable Drive, replace that one).
Replace the ESS Disk Drive / Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 4.
If the problem continues, replace the Removable Disk Drive Assembly PL 1.1B Item 1.
May 2003
2-649
16-B
16-B
May 2003
2-650
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
36V
24V
24 PSV
Interlock Output
Interlock Input
5.15V
+12V
-12V
5.15 PSV
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-651
16-B
+36V
+24V
-12V
+24 VES
INT-OUT
RMT-OFF
ES#1
ES#2
INT-IN
+5 VES
+5V
+12V
+12 VES
16-B
May 2003
2-652
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CR7
CR10
CR9
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-653
16-B
16-B
May 2003
2-654
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
This RAP provides a procedure to verify and repair problems that may be caused by corrupted
ESS software.
Fault code, 16-781.19, indicates there is not enough ESS DRAM available to support Network
Scanning.
Enter [ESS/Network tab , ESS Software Verification Tool]. Select [Start Test].
A message is displayed that the routine can't be run or the routine stops before it is
complete.
Y
N
A message is displayed on the PWS indicating that ESS Software must be
reloaded.
Y
N
A message was displayed indicating that a repair was made.
Y
N
No problem was detected with the ESS Software. Reload ESS Software.
Enter [ESS/Network tab , ESS Test Jobs]. Select [Power On/Demo] [Generate New Configuration Report], then the appropriate Composition selection (PS or HP-PCL). Select [Start]
Check the configuration report. Under the Device Profile section, check the ESS RAM size.
The ESS RAM is reported as 96MB or greater.
Y
N
Access the ESS PWB. Check for the presence of at least 96 MB of ESS DRAM. There
should be 4 SIMMs installed. A pair of 16MB SIMMS, and a pair of 32MB SIMMs, or two
pair of 32MB SIMMs.
There is at least 96MB of ESS RAM installed.
Y
N
Determine if memory had been previously present and is now missing. Install additional ESS DRAM to equal 96MB of total ESS DRAM (PL 1.3B Item 2).
Done. The ESS Software Verification Tool has repaired/replaced the corrupt file(s).
Verify the problem is corrected and return to Service Call Procedures.
Switch off the machine power. Reseat each SIMM in its socket.
Select [Power On/Demo] [Generate New Configuration Report], then the appropriate
Composition selection (PS or HP-PCL). Select [Start]. Under the Device Profile section,
check the ESS RAM size. The ESS RAM is reported as 96MB or greater.
Y
N
Run the ESS Memory Test. Start the Alternate Boot Tool. Select [ESS Memory Test].
Observe the test results. The test passes.
Y
N
Replace the indicated ESS DRAM SIMMS PL 1.3B Item 2.
Replace the indicated ESS DRAM DIMM PL 1.3C Item 2.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-655
16-C, 16-781.19
Fault code, 16-785.19, indicates the IPA PWB was detected missing or defective. This fault
only occurs when Network Scanning is enabled.
Fault code, 16-786.19, indicates the IPA PWB was detected missing or defective. This fault
only occurs when LAN FAX is enabled.
Switch off the machine power. Reseat the IPA PWB and the PCI Bus Adaptor PWB.
Switch on the machine power. Check for a reoccurrence of 16-785.19 fault. The fault continues.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Switch off the machine power. Reseat the IPA PWB and the PCI Bus Adaptor PWB.
Switch on the machine power. Check for a reoccurrence of 16-785.19 fault. The fault continues.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics]. Select [IPA Daughter Card Test] [Start].
Observe the test results. The test passes.
Y
N
Replace the IPA PWB PL 1.3B Item 4. If the problem continues, replace the PCI Bus
Adaptor PWB PL 1.3B Item 3 (255/265).
Replace the IPA PWB PL 1.3C Item 6. If the problem continues, replace the Card Cage
Riser PWB PL 1.4C Item 4 (460/470).
Enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics]. Select [IPA Daughter Card Test] [Start].
Observe the test results. The test passes.
Y
N
Replace the IPA PWB PL 1.3B Item 4. If the problem continues, replace the PCI Bus
Adaptor PWB PL 1.3B Item 3 (255/265).
Replace the IPA PWB PL 1.3C Item 6. If the problem continues, replace the Card Cage
Riser PWB PL 1.4C Item 4 (460/470).
16-785.19, 16-786.19
May 2003
2-656
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault code, 16-781.19, indicates there is not enough ESS DRAM available to support LAN
FAX.
N
Access the ESS PWB. Check for the presence of at least 96 MB of ESS DRAM. There
should be 2 DIMMs installed. A 64MB DIMM, and a 32MB DIMM, or two pair of 64MB
DIMMs.
There is at least 96MB of ESS RAM installed.
Y
N
Determine if memory had been previously present and is now missing. Install additional ESS DRAM to equal 96MB of total ESS DRAM (PL 1.3C Item 13).
Switch off the machine power. Reseat each DIMM in its socket.
Select [Power On/Demo] [Generate New Configuration Report], then the appropriate
Composition selection (PS or HP-PCL). Select [Start]. Under the Device Profile section,
check the ESS RAM size. The ESS RAM is reported as 96MB or greater.
Y
N
Run the ESS Memory Test. Use GP35 , Running the ESS Memory Test.
Observe the test results. The test passes.
Y
N
Replace the indicated ESS DRAM DIMMs PL 1.3C Item 2.
Escalate the service call.
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Switch off the machine power. Reseat each DIMM in its socket. Switch on the machine power.
The fault continues.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Run the ESS Memory Test. Use GP35 , Running the ESS Memory Test.
Observe the test results. The test passes.
Y
N
Replace the indicated ESS DRAM DIMMs PL 1.3C Item 2.
Escalate the service call.
Run the ESS Memory Test. Start the Alternate Boot Tool. Select [ESS Memory Test].
Observe the test results. The test passes.
Y
N
Replace the indicated ESS DRAM SIMMS PL 1.3B Item 2.
Escalate the service call.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-657
16-787.19
16-787.19
May 2003
2-658
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
This procedure is provided to help identify and diagnose network printing problems.
Initial Actions
Ensure that the ESS is Online (UI Tools or PWS [ESS/Network tab , ESS Online/Offline])
It is assumed that before this procedure was entered, that the System Fault Analysis RAP
in Service Call Procedures was performed and that the IOT is OK.
Ensure that there are no IOT faults exist that prevent the IOT from functioning. That is,
copies can be made on ST machines, or prints can be printed with Print Test Pattern on
the PWS or made from the UI in the Tools area.
Verify that the problem is corrected. If the problem continues, return to the start of
this procedure.
Verify that the problem is corrected. If the problem continues, return to the start of this procedure.
Have any changes been made to the network just prior to a printing problem?
If there are multiple protocols enabled on the printer, and the problems are ONLY occurring
with one network protocol, go to the procedure appropriate for the protocol that has a printing
problem:
N
Have the system administrator reinstall the printer on the network. When complete,
enter [ESS/Network tab , Echo Test].
Check for a selectable protocol. (Not grayed out) There is at least one selectable
protocol.
Y
N
Go to the 16-C, ESS Software Verification RAP.
In [ESS/Network tab , Echo Test], select the desired protocol and run the test.
Observe the test results. The test passed.
Y
N
Switch the machine power off/on to reboot the ESS. In [ESS/Network tab , Echo Test],
select the desired protocol and run the test.
Observe the test results. The test passed.
Y
N
See if another protocol is enabled.
In [ESS/Network tab , Echo Test], there are other protocols that are selectable.
There is another network protocol selectable.
Y
N
Check if 100Mb Ethernet is enabled. The machine has a 100Mb Ethernet
PWB and has 100 Mb Ethernet Enabled.
Y
N
Check if Token Ring is enabled. The machine has a Token Ring PWB
and has Token Ring Enabled.
Y
N
Use watch-net (GP24 ) to monitor network traffic. At the ok prompt,
type watch-net.
Observe the display for a series of. . . . . . . . . . . . . to be displayed. (A
series of x x x x x x indicates bad packets, nothing at all indicates
watchnet failed to detect network traffic. Watch-net detected network packets.
Y
N
Use test net (GP24 ) to check the ESS. At the ok prompt, type
test net.
Check for an ok prompt to return with no errors. The test net
passed (ok prompt returned with no errors).
Y
N
Replace the ESS PWB PL 1.3A Item 1.
This problem is occurring on a TCP/IP Network.
Y
N
Check the network drop cable. Repair/replace as necessary. If OK, there may a a network problem. Notify the system administrator.
B
May 2003
2-659
H
Status Indicator RAPs
18-A
H
Check the network drop cable. Repair/replace as necessary. If
the problem continues, go to the 18-C, TCP/IP Checkout RAP.
Go to the appropriate RAP for the Network protocol which is not functioning properly:
L
Go to the appropriate RAP for the Network protocol which is not functioning properly:
If the problem continues, replace the Token Ring PWB PL 1.3B Item
5.
If the problem continues, replace the Token Ring PWB PL 1.3B Item
5.
18-A
Verify that the problem is corrected. If the problem continues, go to the 16-C, ESS Software Verification and Repair RAP.
Select the most appropriate from the following:
Instead of job printing normally, there is a literal printing of the PDL (many pages of cryptic
code) - go to the 18-K, Job Prints Incorrectly RAP
Job prints, but looks wrong. Wrong fonts, missing fonts, other image quality problems - go
to the 18-K Job Prints Incorrectly RAP
May 2003
2-660
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
M
Print out a Configuration Report. Enter [ESS/Network tab , ESS Test Jobs]. Select [Power On/
Demo] (default) [Start Job].
Review the TCP/IP, AppleTalk, Netware, Banyan Vines, and NetBIOS settings. At least one
networking protocol is enabled.
Y
N
The printer is not installed properly. Inform the customer/system administrator that the
printer needs to be installed and setup for the appropriate networking protocol.
R
Y
Verify that the problem is corrected. If the problem continues, return to the start of
this procedure.
Verify that the problem is corrected. If the problem continues, return to the start of this procedure.
In [ESS/Network tab , Echo Test], select the desired protocol and run the test.
Observe the test results. The test passed.
Y
N
Switch the machine power off/on to reboot the ESS. In [ESS/Network tab , Echo Test],
select the desired protocol and run the test.
Observe the test results. The test passed.
Y
N
See if another protocol is enabled.
In [ESS/Network tab , Echo Test], there are other protocols that are selectable.
There is another network protocol selectable.
Y
N
Check if Token Ring is enabled. The machine has a Token Ring PWB and
has Token Ring Enabled.
Y
N
Observe the Link Lights on the ethernet connector on the card cage.
NOTE: The color of the link light indicates what the speed of the network
is. Amber indicates 10Mbs and green indicates 100Mbs.
The link light is flashing indicating network activity.
Y
N
This problem is occurring on a TCP/IP or Novell Network.
N
O
V0.042
N
The link light is on steady.
Y
N
Check the network drop cable. Repair/replace as necessary. If OK, there may a a network problem. Notify the system administrator.
N
May 2003
2-661
18-A
N
Y
N
A message is displayed on the PWS indicating that
ESS Software must be reloaded.
Y
N
A message was displayed indicating that a repair
was made.
Y
N
No problem was detected with the ESS Software. Reload ESS Software.
NOTE: The color of the link light indicates what the speed of the network
is. Amber indicates 10Mbs and green indicates 100Mbs.
N
O T
U
V
W
Status Indicator RAPs
18-A
N
Check the network drop cable. Repair/replace as necessary. If OK, there may a a network problem. Notify the system administrator.
N
May 2003
2-662
X
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
X
Y
N
A message is displayed on the PWS indicating that
ESS Software must be reloaded.
Y
N
A message was displayed indicating that a repair
was made.
Y
N
No problem was detected with the ESS Software. Reload ESS Software.
Done. The ESS Software Verification Tool has
repaired/replaced the corrupt file(s). Verify that the
problem is corrected and return to Service Call Procedures.
Reload the ESS Software.
Instead of job printing normally, there is a literal printing of the PDL (many pages of cryptic
code) - go to the 18-K, Job Prints Incorrectly RAP
Job prints, but looks wrong. Wrong fonts, missing fonts, other image quality problems - go
to the 18-K Job Prints Incorrectly RAP
Verify that the problem is corrected. If the problem continues, go to the 16-C, ESS Software Verification and Repair RAP.
Select the most appropriate from the following:
Go to the 16-C, ESS Software Verification RAP. If no problems are found and the problem continues replace the Token Ring PWB PL 1.3B Item 5.
May 2003
2-663
18-A
Y
Connect the PWS to the ESS serial port. (See GP22 ). Switch the machine power off/on to
reboot the ESS and view the results of the Power On Self-Test (POST).
Observe the PWS screen. Check for a message cannot open Fast Ethernet driver.
Y
N
In [ESS/Network tab , Echo Test], select [PCI Ethernet] [Start].
The test passes.
Y
N
Have the customer replace the network drop cable. Switch off the machine power to
reboot the ESS.
In [ESS/Network tab , Echo Test], select [[PCI Ethernet] [Start]. The test passes.
Y
N
Go to the 16-C, ESS Software Verification RAP. If no problems are found and
the problem continues replace the 100Mb Ethernet PWB PL 1.3B Item 6.
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Have the customer move the printer to a different MSAU port. Switch off the machine
power to reboot the ESS.
The problem continues.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures. Ensure the customer / system administrator is aware of a possible problem with the original MSAU port.
Replace the 100Mb Ethernet PWB PL 1.3B Item 6.
Go to the 16-C, ESS Software Verification RAP. If no problems are found and the problem continues replace the 100Mb Ethernet PWB PL 1.3B Item 6.
Initial Actions
Question the Systems Administrator and determine if any changes have been made to
the machine Network Setup or the network.
A Print Server password is set and the same as the password set for the print
server object on the NDS tree
18-A, 18-B
May 2003
2-664
B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
Check the following:
In pconsole, check [Print Queue] [Print Queue Information] [Status]. Ensure that
the following two flags are set to YES.
Print servers can service jobs in the queue
Notify customer/system administrator. Check for problems with the client workstation
ESS Parallel
Port
Network Port
Token Ring
ESS LEDs
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-665
18-B
E
Y
Use this RAP if the printer is enabled for TCP/IP protocol, but there are problems printing to it.
Initial Actions
If not already done, perform 18-A, Network Entry RAP before using this RAP.
It is assumed that before entering here that the IOT is known to be OK.
Ensure that the printer is properly configured for the TCP/IP Network. Verify with the system administrator that the following printer settings are correct:
N
A message was displayed indicating that a repair was
made.
Y
N
Reload ESS Software. Reinstall the printer to the network
and see if the problem is resolved.
Done. The ESS Software Verification Tool has repaired/
replaced the corrupt file(s). Verify that the problem is corrected
and return to Service Call Procedures.
Printer IP address
Reload the ESS Software.
Subnet mask
Broadcast Address
Default Gateway
For Solaris 2.5, the key operator or system administrator must have root privilege to install
the printer
For SunOS, have the system administrator ensure that the /etc/printcap file is properly
configured
Verify that the problem is corrected. If the problem continues, return to the start
of this procedure.
Verify that the problem is corrected. If the problem continues, return to the start of
this procedure.
18-C
A
May 2003
2-666
A
Y
N
Replace the ESS PWB PL 1.3A Item 1.
There may be a problem with the network port. Ask the system administrator to test the port.
If the problem continues, have the customer/SA replace the network drop
cable
If the problem continues and the machine has a Token Ring PWB which is
enable, replace the Token Ring PWB PL 1.3B Item 5.
If the problem continues and the machine has Ethernet enabled, replace
the ESS PWB PL 1.3A Item 1.
F
The printer needs to be reinstalled on the network. Have the system administrator reinstall the printer.
For Solaris 2.5, follow Unix procedures in the Systems Administrator Guide
For SunOS, ensure that the /etc/printcap file is properly configured (see Systems
Administrator Guide)
For Solaris 2.5, follow Unix procedures in the Systems Administrator Guide
For SunOS, ensure that the /etc/printcap file is properly configured (see Systems
Administrator Guide)
There may be a problem with the network port. Ask the system administrator
to test the port.
If the problem continues, have the customer/SA replace the network drop cable
If the problem continues and the machine has a Token Ring PWB which is
enable, replace the Token Ring PWB PL 1.3C .
If the problem continues and the machine has Ethernet enabled, replace the
ESS PWB PL 1.3C.
A
F
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-667
18-C
If not already done, perform 18-A, Network Entry RAP before using this RAP.
It is assumed that before entering here that the IOT is known to be OK.
A
In [ESS/Network tab , Echo Test], select [AppleTalk] [Start].
Observe the test results. The test passed.
Y
N
Use watch-net (GP24 ) to monitor network traffic. At the ok prompt, type watch-net.
Observe the display for a series of. . . . . . . . . . . . . to be displayed. (A series of x x x x x x
indicates bad packets, nothing at all indicates watchnet failed to detect network traffic.
Watch-net detected network packets.
Y
N
Use test net (GP24 ) to check the ESS. At the ok prompt, type test net.
Check for an ok prompt to return with no errors. The test net passed (ok prompt
returned with no errors).
Y
N
Replace the ESS PWB PL 1.3A Item 1.
Check the network drop cable. If OK, there may a a network problem. Notify the system administrator.
Perform the following:
There may be a problem with the network port. Ask the system administrator to test
the port.
If the problem continues, have the customer/SA replace the network drop cable
If the problem continues and the machine has a Token Ring PWB which is enabled,
replace the Token Ring PWB PL 1.3B Item 5.
If the problem continues and the machine has Ethernet enabled, replace the ESS
PWB PL 1.3A Item 1.
If the problem continues and the machine has a 100MB Ethernet PWB which is
enabled, replace the 100MB Ethernet PWB PL 1.3B Item 6.
The proper printer drivers are installed on the clients and that the printer is visible and
selected in the Chooser.
18-D
May 2003
2-668
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
G
Done. The ESS Software Verification Tool has repaired/
replaced the corrupt file(s). Verify that the problem is corrected
and return to Service Call Procedures.
Initial Actions
If not already done, perform 18-A, Network Entry RAP before using this RAP.
It is assumed that before entering here that the IOT is known to be OK.
If running NETBIOS over an IP network, ensure that the printer is properly configured for
the TCP/IP Network. Verify with the system administrator that the following printer settings are correct:
Verify that the problem is corrected. If the problem continues, return to the start
of this procedure.
Verify that the problem is corrected. If the problem continues, return to the start of
this procedure.
Host Name
Printer Name
Workgroup (domain)
Check the network drop cable. If OK, there may a a network problem. Notify the
system administrator.
Perform the following:
There may be a problem with the network port. Ask the system administrator
to test the port.
If the problem continues, have the customer/SA replace the network drop cable
If the problem continues and the machine has a Token Ring PWB which is
enable, replace the Token Ring PWB PL 1.3B Item 5.
If the problem continues and the machine has Ethernet enabled, replace the
ESS PWB PL 1.3A Item 1.
May 2003
2-669
18-E
Initial Actions
If not already done, perform 18-A, Network Entry RAP before using this RAP.
It is assumed that before entering here that the IOT is known to be OK.
If the problem is only occurring with one workstation (others are OK), ensure proper configuration and network connections at the workstation.
Talk to the Systems Administrator and determine if any changes have been made to the
machine Network and Connectivity Setups or the network itself.
A
The problem occurs only on one job.
Y
N
Check the workstation configuration and ensure that the Vines Print Service is associated
with the correct port on the workstation. Change to a different printer port.
In [ESS/Network tab , ESS Test Jobs], select [Test Pattern Job]. Choose the same PDL type
as the problem job is using, then [Start].
Check the output. The Test Pattern job prints OK.
Y
N
Perform the 16-C, ESS Software Verification RAP.
Have the customer/system administrator reload the print driver on the affected workstation.
The Print Service entered at the UI matches the Print Service created at the
workstation.
The Streetalk name entered on the UI matches the Streetalk name created at
the server (user account), and also matches the PCPrint Streetalk name.
Have the customer or systems administrator run setprint to check the jobs status and
jobs format.
Use the information below and perform the appropriate corrective actions based on the
state of job observed in setprint:
Rejected: The job is corrupted or an internal error occurred at the server. Cancel the
job and re-send.
On Hold: Release the job and ask the system administrator for assistance.
Paper format N.A.: Job format does not match the printer format. Change the job format.
Printer Busy: Ensure that the PC Print Street Talk name entered at the server
matches the user name on the UI. Also, ensure that the PC Print is the destination
configured for the Print Service at the server.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
18-F
May 2003
2-670
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-671
18-G
open cable
Use this RAP to check for network hardware related problems. Procedure Use the following list
as a guide to possible causes of network related problems:
Connector Problems
Poorly installed on cable
If the network is completely new, ensure that the hardware installation conforms to the
network
improper grounding
maximum number of nodes
minimum cable length between nodes
2.
If the network was working before, ask the question, "What has changed?" Even the most
subtle disturbance of the network hardware, like bumping cables, or moving transceivers,
can cause problems. Look also, for changes in configuration of hardware or software
such as:
Configuration changes on an existing server
Are the cable lengths correct and are they terminated properly?
3.
Added servers
Cable Length
10base 5
10base 2
10base-T
Token Ring
Cable type
Cable Impedance
50 ohms (cable
ends are terminated)
50 ohms (cable
ends are terminated)
50 ohms (cable
ends are terminated)
75 - 100 ohms
Maximum cable
segment length
100 m to hub
Maximum number
of coax segments
without link segments
N/A
N/A
Maximum number
of segments
including 2 link
segments
N/A
N/A
Maximum number
of MAUs per segment
100
30
2.5 m (8 ft.)
0.6 m (1.5ft.)
100
18-H
May 2003
2-672
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
external
external
internal or external
Connector type
50 m (164 ft.)
50 m (164 ft.) if
external transceiver is used
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-673
18-H
N
Go to the 16-B ESS Boot RAP. If no problem is found, go to the 16-C ESS Software
Verification RAP.
Run ESS Memory Test. Use GP35 , Running the ESS Memory Test.
Observe the test results. The test passes.
Y
N
Replace the indicated ESS DRAM SIMMS PL 1.3B Item 2.
Discuss the problem with the customer and/or inspect the incorrect output.
There is a font problem.
Y
N
The problem is occurring on all jobs from all clients.
Y
N
Go to the 16-B ESS Boot RAP. If no problem is found, go to the 16-C ESS Software Verification RAP.
Ensure that the client meets minimum specifications for the CentreWare drivers.
Have the customer view the job in Print Preview of the application. The problem appears in
Print Preview.
Y
N
There may be a font substitution that is not acceptable to the customer. In the Printer
Setup for the print driver, if Always Send to Printer is selected, the actual fonts will be sent
to the printer from the workstation. This will slow down printer performance, but will usually solve the font problem.
There may be a problem with the client workstation. Check/perform the following:
See if problem is related to a particular job. If so, go to 18-G, Problem Printing Job RAP.
Ensure that the client meets minimum specifications for the CentreWare drivers.
The print drivers have already been replaced in an attempt to resolve this problem.
Y
N
Have the system administrator/customer replace the print drivers. Ensure that the
latest drivers available are loaded. The problem still continues.
Y
N
Done. Return to Call Flow.
Check the current software level on the machine.
The machine has L18.x software installed.
Y
N
Go to the 16-B ESS Boot RAP. If no problem is found, go to the 16-C ESS Software Verification RAP.
Run ESS Memory Test. Use GP35 , Running the ESS Memory Test.
Observe the test results. The test passes.
Y
N
Replace the indicated ESS DRAM SIMMS PL 1.3B Item 2.
Go to the 16-B ESS Boot RAP. If no problem is found, go to the 16-C ESS Software
Verification RAP.
Check the current software level on the machine.
The machine has L18.x software installed.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
18-K
May 2003
2-674
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
This RAP is intended to help troubleshoot Network Scanning and Fax problems where the
scanned image is either defective or corrupted (0 bytes) or cannot be found on the server.
Initial Actions
Ensure that the machine copies and prints normally. If problems exist, troubleshoot those
first.
Enter [ESS/Network tab , ESS Test Jobs]. Select [Test Pattern] [Start Job].
Check the test pattern job and see if it prints normally. The test pattern job is OK.
Y
N
The problem is not unique to Network Scanning. Enter [ESS/Network tab , ESS
Error Log]. Select [All] [Retrieve].
Check for 16-XXX Faults. 16-0XX or 16-1XX faults are occurring.
Y
N
Go to 16-B, ESS Boot RAP.
Run ESS Memory Test. Use GP35 , Running the ESS Memory Test.
Observe the test results. The test passed.
Y
N
Replace the ESS DRAM SIMM indicated by the test results PL 1.3B Item 2.
In [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics], select [EPC Memory Test] [Start]. This
test will take approximately 20 minutes per 32 MB. In L18 software, the routine will
estimate time to completion and give status on the progress of the test.
Observe the test results. The test passed.
Y
N
Replace the indicated EPC DRAM SIMM PL 1.4A Item 6 (without TAG 077) or
EPC DRAM DIMM PL 1.4B Item 5 (w/TAG 077).
NOTE: Because the messages available on the UI are limited, troubleshooting may
be more difficult if the option to run a Confirmation Report is not enabled.
Select the Job Status button on the machine UI. Select [Other Queues] [Completed
Non-Printing Jobs]. Select the job at the top of the list and check the status.
The status of the job is completed.
Y
N
Go to the UI Status Table Table 1.
If the Scan job output using the default template is OK, there may be a
problem with a user template.
Enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics]. Select [IPA Daughter Card Test]
[Start].
Observe the test results. The test passes.
A
B
V0.042
If the Scan job output using the default template is OK, there may be a
problem with a user template.
Enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics]. Select [IPA Daughter Card Test]
[Start].
Observe the test results. The test passes.
Y
N
Replace the indicated IPA PWB PL 1.3B Item 4. If the problem continues,
replace the PCI Bus Extender PWB PL 1.3B Item 3 or the Riser PWB PL 1.4C
Item 4
N
Check the following:
A
May 2003
2-675
C
Status Indicator RAPs
18-L
C
Y
N
Replace the indicated IPA PWB PL 1.3B Item 4. If the problem continues,
replace the PCI Bus Extender PWB PL 1.3B Item 3 or the Riser PWB PL 1.4C
Item 4
Action
Image formatting
error
Possible Cause
Action
Login failure
Image Formatting
error
Hardware problem
Job canceled by
user
Machine was reset before images Possible user training. Check for
being transferred to the network
machine problem.
was complete
Remote directory
lock failed
1.
Check the Job Status Details, and go to the Confirmation Report Status Table 2.
Go to the appropriate RAP:
16-781.19
16-785.19
16-786.19
16-787.19
Message
Action
Login Error
18-L
1.
Try again
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.
4.
5.
File delete, replace Overwrite filing policy is selected Check if filing attributes are read
failed
and attempt to remove the existing only or insufficient access rights
files failed.
May 2003
2-676
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Possible Cause
Action
Job Status
Details
Possible Cause
Protocol invalid or
not specified
Action
Enable NetWare
Maximum of 1000
document objects
with same root
name exceeded
Job canceled by
system
Scan attribute
missing from job
template
Change template
Scan attribute error Using something other than Cenin job template
treWare or CentreWare Internet
Services template
Change template
Change template
Document attribute Using something other than Cenerror in job temtreWare or CentreWare Internet
plate
Services template
Change template
Image formatting
error
Hardware problem
Filing attribute
missing from job
template
Change template
Filing attribute
error in job template
Change template
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-677
18-L
18-L
May 2003
2-678
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Replace the Image Disk Cable PL 1.3A Item 6 and Card Cage Harness PL 1.3A Item
5.
See if the problem has been corrected. The problem continues.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
NOTE: Some machines may have the Image Disk located in a Removable Disk Drive. These
are machines that have special security requirements. The Image Disk Drive (and ESS Disk
Drive if an ST machine) is located in a Disk Carrier which is external to the machine. The
Drive(s) can be removed and secured when the machine is not in use. The Disk Carrier is connected by cable to the Machine. Some steps in the RAP are different if the machine has this
option.
If the machine has the Removable Disk Drive option, ensure the following:
Ensure the Removable Disk Drive is plugged in to the wall outlet, and the wall outlet has
the correct voltage (the green LED on the front of the Drive Enclosure indicates power is
available).
Ensure the Removable Drive was powered up correctly. The power for the Removable
Disk Drive should be switched on first, with a constant 0 on the seven segment display
before the machine power is switched on.
Ensure the cables in the rear of the Drive Enclosure are correctly connected.
If the machine is a ST model, ensure that an Image Disk is inserted into position #2 in the
Drive Enclosure.
C
Measure the voltage between +12V (+) (Venray LVPS) or +12V (Zydek LVPS) and
the LVPS. GND. +12 VDC is measured.
Y
N
Go to the 01-A Voltage Checkout RAP.
Observe the LEDs on the front of the Drive Enclosure. The green LED on the front of
the Drive Enclosure is ON.
Y
N
Ensure the Removable Drive Module is switched on and plugged into the wall outlet,
with correct voltage available. If the wall outlet is OK, replace the Drive Enclosure.
Check the Removable Drive SCSI Cable at the back of the Removable Drive and at the
Main Control PWB for good connections. The connections look OK.
Y
N
Repair or replace the Removable Drive Cable as necessary PL 1.1B Item 7.
Swap the two SCSI cables. Use the ESS cable for the Image Disk and the Image Disk
cable for the ESS (if an ST machine). The ends will have to be reversed to enable the
connectors to mate. If the machine is a DC machine and only has 1 removable drive,
there should be a spare cable available (the kit comes with two).
Check for a reoccurrence of the fault. The problem still occurs with a different cable.
Y
N
Replace the Removable Drive Cable PL 1.1B Item 7 (if swapped to the ESS Removable Drive, replace that one).
The problem began immediately after replacing either the Image Disk or the ESS Hard
Disk Drive.
Y
N
The machine has a Removable Disk Drive option.
Y
N
Ensure that all Image Disk Drive cables are connected correctly Flag 1 Flag 2 Flag 3
Flag 4 (without TAG 044) or Flag 1 Flag 5 Flag 6 Flag 4 (with TAG 044).
Check the Image Disk Drive cable connections. The connections are OK.
Y
N
Repair as necessary. Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 3, Image Disk Cable PL
1.3A Item 6, Card Cage Harness PL 1.3A Item 5.
Ask the customer about the availability of a second removable Image Disk Drive.
There is another Image Disk available.
Y
N
NOTE: The format routine may correct the problem. However, once the test is
started, it cannot be stopped. The machine will not be available for use during the
test. It will take up to 20 minutes to reformat each 1 GB of disk space.
NOTE: The format routine may correct the problem. However, once the test is
started, it cannot be stopped. The machine will not be available for use during the
test. It will take up to 20 minutes to reformat each 1 GB of disk space.
NOTE: If the disk was already reformatted during a remote session, answer Yes to
this and continue without running format.
NOTE: If the disk was already reformatted during a remote session, answer Yes to
this and continue without running format.
In Diagnostic Navigator, select [Copier Sys tab , Image Disk Format]. Select Image
Disk Format tab. Select Start.
When the test completes, use [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern] and run some prints
to see if the problem is resolved. The 19-300 faults continue.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
In Diagnostic Navigator, select [Copier Sys tab , Image Disk Format]. Select Image
Disk Format tab. Select Start.
When the test completes, use [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern] and run some prints
to see if the problem is resolved. The 19-300 faults continue.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
A
May 2003
2-679
D
Status Indicator RAPs
19-300
D
If the problem continues, go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
The problem occurs with a second removable Image Disk.
Y
N
NOTE: The format routine may correct the problem. However, once the test is
started, it cannot be stopped. The machine will not be available for use during the
test. It will take up to 20 minutes to reformat each 1 GB of disk space.
NOTE: If the disk was already reformatted during a remote session, answer Yes to
this and continue without running format.
In Diagnostic Navigator, select [Copier Sys tab , Image Disk Format]. Select Image
Disk Format tab. Select Start.
When the test completes, use [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern] and run some prints
to see if the problem is resolved. The 19-300 faults continue.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the original Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 3.
If the Image Disk has a part number 121E16740 or higher, ensure the jumper is installed
as shown in Figure 6.
If the machine has TAG 091, ensure the ESS Hard Disk Drive does NOT have a jumper
as shown in Figure 6.
Refer to Kit instructions for 600K88170 or the ESS Hard Disk Drive Replacement, REP
16-1, or Image DIsk Replacement, REP 19-1.
19-300
May 2003
2-680
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-681
19-300
36V
+36V
+24V
24V
-12V
24 PSV
+24 VES
INT-OUT
Interlock Outp
Interlock Inpu
RMT-OFF
ES#1
ES#2
INT-IN
+5 VES
+5V
+12V
5.15V
+12V
-12V
+12 VES
5.15 PSV
19-300
May 2003
2-682
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
LEDs
May 2003
2-683
19-300
Initial Actions
Replace the Image Disk Cable PL 1.3A Item 6 and Card Cage Harness PL 1.3A Item
5.
See if the problem has been corrected. The problem continues.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
NOTE: Some machines may have the Image Disk located in a Removable Disk Drive. These
are machines that have special security requirements. The Image Disk Drive (and ESS Disk
Drive if an ST machine) is located in a Disk Carrier which is external to the machine. The
Drive(s) can be removed and secured when the machine is not in use. The Disk Carrier is connected by cable to the Machine. Some steps in the RAP are different if the machine has this
option.
If the machine has the Removable Disk Drive option, ensure the following:
Ensure the Removable Disk Drive is plugged in to the wall outlet, and the wall outlet has
the correct voltage (the green LED on the front of the Drive Enclosure indicates power is
available).
Ensure the Removable Drive was powered up correctly. The power for the Removable
Disk Drive should be switched on first, with a constant 0 on the seven segment display
before the machine power is switched on.
Ensure the cables in the rear of the Drive Enclosure are correctly connected.
If the machine is a ST model, ensure that an Image Disk is inserted into position #2 in the
Drive Enclosure.
C
Measure the voltage between +12V (+) (without IOT TAG 011) or +12V (with IOT
TAG 011) and LVPS GND (-) on the LVPS. +12 VDC is measured.
Y
N
Go to the 01-A Voltage Checkout RAP.
Observe the LEDs on the front of the Drive Enclosure. The green LED on the front of
the Drive Enclosure is ON.
Y
N
Ensure the Removable Drive Module is switched on and plugged into the wall outlet,
with correct voltage available. If the wall outlet is OK, replace the Drive Enclosure.
Check the Removable Drive SCSI Cable at the back of the Removable Drive and at the
Main Control PWB for good connections. The connections look OK.
Y
N
Repair or replace the Removable Drive Cable as necessary PL 1.1B Item 7.
Swap the two SCSI cables. Use the ESS cable for the Image Disk and the Image Disk
cable for the ESS (if an ST machine). The ends will have to be reversed to enable the
connectors to mate. If the machine is a DC machine and only has 1 removable drive,
there should be a spare cable available (the kit comes with two).
Check for a reoccurrence of the fault. The problem still occurs with a different cable.
Y
N
Replace the Removable Drive Cable PL 1.1B Item 7 (if swapped to the ESS Removable Drive, replace that one).
The problem began immediately after replacing either the Image Disk or the ESS Hard
Disk Drive.
Y
N
The machine has a Removable Disk Drive option.
Y
N
Ensure that all Image Disk Drive cables are connected correctly Flag 1 Flag 2 Flag 3
Flag 4 (without TAG 044) or Flag 1 Flag 5 Flag 6 Flag 4 (with TAG 044).
Check the Image Disk Drive cable connections. The connections are OK.
Y
N
Repair as necessary. Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 3, Image Disk Cable PL
1.3A Item 6, Card Cage Harness PL 1.3A Item 5.
Ask the customer about the availability of a second removable Image Disk Drive.
There is another Image Disk available.
Y
N
NOTE: The format routine may correct the problem. However, once the test is
started, it cannot be stopped. The machine will not be available for use during the
test. It will take up to 20 minutes to reformat each 1 GB of disk space.
NOTE: The format routine may correct the problem. However, once the test is
started, it cannot be stopped. The machine will not be available for use during the
test. It will take up to 20 minutes to reformat each 1 GB of disk space.
NOTE: If the disk was already reformatted during a remote session, answer Yes to
this and continue without running format.
NOTE: If the disk was already reformatted during a remote session, answer Yes to
this and continue without running format.
In Diagnostic Navigator, select [Copier Sys tab , Image Disk Format]. Select Image
Disk Format tab. Select Start.
When the test completes, use [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern] and run some prints
to see if the problem is resolved. The 19-301 faults continue.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
In Diagnostic Navigator, select [Copier Sys tab , Image Disk Format]. Select Image
Disk Format tab. Select Start.
When the test completes, use [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern] and run some prints
to see if the problem is resolved. The 19-301 faults continue.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
19-301
A
May 2003
2-684
D
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
D
If the problem continues, go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
The problem occurs with a second removable Image Disk.
Y
N
NOTE: The format routine may correct the problem. However, once the test is
started, it cannot be stopped. The machine will not be available for use during the
test. It will take up to 20 minutes to reformat each 1 GB of disk space.
NOTE: If the disk was already reformatted during a remote session, answer Yes to
this and continue without running format.
In Diagnostic Navigator, select [Copier Sys tab , Image Disk Format]. Select Image
Disk Format tab. Select Start.
When the test completes, use [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern] and run some prints
to see if the problem is resolved. The 19-301 faults continue.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the original Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 3.
If the Image Disk has a part number 121E16740 or higher, ensure the jumper is installed
as shown in Figure 6.
If the machine has TAG 091, ensure the ESS Hard Disk Drive does NOT have a jumper
as shown in Figure 6.
Refer to Kit instructions for 600K88170 or the ESS Hard Disk Drive Replacement, REP
16-1, or Image DIsk Replacement, REP 19-1.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-685
19-301
19-301
May 2003
2-686
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
36V
+36V
+24V
24V
-12V
24 PSV
+24 VES
INT-OUT
Interlock Outp
Interlock Inpu
RMT-OFF
ES#1
ES#2
INT-IN
+5 VES
+5V
+12V
5.15V
+12V
-12V
+12 VES
5.15 PSV
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-687
19-301
LEDs
19-301
May 2003
2-688
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Replace the Image Disk Cable PL 1.3A Item 6 and Card Cage Harness PL 1.3A Item
5.
See if the problem has been corrected. The problem continues.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
NOTE: Some machines may have the Image Disk located in a Removable Disk Drive. These
are machines that have special security requirements. The Image Disk Drive (and ESS Disk
Drive if an ST machine) is located in a Disk Carrier which is external to the machine. The
Drive(s) can be removed and secured when the machine is not in use. The Disk Carrier is connected by cable to the Machine. Some steps in the RAP are different if the machine has this
option.
If the machine has the Removable Disk Drive option, ensure the following:
Ensure the Removable Disk Drive is plugged in to the wall outlet, and the wall outlet has
the correct voltage (the green LED on the front of the Drive Enclosure indicates power is
available).
Ensure the Removable Drive was powered up correctly. The power for the Removable
Disk Drive should be switched on first, with a constant 0 on the seven segment display
before the machine power is switched on.
Ensure the cables in the rear of the Drive Enclosure are correctly connected.
If the machine is a ST model, ensure that an Image Disk is inserted into position #2 in the
Drive Enclosure.
C
Measure the voltage between +12V (+) (without IOT TAG 011) or +12V (with IOT
TAG 011) and LVPS GND (-) on the LVPS. +12 VDC is measured.
Y
N
Go to the 01-A Voltage Checkout RAP.
Observe the LEDs on the front of the Drive Enclosure. The green LED on the front of
the Drive Enclosure is ON.
Y
N
Ensure the Removable Drive Module is switched on and plugged into the wall outlet,
with correct voltage available. If the wall outlet is OK, replace the Drive Enclosure.
Check the Removable Drive SCSI Cable at the back of the Removable Drive and at the
Main Control PWB for good connections. The connections look OK.
Y
N
Repair or replace the Removable Drive Cable as necessary PL 1.1B Item 7.
Swap the two SCSI cables. Use the ESS cable for the Image Disk and the Image Disk
cable for the ESS (if an ST machine). The ends will have to be reversed to enable the
connectors to mate. If the machine is a DC machine and only has 1 removable drive,
there should be a spare cable available (the kit comes with two).
Check for a reoccurrence of the fault. The problem still occurs with a different cable.
Y
N
Replace the Removable Drive Cable PL 1.1B Item 7 (if swapped to the ESS Removable Drive, replace that one).
The problem began immediately after replacing either the Image Disk or the ESS Hard
Disk Drive.
Y
N
The machine has a Removable Disk Drive option.
Y
N
Ensure that all Image Disk Drive cables are connected correctly Flag 1 Flag 2 Flag 3
Flag 4 (without TAG 044) or Flag 1 Flag 5 Flag 6 Flag 4 (with TAG 044).
Check the Image Disk Drive cable connections. The connections are OK.
Y
N
Repair as necessary. Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 3, Image Disk Cable PL
1.3A Item 6, Card Cage Harness PL 1.3A Item 5.
Ask the customer about the availability of a second removable Image Disk Drive.
There is another Image Disk available.
Y
N
NOTE: The format routine may correct the problem. However, once the test is
started, it cannot be stopped. The machine will not be available for use during the
test. It will take up to 20 minutes to reformat each 1 GB of disk space.
NOTE: The format routine may correct the problem. However, once the test is
started, it cannot be stopped. The machine will not be available for use during the
test. It will take up to 20 minutes to reformat each 1 GB of disk space.
NOTE: If the disk was already reformatted during a remote session, answer Yes to
this and continue without running format.
NOTE: If the disk was already reformatted during a remote session, answer Yes to
this and continue without running format.
In Diagnostic Navigator, select [Copier Sys tab , Image Disk Format]. Select Image
Disk Format tab. Select Start.
When the test completes, use [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern] and run some prints
to see if the problem is resolved. The 19-302 faults continue.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
In Diagnostic Navigator, select [Copier Sys tab , Image Disk Format]. Select Image
Disk Format tab. Select Start.
When the test completes, use [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern] and run some prints
to see if the problem is resolved. The 19-302 faults continue.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
A
May 2003
2-689
D
Status Indicator RAPs
19-302
D
If the problem continues, go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
The problem occurs with a second removable Image Disk.
Y
N
NOTE: The format routine may correct the problem. However, once the test is
started, it cannot be stopped. The machine will not be available for use during the
test. It will take up to 20 minutes to reformat each 1 GB of disk space.
NOTE: If the disk was already reformatted during a remote session, answer Yes to
this and continue without running format.
In Diagnostic Navigator, select [Copier Sys tab , Image Disk Format]. Select Image
Disk Format tab. Select Start.
When the test completes, use [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern] and run some prints
to see if the problem is resolved. The 19-302 faults continue.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the original Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 3.
If the Image Disk has a part number 121E16740 or higher, ensure the jumper is installed
as shown in Figure 6.
If the machine has TAG 091, ensure the ESS Hard Disk Drive does NOT have a jumper
as shown in Figure 6.
Refer to Kit instructions for 600K88170 or the ESS Hard Disk Drive Replacement, REP
16-1, or Image DIsk Replacement, REP 19-1.
19-302
May 2003
2-690
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-691
19-302
36V
+36V
+24V
24V
-12V
24 PSV
+24 VES
INT-OUT
Interlock Outp
Interlock Inpu
RMT-OFF
ES#1
ES#2
INT-IN
+5 VES
+5V
+12V
5.15V
+12V
-12V
+12 VES
5.15 PSV
19-302
May 2003
2-692
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
LEDs
May 2003
2-693
19-302
Fault Code, 19-303, occurs when the Image Disk cannot be formatted.
Initial Actions
NOTE: Some machines may have the Image Disk located in a Removable Disk Drive. These
are machines that have special security requirements. The Image Disk Drive (and ESS Disk
Drive if an ST machine) is located in a Disk Carrier which is external to the machine. The
Drive(s) can be removed and secured when the machine is not in use. The Disk Carrier is connected by cable to the Machine. Some steps in the RAP are different if the machine has this
option.
If the machine has the Removable Disk Drive option, ensure the following:
Ensure the Removable Disk Drive is plugged in to the wall outlet, and the wall outlet has
the correct voltage (the green LED on the front of the Drive Enclosure indicates power is
available).
Ensure the Removable Drive was powered up correctly. The power for the Removable
Disk Drive should be switched on first, with a constant 0 on the seven segment display
before the machine power is switched on.
Ensure the cables in the rear of the Drive Enclosure are correctly connected.
If the machine is a ST model, ensure that an Image Disk is inserted into position #2 in the
Drive Enclosure.
N
Ensure the Removable Drive Module is switched on and plugged into the wall outlet, with
correct voltage available. If the wall outlet is OK, replace the Drive Enclosure.
Check the Removable Drive SCSI Cable at the back of the Removable Drive and at the Main
Control PWB for good connections. The connections look OK.
Y
N
Repair or replace the Removable Drive Cable as necessary PL 1.1B Item 7.
Swap the two SCSI cables. Use the ESS cable for the Image Disk and the Image Disk cable for
the ESS (if an ST machine). The ends will have to be reversed to enable the connectors to
mate. If the machine is a DC machine and only has 1 removable drive, there should be a spare
cable available (the kit comes with two).
Check for a reoccurrence of the fault. The problem still occurs with a different cable.
Y
N
Replace the Removable Drive Cable PL 1.1B Item 7 (if swapped to the ESS Removable
Drive, replace that one).
Ask the customer about the availability of a second removable Image Disk Drive.
There is another Image Disk available.
Y
N
Replace the Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 3.
If the problem continues, go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
The problem occurs with a second removable Image Disk.
Y
N
Replace the original Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 3.
Replace the Removable Disk Drive Assembly PL 1.1B Item 1.
If the problem continues, go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
Measure the voltage between +12V (+) (without IOT TAG 011) or +12V (with IOT TAG
011) and LVPS GND (-) on the LVPS. +12 VDC is measured.
Y
N
Go to the 01-A Voltage Checkout RAP.
Replace the Image Disk Cable PL 1.3A Item 6 and Card Cage Harness PL 1.3A Item 5.
See if the problem has been corrected. The problem continues.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 3.
If the problem continues, go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
Observe the LEDs on the front of the Drive Enclosure. The green LED on the front of the
Drive Enclosure is ON.
19-303
May 2003
2-694
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-695
19-303
36V
+36V
+24V
24V
-12V
24 PSV
+24 VES
INT-OUT
Interlock Outp
Interlock Inpu
RMT-OFF
ES#1
ES#2
INT-IN
+5 VES
+5V
+12V
5.15V
+12V
-12V
+12 VES
5.15 PSV
19-303
May 2003
2-696
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 19-310, occurs when the Image Disk capacity cannot be determined at power up.
Initial Actions
NOTE: Some machines may have the Image Disk located in a Removable Disk Drive. These
are machines that have special security requirements. The Image Disk Drive (and ESS Disk
Drive if an ST machine) is located in a Disk Carrier which is external to the machine. The
Drive(s) can be removed and secured when the machine is not in use. The Disk Carrier is connected by cable to the Machine. Some steps in the RAP are different if the machine has this
option.
If the machine has the Removable Disk Drive option, ensure the following:
LEDs
Ensure the Removable Disk Drive is plugged in to the wall outlet, and the wall outlet has
the correct voltage (the green LED on the front of the Drive Enclosure indicates power is
available).
Ensure the Removable Drive was powered up correctly. The power for the Removable
Disk Drive should be switched on first, with a constant 0 on the seven segment display
before the machine power is switched on.
Ensure the cables in the rear of the Drive Enclosure are correctly connected.
If the machine is a ST model, ensure that an Image Disk is inserted into position #2 in the
Drive Enclosure.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Observe the LEDs on the front of the Drive Enclosure. The green LED on the front of the
Drive Enclosure is ON.
May 2003
2-697
19-303, 19-310
N
Ensure the Removable Drive Module is switched on and plugged into the wall outlet, with
correct voltage available. If the wall outlet is OK, replace the Drive Enclosure.
Check the Removable Drive SCSI Cable at the back of the Removable Drive and at the Main
Control PWB for good connections. The connections look OK.
Y
N
Repair or replace the Removable Drive Cable as necessary PL 1.1B Item 7.
Swap the two SCSI cables. Use the ESS cable for the Image Disk and the Image Disk cable for
the ESS (if an ST machine). The ends will have to be reversed to enable the connectors to
mate. If the machine is a DC machine and only has 1 removable drive, there should be a spare
cable available (the kit comes with two).
Check for a reoccurrence of the fault. The problem still occurs with a different cable.
Y
N
Replace the Removable Drive Cable PL 1.1B Item 7 (if swapped to the ESS Removable
Drive, replace that one).
Ask the customer about the availability of a second removable Image Disk Drive.
There is another Image Disk available.
Y
N
Replace the Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 3.
If the problem continues, go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
The problem occurs with a second removable Image Disk.
Y
N
Replace the original Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 3.
Replace the Removable Disk Drive Assembly PL 1.1B Item 1.
If the problem continues, go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
19-310
May 2003
2-698
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-699
19-310
36V
+36V
+24V
24V
-12V
24 PSV
+24 VES
INT-OUT
Interlock Outp
Interlock Inpu
RMT-OFF
ES#1
ES#2
INT-IN
+5 VES
+5V
+12V
5.15V
+12V
-12V
+12 VES
5.15 PSV
19-310
May 2003
2-700
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Disk Carrier
LEDs
Table 1 65 PPM Approximate Automatic Electronic Collation Job/Memory Capacities (Build Job Mode**)
32 MB
64 MB
Doc Type
Complexity
8.5x11 (A4)
11x17 (A3)
Text
Low
OK*
OK*
OK*
OK*
Medium
OK*
OK*
OK*
OK*
High
OK*
OK*
OK*
OK*
OK*
OK*
OK*
OK*
Medium
OK*
OK*
OK*
OK*
High
OK*
OK*
OK*
OK*
Low
OK*
OK*
OK*
OK*
Medium
20
10
50
20
High
10
20
10
Graphics
8.5x11 (A4)
11x17 (A3)
** = If printing is disabled by using build job mode or scanning with the Front Door open.
Table 2 65 PPM Approximate Automatic Electronic Collation Job/Memory Capacities (Normal Mode)
32 MB
Doc Type
Text
64 MB
Complexity
8.5x11 (A4)
11x17 (A3)
8.5x11 (A4)
11x17 (A3)
Low
OK*
OK*
OK*
OK*
Medium
OK*
OK*
OK*
OK*
High
OK*
OK*
OK*
OK*
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-701
19-310, 19-401/
Table 2 65 PPM Approximate Automatic Electronic Collation Job/Memory Capacities (Normal Mode)
32 MB
Doc Type
Complexity
8.5x11 (A4)
11x17 (A3)
8.5x11 (A4)
11x17 (A3)
OK*
OK*
OK*
OK*
Medium
OK*
OK*
OK*
OK*
High
20
10
50
20
Low
20
20
40
40
Medium
10
20
10
High
10
Graphics
19-401/
64 MB
May 2003
2-702
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
If the job has mixed size originals, ensure that Mixed Size originals is selected on the UI.
2.
There may be an Image Disk problem. Check for 19-3xx faults are occurring, go to that
RAP. 19-300 19-301 19-302 19-310
3.
If the machine has an Electronic Hole Removal PWB, switch off the machine power,
remove and reseat the PWB and see if the problem continues.
4.
This fault can be caused by DADF problems. Check the Last 40 ([Faults/Counters tab ,
Faults]) for any 05-XXX faults and fix them first.
5.
6.
If this fault occurs in manual platen mode with a 22-300.05 or 22-700.05 fault, and a sheet
is printed that is scrogged, it may be related to certain combinations of image shift, edge
erase, and mag. The problem may be alleviated by changing edge erase back to default.
7.
If the fault occurs in DADF mode with a 22-300.05 or 22-700.05 fault, and a sheet is
printed that is scrogged, all black, or partially black, it may be an electrical noise problem.
Check the following:
a.
Ensure the Scanner Top Frame is grounded correctly. Check continuity from the
Scanner Top Frame to the machine frame. If there is a problem, check the Left front
mounting screw of the Scanner Base. Make sure it is present and the metal bracket
carries ground to the Scanner Top Frame. On some machines, other mounting
screws are also used for grounding. Check all four mounting screws. If a metal strip
or wire is connected under the screw, check continuity.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Check the CVT Motor ground wire. One end of the ground wire should be secured
between the screw head and the motor bracket. The other end should be secured
between the screw head and the bearing retainer. (only on machines built before
Sept. 1998. Machines built after have a metal bracket in place of the ground wire.)
NOTE: Be sure the ground wire is connected to the correct screw on the DADF
base, to provide an electrical ground for the CVT Motor. The correct screw is the one
holding the metal bearing retainer, which has a metal ground strap underneath, NOT
the nearby screw which only contacts plastic parts.
f.
If the above do not help, check ground wire for continuity to machine frame (on
machines that had TAG 039 installed at the factory, there will be a braided wire running from the Scanner to the machine frame) Figure 3
Ground Wire
(violet wire)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-703
19-404
Ground Wire
(violet)
19-404
May 2003
2-704
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Ground Wire
(violet or metal
braid)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-705
19-404
Check Connections
There may be an Image Disk problem. Check for 19-3xx faults are occurring, go to that
RAP. 19-300 19-301 19-302 19-310
This fault occurs under certain conditions after an IOT paper path jam. It is normal and no
action should be taken for the 19-405 faults. Troubleshoot the cause of the IOT paper
path faults.
If the problem continues, enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics], select [VCM +
IPS1 Loop Test], then [Start]. If the test fails, go to the 03-G Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
19-404, 19-405
May 2003
2-706
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 19-406, indicates the system has detected at video loopback DVMA time-out.
Fault Code, 19-407, indicates the system has detected at video middle function input DVMA
time-out.
There may be an Image Disk problem. Check for 19-3xx faults are occurring, go to that
RAP. 19-300 19-301 19-302 19-310
Check the Image Disk Drive connections. Disconnect/reconnect the Image Disk Drive
cables.
If the problem continues, enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics], select [VCM +
IPS1 Loop Test], then [Start]. If the test fails, go to the 03-G Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
There may be an Image Disk problem. Check for 19-3xx faults are occurring, go to that
RAP. 19-300 19-301 19-302 19-310
Check the Image Disk Drive connections. Disconnect/reconnect the Image Disk Drive
cables.
There have been some cases reported where certain instances of image rotation along
with documents fed SEF onto LEF paper caused this fault. It was found only to occur on
machines with 1GB Image Disk Drives. On machines where this problem is occurring,
send service and replace the Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 3.
If the problem continues, enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics], select [VCM +
IPS1 Loop Test], then [Start]. If the test fails, go to the 03-G Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
May 2003
2-707
19-406, 19-407
Fault Code, 19-408, indicates the system has detected at video middle function output DVMA
time-out.
Fault Code, 19-409, indicates the video cannot guarantee the integrity of the job being processed.
There may be an Image Disk problem. Check for 19-3xx faults are occurring, go to that
RAP. 19-300 19-301 19-302 19-310
If the job has mixed size originals, ensure that Mixed Size originals is selected on the UI.
Check the Image Disk Drive connections. Disconnect / reconnect the Image Disk Drive
cables.
If any 19-3xx faults are occurring, go to that RAP. 19-300 19-301 19-302
There have been some cases reported where certain instances of image rotation along
with documents fed SEF onto LEF paper caused this fault. It was found only to occur on
machines with 1GB Image Disk Drives. On machines where this problem is occurring,
send service and replace the Image Disk Drive PL 1.3A Item 3.
If the problem continues, enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics], select [VCM +
IPS1 Loop Test], then [Start]. If the test fails, go to the 03-G Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
If the problem continues, enter [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics], select [VCM +
IPS1 Loop Test], then [Start]. If the test fails, go to the 03-G Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
19-408, 19-409
May 2003
2-708
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 19-410, indicates that the IPS does not respond to a set up request from video
when start is selected.
Fault Code, 19-750, indicates the detected EPC Memory does not match the expected configuration. One of the following may have occurred since the last power on:
Initial Actions
The fault may possibly due to a EPC DRAM SIMM not seated correctly in its socket or
missing. Check the EPC DRAM SIMMs and ensure they are inserted correctly in their
socket and the correct number of SIMMs are present that are expected for the machine (1
SIMM = 32MB, 2 SIMMs = 64MB).
To clear the fault while the problem is diagnosed:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-709
Enter [Configuration tab , System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System]
Change the "Install Phase" for System and Main Controller to [Manufacturing].
Select [Apply] [OK].
Troubleshoot the cause of the configuration mismatch. Check for loose or missing
memory.
When the problem is corrected, enter [Configuration tab , System, Imaging, and IOT
Configuration], select [System]
Select [Apply] [OK]. Switch off the machine power, then switch it back on.
19-410 , 19-750
Autosegmentation PWB - Only used on pre-Atlanta Gold Main Control PWBs (TAG 015).
Electronic Hole Removal (EHR) PWB - Available on Atlanta Gold and Atlanta Platinum
Main Control PWBs.
One of these PWBs was removed or was added and the correct procedures were not followed
to complete the install.
This fault may be due to a configuration change (Rotation SRAM SIMM) that was not
completed correctly. If the machine was upgraded and now has 19-752 faults, see if the
customer is available to assist with running the install wizard. If so, enter [Configuration
tab , System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and change the "Install
Phase" for System and Main Controller to [Manufacturing]. Select [OK]. Switch off the
machine power, then switch it back on. When the machine is ready, enter [Configuration
tab , System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and change the "Install
Phase to [Install Complete]. Switch off the machine power, then switch it back on.
When the machine is ready, the fault should be cleared.
The fault may possibly due to a Rotation SRAM SIMM not seated correctly in its socket or
missing. Check the Rotation SRAM SIMM for a good connection to the Main Control
PWB.
This fault may be due to a configuration change (Autosegmentation PWB or EHR PWB
added) that was not completed correctly. If the machine was upgraded and now has 19751 faults, enter [Configuration tab , System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select
[System] and change the "Install Phase" for System and Main Controller to [Manufacturing]. Select [OK]. Switch off the machine power, then switch it back on.
When the
machine is ready, enter [Configuration tab , System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration],
select [System] and change the "Install Phase" to [Install Complete]. Switch off the
machine power, then switch it back on. When the machine is ready, the fault should be
cleared.
If the Main Control PWB has an Autosegmentation PWB or EHR PWB, check the connection of the Autosegmentation PWB or EHR PWB to the Main Control PWB.
19-751, 19-752
May 2003
2-710
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 19-753, indicates the platen cover (gray / white) configuration does not match the
expected configuration.
Fault Code, 19-754, indicates the Image Disk configuration (present / not present) does not
match the expected configuration.
The fault may possibly due to a Document Glass Pad not connected correctly or missing.
Check the Document Glass Pad and ensure it is connected.
This fault may be due to a configuration change (Document Glass Pad) that was not completed correctly. If the machine was upgraded and now has 19-753 faults, enter [Configuration tab , System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and change the
"Install Phase" for System and Main Controller to [Manufacturing]. Select [OK]. Switch
off the machine power, then switch it back on. When the machine is ready, enter [Configuration tab , System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and change the
"Install Phase" to [Install Complete]. Switch off the machine power, then switch it back
on. When the machine is ready, the fault should be cleared.
Enter [Configuration tab , System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and
change the "Install Phase" to [Manufacturing]. Select [OK]. Switch off the machine power,
then switch it back on. When the machine is ready, enter [Configuration tab , System,
Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and change the "Install Phase" to [Install
Complete]. Switch off the machine power, then switch it back on. When complete, the
machine will recognize the correct Image Disk Drive configuration and the fault will clear.
The fault may possibly due to a Image Disk Drive not connected correctly or missing.
Inspect the Image Disk Drive. Check for any 19-3xx faults.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-711
19-753, 19-754
N
Perform the following steps until the problem is resolved:
This RAP will assist in diagnosing problems with PWS to machine communication.
1.
Initial Actions
Check the PWS Serial Cable. Ensure that it is connected correctly at both ends.
Check the pins and connectors for any damage.
2.
If there is a problem when trying to upload software to the machine, go to the GP28 , Software
Upload Failures Procedure.
Disconnect the cable from the machine. Reboot the PWS. When the PWS has up,
reconnect the PWS cable to the machine.
3.
Disconnect the PWS cable from the machine. PO/PO the machine. When the
machine is ready, reconnect the PWS to the machine.
4.
Observe the machine User Interface (UI). The UI Boots up normally to the Basic Copying
screen.
Y
N
Perform the following:
Check the COMM port setup. When the connection selection window appears (upon
starting the Diagnostic Navigator or EDOC Browser), ensure the connection type is
set to Local, and click the [Setup] button. The COMM port for the Local Setup should
be Comm1.
5.
Check the Portable Work Station Cable PL 1.2A Item 8 for good connections, damage, etc. Repair/replace as necessary. (If the PWS can connect remotely to this
machine, and the comm port setup is correct for local mode, replace the Portable
Work Station Cable PL 1.2A Item 8.)
1.
2.
Ensure the EPC DRAM SIMMS (or EPC SDRAM DIMM w/TAG 077) are present.
3.
Observe the LED on the lower left corner of the Main Control PWB (it may be
obstructed by the Accessory PWB, but if the LED is on, the light will be visible).
NOTE: On machine without Tag 077 (Atlanta Platinum) the LED is green, with Tag
077, the LED is red.
The EPC DRAM SIMMS (or EPC SDRAM DIMM w/TAG 077) are present on the Main
Control PWB.
Y
N
The EPC DRAM SIMMS (or EPC SDRAM DIMM w/TAG 077) must have been
removed from the machine. Inform the customer. Install new EPC DRAM SIMMS PL
1.4A Item 2 (or PL 1.4B Item 5 w/TAG 077) or PL 1.4C Item 6 (on 460/470).
Observe the LED. The LED is blinking about once per second (answer NO if blinking slower).
Y
N
Observe the LED. The LED is On.
Y
N
The LED is off. There may be a power problem. Check all of the connectors
on the Main Control PWB, especially at J13 and J7. Inspect the harness from
these connectors back to the LVPS. Ensure they are connected correctly and
not damaged. If OK, go to the 01-A, Voltage Checkout RAP.
Go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
This is the normal state for the LED. Re-assess the first question of this RAP. If there is no
doubt the machine will not boot, no error codes are present on the UI Display, and the
PWS won't connect, go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
On the machine UI Control Panel, select [Machine Status]. On the UI DIsplay, select [Faults],
[Error Log].
Observe the Error log for any current fault codes. There are current fault codes that begin
with (Chain) 03.
19-A
May 2003
2-712
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 21-300, indicates the Main Controller PWB cannot communicate with the modem.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 21-304, indicates that no dial tone was sensed at the modem. This fault can occur
when an RDT Configuration mismatch exists (22-755.17), such as RDT was configured but the
dial-tone was not sensed at power up. It can also occur on a machine which does not have
RDT enabled. In that case, the fault should be ignored.
This fault can occur if a phone line was at one time connected, and then removed. Determine if the machine is intended to be RDT enabled. If no, this fault can be ignored.
2.
May 2003
2-713
21-300, 21-304
Fault Code, 21-308, indicates the modem has indicated that one or more phone numbers have
been blacklisted. The modem exceeded the number of allowable attempts to contact the host.
This fault can occur only on XE machines.
1.
Configuration Problems - If Auto-billing has never previously been installed and working
on this machine, or there has recently been a change in the Auto-billing configuration, the
configuration may be incorrect. Enter [RDT tab , RDT Configuration]. Check the following:
Configuration Problems - If Auto-billing has never previously been installed and working
on this machine, or there has recently been a change in the Auto-billing configuration, the
configuration may be incorrect. Enter [RDT tab , RDT Configuration]. Check the following:
a.
Select [Auto-Billing Setup]. Ensure the Direct Dial Phone Number is correct (including Area Code).
a.
Select [Auto-Billing Setup]. Ensure the Direct Dial Phone Number is correct (including Area Code).
b.
b.
Another common problem is in [Dialing Setup]. Ensure the Dial-out Prefix is correct.
If a number is required to reach an outside line (ie. 9,), that should be in the Dial-out
Prefix.
Another common problem is in [Dialing Setup]. Ensure the Dial-out Prefix is correct.
If a number is required to reach an outside line (ie. 9,), that should be in the Dial-out
Prefix.
c.
The machine phone number must also be entered for Dial-out to work. Include 1 and
area code.
c.
The machine phone number must also be entered for Dial-out to work.
d.
d.
If the machine is on a phone share device, another device may be using the line.
Determine if another device is blocking access for the machine to dial out.
If the machine is on a phone share device, another device may be using the line.
Determine if another device is blocking access for the machine to dial out.
e.
e.
f.
f.
Use the Auto-Billing Host Test to check the ability to connect to the host. Select
[Start].
Use the Auto-Billing Host Test to check the ability to connect to the host. Select
[Start].
2.
2.
Host Problem - The Host may be unavailable. If possible, dial the host from a phone
using the same parameters entered in the Auto-Billing Setup (e.g. 9, 18887787012). See
if a modem answers. More than 2 rings indicates a host problem. If a modem does
answer, the Host is probably OK and the problem is on the machine. Go to next item.
Host Problem - The Host may be unavailable. If possible, dial the host from a phone
using the same parameters entered in the Auto-Billing Setup (e.g. 9, 18887787012). See
if a modem answers. More than 2 rings indicates a host problem. If a modem does
answer, the Host is probably OK and the problem is on the machine. Go to next item.
3.
3.
Machine Modem Problem - The machine modem may have failed. Ensure the machine
can be contacted using RDT (Sixth Sense). If the machine can be contacted using RDT,
the machine modem and software are OK. If the machine cannot be contacted, use the
21-A RAP to diagnose.
Machine Modem Problem - Finally, the machine modem may have failed. Ensure the
machine can be contacted using RDT (Sixth Sense). If the machine can be contacted
using RDT, the machine modem and software are OK. If fails, use the 21-A RAP to diagnose.
21-308, 21-708
May 2003
2-714
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 21-712, indicates there was no carrier after the host answered.
Fault Code, 21-716, indicates there was no login packet after a connection.
Machine Modem Problem - The machine modem may have failed. Ensure the machine
can be contacted using RDT (Sixth Sense). If the machine can be contacted using RDT,
the machine modem and software are OK. If the machine cannot be contacted, use the
21-A RAP to diagnose.
2.
Configuration Problems - If Auto-billing has never previously been installed and working
on this machine, or there has recently been a change in the Auto-billing configuration, the
configuration may be incorrect. Enter [RDT tab , RDT Configuration]. Check the following:
3.
a.
Select [Auto-Billing Setup]. Ensure the Direct Dial Phone Number is correct (including Area Code).
b.
Another common problem is in [Dialing Setup]. Ensure the Dial-out Prefix is correct.
If a number is required to reach an outside line (ie. 9,), that should be in the Dial-out
Prefix.
c.
The machine phone number must also be entered for Dial-out to work. Include 1 and
area code.
d.
If the machine is on a phone share device, another device may be using the line.
Determine if another device is blocking access for the machine to dial out.
e.
f.
Use the Auto-Billing Host Test to check the ability to connect to the host. Select
[Start].
Host Problem - The Host may be unavailable. If possible, dial the host from a phone
using the same parameters entered in the Auto-Billing Setup (e.g. 9, 18887787012). See
if a modem answers. More than 2 rings indicates a host problem. If a modem does
answer, the Host is probably OK and the problem is on the machine. Go to next item.
2.
Machine Modem Problem - The machine modem may have failed. Ensure the machine
can be contacted using RDT (Sixth Sense). If the machine can be contacted using RDT,
the machine modem and software are OK. If the machine cannot be contacted, use the
21-A RAP to diagnose.
Host Problem - The Host may be unavailable. If possible, dial the host from a phone
using the same parameters entered in the Auto-Billing Setup (e.g. 9, 18887787012). See
if a modem answers. More than 2 rings indicates a host problem. If a modem does
answer, the Host is probably OK and the problem is on the machine. Go to next item.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-715
21-712, 21-716/720
Fault Code, 21-724, indicates there was a lost session after a login.
Fault Code, 21-728, indicates the modem failed to disconnect from the phone line.
Possible noisy phone line problem. Using a handset, often noise can be heard. If possible try
this and notify the customer if noise is heard. See if another phone line is available to test. If
another phone line is successful, there may be a problem with the original line. Inform the customer.
Ensure the Accessory PWB is seated correctly. If OK, replace the Accessory PWB PL 1.4A
Item 4
21-724, 21-728
May 2003
2-716
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 21-736, indicates there has been a protocol transmission failure.
If this fault has been occurring and there have been problems connecting to the machine,
check for a possible phone line problem. See if another line is available to test.
1.
2.
Host Problem - The Host may be unavailable. If possible, dial the host from a phone
using the same parameters entered in the Auto-Billing Setup (e.g. 9, 18887787012). See
if a modem answers. More than 2 rings indicates a host problem. If a modem does
answer, the Host is probably OK and the problem is on the machine. Go to next item.
If no phone line problems are occurring, ensure the Accessory PWB is seated correctly. If OK,
replace the Accessory PWB PL 1.4A Item 4
Machine Modem Problem - The machine modem may have failed. Ensure the machine
can be contacted using RDT (Sixth Sense). If the machine can be contacted using RDT,
the machine modem and software are OK. If the machine cannot be contacted, use the
21-A RAP to diagnose.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-717
21-732, 21-736
21-740
May 2003
2-718
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 22-300.04, occurs when the system is unable to find the scheduling table. The
machine will attempt to automatically recover from this fault.
Fault Code, 22-300.05, occurs when the system does not receive an image complete status
from the video system. The job must be deleted from the queue to recover from this fault.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention. This fault can be caused by opening the Front Door or the HCF
before the machine has completely cycled out.
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If the problem continues, change the job parameters in some way to work around the
problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
If this fault is causing a problem for the customer, or is occurring at a high rate, clean the
DADF Exit/Invert Sensor.
If this fault occurs in manual platen mode and a sheet is printed that is scrogged, it may
be related to certain combinations of image shift, edge erase, and mag. The problem may
be alleviated by changing edge erase back to default.
If the fault occurs in DADF mode and a sheet is printed that is scrogged, all black, or partially black, it may be an electrical noise problem.
Check the following:
1.
Ensure that the Scanner Top Frame is grounded properly. Check continuity from the
Scanner Top Frame to the machine frame. If there is a problem, check the Left front
mounting screw of the Scanner Base. Make sure it is present and the metal bracket
carries ground to the Scanner Top Frame.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Check for a good connection in connectors P95 and P96 on the Prefuser Transport,
If the problem continues, change the job parameters in some way to work around the
problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
PL 6.1A Item 1.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-719
22-300.04, 22-300.05
Ground Wire
(violet)
Ground Wire
(violet wire)
22-300.05
May 2003
2-720
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Ground Wire
(violet)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-721
22-300.05
Check Connections
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If the problem continues, change the job parameters in some way to work around the
problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
If the problem continues, replace the ROS Video Cable PL 1.2A Item 4
22-300.05, 22-300.10
May 2003
2-722
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 22-306.10, occurs when the machine determines it must reset to avoid a real time
clock overflow.
Fault Code, 22-301.04, occurs when the system cannot find the initial state for initial scheduling offset. The machine will attempt to automatically recover from this fault.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If the problem continues, change the job parameters in some way to work around the
problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-723
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
22-300.16, 22-301.04
Fault Code, 22-301.05, occurs when the system cannot make scan resources available. The
job must be deleted from the queue to recover from this fault.
Fault Code, 22-302.04, occurs when the system cannot find a transition for the current state.
The machine will attempt to automatically recover from this fault.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
22-301.05, 22-302.04
May 2003
2-724
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 22-303.04, occurs when the system detects an invalid shifted proposal. The
machine will attempt to automatically recover from this fault.
Fault Code, 22-303.05, occurs when documents fed into the DADF are longer or shorter (in the
feed direction) by more than 50mm (approximately 2 inches) than the length inferred by the
control system.
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
The "inferred" length of the document is determined by the DADF Side Guides and sideguide switches.
The "actual" length of the document is determined by the time over the Start of Scan sensor in the DADF paper path as the document is fed.
When this fault occurs, the job is automatically deleted by the system, and the following message is displayed on the UI:
"The job was deleted because a document was larger than expected. Try flattening the
document and scan it through the Document Feeder or scan it from the Document Glass".
This message can be confusing to the operator and to the Service Engineer, because there are
many other causes of this fault in addition to folded originals.
2.
The stack of originals contains at least one original that is at least 50mm (2 inches)
smaller than the others, and the user didn't select 'Mixed Size Originals'.
NOTE: This fault does not occur when the user selects "Mixed Size Originals".
3.
The DADF feeds multiple originals in a shingle feed (multiple feed) condition, or feeds the
originals too slowly or quickly in the CVT region, or does not feed at all.
This problem is often caused by operator induced problems or problems with the originals.
Check the following:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The operator is not holding up the trail edge of an original after Start is pressed
Document Loaded Sensor is not being actuated by the operator's hand or by an object
being placed on the uncovered switch
When using mixed size originals, ensure the "Mixed Size Originals" feature is selected
Originals are stacked properly when placed in the DADF Input Tray
Originals are not folded (especially folds to let the original be placed in an envelope)
(Note: this is the condition that should be detected by the fault)
Check if originals are 'non-standard sizes' for the particular Market Region DADF zone
Zone of DADF has been setup as a 'non-standard size' and a 'standard size' document is
fed
May 2003
2-725
22-303.04, 22-303.05
If the problem is not caused by the operability or original problems, check/perform the following:
There may be a problem with the feeding of originals. Multi feeding, misfeeding can contribute to this problem. If not already done, replace the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge
PL 2.2 Item 4.
Problems with the CVT drive could cause this fault. Check for any 05-XXX faults and go to
the pertinent RAP.
Intermittent sensors in the document size sensing function. Go to the 05-E Document
Size Sensing RAP
In many cases, the same zone for a USCO machine may define a different size than for a XL
machine. Running a foreign size document not expected for the market region can cause the
fault. For example, if a customer with a machine setup for the USCO market region tried to run
B4 paper, which is 257mm x 364mm, the system will infer it is 11 x 17" (279mm x 432mm).
Since the B4 paper is more than 2" shorter than the expected 11 x 17", a 22-303.05 fault will be
declared.
The user can see what size is inferred for a zone by using the 'Document Scanner Size Sensing' Tool and can redefine the default size of the zone using the same tool. Refer to the Reference Guide, under Document Scanner Size Sensing. This is helpful when a multinational
company often copies documents from another market region. Go to Tools, System Settings,
Document Scanner Size Sensing to locate the Document Scanner Size Sensing Tool. Once
the size is redefined, the job can be run with no faults.
The user can receive an output copy in which the image is only partially reproduced. When the
scanner scans an original whose size is greater than expected, it raises a status 22-303.05 and
deletes the job. If this happens on a single sheet job, an output sheet maybe produced with a
truncated (cut-off) image. The above scenario can occur due to a folded/ripped original, or by
the customer holding the trail edge of the input document such that it does not engage the correct Document Feeder sensors.
Table 1 Default Document Sizes for Each Market Region Based on Actuation of the Input Tray Switches
Side Guide
Sensor 2 (Q6)
Side Guide
Sensor 1 (Q7)
Not Actuated
Not Actuated
Not Actuated
Not Actuated
A5 SEF
A5 SEF
Not Actuated
Not Actuated
Actuated
Not Actuated
B5 SEF
B5 SEF
ACO
XL
FX Domestic &
APO
Not Actuated
Not Actuated
Actuated
Actuated
B5 SEF
B5 SEF
Not Actuated
Not Actuated
Not Actuated
Actuated
B5 SEF
B5 SEF
Actuated
Not Actuated
Not Actuated
Not Actuated
A5 LEF
A5 LEF
Actuated
Not Actuated
Actuated
Not Actuated
8.5 x 11 SEF
8.5 x 11 SEF
A4 SEF
A5 LEF
Actuated
Not Actuated
Actuated
Actuated
8.5 x 14
215 x 330mm
215 x 330mm
8.5 x 14
Actuated
Not Actuated
Not Actuated
Actuated
8.5 x 14
215 x 330mm
215 x 330mm
8.5 x 14
Actuated
Actuated
Not Actuated
Not Actuated
8.5 x 11 LEF
8.5 x 11 LEF
8.5 x 11 LEF
B5 LEF
Actuated
Actuated
Actuated
Not Actuated
8.5 x 11 LEF
8.5 x 11 LEF
8.5 x 11 LEF
B5 LEF
Actuated
Actuated
Actuated
Actuated
11 x 17 SEF
11 x 17 SEF
B4 SEF
B4 SEF
Actuated
Actuated
Not Actuated
Actuated
11 x 17 SEF
11 x 17 SEF
B4 SEF
B4 SEF
Not Actuated
Actuated
Not Actuated
Not Actuated
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
Not Actuated
Actuated
Actuated
Not Actuated
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
Not Actuated
Actuated
Actuated
Actuated
A3 SEF
A3 SEF
A3 SEF
A3 SEF
Not Actuated
Actuated
Not Actuated
Actuated
A3 SEF
A3 SEF
A3 SEF
A3 SEF
22-303.05
May 2003
2-726
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 22-304.04, occurs when the system detects an missing schedule. The machine
will attempt to automatically recover from this fault.
Fault Code, 22-305.04, occurs when the system detects a scheduling dead cycle. The machine
will attempt to automatically recover from this fault.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
Fault Code, 22-306.04, occurs when the system detects no proposal found for rejection. The
machine will attempt to automatically recover from this fault.
Fault Code, 22-307.04, occurs when the system cannot find a reschedule point for rejection.
The machine will attempt to automatically recover from this fault.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-727
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
Fault Code, 22-308.04, occurs when the system cannot find a execution state error for rejection. The machine will attempt to automatically recover from this fault.
Fault Code, 22-309.04, occurs when the system received consecutive no accepts from a module. The machine will attempt to automatically recover from this fault.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If any 09-318, 09-330, or 09-334 faults occur about the same time, go the appropriate
RAP
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
22-308.04, 22-309.04
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
May 2003
2-728
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 22-310.04, occurs when the system detected pages received from Extended Job
Service are out of sequence. The status must be cleared at the UI Display Panel.
Fault Code, 22-311.04, occurs when the sequencer did not respond with proposal within the
required time. The machine will attempt to automatically recover from this fault.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
If this fault is occurring during a Network Scanning job, go to the 16-785.19 RAP.
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-729
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
22-310.04, 22-311.04
Fault Code, 22-312.04, occurs when the system cannot find data for the current sync. The
machine will attempt to automatically recover from this fault.
Fault Code, 22-313.04, occurs when no sync was received within the specified time. The status must be cleared at the UI Display Panel.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
22-312.04, 22-313.04
May 2003
2-730
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 22-314.04, occurs when a module registration message was received beyond the
required time window. The machine will attempt to automatically recover from this fault.
Fault Code, 22-315.04, occurs when one or more modules did not respond with a completion
message. The machine will attempt to automatically recover from this fault.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-731
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
22-314.04, 22-315.04
Fault Code, 22-316.04, occurs when the job requires a paper tray that does not exist.
Fault Code, 22-317.04, occurs when the job requires a IOT capability that does not exist.
The job is calling for a paper that is not available. The customer should ensure that the proper
paper is available or change the job so it can use available paper in an existing paper tray.
22-316.04, 22-317.04
May 2003
2-732
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
Go to the fault log, [Faults/Counters tab , Faults]. Check for faults that occur just previous
to the 22-319.04 and troubleshoot those faults.
May 2003
2-733
22-318.04, 22-319.04
Fault Code, 22-330, indicates that a List Jobs Request Timed Out. The specific codes and
extensions are as follows:
Fault Code, 22-700.04, occurs when one or more modules did not respond with a proposal
within the required time window.
22-330.01 - List Jobs request timed out between the Main Control PWB and the UI
22-330.02 - List Jobs request timed out between the Main Control PWB and the ESS Print
Service
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
22-330.03 - List Jobs request timed out between the Main Control PWB and the Scan to
File Service
22-330.04 - List Jobs request timed out between the Main Control PWB and the Scan to
Fax Service
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
22-330.05 - List Jobs request timed out between the Queue Utility and the DC Job Service
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
Go to the fault log, [Faults/Counters tab , Faults]. Check for faults that occur just previous
to the 22-330.xx and troubleshoot those faults.
22-330.xx, 22-700.04
May 2003
2-734
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 22-701.04, occurs when a module completion message was received after the IOT
returned to standby.
Fault Code, 22-750.04, occurs when an output device configuration mismatch was detected.
This fault, if it happens, is usually a transitory event and the machine will recover without customer or CSE intervention.
1.
If there is a 22-757.04 present in the Last 40 faults, go to that RAP (22-757.04 RAP)
2.
This fault may be due to a configuration change that has not been accepted. Ensure that
the customer is correctly identifying the correct configuration when the machine prompts
the customer to accept or not accept the present configuration. When connected to the
machine, if a System Configuration Error window appears that describes platform configuration, compare the detected configuration to the programmed configuration. If the
detected configuration is correct, accept it and the fault should clear.
If the fault is not causing a problem for the customer, ignore it.
If not already attempted, switch the machine power off/on and see if the problem clears.
If the problem continues, try to change the job parameters in some way to work around
the problem. Split the job into smaller segments or change the options.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
3.
4.
Check P/J4 and P/J11 on the Distribution PWB. Ensure that they are connected properly.
Check for any wire or connector damage or pulled out pins.
5.
Enter [Configuration tab , System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and
change the "Install Phase" to [Manufacturing]. Select [OK]. Switch off the machine power,
then switch it back on. When the machine is ready, enter [Configuration tab , System,
Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and change the "Install Phase" to [Install
Complete]. Switch off the machine power, then switch it back on. When complete, the
machine will recognize the proper output device configuration and the fault will clear.
May 2003
2-735
22-701.04, 22-750.04
2.
3.
Enter [Configuration tab , System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and
change the "Install Phase" to [Manufacturing]. Select [OK]. Switch off the machine power,
then switch it back on. When the machine is ready, enter [Configuration tab , System,
Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and change the "Install Phase" to [Install
Complete]. Switch off the machine power, then switch it back on. When complete, the
machine will recognize the proper Accessory PWB configuration and the fault will clear.
22-750.17, 22-751.04
Fault Code, 22-751.04, occurs when a Bypass Tray (SMH) or HCF configuration mismatch
was detected. Either one of these units was detected when it was not expected, or one of
these units was not detected when the machine configuration indicates it should be present.
If there is a 22-757.04 present in the Last 40 faults, go to that RAP (22-757.04 RAP)
2.
This fault may be due to a configuration change that has not been accepted. Ensure that
the customer is correctly identifying the correct configuration when the machine prompts
the customer to accept or not accept the present configuration. When connected to the
machine, if a System Configuration Error window appears that describes platform configuration, compare the detected configuration to the programmed configuration. If the
detected configuration is correct, accept it and the fault should clear.
3.
4.
Enter [Configuration tab , System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and
change the "Install Phase" to [Manufacturing]. Select [OK]. Switch off the machine power,
then switch it back on. When the machine is ready, enter [Configuration tab , System,
Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and change the "Install Phase" to [Install
Complete]. Switch off the machine power, then switch it back on. When complete, the
machine will recognize the proper SMH/HCF configuration and the fault will clear.
May 2003
2-736
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 22-751.17, occurs when an ESS configuration mismatch was detected.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-737
22-751.17, 22-752.17
Fault Code, 22-754.17, occurs when an UI configuration mismatch was detected. The type of
UI detected does not match the configuration of the machine stored in NVM.
Fault Code, 22-755.17, occurs when a RDT configuration mismatch was detected. The
machine was configured for RDT but no dial tone is sensed. May occur with a 22-750.17 if
there is an Accessory PWB problem.
1.
This fault should not normally occur. Only one type UI is presently used. Ensure that the
UI is connected properly.
2.
Enter [Configuration tab , System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and
change the "Install Phase" to [Manufacturing]. Select [OK]. Switch off the machine power,
then switch it back on. When the machine is ready, enter [Configuration tab , System,
Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and change the "Install Phase" to [Install
Complete]. Switch off the machine power, then switch it back on. When complete, the
machine will recognize the proper UI configuration and the fault will clear.
22-754.17, 22-755.17
If occurring on a machine which has not had RDT enabled or working, and now a dial tone
is sensed, the configuration needs to be confirmed.
Determine the status of the RDT Phone line. Ensure that it is connected properly to the
machine. If disconnected, the machine will have to be switched off/on, to detect the new
configuration. Confirm the new configuration when prompted.
NOTE: This item is only relevant on XE machines and is not displayed when connected to nonXE machines.
On XE machines, check the DIP Switch settings on the Accessory PWB. Refer to Table 1
for the proper switch settings for the appropriate country.
Verify that the phone line is active. Enter [RDT tab , RDT Dial Tone Test]. Select [Start]. If
the test fails, the phone line has no dial tone. Alternately, connect the PWS to the phone
line and attempt to dial out with another communications application (ie. Call Handling,
Worldgroup, etc.) Inform the customer about the not functioning phone line, if that is the
case. If the phone line is OK, replace the Accessory PWB PL 1.4A Item 4.
Check the fault counters for instances of any 21-XXX faults. Select [Fault Counters]. Filter
by Chain 21. Enter [Faults/Counters tab , Faults]. If any 21-XXX faults are occurring, go
to the appropriate RAP.
May 2003
2-738
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fault Code, 22-756.17, occurs when a Scanner configuration mismatch was detected. A Scanner is detected when the configuration of the machine stored in NVM does not include a Scanner, or no Scanner is detected when the machine configuration indicates that there should be a
Scanner.
Fault Code, 22-757.04, occurs when a mismatch occurs with the machine speed configuration.
A 55ppm machine is expected but a 65ppm or 40ppm machine is sensed, a 40ppm machine is
expected, but 55ppm is enabled, or a 65ppm machine is expected and a 55ppm or 40ppm
machine is sensed.
Determine if the machine is being upgraded from an LP to an ST model. The Install Wizard may not have completed properly. If a new configuration is being sensed, it needs to
be accepted to continue. The Install Wizard can also be run to correct the configuration.
All of the connections for the scanner may not have been made properly. Check the connections from the Scanner to the IOT.
Enter [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System], change the "Install
Phase" to [Manufacturing], then select [OK]. Select [Main Contol], change the "Install
Phase" to [Manufacturing], then select [OK]. Switch off the machine power, then switch it
back on.
When the machine is ready, enter [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System], change the "Install Phase" to [Install Complete], then select [OK]. Select [Main Contol], change the "Install Phase" to [Install Complete], then select [OK].
In [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests], select [IOT] [Type 1], then [Start].
Observe the test results. The Type 1 test passed.
Y
N
Observe the fault display in the IIOC Self-Test screen. An 03-808 fault is detected.
Y
N
If some other fault is detected, make a note and evaluate the faults effect on other
machine problems that might be occurring. If the problem continues, replace the
IIOC PWB W25A1 PL 1.5 Item 2.
Go to the 03-808 RAP.
Switch off the machine power, then switch it back on. When complete, the machine will
recognize the proper Scanner configuration and the fault will clear.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-739
22-756.17, 22-757.04
22-757.04
May 2003
2-740
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Go to Standby Noise Checkout Procedure.
(27Jun2001)
There is an audible noise when the machine is in stand-by or when the machine is operating.
Initial Actions
If the noise appears to be in the Document Feeder, the Scanner, or in one of the output
devices, refer to the appropriate RAP listed below.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], [Output On],
[Registration Clutch], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Developer Drive Motor and the Registration Clutch are energized. The noise occurs when the Developer Drive Motor and Registration Clutch
are energized.
Y
N
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [All Outputs Off], [Fuser Drive
Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Fuser Drive Motor is energized. The
noise
occurs
when the Fuser Drive Motor is energized.
Y
N
Ensure the Fuser Drive Motor is still energized in Component Control. In Component Control, select [Inverter Reverse Drive Solenoid] then [Output On].
Listen for noise when the Inverter Reverse Drive Solenoid is energized. The
noise occurs when the Inverter Reverse Drive Solenoid is energized.
Y
N
Go to PFT and Xerographic Checkout Procedure.
Check the Fuser Fan/Duct PL 9.1 Item 5. The Fuser Fan/Duct is mounted correctly and is free from obstructions.
Y
N
Ensure that the Fuser Fan/Duct is mounted correctly and is free from obstructions.
Replace the Fuser Fan/Duct PL 9.1 Item 5, if necessary.
B
May 2003
2-741
D
Status Indicator RAPs
OF-1
D
Replace the Fuser Fan/Duct PL 9.1 Item 5.
F
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Do the following:
Replace the Bypass Tray Assembly PL 4.3 Item 1 and reset the Life Counter for the
Tray 5 Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Select [Xerographic Blower], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component
Control].
Listen for noise when the Xerographic Blower is energized. The noise occurs with the
Xerographic Module removed.
Y
N
Check for mechanical interference between the Xerographic Module and the Xerographic Blower PL 9.1 Item 11.
Check the mounting of the Xerographic Blower.
If the Xerographic Blower is mounted securely, replace the Xerographic Blower PL 9.1
Item 11.
Replace the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.2B Item 6,in Tray 6 and reset
the Life Counter for the Tray 6 Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
The noise occurs after replacing the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Switch the power [Off]. Disconnect the Scanner Cooling Fan, PL 9.1 Item 10, and switch the
power [On].
The noise occurs with the Scanner Cooling Fan disconnected.
Y
N
Replace the Scanner Cooling Fan PL 9.1 Item 10.
Press the Up/Down button on Tray 6 to lower Tray 6, then press the Up/Down
button to raise Tray 6.
The noise occurs when Tray 6 is driving up or down.
Y
N
Check the following for wear, damage, or contamination:
Do the following:
Switch the power [Off].
Disconnect the PWB Cooling Fan/Duct, PL 9.1 Item 3, and switch the power [On].
Do the following:
Disconnect the LVPS Cooling Fan/Duct, PL 9.1 Item 2, and switch the power [On].
Replace the HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly PL 4.2A Item 1 and reset the Life
Counter for the Tray 5 and Tray 6 Paper Feed Roll Cartridges. Refer to GP6.
Replace the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.3 Item 2, in Tray 5 and reset the Life
Counter for the Tray 5 Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Run the job to verify the problem is resolved. The noise continues after replacing
the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
OF-1
Replace the HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly PL 4.2A Item 1 and reset the Life Counter
for the Tray 5 Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Replace the HCF Bypass Tray Feed Motor PL 4.2B Item 8.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Trays], [Tray X Nudger Solenoid], then [Output On],
for the IOT Paper Tray that is causing the noise. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
May 2003
2-742
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
G
Listen for noise when the Tray X Nudger Solenoid is energized. The noise occurs when the
Nudger Solenoid is energized.
Y
N
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Trays], [All Outputs Off], [Tray X Feed Motor],
then [Output On] for the IOT Paper Tray that is causing the noise. Enter [Copier Sys tab ,
Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Tray X Feed Motor is energized. The noise occurs when the
Feed Motor is energized.
Y
N
Do the following:
In Component Control. Select [IOT Paper Trays], select [All Outputs Off].
In Component Control, select [Tray X Elevator Motor] then [Output On], for the
IOT Paper Tray that is causing the noise. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component
Control].
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Trays], select [All Outputs Off].
In Component Control, select [Tray X Feed Motor], then [Output On], for the IOT
Paper Tray that is causing the noise. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
N
Replace the Paper Tray Assembly PL 4.1A Item 1.
Also reset the Life Counter for Tray X Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
Listen for noise when the Tray X Elevator Motor is energized. The noise occurs
when the Tray Elevator Motor is energized.
Y
N
Check the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. The Paper Feed Roll Cartridge is in
the correct position.
Y
N
Reseat the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge in the correct position.
If the problem continues, replace the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.1A
Item 3 and reset the Life Counter for Tray X Paper Feed Roll Cartridge.
Refer to GP6.
Replace the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.1A Item 3 and reset the Life
Counter for Tray X Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Refer to GP6.
If the problem continues, replace the Paper Tray assembly PL 4.1A Item 3.
Listen for noise when the Tray X Feed Motor is energized. The noise occurs when the
Feed Motor is energized with the tray pulled out.
Y
N
Do the following:
Check the position of the Developer Drive Alignment Arm. It should be resting
against the SCAM PWB support bracket and not attached to the locating shaft for
the Developer drive.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Trays], select [All Outputs Off].
Do the following:
Swap a known good tray for the tray which was pulled out. Push the substitute
tray fully in.
To ensure the Developer Gear Bracket meshes correctly with the Developer Housing
drive gear, refer to the Replacement procedure in REP 04-1, then return here.
In Component Control, select [Tray X Feed Motor], then [Output On], for the
IOT Paper Tray position which was causing the noise. Enter [Copier Sys tab ,
Component Control].
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Tray X Feed Motor is energized. The
noise
when the Feed Motor is energized with the substitute tray installed.
G H
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
occurs
Listen for noise when the Developer Drive Motor is energized. The noise occurs after
aligning the Developer Gear Bracket to the Developer Housing drive gear.
I
May 2003
2-743
OF-1
I
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
K
N
Remove the source of the contamination.
Determine the Upper Paper Guide that is causing the noise by replacing each
Upper Paper Guide one at a time until the noise occurs. Replace the Upper
Guide assembly PL 4.1A Item 6 causing the noise.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Developer Drive Motor is energized. The noise occurs with
the Developer Drive Belt removed.
Y
N
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then
[Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Developer Drive Motor is energized. The noise occurs with
the Duplex Transport removed
Y
N
Inspect Helical Drive Gear PL 6.1B Item 3 for wear and damage.
The Helical Drive Gear is worn or damaged.
Y
N
Check the components on the Left Drive Plate Assembly PL 6.1B Item 21, for
wear and damage. Replace the Duplex Transport PL 6.1A Item 2, if necessary.
Listen for noise when the Developer Drive Motor is energized. The noise occurs
with the Developer Housing removed.
Y
N
Replace the Developer Housing PL 5.1B Item 1.
Do the following:
Check the 50 tooth Gear PL 7.1 Item 10 and the 60 tooth Gear PL 7.1 Item 11.
Remove the Vertical Transport (REP 08-1) and switch the power [On].
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Developer Drive Motor is energized. The noise occurs with
the Vertical Transport removed.
Y
N
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Developer Drive Motor], then
[Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
OF-1
Listen for noise when the Developer Drive Motor is energized. The noise occurs
with the Upper Paper Guides removed.
Y
N
Check the idlers on the Upper Paper Guides for contamination. The idlers on
the Upper Paper Guides are free from contamination.
I
J
K
Status Indicator RAPs
Cheat the Right Side Interlock Switch, and switch the power [On].
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Fuser Drive Motor is energized. The noise occurs with the OCT
removed.
Y
N
Go to 12-F OCT Noise RAP.
L
May 2003
2-744
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
L
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Fuser Drive Motor is energized. The noise occurs when the
Fuser Drive Motor is energized and the Prefuser Transport is removed.
Y
N
Replace the Prefuser Transport PL 6.1A Item 1.
Do the following:
Ensure the Decurler Drive Belt has the correct tension. Refer to the replacement in REP
04-5.
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Fuser Module is removed and the Fuser Drive Motor is energized.
The noise occurs with the Fuser Module removed.
Y
N
Check the Fuser Drive Gear for wear, damage, or excessive radial play on the shaft.
The Fuser Drive Gear is damaged, or there is excessive radial play on the shaft.
Y
N
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Fuser Drive Motor is energized. The noise occurs with
the Inverter removed.
Y
N
Check the mounting post on the rear of the Inverter frame. Refer to Figure 2.
The mounting post on Inverter frame is broken.
Y
N
Replace the Inverter PL 6.2A Item 2.
Install the Inverter Repair Kit PL 6.2B Item 2 .
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
Install the Fuser Drive Gear Kit PL 7.1 Item 15.
If the problem continues, replace the Fuser Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 3.
Do the following:
Listen for noise when the Fuser Drive Motor is energized. The noise occurs.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Fuser Drive Motor is energized. The noise occurs with the
Decurler Drive Belt removed.
Y
N
Replace the Decurler/OCT Drive Bracket PL 7.1 Item 4.
Replace the Fuser Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 3.
Carefully undock the Finisher from the IOT (Do not disconnect the Finisher connector).
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Fuser Drive Motor is energized. The noise occurs when the
Fuser Drive Motor is energized and the Prefuser Transport is removed.
Y
N
Replace the Prefuser Transport PL 6.1A Item 1.
Do the following:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-745
OF-1
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Fuser Module is removed and the Fuser Drive Motor is energized.
The noise occurs with the Fuser Module removed.
Y
N
Check the Fuser Drive Gear for wear, damage, or excessive radial play on the shaft.
The Fuser Drive Gear is worn, damaged, or there is excessive radial play on the
shaft.
Y
N
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Fuser Drive Motor is energized. The noise occurs with
the Inverter removed.
Y
N
Check the mounting post on the rear of the Inverter frame. Refer to Figure 2.
The mounting post on Inverter frame is broken.
Y
N
Replace the Inverter PL 6.2A Item 2.
Install the Inverter Repair Kit PL 6.2B Item 2.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Do the following:
Ensure the Decurler Drive Belt has the correct tension. Refer to the replacement in REP
04-5
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output
On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
OF-1
Do the following:
Do the following:
Check for the installation of a Decurler (a Decurler is required on machines with an OCT). A
Decurler is installed.
Y
N
Check the IOT for a Decurler Drive Belt.
A Decurler Drive Belt is installed
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 3.
M
Status Indicator RAPs
Listen for noise when the Fuser Drive Motor is energized. The noise occurs.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
N
Do not reinstall the Decurler Drive Belt. It is not required on machines without a
Decurler.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Drive Motor], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Fuser Drive Motor is energized. The noise occurs with the
Decurler Drive Belt removed.
Y
N
Replace the Decurler/OCT Drive Bracket PL 7.1 Item 4.
Replace the Fuser Drive Motor PL 7.1 Item 3.
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [PFT Vacuum Fan], then [Output On]. Enter
[Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the PFT Vacuum Fan is energized. The noise occurs when the PFT
Fan is energized.
May 2003
2-746
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
N
CAUTION
Energize the Toner Bottle Motor in Component Control only long enough to determine
whether or not the noise is being caused by the Toner Bottle Motor.
Belt Tensioner
Do the following:
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [All Outputs Off], [IOT General],
[Toner Bottle Motor], [Output On], and [All Outputs Off].
In Component Control, select [IOT General] [Toner Dispense Motor], select [Output
On]. Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
Listen for noise when the Toner Bottle Motor is energized and when the Toner Dispense
Motor is energized. The noise occurs when the Toner Bottle Motor or the Toner Dispense Motor is energized.
Y
N
Developer
Drive Belt
Developer Gear
Bracket
Developer Drive
Alignment Arm
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-747
OF-1
Initial Actions
If damage is occurring from a single paper tray, do the following:
Flip the ream of paper in the tray causing the problem and rerun the job.
Load a new ream of paper in the tray causing the problem and rerun the job.
If the damage occurs after performing the above actions, follow the procedure in the RAP.
Remove then reinstall the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.2B Item 6 in
Tray 5.
If the damage is occurring on paper fed from Tray 6 only, do the following.
Check for damage after performing each action listed.
Remove then reinstall the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.2B Item 6 in
Tray 6.
The paper path between the Registration Transport Assembly and the HCF/
Duplex Baffle for obstructions.
The surface of the HCF Paper Handling Baffle PL 4.2B Item 2 for nicks or contamination.
Do the following:
Ensure the HCF/Duplex Baffle PL 6.1B Item 8, is seated correctly and is free from
damage.
A
Status Indicator RAPs
OF-1, OF-2
May 2003
2-748
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
If the problem continues, replace the Registration Transport Assembly PL 4.1A Item 8.
N
Replace the Duplex Transport PL 6.1A Item 2.
Remove the output device, cheat the Right Side Interlock Switch, and switch the
power [On].
The Feed/Reverse Roll Idler PL 6.3 Item 14 for burrs and ensure it is seated
correctly.
When the Configuration Details screen is displayed, select [Yes], to confirm there is
no output device installed.
The Inverter Exit Roll Idler PL 6.3 Item 14 for burrs and ensure it is seated correctly.
In [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], select [Blank Page] and Quantity [5].
Select [Options]. In the Options dialog box, select [Face Up] and [OK].
The Guide Blade and the rollers on the TAG 279 Decurler for damage.
NOTE: A Guide Blade is installed on machines equipped with a Multi-Function
Finisher.
The Inverter Exit Roll PL 6.3 Item 7, for damage and contamination.
Replace the Inverter PL 6.2A Item 2, if necessary.
The damage occurs on paper fed from all 4 IOT paper trays.
Y
N
Move the Paper Tray the damage is occurring from to another position. Program a job to
feed paper from the tray in its new position.
Damage occurs on paper fed from the tray in its new position.
Y
N
Return the Paper Tray to its original position.
Make the following checks on the components adjacent to the Paper Tray:
Check for obstructions between the Upper Guide PL 4.1A Item 14 and the
Lower Guide PL 4.1A Item 5.
Check the idlers on the Upper Guide PL 4.1A Item 14, for burrs and ensure
they are seated correctly.
A component in the Paper Tray is causing damage. Do the following, checking for damage after performing each action listed.
Remove then reinstall the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 4.1A Item 3.
Check the Paper Tray Feed Head PL 4.1A Item 17, for damage and obstructions.
If the problem continues, replace the Paper Tray Assembly PL 4.1A Item 1.
Do the following:
Select [Options]. In the Options dialog box, select [Face Down], [Uncollated],
and [OK].
Check the paper path at the top of the Vertical Transport for obstructions.
Ensure the Vertical Transport is mounted correctly to the Registration Transport Assembly. Refer to REP 08-1.
Check the Vertical Transport PL 4.1A Item 7, for burrs and obstructions.
Run the five copies and check them for the copy damage. The
with Simplex, Face Down, and Uncollated selected.
B
C
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
damage
occurs
May 2003
2-749
OF-2
Check the idlers on the Upper Guide - Tray 1 PL 4.1A Item 14 (Tray 1), for burrs and
ensure they are seated correctly.
OF-2
May 2003
2-750
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P5
P4
Decurler Home Sensor
P3
Guide Blade
Decurler Position
Sensor
Decurler Gate
Solenoid
P137
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-751
OF-2
Check the position of the Stapler Head. The Convenience Stapler remains stuck in the
down (clinched or stapled) position.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
(18Dec2000)
The Convenience Stapler is exhibiting one or more of the following problems:
Do the following:
The Green LED is not illuminated (indicating the stapler not ready).
The Red LED is illuminated (indicating an out of staples condition or a staple jam).
Using the corner of a stack of 10 sheets of paper, push the Stapler Cycle Switch Actuator
to actuate the Stapler Cycle Switch.
While keeping the Stapler Cycle Switch actuated, switch off the Convenience Stapler
power switch.
Still keeping the Stapler Cycle Switch actuated, switch on the Convenience Stapler power
switch.
Initial Actions
Ensure the power switch on the back of the Convenience Stapler is in the on position.
Ensure the Convenience Stapler Harness is connected securely to the Convenience Stapler.
Action
The Stapler Head of the ConveGo to the Stapler Head Checkout Procedure.
nience Stapler is stuck in the down
(clinched or stapled) position.
The green LED is not illuminated
when the Convenience Stapler
Top Cover is closed and the Staple
Cartridge is present.
Check the position of the Stapler Head. The Convenience Stapler remains stuck in the
down (clinched or stapled) position.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the Convenience Stapler PWB PL 8.1 Item 15.
If the problem continues, replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly PL 8.1 Item 4.
CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to the machine electronics, ensure the Convenience Stapler connector P109 does not come in contact with the machine
frame, the card cage, or electrical components.
Remove the IOT Upper Rear Cover to gain access to P/J87. Measure the
voltage between P87-2 (-) and P87-1 (+).
The voltage is +24 VDC.
Do the following:
Switch off the Convenience Stapler power switch located on the back of the Convenience
Stapler.
OF-3
May 2003
2-752
D
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Y
N
Go to Flag 2 on Figure 2. Check the wires for an open circuit. Ensure
the wires are seated securely into the IDC connector P/J87. Repair
as required.
The Convenience Stapler operates correctly after reinstalling the Staple Cartridge.
Y
N
Replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly PL 8.1 Item 4.
Do the following:
Check the Red LED on the Convenience Stapler. The red LED is illuminated.
Y
N
Replace the Convenience Stapler Internal DC Harness PL 8.1 Item
13.
If the problem continues, replace the Convenience Stapler PWB PL
8.1 Item 15.
Replace the Convenience Stapler Harness PL 1.5 Item 1.
CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to the machine electronics, ensure the Convenience
Stapler connector P109 does not come in contact with the machine frame, the
card cage, or electrical components.
Remove the IOT Upper Rear Cover to gain access to P87/ J87A. Measure the
voltage between P87-2 (-) and P87-1 (+).
The voltage is +24 VDC.
Y
N
Go to Flag 2 on Figure 3. Check the wires between P45A and J87A for
an open circuit.
Do the following:
NOTE: The customer has described the problem as poorly clinched staples or missing staples.
The customer describes the problem as poorly clinched staples.
Y
N
Remove and then reinstall the Staple Cartridge.
The Convenience Stapler operates correctly after reinstalling the Staple Cartridge.
Y
N
The unformed staple roll may be wound too tightly or the Driver Bar may be out of
position.
Do the following:
Check the Red LED on the Convenience Stapler. The red LED is illuminated.
Y
N
Replace the Convenience Stapler Internal DC Harness PL 8.1 Item 13.
If the problem continues, replace the Convenience Stapler PWB PL 8.1
Item 15.
The Convenience Stapler operates correctly after performing the Staple Cartridge Checkout Procedure.
Y
N
Replace the Staple Cartridge and attempt to staple a stack of documents.
The Convenience Stapler operates correctly after replacing the Staple
Cartridge.
Y
N
Replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly PL 8.1 Item 4.
Check the Red LED on the Convenience Stapler. The red LED is illuminated.
Y
N
Remove and the reinstall the Staple Cartridge.
A
E
V0.042
F
May 2003
2-753
H
Status Indicator RAPs
OF-3
H
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Red LED
Green LED
Stapler Cycle
Switch Actuator
OF-3
May 2003
2-754
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-755
OF-3
OF-3
May 2003
2-756
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
(09Jul2001)
Ensure there are no foreign objects or paper preventing the seal on the
Xerographic Module from making contact with the Xerographic Blower.
Indicators of an air flow problem include, increased ozone odor during machine operation,
excessive dirt in the machine, dirt being blown out of the IOT, excessive dirt inside the IOT, no
air flow out of the IOT, repeated premature replacement of the Xerographic Module, buildup of
toner inside the Xerographic Module manifold, or Image Quality problems.
The housing that contains the Xerographic Module dirt filter is cracked.
Y
N
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Fan], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The Fuser Fan energizes in Component Control.
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Fan/Duct PL 9.1 Item 5.
Initial Actions
If there is a burning odor coming from the machine, and the odor is traced to the AC Distribution Panel, replace the AC Distribution Panel PL 1.2A Item 1 (TAG 053).
Check the Fuser Fan/Duct for obstructions and ensure it is correctly mounted.
The Xerographic Blower energizes in Component Control when the Xerographic Module is removed.
Y
N
Replace the Xerographic Blower PL 9.1 Item 11.
Check the Ozone Filter PL 9.1 Item 4. The Ozone Filter is installed and is free
from dirt and contamination.
Y
N
Replace the NOHAD Filter Kit PL 9.1 Item 1, and reset the NOHAD Filter Life
counter. Refer to GP6.
Check the seal on the Xerographic Module. The seal on the Xerographic Module is free from damage and is making contact with the housing of the Xerographic Blower.
Y
N
Check the following:
Do the following:
The Xerographic Blower energizes in Component Control when the Xerographic Module is removed.
Y
N
Replace the Xerographic Blower PL 9.1 Item 11.
there are no foreign objects or paper preventing the seal on the Xerographic Module from making contact with the Xerographic Blower.
The housing that contains the Xerographic Module dirt filter is cracked.
Y
N
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Fan], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The Fuser Fan energizes in Component Control.
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Fan/Duct PL 9.1 Item 5.
Check the seal on the Xerographic Module. The seal on the Xerographic Module
is free from damage and is making contact with the housing of the Xerographic Blower.
Y
N
Do the following:
A
B
V0.042
Check the Fuser fan/Duct for obstructions and ensure it is correctly mounted.
A
May 2003
2-757
E
Status Indicator RAPs
OF-4
E
Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
03-801 RAP.
03-813 RAP.
Replace the PL 9.1 Item 1, and reset the NOHAD Filter Life counter. Refer to GP6.
OF-4
May 2003
2-758
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
OF-5 55 ppm and 65 ppm IOT Odor, Heat And Dirt RAP.
(09Jul2001)
Indicators of an air flow problem include, increased ozone odor during machine operation,
excessive dirt in the machine, dirt being blown out of the IOT, excessive dirt inside the IOT, no
air flow out of the IOT, repeated premature replacement of the Xerographic Module, buildup of
toner inside the Xerographic Module manifold, or Image Quality problems.
C
Check the seal on the Xerographic Module. The seal on the Xerographic Module is free from damage and is making contact with the housing of the Xerographic Blower.
Y
N
Do the following:
Initial Actions
If there is a burning odor coming from the machine, and the odor is traced to the AC Distribution Panel, replace the AC Distribution Panel PL 1.2A Item 1 (TAG 053).
Ensure there are no foreign objects or paper preventing the seal on the
Xerographic Module from making contact with the Xerographic Blower.
The housing that contains the Xerographic Module dirt filter is cracked.
Y
N
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Fan], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The Fuser Fan energizes in Component Control.
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Fan/Duct PL 9.1 Item 5.
Check the Fuser Fan/Duct for obstructions and ensure it is correctly mounted.
Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
In IIOC Controller, select [IIOC Self Tests], [IOT], [Type 1], then [Start]. Enter [Self Tests
tab , IIOC Controller Tests].
An 03-801 or 03-813 fault is declared.
Y
N
Do the following:
The Xerographic Blower energizes in Component Control when the Xerographic Module is removed.
Y
N
Replace the Xerographic Blower PL 9.1 Item 11.
Check the Ozone Filter PL 9.1 Item 4. The Ozone Filter is installed and is free
from dirt and contamination.
Y
N
Replace the NOHAD Filter Kit PL 9.1 Item 1, and reset the NOHAD Filter Life
counter. Refer to GP6.
Check the seal on the Xerographic Module. The seal on the Xerographic Module is free from damage and is making contact with the housing of the Xerographic Blower.
Y
N
Do the following:
Do the following:
The Xerographic Blower energizes in Component Control when the Xerographic Module is removed.
Y
N
Replace the Xerographic Blower PL 9.1 Item 11.
Ensure there are no foreign objects or paper preventing the seal on the
Xerographic Module from making contact with the Xerographic Blower.
The housing that contains the Xerographic Module dirt filter is cracked.
A
B
V0.042
A
May 2003
2-759
D
Status Indicator RAPs
OF-5
D
Y
N
In Component Control, select [IOT Paper Path], [Fuser Fan], then [Output On].
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
The Fuser Fan energizes in Component Control.
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Fan/Duct PL 9.1 Item 5.
Check the Fuser Fan/Duct for obstructions and ensure it is correctly mounted.
To view the active status codes, select the Machine Status Pathway button, then make the following selections on the Touch Screen; Faults and Active Statuses.
03-801 RAP.
03-813 RAP.
Replace the NOHAD Filter Kit PL 9.1 Item 1, and reset the NOHAD Filter Life counter. Refer to
GP6.
OF-5, OF-6
May 2003
2-760
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
To view the active status codes, select the Machine Status Pathway button, then make the following selections on the Touch Screen; Faults and Active Statuses.
(28Feb2001)
The tables referenced in this procedure describe status messages, the conditions that cause
the status to be raised, the function disabled, the conditions required to clear the status, and
the RAP to go to or the action to take if the status cannot be cleared.
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
Status
Number
UI Message
01-510
01-512
Ensure the input and out- +36 VDC off line or 01-310 Printing
put devices are installed
fault
correctly, or call for service
01-513.6
01-540.1
01-540.2
01-540.3
01-540.4
01-540.5
Printing
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
When the
Go to 01Front Door is 301
closed
+36 VDC on Go to RAP
line
01-F
HCF Interlock Closed
Go to 01305
Feeding
The tray set- N/A
from Tray 5. tings are
confirmed or
the tray is
opened.
May 2003
2-761
OF-6A
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
01-545.1
N/A
The tray is
opened or
the size is
set to match
the position
of the
guides.
01-545.2
N/A
The tray is
opened or
the size is
set to match
the position
of the
guides.
01-545.3
N/A
The tray is
opened or
the size is
set to match
the position
of the
guides.
01-545.4
The tray is
N/A
opened or
the size is
set to match
the position
of the
guides.
02-515
02-520
02-585
OF-6A
Local UI Failure
Local UI
Exit Diagnostics
Go to 02-A
System is
unavailable
Switch the
power [Off]
then switch
the power
[On].
Go to 02320/380
None
May 2003
2-762
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
02-590
All
Configurable services
have not reached a stable
state within 5 minutes of
power up.
Switch the
Go to 02power [Off] 390/391
then switch
the power
[On] then all
services
much reach
a stable
state within
5 minutes.
02-591
Switch the
Go to 02power [Off] 390/391
then switch
the power
[On] then all
relevant services the UI
is waiting for
should
appear in
the registry.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-763
OF-6A
To view the active status codes, select the Machine Status Pathway button, then make the following selections on the Touch Screen; Faults and Active Statuses.
(28Feb2001)
The tables referenced in this procedure describe status messages, the conditions that cause
the status to be raised, the function disabled, the conditions required to clear the status, and
the RAP to go to or the action to take if the status cannot be cleared.
Status
Number
UI Message
03-501
03-505
03-515
OF-6B
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
None for the N/A
user (i.e.
user cannot
clear the
remote reset
operation at
the local UI),
system
automatically reboots
which eliminates the
request-forreboot state.
May 2003
2-764
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
03-516
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
Go to 03Main ConScanning
and Scan to troller Reset 321, 03-352,
File job pro- or Power Off or 03-322
gramming
03-520
None
03-521
None
03-535
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-765
OF-6B
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
UI Message
03-536
03-541
Press Resume/Cancel
03-555
All machine
operations
that have not
been initiated by
authorized
users via
locally or
remotely
connected
PWS
Note: When
this status is
active, status 03-535
should be
masked so
that it is not
displayed to
the user.
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
When there N/A
are no active
intrusive
diagnostic
activities in
progress or
when the
PWS initiates a
request to
change to
Non Intrusive Diagnostics
Resume or
Cancel Job
command
from UI
N/A
Stapling
Stapling
from run or deselected.
running from
standby
N/A
03-556
Image Disk
(System
runs in Diskless Mode)
03-557
OF-6B
Document
When comFeeding and munication
Scanning
is reestablished with
the SCVM
Go to 03321
May 2003
2-766
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
03-558
UI Message
When the Foreign InterCopying is being prevented by the access con- face is configured and a
connected 3rd Party
trol device.
accessory is reporting that
it is not enabled.
03-559
Function
Disabled
Scanning,
copy job
programming, and
marking of
copy jobs
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
When the
N/A
Foreign
Interface is
configured
and a connected 3rd
Party accessory is
reporting
that it is
enabled.
N/A
Power Off
N/A
03-560
03-561
When the
N/A
SCAM,
RCM, and
Finisher
modules are
all successfully up and
running, or
when status
03-515, 03516, 03-556,
or 03-565
03-562
When the
N/A
operator
acknowledges the
fault via a UI
invocation
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-767
OF-6B
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
03-563
03-564
Image RotaImage rotation is not avail- When certain Main Conable. Please call for assis- troller PWB POST failures tion
tance.
are detected (see fault 03348 for details)
03-565
Scanner,
Print
Engine,
copy job
programming, and
Scan to File
job programming
03-566 (FX
Only)
Scanning,
Main ConGo to 03printing,
troller Reset 360
copy job
or Power Off
programming, and
Scan to File
job programming
03-567 (FX
Only)
Scanning,
printing,
copy job
programming, and
Scan to File
job programming
OF-6B
Whenever
N/A
the EP-SV
reports an
accessory
ready status.
May 2003
2-768
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
UI Message
03-568 (FX
Only)
System is unavailable.
Diagnostics are active.
03-569 (FX
Only)
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
Scanning,
Printing,
Copy Job
programming, Scan
to File job
programming, and
network job
submissions
None
N/A
Whenever
the EP-SV
requests a
new message display
03-570 (FX
Only)
None
Whenever
N/A
the EP-SV
requests a
new message display
03-571 (FX
Only)
None
Whenever
N/A
the EP-SV
requests a
new message display.
03-572 (FX
Only)
None
Whenever
N/A
the EP-SV
requests a
new message display
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-769
OF-6B
Status
Number
UI Message
03-573 (FX
Only)
Any new
selection at
the PWS
N/A
03-574 (FX
Only)
Any new
selection at
the UI
N/A
03-575 (FX
Only)
When the
N/A
EP-SV
requests a
new message display
03-576 (FX
Only)
Any PWS
selection
N/A
03-577 (FX
Only)
Any PWS
selection
N/A
03-578 (FX
Only)
None
Any PWS
selection
N/A
03-579 (FX
Only)
None
Any PWS
selection
N/A
OF-6B
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
Scanning,
printing,
copy job
programming, and
Scan to File
job programming
May 2003
2-770
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
03-580 (FX
Only)
03-585
IIOC Failure
Printing
03-586
03-587
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
Any PWS
selection
N/A
Power Off/
Power On
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 038XX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
IIOC Failure
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 038XX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
IIOC Failure
Tray 1
Power Off/
Power On
Go to 03804
03-588
IIOC Failure
Tray 2
Power Off/
Power On
Go to 03805
03-589
IIOC Failure
Tray 3
Power Off/
Power On
Go to 03824
03-590
IIOC Failure
Tray 4
Power Off/
Power On
Go to 03825
03-591
IIOC Failure
Trays 3 &
Tray 4.
Power Off/
Power On
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 038XX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-771
OF-6B
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
03-592
Duplex and
Face Up
Simplex
Power Off/
Power On
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 038XX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
03-592 (FX
Only)
Duplex and
Face Up
Simplex
Power Off/
Power On
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 038XX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
03-593
SMH / HCF
Power Off/
Power On
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 038XX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
03-596
Finishing
Power Off/
Power On
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 038XX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
03-597
Document
Feeding
Power Off/
Power On
Go to 03800
OF-6B
May 2003
2-772
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
To view the active status codes, select the Machine Status Pathway button, then make the following selections on the Touch Screen; Faults and Active Statuses.
(28Feb2001)
The tables referenced in this procedure describe status messages, the conditions that cause
the status to be raised, the function disabled, the conditions required to clear the status, and
the RAP to go to or the action to take if the status cannot be cleared.
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
05-507
Unscheduled document
None
detected by any Document
Feeder sensor.
Delivery of
unscheduled documents plus
press Start.
N/A
05-511
Document
Feeder
cover is
closed
Go to 05-K
05-512
05-515
Document
Feeder
scanning
Service
action or
Power Off/
Power On
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 053XX faults.
Go to 05365/375 or
05-370/380
05-525
Document
Feeder
scanning
Document
placed in
Document
Input Tray
Go to 05-C
05-535
None
Document
Input Tray
empty
Go to 05100
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Document
Feeder
scanning
Document
Go to 05-J
Feeder is
closed (lowered)
May 2003
2-773
OF-6C
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
05-550
Top Cover
opened and
closed and
no paper on
the Document Tray
Input Sensor
or the Reg.
Gate Sensor.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 05XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
05-555
DADF Top
Cover raised
and lowered,
and no
paper on the
Input Tray
Exit Sensor
or on the
Reg. Gate
Sensor.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 05XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
05-565
Document
Handler
raised &
lowered and
no paper on
the Reg.
Gate Sensor, the CVT
SOS Sensor, or the
DADF Exit/
Invert Sensor.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 05XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
05-570
RESUME
JOB command is
given with
documents
in input tray
if required,
or CANCEL
JOB command is
given.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 05XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
OF-6C
May 2003
2-774
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
05-570 (FX
Only)
RESUME
JOB command is
given with
documents
in input tray
if required,
or CANCEL
JOB command is
given.
05-571 (FX
Only)
N/A
Automatically cleared
0.5 seconds
after being
set
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
None
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 05XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
May 2003
2-775
OF-6C
To view the active status codes, select the Machine Status Pathway button, then make the following selections on the Touch Screen; Faults and Active Statuses.
(28Feb2001)
The tables referenced in this procedure describe status messages, the conditions that cause
the status to be raised, the function disabled, the conditions required to clear the status, and
the RAP to go to or the action to take if the status cannot be cleared.
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
UI Message
06-511
06-515
07-505.6
07-512.6
Printing
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
Xerographic Go to 06Module
380
CRUM Chip
detected OK
and the
ROS interlock is
closed.
Service
action or
successful
power on.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for ROS
faults. Go to
the RAP for
the fault or
faults displayed.
HCF Feeding
When tray
starts to
raise
Go to 07202.06
HCF Feeding
HCF Door
Interlock
closed.
Go to 01305
07-514.1
Tray 1 is open
Go to 07202.01/
202.02/
202.03/
202.04
07-514.2
Tray 2 is open
07-202.01/
202.02/
202.03/
202.04
OF-6D
May 2003
2-776
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
UI Message
07-514.3
Tray 3 is open
Go to 07202.01/
202.02/
202.03/
202.04
07-514.4
Tray 4 is open
Go to 07202.01/
202.02/
202.03/
202.04
07-515.1
Paper present sensor still Tray 1 Feed- Tray 1 open Go to 07indicates no paper present ing
202.01/
202.02/
202.03/
202.04
07-515.2
Paper present sensor still Tray 2 Feed- Tray 2 open Go to 07indicates no paper present ing
202.01/
202.02/
202.03/
202.04
07-515.3
Paper present sensor still Tray 3 Feed- Tray 3 open Go to 07indicates no paper present ing
202.01/
202.02/
202.03/
202.04
07-515.4
Paper present sensor still Tray 4 Feed- Tray 4 open Go to 07indicates no paper present ing
202.01/
202.02/
202.03/
202.04
07-515.6
Tray 6 Stack Height Sen- Tray 6 Feedsor is not LOW after Eleva- ing
tor Down Motor On while
tray down status is in effect
Load/Run
Go to 07-A
Switch
pressed or
Tray 6 Interlock Switch
opened
07-520.6
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
None
May 2003
2-777
OF-6D
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
Misfeed
Feeds from
Tray 1
Tray 1
pushed in
Go to 08101.01/.02/
.03/.04
Check Tray 2
Misfeed
Feeds from
Tray 2
Tray 2
pushed in
Go to 08101.01/.02/
.03/.04
07-525.3
Check Tray 3
Misfeed
Feeds from
Tray 3
Tray 3
pushed in
Go to 08101.01/.02/
.03/.04
07-525.4
Check Tray 4
Misfeed
Feeds from
Tray 4
Tray 4
pushed in
Go to 08101.01/.02/
.03/.04
07-525.5
Feeds from
Tray 5
Tray 5
detects
paper
N/A
07-525.6
07-530.6
Go to 07When the
HCF eleva- 202.06
tor is sensed
at its normal
feed position
07-570 (FX
Only)
Number of
N/A
feeders with
PDRN XX is
equal to the
number of
Feed Head
notifications
sent. System must
wait 0.5 seconds prior to
updating the
Feed Head
notifications
sent value.
07-571 (FX
Only)
AutomatiN/A
cally @ 0.5
seconds
after setting.
Status
Number
UI Message
07-525.1
Check Tray 1
07-525.2
OF-6D
HCF Feeding
May 2003
2-778
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
To view the active status codes, select the Machine Status Pathway button, then make the following selections on the Touch Screen; Faults and Active Statuses.
(28Feb2001)
The tables referenced in this procedure describe status messages, the conditions that cause
the status to be raised, the function disabled, the conditions required to clear the status, and
the RAP to go to or the action to take if the status cannot be cleared.
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
08-535.5
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
08-535.6
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
08-540
Trays 1
through 4
Feeding
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
IOT Front
Door closed
and Registration Sensor clear
May 2003
2-779
OF-6E
Status
Number
08-542.5
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Open the Tray 6 cover and Paper on the Tray 5 trans- Tray 5 feedremove any misfed sheets port (Bypass Tray)
ing
from area 7.
or
Open the Tray 5 cover and
remove any misfed sheets
from area 7a.
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
No paper on
Registration
Sensor after
closing the
Tray 5 Cover
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
No paper on
Registration
Sensor after
closing the
Tray 6 Cover
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
Open the Tray 6 cover and Paper on the Tray 6 trans- Tray 6 feeding
remove any misfed sheets port (HCF/Bypass Tray
combination)
from area 7a.
or
Open the Tray 5 cover and
remove any misfed sheets
from area 7a.
NOTE: The first message
is incorrect. The message
has been corrected in
L0.18.0 S/W
08-555
Printing
IOT Front
Door closed
and PFT
Sensor clear
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
08-555 and
08-540
Trays 1
through 4
Feeding
IOT Front
Door closed,
Registration
Sensor and
PFT Sensor
clear.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
OF-6E
May 2003
2-780
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
To view the active status codes, select the Machine Status Pathway button, then make the following selections on the Touch Screen; Faults and Active Statuses.
(28Feb2001)
The tables referenced in this procedure describe status messages, the conditions that cause
the status to be raised, the function disabled, the conditions required to clear the status, and
the RAP to go to or the action to take if the status cannot be cleared.
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
09-510
Machine is capable of
communicating with the
CRUM but no Xerox data
found in the ROM area of
the CRUM
09-511
09-513
Go to 09Max. Print
351
Volume
Value Print
Count and
Max. Pixel
Usage Value
Pixel Usage
when the
Xerographic
Module is
closed.
09-514
09-515
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Printing
Xerox Data
read from
the ROM
area of the
CRUM when
the Xerographic
Module is
pushed in.
Replace
Xerographic
Module PL
5.1A Item 1.
May 2003
2-781
OF-6F
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
09-516
Xerographic failure.
Please replace the Xerographic Module.
None
Cleaner, Ground Brush,
Charge and or Photoreceptor Failure(s) are
detected when running the
Xerographic Set Up.
Successful
completion
of the Xerographic Setup
09-517
Service needed.
Machine is Go to 09capable of
355.
communicating with
the Xerox
Xerographic
CRUM or
the Aftermarket
Xerographic
CRUM when
the ROS
interlock is
closed.
09-519
When the
N/A
Xerographic
Module is
replaced or
status 09573
09-519 and
10-519
When the
N/A
Xerographic
Module and
the Fuser
Module are
replaced or
status 09573 and 10573 raised.
OF-6F
None
Replace
Xerographic
Module PL
5.1A Item 1.
May 2003
2-782
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
09-520
When the
N/A
Xerographic
Module is
replaced or
status 09525
09-520 and
10-520
N/A
When the
Xerographic
Module and
the Fuser
Module are
replaced or
status 09525 and 10525 raised.
09-521
None
No Toner detected after
Toner Bottle Motor has
been on for 40 seconds for
the 2nd time. 09-870 fault
declared.
Toner
detected
09-523
Printing
Toner
Go to 09detected or 360/362
Toner Bottle
Motor turned
off after 4
minutes.
09-524
None
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
None
Go to 09360/362
May 2003
2-783
OF-6F
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
09-525
When the
Xerographic
Module is
replaced
Replace
Xerographic
Module PL
5.1A Item 1.
09-527
Open and
close the
Front Door
Go to 09360/362
09-528
Printing
09-530
None
09-570
OF-6F
Start
N/A
May 2003
2-784
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
09-571
None
N/A
Automatically at 500
ms after setting.
09-573
When the
N/A
Xerographic
Module is
replaced or
status 09520 is set.
09-573 and
10-573
N/A
When the
Xerographic
Module and
the Fuser
Module are
replaced, or
status 09520 and 10520 are set.
09-580
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
None
Status
cleared after
selecting
Retry Button.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for Xerographic
faults. Go to
the RAP for
the fault or
faults displayed.
May 2003
2-785
OF-6F
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
09-582
Printing
If one of the following
power faults are declared:
09-370 , 09-372 , 09-374 ,
or 09-376.
The status
09-382 is
not present
after pressing after the
power is
turned on.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for Xerographic
faults. Go to
the RAP for
the fault or
faults displayed.
09-584
Printing
Two consecutive occurrences of fault 09-310 , 09314 , 09-316 , 09-318 ,09320, or 09-324 .
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for Xerographic
faults. Go to
the RAP for
the fault or
faults displayed.
09-585
Check the output. Call the Unclearable process conAdministrator if the quality trol fault declared
is unacceptable.
OF-6F
None
Service
Go to IQ-1
action OK at
START
May 2003
2-786
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
To view the active status codes, select the Machine Status Pathway button, then make the following selections on the Touch Screen; Faults and Active Statuses.
(28Feb2001)
The tables referenced in this procedure describe status messages, the conditions that cause
the status to be raised, the function disabled, the conditions required to clear the status, and
the RAP to go to or the action to take if the status cannot be cleared.
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
10-505
Please wait...
The Fuser is warming up.
Printing may be delayed.
10-510
Xerox Data
is read from
the ROM
area of the
CRUM when
the Fuser
Module is
closed.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
10-511
Pull out the Fuser Module, The system fails to estab- Printing
then firmly push it back in. lish communication with
the Fuser Module CRUM
Chip with thermistor open
or closed. Faults declared:
10-300, 10-350, 10-354
The Fuser
Module
CRUM Chip
is detected
correctly
when the
Fuser Module is
closed.
If the Fuser/
Inverter
Drawer fails
to stay
latched,
replace the
Fuser/
Inverter
Drawer
Latch PL
6.2A Item 5.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 103XX faults.
Go to 10300 10-350
10-354
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Printing
When the
Go to 10Fuser has
301
reached the
operating
temperature.
May 2003
2-787
OF-6G
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
10-513
Max. Print
Go to 10Volume
351
Value Print
Count and
Max. Fuser
Web Usage
Value Fuser
Web Usage
when the
Fuser Module is
closed.
10-514
The correct
Fuser Module is
detected
when the
Fuser Module is
closed.
10-515
The Fuser
Go to 10Module is
303.
replaced, or
the fault is
corrected.
10-517
Service needed.
Machine is Go to 10capable of
355.
communicating with
the Xerox
Fuser
CRUM or
the Aftermarket
Fuser
CRUM when
the thermistor circuit is
closed.
OF-6G
Go to 10352
May 2003
2-788
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
10-519
The Fuser
Module is
replaced or
the status
10-573 is
set.
N/A
10-520
The Fuser
Module is
replaced or
the status
10-525 is
set.
N/A
10-525
The Fuser
Module is
replaced.
Replace the
Fuser Module PL 6.2A
Item 1.
10-530
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Printing per
purge rules
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
May 2003
2-789
OF-6G
Status
Number
UI Message
10-560
Printing
The Front
Door is
closed,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
10-560 and
10-562
Printing
The Front
Door is
closed,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
Printing
The Front
Door is
closed,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
OF-6G
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
May 2003
2-790
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
10-560 and
08-540
The Front
Door is
closed, Registration
Sensor,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX and 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
10-560 and
08-555
The Front
Door is
closed, PFT
Sensor,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX and 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-791
OF-6G
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
The Front
Door is
closed, PFT
Sensor,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX and 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
The Front
Door is
closed, Registration
Sensor, PFT
Sensor,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX and 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
OF-6G
May 2003
2-792
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
The Front
Door is
closed, Registration
Sensor, PFT
Sensor,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX and 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
10-560 and
10-565
The Front
Door is
closed, PFT
Sensor,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Printing
May 2003
2-793
OF-6G
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
The Front
Door is
closed, PFT
Sensor,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
The Front
Door is
closed, Registration
Sensor, PFT
Sensor,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX and 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
OF-6G
Printing
May 2003
2-794
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
Printing
The Front
Door is
closed, Registration
Sensor, PFT
Sensor,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX and 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
Printing
The Front
Door is
closed, Registration
Sensor, PFT
Sensor,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX and 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-795
OF-6G
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
Printing
The Front
Door is
closed, Registration
Sensor, PFT
Sensor,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX and 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
The Front
Door is
closed, Registration
Sensor, PFT
Sensor,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX and 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
OF-6G
May 2003
2-796
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
UI Message
The Front
Door is
closed, Registration
Sensor, PFT
Sensor,
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor are
clear, and
the Fuser
Module transition to
closed is
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX and 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
10-562
The Front
Door is
closed with
no paper
seen at
Inverter
Entrance
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor, and
fuser transition to
closed was
detected.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
10-563
The Front
Door is
closed with
no paper
seen on
Duplex Exit
Sensor.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
May 2003
2-797
OF-6G
Status
Number
UI Message
10-564
The Front
Door is
closed.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
10-565
The Front
Door is
closed with
no paper
seen on PFT
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
10-565 and
08-540
The Front
Door is
closed with
no paper
seen on
Registration
Sensor, PFT
Sensor, and
Inverter Exit
Sensor.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX and 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
10-565 and
08-555
The Front
Door is
closed with
no paper
seen on PFT
Sensor and
Inverter Exit
Sensor.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX and 10XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
OF-6G
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
May 2003
2-798
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
UI Message
10-570
10-571 (FX
Only)
N/A
Automatically cleared
0.5 seconds
after setting.
10-573
The Fuser
Module is
replaced or
the status
10-520 is
set.
10-574 (FX
Only)
The Fuser Web is near the When either of the follow- Printing
end of life.
ing criteria are met: Prints
left to end of life/ave. daily
print volume is less than or
equal to 0 days, or amount
of Fuser Web left to end of
life/ave. daily Fuser Web
usage is less than or equal
to 0 days.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
None
The Front
Door is
closed with
no paper
seen on
Registration
Sensor, PFT
Sensor, and
Inverter Exit
Sensor.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 08XXX and 10XXX faults.
Start
N/A
N/A
Set by
N/A
pressing the
C button
and the 1
button at the
same time
for 2 seconds, status
10-576 is
set, or the
Fuser Module is
replaced.
May 2003
2-799
OF-6G
Status
Number
10-576 (FX
Only)
UI Message
OF-6G
Function
Disabled
Set by
pressing the
C button
and the 1
button at the
same time
for 2 seconds, status
10-576 is
set, or the
Fuser Module is
replaced.
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
N/A
May 2003
2-800
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
To view the active status codes, select the Machine Status Pathway button, then make the following selections on the Touch Screen; Faults and Active Statuses.
(24Jan2002)
The tables referenced in this procedure describe status messages, the conditions that cause
the status to be raised, the function disabled, the conditions required to clear the status, and
the RAP to go to or the action to take if the status cannot be cleared.
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
12-507
Printing &
Finishing
Output of all
committed
sheets and
press Start
12-510
Finishing
12-512
Finisher
Stacker
(Main) Tray
12-518
The Finisher is not avail- Failure of any critical func- Stapling and
able. Please call for assis- tions including Disk Motor, stacking
tamping, and Stacker Tray
tance.
elevation.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Recovery of
the failed
function on
exit from
diagnostics
or the recovery of the
Disk or
Tamper
functions
when the
Finisher
Interlock
Switch is
opened and
then closed.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 12XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
Open then
close the
Finisher Top
Cover Door.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 12XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
May 2003
2-801
OF-6H
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
12-519
Recovery of
the failed
function on
exit from
diagnostics
or a successful Finisher reinitialization
12-520.1
12-520.2
Stapler 2 is low on staples. Fixed Stapler Empty Sensor detects an empty stapler condition during run.
The Fixed
Go to 12-AL
Stapler
Empty Sensor changes
to not empty
or the status is
upgraded to
Out of Staples.
12-525.1
12-525.2
The Fixed
Go to 12-AL
Stapler
Empty Sensor changes
to not empty.
OF-6H
None
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 12XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
May 2003
2-802
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
12-526
12-532
(OCT)
The OCT
Tray Full
Sensor
changes to
not full.
Go to 12-G
Go to 12-AJ
12-532 (Fin- The top tray of the Finisher The Finisher Top Tray Full Top Tray
isher)
is full.
Sensor has been actuated
20 times after the Finisher
Top Tray Sensor indicated
that the tray was full.
12-533
The Stacker Tray Full Sen- Stapling and The Stacker Go to 12-AH
sor and the Stack Height
stacking
Tray Full
Sensor are blocked.
Sensor and
the Stack
Height Sensor are
unblocked.
12-533
(MFF)
Stapling and
stacking
12-535
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Go to 12751.
May 2003
2-803
OF-6H
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
12-536
12-537
(MFF)
12-540
The Finisher
Entrance
Sensor and
the Top Tray
Paper Path
Sensor are
clear after
closing Finisher Top
Cover Door.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 12XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
12541(OCT)
Q2 cleared
and (Close
OCT - 36 v
toggled to
on or Open
front door 36 VDC offline with 5
VDC offline)
Go to 12101.60
OF-6H
May 2003
2-804
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
Status
Number
UI Message
12-550
(OCT)
When next
job begins
printing.
None
When next
job begins
printing.
Go to 12100
12-555
Finisher
Go to 12Stacker Tray 100
raised or
when next
job begins
printing.
12-558
None
12-559
(MFF)
Offsetting in the Main Tray Main Tray offset mechais degraded. Printing and nism failure.
finishing may continue.
None
Recovery of In [Faults/
failed func- Counters tab
tion.
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 12XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
12-581.1
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Successful None
operation of
previously
failed function or
upgrade to
Finisher Not
Available
Status.
May 2003
2-805
OF-6H
Status
Number
12-581.2
UI Message
Function
Disabled
None
This set has not been sta- Failure of critical Fixed
Stapler functions that may
pled. A new set will be
recover on the next set.
printed and stapled.
12-587 (Fin- Please call for assistance. The Top Tray Offset Sen- Finisher Top
isher)
Offset in the Output Tray is sor fails to block within 500 Tray Offsetnot functional.
ms of turning Top Tray Off- ting
set Motor on. Set by fault
code 12-213
OF-6H
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
Successful None
operation of
previously
failed function or
upgrade to
Finisher Not
Available
Status.
Exit diagnostics or
Power Off/
Power On.
Go to 12213
May 2003
2-806
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
To view the active status codes, select the Machine Status Pathway button, then make the following selections on the Touch Screen; Faults and Active Statuses.
(28Feb2001)
The tables referenced in this procedure describe status messages, the conditions that cause
the status to be raised, the function disabled, the conditions required to clear the status, and
the RAP to go to or the action to take if the status cannot be cleared.
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
14-506
Please wait...
Checks for ready are
Adjustments in progress... incomplete
N/A
14-508
N/A
14-517
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 143XX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
14-531
14-585
Scanner is Calibrating.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
None
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Fault
Counters]
for 14-7XX
faults. Go
to the RAP
for the fault
or faults displayed
May 2003
2-807
OF-6J
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
14-590
None
SVCM
receives
NVM data
within correct range.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 14XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
14-595
None
SVCM
receives
NVM data
within correct range.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 14XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
OF-6J
May 2003
2-808
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
To view the active status codes, select the Machine Status Pathway button, then make the following selections on the Touch Screen; Faults and Active Statuses.
(28Feb2001)
The tables referenced in this procedure describe status messages, the conditions that cause
the status to be raised, the function disabled, the conditions required to clear the status, and
the RAP to go to or the action to take if the status cannot be cleared.
Status
Number
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
Function
Disabled
16-502
Network
When the
Go to 16-A.
printing and ESS reset is
scan to file. initiated.
16-543
Accounting problem.
Please notify Machine
Administrator.
16-545
16-546
Go to 16-A.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-809
OF-6K
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
16-547
Scan-To-File
is limited to
the use of
old, default,
or WebUI
templates.
16-548
Go to 16-A.
Scan-To-File Resubmit
Job will be
job. If probcanceled.
lem persists, ESS
Reset manually Initiated
by customer.
16-549
16-550
Machine entering SW
upgrade mode - all jobs
will be canceled.
16-551
16-552
OF-6K
Verify
Remote
template
pool settings; verify
that the
Template
Repository
is online.
Check network connectivity.
System
Reset,
Power Off/
Power On.
Go to 16-A.
Go to 16-A.
May 2003
2-810
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
16-553
Additional memory
required. Please call for
assistance.
16-554
16-555
Additional memory
required to support Fax.
Please notify Machine
Administrator.
LAN Fax
16-556
LAN Fax
Go to 16When the
IPA Card is 786.19
added, reinserted, or
replaced.
16-557
DC platform recovery
failed.
16-558
16-559
16-560
Fault 16-770
Unknown
ESS reset
Go to 16-A
manually initiated by the
customer
16-561
Scan to file
ESS reset
Go to 16-A
manually initiated by the
customer
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Go to 16-A
May 2003
2-811
OF-6K
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
16-562
LPD connectivity
16-563
Go to 16-A
Novell Con- ESS reset
nectivity
manually initiated by the
customer
16-564
Go to 16-A
Netbios con- ESS reset
nectivity
manually initiated by the
customer
16-565
AppleTalk
ESS reset
Go to 16-A
Connectivity manually initiated by the
customer
16-566
Banyan
Vines Connectivity
OF-6K
Go to 16-A
ESS reset
manually initiated by the
customer
ESS reset
Go to 16-A
manually initiated by the
customer
May 2003
2-812
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
16-567
Postscript
print capability
Go to 16-A
ESS reset
manually initiated by the
customer
16-568
PCL print
capability.
Go to 16-A
ESS reset
manually initiated by the
customer
16-569
Go to 16-A
Parallel port ESS reset
connectivity. manually initiated by the
customer
16-570
16-571
Fault 16-771
ESS reset
Go to 16-A
manually initiated by the
customer
16-572
Fault 16-772
ESS reset
Go to 16-A
manually initiated by the
customer
16-573
Fault 16-773
ESS reset
Go to 16-A
manually initiated by the
customer
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-813
OF-6K
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Go to 16-A
ESS reset
manually initiated by the
customer
16-574
16-575
Fault 16-160
Go to 16-A
All ESS pro- ESS reset
cesses lost manually initiated by the
customer
16-576
Fault 16-161
Go to 16-A
All ESS pro- ESS reset
cesses lost. manually initiated by the
customer
16-577
Fault 16-162
Go to 16-A
All ESS pro- ESS reset
cesses lost. manually initiated by the
customer
16-578
Unable to
log faults.
Go to 16-A
ESS reset
manually initiated by the
customer
16-579
Completed
job log data
lost.
ESS reset
Go to 16-A
manually initiated by the
customer
16-580
No ESS
configuration data.
ESS reset
Go to 16-A
manually initiated by the
customer
16-581
Fault 16-779
ESS reset
Go to 16-A
manually initiated by the
customer
16-582
Fault 16-780
Print and
scan capability lost.
ESS reset
Go to 16-A
manually initiated by the
customer
16-583
Unable to
retrieve
counter
data.
ESS reset
Go to 16-A
manually initiated by the
customer
16-584
OF-6K
Fault 16-163
Job queue
data lost
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
May 2003
2-814
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
16-585
Fault 16-782
Incomplete system information. Please contact the
Machine Administrator.
No ESS
configuration data to
RDT and
PWS.
Go to 16-A
ESS reset
manually initiated by the
customer
16-586
Remote
SNMP operations not
possible.
Go to 16-A
ESS reset
manually initiated by the
customer
16-587
16-588
16-589
16-590
16-591
IP over
Ethernet.
Go to 16-A
16-592
IP over
ConnectivToken Ring. ity fix and
reboot.
Go to 16-A
Fault 16-785
Fault 16-787
Fault 16-789
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Go to 16-A
Token ring
ESS reset
operations
manually ininot possible. tiated by the
customer
Configuration changes
are not possible.
Go to 16-A
ESS reset
manually initiated by the
customer
May 2003
2-815
OF-6K
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
16-593
Fault 46.16-802
Go to 16-A
16-594
Fault 46.16-803
Go to 16-A
16-595
16-596
16-597
16-598
OF-6K
Tiff printing.
May 2003
2-816
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
To view the active status codes, select the Machine Status Pathway button, then make the following selections on the Touch Screen; Faults and Active Statuses.
(28Feb2001)
The tables referenced in this procedure describe status messages, the conditions that cause
the status to be raised, the function disabled, the conditions required to clear the status, and
the RAP to go to or the action to take if the status cannot be cleared.
Status
Number
19-502
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
None
19-503
19-505
Your job has been deleted. Compressor DVMA timePlease resubmit this job.
out.
or
Your job has been deleted.
please rescan the originals.
Video path
19-510
None
19-511
None Revert to
Diskless
operation
19-512
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Operator
selection at
the UI.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40]. Go to
the RAP for
the fault or
faults displayed.
May 2003
2-817
OF-6L
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
19-513
When the
N/A
System
detects that
the available free
space for
Image data
is greater
than or
equal to
20% of the
total space
on the disk
that has
been allocated for
Image Data.
19-514
Video path.
Video Path.
When the
N/A
currently
marking job
completes
Marking or
when the
user deletes
a job.
19-515
OF-6L
May 2003
2-818
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
19-516
19-520
UI Message
Function
Disabled
None
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
When the
N/A
System
detects that
the available free
space for
Image data
is greater
than or
equal to
20% of the
total space
on the disk
that has
been allocated for
Image Data.
Clears auto- N/A
matically
right after
being raised.
UI continues to display
message
until user
confirms
that the
message
has been
read via a
selection at
the UI or
after Power
On, Power
Off.
May 2003
2-819
OF-6L
Status
Number
UI Message
19-550
Function
Disabled
When the
system is
powered off
or when a
Main Control
PWB reset
occurs.
21-500
22-500.16
Confirming configuration
information...
OF-6L
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
Call out to
the Blacklisted Phone
Number(s).
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40]. Go to
the RAP for
the fault or
faults displayed.
When the
N/A
Main Control
PWB
receives
confirmation of the
core configuration information from
the UI.
May 2003
2-820
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
22-501.04
22-501.05
22-501.16
System not
When user or system
available
selects the Quick Controlled Soft Power Down
Option at the UI, or during
the initial power on at the
customer's site when Auto
Configuration setup is initiated.
When the
N/A
System
Manager
receives
confirmation that it is
O.K. to
Power Off,
or when the
Auto Configuration Set
process
completes.
22-502.04
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
When the
IOT and the
Finisher
reach
standby.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 223XX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
Go to 22When the
300.05
job is
deleted from
the queue
May 2003
2-821
OF-6L
Status
Number
22-502.05
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
N/A
Document
Handler lowered or no
documents
sensed in
Document
Input Tray.
When the
None
User either
confirms or
cancels the
Quick Controlled
Power Off
Request, or
when the
System initiates the
auto configuration
detection
sequence.
22-502.16
22-503.04
None
22-503.05
Document
Feeder
scanning.
Documents
sensed in
the Document Input
Tray or Job
Incomplete
Timer
Expires.
OF-6L
N/A
May 2003
2-822
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
22-504.04
22-504.05
A document length is
None
detected during the document feed cycle that is not
consistent with the document assumed by the
DADF sensors and the
Market Region setting
when the Documents were
initially loaded into the
Document Input Tray.
22-504.16
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
IOT
Go to 22Job can315.04
celled by
user or Tray
is configured
by KO for
required
media
When the
None
Document
stack has
been completely
scanned or
when the job
is cancelled
by the user.
N/A
May 2003
2-823
OF-6L
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
22-505.05
22-505.17
22-506.05
When the
Warm Up
and Cold
Calibration
completes
or when the
calibration is
halted due
to a calibration fault.
22-506.17
Whenever
TBD
Auto Configuration is
enabled via
the PWS
OF-6L
Scanning
When the
Scanner
Lamp Calibration is
complete,
when the
system software has
successfully
interrupted
the Scanner
Lamp Calibration and
has returned
the Scanner
to a Ready
to Scan
state, or
when the
calibration is
halted due
to a calibration fault.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 14XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
Whenever
TBD
Manufacturing Mode is
exited via
the PWS.
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 14XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
May 2003
2-824
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Status
Number
UI Message
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
Job cancelled by
user
N/A
22-507.04
22-507.05
22-508.04
22-510.04
Automatic Configuration
Whenever the Mark Ser- System not
has detected the hardware vice detects one or more available
listed below.
of the following configuration mismatches during the
Power On sequence (OCT,
Finisher, SMH, HCF)
When the
N/A
user confirms or
rejects the
displayed
configuration via a UI
invocation.
22-511.04
When the
N/A
System
detects that
there is a
Tray available that
currently
contains the
stock
required to
continue
marking the
job.
22-512.04
All Paper Trays have been Whenever all the configspecified by the SA/KO to ured Paper Trays in the
be Direct Select Trays.
System have been programmed to be [Direct
Select] Paper Trays.
Go to 22303.05.
User needs to be informed Scanning
that Scan Start up will be
delayedWhen Start is
selected but Scan Service
is unable to acquire
resources (No Accept Halt
received from Job Contention).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
None
TBD
When the
Scan Service is able
to acquire
resources or
the Scan
Job is
deleted.
Whenever at TBD
least one
configured
Paper Tray
has been
programmed to
be [Auto
Select].
May 2003
2-825
OF-6L
Status
Number
Function
Disabled
Condition
Required to
Clear
Status
Action
UI Message
None
Whenever one or more
queued jobs in the system
is being held due to the
lack of resources.
Whenever
TBD
there are no
queued jobs
in the system that are
being held
for
resources.
22-550.17
For an RDT
configuration mismatch:
When the
Auto Configuration
detection
sequence
complete.
For any
other mismatch:
When the
System is
Powered Off
or when a
Main Control
PWB reset
occurs.
22-551.04
22-513.04
OF-6L
In [Faults/
Counters tab
, Faults],
check [Last
40] for 22XXX faults.
Go to the
RAP for the
fault or faults
displayed.
When the
Go to OF-9.
Auto Configuration
Detection
sequence
complete
completes
successfully.
May 2003
2-826
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
(03Mar1999)
The unformed staple roll is wound too tightly in the Staple Cartridge and/or the Driver Bar is out
of position. This may cause the following:
The Moving Stapler or the Fixed Stapler in the Finisher are failing to staple sets of copies.
The Staple Cartridge cannot be installed correctly in the Finisher (Moving Stapler or Fixed
Stapler)
To correct this malfunction, the CSE must force an exit of the Installation Wizard, identify and
correct the cause of the Installation Wizard failure, and then reset the Installation Selection
back to Customer Install and run the Installation Wizard again.
Use the following procedure to diagnose and correct this failure. (Do not select the hot links
until you are familiar with all of the steps.)
To ensure the unformed staple roll in the Staple Cartridge is not wound too tight, do the following:
1.
In the Diagnostic Navigator, select [Configuration] [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration]. Enter [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration].
Using one hand, grasp the Staple Cartridge along the top and bottom.
2.
3.
4.
After the selection is made, exit the Diagnostic Navigator, then switch the power Off.
Vigorously snap the cartridge in the direction of the arrow (refer to Figure 1) about 10
times being careful not to squeeze the cartridge too tightly. You should be able to hear the
roll clunking back and forth inside the cartridge.
5.
While the power is Off, look at the connectors to the Main Control PWB and the Distribution PWB. Ensure all connectors securely connected.
6.
If the message Ensure the input and output devices are installed correctly, or call for service is displayed on the User Interface, do the following:
Check to see if the Driver Bar is flush with the leading edge of the cartridge as shown in
Figure 2.
NOTE: TAG 114 is a 460/470 manufacturing tag that removes the Right Side Interlock
Switch and inserts an in line splice in its place.
If necessary, use a pen or other pointed tool to move the plate edge tab located on the left
side of the cartridge.
Move the tab until the Driver Bar is even with the leading edge of the cartridge.
TAG 120 is a460/470 manufacturing tag that removes the Left Side Interlock Switch and
inserts an in line splice in its place.
If correctly positioned, the staple will be laying down flat on the Driver Bar.
If the staple is oriented on end, as shown in Figure 3, or if the staple appears to be malformed in any way, remove it.
a.
Ensure the Finisher is mounted correctly to the IOT frame (refer to REP 12-12 ).
b.
c.
d.
7.
8.
9.
Identify all logged faults. Diagnose and repair the cause of the faults.
Ensure the first staple is in the correct position and the staple is not damaged
10. PO/PO the machine in order to clear the active faults and verify the faults do not reoccur.
11. In the Diagnostic Navigator, select [Configuration] [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration]. Enter [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration].
12. Locate the [Install Phase] window, and select [Customer Install].
13. Select [Apply], then select [OK].
14. After the selection is made, exit the Diagnostic Navigator, then PO/PO the machine for
the change to take effect.
15. Execute the Install Wizard.
16. Reset the second side registration (ADJ 8-1C and ADJ 8-1D).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-827
OF-7, OF-8
OF-8
May 2003
2-828
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
Go to Flag 2, Flag 3, Flag 4, Flag 5, Flag 6, Flag 7, and Flag 8. Check the harness for a
After it has failed, the machine automatic configuration detected the changed configuration, and to continue running the customer accepted the changed configuration.
If the feature or function is still not recognized, there may be a hardware problem.
A
V0.042
Perform the following: Enter [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and change the Install Phase to [Manufacturing]. Select [OK]. Switch off the
machine power, then switch it back on. When the machine is ready, enter [System,
Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select [System] and change the Install Phase to
[Install Complete]. Switch off the machine power, then switch it back on. When
complete, the machine should recognize the correct configuration.
If the feature is an output or input device, ensure they are connected correctly.
Check again for any fault codes, including the fault counters ([Faults/Counters
tab , Faults]. Select [Fault Counters]). If any faults are now present that indicate a configuration problem, go to that RAP.
Go to [Faults/Counters tab , Faults]. Select [Fault Counters]. Check for one of the following
faults 10-357, 10-358, 10-706, 12-323,12-700, 19-750, 19-751, 19-752, 22-750.17.
One of the above faults was listed in the Fault Counters.
Y
N
The output device is a Multi-Function Finisher (470 machines only).
Y
N
Go to the OF-9 Auto Configuration On-Site Procedure.
A
A
B
short circuit or an open circuit.
A
May 2003
2-829
OF-8, OF-9
A
If the harness is good, replace the IOT/MFF Interface PWB PL 8.22A .
If the problem continues, replace the Distribution PWB PL 1.5.
Go to the appropriate RAP:
OF-9
May 2003
2-830
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-831
OF-9
While the power is Off, look at the connectors to the Main Control PWB and the Distribution PWB. Ensure all connectors securely connected.
2.
Ensure the Finisher is mounted correctly to the IOT frame (refer to REP 12-12 ).
b.
c.
Ensure that the HCF is mounted correctly and that the connector is connected.
3.
4.
(20Oct2000)
The purpose of the RAP is to inform the CSE of any pertinent service information that may
apply to certain failed parts. This type of information may have been previously issued in a bulletin.
Procedure
When a part is obviously broken or defective, check this list for any service information related
to that part.
If no information is listed here on the broken part, replace the part following the usual procedures.
5.
Identify all logged faults. Diagnose and repair the cause of the faults.
6.
PO/PO the machine in order to clear the active faults and verify the faults do not reoccur.
7.
In the Diagnostic Navigator, select [Configuration] [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration]. Enter [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration].
8.
9.
Inverter
10. After the selection is made, exit the Diagnostic Navigator, then PO/PO the machine for
the change to take effect.
The customer has difficulty opening IOT Paper Trays 1, 2, 3, or 4, or is unable to open IOT
Paper Trays 1, 2, 3, or 4
11. In the Diagnostic Navigator, select [Configuration] [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration]. Enter [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration].
Cause:
The locator pin on the Paper Feed Drives Plate may become locked or sticky within the tray
socket, keeping the tray from being opened easily. The Paper Feed Drives Plate pin material
changed from stainless to nickel plating causing a diametrical difference.
Solution:
If the customer is having difficulty opening one of the IOT Paper Trays, coat both locator pins
on each Paper Feed Drives Plate (See Figure 1) with a small amount of molybdenum disulfide
grease (Xerox part # 70E120).
If the tray is locked, and can not be pulled out, do the following:
1.
2.
Pull on inboard side wall of the tray and the tray handle simultaneously.
3.
Once the tray is pulled open, apply the 70E120 grease to the 4 locator pins.
Bookmarks:
OF-9, OF-10
May 2003
2-832
REP 07-1
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
2-833
OF-10
An Inverter Repair Kit (PL 6.2C Item 2) was developed to repair Inverter frames that are
broken as described above.
2.
An Exit Baffle Bracket Kit (PL 6.1A Item 12) contains brackets to hold the entrance guide
securely in place, preventing it from becoming dislodged and interfering with the movement of the Inverter. As a preventative measure, Exit Baffle brackets should be installed
on all machines with Tag 083 and without Tag 085.
NOTE: The Exit Baffle brackets are also included in the Exit Baffle Kit PL 6.1A Item 6.
Tags
There is no Tag # associated with the repaired Inverter. However, Tag 085 is associated with
the Copy Exit Baffle retrofitted with the new brackets. Tag 085 should be marked off when
these brackets are installed on the Exit Baffle from either the Exit Baffle Kit PL 6.1A Item 6 or
the Exit Baffle Bracket Kit PL 6.1A Item 12.
Tools
Four tools are required to install the DC Thermal Fuse which are NOT part of the standard tool
kit, and also are NOT included in the repair kit.
OF-10
May 2003
2-834
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
3. Image Quality
Image Quality RAPs
IQ-1 Entry RAP ...............................................................................................................
IQ-2 Image Quality Checkout RAP .................................................................................
IQ-3 Video Path RAP ......................................................................................................
IQ-4 Signature Defects RAP ...........................................................................................
IQ-5 Non-Uniform Copies/Prints RAP .............................................................................
IQ-6 Copies/ Prints Too Dark RAP..................................................................................
IQ-7 Copies/ Prints Too Light RAP ................................................................................
IQ-8 Deletions .................................................................................................................
IQ-9 No Image RAP ........................................................................................................
IQ-10 Distorted Image RAP ............................................................................................
IQ-11 Ghosting/Residual Image/Offsetting RAP .............................................................
IQ-12 Background RAP...................................................................................................
IQ-13 Lines/Bands/Streaks RAP .....................................................................................
IQ-14 Spots/Dirt RAP ......................................................................................................
IQ-15 Geometrics RAP ...................................................................................................
IQ-16 Poor Fusing RAP ..................................................................................................
IQ-17 Black Copies/Prints RAP.......................................................................................
IQ-18 Special Stock RAP ................................................................................................
IQ-19 Motion Quality RAP...............................................................................................
IQ-20 IIT Torn Image RAP ..............................................................................................
IQ-21 IIT Grainy Image RAP ...........................................................................................
IQ-22 IIT Jagged Lines RAP ...........................................................................................
IQ-23 Black Holes Defect RAP .......................................................................................
IQ-24 Toner Blow-Out RAP.............................................................................................
3-3
3-5
3-8
3-10
3-12
3-16
3-17
3-19
3-23
3-23
3-26
3-28
3-30
3-34
3-38
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-46
3-47
3-48
3-48
3-49
3-50
3-91
3-91
3-92
3-92
IQ Defect Samples.
IQ Defect Samples Entry.................................................................................................
IB-OB Bands ...................................................................................................................
LE-TE Streaks/Bands......................................................................................................
Scrogged Images ............................................................................................................
Non-Uniform Copies/Prints .............................................................................................
Smeared Copies/Prints ...................................................................................................
Spots/Dirt ........................................................................................................................
Image Distortion ..............................................................................................................
Toner Disturbance...........................................................................................................
3-53
3-53
3-60
3-63
3-70
3-73
3-78
3-79
3-80
3-81
3-85
3-87
3-87
3-88
3-88
3-89
3-89
3-90
3-90
May 2003
3-1
Image Quality
Image Quality
May 2003
3-2
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Lighten/Darken
Reduce/Enlarge
Negative Image
Mirror Image
Bitmap Smoothing
Centered
Initial Actions
100%
For problems copying on a DC or ST machine, inspect the originals for quality (question
customer if remote). Ensure that the originals are of sufficient weight to avoid showthrough and do not contain any irregularities at the location of the observed defect.
Not Selected
Not Selected
(DC and ST machines) Ensure that the Document Glass glass is clean. Lines on copies
are often caused by dirty CVT Glass (Refer to REP 05-1, DADF Cleaning Procedure).
If the customer is experiencing intermittent light copies/prints and/or intermittent faults 09318/320, and is running mostly in the SEP mode or alternates frequently between SEF
and LEF mode, suspect a parking deletion problem. This problem affects the patch zone
on the photoreceptor. Replacing the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1 will fix the problem temporarily. Engineering is working on a permanent fix for this problem. The problem
may re-occur within 50K depending on the customer mode of operation. Disabling Power
Save Mode may help prevent parking deletions by keeping a steady air flow through the
machine. Ensure the air filters are not clogged with dirt.
Margins
Resolution
If the defect repeats only on every other copy/print of 8.5 x 11" (A4), from the Document
Glass, Long Edge Feed (LEF), replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
Not Selected
Not Selected
Standard
600x600x1
NOTE: If any of the above are not set to the default values, select the button to access the individual settings. A zero on the first screen is equivalent to Normal under the individual screens.
Image Quality should only be evaluated against the specification when the optional IQ settings
are nominal. Question the customer if remote or ensure that the UI Image Quality settings
(under the Image Adjustment tab) are as follows and make a note if any settings are not at the
nominal setting so that they can be restored when complete:
Take appropriate steps to reproduce the problem if possible, or have a customers defective
copies for reference. For information about evaluating IQ using the test patterns, see IQ-2,
Image Quality Checkout RAP and/or the IQ Specifications Entry . Also, samples of IQ defects
are located at IQ Defect Samples Entry.
If any of the following conditions are known to be occurring (main customer complaint), perform
the action indicated:
Image Quality
Type: Normal
Lighten/Darken: 0
Suppression: On
Bound Originals
Off
Edge Erase
Border Erase
The defect ONLY occurs when copying/printing on to special stock: Go to IQ-18, Special
Stock RAP.
If the defect repeats only on every other copy/print of 8.5 x 11" (A4), from the Document
Glass, Long Edge Feed (LEF), replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
The dry ink is not fused to the paper: Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
There are oil marks on the paper: Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
There is paper damage such as wrinkles, creases, embossing, dog ears: Go to the OF-2,
Print Damage RAP.
The defect only occurs with jobs that use Image Rotation: Go to the IQ-3 Video Path RAP
(Digital Copier).
Textured paper - The machine cannot run highly textured paper without IQ defects
If the problem began after installing a EHR PWB (Electronic Hole Removal) (see samples
- Figure 7, Figure 8), go to the IQ-3 , Video Path RAP.
3mm
Original Input
Auto
Image Shift
No Shift
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-3
Image Quality
IQ-1
In [Faults/Counters tab , Faults], check the Last 40 Faults for any 09-338. If any 09-338
appears, check for any of the following faults that precede the 09-338. They would appear two
times, once just before the 09-338: 09-310, 09-314, 09-316, 09-318, 09-320, 09-324, 09330, or 09-332. If that situation occurred, go the RAP for the fault that occurred just prior to
the 09-338. If no 09-338 occurred, on the PWS in the Faults/Counters screen, select [Fault
Counters]. Select the Filter By Chain 09 option. Check for the above fault codes for any unusually high values. If there are high values, troubleshoot the most prevalent fault. If none of these
faults appear in the Last 40 or Fault Counters, continue below.
If the defect is LE-TE streaks that are most prominent in halftones, approximately 3-6mm
wide, not well defined edges (fuzzy), replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
Wood-grain or honeycomb type pattern in halftones - go to the IQ-5, Non-Uniform Copies/Prints RAP
Select the condition, which BEST describes the defect that is presently under investigation:
Non-Image Area Defects - Defects that occur in non-image areas of the print such as
background, dirt, lines and streaks, or dark spots. Go to the Non Image Area Defects
Procedure.
Halftone Defects - Defects which are primarily seen in halftone images such as non-uniformity, streaks, or banding. Go to the Halftone Defects Procedure
Deletion Defects - Part or all of the image is missing. Go to the Deletion Defects Procedure
Read the types of non-image areas defects, and select the defect that best describes the
defect that is presently under investigation:
Cropped Image, part of image missing and a misregistration problem in DADF mode - go
to the 05-E, Document Size Sensing RAP.
Image Density Problems - The copies/prints are too light or too dark. Go to the Image
Density Defects Procedure
Line Deletions, Streaks - go to the IQ-13, Lines, Streaks, and Bands RAP
Solid Area Quality - Defects related to the reproduction of solid area. Go to the Solid
Area Defects Procedure
Distorted Image - Smeared or blurred copies/prints. The image has been distorted in
some way. Go to the Distorted Image Defects Procedure
Scrogged Image - The digital image has been altered in some way. Go to the Scrogged
Defects Procedure
Read the types of non-image areas defects, and select the defect that best describes the
defect that is presently under investigation:
Part of image missing (cropped) and a misregistration problem in DADF mode - go to the
05-E, Document Size Sensing RAP.
Read the types of non-image areas defects, and select the defect that best describes the
defect that is presently under investigation:
Spots, Dirt - If the spots look like these, Figure 1 or Figure 2, go to the IQ-4, Signature
Defect RAP and troubleshoot Donor Debris Arcing. For other spots or dirt, go to the IQ-14
Spots/Dirt RAP
Jumping Gap Arcing defect (Figure 2, Figure 3, Figure 4, Figure 5, Figure 6) - If defect
looks like these, go to the IQ-4, Signature Defect RAP and troubleshoot Jumping Gap
Arcing Defect.
Top Half different Density from Bottom Half of copy - go to the IQ-5
Read the types of density defects, and select the defect that best describes the defect that is
presently under investigation:
Holes from punched originals visible on copies/prints - Go to the IQ-23, Black Holes RAP.
Image Quality
IQ-1
May 2003
3-4
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Torn Image, image is stretched or compressed in a band from IB-OB - go to the IQ-20, IIT
Torn Image RAP.
Image Quality should only be evaluated against the specification when the optional IQ settings
are nominal. Ensure that the UI Image Quality settings (under the Image Adjustment tab) are
as follows and make a note if any settings are not at the nominal setting so that they can be
restored when complete:
(DC and ST Machines UI Image Quality Settings)
The IQ Checkout RAP can be used to help identify IQ defects and ensure that the IQ is meeting spec.
Image Quality
Type: Normal
Lighten/Darken: 0
Suppression: On
Contrast: 0
Sharpness: 0
Screen: Auto
Bound Originals
Edge Erase
Off
Read the types of density defects, and select the defect that best describes the defect that is
presently under investigation:
Border Erase
3mm
Original Input
Image Shift
Auto
No Shift
(LP and ST Printers Printer Driver Image Quality Settings)
Lighten/Darken
Reduce/Enlarge
Negative Image
Mirror Image
Bitmap Smoothing
Margins
Resolution
Centered
100%
Not Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected
Standard
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-5
Image Quality
IQ-1, IQ-2
600x600x1
NOTE: More information on IQ Specs can be located at IQ Specifications Entry .
1.
Place test pattern 82E13100 (8.5 x 11") or 82E13110 (A4) on the document glass (select
the appropriate paper size paper supply). Make 3 copies in standard mode.
NOTE: All evaluations should be done with the copies on a flat surface with white paper
underneath.
e.
f.
If out of spec, use the ADJ 8-1 and ADJ 14-2 for adjustment procedures. If the
problem continues, use IQ-1 IQ Entry RAP to identify the correct RAPs for
troubleshooting.
Magnification
a.
Compare the solid area patches "A1" and "A2" on the copy to the "V" patch on
the side 2 of the test pattern. The "A1" and "A2" patches on the copy should be
no lighter than the "V" patch on the test pattern.
b.
If the darkness/solid area quality is out of spec, enter [Marking tab , Print Test
Pattern]. Select [Step Wedge]. Make 3 prints.
c.
Examine the 3rd print. Compare the darkest step to the V patch on side 2 of
the test pattern original. If the step wedge is also lighter than the "V" patch, the
problem is in the IOT. Go to the IQ-7, Copies/Prints Too Light RAP. If the IOT
prints are clearly OK, suspect an IIT problem. Go to the IQ-7, Copies/Prints
Too Light RAP.
d.
Compare the "E1" patch on the copy to the "P1" and "P3" patches on the original. The "E1" patch on the copy should be no darker than the "P3" and no
lighter than the "P1" on the test pattern. Also, Compare the "D1" patch on the
copy to the "N1" and "N3" patches on the original. The "D1" patch on the copy
should be no darker than the "N3" and no lighter than the "N1" on the test pattern.
i.
Enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], select [Marking]. Make 1 print of
the Registration test pattern.
ii.
Using the last print of the Registration test pattern, lay the 82E13100 (11")
or 82E13110 (A4) pattern on top.
iii.
Align the K1 mag line on the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) to the closest corresponding line on the registration pattern.
iv.
Compare and note the alignment of the H1 line with the closest corresponding line on the registration pattern. (Each line is 0.5% difference
from nominal mag.)
v.
Perform the same procedure on the bottom edge of the pattern using the
K2 and H2 mag lines. Note the difference in mag from the nominal.
vi.
vii.
The horizontal mag should be less than or equal to 0.5% (one line) from
the nominal (H1 line). If horizontal mag is out of spec, go to the IQ-15,
Geometrics RAP.
Enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], select [Marking]. Make 1 print of
the Registration test pattern.
If the darkness is out of spec, enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern]. Select
[Step Wedge]. Make 3 prints. Using the 3rd print, compare the 5th darkest step
(find the 100% solid, count down 4 steps or use the graphic on side 2 of the test
pattern) to the "M1" and "M3" patches on side 2 of the test pattern original.
ii.
Using the last print of the Registration test pattern, lay the 82E13100 (11")
or 82E13110 (A4) pattern on top.
iii.
Align the K3 mag line on the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) to a corresponding line on the registration pattern.
f.
If the darkness appears clearly lighter than M1 darker than M3, the problem is
in the IOT. Go to the IQ-7, Copies/Prints Too Light RAP or the IQ-6, Copies/
Prints Too Dark RAP. If the IOT print are OK, suspect an IIT problem. Go to the
IQ-7, Copies/Prints Too Light RAP or the IQ-6, Copies/Prints Too Dark RAP.
iv.
Compare and note the alignment of the H3 line with the closest corresponding line on the registration pattern. (Each line is 0.5% difference
from nominal mag.)
g.
Ensure that both sections of blue text are readable and the blue square are visible on the copies.
v.
Perform the same procedure on the left edge of the pattern using the K4
and H4 mag lines. Note the difference in mag from the nominal.
h.
Check for toner reload. Compare the copies of the "B" and "C" patches to the
"S" and "T" patches on side 2 of the test pattern. Ensure that the lightened area
on the copy is no worse than the "S" and "T" patches. If it is, reload is out of
spec. Go to the IQ-11, Ghosting/Residual Image/Offsetting RAP.
vi.
Average the right and left measurements to calculate the Vertical Magnification.
vii.
The horizontal mag should be less than or equal to 0.5% (one line) from
the nominal (H1 line). If horizontal mag is out of spec, go to the IQ-15,
Geometrics RAP.
e.
i.
Check the copy of patch "A1" with the "V" patch on side 2 of the test pattern.
Solid area quality should be no worse than the "V" patch.
c.
Place the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) on the document glass and
make one copy.
a.
Use the reference scales on the corners of the pattern to check LE Registration, TE Registration, and skew.
ii.
b.
Align the K1 mag line on the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) to the corresponding line on the copy.
c.
iii.
Compare and note the alignment of the H1 line with the corresponding line
on the copy. (Each line is 0.5% difference from nominal mag.)
d.
Image Quality
IQ-2
b.
May 2003
3-6
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
d.
iv.
Perform the same procedure on the bottom edge of the pattern using the
K2 and H2 mag lines. Note the difference in mag from the nominal.
v.
vi.
The horizontal mag should be less than or equal to 0.7% (one line = 0.5%)
from the nominal (H1 line). If horizontal mag is out of spec, go to the IQ15, Geometrics RAP.
3.
Place test pattern 82E13100 (8.5 x 11") or 82E13110 (A4) in the DADF. Make 3 copies.
Evaluate the copies as in step 1, unless specified below.
Magnification
a.
Align the K3 mag line on the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) to the corresponding line on the copy.
ii.
Compare and note the alignment of the H3 line with the corresponding line
on the copy. (Each line is 0.5% difference from nominal mag.)
iii.
Perform the same procedure on the left edge of the pattern using the K4
and H4 mag lines. Note the difference in mag from the nominal.
iv.
Average the right and left measurements to calculate the Vertical Magnification.
v.
The horizontal mag should be less than or equal to 0.7% (one line = 0.5%)
from the nominal (H1 line). If horizontal mag is out of spec, go to the IQ15, Geometrics RAP.
Resolution
b.
Run the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) through the DADF and make one
copy.
ii.
Align the K1 mag line on the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) to the corresponding line on the copy.
iii.
Compare and note the alignment of the J1 line with the H1 line on the copy.
(Each line is 0.5% difference from nominal mag.) A different mag is applied in
DADF mode to avoid black border lines.
iv.
Perform the same procedure on the bottom edge of the pattern using the K2
and J2 mag lines. Note the difference in mag from the nominal.
v.
Average the top and bottom measurements to calculate the Horizontal Magnification.
vi.
The horizontal mag should be less than or equal to 1.0% (one line = 0.5%) from
the nominal (H1 line). If horizontal mag is out of spec, go to the IQ-15, Geometrics RAP.
Align the K3 mag line on the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) to the corresponding line on the copy.
ii.
Compare and note the alignment of the H3 line with the corresponding line on
the copy. (Each line is 0.5% difference from nominal mag.)
iii.
Perform the same procedure on the left edge of the pattern using the K4 and
H4 mag lines. Note the difference in mag from the nominal.
Background/Spots
iv.
Average the right and left measurements to calculate the Vertical Magnification.
a.
v.
b.
Enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern]. Select [Blank Page]. Make 5 prints.
c.
The horizontal mag should be less than or equal to 0.7% (one line = 0.5%) from
the nominal (H1 line). If horizontal mag is out of spec, go to the IQ-15, Geometrics RAP.
d.
a.
Check the R1, R2, R3, R4 patches for blurred lines. The 4.3 lpi pairs should just
be resolved, and 3.5 lpi should be clearly resolved.
b.
Check IOT resolution. Enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern]. Make 5 prints of
2on/2off perpendicular lines. Check for banding within this pattern.
c.
Uniformity
a.
Make 3 copies of the test pattern in Photo mode. Inspect the IB-OB (F) and LETE (G) bands to check for objectionable non-uniformity.
b.
Compare the E1 and E2, D1 and D2, A1 and A2 patches for uniformity.
c.
If the uniformity is objectionable, enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern]. Make
5 prints of 106 DPI 50% Halftone.
d.
e.
If the 106dpi 50% Halftone internal prints are OK, suspect an IIT problem. For a
non-uniformity problem, go to the IQ-5 IOT Non-Uniform Prints RAP. If the
problem is Lines, Streaks, or Bands, go to the IQ-13, Lines, Streaks, or Bands
RAP. If the problem is deletions, go to the IQ-8, Deletions RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-7
Image Quality
IQ-2
This RAP is intended to used when the IQ-1 Entry RAP indicates that the Imaging Electronics
is the cause of the IQ Defect.
The following definitions pertain to defects that can be generated in the video path:
Scrogged Image: A digital image defect. The digital data sent to the ROS is an incorrect
reproduction of the original document. These defects are usually well defined and have
definite edges. They may be subtle or very dramatic.
Initial Actions
To view samples of this type of defect, go to the Scrogged Images Samples section.
If the machine has an EHR PWB (Electronic Hole Removal PWB), especially if the problem
occurred after replacing or installing an EHR PWB, ensure the following:
If the machine has TAG 077 , ensure that the EHR PWB part number is 160K64610.
If the machine does not have TAG 077 , the EHR PWB can be part number 160K59430 or
160K64130. 160K64610 will not work in machines without TAG 077.
If the machine is a 460/470, the EHR PWB is unique and cannot be one of the older styles
above.
N
Reseat the EPC Memory SIMM or DIMM.
Select the [EPC Memory Test] [Start Test]. The test passes.
Y
N
Without TAG 077 Replace the EPC DRAM SIMMS PL 1.4A Item 6.
If the problem continues, go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB
Replacement RAP.
With TAG 077 Replace the EPC SRAM DIMM PL 1.4B Item 5. If the
problem continues, go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement
RAP.
On 460/470, replace the EPC SDRAM DIMM PL 1.4C Item 6. If the
problem continues, go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement
RAP.
Run copies/prints to re-test for defect. The IQ Defect is still present.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
Reseat the IPS1 daughter card. Re-run the [VCM/IPS1 Loop Test], then
[Start Test].
Observe the status area. The test passes.
Y
N
Switch off the machine power. Remove the IPS1 Daughter Card from
the machine. Switch on the machine power. Re-run the [VCM/IPS1
Loop Test], then [Start Test]
Observe the status area. The test passes.
Y
N
Go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
Replace the IPS1 Daughter Card (Autoseg PWB or EHR PWB) PL
1.4A Item 3 or PL 1.4B Item 1.
Run copies/prints to re-test for defect.
Observe the copies/prints. The IQ Defect is still present.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
IQ-3
Replace the Raster Output Scanner Video Cable PL 1.2A Item 4. Run copies/
prints to re-test for defect.
A
May 2003
3-8
C
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
D
Observe the copies/prints. The IQ Defect is still present.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the IPS1 Daughter Card (Autoseg PWB or EHR PWB) PL 1.4A Item 3 or
PL 1.4B Item 1.
Run copies/prints to re-test for defect.
Observe the copies/prints. The IQ Defect is still present.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
D
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
In printers, this problem can be caused by print drivers, ESS, or the Main Control PWB (even
when Video Path Diagnostics passes). Unless the defect matches one of the defects known to
be caused by the Main Control PWB, there is no way to diagnose it.
Before continuing, if defect is seen in print jobs, but not in any internal IOT test patterns, check
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Ensure that no ESS / Print Controller faults are occurring. If ESS Faults are occurring on a
LP machine, return to Service Call Procedures. If Print Controller faults are occurring on
DocuTech 65 /Docuprint 65, return to the DocuTech 65 service manual.
4.
Replace the Raster Output Scanner Video Cable PL 1.2A Item 4. Run copies/prints to re-test
for the defect.
Observe the copies/prints. The IQ Defect is still present.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
May 2003
3-9
Image Quality
IQ-3
NOTE: Installing a high altitude kit on machines that are not at high altitudes wont fix
jumping gap arcing. In most cases, it will actually make it worse.
The Signature Defects RAP is designed to be used for unique IQ defects that are easily identifiable.
Using REP 09-11, Photoreceptor Drive Module Cleaning Procedure, thoroughly clean all
surfaces of the Photoreceptor Drive Module. Observe the inside of the Xerographic
Module. Check for contamination, especially on the inside of the P/R Belt. If contaminated, replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
Check for a reoccurrence of the problem. The problem continues (Or, if this is the
second service call for this problem on this machine, answer Yes).
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Initial Actions
Be sure to enter this RAP from another RAP or procedure that refers to this RAP.
Definitions:
Jumping Gap Arcing - When debris in the Photoreceptor Drive Module passes underneath the P/R Belt and momentarily narrows the gap between the Donor Roll and the P/R
belt. There may be a arc, which causes the prominent defect. If is, however, usually limited to a small area on the page. Jumping Gap Arcing IQ Defect Samples (Smudges/
Smears), Figures 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6).
Check the Card Cage for possible shorting to the Developer HVPS. (09-370, 09-372, 09374, 09-376, and 09-386 faults may also occur with this problem) Perform the following:
1. Switch off the machine power. Remove all rear covers.
Jumping Gap Air Breakdown - Similar to Jumping Gap Arcing, but the arcing is not related
to debris narrowing the gap. It is usually related to high altitude conditions where the density of the air increases the likelihood of widespread donor to P/R Belt arcing. Usually is
widespread across the page. If it is occurring at low altitudes it is due to a narrow gap
between the Developer Donor Roll and the PR backer bar. Jumping Gap Air Breakdown
IQ Defect Samples (Smudges/Smears), Figures 7, 8, and 9.
2.
Remove the cover at the HCF end of the machine (the small narrow gray side panel
secured by 2 screws)
3.
4.
From the rear of the machine, locate the Card Cage hinge blocks that mount to the
IOT side frame member. Determine if the upper portion of the hinge blocks are tilted
inward, creating an uneven gap between the hinge block and the machine frame
member.
5.
The defect is a Jumping Gap Arcing or Jumping Gap Air Breakdown defect.
Y
N
The defect is Donor Debris Arcing.
Y
N
At this time there are no other defects checked in this RAP. Use the IQ Defect Samples Entry or IQ-1, IQ Entry RAP, for specific defect actions.
Loosen the top hinge pin screw and adjust the hinge block by placing a finger behind
the hinge block and pulling the hinge block towards you until it is parallel and tight to
the back frame flange.
6.
Loosen the bottom hinge pin screw and adjust the hinge block by placing a finger
behind the hinge block and pulling the hinge block towards you until it is parallel and
tight to the back frame flange.
7.
Swing open the Card Cage. Ensure the inside cover of the Card Cage is seated and
positioned correctly. Re-position the inside cover if necessary. Close and secure the
Card Cage.
8.
Donor Debris Arcing - Occurs when debris gets between the Donor Roll and P/R Belt.
(Donor Debris Arcing IQ Defect Samples).
Inspect all areas near the Developer Housing for any debris or fibers that may interfere with the housing.
Inspect the Xerographic Module for any debris/fibers, especially in the development
area.
If the problem continues, replace the Photoreceptor Drive Module PL 5.1A Item 2.
Review the definitions and defect samples of Jumping Gap Air Breakdown and Jumping Gap
Arcing if necessary.
Determine if the defect is Jumping Gap Air Breakdown or Jumping Gap Arcing. The
defect
looks like Jumping Gap Air Breakdown.
A
Image Quality
IQ-4
May 2003
3-10
Toner Dispenser
D
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Developer Housing
ROS
BTAC Noise
Toner Dispenser
Developer Housing
Charge HVPS
BTAC Noise
NOTE: Ignore any other parts that are in the Parts to Replace message
that are not in the list above.
The parts to replace message includes one or more from the above
list.
Y
N
Go to the 09-318 Without Exerciser Procedure Procedure.
The Xerographic Exerciser is displaying a Parts to Replace message.
There may be a single item, or several on the list. The first item is the main
suspect, but make a note of the other items for possible future reference.
Go to the RAP listed below for the part that was the first one listed in the
Xerographic Exerciser parts to replace message.
(Use this list for 15.x software)
If the problem continues, replace the Photoreceptor Drive Module PL 5.1A Item 2.
A
B
V0.042
May 2003
3-11
Image Quality
IQ-4
N
Obtain and install TAG 086 (L17.8.64 SW).
Ensure that the altitude setting in NVM is correct for the local altitude. Machines that have
this kit installed in VALO are set to 6000 feet. This may not have been adjusted for this
machine.
1.
In [NVM tab , NVM Tool], under the Mark Service, go to location 841.
2.
Ensure that the value is correct for the local altitude in feet.
NOTE: To convert from meters to feet, multiply the altitude in meters by 3.
Non-uniformity: Image density varies from one part of the copy/print to another. This defect is
easiest to see and more likely to appear on copies/prints with halftones that cover a large part
of the page.
Initial Actions
To view samples of this type of defect, go to the Non-Uniform Copies/Prints Samples section.
(DC or ST machines, Copying only) If this defect is only occurring with an original that
contains high frequency lines (4 lines per mm or greater), it is a normal condition.
If the Non-Uniformity appears as streaks or bands, go to the IQ-13 Lines, Bands, and
Streaks RAP.
3.
If the value was not correct, change the value to the correct altitude. Save the
change.
4.
Enter [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics]. Select [Set-Up], then [Start]. When
complete, ensure that the problem is resolved.
If any 09-XXX fault codes are present in the fault logs, troubleshoot them first.
Ensure that paper is fresh and in spec. Try a new ream of paper, if necessary.
(DC or ST machines, Copying only) If the defect is light areas or bands that occur in halftones, generally within 60mm of the lead edge or trail edge, check for TAG 016. If Tag
016 is not installed, order and install Tag 016. Until Tag 016 is installed, perform the following to help overcome the problem:
NOTE: While cleaning the pads on the HVPS, note whether the pads are solid or ribbed.
This information might be needed later.
Perform the 09-E Developer HVPS Checkout. If no problem is found, return here.
a.
On the User Interface display, select [Image Adjustment] [More Image Quality].
Increase the altitude setting by 1000 feet. In [NVM tab , NVM Tool], under the Mark Service, go to location 841, increase the value by 1000. Enter [Marking tab , Xerographic
Diagnostics]. Select [Set-Up], then [Start].
b.
On the Sharpness scale, press [Down] once to move the indicator down one increment into Soft.
If the Developer HVPS had ribbed pads, order a new Developer HVPS PL 1.2A Item 7.
c.
Select [Save]. Under the More Image Quality button, it should now say Sharpness: 1.
Check the Card Cage for possible shorting to the Developer HVPS. (09-370, 09-372, 09374, 09-376, and 09-386 faults may also occur with this problem) Perform the following:
d.
e.
If the copies are acceptable, return to Service Call Procedures. If the copies still
have the defect, repeat steps a-d so that the sharpness is: -2. If the problem continues, go to step f.
1.
2.
Remove the cover at the HCF end of the machine (the small narrow gray side panel
secured by 2 screws)
f.
3.
g.
4.
From the rear of the machine, locate the Card Cage hinge blocks that mount to the
IOT side frame member. Determine if the upper portion of the hinge blocks are tilted
inward, creating an uneven gap between the hinge block and the machine frame
member.
On the Lighten/Darken scale, press [Down] once to move the indicator down one
increment into Darken.
h.
Select [Save]. Under the Image Quality button, it should now say Darken: -1.
i.
If the copies are acceptable, return to Service Call Procedures. If the copies still
have the defect, repeat steps f-i so that the Darken is: -2.
5.
Loosen the top hinge pin screw and adjust the hinge block by placing a finger behind
the hinge block and pulling the hinge block towards you until it is parallel and tight to
the back frame flange.
6.
Loosen the bottom hinge pin screw and adjust the hinge block by placing a finger
behind the hinge block and pulling the hinge block towards you until it is parallel and
tight to the back frame flange.
7.
Swing open the Card Cage. Ensure the inside cover of the Card Cage is seated and
positioned correctly. Re-position the inside cover if necessary. Close and secure the
Card Cage.
8.
Image Quality
IQ-4, IQ-5
May 2003
3-12
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Y
N
The problem only appears in halftone images.
Y
N
Inspect for high levels of contamination on the Image Module and underside of
document glass. There is a high level of contamination.
Y
N
The defect occurs when making copies from the document glass.
Y
N
Replace the Document Glass Frame PL 3.1 Item 5.
D
Perform the REP 14-3 Scanner Cleaning Procedure. If the problem continues,
return to the beginning of this RAP.
The problem is related to the original. Discuss with the customer the IQ options
which may help improve the IQ of these types of originals.
Return to the beginning of this RAP and answer NO to the statement that this is related to
a colored original.
In [IIT tab , Scanner Lamp Profile], select [Lamp On], then [Start].
Observe the test results. The Lamp Profile checks OK. (The green
line stays within the indicated range.)
Y
N
Replace the Image Module PL 3.2 Item 3 .
If the problem continues, go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB
Replacement RAP.
E
May 2003
3-13
H
Image Quality
IQ-5
H
If the Xerographic Module has been exposed the room light for under 1 hour,
the PR Belt should recover after a short period of time. If it was exposed for an
hour or more, the PR Belt will need several hours of recovery time (overnight).
If the problem continues after sufficient recovery time, replace the Xerographic
Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
In [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], run 5 prints of the 1.75" Lead Edge Black Band pattern.
NOTE: Solid area should only be evaluated with the print on a white flat surface (use
paper behind if necessary).
Compare the solid area to the V patch on Side 2 of test pattern 82E13100 (8.5 x 11") or
82E13110 (A4). The relative quality of the prints should not be worse than the V patch on
the test pattern. The darkness gradually changes from IB-OB (ramps) and is objectionable.
Y
N
In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select [Exerciser], then [Start Test].
Observe the test results. The test passes.
Y
N
The Xerographic Exerciser is displaying a Parts to Replace message. There
may be a single item, or several on the list. The first item is the main suspect,
but make a note of the other items for possible future reference.
Go to the RAP listed below for the part that was the first one listed in the Xerographic Exerciser parts to replace message.
(This list for 15.x software)
E
I
J
Image Quality
IQ-5
In [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], select the Manufacturing pattern. Make 100
prints. Then, enter [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics]. Select [Set-up], then
[Start Test]. In [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], run 5 prints of the 1.75" Lead Edge
Black Band pattern.
Compare the solid area to the V patch on Side 2 of test pattern 82E13100 (8.5 x 11")
or 82E13110 (A4). The relative quality of the prints should not be worse than the V
patch on the test pattern. The solid area on the prints is now OK.
Y
N
If the problem continues, go to the 09-A, Charge HVPS Checkout RAP.
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
In [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], select 106 dpi 50% Halftone. Make prints to help
characterize the problem.
Observe the prints. The darkness is lighter or darker in the center of the print than
it is on the IB and OB areas of the prints.
Y
N
Replace the following in order, one-at-a-time, until the problem is resolved:
May 2003
3-14
K
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Inspect the prints. There is a honeycomb defect and it is seen only on side 2 of duplex
jobs.
Y
N
Inspect the prints. The defect is a woodgrain type pattern in the halftones.
Y
N
Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1 .
Replace the ROS Assembly PL 5.2 Item 3.
Replace the Transfer/Detack HVPS PL 1.2A Item 6.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-15
Image Quality
IQ-5
B
Replace the BTAC Sensor PL 5.1B Item 3.
Initial Actions
Ensure that there are no other defects on the copies/prints. If other defects are occurring,
do not troubleshoot for dark copies/prints.
If any 09-XXX fault codes are present in the fault logs, troubleshoot them first.
Ensure that paper is fresh and in spec. Try a new ream of paper, if necessary.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: If a 09-XXX fault occurs when running Xerographic Set-Up at anytime in this RAP, go to
the RAP for that fault to continue troubleshooting.
Initial Actions
If any 09-XXX fault codes are present in the fault logs, troubleshoot them first.
Ensure that paper is fresh and in spec. Try a new ream of paper, if necessary.
In [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], select Manufacturing test pattern. Make 100 prints.
In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics]. Select [Set-Up], then [Start Test].
Observe the test results. The Xero Set-Up completed successfully without a fault or failure.
Y
N
Go to the RAP for the indicated fault code.
The problem is occurring only with the reproduction of colors other than
black or gray.
Y
N
Replace the Document Glass Frame PL 3.1 Item 5.
Replace the Illumination Lamp Module PL 3.2 Item 7.
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Go to the IQ-7 IOT On-Site Diagnostic Procedure.
Go to the IQ-7 IOT On-Site Diagnostic Procedure.
NOTE: Solid area should only be evaluated with the print on a white flat surface (use paper
behind if necessary).
Compare the solid area on the 5th print to the V patch on Side 2 of test pattern 82E13100 (8.5
x 11") or 82E13110 (A4). The relative quality of the prints should not be worse than the V patch
on the test pattern. Some or all of the solid on the print is worse than the V patch.
Y
N
The solid area appears to be in spec. The problem was corrected by running Xero SetUp.
The darkness gradually changes from IB-OB (ramps) and is objectionable.
Y
N
In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select [Exerciser], then [Start Test].
Observe the test results. The test passes.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-17
Image Quality
IQ-7
A
Y
N
The Xerographic Exerciser is displaying a Parts to Replace message. There may be
a single item, or several on the list. The first item is the main suspect, but make a
note of the other items for possible future reference.
Go to the RAP listed below for the part that was the first one listed in the Xerographic
Exerciser parts to replace message.
Observe the prints. The darkness is lighter or darker in the center of the print than it is
on the IB and OB areas of the prints.
Y
N
Replace the following in order, one-at-a-time, until the problem is resolved:
Developer HVPS (may say Developer PS), go to the 09-G, Developer HVPS
Checkout RAP
The Xerographic Module (may say XRM) can fail the Exerciser for 3 reasons:
XRM (Belt)
XRM (Cleaner)
XRM (Ground)
Go to the 09-J, Xerographic Module Checkout RAP
General Image Noise - There may be an IQ problem which could lead to incorrect results in the Xerographic Exerciser. Run some 106 DPI Halftones and
check for banding. If banding exists, go to IQ-1, Image Quality Entry RAP.
Clean
WARNING
Switch off the machine power and unplug from the wall outlet.
Possible poor contact between the Developer Housing and the Developer HVPS. This
contact is made by a pair of compression springs (Developer HVPS Contact Springs) on
the inboard end of the Developer Housing which push directly against the pads of the
Developer HVPS. On most machines, the two springs are covered by a small plastic
shield to prevent them from being damaged.
Check the following:
Remove the Developer Housing from the machine. See Figure 1 and clean the
Donor Roll Shaft contact area with Scotch Brite, (43P74) or Pumice Paper (43P46).
Examine the two high voltage springs to determine if they are bent or snagged.
Check the plastic shield that covers them for damage. The shield is spring loaded,
and it should move in and out smoothly without catching on the two high voltage
springs.
Clean Shaft
(especially discolored area)
If OK, access the Developer HVPS. With the machine power off, wiggle the Developer HVPS slightly to improve the contact of the springs to the HVPS.
Image Quality
IQ-7
May 2003
3-18
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
IQ-8 Deletions
This procedure is intended to assist in troubleshooting causes for deletions.
Blank Segments: Segments or strips of the copies/prints are white (color of stock).
Trail Edge Deletion: A deletion that occurs near the trail edge of the copies/prints.
E
Check if the machine has TAG 296 or TAG 080 (Electronic Hole Removal)
AND the defect is occurring within 20mm of the edge of the paper. The
machine has TAG 296 or TAG 080 AND the defect is occurring within
20mm of the edge of the paper.
Y
N
Go to the 05-E, DADF Document Size Sensing RAP. If no problem is
found, return here. (use the back () feature on the browser)
The defect has been corrected.
Y
N
Replace the Document Glass Frame PL 3.1 Item 5.
Return to Service Call Procedures.
If the deletion is in the shape of a line, streak, or band, go to the IQ-13, Lines, Streaks, and
Bands RAP.
The problem may be caused by the Electronic Black Hole Removal system incorrectly identifying black holes. Check/perform the following:
Check the NVM locations in Table 1 and confirm that they are correct.
NOTE: For small deletions that resemble white spots, go to the IQ-14, IOT Spots RAP.
Initial Actions
Ensure that the Registration Transport is fully latched (Jam Clearance lever 2)
Ensure that all the paper tray side guides are set correctly.
If necessary, the job may have to be run from the Document Glass
instead of the DADF.
If there is any paper damage visible, go to the OF-2, Paper Damage RAP.
If any 09-XXX fault codes are present in the fault logs, troubleshoot them first.
If this continues to be a problem, if the value (in Table 1) for Threshold is changed to 0, Electronic Black Hole Removal will be disabled.
Black holes will no longer be removed.
Ensure that paper is fresh and in spec. Try a new ream of paper, if necessary.
NOTE: If problem is solved by using fresh paper, and the customer cannot avoid using
conditioned paper, the problem can be corrected by installing a Paper Tray Heater Kit,
TAG 299 (IOT) or TAG 300 (HCF).
Change the orientation of the original from LEF to SEF (will affect stapling)
A
May 2003
3-19
Image Quality
IQ-8
The defect occurs along the IB or OB edges, approximately 80-140mm from the trail
edge of the paper, and is worst with light weight paper, 11x17 or A3 paper, and/or
high humidity conditions
b.
The deletion occurs in the body of the print, has a maximum width of 10mm, a minimum length of 20mm, tend to be long and thin, and is worst with light weight paper,
11x17 or A3 paper, and/or high humidity conditions
In [Copier Sys tab , Component Control], select [IOT Paper Path] [Xerographic Blower] [Output On].
Check the Xerographic Blower. Ensure that it is working. The blower
is working.
Y
N
40PPM: Go to the OF-4, Noise, Odor, Heat, and Dirt RAP to diagnose the Xerographic Blower circuit.
65PPM and 55PPM: Go to the OF-5, Noise, Odor, Heat, and Dirt
RAP to diagnose the Xerographic Blower circuit.
IQ-8
If the deletions are tear-dropped shape and appear in clusters, replace the Developer Housing PL 5.1B Item 5.
If the deletions are horseshoe shaped, replace the Transfer/Detack HVPS PL 1.2A Item 6.
Run the job in duplex mode with the image put on side 2
Refer to Figure 1. Move the Skew Adjustment Lever one position at a time, first one
direction and then the other direction until the deletions are gone. When the deletions are eliminated, check for acceptable skew.
The deletions were eliminated and acceptable skew was maintained.
Y
N
Replace the Registration Transport PL 4.1A Item 8.
Inspect the prints. The deletion repeats in the same location only on
every other print when running 8.5 x 11" (A4) simplex prints.
Y
N
Inspect the prints. The deletions repeat every 157mm in the process direction (LE - TE).
Y
N
Check the following:
Open the front door and access the Prefuser Transport PL 6.1A Item 1 .
Check the Prefuser Transport part number. It is located on the bar code label (the
transport will have to be removed to see it). The machine has a Prefuser Transport with a part number 22K63813 or higher.
Y
N
Replace the Prefuser Transport PL 6.1A Item 1.
K
Replace the Duplex Transport PL 6.1A Item 2.
The deletion occurs mostly in halftones and is located near the trail
edge.
Y
N
Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
F
G H
I
Image Quality
May 2003
3-20
M
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
M
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
O
Y
N
Ensure that the Fuser Drive Motor is biased clockwise in its mounting. If the
problem continues, perform the following:
Check/replace the following items one-at-a-time, until the problem is resolved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Change the orientation of the original from LEF to SEF (will affect stapling)
Image
Processing
Service NVM
Name
Location
Value
MinVar
30
MaxVar
31
16
Black
32
28
Threshold
33
360
Observe the copies/prints. The side one image includes halftones or solid areas.
Y
N
Refer to Figure 1. Move the Skew Adjustment Lever one position at a time, first one
direction and then the other direction until the deletions are gone. When the deletions are
eliminated, check for acceptable skew.
The deletions were eliminated and acceptable skew was maintained.
Y
N
Run several copies/prints in simplex mode. Take the output and place in the Bypass
Tray (Tray 5) or another tray if there is no bypass. Place the copies/prints in the tray
such that the backside can be imaged. Make copies/prints again in simplex mode so
that side 2 is now imaged.
Check the copies/prints for the deletion on side 2. The deletion still occurs.
Y
N
There may be paper damage occurring during a duplex pass. Check the Duplex
Transport for correct operation/damage. Repair or replace the Duplex Transport as necessary PL 6.1A Item 2.
Inspect the copies for visible paper damage There is damage to the paper.
N
O
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-21
Image Quality
IQ-8
Full Left
Center
Full Right
Right
Center
Left Center
Image Quality
IQ-8
May 2003
3-22
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Blur: Images that are not clear, appear out of focus, not sharp.
NOTE: If blurs occur approximately 80mm from trail edge when using 3 hole punched
paper on a DT65/DP65, disable stock size checking in DocuSP Printer Manager.
2.
From the menu bar, select [Machine] [Download], then [Yes] after the question Initiate NVM Download?.
Deformed Image: Gross defects where the image has been incorrectly reproduced.
Ghosting: Similar to residual image, but the image appears within an image instead of the
background area.
Ragged Halftones: Gray areas have small-scale texture, line or herringbone appearance.
Ragged Lines: Lines that should be straight and smooth are ragged, or have bumpy or
ragged edges.
Torn Image: The image appears to be stretched or distorted in a band that runs from IB to
OB on the copy. For this problem, go to the IQ-20, Torn Image RAP.
Smear: The toner in an image is disturbed and appears as a smear on the copies/prints.
Scrogged Image: A digital image defect. The digital data sent to the ROS an incorrect
reproduction of the original document. These defects are usually well defined and have
definite edges. They may be subtle or very dramatic.
3.
4.
5.
Initial Actions
a.
b.
Type in 24 (or 8 if older 40ppm machine with an Atlanta 95 PWB) into the
[Current Value] field
If any 09-XXX fault codes are present in the fault logs, troubleshoot them first.
Ensure that paper is fresh and in spec. Try a new ream of paper, if necessary.
c.
d.
Exit diagnostics, then power off / power on for the NVM changes to take
effect.
Make some copies/prints, and hardstop the machine before the image passes the transfer
zone.
Remove the Xerographic Module and view the PR Belt. There is image seen on the
Photoreceptor Belt.
Y
N
Replace the Raster Output Scanner Video Cable PL 1.2A Item 4.
See if the problem continues. The problem continues.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Decrease the magnification by 10% (unless the problem is occurring when running a
mag of 101% to 110% or 201% to 210%, then increase the mag by 10%).
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-23
B
Image Quality
IQ-9, IQ-10
A
Make copies to check for the defect. The defect moved with the image.
Y
N
If the defect does not move with the magnification change, the problem is not
related to the IIT. Return to the first step of the RAP and answer YES to the first
question.
Inspect the original defect copies for a torn image. (IB-OB band with well defined
straight edges and an image that appears to be stretched within the band). Refer a
sample of this type of defect in the IQ Defects and Samples section (IB-OB Bands).
The defect is a torn image defect.
Y
N
Inspect the original defect copies. There are smears on the defect copies.
Y
N
There is a blur or out of focus problem.
Perform the following:
Ensure that the document is smooth and flat, that it would lie flat
against the document glass.
E
The defect occurs in the DADF mode.
Y
N
Defect may be related the customers document. Question the customer about the nature of the document used when the problem
occurred. If not related to the document, check the Document Glass
Cover/Document Output Tray and Document Glass Pad for damage,
that is seating correctly against the document glass when closed.
Repair or replace as necessary PL 2.1A Item 7 , PL 2.1A Item 8.
NOTE: If a message appears when trying to make copies from the document
glass about raising the Document Scanner, you may need to change the original input type. In the Image Quality tab on the UI Display, select [Original Input],
[Manual Platen Input], then select the original size of the document being copied.
Inspect the copies. The smear is present on the copies.
Y
N
Make 3 copies using the Document Feeder mode. The
smear
is
present on the copies.
Y
N
The defect is not being reproduced. One of the following may be
occurring:
IQ-10
Use a print of the Quadrille test pattern made in the beginning of the RAP and
place it on the document glass. Make 3 copies.
Inspect the Document Glass Frame and the Document Glass for damage
or defects. The Document Glass Frame and the Document Glass are
OK.
Y
N
Replace the Document Glass Frame PL 3.1 Item 5.
A
B
C
D
Image Quality
If any actions were completed, make copies and check for reoccurrence of
the defect. The problem is still occurring.
Y
N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
still
E
May 2003
3-24
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Go To
IQ-11
Smears/Blurs
Smears Procedure
Scrogged Image
Ragged Halftones
Smears Procedure
Some IQ samples of Smears/Smudges are in the IQ Samples section. Use this link to view the
samples and descriptions of some known causes - Smeared Copies/Prints.
In [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], select 2 On 2 Off Perpendicular Lines and 50% 106dpi
Halftones to test for smears. Select the appropriate paper size, tray, and run mode.
1.
2.
Check for contamination or something in the paper path that may be contacting or rubbing
against the paper.
3.
If narrow, dark smears run IB-OB on the 106 dpi 50% Halftones and occur all across the
page LE-TE, replace the Developer Housing PL 5.1B Item 5.
4.
If the defect only appears on every other print on 8.5 x 11 inch or A4 paper, replace the
Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1. Check the error log for occurrences of 04-701
Faults. If any have occurred, go to the 04-201 RAP. If not, check the operation of the
machine exhaust blowers. If not operating correctly or if this problem has occurred more
than once, go to the OF-4 NOHAD RAP (40ppm) or OF-5 NOHAD RAP (65ppm and
55ppm).
5.
Check the location of the smear. If it is located approximately 55mm from the lead edge of
the paper, check that the Prefuser Transport is located correctly. Check again for smears.
Replace the Prefuser Transport PL 6.1A Item 1 if the problem continues.
6.
Check the location of the smear. If it is located approximately 80mm or less from the trail
edge of the paper, check for high paper curl. Load fresh paper. Check for any type of
obstructions in the transfer area. If the problem continues, replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
If the machine has an EHR PWB, ensure that the correct version is on the machine. If the
machine has TAG 077, the EHR PWB should be part number 160K64610. If the machine
does not have TAG 077, the EHR PWB should be either 160K59430 or 160K64130.
If the machine has an EHR PWB, switch off the machine power and remove the EHR
PWB. See if the problem is resolved. Install a new EHR PWB as necessary (PLx.x).
If the machine does not have an TAG 015 (Atlanta Gold Main Control PWB), reseat the
IPS1 Daughter Card (Autoseg PWB) on the Main Control PWB.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-25
Image Quality
IQ-10
This procedure is intended to assist in troubleshooting causes for Ghosting or residual image
problems.
C
In [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests], select [IOT] [Type 2], then [Start].
Observe the test results. The Type 2 test passed.
Y
N
Go to the 03-813 RAP.
NOTE: Ghosting, residual image, and offsetting are all assumed to be IOT caused problems.
The IIT (Scanner) is not known to be a cause of these types of defects.
Ghosting: Similar to residual image, but the image appears within an image instead of the
background area
A reload defect is occurring. Reload occurs when a large amount of toner is removed
from the donor roll of the Developer Housing before it can be fully replenished.
Compare the B and C patches on the copies to the S and T patches on side 2 of the test
pattern. The ghosting on the copies is worse than the ghosting on the S and T
patches on side 2 of the test pattern.
Y
N
This is an expected level of reload under most conditions.
Enter [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics]. Select [Set-Up], then [Start Test].
When complete, check the level of reload ghosting again. The ghosting on the copies
is worse than the ghosting on the S and T patches on side 2 of the test pattern.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Initial Actions
If any 09-XXX fault codes are present in the fault logs, troubleshoot them first.
Ensure that paper is fresh and in spec. Try a new ream of paper, if necessary.
Observe the defect prints. The defect is a ghosting problem (a negative image of a previous image appears within another image).
Y
N
The defect repeats every 159.5mm.
Y
N
Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
Make 5 copies of test pattern 82E13100 (8.5x11) or 82E13110 (A4).
Look at the B and C patches on the copies. A ghost approximately the size of the A1 and
A2 patches is visible in the B or C patch.
Y
N
In [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests], select [IOT] [Type 1], then [Start].
Observe the test results. The Type 1 test passed.
Y
N
Observe the fault display in the IIOC Self-Test screen. An
03-813
fault
is
detected.
Y
N
If some other fault is detected, make a note and evaluate the faults effect on
other machine problems that might be occurring. If the problem continues,
replace the IIOC PWB W8A1 PL 1.5 Item 2.
Go to the 03-813 RAP.
In [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests], select [IOT] [Type 2], then [Start].
Observe the test results. The Type 2 test passed.
IQ-11
D
May 2003
3-26
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
D
Y
N
Go to the 03-813 RAP.
N
This is an expected level of reload under most conditions.
Enter [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics]. Select [Set-Up], then [Start Test].
When complete, check the level of reload ghosting again. The ghosting on the copies is
worse than the ghosting on the S and T patches on side 2 of the test pattern.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Replace the Go to 09-K Developer Housing Checkout RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-27
Image Quality
IQ-11
Digital Background: Background that is on the original, but enhanced during copying.
Initial Actions
If any 09-XXX fault codes are present in the fault logs, troubleshoot them first.
Ensure that paper is fresh and in spec. Try a new ream of paper, if necessary.
IQ-12
A
May 2003
3-28
C
This problem occurs due to a defect in the design of the chip in image processing
hardware. Because the problem is in the chip design, replacing the Main Control
PWB will NOT correct the problem. Suggest to the customer that if they increase or
decrease the reduction by 1%, the background will be gone. This problem will be
resolved with the release of L18 software.
A
B
V0.042
Replace the Illumination Lamp Module PL 3.2 Item 7 and the Illumination
Lamp Power Supply PL 3.2 Item 5.
May 2003
3-29
Image Quality
IQ-12
Initial Actions
Ensure that the Document Glass is cleaned, especially the CVT Glass. This is the MAIN
cause of black lines/streaks that run LE-TE when copies made in DADF mode. Refer to
REP 05-1.
N
Check the machine for Tag 15. The machine has TAG 015.
Y
N
In [Faults/Counters tab , Faults], check the Last 40 Faults for any 14-314, 14315, 14-316, 14-317, 14-318, 14-319, or 14-320 faults.
There are 14-314, 14-315, 14-316, 14-317, 14-318, 14-319, or 14-320 faults
in the Last 40.
Y
N
There was a false failure of the SCVM Digital Test. Return to the step
where the SCVM Digital Test was run and answer YES.
NOTE: If dirt on the CVT glass has been a problem, a CVT Cleaning Kit can be ordered
for the customer (673K52480).
To help the customer see contamination on the glass, and also reduce the amount of contamination on the glass, ensure that the machine has had a CVT Dirt Reduction Kit PL 3.1
Item 6 installed.
For examples of Lines, Bands, Streaks, refer to the IQ Defect Samples Entry Section.
If deletion bands are occurring in DADF mode on the Trail Edge, the original size may not
be sensed correctly. It may be a non-standard size. Use the Document Scanner Size
Sensing screens on the UI in [Tools] to adjust for any unusual documents.
Ensure that paper is fresh and in spec. Try a new ream of paper, if necessary.
If the defect is light areas or bands that occur in halftones, generally within 60mm of the
lead edge or trail edge, it may be due to an document which has irregularities. Check the
machine for TAG 016. If tag 16 is not installed, order and install kit # 606K57921 which
includes a new CVT Drive-on-glass Roll that improves the performance of irregular documents.
NOTE: Not all IOT defects will always reproduce on the internal IOT test patterns. The following couple of steps help verify whether the problem is related
to the IIT.
The following definitions are used in this procedure and are the types of defects this RAP will
diagnose:
Lines: A straight and narrow defect that resembles a line. The line may be dark, or a white
or light streak.
Band: Wider than a line or streak, usually run IB-OB. Can be light or dark.
High Frequency Banding: Closely spaced lines that run IB-OB, but repeat at such a high
frequency that the bands are less than 2mm apart, and occurs all the way across the
page.
Observe the defect copies and determine if the defect is present on all copies
of each original. The defect appears on all copies of an original and in the
same location on every copy.
Y
N
The problem is not an IIT problem. Each original is scanned once, and any
defect in scanning would be reproduced on all copies of each original.
Return to the first step of the RAP and answer YES to the first question.
Decrease the magnification by 10% (unless the problem is occurring when running a mag of 101% to 110% or 201% to 210%, then increase the mag by
10%).
Make copies to check for the defect. The defect appears and moved with
the image.
Y
N
If the defect does not move with the magnification change, and stays in
the same location, the problem is not related to the IIT. Return to the first
step of the RAP and answer YES to the first question.
IQ-13
A
May 2003
3-30
D
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
If the defect did not appear again, it may be an intermittent Main Control
PWB problem. If the defect appears as a very narrow black line (similar to
dirt on CVT Glass, ensure that the CVT Glass has been cleaned), or a
series of short lines, side-by-side, so that they appear to look like a gray
band that runs IB-OB, go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement
RAP.
NOTE: If a message appears when trying to make copies from the document
glass about raising the Document Scanner, you may need to change the original input type. In the Image Quality tab on the UI Display, select [Original Input],
[Manual Platen Input], then select the original size of the document being copied.
Observe copies with the defect. The lines, bands, or streaks are running
from LE to TE.
Y
N
The 14-A Illumination Checkout has already been performed for this
problem.
Y
N
Go to the 14-A Illumination Checkout RAP. Return to this RAP if the
problem is not corrected.
14-700
14-702
14-703/704
14-712
14-713
May 2003
3-31
Image Quality
IQ-13
NOTE: It is assumed that if the defect is described as a line, streak, or band, that the defect
has a shape that would have a much longer length than width.
Look at the lines, streaks, or bands on the prints and their direction or how they are oriented on
the page (the direction of the length of the line, streak, or band). The line, streak, or band
defect runs LE to TE across the copies/prints.
Y
N
Go to the IB-OB Bands area to view samples of these types of defects.
The defect only occurs on every other copy/print and is in the same location.
Y
N
Observe the 50% Halftone prints for a condition that looks high frequency banding.
Check for closely spaced (less than 3mm) lines or bands that run IB-OB. The
defect appears to be high frequency banding.
Y
N
In [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select [Exerciser], then [Start Test].
Observe the test results. Fault codes or failures are indicated.
Y
N
The defect occurs at regularly spaced intervals either within a page
or between pages.
Y
N
Go to the 09-K Developer Housing Checkout RAP.
The defect repeats every 42.6mm (40ppm) or every 48.5mm (65ppm
and 55ppm).
Y
N
The lines are diagonal to the edges of the paper.
Y
N
Go to IQ-19, IOT Motion Quality RAP.
NOTE: Ignore any message that indicates Xerographic Module Ground Noise,
General Image Noise, or BTAC Noise. Go to the first part that is listed after the
colon (:)
Go to the RAP listed below for the part that was the first one listed in the Xerographic Exerciser parts to replace message.
Developer HVPS, go to the 09-G, Developer HVPS Checkout RAP
IQ-13
F
G H
Image Quality
I
May 2003
3-32
L
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
L
Y
N
Check the drive belt on the Photoreceptor Drive Module PL 5.1A Item
2 . The belt is visible through an opening behind the Detack HVPS.
Ensure that the belt is correctly on the idler roll and has not slipped
off on to the shaft.
The belt is OK.
Y
N
Repair/replace as necessary PL 5.1A Item 2.
This table can be used to isolate lines on copies/prints that are caused by fuser stripper fingers
(if more than one line is present). There are six stripper fingers. The farthest OB finger is
labeled #1 on this table. The most IB is labeled #6. For instance, if two lines on the copies/
prints are separated by 76mm, from the table it can be determined that this is the distance
between stripper fingers #3 and #4. Therefore, the lines are most likely caused by the Fuser
Module stripper fingers. Another test of reasonableness, would be to line up the streaks with
fingers #3 and #4 on the Fuser Module.
There are many mechanical and software problems that can cause this defect.
If the machine is overtoned or the toner concentration is above the 7-8% range, the process
controls will maintain it at that value. If detoning of the machine is required, further in-depth
troubleshooting is needed to identify a root cause of the overtoning.
Use the IQ-2 Image Quality Checkout RAP to evaluate the copies/prints.
What fault codes are recorded in the error log? Troubleshoot any/all 09-xx fault codes per
the appropriate RAPs.
All of these can contribute to short horizontal streaks. Continue below.
If the machine is in the NASG or FX markets and this is the first time through this procedure, check for defective PR Belt. Perform the Out of Spec PR Belt Checkout and return
here when complete.
2.
If the machine has v5.07 or v5.08 software, ensure that the following two NVM values are
correct:
1 (OB)
6 (IB)
1 (OB)
N/A
42mm
89mm
165mm
212mm
254mm
202mm
42mm
N/A
47mm
123mm
170mm
89mm
47mm
N/A
76mm
123mm
165mm
165mm
123mm
76mm
N/A
47mm
89mm
212mm
170mm
123mm
47mm
N/A
42mm
6 (IB)
254mm
202mm
165mm
89mm
42mm
N/A
4.
5.
6.
V0.042
3.
May 2003
3-33
Check the Developer Top Cover. Check the date/bar code label on the back of the Developer Housing assembly. If the Developer Housing was built:
Between 09-24/98 and 09/17/99 without Tag 088 - Replace the Developer Housing
Top Cover (Tag 088) PL 5.1B Item 16
After 07/17/99 with Tag 088 - the Developer Housing and Top Cover are OK.
Detone procedure - To be used when the problem root cause has been identified and corrected (not needed if already replaced Developer Housing):
IQ-13
In June 1999, some PR Belts were manufactured that had a high residual charge problem.
This problem may contribute to:
Initial Actions
Check the following:
NOTE: Up to 10% of the machines with one of these PR Belts will experience a severe
enough problem to cause a service call.
On machines where one of the above symptoms is occurring, remove the Xerographic Module
from the machine and examine the inside of the photoreceptor belt along the ground strip. The
lot number is on the inside of the belt, repeated at about 300mm spacing. Check if the lot number is one of the following:
210082xxxx
210084xxxx
210086xxxx
210087xxxx
Ensure that the Developer Collector Tube is connected and is not clogged.
If the Xerographic Module does not have one of the above lot numbers, then an out of spec PR
Belt would not be suspected. Return to the IQ-13 IOT On-Site Diagnostic Procedure.
If the Xerographic Module has a photoreceptor belt with one of the above lot numbers, replace
the Xerographic Module with one from the customers inventory, or order one and ask the customer to replace it on arrival. All Xerographic Modules should be returned through the normal
return process using the shipping box and return label.
NOTE: Not all IOT defects will always reproduce on the internal IOT test patterns. The following couple of steps help verify whether the problem is related
to the IIT.
To help identify which Xerographic Modules might have a high residual photoreceptors, the
pack date can be used. The pack date is listed on the shipping box, usually on one side above
the big red X, and also on the bar code label which is on the Xerographic Module. If the pack
date is from June 15, 1999 to July 15, 1999, the Xerographic Module MIGHT have a high residual photoreceptor. The belt should be checked before it is installed in a machine
Observe the defect copies and determine if the defect is present on all copies
of each original. The defect appears on all copies of an original and in the
same location on every copy.
Y
N
The problem not an IIT problem. Each original is scanned once, and any
defect in scanning would be reproduced on all copies of each original.
Return to the step labeled IOT/IIT Check and answer YES to the question.
NOTE: Not all Xerographic Modules built in this time period have defective photoreceptor
belts.
Decrease the magnification by 10% (unless the problem is occurring when running a mag of 101% to 110% or 201% to 210%, then increase the mag by
10%).
Make copies to check for the defect. The defect moved with the image.
Y
N
If the defect does not move with the magnification change, the problem is
not related to the IIT. Return to the step labeled IOT/IIT Check and
answer YES to the question.
The defect occurs in the manual platen mode.
A
Image Quality
IQ-13, IQ-14
May 2003
3-34
C
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
D
Y
N
Inspect the prints. The defect is white spots in halftones or solid areas.
Y
N
Inspect the prints. Determine if the spots, in any way, look like they might
be generated digitally by the imaging system. That is, do they appear regular or have a pattern. See Figure 13 (IQ Defect Samples, Structured
Background) for an example.
The defects appear to have been digitally generated.
Y
N
Inspect the prints. The defect resembles a smear or smudge or
is similar to the defects in the Smudges, Smears section of
Smeared Copies/Prints.
Y
N
Inspect the Developer Collector Tube.
Ensure that it is correctly connected to the Developer Housing
and is not clogged. The Developer Collector Tube is OK.
Y
N
Repair or replace as necessary Developer Collector Tube
PL 5.1B Item 7.
Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1. When set-up
is complete, enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern]. Run 4
prints (11", A4) of the [Blank Page] test pattern. Lay the prints
out in order.
Inspect the prints for spot defects. The spots are gone.
Y
N
Paper path related spots. Try to characterize the spots as
toner or some other material. Inspect the paper path for
toner contamination or any other source of foreign material. Clean or repair as necessary.
Perform the REP 05-1 DADF Cleaning Procedure, and the REP 143 Scanner Cleaning Procedure.
If the defect is occurring in both of these modes and is not an original problem,
it is not an IIT defect. Return to IQ-1 and repeat that procedure. See if the
defect can be classified differently
Inspect the spots closely. Touch the spot with a fingertip. There is a small
dark spot in the center of the white spots and can be felt as a raised area
on the print.
Y
N
Enter [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration]. Select [Software].
Inspect the software level of the machine. The System Software version is 1.10 or greater.
Y
N
Upgrade the machine software to the latest level available.
Inspect the original defect copies or determine the run mode in which the defect copies were
occurring. The defect ONLY occurs on side 2 of duplex jobs.
Y
N
In [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], make 6 (8.5 x 11" or A4) prints of [Blank Page] and 6
prints of 106 dpi [50% Halftones]. Discard the first two prints. Lay out the prints 3, 4, 5, 6 in
order.
Inspect the prints for spot defects. Carefully check if the spots repeat ONLY on every
other print. The defect occurs in the same position on every other print.
Y
N
The defect is visible only on the backside of the prints.
Follow REP 09-11, Photoreceptor Drive Module Cleaning Procedure and thoroughly clean the Photoreceptor Drive Module.
D
E
V0.042
D
May 2003
3-35
H
Image Quality
IQ-14
H
Switch the machine power off / on. Run the copies/prints again and check
for white spots.
Inspect the copies/prints. White spots are still present on the copies/
prints.
Y
N
Go to the 03-G, Main Control PWB Replacement RAP.
Prepare to hardstop the machine. Use an interlock cheater in the Front
Door Interlock Switch and observe the paper as it passes the Prefuser
Transport. Just as the trail edge of the paper passes into the Duplex
Transport, remove the interlock cheater. Enter [Marking tab , Print Test
Pattern]. Run 4 prints (11", A4) of the 106dpi 50% Halftone.
Observe the print for spots. White spots are present on the print.
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
Observe the back side of the copy/print for spots. Spots are present on the back side of
the copy/print.
Y
N
Hardstop the machine again, this time after the copy/print has gone through the Prefuser
Transport, but before the print enters the Duplex Transport.
Observe the back side of the print for spots. Spots are present on the back side of
the copy/print.
Y
N
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
Check for contamination of the Duplex Transport. Clean / replace the Duplex Transport as
necessary PL 6.1A Item 2 .
Replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
Image Quality
IQ-14
May 2003
3-36
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fuser Module
Toner Dispenser
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-37
Image Quality
IQ-14
Check the first visible mark on the scales. The last visible mark
on both of the scales is between 2mm and 4.5mm.
Y
N
Go to the 05-A, Document Feeder Fault Entry RAP and troubleshoot a misregistration or border band problem.
This procedure is intended to assist in troubleshooting causes for image location problems on
the machine, such as misregistration, skew, incorrect magnification, border bands, etc.
Initial Actions
Ensure that all side guides are set correctly in the Document Feeder and all paper trays.
If a black border problem in the manual mode, ensure that the originals are placed correctly on the document glass
If a black border problem using the DADF, ensure the original size is correct for the paper
size being run.
If a black border problem using the DADF, ensure that the CVT Glass is clean.
If Registration mag problems occur after doing a software upgrade, perform ADJ 14-2.
The problem is black borders when running A5, B5, or Statement paper SEF from the Document Feeder.
Y
N
Go to the RAP or Procedure indicated for the associated defect:
IQ-15
1.
2.
3.
4.
Scroll (or search) to location 53, (CVT Carr Location). Check the
value in that location
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Subtract 71 from the value read in the previous step. Enter the
new value and select [Write NVM].
10. Exit from NVM Tool and diagnostics. At the end of the session,
answer Yes to the question Do you want to reset the machine.
Perform the following (Only if TAG 016 is installed and IOT software
level is L15.x or L17.x)
Check the Last 40 faults [Faults/Counters tab , Faults]. The defect is associated with either 22-300.05 or 22-700.05 faults.
Y
N
Check the DADF for contamination. The DADF is dirty.
Y
N
Check for DADF skew. Ensure that the Border Erase is set to 3mm
(0.1"). Using the DADF, make 1 copy of test pattern 82E13100 (11")
or 82E12321 (A4).
Observe the lead edge registration scales on the copy. Notice the
first visible mark on the IB and OB scale. The difference in the
first visible mark on the IB and OB scale is 1mm or less.
Y
N
Go to the 05-F Document Feeder Registration and Skew RAP
and troubleshoot a DADF Skew problem.
A
B
C
D
Image Quality
Perform the REP 05-1 DADF Cleaning Procedure. If the problem continues, go back one step and answer No.
A
May 2003
3-38
D
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
D
Clean the DADF Exit/Invert Sensor.
Run copies/prints again and check for a reoccurrence of the defect. The
defect is still present.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
Magnification (Top to Bottom): Check the value in NVM for the Hall
Period Reference. Use [NVM | NVM Tool]. The Hall Period Reference
is a calibration factor for the ROS Polygon Motor speed. This value
sets the magnification in the IB-OB (fast-scan) direction. Ensure that
the value matches the value for the Hall Period Reference on the
ROS Bar Code label. Figure 1
Ensure that the Scanner Top Frame is grounded correctly. Check continuity from the Scanner Top Frame to the machine frame. If there is a problem, check the Left front mounting screw of the Scanner Top Frame.
Make sure it is present and the metal bracket carries ground to the Scanner Top Frame.
2.
3.
4.
Check for scanner skew. Ensure that the Border Erase is set to 3mm (0.1").
Make 1 copy of test pattern 82E13100 (11") or 82E12321 (A4) using the platen
mode.
Observe the lead edge registration scales on the copy. Notice the first visible
mark on the IB and OB scale. The difference in the first visible mark on
the IB and OB scale is 1mm or less.
Y
N
Go to the ADJ 14-1.
Check for misregistration. Observe the registration scales (the two registration
scales nearest the R2 resolution scale) on the lead edge and top edge.
Check the first visible mark on the scales. The last visible mark on both of
the scales is between 2mm and 4.5mm.
Y
N
Go to the ADJ 14-2.
Check for a magnification problem. Align the K1 line on the copy to the K1 line
on the original.
Check the alignment of the J1 line on the copy to the J1 line on the test pattern
original. The J1 line is aligned with the J1 line or less than 2 lines off.
Y
N
Go to the ADJ 14-2.
Check the registration and skew of the sixth print. The short lines on the top
edge should be 5mm 2.4mm (95% of all sheets should meet this spec, simplex or duplex. All sheets should be no more than 5mm 3.6mm) from the
edge of the paper. The long line parallel to the lead edge should also be 5mm
1.8mm from the edge of the paper. Lead Edge skew should not be more than
1.6mm (8.5 x 11") or 1.7mm (A4). The Lead Edge and Top Edge Registration, and the Skew are all within spec.
Y
N
To check registration and skew, go to the ADJ 8-1.
Choose the appropriate defect:
All of the geometrics are in spec. Determine if the problem is intermittent or job
run length related. Check the type/quality of original documents. Perform the
above steps again if copies can be reproduced which are out of spec.
Choose the appropriate defect:
Skew, go to 08-C.
NOTE: On some machines with the aluminum ROS TAG 057, burrs
on the alignment pins of the ROS can cause the ROS to shift up to
7mm when the Xerographic Module is inserted. If the ROS has a
serial number 15500 and below, perform the following:
A
B
V0.042
NOTE: Magnification can be checked in the IQ-2, IQ Checkout RAP or in IQ Specifications Entry .
1.
2.
Cover the window of the ROS with a towel or rag to keep out
contaminates.
If the problem only occurs in the DADF mode, ensure TAG 084 is installed. If already
installed, use the 12-AM RAP to check the DADF CVT Motor Ground kit.
3.
4.
Magnification (Top to Bottom): Check the value in NVM for the Hall Period Reference. Use [NVM | NVM Tool]. The Hall Period Reference is a calibration factor for
the ROS Polygon Motor speed. This value sets the magnification in the IB-OB (fastscan) direction. Ensure that the value matches the value for the Hall Period Reference on the ROS Bar Code label. Figure 1
Skew, go to 08-C
A
May 2003
3-39
Image Quality
IQ-15
A
Go to the IQ-15 IOT On-Site Diagnostic Procedure.
Misregistration (Top Edge), go to 08-B Side 2 Checkout Procedure, 08-B Side 2 Checkout Procedure.
Skew, go to 08-C
Magnification (Top to Bottom): Check the value in NVM for the Hall Period Reference.
Use [NVM | NVM Tool]. The Hall Period Reference is a calibration factor for the ROS
Polygon Motor speed. This value sets the magnification in the IB-OB (fast-scan) direction.
Ensure that the value matches the value for the Hall Period Reference on the ROS Bar
Code label. Figure 1
470 DC/ST
Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRef Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRefGb
460 DC/ST
Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRef Mark Service, location 729, hallPeriodRefGb
255/265 DC/ST
N/A
240 DC/ST
N/A
Part #
ROS Serial #
Exposure Calibration
(NVM 793)
Figure 1 Bar Code Label
Image Quality
IQ-15
May 2003
3-40
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Ground Wire
(violet)
Ground Wire
(violet wire)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-41
Image Quality
IQ-15
Ground Wire
(violet)
Image Quality
IQ-15
May 2003
3-42
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Initial Actions
Only perform this procedure if there are no Chain 10 fault codes.
Check whether the problem is occurring with standard 20lb. paper. If not and the problem
is occurring with the customers paper, ensure that the paper stock is not damaged and is
not less than 16 lb or 61 gsm and not greater than110 lb or 203 gsm.
Check for use of non-Xerox toner. Call the Competitive Toner Hotline.
If the above checks are OK, replace the Fuser Module PL 6.2A Item 1.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-43
Image Quality
IQ-16
A
The Main Control PWB has apparently failed. Go to the 03-G Main Control PWB Replacement
RAP.
Initial Actions
Check the Raster Output Scanner Video Cable for good connection at the ROS Assembly and Main Control PWB
A
Image Quality
IQ-17
May 2003
3-44
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
For defects that are occurring on 20lb. (80gsm) paper, go to the IQ-1, IQ Entry RAP.
Try to feed standard paper. If a problem exists with standard paper, troubleshoot using the
fault or symptom.
Ensure that the stock is one the Document Centre 240/265 is designed to feed (see
Product Specifications ,
Ensure that the correct tray is being used. In most cases, the Bypass Tray should be used
for special stock. See GP10 .
Ensure that the stock is being loaded per the instructions on the packaging.
Ensure that the stock is not damaged and has been stored correctly.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-45
Image Quality
IQ-18
This RAP is used to help diagnose motion quality problems. Motion quality problems usually
appear as IB-OB banding or smears.
If the banding is accompanied by an unusual humming noise when the machine runs,
clean the backer bars in the Photoreceptor Drive Module (REP 09-11). If the problem
continues, replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A Item 1.
2.
Check the mounting of the ROS Assembly. Ensure that it is not biased up against any
structural members of the machine (Developer Housing or machine frame).
3.
If #1 does not help, replace the following parts in order or perform the following until the
problem is resolved: ROS Assembly PL 5.2 Item 3
4.
5.
Corrective Actions
Replace
161.3mm
92.6mm
90.9mm
PR Cleaner Brush
79.4mm
48.5mm
(65ppm and
55ppm)
Donor Roll
42.5mm
(40ppm)
Donor Roll
15.9mm
14.7mm
(65ppm and
55ppm)
Mag Roll
12.9mm
(40ppm)
Mag Roll
2.0mm
1.3mm
Developer Idlers
Image Quality
IQ-19
May 2003
3-46
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B
Replace the Scanner Assembly PL 3.1 Item 1.
Torn Image: The image appears to be stretched or distorted in a band that runs from IB to OB
on the copy.
Initial Actions
If this problem occurs in DADF mode, ensure that the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge PL 2.2
Item 4 has been replaced.
May 2003
3-47
Image Quality
IQ-20
This RAP is used to diagnose grainy images when scanned from a DC or ST machine.
This RAP is used to diagnose jagged lines when scanned from a DC or ST machine. This RAP
is not for IOT problems.
Image Quality
IQ-21, IQ-22
May 2003
3-48
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A
Check the CVT Drive on Glass Roll guides to ensure that all three are present, in place and
correctly oriented. The guides are OK.
Y
N
Repair or replace the CVT Drive on Glass Roll PL 2.4 Item 3.
Clean the Document Glass under the CVT area.
The problem is still occurring.
Y
N
Done. Return to Service Call Procedures.
TAG 077 is installed.
Y
N
Access the EHR PWB to view the part number.
The EHR PWB has a part number of 160K59430 or 160K64130.
Y
N
Replace the Electronic Hole Removal PWB PL 1.4B Item 3 with the correct one to
make a valid combination.
NOTE: The customer will be unable to use either Auto Paper Select or Auto Reduction/
Enlargement.
Check the NVM values listed in Table 1 for the correct values The NVM values are correct.
Y
N
Enter the correct NVM values from Table 1.
Check the machine for TAG 296 or TAG 080. TAG 296 or TAG 080 is installed.
Y
N
Check the machine for TAG 077.
TAG 077 is installed.
Y
N
Check the machine for TAG 015.
TAG 015 is installed.
Y
N
Obtain and install TAG 077 and TAG 080.
If the platen pad is white, run the job from the platen with the document cover closed.
NOTE: The customer will be unable to use either Auto Paper Select or Auto Reduction/Enlargement.
If the platen pad is gray, place a white sheet of paper behind the original and copy
from the platen.
A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Location
Value
MinVar
30
MaxVar
31
16
Black
32
28
Threshold
33
360
May 2003
3-49
Image Quality
IQ-23
Toner Blow-Out (TBO) is often an early warning indicator of a larger system problem. Attempts
to minimize TBO by itself without fixing the underlining problem will likely be temporary, and/or
ineffective, and may even induce other problems such as light prints. This RAP is intended to
help resolve the underlying problem not just provide a fix for the TBO symptom.
1.
Use (Table 1) values for machines with software (07.19.01.xxx) and later.
Use (Table 2) values for machines with software earlier than (07.19.01.xxx)
NOTE: Toner Blow-Out is most likely to be seen in High Temp/ High RH conditions and will be
more noticeable on low volume and low area coverage machines.
Initial Actions
If the Developer Housing has more than 400000 prints on it, replace it before continuing
with this RAP. (Skip the Donor Roll Filming Check)
Enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern]. Select [Marking] [Print Test Pattern]. Make 5 prints
of the Perpendicular Lines Test Patterns, 2 On 30 Off and 8 On: 56 Off. Retain the
prints for evaluation or comparison.
NVM Loc
Current NVM
Value
New
NVM Value
776
1500
3000
777
350
1000000
788
265
498
1230
45
45 (no change)
1231
10.5
10
1256
1.
Prior to running an initial Xerographic set-up initialize the Xerographic NVMs and re-enter
the ROS NVM values. Run Xerographic set-up.
1257
0.5
1302
39
34
1330
495
530
1343
220
170
1351
495
430
1353
220
100
1355
2245
2550
1381
190
100
2.
3.
Record the Background Level. The Background Level should be below 4. If the
Background Level is above 4, the machine is running at an increased Toner Concentration (TC) which can be caused by low area coverage or low machine usage or by
a poor Mag or Donor Roll Contact or slow reacting Photoreceptor.
Perform the recommended repairs.
Enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern]. Select [Marking] [Print Test Pattern]. Make 5 prints
of the Perpendicular Lines Test Patterns, 2 On 30 Off and 8 On: 56 Off. Retain the
prints for evaluation or comparison.
Toner Blow-Out is still present.
NVM location 780 is greater than 2600 and location 1273 is greater than 250.
New
NVM Value
1222
49
44
1223
45
46.5
1229
86
87.5
45.5
46.5
11
1230
No - Remove the Developer Housing from the machine. See Figure 1 and clean the
Donor Roll Shaft contact area with Scotch Brite, (43P74) or Pumice Paper, (43P46).
1231
10.5
1271
0.4
2.
Run Xerographic set-up. (must be run anytime properties of Developer Housing have
changed)
1281
42
3.
Enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern]. Select [Marking] [Print Test Pattern]. Make 5 prints
of the Perpendicular Lines Test Patterns, 2 On 30 Off and 8 On: 56 Off. Retain the
prints for evaluation or comparison.
lower by 2 from
present value
(dont go below 39)
2.
3.
Enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern]. Select [Marking] [Print Test Pattern]. Make 5 prints
of the Perpendicular Lines Test Patterns, 2 On 30 Off and 8 On: 56 Off. Retain the
prints for evaluation or comparison.
Image Quality
IQ-24
May 2003
3-50
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Clean Shaft
(especially discolored area)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-51
Image Quality
IQ-24
Image Quality
IQ-24
May 2003
3-52
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
IB-OB Bands
Purpose
The purpose of this section is to provide a collection of images that represent the types of
image quality defects that may occur. The defects are referenced and hotlinked from associated RAPs, and they are grouped here by defect type.
This defect was caused by a Developer Donor Roll with severe runout. The defect is a light
band running from IB-OB and separated by 42.6mm (40ppm) or 48.5mm (65ppm). Refer to the
IQ-13 Lines/Bands/Streaks RAP. Replace the Developer Housing.
NOTE: If you have trouble displaying these samples, change the number of colors that your
laptop will display to 256.
Defect Types
This area is grouped by category. Choose the defect type and go to the appropriate area:
IB-OB Bands
LE-TE Streaks/Bands
Scrogged Images
Non-Uniform Copies/prints
Smeared copies/prints
Spots/Dirt
Image Distortion
Toner Disturbance
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-53
Image Quality
This defect was caused by a Developer Donor Roll with slight runout. The defect is a light band
running from IB-OB and separated by 42.6mm (40ppm) or 48.5mm (65ppm). Refer to the IQ13 Lines/Bands/Streaks RAP. Replace the Developer Housing.
Four samples are shown here. This defect which appears as light bands IB-OB, is caused by a
poor PR Belt ground. It is usually intermittent and no pattern prevails. Refer to the IQ-13
Lines/Bands/Streaks RAP. Replace the XRU.
Image Quality
IB-OB Bands
May 2003
3-54
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-55
Image Quality
IB-OB Bands
Image Quality
IB-OB Bands
May 2003
3-56
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Poor PR Belt Ground, low frequency. Here, the banding has no consistent pattern. Refer to the
IQ-13 Lines/Bands/Streaks RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-57
Image Quality
IB-OB Bands
This is a sample of High Frequency Banding. Very narrowly spaced lines running IB-OB, usually repeating across the page. This particular sample was caused by a defective Xerographic
Module that had a high friction condition between the P/R Belt and the P/R Drive Module
backer bars which caused the belt to vibrate.
Image Quality
IB-OB Bands
May 2003
3-58
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-59
Image Quality
IB-OB Bands
LE-TE Streaks/Bands
Streak, LE-TE: XRU, Cleaner problem
The narrow, streak which is a light streak through solid areas and is a dark streak through nonimaged areas here was caused by poor PR Belt cleaning. Refer to the IQ-13 Lines/Bands/
Streaks RAP.
Image Quality
May 2003
3-60
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
This defect which is a dark streak through non-imaged areas was caused by a bad Transfer
Corotron. Note that is not a continuous image and not smeared which indicates that no contact
was involved (rule out Developer Housing and Cleaner problems). Refer to the IQ-13 Lines/
Bands/Streaks RAP.
Both of these defects were caused by something internal to the Developer Housing rubbing on
the donor roll. Refer to the IQ-13 Lines/Bands/Streaks RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-61
Image Quality
LE-TE Streaks/Bands
Image Quality
LE-TE Streaks/Bands
May 2003
3-62
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Scrogged Images
This defect was caused by a dirty or damaged Charge Scorotron. Clean or replace Charge
Scorotron.
Compressed Image
This sample is indicative of a situation where a compressed image was corrupted. Once corrupted, the data cannot be reconstructed, and an image that is unintelligible remains. The
image is compressed before it goes to the EPC Memory and the
Image Disk Drive and
decompressed on the Main Control PWB. Go to the IQ-3 Video Path RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-63
Image Quality
No Sync Image
Broken Image
This defect resembles a loss of horizontal hold on an old television set. Loss of sync has
occurred. Go to the IQ-3 Video Path RAP.
In this defect, an recognizable image is visible, but it has been broken up and put together
incorrectly. The image has most likely made it through most of the image path correctly, but
deformed just before the CVT Dirt Streaks Label. Go to the IQ-3 Video Path RAP.
Figure 2 No Sync
Figure 3 Broken Image
Image Quality
Scrogged Images
May 2003
3-64
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Autoseg Defect
This defect is distinguished by only occurring within haltones on scanned images. It will not
appear on the IOT internal patterns. Go to the IQ-3 Video Path RAP.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-65
Image Quality
Scrogged Images
Negative Image
Figure 6 looks similar to a "negative image", but all images aren't reversed. The white background is black, but some black images remain black. Go to the IQ-3 Video Path RAP.
Image Quality
Scrogged Images
May 2003
3-66
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-67
Image Quality
Scrogged Images
Structured Background
Image Quality
Scrogged Images
May 2003
3-68
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Another type of structured background. No background at the trail edge side of images.
Caused by a defective ROS Video cable.
Bad ROS Video cable also caused this defect. Note that the black bars are lighter than usual
(normal at very top). Small horizontal lines form a diagonal pattern.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-69
Image Quality
Scrogged Images
Non-Uniform Copies/Prints
Non-Uniform Halftones
Non Uniform copies/prints are best seen in halftones. The 106dpi 50% pattern will show this
defect. Figure 1 is a sample of a defective Developer Housing. In this case one of the augers
was not being driven. Use the IQ-5, Non-Uniform Prints RAP to diagnose the problem.
Figure 1 Non-Uniform
Image Quality
May 2003
3-70
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Figure 2 is known as a "parking deletion". It is distinguished by being located near the trail
edge of the prints, and only on every other print. Replace the Xerographic Module PL 5.1A
Item 1.
Figure 3 is a sample of an intermittent bias connection on the Developer Housing mag roll.
Use the IQ-5, Non-Uniform Prints RAP to diagnose the problem.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-71
Image Quality
Non-Uniform Copies/Prints
Figure 4 appears as non-uniform or light bands IB-OB, is caused by a poor PR Belt ground. It
is usually intermittent and no pattern prevails. Refer to the IQ-13 Lines/Bands/Streaks RAP.
Replace the XRU.
Channel Banding
Channel Banding is an IIT Defect and is distinguished by the distinct line separating the copy
into two halves. Switch the machine power off/on to force a scanner calibration for this defect.
Image Quality
Non-Uniform Copies/Prints
May 2003
3-72
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Washed Out
Smeared Copies/Prints
This may appear as washed out on normal copies. This particular defect was due to a problem
with the Developer Mag roll. Could be diagnosed using the IQ-5, Non-Uniform Prints RAP.
Smeared/Dirty
Print is smeared/dirty. Occurs over entire page which distinguishes it from common paper path
induced smears which are usually localized. Image is still visible, though it is very light/almost
deleted. This defect was caused by a poor contact between the Developer HVPS and the
Developer Housing. This might occur if the Developer HVPS is removed/reinstalled with the
Developer Housing in place.
May 2003
3-73
Image Quality
Smudges/Smears
These four samples show an unusual defect, jumping Gap Arcing defect, sometimes referred
to a "Doppler Defect". These defects can occur in an image area or a non-image area. It is
unrelated to the image but can affect the image. The defect is random, but usually localized. It
will usually look like a smudge or fingerprint, but it may run in the lead edge to the trail edge
direction of the copy/print and have branches that fork off towards the top or bottom of the
copy/print. It also can appear as a long narrow smudge.
This defect is caused by small particles of debris passing between the inside of the photoreceptor belt and the development backer bar on the Photoreceptor Drive Module. Frequently
the debris is small flakes from the rubber LLF (Low Lateral Force) Rolls in the Photoreceptor
Drive Module. It also has been attributed to the Card Cage touching the Developer HVPS
heat sink. Use IQ-4, Signature Defects RAP to diagnose this problem.
Refer to any bulletins that pertain to this problem.
Image Quality
Smeared Copies/Prints
May 2003
3-74
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-75
Image Quality
Smeared Copies/Prints
Image Quality
Smeared Copies/Prints
May 2003
3-76
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Figures 7, 8, and 9 are examples of Jumping Gap Air Breakdown. Similar to Jumping Gap Arcing, but related to altitude above sea level. Go to IQ-4
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-77
Image Quality
Smeared Copies/Prints
Spots/Dirt
Donor Debris Arcing
This defect is caused by debris getting between the Donor Roll and the P/R Belt. Use the IQ4, Signature Defects RAP and troubleshoot Donor Debris Arcing.
Image Quality
May 2003
3-78
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Image Distortion
Document Glass screws too tight.
This defect (lines not straight) is caused by the Document Glass screws being too tight. To correct this problem, back off on the screws until the distortion problem is resolved.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-79
Image Quality
Toner Disturbance
Toner Blow-Out
Toner Blow-Out is a form of toner disturbance that occurs between transfer and fusing. It usually shows up on parallel lines such as those in a table. Go to RAP IQ-24, Toner Blow-Out RAP.
Image Quality
May 2003
3-80
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Introduction/Test Patterns
Introduction
This section of the Service Manual provides the required information for setting up and checking the machine at customers sites to evaluate image quality. The information is presented in
the following manner:
A description of all test patterns necessary.
A heading titled Procedure.
Two subheadings titled Prerequisite Procedures/Checks and Post Requisite Procedures/
Checks. The Prerequisite Procedures/Checks identifies procedures or checks if any,
which must be done first. The Post Requisite Procedures/Checks identifies procedures or
checks that are affected by the subject procedure.
The Procedure identifying how to check the image quality element. The required test pattern, if any, is also include here.
The Specification for the element. Several specification entries may be given for multiple
modes.
CAUTION
Use care when handling and storing the hard copy test pattern. Dirt and oil from hands will
change the appearance of the patches and consequently the accuracy of visual comparisons
between the copies/prints and the test pattern.
All image quality elements and specifications for the Xerox Document Centre 240/255/265/
460/470 are evaluated using the test patterns listed below. These are the only test patterns
authorized for evaluating image quality.
NOTE: Xerox Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 Family image quality specifications
should be evaluated when using copy paper such as: 4024DP 20 lb. (70gsm) or equivalent.
Table 1 Hard Copy Test Patterns
Number
82E13100
82E12191*
82E13110
82E12320*
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-81
Image Quality
Introduction/Test Patterns
Side 1
Side 1 is the test pattern side. The following describes the features on the test pattern:
"H1, H2, H3, H4" - Magnification Lines, Flag H1, Flag H2, Flag H3, Flag H4
"K1, K2, K3, K4" - Magnification Lines, Flag K1, Flag K2, Flag K3, Flag K4
Image Quality
Introduction/Test Patterns
May 2003
3-82
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Side 2
Side 2 is a SIR (Standard Image Reference) pattern. It is used to evaluate copies of side 1 of
the pattern.
"V" - Minimum level of solid area density for A1 and A2, Flag V
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-83
Image Quality
Introduction/Test Patterns
The electronic test patterns are available on the PWS. These patterns do not reside on the
PWS, but are generated on the Main Control PWB upon request from the PWS. Enter PWS
Diagnostics, enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern]. The table that follows indicates the patterns that are available.
Name
8 On 56 Off
Perpendicular
Lines
Description /Function
Common/General
Blank Page
Manufacturing
Quadrille
Registration
Step Wedge
17mm wide bands of varying area coverage running IB-OB. Starting at lead
edge, 0%, 100%. 93.75%, 87.5%, 75%,
50%, 25%, 12.5%, 6.25%, 0%. The
50% wedge is used for checking IOT
darkness.
25% Halftones
75 DPI
75 dots/in.
106 DPI
212 dots/in.
212 DPI Reserved for engineering investigations
50% Halftones
106 DPI
212 DPI
424 DPI
Image Quality
Introduction/Test Patterns
Description /Function
Parallel Lines
2 On 2 Off
2 On 30 Off
8 On 56 Off
Black Bands
IQ Tests
IQ Test 1 - 1" On 1" For checking P/R Belt. Belt is comOff followed by 1" pletely covered with image.
On 1" Off Black.
Repeated twice.
IQ Test 2 - 106dpi
50% halftone
repeated 4 times.
May 2003
3-84
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
IQ Definitions
Description /Function
PURPOSE
IQ Defect Definitions
Image Location Defects: Image that is incorrectly located on the print. (Also known as
Geometrics)
Background Defects
Black Copies/ Prints: Prints which are solid black with no image visible within.
Line/Streak: An unwanted line or streak in a image or non-image area. Refer to the Line/
Streak LE-TE Defect Sample Scrogged Images.
There is a test pattern stored on the ESS that can be printed via [ESS/Network tab , ESS Test
Jobs]. Select [Test Pattern]. The usual job options are available for this job.
The ESS Test Pattern is an electronic version of the 82E12191 hard copy test pattern. The IIT
unique elements have been removed from the pattern (blue text, solids). For copy quality evaluation use the CSE Test Pattern from the Document Glass.
The only intended use for the ESS Test Pattern is for troubleshooting failures related to the
video path. Troubleshoot the video path by halfsplitting. Run copies from the Document Glass
and print from the ESS. Use the IQ Entry RAP in the EDOC.
The ESS Test Pattern should not be used to evaluate image quality (see IQ-2 RAP) and to
compare copier vs. printer.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Deletion Defects
Blank Segments: Segments or strips of the copies/prints are white (color of substrate).
Comets: Deletions about 0.1mm in width and about 1 to 2mm in length that tail off in the
trail edge direction.
Debris Centered Deletion (DCD): A type of spot deletion caused by developer bead carry
out.
Dotted Line Deletion: A line deletion that is not continuous and resembles a dotted line.
Line Deletion: A deletion that looks like a white line (color of substrate) in an image area.
Up to 3mm wide and anywhere from 5mm to the length of the paper long.
May 2003
3-85
Image Quality
Trail Edge Deletion: A deletion that occurs near the trail edge of the copies/prints.
Oil on copies/prints:
Oil Streaks:
Poor Fusing: Toner that does not adhere correctly to the paper/substrate.
Wrinkles:
Misregistration: The image is not centered correctly on the page due to paper to image
timing mismatch.
Shear: Two sides (LE and TE) of the image are not parallel to the paper edges. The
image is "parallelogrammed". Only a IIT defect.
Doppler Defect: A hard to categorize defect unique to the Document Centre 240/255/265.
May occur in an image area or a non-image area. It can be very limited and appear as a
small smear, or it may take on an unusual structure that covers much of the page. The
structure is usually a series of wide toner bands that branch out across the page. See the
Smudges, Smears section of Smeared Copies/Prints.
Geometrics: This term refers to the correct placement of the image on the page. Includes
registration, skew, and magnification.
Banding: Gray areas show a pattern of regularly spaced bands that extend from the
inboard to the outboard edge of the copy/print. Refer to IB-OB Bands for examples.
Grainy Image: Uniform black or gray areas have a sandy-like appearance. Density variation over distances of 1-2mm or less.
Moire: Gray areas show a regular striped, plaid, or other pattern of density variation on a
scale of 1-2mm or greater.
Mottle: Black or gray areas that should be uniform and smooth have local density variations on a scale of 1-5mm.
Non-uniformity: Image density varies from one part of the copy/print to another.
Reload: A ghost of an image shows up 42-49mm towards the trail edge in solid areas or
halftones.
Blur: Images that are not clear, appear out of focus, not sharp.
Deformed Image: Gross defects where the image has been incorrectly reproduced.
Ghosting: Similar to residual image, but the image appears within an image instead of the
background area.
Ragged Halftones: Gray areas have small-scale texture, line or herringbone appearance.
Ragged Lines: Lines that should be straight and smooth are ragged, or have bumpy or
ragged edges.
Smear: The toner in an image is disturbed and appears as a smear on the copies/prints.
Scrogged Image: A digital image defect. The digital data sent to the ROS an incorrect
reproduction of the original document. These defects are usually well defined and have
definite edges. They may be subtle or very dramatic.
Shear: Two sides (LE and TE) of the image are not parallel to the paper edges. The
image is "parallelogrammed". Only a IIT defect.
Other Defects
Gloss Variations:
Image Quality
IQ Definitions
May 2003
3-86
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
IQ Specifications Entry
Background
IQ Specifications Links
Prerequisite Procedures/Checks
NOTE: All evaluations should be done with the copies on a flat surface with white paper underneath.
Background
Spots
Registration, LE
Density
Deletions
Uniformity
Toner Reload
Skew, LE
Resolution
Enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], select [Marking] [Blank Page] [Start Job].
Magnification
None
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-87
Image Quality
Spots
Registration, LE
Prerequisite Procedures/Checks
Prerequisite Procedures/Checks
None
None
None
White Spots - A clean print of 1" On 1" Off and 1" Off 1" On used as originals - 10 prints of each
White Spots - Enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], select [Marking]. Make 10 prints of 1" On
1" Off and 1" Off 1" On black bands.
Image Quality
Spots , Registration, LE
May 2003
3-88
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Density
Prerequisite Procedures/Checks
Prerequisite Procedures/Checks
None
None
None
None
Using test pattern 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4), place on the document glass. Make 5
copies.
Use the 5th copy and compare the patch labeled "E1" to the patches labeled "P1", "P2", and
"P3" on the side 2 of the pattern. The E1 patch on the copy should be not darker than the "P3"
patch or lighter than the "P1" patch.
1.
Enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], select [Marking]. Make 5 prints of a [Step Wedge].
2.
(L18 or later software only) Enter [ESS/Network tab , ESS Test Jobs]. Select [Test Pattern]. Make 5 prints of test pattern.
Side 1 - 1.5mm
1.
Compare the 50% band, which is the 5th band (start with darkest or look at the arrow that
points from the M2 patch to the schematic of the step wedge) on the IOT print to the
patches labeled "M1", "M2", and "M3" on the side 2 of the pattern. The 4th band (75%) on
the step wedge should be not darker than the "M3" patch or lighter than the "M1" patch.
2.
(L18 or later software) Use the 5th print and compare the patch labeled "E1" to the
patches labeled "P1", "P2", and "P3" on the side 2 of the hard copy pattern. The E1 patch
on the print should be not darker than the "P3" patch or lighter than the "P1" patch.
Side 2 - 2.0mm
NOTE: In software levels prior to L17.8.64 (5.07), up to 1.3mm additional misregistration is
allowed on print jobs due to an ESS software problem.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-89
Image Quality
Deletions
Uniformity
Prerequisite Procedures/Checks
Prerequisite Procedures/Checks
None
None
None
None
Deletions Procedure
Make 5 copies of test pattern 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) in standard mode, and 5 copies in Photo mode.
Deletions Specification
No loss of information. Some slight deletions can be expected within 12mm from an edge on
side 1, more on side 2 and slightly more pronounced. At higher temperatures and humidities,
the deletion performance will be degraded.
Enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], select [Marking]. Make 5 prints of a 50% halftone
106dpi.
2.
(L18 or later software only) Enter [ESS/Network tab , ESS Test Jobs]. Select [Test Pattern]. Make 5 prints of test pattern.
Image Quality
Deletions , Uniformity
1.
2.
(L18 or later software) No objectionable variation in image density on any of the bands F
or G, patches D1 and D2, E1 and E2 (use defect samples X1, X2, Y1,Y2, and Y3)
May 2003
3-90
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Toner Reload
Skew, LE
Prerequisite Procedures/Checks
Prerequisite Procedures/Checks
None
Registration
None
None
Make 5 copies of test pattern 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) in standard mode.
Compare the copies of the "B" and "C" patches to the "S" and "T" patches on side 2 of the test
pattern. Ensure that the lightened area on the copy is no worse than the "S" and "T" patches.
(L18 or later software) Compare the prints of the "B" and "C" patches to the "S" and "T" patches
on side 2 of the hard copy test pattern. Ensure that the lightened area on the print is no worse
than the "S" and "T" patches.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1.2mm (A4)
May 2003
3-91
Image Quality
Resolution
Magnification
Prerequisite Procedures/Checks
Prerequisite Procedures/Checks
None
None
None
None
Enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], select [Marking]. Make 1 print of the Registration
test pattern.
Using the last print of the Registration test pattern, lay the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110
(A4) pattern on top.
Align the K1 mag line on the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) to the closest corresponding line on the registration pattern.
Compare and note the alignment of the H1 line with the closest corresponding line on the
registration pattern. (Each line is 0.5% difference from nominal mag.)
Perform the same procedure on the bottom edge of the pattern using the K2 and H2 mag
lines. Note the difference in mag from the nominal.
Average the top and bottom measurements to calculate the Horizontal Magnification.
3.5 line pairs/inch should be clearly resolved and 4.3 line pairs/inch should be just resolved
Enter [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], select [Marking]. Make 1 print of the Registration
test pattern.
Using the last print of the Registration test pattern, lay the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110
(A4) pattern on top.
Align the K3 mag line on the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) to a corresponding line on
the registration pattern.
Compare and note the alignment of the H3 line with the closest corresponding line on the
registration pattern. (Each line is 0.5% difference from nominal mag.)
Perform the same procedure on the left edge of the pattern using the K4 and H4 mag
lines. Note the difference in mag from the nominal.
Average the right and left measurements to calculate the Vertical Magnification.
Image Quality
Resolution , Magnification
May 2003
3-92
Platen Mode
1.
Place the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) on the document glass and make one
copy.
2.
Align the K1 mag line on the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) to the corresponding
line on the copy.
3.
Compare and note the alignment of the H1 line with the corresponding line on the
copy. (Each line is 0.5% difference from nominal mag.)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
4.
Perform the same procedure on the bottom edge of the pattern using the K2 and H2
mag lines. Note the difference in mag from the nominal.
5.
Average the top and bottom measurements to calculate the Horizontal Magnification.
6.
Align the K3 mag line on the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) to the corresponding
line on the copy.
7.
Compare and note the alignment of the H3 line with the corresponding line on the
copy. (Each line is 0.5% difference from nominal mag.)
8.
Perform the same procedure on the left edge of the pattern using the K4 and H4
mag lines. Note the difference in mag from the nominal.
9.
Average the right and left measurements to calculate the Vertical Magnification.
DADF Mode
1.
Run the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) through the DADF and make one copy.
2.
Align the K1 mag line on the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) to the corresponding
line on the copy.
3.
Compare and note the alignment of the J1 line with the H1 line on the copy. (Each
line is 0.5% difference from nominal mag.)
NOTE: A different mag is applied in DADF mode to avoid black border lines.
4.
Perform the same procedure on the bottom edge of the pattern using the K2 and J2
mag lines. Note the difference in mag from the nominal.
5.
Average the top and bottom measurements to calculate the Horizontal Magnification.
6.
Align the K3 mag line on the 82E13100 (11") or 82E13110 (A4) to the corresponding
line on the copy.
7.
Compare and note the alignment of the H3 line with the corresponding line on the
copy. (Each line is 0.5% difference from nominal mag.)
8.
Perform the same procedure on the left edge of the pattern using the K4 and H4
mag lines. Note the difference in mag from the nominal.
9.
Average the right and left measurements to calculate the Vertical Magnification.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
3-93
Image Quality
Magnification
Image Quality
Magnification
May 2003
3-94
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
4-5
4-69
4-89
1. Standby Power
REP 01-1 Distribution PWB ............................................................................................
REP 01-2 AC Distribution Panel .....................................................................................
REP 01-3 Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) ................................................................
4-99
4-101
4-103
2. User Interface
REP 02-1 User Interface Assembly ................................................................................
REP 02-2 UI Processor PWB (With Tag #082 Only) ......................................................
REP 02-3 UI LCD Module (With Tag #082 Only) ............................................................
REP 02-4 UI Software Upload ........................................................................................
4-105
4-106
4-111
4-114
4-179
4-182
4-185
4-187
4-189
4-190
5. Document Transportation
REP 05-1 DADF Cleaning Procedure .............................................................................
REP 05-2 DADF Assembly .............................................................................................
REP 05-3 DADF Top Cover Assembly ...........................................................................
REP 05-4 DADF Feeder Assembly .................................................................................
REP 05-5 DADF Registration Deskew Assembly ...........................................................
REP 05-6 Document Input Tray Assembly .....................................................................
REP 05-7 DADF Exit Shaft .............................................................................................
REP 05-8 DADF Feed Motor ..........................................................................................
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
4-193
4-194
4-197
4-200
4-206
4-211
4-213
4-218
4-219
4-226
4-228
6. ROS Imaging
REP 06-1 ROS Assembly ...............................................................................................
REP 06-2 ROS Polygon Motor (With Tag #057 Only).....................................................
4-231
4-234
7. Paper Supply
REP 07-1 Paper Feed Drives Plate.................................................................................
REP 07-2 Paper Tray Assembly .....................................................................................
REP 07-3 HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly...........................................................................
REP 07-4 Bypass Tray Assembly ...................................................................................
REP 07-5 HCF Elevator Motor ........................................................................................
REP 07-6 Bypass Input Tray...........................................................................................
REP 07-7 HCF Rear Cover .............................................................................................
REP 07-8 HCF Front Cover ............................................................................................
REP 07-9 HCF PWB .......................................................................................................
4-237
4-241
4-241
4-244
4-244
4-249
4-251
4-253
4-254
8. Paper Transportation
REP 08-1 Vertical Transport ...........................................................................................
REP 08-2 Registration Transport Assembly....................................................................
REP 08-3 HCF/Bypass Tray Feed Motor ........................................................................
REP 08-4 Bypass Tray Feeder .......................................................................................
REP 08-5 HCF Feeder ....................................................................................................
REP 08-6 HCF Paper Handling Baffle ............................................................................
REP 08-7 Registration Sensor (S2) ................................................................................
REP 08-8 Registration Clutch .........................................................................................
4-255
4-256
4-258
4-267
4-270
4-274
4-277
4-279
9. Marking
REP 09-1 Xerographic Module........................................................................................
REP 09-2 Developer Housing .........................................................................................
REP 09-3 BTAC Sensor..................................................................................................
REP 09-4 Toner Dispenser .............................................................................................
REP 09-5 Photoreceptor Drive Module ...........................................................................
REP 09-6 Charge HVPS .................................................................................................
REP 09-7 Developer HVPS.............................................................................................
REP 09-8 Transfer/Detack HVPS ...................................................................................
REP 09-9 BTAC Sensor Cleaning Procedure .................................................................
REP 09-10 Developer Housing Support Rail ..................................................................
REP 09-11 Photoreceptor Drive Module Cleaning Procedure ........................................
REP 09-12 Developer HVPS Contacts Cleaning Procedure...........................................
REP 09-13 Donor Roll Cleaning Procedure ....................................................................
4-281
4-281
4-287
4-288
4-290
4-299
4-299
4-300
4-301
4-301
4-303
4-304
4-304
May 2003
4-1
4-309
4-313
4-322
4-325
12. Finishing
REP 12-1 Top Module Assembly ....................................................................................
REP 12-2 Stacker Drive Motor........................................................................................
REP 12-3 Finisher Service Tray Assembly .....................................................................
REP 12-4 Moving Stapler................................................................................................
REP 12-5 Fixed Stapler ..................................................................................................
REP 12-6 Nip 1 Drive Shaft ............................................................................................
REP 12-7 Nip 2 Drive Shaft ............................................................................................
REP 12-8 Finisher Transport Baffle ................................................................................
REP 12-9 Disk Baffle Assembly......................................................................................
REP 12-10 Disk Drive Motor ...........................................................................................
REP 12-11 Disk Shaft .....................................................................................................
REP 12-12 Finisher Assembly (Undocking the Finisher) ................................................
REP 12-13 Nip 1/2 Drive Belt..........................................................................................
REP 12-14 Nip 3/4 Drive Belt..........................................................................................
REP 12-15 Finisher Lubrication ......................................................................................
REP 12-16 Finisher Top Tray Back Wall ........................................................................
REP 12-17 Convenience Stapler Internal DC Harness...................................................
REP 12-18 Stapler Lead-In Baffle...................................................................................
REP 12-19 Convenience Stapler PWB ...........................................................................
REP 12-20 Stacker Tray Drive Belts ...............................................................................
REP 12-21 Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamps ...................................................................
REP 12-22 Fixed-Stapler Safety Gate ............................................................................
REP 12-23 Moving-Stapler Safety Gate .........................................................................
REP 12-24 Tamper Cable...............................................................................................
REP 12.01.01 Main Tray Elevator Belt ...........................................................................
REP 12.01.02 Main Tray Offset Motor (M50)..................................................................
REP 12.01.03 Main Tray Offset Panel/Rails ...................................................................
REP 12.01.04 Main Tray Elevator Motor (M51) ..............................................................
REP 12.02.01 Booklet Maker Assembly .........................................................................
REP 12.02.02 Crease Blade ...........................................................................................
REP 12.02.03 Crease Rolls ............................................................................................
REP 12.02.04 Crease Roll Motor (M68) .........................................................................
REP 12.02.05 Crease Roll Gears ...................................................................................
REP 12.02.06 Crease Blade Motor (M67) ......................................................................
REP 12.02.07 Crease Blade Motor Encoder and Sensor (S70) .....................................
REP 12.02.08 Booklet Compiler Flapper ........................................................................
REP 12.02.09 Booklet Tamper Assembly .......................................................................
REP 12.02.10 Booklet Tamper Motor (M62)...................................................................
REP 12.02.11 Booklet Backstop Assembly ....................................................................
REP 12.02.12 Booklet Backstop Motor (M63) ................................................................
REP 12.02.13 Booklet Backstop Belt or Drive Belt .........................................................
REP 12.02.15 Booklet Rear Stapler................................................................................
REP 12.02.16 Booklet Front Stapler ...............................................................................
REP 12.03.01 Booklet Exit Sensor (S73)........................................................................
REP 12.04.01 Tri-Folder Assembly.................................................................................
REP 12.04.02 Tri-Folder Drive Belt.................................................................................
REP 12.05.01 Compiler Tamper Assembly ....................................................................
REP 12.05.02 Compiler Backstop Assembly ..................................................................
REP 12.05.03 Compiler Fingers Assembly .....................................................................
REP 12.05.04 Compiler Tamper Motor (M44) ................................................................
4-331
4-333
4-333
4-337
4-340
4-341
4-345
4-348
4-350
4-355
4-356
4-360
4-362
4-364
4-366
4-371
4-373
4-376
4-380
4-381
4-383
4-385
4-389
4-394
4-397
4-398
4-400
4-403
4-403
4-407
4-408
4-410
4-411
4-412
4-413
4-413
4-415
4-417
4-418
4-419
4-420
4-421
4-424
4-427
4-428
4-429
4-431
4-432
4-434
4-435
4-435
4-436
4-437
4-437
4-438
4-438
4-439
4-441
4-443
4-445
4-446
4-448
4-448
4-450
4-451
4-452
4-452
4-454
4-455
4-456
4-456
4-457
4-458
4-459
4-459
4-460
4-462
4-463
4-464
4-465
4-467
4-468
4-469
4-472
14. Scanning
REP 14-1 Image Module, Scanner Video Cable Kit........................................................
REP 14-2 Illumination Lamp Module...............................................................................
REP 14-3 Scanner Cleaning Procedure..........................................................................
REP 14-4 Document Glass Frame..................................................................................
REP 14-5 Scanner Top Frame........................................................................................
REP 14-6 Scanner Main Cover .......................................................................................
REP 14-7 Document Glass Pad......................................................................................
REP 14-8 Illumination Lamp Power Supply ....................................................................
REP 14-9 Scan Carriage Motor.......................................................................................
4-473
4-476
4-478
4-478
4-480
4-480
4-481
4-482
4-482
16 - ESS.
REP 16-1 ESS Disk Drive ............................................................................................... 4-485
REP 16-2 ESS PWB ....................................................................................................... 4-490
REP 16-3 ESS DRAM SIMM's (240/255/265 Only) ........................................................ 4-496
REP 16-4 Token Ring PWB or Image Processing Accelerator (IPA) PWB or 100 Mb Ethernet
PWB (240/255/265 Only) ................................................................................................ 4-501
May 2003
4-2
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
4-509
4-511
4-513
4-516
4-519
4-521
5. Document Transportation
ADJ 05-1 DADF Skew..................................................................................................... 4-527
ADJ 05-2 CVT Carriage Position Setup for Electronic Hole Removal (With Tag #296, Tag #080,
or Tag #285 Only) ........................................................................................................... 4-528
ADJ 05-3 DADF/Document Glass Cover Latch (460/470 with Tag 115 Only) ................ 4-530
8. Paper Transportation
ADJ 8-1 IOT Registration Setup Series .......................................................................... 4-533
ADJ 8-1A IOT Lead Edge Registration (Process Direction)............................................ 4-536
ADJ 8-1B IOT Top Edge Registration (IB-OB), Side 1.................................................... 4-537
ADJ 8-1C IOT Top Edge Registration (IB-OB), Side 2, Small Paper.............................. 4-539
ADJ 8-1D IOT Top Edge Registration (IB-OB), Side 2, Large Paper.............................. 4-541
ADJ 8-1E IOT Lead Edge Registration for Small Heavy Weight Paper (19.02 and Higher Software Only)....................................................................................................................... 4-542
ADJ 8-1F IOT Lead Edge Registration for Large Paper (19.02 and Higher Software Only) 4546
ADJ 8-1G IOT Lead Edge Registration for Large Heavy Weight Paper (19.02 and Higher Software Only)....................................................................................................................... 4-550
ADJ 8-2 IOT Skew (Registration Transport) ................................................................... 4-554
12. Finishing
ADJ 12-1 Tamping - Disk Finisher.................................................................................
ADJ 12-2 Tamper Position - Disk Finisher ....................................................................
ADJ 12.02.01 Crease Blade............................................................................................
ADJ 12.02.02 Booklet Stapler Anvils ..............................................................................
ADJ 12.02.03 Booklet Tamping ......................................................................................
ADJ 12.02.04 Booklet Staple Position ............................................................................
ADJ 12.02.05 Booklet Crease Position ...........................................................................
ADJ 12.02.06 Crease Roll Gate......................................................................................
ADJ 12.02.07 Booklet Maker Drawer Alignment .............................................................
ADJ 12.02.08 Booklet Compiling Position.......................................................................
ADJ 12.04.01 Tri-Fold First Crease Position...................................................................
ADJ 12.04.02 Tri-Fold Second Crease Position .............................................................
ADJ 12.05.01 Compiler Tamping ....................................................................................
ADJ 12.12.01 Main Stapler Alignment ............................................................................
ADJ 12.12.02 Main Stapler Staple Position ....................................................................
4-557
4-558
4-561
4-566
4-569
4-570
4-570
4-571
4-571
4-572
4-573
4-574
4-575
4-575
4-576
14. Scanning
ADJ 14-1 Image Module Set-Up .....................................................................................
ADJ 14-2 IIT Registration and Magnification...................................................................
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
4-577
4-579
May 2003
4-3
May 2003
4-4
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Component Locations
Introduction
Locate the component in the left column of the Component Locator Table. Select the component name go to a specific component. Select the Figure Number to go to the figure in which
the component is located.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-5
NOTE: To view components that are not a hotlink (green and underlined), select the Parts List
reference.
Figure Number
Figure 45
Figure 27
Figure 9
Component Name
Figure Number
DADF PWB
Figure 10
Figure 54
PL 2.2 Item 4
Figure 32
Accessory PWB
Figure 11
Figure 35
AC Distribution Panel
Figure 18
Figure 10
Anti-Kickback Pad
Figure 9
Figure 10
Area 2 Handle
Figure 7
Figure 32
Area 3E
Figure 19
Figure 26
Backlight
PL 1.1A Item 6
Figure 26
BTAC Sensor
Figure 1
Figure 26
PL 4.2B Item 4
Figure 26
Canard Wing
Figure 25
Figure 64
Card Cage
Figure 12
Figure 64
Charge HVPS
Figure 5
Figure 64
Figure 55
Figure 64
Figure 55
Figure 64
Figure 55
Figure 6
PL 1.1A Item 1
Figure 6
Detack HVPS
Figure 5
Figure 27
Developer Collector
Figure 2
Figure 10
Figure 28
CVT Skis
Figure 27
PL 5.1B Item 9
Figure 30
Figure 30
Figure 27
Figure 30
Figure 10
Developer Housing
Figure 2
CVT Motor
Figure 10
Developer HVPS
Figure 5
Figure 38
Figure 29
Figure 45
Figure 20
Figure 27
Figure 22
Figure 27
Figure 22
Figure 32
Disk Fingers
Figure 21
Figure 27
Figure 22
Figure 10
Disk Shaft
PL 8.3 Item 13
Figure 45
Distribution PWB
Figure 18
Figure 8
Figure 10
PL 2.2 Item 7
Figure 26
Figure 10
Figure 9
May 2003
4-6
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Component Name
Figure Number
Component Name
Figure Number
Figure 9
Figure 20
Figure 10
Figure 39
Figure 9
Figure 23
Figure 58
Fixed Stapler
Figure 23
Figure 32
Figure 25
Dual Idler
Figure 22
Figure 21
Figure 13
Figure 21
Figure 56
Fuse F3
Figure 16
Figure 56
Fuser/Inverter Drawer
Figure 7
Duplex Transport
Figure 13
Figure 50
Figure 4
Figure 6
Decurler
PL 6.1A Item 4
Fuser Fan
Figure 6
Figure 7
Figure 7
Figure 55
Fuser Module
Figure 11
Figure 64
Figure 53
Figure 2
Figure 11
Figure 31
Figure 43
Figure 31
Figure 41
Figure 40
Figure 42
HCF/Duplex Baffle
Figure 61
Figure 42
HCF Feeder
PL 4.2B Item 3
ESS LEDs
Figure 52
HCF PWB
Figure 31
ESS PWB
Figure 41
Figure 55
Exit Baffle
Figure 13
Figure 55
Figure 10
Figure 37
Figure 63
Figure 16
Figure 63
Figure 16
Figure 56
Figure 16
Figure 55
Figure 16
Figure 55
Figure 17
Figure 22
Figure 16
Figure 23
Figure 16
Figure 24
Figure 16
Figure 24
Figure 16
Figure 39
Figure 17
Figure 24
Figure 14
Figure 39
Figure 14
Figure 39
Figure 14
Figure 20
Figure 14
Figure 20
Figure 14
Figure 20
Figure 15
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-7
Component Name
Figure Number
Component Name
Figure Number
Figure 15
Figure 22
Figure 14
Nip 2 Idlers
Figure 49
Figure 12
Figure 22
PL 3.1 Item 4
Figure 22
Figure 10
Nip 3 Idlers
Figure 24
Figure 36
Figure 22
Figure 36
Figure 22
Figure 2
Figure 22
Inverter
Figure 13
Nip 4 Idlers
Figure 24
Figure 55
NOHAD Thermostat
PL 1.5 Item 5
Figure 55
Nudger Solenoid
Figure 26
Figure 56
PL 8.1 Item 8
Figure 55
PL 8.1 Item 1
Figure 55
PL 8.1 Item 9
Figure 56
Figure 19
Figure 55
Paper Tray
PL 4.1A Item 2
IPA PWB
Figure 51
Figure 63
Figure 11
Figure 17
Kicker
Figure 37
Figure 17
Figure 37
Figure 20
Figure 27
PFT Clip
Figure 2
Figure 32
Figure 4
Figure 32
Figure 30
Figure 19
Figure 2
Figure 19
Prefuser Transport
Figure 13
Figure 19
Figure 60
Figure 19
Figure 21
LVPS
Figure 5
Figure 61
Figure 3
Figure 35
Figure 15
Figure 45
Figure 11
Figure 35
Moving Stapler
Figure 23
Figure 35
Figure 37
Registration Sensor
Figure 4
Figure 25
Figure 7
Figure 37
Retaining Ring
PL 7.1 Item 6
Figure 61
Figure 46
Figure 37
Figure 20
Figure 24
Reversing Baffle
Figure 55
Figure 22
Figure 56
Nip 1 Idlers
Figure 24
Figure 56
Figure 22
Figure 27
May 2003
4-8
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Component Name
Figure Number
Component Name
Figure 34
Figure 21
Figure 34
Tamper Motor
Figure 37
ROS
Figure 4
Figure 37
PL 9.1 Item 6
Figure 44
Figure 3
Figure 39
SCAM PWB
Figure 3
Figure 39
Figure 33
Figure 24
Service AC Outlet
Figure 16
Figure 24
Figure 58
Figure 39
Figure 36
Figure 24
Figure 36
Transfer/Detack HVPS
Figure 5
Figure 37
Transfer HVPS
Figure 5
Figure 48
Figure 22
Figure 48
Figure 62
Figure 48
Figure 62
Stacker Tray
Figure 20
Figure 62
Figure 21
Figure 62
Figure 21
Figure 62
Figure 47
Figure 62
Figure 47
Figure 62
Figure 47
Figure 62
Figure 22
Figure 19
Figure 21
Figure 19
Figure 47
Figure 19
Figure 47
Figure 19
Figure 20
Figure 17
Figure 25
Figure 17
Figure 23
Figure 17
Figure 23
Figure 17
Static Eliminator
Figure 21
Figure 40
Figure 37
Figure 19
Tamper Button
Figure 19
Figure 19
Figure 33
Figure 19
Tamper Arm
Figure 20
Vertical Transport
Figure 17
Figure 57
Figure 17
Figure 57
Xerographic Blower
Figure 15
Xerographic Module
Figure 2
Figure 33
Figure 1
Toner Dispenser
Figure 1
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-9
Figure Number
Drawings
Toner Dispenser
BTAC Sensor
May 2003
4-10
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
PFT Clip
Xerographic
Module
Power ON/OFF
Switch
Front Door
Interlock Switch
Developer
Housing
Developer
Collector
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-11
SCAM PWB
May 2003
4-12
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Registration Sensor
ROS
Figure 4 ROS, Photoreceptor Drive Module, Reg. Sensor, and Duplex Transport Belt
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-13
Detack HVPS
Transfer HVPS
Charge HVPS
Developer HVPS
LVPS
May 2003
4-14
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Decurler Drive
Belt
Decurler/OCT
Drive Bracket
Fuser Drive
Motor
Fuser Fan
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-15
Area 2 Handle
Fuser Module
Fuser Jam
Clearance
Knob
Registration Transport
Assembly
Fuser/Inverter
Drawer
May 2003
4-16
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-17
Anti-Kickback
Pad
Document Input
Tray
Figure 9 DADF
May 2003
4-18
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Document Feeder
Top Cover Sensor
Input Tray Exit
Sensor
DADF PWB
CVT Motor
CVT/Reg Roll
Drive Belt
Document
Loaded Sensor
DADF Feeder
Assembly
DADF Interlock
Switch
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-19
EPC DRAM
SIMMS
IPS1 Daughter
Card
(Not Shown)
Main Control
PWB
Accessory PWB
May 2003
4-20
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Card Cage
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-21
Exit Baffle
Handle 3d
Duplex Transport
Inverter
May 2003
4-22
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-23
Xerographic Blower
May 2003
4-24
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
IIOC PWB
A7A4
IIOC PWB
A7A3
IIOC PWB
A7A1
IIOC PWB
A7A2
Service AC
Outlet
IIOC PWB
A8A3
IIOC PWB
A8A4
IIOC PWB
A8A2
IIOC PWB
A8A1
Fuse F3
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-25
Vertical Transport
May 2003
4-26
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
AC Distribution Panel
Distribution PWB
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-27
Tray 1 Stack
Height Sensor
Area 3E
Upper Guide - Tray 2
Tray 4 Stack
Height Sensor
Tray 3 Stack
Height Sensor
May 2003
4-28
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Finisher Top
Tray
Pause Resume
Switch
Finisher Top
Cover Door
Finisher Top
Cover
Tamper Button
Stacker Tray
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-29
Static Eliminator
Disk Fingers
Tamper Button
Stacker Tray
Drive Pulley
Stacker Tray
Drive Belt Clamp
Front Stacker
Tray Bracket
Stacker Tray
Drive Belt
May 2003
4-30
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Dual Idler
Nip 1 Drive Shaft
Stacker Tray
Drive Motor
Finisher Controller PWB
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-31
Finisher Diverter
Gate
Finisher Upper
Harness
Fixed Stapler
Moving Stapler
Stapler Position
Home Sensor
Stapler Position
Motor
May 2003
4-32
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Finisher Diverter
Gate Solenoid
Heat Cover
Finisher Diverter
Gate Solenoid
(under heat cover)
Nip 4 Idlers
Finisher Transport
Baffle
Nip 1 Idlers
Nip 3 Idlers
Finisher Input
Baffle
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-33
Canard
Wing
Moving - Stapler
Safety Gate
Stapler Lead-In
Baffle
The Lead-In Baffle is part
of the Moving Stapler
Fixed - Stapler
Safety Gate
May 2003
4-34
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Document Feeder
Top Cover Sensor
Actuator
DADF Take
Away Roll
Nudger Solenoid
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-35
CVT Skis
DADF Exit Shaft
DADF Inverter
Gate
DADF Exit/Invert
Sensor
CVT Start of
Scan Sensor
May 2003
4-36
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Developer HVPS
Contact Springs
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-37
Developer Drive
Motor
Developer Drive
Belt
Photoreceptor
Drive Motor
Developer Gear
Bracket
May 2003
4-38
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
HCF/Bypass
Tray Feed Motor
HCF Elevator
Motor
HCF PWB
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-39
DADF Static
Eliminator
Document
Restack Guide
May 2003
4-40
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Figure 34 Right CVT Roll and Right CVT Idler (CVT Skis removed)
Tamper Home
Sensor
Tamper Ball
Slide
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-41
Registration Roll
(see note below)
May 2003
4-42
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Side Guide
Sensor 1
Input Tray
Sensor 2
Side Guide
Sensor 2
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-43
Kicker
Moving Stapler
Ball Slide
Tamper Arm
Gear Rack
Stapler Position
Home Sensor
Tamper
Motor Gear
Moving Stapler
drive gears
Tamper Motor
Moving Stapler
Gear Rack
May 2003
4-44
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CVT Motor
Ground Wire
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-45
Finisher Interlock
Switch Actuator
May 2003
4-46
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Figure 40 HCF
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-47
ESS PWB
May 2003
4-48
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-49
ESS DRAM
SIMMS
(CARD CAGE)
(ESS PWB)
May 2003
4-50
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-51
DADF Feed
Clutch
DADF Inverter
Clutch
Registration Roll
Drive Gear
May 2003
4-52
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Retard Bracket
Spring
Stacker Tray
Full Sensor
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-53
Nip 2 Idlers
Stack Height
Sensor actuator
Stack Height
Sensor
Rear Bale
Arm
May 2003
4-54
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-55
IPA PWB
May 2003
4-56
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
ESS LEDs
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-57
May 2003
4-58
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Inverter Drive
Gear
Feed/Reverse
Roll Idler
Inverter Entrance
Sensor
IIOC PWB
A4A1
Close Nip
Link
Close Nip
Solenoid
Spring
Close Nip
Solenoid
IIOC PWB
A4A2
Feed/Reverse
Roll Idler
Spring
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-59
Duplex Gate
Inverter Drive
Assembly
Reverse Drive
Solenoid Spring
Reverse Drive
Solenoid
Feed/Reverse Roll
May 2003
4-60
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Tamper Arm
Drive Cable
Tamper Capstan
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-61
Drive Gear
Shim
NOTE: Also referred to as Baffle Jack
Figure 58 Fuser Module - Drive Gear and Shim (Baffle Jack)
May 2003
4-62
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-63
May 2003
4-64
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Duplex Transport
Vertical Transport
HCF/Duplex Baffle
Mylar
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-65
May 2003
4-66
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-67
P5
P4
Decurler Home Sensor
P3
Guide Blade
Decurler Position
Sensor
Decurler Gate
Solenoid
P137
May 2003
4-68
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
MFF Components
Name
Designator
Purpose
BSD
Location
12B.5
M41
CL40
S45
Monitors the position of the 4-Bar Assembly. Indicates when the 4-Bar 12B.5
Assembly is in the home position.
M45
S64
Monitors the position of the Backstop in the Booklet Maker. Indicates 12B.9
when the Backstop is in the home (lowered) position.
M63
12B.9
S61
12B-9
N/A
12B.3
12B.3
S60
Monitors the movement of paper entering the Booklet Maker. Located 12B.9
just before Nip 20 in the Booklet Maker.
S73
Monitors the movement of paper exiting the Booklet Maker or Tri-Fold 12B.10
Assembly Located just before Nip 19 in the Tri-Fold Assembly.
Booklet Flapper
N/A
L61
When energized, drive from the booklet Paper Path Motor, M60, is pro- 12B.9
vided to rotate the Booklet Flapper. The flapper registers the lead
edge of the sheets against the backstop in the Booklet Maker.
N/A
12B.8
N/A
12B.8
M60
Provides drive to Nip 20 (Booklet Maker entrance nip) and the Flapper 12B.9
in the Booklet Maker.
N/A
12B.7, 12B.8,
12B.9,
S63
12B.7
M62
Provides drive to the Tamper in the Booklet Maker. Moves the Tamper 12B.7
Pads to the Letter tamping position or the A4 tamping position and
tamps the sheets as they enter the Booklet Maker.
M61
S74
Monitors the quantity of booklets in the Booklet Output Tray. Indicates 12B.10
the Booklet Tray needs to be emptied when the Booklet Tray backstop
is in the raised position.
12B.9
12B.10
M31
12B.4
Buffer Gate
N/A
12B.4
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-69
MFF Components
Name
Designator
Purpose
L33
Actuates the Buffer Gate to direct the first sheet of a set into the buffer 12B.4
area.
M30
Provides drive to Nip 8, Nip 9 Clutch, Nip 12, and Nip 13.
12B.4
Compile Belts
N/A
12B.5
L41
12B.5
S46
12B.5
M47
Moves the Compiler Fingers to the compile position (extended) and to 12B.5
the eject position (retracted).
12B.5
S40
12B.5
M47
Provides drive to rotate the Flapper in the Eject Housing. The Flapper 12B.5
aids in stacking of sheets as they are compiled.
S47
12B.5
M40
12B.5
S51
Monitors the position of the Main Tray. Indicates when the Main Tray is 12B.6
in the compile position.
Provides drive to the Tamper in the Compiler Tray. Moves the Tamper 12B.7
Pads to the Letter tamping position or the A4 tamping position and
tamps the sheets as they enter the Compiler Tray.
M44
12B.7
M48
Provides drive to the Upper Compiler drive rolls in the Eject Housing.
12B.5
Cooling Fan
M111
12B.4
12B.6
SW53
Cuts power to the Main Tray Elevator Motor, M51, when actuated.
S68
Monitors the position of the Crease Blade. Indicates when the Crease 12B.9
Blade is in the home (retracted) position.
M67
N/A
N/A
S70
12B.9
S72
12B.10
N/A
N/A
N/A
Prevents the curled edge of paper from entering the Crease Rolls
12B.9
M68
Provides drive to Nip 16 (crease Roll), Nip 17, Nip 18, and Nip 19.
12B.9
S71
Provides feedback to the MFF Control PWB from the Crease Roll
Motor, M68.
12B.9
Monitors the position of the Crease Roll Gate. Indicates when the
Crease Roll Gate is in the home (raised) position.
12B.9
MFF Components
12B.9
May 2003
4-70
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Designator
Purpose
BSD
Location
M66
12B.9
M46
Provides drive to move the Eject Housing to the eject position (down)
and to the set compile position (up).
12B.5
N/A
Provides power and control signals to the Main Stapler and eject com- 12B.5, 12B.8
ponents
S49
Monitors the position of the Eject Housing. Indicates when the housing is in the home position.
Frame/Booklet/Tri-Fold PWB
N/A
Provides power and control signals to Booklet Maker and Tri-Fold com- 12B.3, 12B.4,
ponents
12B.512B.61
2B.7, 12B.10
S110
12B.3
12B.9
SW01
Cuts +24 VDC to the MFF and send a 'Front Door open' signal to the 12B.2
MFF Control PWB, when the Front Door is open.
SW62
12B.8
SW60
Monitors the position of the stapler head in the Booklet Front Stapler.
12B.8
M65
Provides drive to clinch and release the stapler head in the Booklet
Front Stapler.
12B.8
12B.1
12B.5
N/A
Interface between Main Control PWB in IOT and MFF Control PWB.
S42
Monitors the staple supply in the Main Stapler. Indicates when the sta- 12B.8
ple cartridge is low.
S92
Indicates when the staples in the Main Stapler are in the primed
(ready) position.
12B.8
S41
Indicates when the stapler head in the Main Stapler is in the home
position.
12B.8
M43
Moves the Main Stapler to the rear position and to the front position for 12B.8
dual stapling of sets.
Transfers drive from Main Tray Elevator Motor to the Main Tray
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Transfers drive from Main Tray Elevator Motor to the Main Tray
N/A
N/A
M42
Provides drive to clinch and release the stapler head in the Main Stapler.
12B.8
S54
Provides feedback to the MFF Control PWB from the Main Tray Motor. 12B.6
S52
Monitors the position of the Main Tray. Indicates when the Main Tray
need to be emptied.
SW50
Cuts power to the Main Tray Motor if the Main Tray is lowered too far, 12B.6
preventing component damage.
M51
12B.6
M50
12B.6
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-71
12B.6
MFF Components
BSD
Location
Designator
Purpose
S53
12B.6
SW51
Cuts power to the Main Tray Motor if the Main Tray is raised too far,
preventing component damage.
12B.6
N/A
All
N/A
12B.3
12B.3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Nip 6 Idlers
12B.4
Nip 7 Idlers
12B.4
12B.4
Nip 8 Idlers
N/A
L31
12B.4
Nip 9 Clutch
N/A
12B.4
N/A
N/A
N/A
12B.5
N/A
12B.4
Nip 12 Idlers
N/A
N/A
N/A
12B.4
Nip 13 Idlers
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Nip 20 Idlers
N/A
12B.9
M110
12B.3
LED51
12B.6
SW52
This switch is allows the operator to pause the machine to unload sets 12B.6
from the Main Tray.
12B.9
SW61
Monitors the position of the stapler head in the Booklet Rear Stapler.
12B.8
M64
Provides drive to clinch and release the stapler head in the Booklet
Rear Stapler.
12B.8
SW63
12B.8
12B.5
S91
SW04
Cuts power to the Main Stapler Clinch Motor, M42, when the Main Sta- 12B.8
pler is in the position for installing a new staple cartridge.
S79
Indicates when the Booklet Maker Staple Module, Area 5d1, is closed. 12B.8
S43
SW120
Cuts power to MFF components when the Top Cover is open (raised). 12B.2
MFF Components
May 2003
4-72
12B.8
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Name
Designator
Purpose
S121
Monitors the paper in the Top Tray. Indicated when the Top Tray is
approximately 90% full.
12B.4
Actuates Top Tray 90% Full Sensor when Top Tray is 90% full
N/A
S120
12B.4
12B.4
12B.4
L30
12B.4
L81
12B.10
L80
12B.10
CL80
12B.10
N/A
12B.10
N/A
12B.10
S81
12B.10
N/A
Contains the Compiler Flapper and lowers to eject sheets into the
Main Tray
12B.5
N/A
12B.3, 12B.4,
12B.5,
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-73
MFF Components
Nip 13 Idlers
Finisher Entrance
Sensor
Nip 12 Idlers
Front Door
Interlock Switch
Booklet Diverter
Gate Solenoid
Main Stapler
MFF Components
May 2003
4-74
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Figure 2 Main Tray Drive Components 1 of 2 (removed from MFF for clarity)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-75
MFF Components
Compiler Lower
Eject Motor
Upper Eject
Housing
Nip 12 Idlers
MFF Components
May 2003
4-76
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-77
MFF Components
Buffer Entrance
Nip Motor
4 Bar Position
Clutch
4 Bar Position
Motor
MFF Components
May 2003
4-78
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Compiler Lower
Eject Motor
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-79
MFF Components
Crease Roll
Gate Motor
Booklet
Flapper
Solenoid
IOT/MFF
Interface PWB
MFF LVPS
Main Tray
Lower Limit
Switch
LVPS Dirt Filter
Tri-Fold Drive Belt
MFF Components
May 2003
4-80
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-81
MFF Components
Buffer Gate
Solenoid
Nip 7 Idlers
Buffer
Gate
Buffer Entrance
Motor
Buffer Module
Entrance Sensor
Cooling Fan
Nip 6 Idlers
MFF Components
May 2003
4-82
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Top Tray
Diverter Gate
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-83
MFF Components
Crease Nip
Release Lever
Booklet Entrance
Sensor
MFF Components
May 2003
4-84
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Booklet Tamper
Nip 20 Idlers
Booklet Flapper
Booklet Flapper
Solenoid
Booklet Tamper
Motor
Crease Blade
Motor Encoder
Backstop Home
Sensor
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-85
MFF Components
Booklet Entrance
Sensor
Booklet Compiler
Tray Sensor
Front Stapler
Motor
Staple Module
Closed Sensor
Rear Stapler
Motor
MFF Components
May 2003
4-86
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Tri-Fold Jam
Sensor
Tri-Fold Diverter Solenoid
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-87
MFF Components
MFF Components
May 2003
4-88
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Designator
Purpose
BSD
Location
12B.5
M41
CL40
S45
Monitors the position of the 4-Bar Assembly. Indicates when the 4-Bar 12B.5
Assembly is in the home position.
M45
S64
Monitors the position of the Backstop in the Booklet Maker. Indicates 12B.9
when the Backstop is in the home (lowered) position.
M63
12B.9
S61
12B-9
12B.3
S60
Monitors the movement of paper entering the Booklet Maker. Located 12B.9
just before Nip 20 in the Booklet Maker.
S73
Monitors the movement of paper exiting the Booklet Maker or Tri-Fold 12B.10
Assembly Located just before Nip 19 in the Tri-Fold Assembly.
L61
When energized, drive from the booklet Paper Path Motor, M60, is pro- 12B.9
vided to rotate the Booklet Flapper. The flapper registers the lead
edge of the sheets against the backstop in the Booklet Maker.
M60
Provides drive to Nip 20 (Booklet Maker entrance nip) and the Flapper 12B.9
in the Booklet Maker.
N/A
12B.7, 12B.8,
12B.9,
S63
12B.7
M62
Provides drive to the Tamper in the Booklet Maker. Moves the Tamper 12B.7
Pads to the Letter tamping position or the A4 tamping position and
tamps the sheets as they enter the Booklet Maker.
M61
S74
Monitors the quantity of booklets in the Booklet Output Tray. Indicates 12B.10
the Booklet Tray needs to be emptied when the Booklet Tray backstop
is in the raised position.
12B.10
M31
L33
Actuates the Buffer Gate to direct the first sheet of a set into the buffer 12B.4
area.
M30
Provides drive to Nip 8, Nip 9 Clutch, Nip 12, and Nip 13.
12B.4
12B.4
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-89
Designator
Purpose
BSD
Location
L41
12B.5
S46
12B.5
M47
Moves the Compiler Fingers to the compile position (extended) and to 12B.5
the eject position (retracted).
12B.5
S40
12B.5
M47
Provides drive to rotate the Flapper in the Eject Housing. The Flapper 12B.5
aids in stacking of sheets as they are compiled.
S47
12B.5
M40
12B.5
S51
Monitors the position of the Main Tray. Indicates when the Main Tray is 12B.6
in the compile position.
Monitors the position of the Main Tray. Indicates when the Main Tray is
in the compile position.
Provides drive to the Tamper in the Compiler Tray. Moves the Tamper 12B.7
Pads to the Letter tamping position or the A4 tamping position and
tamps the sheets as they enter the Compiler Tray.
M44
12B.7
M48
Provides drive to the Upper Compiler drive rolls in the Eject Housing.
12B.5
M111
12B.4
12B.6
SW53
Cuts power to the Main Tray Elevator Motor, M51, when actuated.
S68
Monitors the position of the Crease Blade. Indicates when the Crease 12B.9
Blade is in the home (retracted) position.
M67
12B.9
S70
12B.9
M68
Provides drive to Nip 16 (crease Roll), Nip 17, Nip 18, and Nip 19.
12B.9
S71
Provides feedback to the MFF Control PWB from the Crease Roll
Motor, M68.
12B.9
Monitors the position of the Crease Roll Gate. Indicates when the
Crease Roll Gate is in the home (raised) position.
12B.9
M66
12B.9
S72
12B.10
M46
Provides drive to move the Eject Housing to the eject position (down)
and to the set compile position (up).
12B.5
N/A
Provides power and control signals to the Main Stapler and eject com- 12B.5, 12B.8
ponents
S49
Monitors the position of the Eject Housing. Indicates when the housing is in the home position.
May 2003
4-90
12B.5
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Name
Designator
Purpose
Frame/Booklet/Tri-Fold PWB
N/A
Provides power and control signals to Booklet Maker and Tri-Fold com- 12B.3, 12B.4,
ponents
12B.512B.61
2B.7, 12B.10
S110
12B.3
SW01
12B.9
SW01
Cuts +24 VDC to the MFF and send a 'Front Door open' signal to the 12B.2
MFF Control PWB, when the Front Door is open.
SW62
12B.8
SW60
Monitors the position of the stapler head in the Booklet Front Stapler.
12B.8
M65
Provides drive to clinch and release the stapler head in the Booklet
Front Stapler.
12B.8
N/A
Interface between Main Control PWB in IOT and MFF Control PWB.
12B.1
S42
Monitors the staple supply in the Main Stapler. Indicates when the sta- 12B.8
ple cartridge is low.
S92
Indicates when the staples in the Main Stapler are in the primed
(ready) position.
12B.8
S41
Indicates when the stapler head in the Main Stapler is in the home
position.
12B.8
M43
Moves the Main Stapler to the rear position and to the front position for 12B.8
dual stapling of sets.
M42
Provides drive to clinch and release the stapler head in the Main Stapler.
12B.8
S52
Monitors the position of the Main Tray. Indicates when the Main Tray
need to be emptied.
12B.6
SW50
Cuts power to the Main Tray Motor if the Main Tray is lowered too far, 12B.6
preventing component damage.
12B.2
M51
S54
Provides feedback to the MFF Control PWB from the Main Tray Motor. 12B.6
12B.6
M50
12B.6
S53
12B.6
SW51
Cuts power to the Main Tray Motor if the Main Tray is raised too far,
preventing component damage.
12B.6
N/A
All
L31
12B.4
M110
12B.3
LED51
12B.6
SW52
This switch is allows the operator to pause the machine to unload sets 12B.6
from the Main Tray.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-91
BSD
Location
12B.9
SW61
Monitors the position of the stapler head in the Booklet Rear Stapler.
12B.8
M64
Provides drive to clinch and release the stapler head in the Booklet
Rear Stapler.
12B.8
SW63
12B.8
12B.5
Name
Designator
S91
SW04
Cuts power to the Main Stapler Clinch Motor, M42, when the Main Sta- 12B.8
pler is in the position for installing a new staple cartridge.
S79
Indicates when the Booklet Maker Staple Module, Area 5d1, is closed. 12B.8
S43
SW120
Cuts power to MFF components when the Top Cover is open (raised). 12B.2
S121
Monitors the paper in the Top Tray. Indicated when the Top Tray is
approximately 90% full.
12B.4
12B.8
S120
12B.4
L40
12B.4
L30
12B.4
L81
12B.10
L80
12B.10
CL80
12B.10
S81
12B.10
N/A
12B.3, 12B.4,
12B.5,
May 2003
4-92
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Buffer Module
Entrance Sensor
Pause to Unload
LED
Compiler Jam
Sensor
Compiler Position
Sensor
Cooling Fan
Motor
(receiver)
Compiler Fingers
Home Sensor
Compiler Fingers
Motor
Stapler Position
Home Sensor
Figure 1 Cross Section of MFF Front View - Buffer/Compiler, Main Tray, and Top Tray (1 of 2)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-93
Eject Housing
Elevator Motor
Compiler Flapper
Motor
Exit Flapper Home
Sensor
The Compiler Flapper
Motor and Exit Flapper
Home Sensor are
behind the Eject Housing Elevator Motor
Stapler Interlock
Switch
Finisher Entrance
Sensor
Set Eject
Sensor
4 Bar Home
Sensor
Main Tray Offset
Sensor
Compiler Entrance
Sensor
Figure 2 Cross Section of MFF Front View - Buffer/Compiler, Main Tray, and Top Tray (2 of 2)
May 2003
4-94
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Crease Blade
Motor Encoder
Sensor
Booklet Entrance
Sensor
Crease Blade
Home Sensor
Crease Blade
Motor
Booklet Tamper
Motor
Booklet Compiler
Tray Sensor
Booklet Backstop
Motor
Front Backstop
Clamp Solenoid
Figure 3 Cross Section of MFF Front View - Booklet Maker, Tri-Folder, Booklet Maker Exit
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-95
Compiler Lower
Eject Motor
Buffer Gate
Solenoid
Eject Housing
Home Sensor
Compile Position
Sensor
(Transmitter)
Nip 8 Release
Solenoid
Compiler Tamper
Home Sensor
Compiler Tamper
Motor
4 Bar Position
Motor
Main Stapler
Position Motor
4 Bar Position
Clutch
Compiler Curl
Guard Solenoid
Figure 4 Cross Section of MFF Rear View - Buffer/Compiler, Main Tray, and Top Tray
May 2003
4-96
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Crease Roll
Motor Encoder
Sensor
Tri-Fold Drive
Clutch
Crease Roll
Gate Motor
Booklet Paper
Path Motor
Booklet Flapper
Solenoid
Booklet Tamper
Home Sensor
Staple Module
Closed Sensor
Backstop Home
Sensor
Located between
the Front and Rear
Backstop Clamp
Solenoids.
Crease Roll
Motor
Rear Backstop
Clamp Solenoid
Tri-Fold Diverter
Solenoid
Figure 5 Cross Section of MFF Rear View - Booklet Maker, Tri-Folder, and Booklet Exit
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-97
May 2003
4-98
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
Swing out the Card Cage (one or two 1/4-turn T20 fasteners).
4.
5.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-99
REP 01-1
J13
J2
J3
J1
J14
J4
J15
J5 (ribbon
cable)
J10
J11
J12
J8
J7
Figure 1 Connectors
REP 01-1
May 2003
4-100
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
Remove
the T20
screw (1).
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
With TAG 300: Disconnect the HCF Heater Enable Harness from the AC Distribution Panel
(Figure 1).
Disconnect
J9 on the
Distribution
PWB from
J4 on the
LVPS.
With TAG 299: Disconnect the IOT Heater Power Supply connector P125 from the AC Distribution Panel.
4.
b.
c.
Without TAG 105: If replacing the AC Distribution Panel with a new one, disconnect
P41 from the LVPS, and open the LVPS Cooling Fan/Duct (PL 9.1) and disconnect
the two in-line fastons P2 and P4.
Figure 2 Removal
With TAG 105: If replacing the AC Distribution Panel with a new one, disconnect
P41 from the LVPS, and open the LVPS Cooling Fan/Duct (PL 9.1) and disconnect
the three wires from the Flicker PWB.
Replacement
Align the Distribution PWB connector J9 with LVPS connector J4 carefully, ensuring all
pins are engaged and the connectors are not offset.
d.
With TAG 300 or TAG 299: If replacing the AC Distribution Panel with a new one: Remove all
of the following components which are not present in the new panel, and install them in the new
panel (Figure 2):
a.
Heater Enable Harness (connector P6 to J1 on the Relay PWB, and J4 and J5 into
the panel case)
b.
AC Power Harness connector P8 to J3 on the Relay PWB, and FL1-1 and FL1-2 to
the Line Filter.
c.
d.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-101
REAR VIEW
P7/J4
Replacement
CAUTION
Without TAG 105: If replacing the AC Distribution Panel with a new one, be sure to reconnect
the two in-line fastons P2 and P4 inside the LVPS Cooling Fan/Duct correctly: Connect the
blue wire to the blue wire and the brown wire to the brown wire.
Relay
With TAG 105: If replacing the AC Distribution Panel with a new one, be sure to reconnect the
wires to the Flicker PWB inside the LVPS Cooling Fan Duct correctly: Connect the brown wire
to J1, the violet wire to J2, and the blue wire to J3 on the Flicker PWB.
Harness Clip
J5
REP 01-2
J4
Heater
Enable
Harness
(P6/J1)
May 2003
4-102
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: Leaving these two screws loose for now will make it easier to mate the Distribution PWB to the LVPS later.
2.
Connect connector P41 to the LVPS on the left side (as viewed from the rear).
3.
Connect the connectors to J2, J3, J5, and J6 on the right side of the LVPS (as viewed
from the rear).
4.
5.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
NOTE: Figure 1 shows the Distribution PWB with the harnesses omitted for clarity. You
do not have to disconnect the harnesses from the Distribution PWB.
Reinstall the
screw here.
4.
Disconnect connector P41 from the left side of the LVPS (as viewed from the rear).
b.
Disconnect the connectors from J2, J3, J5, and J6 on the right side of the LVPS (as
viewed from the rear).
c.
Remove the two T20 screws (one on each side) which secure the LVPS to the rear
machine frame.
d.
Tilt the LVPS outward, lift it out of its bottom mounts, and remove it.
Remove
the T20
screw.
Engage all
pins to the
LVPS connector J4.
Remove the
T20 screw.
Reinstall
the screw
here, holding the
PWB in
this position.
3
Slide the PWB
as far as possible to your left.
3
Ensure that
all pins are
disengaged
from the
LVPS connector J4.
2
Slide the PWB
to your right.
Replacement
1.
Position the LVPS and install the T20 screws (2) loosely.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-103
REP 01-3
REP 01-3
May 2003
4-104
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CAUTION
If replacing the UI Assembly with a new one and the machine has any level of L0.15 software
(V1.1, 1.11, 1.12, 1.2, 1.21), then you must upgrade the machine software, using the latest
software upgrade kit, before performing this procedure. This procedure has you load software
onto the new UI (as required) to match the version of software currently on the machine, and
loading any level of L0.15 software onto a new UI may destroy the new UI.
2
Lift the
panel.
CAUTION
Certain components in this procedure are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
1.
If replacing the UI with a new one, determine the current software level in the machine
and obtain the appropriate Software Upgrade Kit:
CAUTION
Be sure to consult any bulletins which may have announced later software releases than
those listed in this version of EDOC.
a.
Identify the current software level on the machine by the highest software Tag number which is marked off on the IOT Change Tag Matrix (see Product Specifications :
Software Version Compatibility).
b.
Obtain the Software Upgrade Kit either for the level of software already in the
machine or for the next level higher
NOTE: The Software Upgrade Kit for each software release includes the files both
for that software release and for the previous release.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
2.
Figure 1 Removal
Replacement
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the User Interface Assembly: Lift the rear out, disengaging the rear tabs.
6.
If replacing the User Interface Assembly with a new one, remove the bezel from the User
Interface Assembly. (The bezel provides the User Interface button labels, either in English
or in multinational symbols.)
NOTE: If the old UI has a SIMM attached that the new one does not have, do not transfer the
SIMM to the new UI. The SIMMs function is built into the new UI, and installing the SIMM on
the new UI will cause malfunctions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-105
Wait until 30 seconds have passed after switching on the machine power.
b.
Place the UI into Diagnostics mode: On the UI keypad, press and hold the [*] key
and the [Dial Pause] key (under the [*] key), and press the [#] key.
c.
Refer to the APPrevisionlevel on the UI display, and record the UI software version.
d.
REP 02-1
5.
If the new UI's software level does not match that already in the machine, or if the customer requires a non-default language set, perform a UI Software Upload (REP 02-4).
If replacing the UI Processor PWB with a new one, determine the current software level in
the machine and obtain the appropriate Software Upgrade Kit:
CAUTION
Be sure to consult any bulletins which may have announced later software releases than
those listed in this version of EDOC.
a.
Identify the current software level on the machine by the highest software Tag number which is marked off on the IOT Change Tag Matrix (see Product Specifications :
Software Version Compatibility).
b.
Obtain the Software Upgrade Kit either for the level of software already in the
machine or for the next level higher
NOTE: The Software Upgrade Kit for each software release includes the files both
for that software release and for the previous release.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
2.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
3.
4.
Remove the Inverter PWB from the UI Processor PWB (Figure 1).
5.
May 2003
4-106
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
3
Slide the Inverter PWB to
the right to disconnect
CN1, and remove the
Rotator PWB.
1
Disconnect CN2.
2
Remove the T10 screw.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-107
REP 02-2
3
Remove the T10 screws
(4), and remove the UI
Processor PWB.
2
Slide the connector clip
out and disconnect the
ribbon cable from J3.
1
Slide the connector clip
out and disconnect the
ribbon cable from J1.
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
b.
NOTE: This concludes the physical replacement of the UI Processor PWB. Continue only
if replacing the UI Processor PWB with a new one.
4.
5.
6.
Place the UI into Diagnostics mode: On the UI keypad, press and hold the [*] key
and the [Dial Pause] key (under the [*] key), and press the [#] key.
c.
Refer to the APPrevisionlevel on the UI display, and record the UI software version.
d.
If the new UI Processor PWB's software level does not match that already in the
machine, or if the customer requires a non-default language set, perform a UI Software
Upload (REP 02-4).
Wait until 30 seconds have passed after switching on the machine power.
REP 02-2
May 2003
4-108
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Install the T10 screws (4).
3
Insert the ribbon cable
into (J3), and slide the
connector clip in. Ensure
that the ribbon cable is
connected securely.
4
Insert the ribbon cable
into (J1), and slide the
connector clip in. Ensure
that the ribbon cable is
connected securely.
1
Position the UI Processor
PWB onto the standoff,
pressing (J7) straight
down onto the connector
pins. USE CAUTION not
to bend the pins.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-109
REP 02-2
1
Slide the Inverter PWB to
the left to connect CN1,
and position the Rotator
PWB.
3
Connect CN2.
2
Install the T10 screw.
REP 02-2
May 2003
4-110
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-111
REP 02-3
UI Processor PWB
(removed)
Figure 1 Removal
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
REP 02-3
May 2003
4-112
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
UI Processor PWB
(removed)
Figure 2 Installation
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-113
REP 02-3
UI Software Upload
If the software level of the new UI or new UI Processor PWB does not match the machine software level, or if the customer requires a non-default language set, upload to the UI the correct
software level and language set, using the appropriate Software Upgrade Kit. You may use
either the Software Upgrade Kit Instructions or the following UI Software Upload procedure:
1.
If the machine power is on, switch off the machine power and wait at least 20 seconds.
b.
Press and hold the [C] and [#] buttons simultaneously, and switch on the machine
power. Wait ten seconds, then release the [C] and [#] buttons.
2.
Connect the PWS parallel cable to the parallel connector on the laptop and to the
machine parallel cable connection. Also, ensure the PWS serial cable is connected to the
serial connector on the laptop and the to the machine serial cable connection.
3.
In the Diagnostics Navigator, select the [Configuration] tab, then select [Software
Upgrade].
4.
5.
6.
7.
Obtain the machine software CD-ROM from the Software Upgrade Kit.
8.
Read the following steps, up through and including inserting the EDOC CD-ROM back
into the PWS CD-ROM drive, and record those steps necessary to work from hardcopy
during the software upload process.
NOTE: The UI software upload will take at least 18 minutes. As long as the upload is progressing as described below, do not intervene until the third event has occurred, indicating the upload is complete.
15. After a few seconds you should begin to observe three stages in sequence:
a.
During approximately the first three minutes, the machine will go into quiescent
(quiet) state wherein the ROS stops spinning. The UI will show a horizontal gas
gauge display (a box with legs, like a rectangular centipede), which is empty during
this first stage. The Status window on the PWS will first display a message that it is
waiting for the machine to enter download mode. After approximately 60 seconds the
Percent Complete/Blocks Completed box at the bottom of the Software Upgrade
Wizard window starts to fill with an advancing blue bar, at which time the Status window on the PWS indicates that it is copying files to the Main Controller.
b.
Approximately three minutes after the start of file transfer, the machine UI display
begins to increment from left to right, then from bottom to top. (This UI display may
blink and restart several times during the upload -- this is normal.) A short time later,
the file transfer begins from the Main Control PWB (Atlanta) to the UI. The PWS Status window will display Transferring file to UI and Bank 1, then Bank 2, and so on,
up to Bank 5.
c.
When the upload has completed, the Platforms Upgraded window on the PWS displays User Interface Upgrade Complete. A short time later, the normal machine
sounds will resume (the ROS resumes spinning). The PWS may lose communications with the machine briefly and then reestablish communications.
NOTE: You will not have access to this EDOC procedure while the EDOC CD-ROM is
removed and the machine software CD-ROM is inserted into the PWS CD-ROM drive.
Again, you can use the Software Upgrade Kit Instructions instead.
9.
Remove the EDOC CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive of the PWS and insert the Digital
Copier Software CD-ROM, included in the Software Upgrade Kit.
10. Open (double-click) the directory: [g:\inst\], then open the directory corresponding to the
machine's current software level.
11. Select the UI directory, then select the directory corresponding to the correct language
set.
19. Switch off the machine power using the red button inside the front door, and wait at least
20 seconds.
a.
Language set 05 (for North America and South America): US English, Spanish,
South American Portuguese, French
In the Diagnostic Navigator, select the [Configuration] tab, then select [System,
Imaging, and IOT Configuration].
b.
In the System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration window, select the [Software] tab,
and verify that the software version shown for the [UI] matches the correct version for
the machine's software level, listed in Table 1 or in the Software Upgrade Kit Instructions.
12. Select the file spuXXXXX.sre, where XXXXX corresponds to the software version.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 02-4
May 2003
4-114
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
c.
Press the [Language] button on the UI control panel, and verify that the desired languages are available.
UI Version
07.19.05.026
0.019.05.024
07.19.04.039
0.019.04.037
07.19.04.038
0.019.04.037
07.19.02.503
0.019.02.503
07.19.02.051
0.019.02.049
07.19.01.504
0.019.01.504
7.02 (L0.19.0.56)
0.019.00.056
7.01 (L0.19.0.28)
0.019.00.027
7.00 (L0.19.0.27)
0.019.00.027
6.08 (L0.18.6.07)
0.018.06.004
6.04 (L0.18.1.24)
0.018.01.025
6.03 (L0.18.1.24)
0.018.01.024
5.22 (L0.17.9.32)
0.017.09.032
5.18 (L0.17.8.67)
0.017.08.066
5.11 (L0.17.8.67)
0.017.08.066
5.08 (L0.17.8.65)
0.017.08.065
5.07 (L0.17.8.64)
0.017.08.063
5.06 (L0.17.8.12)
0.017.08.005
5.05 (L0.17.6)
0.017.06.005
5.03 (L0.17.5)
0.017.05.007
5.01 (L0.17.4)
0.017.04.010
5.00 (L0.17.3)
0.017.03.008
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-115
REP 02-4
REP 02-4
May 2003
4-116
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
a.
Disconnect the connectors from J1, J2, and J3 along the top of the SCAM PWB.
b.
Disconnect the connectors from J4 and J5 along the right side of the SCAM PWB
(as viewed from the rear).
c.
Disconnect any connectors from J8, J7, and J6 along the bottom of the SCAM PWB.
d.
Disconnect any connectors from J10, J9, and J11 along the left side of the SCAM
PWB (as viewed from the rear).
b.
Lift the SCAM PWB from the bottom supports and remove it.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-117
REP 03-1
J1
J2
J3
J4
J10
J9
J11
J5
J8
J7
J6
Figure 1 Connectors
Replacement
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 03-1
If replacing the SCAM PWB with a MSCAM PWB (160K72972 or higher), mark off TAG 108 on
the IOT Change/Tag Matrix (if not already marked off).
May 2003
4-118
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
a.
b.
Left Rear Cover (on the right as viewed from the rear)
c.
Cardcage Cover
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-119
REP 03-2
Replacement
CAUTION
Be sure to position the upper left corner of the IPS1 PWB between the two Card Cage tabs
(Figure 1). Whereas the other three corners are each aligned by a standoff, the upper left corner of the PWB is aligned between the two Card Cage tabs.
CAUTION
Be sure to seat the daughter PWB connectors securely against the Main Control PWB by
pressing on the rear of the connectors (Figure 1).
REP 03-2
May 2003
4-120
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Figure 1 Installation
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-121
REP 03-2
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
b.
c.
3.
(240/255/265): Remove the rear (Main Control PWB side) Cardcage Cover
4.
b.
c.
5.
6.
XE (formerly RX) machines only: If replacing the Accessory PWB with a new one,
remove the Nationalization Chip from the old PWB, to be reused on the new PWB.
NOTE: DMO (formerly AO) 220V machines use the non-XE Accessory PWB.
REP 03-3
May 2003
4-122
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Disconnect the video cable from the card cage, and free
the video cable from its restraints on the fan housing.
1
Remove the video connector
cover (two T20 hex-head screws).
4
Disconnect the fan
connector.
3
Remove the T20 roundhead screw.
6
5
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-123
REP 03-3
b.
Set the Accessory PWB Dip Switches correctly for the nationality of the machine
(see Product Specifications ).
2.
Install the Accessory PWB (Figure 3 for 240/255/265; Figure 4 for 460/470).
3.
Ensure that the Accessory PWB connector to the Main Control PWB is seated firmly (Figure 5 for 240/255/265; Figure 6 for 460/470).
1
Insert the PWB at an
angle.
Figure 2 Remove the Card Cage Cover
2
Pivot the PWB
inward.
Replacement
CAUTION
Be sure to seat the Accessory PWB connector securely against the Main Control PWB by
pressing on the rear of the connector.
1.
XE (formerly RX) machines only: If replacing the Accessory PWB with a new one, perform the following:
NOTE: DMO (formerly AO) 220V machines use the non-XE Accessory PWB.
a.
REP 03-3
May 2003
4-124
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Install the
PWB onto
the four
standoffs.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-125
REP 03-3
REP 03-3
May 2003
4-126
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Press firmly in
these two locations to seat
the Accessory
PWB connector.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-127
REP 03-3
REP 03-4 Main Control PWB (Atlanta '96-to-'96 or Gold-toGold) (without Tag 077)
Parts List on PL 1.4A
Removal
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
4.
NOTE: Use this procedure only if replacing an Atlanta96 or Atlanta Gold Main Control PWB
with the same type, i.e. (without TAG 015) if replacing an Atlanta '96 with another Atlanta '96 or
(with TAG 015) if replacing an Atlanta Gold with another Atlanta Gold. If replacing an Atlanta
'96 with an Atlanta Gold (upgrading to TAG 015), or if replacing an Atlanta 96 or Atlanta Gold
with an Atlanta Platinum (upgrading to TAG 077), you must order the appropriate Upgrade Kit
(PL 1.4A) and follow the instructions provided in that kit. If replacing an Atlanta Platinum (with
TAG 077) with another Atlanta Platinum, go to REP 03-11.
5.
b.
c.
d.
Connector Panel (lower center rear cover: remove four T20 screws)
Swing out the Card Cage (one or two 1/4-turn T20 fasteners).
b.
Disconnect the following connectors (at the Card Cage unless otherwise specified,
and freeing harnesses from cable clips as necessary):
CAUTION
Certain components in this procedure are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
CAUTION
You must identify the current software level in the machine and on the new Main Control PWB,
and if the software levels are different then obtain the appropriate Software Upgrade Kit. If the
machine and new PWB software levels are different, software must be uploaded onto the new
PWB after the PWB replacement, to restore the machine operation.
NOTE: In all cases, this procedure has you restore the machine operation at the same level of
software as was already in the machine before the Main Control PWB replacement. You will
upload software onto the new PWB if necessary, to match the level of software already in the
machine; you will not upgrade or downgrade the machine software to match the software
level on the new PWB.
1.
2.
Determine the current software level in the machine and on the new Main Control PWB,
and obtain the appropriate Software Upgrade Kit if necessary.
6.
7.
c.
Unsnap and remove the fan/duct unit from the top of the Card Cage.
d.
Front and rear covers: Loosen two T20 screws on top for each cover.
b.
Side connector plate (on the left side of the Card Cage as viewed from the rear, Main
Control PWB side: Loosen two T20 screws on top and two on the bottom)
CAUTION
a.
Be sure to consult any bulletins which may have announced later software releases than
those listed in this version of EDOC.
b.
(Without TAG 015) Auto Segmentation PWB (IPS1 Daughter PWB, REP 03-2)
c.
(With TAG 296) Electronic Hole Removal PWB (IPS1 Daughter PWB, REP 03-2)
a.
Identify the current software level on the machine by the highest software Tag number which is marked off on the IOT Change Tag Matrix (see Product Specifications :
Software Version Compatibility).
d.
e.
b.
Identify the software level on the new Main Control PWB, by the labels on the Flash
chips near the lower right corner of the PWB (Figure 1 for Atlanta '96, or Figure 2 for
Atlanta Gold, TAG 015).
NOTE: You will reuse the NVM RAM Chip from the old PWB. However, leave the chip on
the old PWB for now, for safekeeping, until you are instructed later to transfer the chip to
the new PWB.
c.
If the new PWB's software level does not match that already in the machine, obtain
the Software Upgrade Kit for the level of software already in the machine.
If possible, save the NVM to Floppy (GP4), naming the file so as to identify the software
level (e.g. 1_0.nsf for Version 1.0).
NOTE: If an NVM download is not possible, inform the customer that any recent Tools
settings (entered since the last NVM download) will need to be reentered after the service
call.
3.
8.
Disconnect the connectors from the Main Control PWB (Figure 3).
CAUTION
Without TAG 015 only: If you are replacing an Atlanta '96 Main Control PWB with another
Atlanta '96, take care to save and reuse the mica washers on the two screws in the center of
the PWB.
9.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
REP 03-4
May 2003
4-128
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Atlanta '96:
Software level
printed on Flash
Chip label. Example shown: L0.15.3
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-129
REP 03-4
Atlanta Gold:
REP 03-4
May 2003
4-130
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Remove metal cover
(two T20 screws) and
disconnect the connector from J14.
1
Disconnect Image Disk
ribbon cable from J3.
4
(FX Only):
Disconnect
EPSV
3
Disconnect connectors from J6,
J7, and J13.
Figure 3 Connectors
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-131
REP 03-4
3
Remove the PWB from
the standoffs and slide it
out of the Card Cage.
1
Remove the T20
screws (5).
2
Without TAG 015:
Remove the T20
screws (2).
Figure 4 Screws
Replacement
NOTE: The new PWB may have a small metal EME shield on the ROS video connector,
and this shield may fall off easily. Ensure that this shield is in place when the new PWB is
installed.
CAUTION
This procedure assumes that the new Main Control PWB does not have an NVM RAM Chip
installed. If an NVM RAM Chip is presently installed on the new PWB, remove the chip (REP
03-7).
CAUTION
a.
Slide the PWB into the cardcage and position the right-edge connectors into the side
of the cardcage.
b.
Position the PWB onto the standoffs and reinstall the T20 screws (7 screws for
Atlanta 96, 5 screws for Atlanta Gold).
If the new PWB is an Atlanta Gold, be sure to set the jumper for the correct processing speed
according to the following step, to ensure that machine will function properly.
1.
(With TAG 015): Set the jumper on the new PWB for the correct processing speed (Figure 5).
NOTE: If this jumper is missing from the new PWB, you may reuse the jumper from the
old PWB.
2.
REP 03-4
CAUTION
Without TAG 015 only: When replacing an Atlanta '96 Main Control PWB with another
Atlanta '96, be sure to reinstall the mica washers on the two screws in the center of the PWB.
Otherwise, damage to the Main control PWB may result.
c.
3.
Reinstall all Card Cage covers except the rear, (Main Control PWB side) cover.
4.
May 2003
4-132
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CAUTION
c.
Select the file asy****.sre (where **** indicates the desired software level), and
select [OK].
d.
In the Software Upload window, select [Upload], and note the time at which you are
starting the upload.
e.
b.
5.
6.
(Without TAG 015): Reinstall the Auto Segmentation PWB (IPS1 Daughter PWB, REP
03-2)
7.
If you are certain that the new Main Control PWB has the same level software as was
already in the machine as determined earlier, skip the Manual IOT Software Upload and
go to Final Steps After the Main Control PWB Replacement, below.
CAUTION
Be sure to wait at least the length of time specified below, to ensure that the software
upload has time to complete.
After approximately ten minutes the PWS should indicate IOT Upgrade Complete , then you must wait at least 20 seconds longer.
If there is no feedback on the PWS indicating that the upload is complete (normal with some software releases), wait at least 15 minutes from the start of the
upload.
f.
CAUTION
g.
On the PWS, [Exit] Diagnostic Navigator and close the current session.
h.
Remove the machine software CD-ROM and insert the EDOC CD-ROM back into
the PWS CD-ROM drive.
Ensure that the front door is open and the interlock switch is not cheated.
CAUTION
10. Disconnect the parallel cable and connect the serial cable.
1.
2.
Ensure that the PWS Diagnostics is set to the same software level as was already in the
machine. (If necessary, exit Session Manager and use the Multiple Version Handler to
switch versions.)
1.
Remove the NVM RAM Chip from the old Main Control PWB (REP 03-7).
2.
Install the NVM RAM Chip onto the new Main Control PWB. Perform only the Physical
Installation steps of REP 03-7 Replacement at this time, then return here.
3.
Connect the parallel cable (but not the serial cable -- disconnect the serial cable, if connected).
3.
4.
Ensure that the front door is open and the interlock switch is not cheated.
5.
Select the [Configuration] tab, select [Software Upgrade], and select [Manual] (not Wizard), for the upgrade type.
4.
6.
In the Software Upgrade window, deselect [Automated Mode] (ensure that [Automated
Mode] is not selected).
7.
Obtain the machine software CD-ROM from the Software Upgrade Kit.
8.
Record the following step, up through and including inserting the EDOC CD-ROM
back into the PWS CD-ROM drive, to enable reading from hardcopy or Notepad during
the software upload process.
NOTE: You will not have access to this EDOC procedure while the EDOC CD-ROM is
removed and the machine software CD-ROM is inserted into the PWS CD-ROM drive.
Record the entire next numbered step: Either write it down; or select the text in the
Browser, copy it (CTRL-C), open a blank Notepad text document, and paste the text
(CTRL-V) into the Notepad document. (In Notepad, select the Edit menu and select
Word Wrap to ensure that the text is easily readable.)
9.
CAUTION
NOTE: If the Auto Configuration detects that Remote Data Transfer has become disabled,
do not accept the configuration change. Instead, switch off the machine power and check
that the Accessory PWB is seated securely on the Main Control PWB.
NOTE: (With TAG 015): Accept an EPSV configuration error in all market regions except
FX.
5.
6.
Remove the EDOC CD-ROM from the PWS CD-ROM drive and insert the machine
software CD-ROM.
b.
On the PWS, in the Software Upgrade window, select [Main Controller], select
[Source...], and navigate to the directory g:\inst\**_**\scs\ (where **_** indicates
the desired software level).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-133
b.
If a Manual IOT Software Upload was performed, verify the IOT checksums:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Verify the checksums displayed against those listed in Product Specifications : IOT
Software Checksums , or in the Software Upgrade instructions if later than the software levels shown. If the checksums do not agree with those for the desired IOT
software level, go to 03-J Checksum Error RAP.
REP 03-4
NOTE: If the NVM appears to have been corrupted by the failed Main Control PWB, performing the Required Steps After NVM RAM Chip Replacement in (REP 03-7) may
restore the NVM to an operable state.
7.
If the NVM appears to have been corrupted by the failed Main Control PWB, perform the
Required Steps After NVM RAM Chip Replacement in (REP 03-7).
8.
Switch off the machine power, wait at least 20 seconds, and switch on the machine power.
9.
REP 03-4
May 2003
4-134
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-135
REP 03-4
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
a.
b.
Left Rear Cover (on the right as viewed from the rear)
c.
Cardcage Cover
1
Gently press the
clips outward until
the SIMM tilts in
the socket.
2
Grasp the SIMM
by the edges.
3
Remove the
SIMM. Observe
the correct orientation for later installation.
Figure 1 Removal
REP 03-5
May 2003
4-136
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
CAUTION
Ensure that the SIMM is fully inserted, with both clips snapped into position. Applying power to
the machine with a SIMM partly-installed can destroy the SIMM or cause other machine damage.
Orient the SIMM with the notched corner downward when reinstalling it.
If upgrading RAM: Place the machine into Manufacturing mode so that it will accept the
configuration change:
a.
b.
c.
Under Install Phase, pull down the menu and select [Manufacturing] (two places for
L0.17 or higher software).
d.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
2.
3.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
Remove the following from the IOT:
a.
b.
Left Rear Cover (on the right as viewed from the rear)
c.
Cardcage Cover
4.
If a SIMM is installed in the EPC DRAM 2 socket, remove the Rotation SRAM SIMM (REP
03-5) to gain clearance for removing and installing the EPC DRAM SIMM(s).
5.
Remove the SIMM from the EPC DRAM 2 slot (if present).
b.
Remove the SIMM from the EPC DRAM 1 slot (if present).
NOTE: Either one or two EPC DRAM SIMMs can be installed. Figure 1 shows a SIMM in
the EPC DRAM 2 slot for clarity, which is the first SIMM to remove if there are two EPC
DRAM SIMMs. The same method is used for the SIMM in EPC DRAM 1 after the SIMM
is removed from EPC DRAM 2 (if present).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-137
Replacement
CAUTION
Ensure that the SIMM is fully inserted, with both clips snapped into position. Applying power to
the machine with a SIMM partly-installed can destroy the SIMM or cause other machine damage.
1
Gently press the
clips outward until
the SIMM tilts in
the socket.
1.
Install the EPC DRAM SIMM(s) in the reverse order of Removal, starting with the EPC
DRAM 1 slot. Orient each SIMM with the notched corner downward.
NOTE: A single SIMM will function the same in either slot, but EPC DRAM 1 is recommended.
2.
3.
If upgrading RAM: Place the machine back into Install Complete mode.
a.
b.
c.
Under Install Phase, pull down the menu and select [Install Complete] (two places for
L0.17 or higher software).
d.
e.
Switch off the machine power, wait 20 seconds, then switch on the machine power.
2
Grasp the SIMM
by the edges.
3
Remove the
SIMM. Observe
the correct orientation for later installation.
Figure 1 Removal
REP 03-6
May 2003
4-138
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: If replacing the NVM RAM Chip with a new one and an NVM download is not possible, inform the customer that any recent Tools settings (entered since the last NVM
download) will need to be reentered after the service call.
5.
CAUTION
Do not return as new, or reuse in any other machine, any NVM RAM Chip which has been
installed in any machine. Once the NVM RAM Chip is installed and the machine power
switched on, the chip is no longer new -- it is automatically initialized by the machine software and cannot be used again as a "virgin" chip.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
6.
CAUTION
a.
Certain components in this procedure are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
b.
Left Rear Cover (on the right as viewed from the rear)
NOTE: If replacing the NVM RAM Chip with a new one, the NVM values must be restored from
the MRD afterward. However, all counters and Auditron information will be lost because, for
legal reasons, they cannot be copied as part of the NVM download or saved to the MRD. Also,
the machine serial number and time and date will be lost from machine memory and will need
to be reentered afterward using the PWS.
7.
NOTE: Windows '95 PWS, 55 ppm machine ONLY: You must have loaded PWS software
version L0.17.8.67 or higher, to use during this procedure (in addition to the version corresponding to the machine software). Otherwise, the PWS may be unable to communicate with
the machine after the NVM RAM Chip is installed, and you may be unable to restore machine
operation with the new chip installed.
NOTE: Passwords/Confirmation Codes Required: If replacing the NVM RAM Chip with a
new one on a non-FSMA service plan ("Sold" CRUs) machine, this procedure requires that a
protected NVM settings (Service Plan) be restored after replacing the NVM RAM Chip. The
PWS will be prompt you to obtain the necessary confirmation code for the Service Plan setting
during this procedure on a "Sold" machine. When prompted, contact Field Engineering to
obtain the confirmation code.
1.
d.
(With TAG 015): Use only the correct NVM Replacement Tool for replacing the NVM
Chip. If you attempt to use any other tool such as a screwdriver, you will damage the
NVM Chip Socket and necessitate replacing the Main Control PWB. Also be sure to note
the orientation of the chip for correct reinstallation
b.
b.
c.
d.
Select [Close].
2.
If possible, record any Auditron account information. If this is not possible, inform the customer that they will need to reenter this information after the service call.
3.
Check whether the machine is set for a "Sold (A)" Service Plan:
4.
c.
a.
b.
Select [CRU's].
c.
Select the [CRU Management] tab, and note the Service Plan setting. If the Service
Plan is set to "Sold (A)," then you will be instructed to obtain and enter a confirmation
code from Field Engineering later, in order to restore this setting.
d.
Select [Cancel].
If possible, save the NVM to Floppy (GP4), naming the file so as to identify the software
level (e.g. 1_0.bnf for Version 1.0).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-139
REP 03-7
ATLANTA '96:
1
Disconnect this
connector to
gain clearance.
2
Remove the
NVM RAM Chip.
REP 03-7
May 2003
4-140
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
ATLANTA GOLD:
Remove the
NVM RAM Chip.
Replacement
CAUTION
(Without TAG 015): When installing the NVM chip, be careful not to bend the pins. Also
remember to install the NVM Chip in the position noted earlier: The chip must be at the bottom
of the socket so that pin 1 is in hole 3 of the socket (the top four holes are left empty).
CAUTION
(With TAG 015): Be sure to orient the NVM chip correctly, with the beveled (slanted) edge to
the right, even though the lettering on the chip may be upside down. Also, use the correct
technique for installing the chip, avoiding excessive force which can damage the chip and the
Main Control PWB.
1.
2.
b.
If you are reinstalling the same NVM RAM Chip removed earlier, this procedure is now
complete.
Otherwise, continue.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-141
REP 03-7
ATLANTA GOLD:
Install the NVM RAM Chip with
this beveled edge to the right,
as viewed from the rear of the
IOT. (The bevel, or slanted
edge, is represented here by
diagonal lines).
e.
f.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Windows '95 PWS, 55 ppm machine ONLY: You must use PWS software version L0.17.6,
L0.17.8.66, or L0.18.1.13 or higher when first switching on the machine after replacing the
NVM RAM Chip. Otherwise, the PWS may be unable to communicate with the machine after
the 128K NVM RAM Chip is installed, and you may be unable to restore machine operation
with the new chip installed.
You must pull out the Xerographic Module and Fuser before switching on the machine power,
after replacing the NVM RAM Chip. Otherwise the machine may falsely declare the end-of-life
for either CRU, requiring that it be replaced.
2.
1.
3.
Windows '95 PWS, 55 ppm machine ONLY: Switch the PWS Diagnostics to L0.17.6,
L0.17.8.66, or L0.18.1.13 or higher, using Multiple Version Handler:
a.
b.
c.
Under the heading "Available Versions, Install Paths," select PWS version L0.17.6,
L0.17.8.66, or L0.18.1.13 or higher.
d.
REP 03-7
May 2003
4-142
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: When the machine power is switched on with a new (virgin) NVM RAM Chip
installed, it automatically switches from Install Complete phase to Manufacturing phase.
The PWS will therefore display a message indicating that installation is not complete.
Select [OK] to dismiss this message. The NVM upload, done later, will switch the machine
back to Install Complete phase.
CAUTION
Ignore any UI message to switch off the machine power during this phase of the upgrade. Do
not switch off the machine power until after restoring the NVM later, as directed in these
instructions. Until then, the Main Control PWB will not communicate with the UI, and the UI displays only the Document Centre screen with a series of dots at the top, followed by a false
message to switch off the machine power -- ignore this message.
CAUTION
Select [OK] to dismiss the PWS messages indicating that installation has not been completed,
but do not change the Install Phase at this time. When the machine was switched on with a
new (virgin) NVM RAM Chip installed, it defaulted to Manufacturing phase in order to temporarily accept the configuration mismatches associated with the other default NVM. The
machine will return to Install Complete phase when the NVM is restored later.
7.
b.
c.
Under the heading "Available Versions, Install Paths," select the PWS version corresponding to the machine software version.
d.
e.
f.
If this is a "Sold (A)" service plan machine: Contact Field Engineering and obtain the
confirmation code for Non-FSMA ("Sold" CRUs) service plan.
CAUTION
Select [OK] to dismiss the PWS messages indicating that installation has not been completed,
but do not change the Install Phase at this time.
8.
Non-FSMA ("Sold" CRUs) machine only: Restore the Service Plan setting to the
machine memory:
a.
b.
c.
Under Service Plan, select [Sold (A)] from the pull-down menu.
CAUTION
d.
Do not proceed to enter information or restore NVM until the machine is ready, as indicated
below
In the Confirmation Code box that appears, enter the confirmation code obtained
from Field Engineering.
e.
Select [Apply].
4.
f.
Observe the PWS attempting to establish communication with the machine as the
machine initializes the new NVM RAM Chip. The PWS will lose and then reestablish communication with the machine. Wait until the PWS-machine communication is stable (1-3
minutes after you switched on the machine power) before proceeding to the next step.
OR
If the PWS fails to establish stable communication with the machine after 3 minutes, or if it
displays a message, "Unable to read machine configuration," do the following: Switch off
the machine power, wait at least 20 seconds, and switch on the machine power. The PWS
should then establish stable communication with the machine, and you may proceed as
follows.
9.
Restore the machine NVM from the machine resident diskette file (GP4).
b.
In the System tab, ensure that the Market Region is set correctly.
c.
Select [Apply]
d.
CAUTION
e.
You must reenter certain settings as follows, and then upload the NVM from the MRD, in order
to restore the machine operation.
f.
Select [Apply].
g.
5.
h.
a.
i.
Select [Apply].
b.
In the System tab, ensure that the Product Type (40/55/65 ppm) are set correctly.
j.
EXCEPT:
12. Reset the Machine Administrator password back to the default (1111):
55 ppm machine only: Switch the Product Type to [65 ppm] and select [Apply] and
[OK] (the machine should reset - if not, switch the power off and on). Re-enter [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], and switch the Product type to [65 ppm] a second time. (This has to be done twice, to ensure that the 55 ppm setting takes full
effect).
6.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Select [Exit].
c.
Select [Apply]
13. [Exit] Diagnostic Navigator, and close Session Manager or Case Server.
d.
14. Switch off the machine power: Try the white On/Off switch first; then, only if the machine
does not respond at all within 3 minutes, use the red button.
Windows '95 PWS, 55 ppm machine ONLY: Switch the PWS Diagnostics version back
to correspond with the machine software version, using Multiple Version Handler:
a.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
15. Wait at least 20 seconds after the machine shuts down, and then switch on the machine
power. The machine should now cycle up normally, with the normal display on the UI.
May 2003
4-143
REP 03-7
b.
Select [Auditron and Access Administration] (if present), OR select [Access and
Accounting] and then [Internal Auditron Setup].
c.
d.
Select [Initialize Auditron], and select [Confirm] (maybe twice) to accept the confirmation.
e.
ATLANTA '96:
2
Reconnect this connector to the Main
Control PWB.
1
Install the NVM RAM
Chip, with the bottom
pins in the bottom
holes of the socket.
REP 03-7
May 2003
4-144
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: In all cases, this procedure has you restore the machine operation at the same level of
software as was already in the machine before the Main Control PWB replacement. You will
upload software onto the new PWB if necessary, to match the level of software already in the
machine; you will not upgrade or downgrade the machine software to match the software
level on the new PWB.
CAUTION
This procedure is provided here only as a backup to the Kit Installation Instructions provided in
the Atlanta '96 to Atlanta Gold Main Control PWB Upgrade Kit -- if possible, use those Kit
Installation Instructions instead. That kit includes parts which are required, in addition to the
Main Control PWB, when replacing an Atlanta '96 Main Control PWB with an Atlanta Gold.
Certain components in this procedure are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
CAUTION
Do not return as new, or reuse in any other machine, any NVM RAM Chip which has been
installed in any machine. Once the NVM RAM Chip is installed and the machine power
switched on, the chip is no longer new -- it is automatically initialized by the machine software and cannot be used again as a "virgin" chip.
NOTE: Use this procedure only if replacing an Atlanta '96 with an Atlanta Gold, upgrading to
TAG 015.
CAUTION
You must identify the current software level in the machine and on the new Main Control PWB,
and if the software levels are different then obtain the appropriate Software Upgrade Kit. If the
machine and new PWB software levels are different, software must be uploaded onto the new
PWB after the PWB replacement, to restore the machine operation.
NOTE: When replacing an Atlanta '96 with an Atlanta Gold Main Control PWB, you must also
replace the NVM RAM Chip with an Atlanta Gold style of NVM RAM Chip, included in this kit
(or see PL 1.4A).
1.
If replacing the Main Control PWB with the same type, i.e. (without TAG 015) if replacing
an Atlanta '96 with another Atlanta '96 or (with TAG 015) if replacing an Atlanta Gold with
another Atlanta Gold, go to REP 03-4.
Determine the current software level in the machine and on the new Main Control PWB,
and obtain the appropriate Software Upgrade Kit if necessary.
CAUTION
Kit Contents:
Be sure to consult any bulletins which may have announced later software releases than
those listed in this version of EDOC.
a.
Ferrites, Medium
Ferrite, Large
Identify the current software level on the machine by the highest software Tag number which is marked off on the IOT Change Tag Matrix (see Product Specifications :
Software Version Compatibility ).
Tiewraps
b.
Ground Clip
Identify the software level on the new Main Control PWB, by the labels on the Flash
chips near the lower right corner of the PWB (Figure 1).
Backplane Shield
c.
If the new PWB's software level does not match that already in the machine,
obtain the Software Upgrade Kit for the level of software already in the machine.
Installation Instructions
2.
If possible, save the NVM to Floppy (GP4), naming the file so as to identify the software
level (e.g. 1_0.nsf for Version 1.0.
NOTE: If an NVM download is not possible, inform the customer that any recent Tools
settings (entered since the last NVM download) will need to be reentered after the service
call.
3.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
4.
5.
b.
c.
d.
Connector Panel (lower center rear cover: remove four T20 screws)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-145
Swing out the Card Cage (one or two 1/4-turn T20 fasteners).
REP 03-8
b.
b.
Disconnect the following connectors (at the Card Cage unless otherwise specified,
and freeing harnesses from cable clips as necessary):
Scanner video cable (remove cover first -- two T20 screws)
7.
a.
b.
c.
d.
NOTE: You will not reuse the existing Auto Segmentation PWB (IPS1 Daughter PWB) or
NVM RAM Chip. The Atlanta Gold Main Control PWB requires a different NVM RAM Chip
and no Auto Segmentation PWB.
Unsnap and remove the fan/duct unit from the top of the Card Cage.
d.
6.
Side connector plate (on the left side of the Card Cage as viewed from the rear,
Main Control PWB side: Loosen two T20 screws on top and two on the bottom)
Front and rear Card Cage covers: Loosen two T20 screws on top for each cover.
8.
Disconnect the connectors from the Main Control PWB (Figure 2).
9.
Atlanta Gold:
REP 03-8
May 2003
4-146
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Remove metal cover
(two T20 screws) and
disconnect the connector from J14.
1
Disconnect Image Disk
ribbon cable from J3.
4
(FX Only):
Disconnect
EPSV
3
Disconnect connectors from J6,
J7, and J13.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-147
REP 03-8
3
Remove the PWB from
the standoffs and slide it
out of the Card Cage.
1
Remove the T20
screws (5).
2
Without TAG 015:
Remove the T20
screws (2).
Replacement
NOTE: The new PWB may have a small metal EME shield on the ROS video connector,
and this shield may fall off easily. Ensure that this shield is in place when the new PWB is
installed.
CAUTION
This procedure assumes that the new Main Control PWB does not have an NVM RAM Chip
installed. If an NVM RAM Chip is presently installed on the new PWB, remove the chip (REP
03-7).
NOTE: When replacing an Atlanta '96 with an Atlanta Gold Main Control PWB, you may
need to extend the harness inside the Card Cage (cutting a tiewrap as necessary) to
reach the connectors along the bottom edge of the PWB.
CAUTION
Be sure to set the jumper on the new PWB for the correct processing speed according to the
following step, to ensure that machine will function properly.
a.
Slide the PWB into the cardcage and position the right-edge connectors into the side
of the cardcage.
1.
Look for the jumper on the new Main Control PWB (Figure 4). If the jumper is missing,
use the extra jumper, provided in this kit, in the following step.
b.
Position the PWB onto the standoffs and reinstall the T20 screws (only 5 screws for
Atlanta Gold).
2.
Set the jumper on the new PWB for the correct processing speed (Figure 4).
c.
3.
REP 03-8
4.
Reinstall all Card Cage covers except the rear (Main Control PWB side) Card Cage
cover.
5.
May 2003
4-148
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CAUTION
NOTE: You will not have access to this EDOC procedure while the EDOC CD-ROM is
removed and the machine software CD-ROM is inserted into the PWS CD-ROM drive.
Record the entire next numbered step: Either write it down; or select the text in the
Browser, copy it (CTRL-C), open a blank Notepad text document, and paste the text
(CTRL-V) into the Notepad document. (In Notepad, select the Edit menu and select
Word Wrap to ensure that the text is easily readable.)
b.
9.
6.
7.
Swing out the Card Cage and install the three ferrites, included in this kit, in the locations
shown (Figure 5).
8.
Prepare to install the Ground Clip and the Backplane Shield, by removing the following:
9.
a.
b.
c.
Install the Ground Clip and the Backplane Shield, both provided in this kit (Figure 6).
Remove the EDOC CD-ROM from the PWS CD-ROM drive and insert the machine
software CD-ROM.
b.
On the PWS, in the Software Upgrade window, select [Main Controller], select
[Source...], and navigate to the directory g:\inst\**_**\scs\ (where **_** indicates
the desired software level).
c.
Select the file asy****.sre (where **** indicates the desired software level), and
select [OK].
d.
In the Software Upload window, select [Upload], and note the time at which you are
starting the upload.
e.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Be sure to reinstall the left rear Scanner mounting screw after installing the Ground Clip. This
screw is required to provide ground for the Ground Clip, and to secure the Scanner in place.
Be sure to wait at least the length of time specified below, to ensure that the software
upload has time to complete.
10. Reinstall the Scanner Main Cover and the User Interface Assembly.
After approximately ten minutes the PWS should indicate IOT Upgrade Complete , then you must wait at least 20 seconds longer.
11. If you are certain that the new Main Control PWB has the same level software as was
already in the machine as determined earlier, skip the Manual IOT Software Upload and
go to Final Steps After the Main Control PWB Replacement, below.
h.
Remove the machine software CD-ROM and insert the EDOC CD-ROM back into
the PWS CD-ROM drive.
CAUTION
1.
2.
Ensure that the PWS Diagnostics is set to the same software level as was already in the
machine. (If necessary, exit Session Manager and use the Multiple Version Handler to
switch versions.)
Connect the parallel cable (but not the serial cable -- disconnect the serial cable, if connected).
4.
5.
Select the [Configuration] tab, select [Software Upgrade], and select [Manual] (not Wizard), for the upgrade type.
6.
In the Software Upgrade window, deselect [Automated Mode] (ensure that [Automated
Mode] is not selected).
7.
Obtain the machine software CD-ROM from the Software Upgrade Kit.
8.
Record the following step, up through and including inserting the EDOC CD-ROM
back into the PWS CD-ROM drive , to enable reading from hardcopy or Notepad during
the software upload process.
On the PWS, [Exit] Diagnostic Navigator and close the current session.
V0.042
g.
10. Disconnect the parallel cable and connect the serial cable.
CAUTION
3.
f.
Avoid excessive force when installing the NVM RAM Chip. Otherwise, damage to the chip or
the Main Control PWB may result.
1.
Install the new NVM RAM Chip onto the new Main Control PWB. Perform only the
Physical Installation steps of REP 03-7 Replacement at this time, then return here.
2.
3.
Pull out the Xerographic Module and Fuser. Ignore the machine UI messages about
reseating the modules.
CAUTION
Be sure to pull out the Xerographic Module and Fuser before switching on the machine power,
after replacing the Main Control PWB and installing the NVM RAM Chip. Otherwise the
machine may falsely declare the end-of-life for either CRU, requiring that it be replaced.
4.
May 2003
4-149
REP 03-8
NOTE: If the Auto Configuration detects that Remote Data Transfer has become disabled,
do not accept the configuration change. Instead, switch off the machine power and check
that the Accessory PWB is seated securely on the Main Control PWB.
TAG 015
TAG 018
13. Reinstall the remaining components in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Accept an EPSV configuration error in all market regions except FX.
CAUTION
Ensure that the front door is open and the interlock switch is not cheated.
5.
6.
7.
a.
b.
The PWS will display a message indicating that installation is not complete. Select [OK]
to dismiss this message.
CAUTION
If a Manual IOT Software Upload was performed, verify the IOT checksums:
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
Verify the checksums displayed against those listed in Product Specifications : IOT
Software Checksums , or in the Software Upgrade instructions if later than the software levels shown. If the checksums do not agree with those for the desired IOT
software level, go to 03-J Checksum Error RAP.
Perform the Required Steps After NVM RAM Chip Replacement (REP 03-7).
CAUTION
Because a new NVM Chip has been installed, you must perform the Required Steps After
NVM RAM Chip Replacement in order to restore the machine operation.
10. Switch off the machine power, wait at least 20 seconds, and switch on the machine power.
11. The UI may display a configuration mismatch. If so, do the following to allow the machine
accept the configuration change:
a.
b.
Switch off the machine power again, wait at least 20 seconds, then switch on the
machine power.
c.
Be sure to switch the machine back into Install Complete mode. The machine must not
be left in Manufacturing mode, but there will be no message on the UI to remind you to
switch it back.
d.
Switch off the machine power again, wait at least 20 seconds, then switch on the
machine power.
12. Mark off the following Tags on the IOT Change Tag Matrix:
REP 03-8
May 2003
4-150
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-151
REP 03-8
1
Install one
medium ferrite on the
ROS Video
Cable, here.
5
Roll the Scanner Video
Cable and carefully install
the large ferrite here.
Ensure that the cable is
not pinched (the ferrite can
move slightly).
4
Install one tiewrap
on the PWS Cable
here, no more than
60mm (2.25 in.)
from the connector
at the card cage.
2
Install one tiewrap on the
ROS Video Cable here, 100
+/- 10mm (4 +/- 0.4 in.)
away from the connector at
the card cage.
3
Install one medium
ferrite on the PWS
Cable, here.
Figure 5 Ferrites
REP 03-8
May 2003
4-152
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
5
Reinstall the
Scanner Rear
Cover (three T20
screws).
4
Install the Backplane Shield onto
the inside of the
Scanner Rear
Cover.
3
Reinstall the screw.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-153
REP 03-8
460/470
NOTE: If the customer wishes to upgrade their RAM, they must order the upgrade kit through
Sales and that kit includes CSE instructions for performing the upgrade. However, instructions
are included here to enable increasing RAM as a troubleshooting tool.
CAUTION
Certain components in this procedure are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
1.
If upgrading RAM: Place the machine into Manufacturing mode so that it will accept the
configuration change:
a.
b.
c.
Under Install Phase, pull down the menu and select [Manufacturing] (two places for
L0.17 or higher software).
d.
Remove the
small access
cover (two T20
screws).
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
2.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
3.
b.
Left Rear Cover (on the right as viewed from the rear)
4.
(240/255/265): Remove the rear (Main Control PWB side) Cardcage Cover
5.
(460/470): Remove the small access panel from the Card Cage (Figure 1).
CAUTION
When pivoting the clips outward to remove the DIMM, be careful not to let the DIMM fall out
and become damaged.
6.
Remove the EPC SDRAM DIMM(s) (Figure 2 for 240/255/265, Figure 3 for 460/470).
NOTE: Either one or two EPC SDRAM DIMMs can be installed. Figure 2 and Figure 3
each shows a DIMM in the EPC SDRAM 1 slot. The same method is used for the DIMM
in EPC SDRAM 2.
REP 03-9
May 2003
4-154
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
240/255/265
460/470
Locate
the EPC
SDRAM
DIMM(s).
Locate
the EPC
SDRAM
DIMM(s).
2
Pivot the clips
(2) outward and
remove the
DIMM. (See
CAUTION.)
2
Pivot the clips
(2) outward and
remove the
DIMM. (See
CAUTION.)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-155
REP 03-9
Replacement
240/255/265
CAUTION
Ensure that the DIMM is fully inserted, with both clips snapped into position. Applying power to
the machine with a DIMM partly-installed can destroy the DIMM or cause other machine damage.
1.
Install the EPC SDRAM DIMM(s) (Figure 4 for 240/255/265, or Figure 5 for 460/470).
NOTE: A single DIMM will function the same in either slot, but EPC SDRAM 1 is recommended.
2.
3.
If upgrading RAM: Place the machine back into Install Complete mode.
a.
b.
c.
Under Install Phase, pull down the menu and select [Install Complete] (two places for
L0.17 or higher software).
d.
e.
Switch off the machine power, wait 20 seconds, then switch on the machine power.
1
Ensure the clips
are pivoted outward (2 places).
2
Align the DIMM
notches (2) with
the slot tabs, and
insert the DIMM
straight into the
slot.
3
Press the DIMM
straight into the
slot until both clips
are fully engaged.
REP 03-9
May 2003
4-156
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
460/470
NOTE: If removing and/or reinstalling the same module (not replacing it with a new one), go
directly to Removal or Replacement, as required.
CAUTION
Do not return as new, or reuse in any other machine, any Software/NVM Module that has
been installed in any machine. Once the Software/NVM Module is installed and the machine
power switched on, the module is no longer new -- the NVM is automatically initialized by the
machine software and cannot be used again as a "virgin" Software/NVM Module.
2
Align the DIMM
notches (2) with
the slot tabs, and
insert the DIMM
straight into the
slot.
NOTE: The NVM values must be restored from the MRD afterward. However, all counters and
Auditron information will be lost because, for legal reasons, they cannot be copied as part of
the NVM download or saved to the MRD. Also, the machine serial number and time and date
will be lost from machine memory and will need to be reentered afterward using the PWS.
NOTE: Confirmation Code Required: If performed on a non-FSMA service plan ("Sold"
CRUs) machine, this procedure requires that a protected NVM setting (Service Plan) be
restored after replacing the NVM RAM Chip. You will be required to obtain the necessary confirmation code for the Service Plan setting during this procedure on a "Sold" machine. This
confirmation code must be obtained from Field Engineering.
CAUTION
3
Press the DIMM
straight into the
slot until both clips
are fully engaged.
You must identify the current software level in the machine and on the new Software/NVM
Module, and if the software levels are different then obtain the appropriate Software
Upgrade Kit. If the machine and new module software levels are different, IOT software must
be uploaded onto the new module after the PWB replacement, to restore the machine operation.
CAUTION
Be sure to consult any bulletins which may have announced later software releases than those
listed in this version of EDOC.
NOTE: This procedure has you restore the machine operation at the same level of software as
was already in the machine before the Software/NVM Module replacement. You will upload
software onto the new module if necessary, to match the level of software already in the
machine; you will not upgrade or downgrade the machine software to match the software
level on the new module.
1.
2.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-157
Determine the current software level in the machine and on the new Software/NVM Module, and obtain the appropriate Software Upgrade Kit if necessary.
a.
Identify the current software level on the machine by the highest software Tag number which is marked off on the IOT Change Tag Matrix (see Product Specifications :
Software Version Compatibility).
b.
Identify the software level on the new Software/NVM Module, by the label on the
Flash chips on the module (Figure 2).
c.
If the new module's software level does not match that already in the machine,
obtain the Software Upgrade Kit for the level of software already in the machine.
3.
If possible, record any Auditron account information. If this is not possible, inform the customer that they will need to reenter this information after the service call.
4.
If possible, save the NVM to Floppy (GP4), naming the file so as to identify the software
level (e.g. 1_0.bnf for Version 1.0).
460/470
NOTE: If replacing the NVM RAM Chip with a new one and an NVM download is not possible, inform the customer that any recent Tools settings (entered since the last NVM
download) will need to be reentered after the service call.
Removal
CAUTION
Certain components in this procedure are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
Remove the
small access
cover (two T20
screws).
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
b.
Left Rear Cover (on the right as viewed from the rear)
3.
(240/255/265): Remove the rear (Main Control PWB side) Cardcage Cover
4.
(460/470): Remove the small access panel from the Card Cage (Figure 1).
CAUTION
When pivoting the clips outward to remove the module, be careful not to let the module fall out
and become damaged.
5.
Remove the Software/NVM Module (Figure 3 for 240/255/265, or Figure 4 for 460/470).
REP 03-10
May 2003
4-158
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
240/255/265
1
Pivot the clips (2)
outward. (See
CAUTION.)
L0.17.8.64
software version
label
2
Pivot the
module to the
right and
remove the
module.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-159
REP 03-10
Replacement
460/470
1.
Install the Software/NVM Module (Figure 5 for 240/255/265, or Figure 6 for 460/470).
2.
If you are reinstalling the same Software/NVM Module removed earlier, this procedure is
now complete.
Otherwise, continue.
240/255/265
1
Orient the corner
notch at the top,
and align the
center notch with
the slot tab.
2
Pivot the
module to the
right and
remove the
module.
2
Insert the module,
angled to the right,
all the way into the
slot.
Figure 4 Removal -- 460/470
3
Pivot the module to
the left until both
clips are fully
engaged.
Figure 5 Installation -- 240/255/265
REP 03-10
May 2003
4-160
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: The machine power must be switched on, switched off after approximately one minute,
and then switched on a second time, in order for the new NVM RAM Chip to fully initialize.
460/470
1
Orient the corner
notch at the top,
and align the
center notch with
the slot tab.
2.
3.
Wait approximately one minute, then switch off the machine power.
4.
Ignore the UI message during this phase of the upgrade. The Main Control PWB will not communicate with the UI now, and the UI displays only the Document Centre screen with a series
of dots at the top, followed by a false message to switch off the machine power -- ignore this
message.
CAUTION
Select [OK] to dismiss the PWS messages indicating that installation has not been completed.
When the machine was switched on with a new (virgin) Software/NVM Module installed, it
defaulted to Manufacturing phase in order to temporarily accept the configuration mismatches
associated with the other default NVM.
2
Insert the module,
angled to the right,
all the way into the
slot.
CAUTION
Do not proceed to enter information or restore NVM until the machine is ready, as indicated
below
5.
3
Pivot the module to
the left until both
clips are fully
engaged.
Observe the PWS attempting to establish communication with the machine as the
machine initializes the new NVM RAM Chip on the Software/NVM Module and then the
machine resets automatically. When the machine resets automatically, the PWS will lose
and then reestablish communication with the machine. Wait until this automatic reset has
occurred and the PWS-machine communication is stable (1-3 minutes after you switched
on the machine power) before proceeding to the next step.
CAUTION
Keep the Front Door open, to prevent the machine from attempting an automatic xerographic
Setup until, the NVM has been restored later.
6.
Reinsert the Xerographic Module and the Fuser, but keep the Front Door open.
7.
Place the machine back into Install Complete mode and set the Product Type:
a.
b.
c.
Under both Install Phase (System) and Install Phase (Main Controller), pull down the
menu and select [Install Complete] (two places).
CAUTION
For a 55 ppm machine, you must toggle the Product Type setting off of 55 ppm, [Apply],
and back to 55 ppm, in order for the setting to take full effect.
d.
For a 55 ppm machine: Switch the Product Type to 65 ppm, select [Apply], and
switch it back to 55 ppm.
NOTE: The remaining steps apply only if you are replacing the Software/NVM Module with
a new (virgin) module.
CAUTION
You must pull out the Xerographic Module and Fuser before switching on the machine power,
after replacing the Software/NVM Module. Otherwise, the machine may falsely declare the
end-of-life for either CRU, requiring that it be replaced.
1.
8.
e.
f.
Switch off the machine power, wait 20 seconds, then switch on the machine power.
Restore the Market Region, System Configuration, Product Identifier (if present), and
serial numbers to the machine memory, and reset the machine time and date:
a.
b.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-161
REP 03-10
9.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Select [Apply]
c.
d.
Enter the "System" (IOT) Serial Number and any options' serial numbers.
e.
Select [Apply].
f.
g.
h.
Select [Apply].
i.
6.
Non-FSMA ("Sold" CRUs) machine only: Restore the Service Plan setting to the machine
memory:
a.
b.
c.
Under Service Plan, select [Sold (A)] from the pull-down menu.
d.
In the Confirmation Code box that appears, enter the confirmation code obtained
from Field Engineering.
e.
Select [Apply].
f.
10. If you are certain that the new Software/NVM Module has the same level software as was
already in the machine as determined earlier, skip the IOT Software Upload and go to
Final Steps After Software/NVM Module Replacement, below.
3.
Restore the machine NVM from the machine resident diskette file (GP4).
Reset the Machine Administrator password back to the default (1111):
a.
b.
c.
d.
Select [Exit].
4.
When closing the call, be sure to report that the Billing Counters were reset (GP17).
5.
REP 03-10
May 2003
4-162
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
REP 03-11 Main Control PWB (Atlanta Platinum-toPlatinum) (With Tag 077 Only)
c.
6.
If replacing the Main Control PWB with a new one, remove the following from the Main
Control PWB:
a.
b.
(240/255/265 with TAG 080): Electronic Hole Removal PWB (IPS1 Daughter PWB,
REP 03-2)
c.
(460/470 with TAG TBD): Electronic Hole Removal PWB (REP 03-12)
d.
e.
7.
(460/470): Remove the side connector plates from the card cage, and disconnect the distribution ribbon cable (Figure 3).
8.
Remove the Main Control PWB (Figure 4 for 240/255/265, or Figure 5 for 460/470).
CAUTION
a.
Certain components in this procedure are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
(240/255/265): Remove the small plate from the Card Cage (two T20 screws) and
disconnect the ribbon cable from the PWB.
b.
1.
c.
Remove the T20 screws securing the PWB (7 screws for 240/255265; 9 screws for
460/470).
d.
(240/255/265): Lift the PWB off of the standoffs and remove the PWB from the Card
Cage.
e.
(460/470): Remove the Main Control PWB. For ST, this requires lifting the PWB out
of its bottom edge connector on the Riser PWB.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
2.
3.
b.
c.
d.
(240/255/265): Connector Panel (lower center rear cover: remove four T20 screws)
b.
Disconnect the following connectors (at the Card Cage unless otherwise specified,
and freeing harnesses from cable clips as necessary):
Scanner video cable (remove cover first -- two T20 screws)
Fan connector P/J 98 (in-line)
ROS video cable
PWS cable (slide the clip down)
Ribbon cable (copper-shielded) -- disconnect at Distribution PWB J5
Power harness -- disconnect at LVPS P42/J2 and P43/J3
Ground strap -- disconnect faston at IOT frame
4.
5.
c.
Unsnap and remove the fan/duct unit from the top of the Card Cage.
d.
Front and rear covers: Loosen two T20 screws on top for each cover.
b.
Side connector plate (on the left side of the Card Cage as viewed from the rear, Main
Control PWB side: Loosen two T20 screws on top and two on the bottom)
b.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-163
REP 03-11
460/470
2
Disconnect the video cable from the card cage, and free
the video cable from its restraints on the fan housing.
1
Remove the video connector
cover (two T20 hex-head screws).
4
Disconnect the fan
connector.
6
5
REP 03-11
May 2003
4-164
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
460/470
460/470
1
Remove the ROS/
PWS connector
plate (two thumb
screws).
2
Remove the connector cover (two
T20 hex-head
screws), and disconnect the distribution cable from the
Main Control PWB.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-165
REP 03-11
240/255/265
T20
screws
(7)
ribbon cable
connectors (3)
REP 03-11
May 2003
4-166
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
460/470
T20
screws
(9)
NOTE: If this
machine has the
Removable Disk
Drive option ONLY:
This connector
should NOT be connected. The ribbon
cable should be
formed around the
PWB connector
when installing the
PWB, ensuring that
the cable connector
will not interfere with
the Main Card Cage
Cover installation.
Riser PWB
connectors (3)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-167
REP 03-11
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
240/255/265 ST/LP
Slide the PWB into the cardcage and position the right-edge connectors into the side
of the cardcage.
b.
Position the PWB onto the standoffs and reinstall the T20 screws (7) loosely.
c.
LP/ST: Press on the Main Control PWB in the location shown, to seat the connectors
to the ESS PWB (Figure 6).
d.
Position the PWB into the cardcage and position the right-edge connectors into the
side of the cardcage. For ST: Insert the PWBs bottom edge connector into the Riser
PWB. Align the 9 screw holes.
b.
c.
b.
c.
(240/255/265 with TAG 080) Electronic Hole Removal PWB (IPS1 Daughter PWB,
REP 03-2).
d.
(460/470 with TAG TBD): Electronic Hole Removal PWB (REP 03-12)
e.
4.
5.
REP 03-11
May 2003
4-168
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
a.
b.
c.
b.
c.
Hold the EHR PWB while releasing the clips, to prevent the PWB from falling and becoming
damaged.
4.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-169
REP 03-12
2
Disconnect the video cable from the card cage, and free
the video cable from its restraints on the fan housing.
1
Remove the video connector
cover (two T20 hex-head screws).
4
Disconnect the fan
connector.
6
5
REP 03-12
May 2003
4-170
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-171
REP 03-12
2
Pivot the EHR
PWB outward
from the Main
Control PWB,
and remove the
EHR WPB.
1
Press the two
clips outward.
Figure 3 Removal
Replacement
1.
REP 03-12
May 2003
4-172
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
2.
3.
1
Align the EHR PWB
notches with the slot
tabs, and insert the
EHR PWB all the way
into the slot at the
angle shown.
4.
b.
c.
b.
c.
Disconnect the following connectors (at the Card Cage unless otherwise specified,
and freeing harnesses from cable clips as necessary):
ROS video cable
PWS cable (slide the clip down)
Distribution ribbon cable (copper-shielded) -- disconnect at Distribution PWB J5
Power harness -- disconnect at LVPS P42/J2 and P43/J3
2
Pivot the EHR PWB to
the right, toward the
Main Control PWB,
until both clips are
fully engaged.
Figure 4 Installation
b.
5.
6.
7.
a.
b.
c.
Remove the bottom access panel from the Card Cage (Figure 3).
8.
Disconnect the DC harness connector from the bottom of the Riser PWB (Figure 4).
9.
Remove the T20 screws (6) securing the Riser PWB (Figure 5).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-173
2
Disconnect the video cable from the card cage, and free
the video cable from its restraints on the fan housing.
1
Remove the video connector
cover (two T20 hex-head screws).
4
Disconnect the fan
connector.
6
5
REP 03-13
May 2003
4-174
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-175
REP 03-13
REP 03-13
May 2003
4-176
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
screw
(hidden)
screws (2)
screws (3)
Replacement:
Install this corner
screw first.
Figure 5 Screws
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-177
REP 03-13
Figure 6 Removal
Replacement
When installing the Riser PWB, install the corner screw indicated, first, installing the
other screws to secure the PWB (Figure 5).
After installing the Riser PWB and all other components, set the System ID to Lakes for
the new Riser PWB (GP39 ).
REP 03-13
May 2003
4-178
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
Do not rotate the developer drives while the Developer Housing is installed in the machine. If
the Mag Roll is rotated at less than the normal operating speed (1250 rpm), the developer
material can jam between the Mag Roll and the Donor Roll.
4.
5.
Remove the Developer Drive Motor (Figure 2 - shown with the SCAM PWB omitted for
clarity).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-179
REP 04-1
J4 on the
SCAM PWB
Figure 1 Connector
REP 04-1
May 2003
4-180
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove
the T20
screws
(4).
2
Remove
the
motor.
2
Rotate the flywheel left and right.
Figure 2 Removal
Replacement
CAUTION
Ensure that the Xerographic Module is in place before installing the Developer Drive Motor.
Removing the motor or other parts which bolt to the rear frame reduces the rigidity of the
frame. This can allow the Photoreceptor Drive Module to sag, deforming the rear frame, if the
Xerographic Module is not in place and supporting the front of the Photoreceptor Drive Module.
Installing the Developer Drive Motor will then 'lock in' the frame deformation.
1.
Figure 3 Installation
(Figure 3): Insert the motor with the gears angled down under the Duplex Transport
gear. Rotate the motor flywheel left and right as you insert the motor -- you should
feel the motor gears engage the Registration Transport gear as the motor plate seats
against the rear IOT frame.
b.
Install one of the top two T20 screws loosely to hold the motor in place temporarily.
c.
From the front of the machine, use a flashlight to check visually that the motor gear
has engaged the Duplex Transport gear correctly (Figure 4). If not, remove the
motor and go back to step a.
d.
Install the remaining T20 screws (3) and tighten all four screws
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-181
REP 04-1
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
NOTE: (Without TAG 040): The machine may not have a Decurler Drive Belt. If not, then
ignore the following step.
5.
Ensure that the Xerographic Module is in place while the Fuser Drive Motor is removed.
Removing the motor or other parts which bolt to the rear frame reduces the rigidity of the
frame. This can allow the Photoreceptor Drive Module to sag, deforming the rear frame, if the
Xerographic Module is not in place and supporting the front of the Photoreceptor Drive Module.
6.
May 2003
4-182
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
J2 on the
SCAM PWB
Figure 1 Connector
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-183
REP 04-2
1
Loosen the T20
screw 1/4 turn
only.
4
Remove the belt.
2
1
Remove the
motor.
Retighten the
screw.
Replacement
CAUTION
Ensure that the Fuser Module is installed and the Fuser drawer is pushed in when installing the
Fuser Drive Motor. This ensures that the Fuser drive gears are aligned correctly when the
motor is secured in place.
1.
Install the motor and install the T20 screws (4) loosely.
CAUTION
Make sure that the motor bracket is rotated and held clockwise when tightening the screws.
This has been shown to reduce trail edge deletions on long sheets.
2.
Rotate and hold the motor bracket clockwise (as viewed from the rear), then tighten the
screws.
3.
NOTE: (Without TAG 040): The machine may not have a Decurler Drive Belt. If not, then
ignore the following step.
REP 04-2
4.
5.
May 2003
4-184
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
6.
1
Ensure the T20
screw is loosened 1/4 turn
only.
2
Rotate the motor
3-4 turns CCW
(arrow direction).
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
Do not rotate the developer drives while the Developer Housing is installed in the machine. If
the Mag Roll is rotated at less than the normal operating speed (1250 rpm), the developer
material can jam between the Mag Roll and the Donor Roll.
4.
Remove the SCAM PWB mounting bracket by removing the T20 screws (3).
5.
Ensure that the Xerographic Module is in place while the Developer Gear Bracket is removed.
Removing the bracket or other parts which bolt to the rear frame reduces the rigidity of the
frame. This can allow the Photoreceptor Drive Module to sag, deforming the rear frame, if the
Xerographic Module is not in place and supporting the front of the Photoreceptor Drive Module.
6.
3
Retighten the
screw.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-185
2
Tighten the
T20 screws
(4; bottom 2
screws are
hidden).
1
Remove the
T20 screws
(4; bottom 2
screws are
hidden).
Replacement
1.
Install the gear bracket and install the T20 screws (4) loosely.
2.
Use the Developer Drive Alignment Arm as follows to set up the gear spacing, then be sure to
disengage the arm when finished. This will minimize gear noise.
3.
Disengage the Developer Drive Alignment Arm, leaving it in the operating position (Figure
3).
4.
5.
Reinstall the SCAM PWB mounting bracket, securing it with the T20 screws (3).
6.
REP 04-3
May 2003
4-186
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
Ensure that the Xerographic Module is in place while the Decurler/OCT Drive Bracket is
removed. Removing the bracket or other parts which bolt to the rear frame reduces the rigidity
of the frame. This can allow the Photoreceptor Drive Module to sag, deforming the rear frame,
if the Xerographic Module is not in place and supporting the front of the Photoreceptor Drive
Module.
4.
1
Loosen the T20
screw 1/4 turn
only.
2
Move the idler pulley
up and hold it.
4
Remove the belt.
3
Retighten the
screw.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-187
1
Ensure the T20
screw is loosened 1/4 turn
only.
1
Remove the T20
screws (2).
Retighten the
screw.
2
Rotate the motor
3-4 turns CCW
(arrow direction).
Replacement
1.
Install the gear bracket and secure it with the T20 screws (2).
2.
3.
REP 04-4
May 2003
4-188
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Rotate the motor
3-4 turns CCW
(arrow direction).
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
3
Retighten the
screw.
Figure 2 Installation
Retighten the
screw.
Figure 1 Removal
Replacement
1.
2.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-189
REP 04-5
Replacement
CAUTION
Perform the following steps to prepare for tensioning the Developer Drive Belt. This will avoid
damage to the Developer Housing and ensure that the belt is tensioned properly for minimum
noise and wear.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Be sure to use the orange plastic cap, provided in the Hardware Kit and in the Developer Housing Kit, to cap the developer collector outlet after disconnecting the Developer Collector Tube.
This will minimize developer leakage and contamination of the machine.
CAUTION
Do not rotate the developer drives while the Developer Housing is installed in the machine. If
the Mag Roll is rotated at less than the normal operating speed (1250 rpm), the developer
material can jam between the Mag Roll and the Donor Roll.
2.
3.
4.
3.
5.
Tension the belt (Figure 3 - shown with the SCAM PWB omitted for clarity).
6.
Detension and remove the Developer Drive Belt (Figure 1 - shown with the SCAM PWB
omitted for clarity).
CAUTION
2
Move the
idler pulley
to the left
and hold it.
Be sure to reconnect the developer collection tube. Otherwise, developer material will spill
inside the machine during operation.
7.
8.
3
Retighten the
screw.
4
Remove the
belt.
1
Loosen the T20 screw
1/4 turn only.
Figure 1 Removal
REP 04-6
May 2003
4-190
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Disconnect P50.
Ensure the
T20 screw
is loosened
1/4 turn
only.
2
Rotate the
motor 3-4
turns CW
(arrow direction).
3
Retighten
the screw.
2
Disconnect the developer collector tube and
cap the outlet on the
housing.
3
Remove the gold
T20 screw.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-191
REP 04-6
1
Connect P50.
2
Connect the
developer collector tube.
3
Install the gold
T20 screw.
REP 04-6
May 2003
4-192
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
15. Treat only the CVT Glass with Glass Cleaner 600T91872, in order to decrease the friction
of the glass.
Cleaning Materials
Vacuum Cleaner
Clean
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
CAUTION
Do not pour or spray fluid directly into the DADF. Do not use any abrasive cleaners to clean the
DADF. These actions will damage the machine.
CAUTION
Do not use yellow cloths or any oil or wax impregnated materials for the roll cleaning portion of
this procedure, as this will contaminate the feed rollers and cause feeding problems and
increased probability of image quality problems.
CAUTION
Do not force the towel into confined areas. Do not force parts open. These actions will damage the machine.
2.
3.
4.
Using a vacuum cleaner, or towel dampened with water, clean the following:
All surfaces and rolls except the Drive-On-Glass Roll of the document transport,
including areas 6a and 6b.
5.
Reinstall the DADF Feed Roll Cartridge and close the DADF Top Cover.
6.
Wiping the DOG Roll with cleaners or water may remove essential ingredients in the roll that
prevent noise from this roll.
7.
Using only a dry towel, clean the Drive-on-Glass Roll (DOG Roll).
8.
Moisten one end of a clean towel with Platen Glass, Lens and Mirror Cleaner.
9.
With a clean area of towel moistened with cleaning fluid, clean the glass area under the
DOG Roll, including the black ramp.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-193
REP 05-1
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Swing out the card cage (one 1/4-turn T20 or slotted fastener).
4.
Disconnect DADF Harness connector P12 from the Distribution PWB (Figure 1).
5.
Disconnect the ground faston connector, and extract the harness from the IOT.
6.
7.
Raise the Document Handler, leaving the Document Glass Cover down.
8.
Keeping the Document Glass Cover Horizontal, lift it straight up and remove it from the
machine.
WARNING
The DADF is heavy and awkward to lift. Ensure that you have a firm, balanced grip on
the DADF before lifting it.
NOTE: You may wish to back out the DADF Skew Adjustment Screw to make it easier to
remove and install the DADF. Note the number of screw turns, to facilitate restoring the skew
adjustment later, if reinstalling the same DADF.
9.
Standing behind the machine, lift the DADF straight up and remove it at the rear, including
the counterbalance mechanism (Figure 2).
REP 05-2
May 2003
4-194
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P/J12 on the
Distribution
PWB
Figure 1 Connector
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-195
REP 05-2
Standing behind
the machine, lift
the DADF straight
up and remove it.
Figure 2 Removal
Replacement
NOTE: You may wish to back out the DADF Skew Adjustment Screw (if you have not already
done so) to make it easier to install the DADF.
1.
2.
If replacing the DADF Assembly with a new one, perform the following:
NOTE: If you are reinstalling the same DADF and you backed out the DADF Skew Adjustment
Screw before removing the DADF, turn the adjustment screw in again the same number of
turns before performing the DADF Skew adjustment.
a.
b.
c.
Reset the Life Counter for the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge (GP6).
d.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
REP 05-2
May 2003
4-196
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
5.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-197
REP 05-3
P/J4 on the
DADF PWB
Figure 1 Connector
REP 05-3
May 2003
4-198
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
3
Remove the DADF Top
Cover Assembly at the rear,
pulling the harness forward
through the rear hinge pin
hole.
2
Lift the DADF
Top Cover
Assembly at
the front.
1
Loosen the T20
screw and slide
the front hinge
pin toward the
rear.
Figure 2 Removal
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-199
REP 05-3
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
5.
WARNING
Perform the following steps with the DADF raised. Otherwise, the DADF can spring
up unexpectedly when its weight is reduced by the removal of parts, possibly causing machine damage or personal injury.
a.
b.
Loosen the bearing retainer screw and disconnect the ground wires (2) (Figure 2).
c.
Remove the T20 screws (3) securing the front and rear of the feeder assembly and
the bearing retainer, and remove the bearing retainer (Figure 3).
d.
Lift the DADF Feeder Assembly out carefully, noting the position of the spring underneath (Figure 4).
REP 05-4
May 2003
4-200
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P/J5 on the
DADF PWB
Figure 1 Connector
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-201
REP 05-4
ground wire
screw (T20)
ground wire
REP 05-4
May 2003
4-202
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Remove the bearing retainer T20
screw, remove the bearing retainer,
and remove the rear T20 screw (hidden).
2
Remove the front
T20 screw.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-203
REP 05-4
spring
Figure 4 Spring
Replacement
1.
Position the DADF Feeder Assembly carefully, ensuring the correct positioning of the
spring underneath and the correct orientation of the clutch (Figure 4).
2.
Finish installing the DADF Feeder Assembly and the remaining components, in the
reverse order of Removal.
3.
If replacing the DADF Feeder Assembly with a new one, perform the following:
a.
Reset the Life Counter for the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge (GP6).
b.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
REP 05-4
May 2003
4-204
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-205
REP 05-4
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
WARNING
Perform the following steps with the DADF raised. Otherwise, the DADF can spring up
unexpectedly when its weight is reduced by the removal of parts, possibly causing
machine damage or personal injury.
4.
5.
b.
c.
6.
Loosen the bearing retainer screw and disconnect the ground wire (Figure 2).
7.
8.
REP 05-5
May 2003
4-206
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P/J3 on the
DADF PWB
Figure 1 Connector
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-207
REP 05-5
screw (T20)
ground wire
3
Remove T20
screws (4).
2
1
Slide the drive
belt off of the
pulley.
Remove the
bearing retainer
(one T20 screw).
Figure 3 Removal
REP 05-5
May 2003
4-208
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Lift the assembly
off partway.
Disconnect the
ground wire faston.
Press down on the right front corner of the DADF so that it contacts the Scanner
Main Cover, and hold it down while performing the next step:
c.
left front
Note how
this baffle is
positioned in
the slot of the
DADF.
b.
right front
right rear
d.
slot
Remove the spacer from under the left front corner of the DADF.
6.
Slide the drive belt onto the pulley of the registration deskew transport, ensuring that the
belt is positioned correctly on the other pulleys as well.
7.
Reinstall the bearing retainer, the ground wire, and the screw (T20).
4
Remove the
assembly.
Replacement
1.
Connect the ground wire faston at the right rear corner of the assembly.
2.
Position the assembly with its left baffle in the slot of the DADF, as noted during Removal.
3.
4.
5.
Ensure that the Registration Deskew Assembly is mounted correctly (Figure 5):
a.
Place an approximate 3mm spacer (fold a sheet of paper to 3 +/- 0.5mm thick) under
the left front foot of the DADF frame.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-209
REP 05-5
3
Tighten the T20
screws (4) IN
SEQUENCE:
3A
Tighten this
screw FIRST.
3B
Tighten
this screw
SECOND
3D
Tighten this
screw LAST.
3C
Tighten this
screw THIRD.
1
Place a 3mm
spacer under
this foot.
4
Remove the
spacer.
2
Press down on this corner
while performing step 3.
Figure 5 Installation
REP 05-5
May 2003
4-210
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-211
REP 05-6
Disconnect P6
from the DADF
PWB, noting the
correct harness
routing.
Disconnect the
ground wire faston.
Figure 1 Connectors
REP 05-6
May 2003
4-212
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
WARNING
Perform the following steps with the DADF raised. Otherwise, the DADF can spring up
unexpectedly when its weight is reduced by the removal of parts, possibly causing
machine damage or personal injury.
4.
1
Remove the T20
screws (2).
5.
Figure 2 Removal
b.
c.
Detension and remove the Exit Clutch drive belt (Figure 1).
6.
Loosen the bearing retainer screw and disconnect the ground wire (Figure 2).
7.
8.
Replacement
Remember the following:
Route the harness correctly, as noted during Removal, so that it is not pinched when the
DADF Main Cover is installed.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-213
screw (T20)
ground wire
1
Loosen the T20
screw (hidden),
move the idler
down and hold it,
then retighten
the screw.
REP 05-7
May 2003
4-214
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Slide the shaft to
the rear, and
remove it from
the front support.
1
Disconnect the
clutch connectors (2).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Figure 4 Removal
May 2003
4-215
REP 05-7
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reinstall and retension the Exit Clutch drive belt (Figure 7).
5.
2
Orient the two
clutches with
their antirotation
tabs downward.
3
Lower the rear end of the shaft into position with each of the two clutches' tabs
straddling the tab in the DADF so the
clutches will not rotate on the shaft.
Figure 5 Installation
REP 05-7
May 2003
4-216
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Rotate the retaining
brackets (2) into
position and tighten
the T20 screws (2).
2
Connect the clutch
connectors (2):
front clutch:
black and white
wires
rear clutch:
brown and red
wires
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Reposition the
belt on the exit
shaft pulley.
May 2003
4-217
REP 05-7
2
Remove the T20
screws (2).
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
WARNING
Perform the following steps with the DADF raised. Otherwise, the DADF can spring up
unexpectedly when its weight is reduced by the removal of parts, possibly causing
machine damage or personal injury.
4.
5.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1
Disconnect P7
from the DADF
PWB. (See
NOTE.)
Figure 1 Removal
REP 05-8
May 2003
4-218
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: The front ski (shorter) also has a 'foot' that must be positioned toward the
front and pointing to the right.
b.
Remove the center ski (if present), while observing the correct orientation (Figure 3).
c.
Remove the rear CVT Ski, while observing the correct orientation (Figure 4).
NOTE: The rear ski (longer) also has a 'foot' that must be positioned toward the rear
and pointing to the right.
5.
If you are installing the Three-Ski Drive On Glass Kit in a machine that does not already have
two or three skis, follow the instructions provided in the kit to install all parts provided in the kit.
If you are installing the Three-Ski Drive On Glass Kit in a machine that does already have two
or three skis, the link and the belt provided in the kit are not required, and you may use this procedure.
Table 1
Installing Singleski kit
Machine currently
has single ski-->
Use this REP. Link Use kit instrucand belt are not
tions and install all
required.
kit parts to convert
from one ski to
three skis.
Machine currently
has two or three
skis-->
Removal
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
(With single ski): Remove the single CVT Ski, while observing the correct orientation (Figure 1)
NOTE: The ski has a 'foot' on each end that must be pointing to the right.
4.
Remove the front CVT Ski, while observing the correct orientation (Figure 2).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-219
REP 05-9
REP 05-9
May 2003
4-220
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Remove the front ski
and observe the
correct orientation.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-221
REP 05-9
REP 05-9
May 2003
4-222
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Remove the rear ski
and observe the
correct orientation.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-223
REP 05-9
3
Unsnap the shaft at
the front and the
rear, and slide it out
of the belt.
1
Slide the belt off of
the pulley.
2
Unhook the spring
(if present), taking
care not to lose the
end.
Replacement
If installing a new Drive On Glass Kit, first install the O-rings (if present) onto the shaft (Figure
6).
REP 05-9
May 2003
4-224
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: These O-rings reduce reflections from the polished shaft that can cause false sensor
readings. They are not used in the single-ski design (TAG 075).
1
Install the two O-rings
onto the shaft, in the
location shown.
Figure 6 O-RIngs
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-225
REP 05-9
2.
3.
4.
Remove the Feed Roll Cartridge Release Lever by unsnapping it in 2 places from the
frame of the DADF Feeder Assembly (Figure 1).
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2
Release the snap by pushing it
toward the left.
1
Release the snap by prying it
toward the right.
3
Lift the lever off the frame of
the DADF Feeder Assembly.
Figure 1 Removal
REP 05-10
May 2003
4-226
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
3.
Replacement
1.
Install the new Feed Roll Cartridge Release Lever, ensuring the yoke on the lever is over
the drive coupling (Figure 2).
2.
Reinstall the DADF Main Cover and close the DADF Top Cover.
Check the operation of the DADF Feeder Assembly by feeding at least one sheet of paper
through the DADF.
NOTE: A pen or other sharp instrument is required to disengage the DADF Paper Feed
Roll Cartridge when the new Feed Roll Cartridge Release Lever is installed. The CSE
has the option of instructing those customers who wish to replace the DADF Paper Feed
Roll Cartridge, how the new Feed Roll Cartridge Release Lever operates.
Yoke - on underside of
release lever
4
Snap the new lever onto the
DADF Feeder Assembly frame.
1
Move the new
release lever into
position on the DADF
Feeder Assembly
frame.
2
Ensure the yoke on the bottom of the release lever is
placed over the drive coupling
3
Press down here to
retract the solenoid.
Drive Coupling
Figure 2 Installation
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-227
REP 05-10
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
2
Remove the
belt from the
exit shaft pulley.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
WARNING
Perform the following steps with the DADF raised. Otherwise, the DADF can spring up
unexpectedly when its weight is reduced by the removal of parts, possibly causing
machine damage or personal injury.
4.
5.
De-tension and remove the belt, and remove the e-ring (Figure 1).
6.
Remove the C-ring (using external retaining ring pliers 600T41402 or equivalent), and
remove the pulley part of the DADF Exit Clutch (Figure 2).
7.
Remove the electrical part of the clutch, observing the correct alignment to the anti-rotation tab for later installation (Figure 3).
REP 05-11
Remove the
e-ring.
1
Loosen the T20 screw (hidden),
move the idler down and hold it,
then retighten the screw.
May 2003
4-228
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Remove the
pulley part of
the clutch.
1
Remove the
C-ring.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-229
REP 05-11
2
1
Remove the
electrical part
of the clutch.
Disconnect the
connector from
the clutch.
3
Observe the correct
alignment with the
anti-rotation tab.
Replacement
Be sure to align the clutch correctly with the anti-rotation tab, as observed during Removal
(Figure 3).
REP 05-11
May 2003
4-230
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Any optional input device from the left side of the machine (Bypass Tray or HCF/
Bypass Tray)
Left Side Cover.
1
Disconnect P1
and P3 from the
ROS.
c.
Xerographic Module
d.
e.
f.
Disconnect the
ground faston
from the rear IOT
frame.
3.
Disconnect the electrical connectors at the rear of the ROS (Figure 1).
4.
Remove the T20 screw securing the bottom rear ROS mounting brackets together,
accessing from the front through the paper tray opening (Figure 2).
b.
Lift the front of the ROS and pull the ROS out the front of the machine.
Figure 1 Connectors
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-231
REP 06-1
6.
i.
Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool], select the [Machine] pull-down menu and select
[Download].
ii.
After the NVM has downloaded, select Service = [Mark Service] and Module=[F1IOT 1,1] or [F2IOT 1,1].
iii.
After the screen refreshes, scroll down to location 723 and enter the imageFastScanReg value from the ROS label.
iv.
Scroll down to location 729 and enter the hallPeriodRef value from the ROS
label. If the value is rejected due to a range checking error, scroll down to location 1397 and enter the hallPeriodRef value there instead.
v.
Scroll down to location 793 and enter the exposureCalibration value from the
ROS label.
vi.
b.
Enter [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select the [Xerographic Routines] tab
and run the Set-Up.
c.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
Figure 2 Screw
Replacement
1.
2.
If replacing the ROS with a new one, record the three values off of the label on the new
ROS before installing it (Figure 3):
a.
Record the imageFastScanReg number. Under the third barcode, it is the number
after the "L" (three digits).
b.
Record the hallPeriodRef number. Also under the second barcode, it is the number after the "H" (four, five, or six digits).
c.
hallPeriodRef
exposure Calibration
imageFastScanReg
Insert the rear locating pins of the ROS into the rear mounting bracket in the
machine (sandwich the two brackets together) (Figure 4).
b.
Lower the front locating pin into the front support hook.
c.
Install the T20 screw securing the bottom rear ROS mounting brackets together,
accessing from the front through the paper tray opening.
3.
Connect the electrical connectors at the rear of the ROS (Figure 5).
4.
CAUTION
Ensure that the ROS is not contacting any structural part of the machine (Developer Housing,
etc) which may transmit vibration to the ROS and cause image quality problems.
5.
Enter into NVM the exposureCalibration , hallPeriodRef , and imageFastScanReg values printed on the ROS barcode label as follows:
REP 06-1
May 2003
4-232
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
mounting bracket
in the machine
2
Connect P1 and
P3 to the ROS.
ROS locating
pins
Connect the
ground faston at
the rear IOT
frame.
Figure 4 Installation
Figure 5 Connectors
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-233
REP 06-1
NOTE: Only a machine with an aluminum ROS (TAG 057) has a replaceable ROS Polygon
Motor. Otherwise, you must replace the entire ROS for any Polygon Motor failure.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
CAUTION
Lock the machine casters before removing the HCF (if present).
3.
a.
Any optional input device from the left side of the machine (Bypass Tray or HCF/
Bypass Tray)
b.
c.
Xerographic Module
d.
e.
Disconnect the
motor ground
wire faston from
the cover.
4
Remove the cover.
f.
g.
Use extreme caution to avoid contamination or damage to the Polygon Motor and the inside of
the ROS. Minimize the length of time that ROS is open, prevent any dirt from contaminating
the Polygon Motor or the inside of the ROS, and do not touch the facets of the Polygon Mirror.
4.
REP 06-2
May 2003
4-234
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-235
REP 06-2
4
Connect the
motor ground
wire faston to the
cover.
1
Position the cover.
REP 06-2
May 2003
4-236
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the appropriate paper tray assemblies: either trays 1 and 2 or trays 3 and 4.
CAUTION
Lock the machine casters before removing the HCF (if present).
3.
Remove any optional input device from the left side of the machine (Bypass Tray or HCF/
Bypass Tray).
4.
5.
Disconnect the appropriate sensors and free the sensor wires from the cable clamps (Figure 1).
6.
Remove the appropriate slide rail/paper guide assemblies: either the trays 1 and 2 rails or
the trays 3 and 4 rails (one T20 screw each at the front frame, and pull out of the drives
plate at the rear). For trays 1 and 2 see Figure 2. For trays 3 and 4 see Figure 3.
7.
Remove the desired Paper Feed Drives Plate: either the trays 1 and 2 drives plate or the
trays 3 and 4 drives plate. For trays 1 and 2 see Figure 4. For trays 3 and 4 see Figure
5.
2
Repeat for the
tray 2 left rail.
1
Disconnect
these three
sensors if
removing
the trays 1
and 2 drives
plate.
OR
Disconnect
these two
sensors if
removing the
trays 3 and 4
drives plate.
2
Free the disconnected
sensors'
wires from
the cable
clamps.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-237
REP 07-1
1
Remove the T20
screw and pull
out the tray 3 left
rail.
1
Disconnect
connector.
Remove T20
screws (4).
REP 07-1
May 2003
4-238
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CAUTION
Be sure to dress the sensor harnesses correctly, out of the paper path, when reconnecting the
sensors on the slide rail/paper guide assemblies.
3.
Disconnect
connector.
For 65 ppm or
55 ppm
machines
ONLY, remove
this jumper.
(Leave it on for
40 ppm
machines.)
2
Remove T20
screws (4).
Replacement
CAUTION
Be sure to configure a new drives plate for 65 ppm or 55 ppm by removing the jumper from the
feed motor IIOC PWB on the drives plate, if required. However, do not remove the jumper for
a 40 ppm machine. If the drives plate is configured incorrectly, 08-105 jams will result.
NOTE: A new Paper Feed Drives Plate comes preconfigured for a 40 ppm machine, with a
jumper in place on the feed motor IIOC PWB. This jumper must be removed for a 65 ppm or 55
ppm machine, but must remain in place for a 40 ppm machine.
1.
2.
If replacing the Paper Feed Drives Plate with a new one in a 65 ppm or 55 ppm
machine only, configure the new drives plate for 65 ppm or 55 ppm by removing the
jumper from the feed motor IIOC PWB on the new drives plate (Figure 6).
Figure 6 Jumper
Align the drives plate's two locating pins with the holes in the machine frame, install the
four screws, and connect the connector. For trays 1 and 2 see Figure 7. For trays 3 and
4 see Figure 8.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-239
REP 07-1
connector
connector
REAR VIEW
REAR VIEW
locating pins
locating pins
REP 07-1
May 2003
4-240
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1.
2.
While gently pulling outward on the tray, insert the tip of a screwdriver into the opening in
the left rail and lift the latch until the tray slides farther out. Repeat on the right rail to
release the right latch, and remove the Paper Tray Assembly.
3.
If replacing the Paper Tray Assembly with a new one, do the following:
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
If the HCF/Bypass Tray is equipped with a Paper Heater, disconnect the heater power
cord from the IOT (Figure 1).
3.
If the HCF/Bypass Tray is equipped with a Paper Heater and you are replacing the HCF/
Bypass Tray Assembly with a new one, remove the Paper Heater and Heater Cover from
the HCF, for installation into the new HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly (Figure 2).
CAUTION
4.
Ensure that a Feed Roll Cartridge is installed in the Paper Tray before sliding the tray in. Damage can occur if the Paper Tray elevator raises without a Feed Roll Cartridge installed in the
tray.
Release the hand-operated 1/4-turn fastener at the rear of the HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly.
5.
Grasp the HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly by the rear hand-hold and by the top front, above
the number 5 -- do not grasp the Bypass Input Tray or the top cover.
a.
Remove the Feed Roll Cartridge from the old tray, to be reinstalled later onto the new
tray.
b.
Remove the tray number from the old tray, to be reinstalled later onto the new tray.
Replacement
CAUTION
If replacing the Paper Tray Assembly with a new one, perform the following:
Install the Feed Roll Cartridge, removed earlier from the old tray, onto the new tray.
Do not grasp the HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly by the top cover or by the Bypass Input Tray -these methods will cause damage. Grasp only in the areas specified below.
2.
Install the tray number, removed earlier from the old tray, onto the new tray.
6.
3.
Check/adjust IOT Top Edge Registration (IB-OB), Side 1, (ADJ 8-1B) for that tray only.
Carefully lift the assembly while gently pulling outward, until only the top two hooks disengage from the IOT frame.
7.
Rest the assembly against your body while disconnecting the electrical connector from
the IOT.
8.
Grasp the assembly in the same manner as above and lift carefully until the bottom two
hooks disengage from the IOT.
1.
NOTE: To run the machine with the HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly removed, you must
cheat the Input Devices Safety Interlock switch on the left side of the machine.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-241
REP 07-3
May 2003
4-242
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Remove the T20 screw and
pull out the Heater Power
Cord.
2
Remove the T20
screws (2), and
remove the
Paper Heater
and the Heater
Cover.
Replacement
1.
2.
If replacing the HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly with a new one, perform the following:
a.
Check/adjust IOT Top Edge Registration (IB-OB), Side 1, (ADJ 8-1B) for Trays 5 & 6.
b.
Reset the Life Counter for the Paper Feed Roll Cartridges in Trays 5 & 6 (GP6).
c.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-243
REP 07-3
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
2.
3.
Release the hand-operated 1/4-turn fastener at the rear of the Bypass Tray Assembly.
3.
If replacing the Elevator Motor with a new one, perform the following:
4.
Unhook the rear of the Bypass Tray Assembly from the IOT.
5.
Support the rear of the Bypass Tray Assembly while disconnecting the electrical connector from the IOT.
6.
Unhook the front of the Bypass Tray Assembly from the IOT.
Unroute the purple/grey load/run switch wires back from the front of the HCF, to
enable extracting them from the rear.
a.
NOTE: To run the machine with the Bypass Tray Assembly removed, you must cheat the
Input Devices Safety Interlock switch on the left side of the machine.
Replacement
1.
2.
If replacing the Bypass Tray Assembly with a new one, perform the following:
3.
a.
Check/adjust IOT Top Edge Registration (IB-OB), Side 1, (ADJ 8-1B) for Tray 5.
b.
Reset the Life Counter for the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge in Tray 5 (GP6).
b.
c.
Removing the harness anchor from the HCF frame in the next step must only be done if
replacing the Elevator Motor with a new one. The harness anchor cannot be reused after
it has been removed.
NOTE: The purple and grey wires, extracted through the frame hole in the next step, are
only used for an uncovered HCF (if no Tray 6 door is present). Otherwise the purple and
grey wires are coiled and stored inside the frame hole.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
d.
4.
For an uncovered HCF only (if no Tray 6 door present), do the following:
May 2003
4-244
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Remove the
switch plate.
2
Disconnect the
connectors from
J5 and J7 on the
PWB.
3
Disconnect the 2 ground wires (T20 screw).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-245
REP 07-5
1
Free the Elevator Motor
harness from
the holders.
3
Extract the purple and grey
wires.
2
Remove the
harness
anchor from
the HCF
frame, cutting
as necessary.
REP 07-5
May 2003
4-246
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Disconnect the
tray ground wire
faston.
3
While supporting the HCF tray,
slide the motor
off of the shaft.
2
Remove the K-clip and the thrust
washer, and save them for reuse.
Figure 3 Removal
Replacement
Ensure that the Elevator Motor harness is routed correctly (Figure 4).
For an uncovered HCF only (if no Tray 6 door is present): You must route the purple/
grey wire harness back through to the front, as noted earlier, to enable reconnecting the
load/run switch when reinstalling the HCF front cover.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-247
REP 07-5
REP 07-5
May 2003
4-248
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Open the HCF Door (or press the Elevator Button, if present) to lower Tray 6, if possible.
2.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
3.
4.
If you were unable to lower Tray 6 earlier, remove the Elevator Motor from the shaft (REP
07-5), and lower Tray 6.
5.
Disconnect the connector from J3 on the HCF PWB and free the harness from the holder
(Figure 1).
6.
7.
Lift out the Bypass Input Tray, removing the front locating pin from its locating hole.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-249
REP 07-6
J3
Figure 1 Connector
REP 07-6
May 2003
4-250
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Remove the rear
T20 screw.
2
Remove the bottom T20 screw
(hidden).
Figure 2 Prepare for Removal
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-251
1
Release the 1/4turn hand latch,
and slide it out.
5
Pull the cover off
here.
2
Release the slotted 1/4-turn fasteners (2).
Figure 1 Removal
REP 07-7
May 2003
4-252
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2.
2
3
Disengage the
top cover from
the hinge pin.
1
Remove the T20
screws (2).
4
Pull the cover off
here, and carefully remove it
partway.
6
Release the harness from the
hooks (2).
5
Disconnect the harness from the load/
run switch.
Figure 1 Removal
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-253
REP 07-8
WARNING
Install the
jumper for a
HCF with a
Tray 6 Door.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
b.
Replacement
1.
If the HCF has a door on Tray 6, install the jumper, provided with the new PWB, onto the
new PWB (Figure 1).
If the HCF does not have a door on Tray 6, ensure that no jumper is installed on the
new PWB (Figure 1).
2.
Ensure that no
jumper is
installed for a
HCF without a
Tray 6 Door.
Figure 1 Jumper
REP 07-9
May 2003
4-254
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Remove the top
T20 screws (2).
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove any optional input device from the left side of the machine (Bypass Tray or HCF/
Bypass Tray).
CAUTION
Lock the machine casters before removing the HCF (if present).
3.
4.
b.
Press the Vertical Transport downward to unclip the top corners from the Registration Transport.
c.
Tilt the top of the Vertical Transport outward from the left side of the IOT, lift the bottom out, and remove the Vertical Transport.
2
Remove the bottom T20 screw.
Figure 1 Removal
Replacement
1.
Insert the bottom of the Vertical Transport, then tilt the top into the left side of the IOT.
b.
Position the Vertical Transport carefully to align with the Registration Transport, then
lift the Vertical Transport firmly, to clip the top corners into the Registration Transport.
NOTE: Ensure that the Vertical Transport and Registration Transport gears are
engaged before installing the screws.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-255
REP 08-1
c.
Install the T20 screws (3) securing the top corners of the Vertical Transport to the
Registration Transport.
d.
Install the T20 screw securing the bottom of the Vertical Transport to the frame.
2.
3.
If replacing the Vertical Transport with a new one, perform the following:
a.
Check/adjust top edge registration (IB-OB), side 1, for Trays 1 thru 4 (ADJ 8-1B).
b.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
3.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
Remove the following:
a.
Xerographic Module
b.
c.
d.
e.
2
Remove the
Registration
Transport.
1
Disconnect P82.
Figure 1 Removal
Replacement
1.
Engage the locating pin at the right rear with the hole in the mounting plate at the
rear machine frame (Figure 2).
b.
Hook the Registration Transport into the left IOT frame in two places.
2.
3.
May 2003
4-256
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Xerographic Module
Remove the Top Rear Cover from the IOT and loosen and then retighten the T20 screw
securing the rear Registration Transport mounting plate. The mounting plate is shown in
Figure 2, and the screw is shown in Figure 3.
M1 Motor
NOTE: Loosening and retightening this screw will ensure free play of the Registration
Transport to seat fully to the rear when the Xerographic Module is installed. Otherwise, it
can interfere with the Xerographic Module installation and damage the Xerographic Module.
5.
If replacing the Registration Transport with a new one, perform the following:
a.
b.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
Figure 2 Installation
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-257
REP 08-2
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
With TAG H002 only: Free the mylar shield at the bottom (Figure 2).
4.
REP 08-3
May 2003
4-258
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
J4
Figure 1 Connector
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-259
REP 08-3
mylar shield
(with Tag #H002
only)
REP 08-3
May 2003
4-260
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
3
Remove the T20 screws
(3), and remove the
motor and the belt.
1
Remove and
save the spring.
2
Free the harness from
the cable clips attached
to the motor bracket and
move the harness to the
right as shown.
Figure 3 Removal
Replacement
6.
7.
Test-feed from both Tray 5 and Tray 6. If gear noise occurs, check the Bypass feed gear
mesh (Figure 6).
8.
If the mylar shield is present on the new feed motor and was not on the old motor, mark
off TAG H002 on the HCF Tag Matrix.
May 2003
4-261
NOTE: A new version of the feed motor (TAG H002) has a mylar shield attached, which may
not have been present on the old feed motor. If this shield is present, you will be instructed
later to connect the bottom of the shield correctly, and to mark off TAG H002 on the HCF Tag
Matrix as required.
1.
2.
3.
Continue installing the HCF/Bypass Tray Feed Motor, setting the Bypass feed gear mesh
(Figure 6).
4.
Finish installing the HCF/Bypass Tray Feed Motor, setting the belt tension (Figure 7).
5.
With TAG H002, or if the mylar shield is present on the new feed motor:
mylar shield at the bottom (Figure 9).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Connect the
REP 08-3
2
Move this bracket
to the left as
shown (stretching
the spring), and
tighten this screw.
Loosen the
T20 screws
(3).
1
Insert the motor
bracket behind
the harness as
shown.
3
Position the motor
bracket against the
HCF frame, aligning
the screw holes (3).
Figure 5 Installation
REP 08-3
May 2003
4-262
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Install the T20
screws (3)
loosely.
3
Ensure that the
bypass feed
gears mesh
properly.
2
Install the spring.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-263
REP 08-3
1
Loosen this screw. (All 3
screws should now be loose.)
2
Rotate the motor
3-5 turns to allow
the belt to align.
3
Tighten the screws (3;
one is hidden).
REP 08-3
May 2003
4-264
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
J4
Figure 8 Connector
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-265
REP 08-3
mylar shield,
present on new
Tag H002 feed
motor
1
Remove the harnesses from this
clip (as required),
rotate the clip to
align with the slot
in the mylar shield,
and position the
shield slot all the
way onto the clip.
2
Rotate the clip
back to the orientation shown,
securing the bottom of the shield,
and reinsert the
harnesses.
REP 08-3
May 2003
4-266
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Squeeze the
tabs together.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
If replacing the Bypass Tray Feeder with a new one, remove the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge from the Bypass Tray, to be reused in the new feeder.
3.
b.
c.
4.
Disconnect the connector from J2 on the HCF PWB (Figure 2), and free the harness from
the cable clips.
5.
3
2
Remove and
save the bushing.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-267
REP 08-4
J2
Figure 2 Connector
REP 08-4
May 2003
4-268
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Remove the Bypass Tray
Feeder, disengaging the
locating/pivot pin at the
front.
1
Remove the T20
screw at the
rear. Save the
bushing.
Figure 3 Removal
Replacement
CAUTION
Do not overtighten the screw when installing the Bypass Tray Feeder. This will cause the pivot
bushing to bind when the Bypass Tray Feeder is raised and lowered with the opening and closing of the HCF Top Cover.
Remember to:
If replacing the Bypass Tray Feeder with a new one, reinstall the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge in the Bypass Tray.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-269
REP 08-4
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
If replacing the HCF Feeder with a new one, remove the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge from
the HCF, to be reused in the new feeder.
3.
b.
c.
4.
Disconnect the connector from J6 on the HCF PWB (Figure 1), and free the harness from
the cable clips.
5.
REP 08-5
May 2003
4-270
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
J6 (hidden)
Figure 1 Connector
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-271
REP 08-5
1
Remove the T20 screws (2).
2
Lift out the HCF Feeder,
removing the pulley from
inside the belt.
Figure 2 Removal
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
If replacing the HCF Feeder with a new one, reinstall the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge in the
HCF.
REP 08-5
May 2003
4-272
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Position the HCF Feeder and
install the T20 screws (2).
1
Insert the HCF Feeder
pulley inside the belt.
Figure 3 Installation
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-273
REP 08-5
3.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
4.
5.
6.
b.
c.
d.
Release the locking tabs for the paper handling baffle (Figure 1).
Lift the baffle free of its mounts (Figure 2).
Tilt the baffle up and remove it (Figure 3).
2
Repeat for the
other locking tab.
1
Press in gently to
release the locking tab, and lift
the baffle slightly.
REP 08-6
May 2003
4-274
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Figure 2 Removal
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-275
REP 08-6
1
Tilt the baffle up
approximately
90.
2
Lift the baffle out.
REP 08-6
May 2003
4-276
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
CAUTION
Be careful, and take your time, when installing the new baffle. The plastic tabs on the baffle
can break if over-stressed.
1.
Install the new paper handling baffle, provided in this kit, in the reverse of removal.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
2.
3.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-277
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
Remove the following:
a.
Xerographic Module
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Remove the two T20 screws securing the sensor bracket to the Registration Transport (Figure 1).
b.
Lift the sensor bracket, disconnect the sensor connector, and remove the sensor
from the bracket (Figure 2)
sensor bracket
T20 bracket
screws (2)
sensor
connector
Figure 2 Removal
Replacement
REP 08-7
1.
Install the Registration Sensor onto the bracket and connect the connector (Figure 2).
2.
Position the bracket onto the Registration Transport and install the two screws loosely
(Figure 1).
3.
Push the bracket all the way to the left, and hold it while tightening the two T20 screws.
4.
May 2003
4-278
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Xerographic Module
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Xerographic Module
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Remove the Registration Gear/Clutch assembly from the Registration Transport (Figure
1).
4.
Remove the Registration Clutch Gear from the Registration Clutch (Figure 2).
Disconnect the
clutch connector.
Figure 3 Installation
4
Remove the gear/
clutch assembly.
3
Remove the E-Ring.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-279
c.
Measure to the face of the clutch body that faces the gear: This distance should be
between 8.0 mm and 8.5 mm (between 0.33" and 0.35", or between 21/64" and 22/
64").
NOTE: As an additional check, the tip of a T8 Torx driver inserted in the gap
between the gear tab and the face of the clutch body should fit but not be able to
rotate.
clutch notch
gear tab
d.
If the setup for that gear tab is incorrect, move the gear tab in or out of the clutch
notch as appropriate and go back to step a. for that gear tab.
e.
Repeat steps a. through d. for the other two gear tabs, and again as required until all
three tabs are set up correctly.
3.
Check for and correct any noticeable wobble in the Registration Clutch Gear: Holding the
clutch body, roll the gear on a flat surface and observe whether the gear displays any
wobble in its rotation. If so, go back to step 2. and adjust the clutch/gear spacing to be
more even among the three gear tabs.
4.
gear tab
Measure to
face of clutch
body:
8.0 to 8.5 mm
Replacement
CAUTION
Do not press the new gear all the way into the Registration Clutch. Follow the next three steps
to set up the gear/clutch spacing correctly and avoid binding.
1.
2.
Start installing the new Registration Clutch Gear provided in this kit onto the Registration
Clutch (Figure 2):
a.
Place the gear on a flat surface with the tabs pointing up.
b.
Align the three clutch notches with the gear tabs, and press the clutch down a short
way onto the gear.
Set up the spacing of the Registration Clutch Gear on the Registration Clutch (Figure 3):
a.
Place the scale flat against the side of the clutch body, adjacent to one of the gear
tabs.
b.
Slide the scale against the gear so that the end of the scale is square against the
recessed face of the gear.
REP 08-8
May 2003
4-280
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
CAUTION
2.
Keep the Xerographic Module covered with a black bag while it is out of the machine, to prevent light shock and image quality defects.
3.
2.
3.
Be sure to use the orange plastic cap, provided in the Hardware Kit and in the Developer Housing Kit, to cap the developer collector outlet after disconnecting the Developer Collector Tube.
This will minimize developer leakage and contamination of the machine.
Replacement
CAUTION
4.
1.
2.
3.
If you are replacing the Xerographic Module with a new one, the machine will automatically run a Xerographic Set-Up. Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to
Floppy (GP4).
b.
Lift the rear of the housing over the stop on the lower support rail, and remove the
Developer Housing.
NOTE: If not replacing the Developer Housing with a new one, this completes the Developer Housing removal.
2.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-281
b.
Unpack the new housing, seal the old housing inside the plastic bag provided with the
new housing, and package the old housing in the packaging that the new housing came
in.
NOTE: If reinstalling the same Developer Housing removed earlier, skip down to
Replacement.
1
Disconnect P50.
CAUTION
Do not pour developer material on the Mag Roll or Donor Roll, near the developer collector
port, or within 25mm of the auger bearings (Figure 3).
5.
Carefully brush the material off of the center rib and any other surfaces where it may prevent the top cover from seating securely to the Developer Housing (Figure 4).
6.
Reinstall the top cover and secure it with the T10 screws (6) (Figure 2).
7.
Inspect the seating of the top cover to the Developer Housing for gaps or leaks, and adjust
as necessary.
CAUTION
Do not rotate the Developer Housing gears by hand. If the Mag Roll is rotated at less than the
normal operating speed (1250 rpm), the developer material can jam between the Mag Roll and
the Donor Roll.
8.
Return the empty developer material bottle in the package with the old Developer Housing.
9.
Reinstall the following items, removed earlier from the old housing, onto the new housing:
a.
b.
Replacement
1.
Lift the rear of the housing over the stop and align its center ribs with the center
groove on the lower support rail (Figure 5).
b.
Supporting the front of the housing, slide it all the way in.
NOTE: If the housing will not slide all the way in at first, you may need to rotate the
gears slightly at the rear of the Developer Housing, or lift the rear of the housing
slightly, in order for the housing gears to mesh with the drive gears in the IOT.
CAUTION
Be sure to reconnect the developer collection tube. Otherwise, developer material will spill
inside the machine during operation.
Figure 1 Removal
2.
3.
4.
If replacing the Developer Housing with a new one, perform the following:
a.
Set up the gear spacing (Figure 7 - shown with the SCAM PWB omitted for clarity).
CAUTION
1.
2.
Remove the T10 screws (6) securing the top cover to the new Developer Housing (Figure
2).
3.
Lift the cover off carefully, taking care not to unseat the Mag Roll or the Donor Roll from
the Developer Housing.
4.
Carefully pour the developer material evenly over the two augers only, keeping the
material at least 25mm away from the auger bearings. Do not pour the material on the
Mag Roll or the Donor Roll, or near the developer collector port (Figure 3).
a.
REP 09-2
May 2003
4-282
Use the Developer Drive Alignment Arm as follows to set up the gear spacing, then be
sure to disengage the arm when finished. This will minimize gear noise.
b.
Disengage the Developer Drive Alignment Arm, leaving it in the operating position
(Figure 8 - shown with the SCAM PWB omitted for clarity).
c.
Enter [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select the [New Parts Setup] tab, and
run the [Developer Housing Install] Setup. Then, select the [Xerographic Routines]
tab and run the Xerographic Set-Up.
d.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Carefully pour
the developer
material evenly
over the two
augers only.
Keep the material at least
25mm away from
the auger bearings and away
from the developer collector
port.
recessed
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-283
REP 09-2
center rib
REP 09-2
May 2003
4-284
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
center groove of
lower support rail
center ribs on
bottom of Developer Housing
Figure 5 Installation
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-285
REP 09-2
1
Connect P50.
1
Loosen the
T20 Develope
Gear Bracket
screws (4; bot
tom 2 screws
are hidden).
3
Retighten
the screws
(4).
2
Connect the developer collector tube.
REP 09-2
May 2003
4-286
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
Remove the following:
a.
Xerographic Module.
b.
Be careful in removing and installing the BTAC Sensor. Although it simply snaps into place, it
can break if not removed and installed correctly.
3.
1
Disconnect P5.
Alignment arm in operating
position (disengaged)
2
Remove the sensor (snap-fit).
Figure 1 Connector
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-287
Replacement
CAUTION
Be careful in removing and installing the BTAC Sensor. Although it simply snaps into place, it
can break if not removed and installed correctly.
1.
2.
If replacing the BTAC Sensor with a new one, perform the following:
a.
b.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
Remove the following:
a.
Xerographic Module.
b.
c.
3.
4.
b.
1
Disconnect ground
fastons (1, 2 or 3)
from the BTAC
Sensor bracket.
2
Disconnect P5
from the BTAC
Sensor.
May 2003
4-288
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
a.
b.
T10 screws (2)
2
If replacing the Toner Dispenser
with a new one: Remove the Bottle Empty Sensor, if present.*
1
Remove the
Toner Dispenser.
* Reinstall the Bottle Empty Sensor onto the new Toner Dispenser.
Figure 2 Removal
Replacement
1.
2.
If replacing the Toner Dispenser with a new one, perform the following:
a.
b.
c.
Enter [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select the [New Parts Setup] tab, and
run the [Toner Dispenser Fill] routine.
NOTE: If the machine power was switched on with the font door closed, a low toner
fault will appear. If this occurs, open and close the front door, reenter [Marking tab ,
Xerographic Diagnostics], reselect the [New Parts Setup] tab, and rerun the [Toner
Dispenser Fill] routine.
d.
e.
f.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-289
REP 09-4
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Take care not to stress the front of the Photoreceptor Drive Module when it is in the machine
and the Xerographic Module is removed. Excessive deflection of the Photoreceptor Drive
Module, when not supported by the Xerographic Module or the installation tool, can adversely
affect the Photoreceptor Drive Module's critical alignment. This is true for the 'old' module
which is being removed as well as for the new module which is being installed, because (1) the
rear IOT frame can become bent and (2) the 'old' module must be returned for possible remanufacturing.
3.
Obtain the installation tool from inside the top of the new Photoreceptor Drive Module box
(Figure 1).
4.
5.
6.
a.
Any optional input device from the left side of the machine (Bypass Tray or HCF/
Bypass Tray).
b.
c.
d.
e.
Fuser Module
f.
g.
h.
i.
Disconnect the Photoreceptor Drive Module harness from J3 on the SCAM PWB (Figure
2).
CAUTION
Be sure to capture the spring as instructed, when removing the Photoreceptor Drive Module.
Otherwise, this spring will fall into the paper trays area and may be difficult to retrieve.
7.
REP 09-5
May 2003
4-290
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-291
REP 09-5
Figure 2 Connector
REP 09-5
May 2003
4-292
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
7.
Rotate the Xerographic Module locking handle down before installing the Developer
Housing (Figure 7).
8.
9.
Capture
the spring
during the
following
step.
Remove
long T20
screws
(2).
b.
c.
d.
Any optional input device removed earlier from the left side of the machine (Bypass
Tray or HCF/Bypass Tray).
11. Enter [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select the [Xerographic Routines] tab, and
run the Set-Up.
a.
3
Pull the
module out
of the
machine.
a.
Rotate the handle to the unloaded position, and place the old Photoreceptor Drive
Module into the box correctly (Figure 9).
b.
Place the top foam block into the box correctly (Figure 10).
c.
Place the installation tool into the box correctly, nested into the top foam block (Figure 11).
d.
Insert the additional small foam block, to prevent the module from sliding end-to-end
(Figure 12).
e.
Figure 3 Removal
Replacement
1.
Take the Photoreceptor Drive Module out of the box, with the other installation tool
attached (Figure 4).
2.
3.
4.
Slide the module/tool the rest of the way in and install the long T20 screws (2) securing
the module to the rear frame.
NOTE: Leave the installation tool in the machine until instructed to remove it later.
5.
Connect the Photoreceptor Drive Module harness to J3 on the SCAM PWB (Figure 2).
6.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Fuser Module
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-293
REP 09-5
REP 09-5
2
Slide the module
and tool halfway
into the machine.
Figure 5 Installation
May 2003
4-294
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Route
the harness
through
the rear
frame.
Rotate the
handle down.
1
Slide the
locating pin
through the
ROS
bracket, and
position the
spring captured earlier.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-295
REP 09-5
1
Rotate the handle to the
unloaded position.
Remove the installation tool.
2
Place the module in the box as
shown.
Figure 9 Packing the Module
Figure 8 Remove the Installation Tool
REP 09-5
May 2003
4-296
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-297
REP 09-5
1
Insert the foam
block as shown,
ensuring that it
misses the motor
PWB.
2
Slide the block
down until it is
flush with the top
of the large foam
block.
REP 09-5
May 2003
4-298
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
Swing out the Card Cage (one 1/4-turn T20 or slotted fastener).
4.
4.
a.
5.
b.
6.
c.
7.
d.
Lift the Charge HVPS out at the bottom and remove it.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
a.
Replacement
b.
1.
Install the Charge HVPS and other components in the reverse order of Removal.
c.
Lift the Developer HVPS off of the hooks (4 places), and remove it.
2.
If replacing the Charge HVPS with a new one, perform the following:
a.
b.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
1
Disconnect P50.
2
Disconnect the
developer collector tube.
May 2003
4-299
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
CAUTION
Be sure to reconnect the developer collection tube. Otherwise, developer material will spill
inside the machine during operation.
4.
5.
If replacing the Charge HVPS with a new one, perform the following:
a.
b.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
1
Connect P50.
a.
b.
Remove the T20 screw (1) from the left side (as viewed from the rear) of the Transfer/Detack HVPS.
c.
Pivot the left side (as viewed from the rear) of the Transfer/Detack HVPS outward.
d.
Unhook the right side (as viewed from the rear) of Transfer/Detack HVPS (2 places),
and remove it.
2
Connect the
developer collector tube.
May 2003
4-300
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Water
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
Clean
1.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
2.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
Remove the following:
a.
b.
3.
2.
3.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
Remove the following:
a.
Xerographic Module.
b.
Xerographic Module.
a.
b.
Swing out the Card Cage (one 1/4-turn T20 or slotted fastener).
c.
Remove the T20 screw securing the rear of the support rail (Figure 1).
b.
4.
Remove
the T20
screw (1).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-301
1
Remove the Developer
Housing wire harness from
the restraint at the left rear
corner of the support rail.
2
Remove the T20
screw.
3
Slide the support rail forward
and lift it out.
Figure 2 Removal
Replacement
1.
Align and engage the rear locating tab with the slot in the rear IOT frame and the
front locating pins with the holes in the front IOT frame.
b.
Install the T20 screw securing the front of the support rail (Figure 3).
c.
Install the T20 screw securing the front of the support rail (Figure 3).
2.
Reinstall the T20 screw securing the rear of the support rail (Figure 4).
3.
REP 09-10
May 2003
4-302
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Install the
T20 screw
(1).
Brush 600T41901
Clean
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
Clean the Photoreceptor Drive Module drive rolls as follows, using the vacuum cleaner
and brush, starting with one of the top rolls:
a.
Start at the rear end of the roll and clean toward the front end.
b.
Rotate the roll 90 and repeat, then rotate 90again and repeat (four times total per
roll).
5.
c.
d.
Protect the ROS image path, ensuring that no fibers get in the ROS window, by placing a long (14 in., 17 in, or A3) piece of paper over the ROS window.
b.
To get better access to the developer backer bar, rotate the Xerographic Module
latch handle as if a Xerographic Module was installed.
c.
Clean all five of the backer bars in the Photoreceptor Drive Module using a lint-free
cloth (600S4372) and Film Remover (43P45).
NOTE: Ensure that the backer bars are clean and smooth after the cleaning. There
should be no tackiness felt.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
d.
e.
6.
7.
May 2003
4-303
Rag
Clean
Clean
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
2.
3.
Swing out the Card Cage (one 1/4-turn T20 or slotted fastener).
3.
Remove the Toner Dispenser from the Developer Housing (REP 09-4).
4.
5.
Pour some of the cleaner onto a rag, then use moderate pressure to clean the two high
voltage contact pads labeled J2 and J3 on the solder side of the HVPS by scrubbing for 5
seconds.
CAUTION
After removing the screws in the next step, do not remove the top cover from the Developer
Housing without first heeding the CAUTION and instructions that follow.
4.
Remove the T10 screws (6) securing the top cover to the Developer Housing (Figure 1).
CAUTION
6.
You must hold down the Mag. Roll and lift the Developer Housing top cover at the rear (gears
end), in order to remove the top cover without unseating the Mag. Roll. If the Mag. Roll
becomes unseated, developer material may move under the Mag. Roll or under the bearings,
preventing the Mag. Roll and the top cover from re-seating correctly. This can result in toner/
developer leakage and image quality problems.
7.
5.
Hold down the Mag. Roll gear, carefully lift the Developer Housing top cover by the rear
(gears end), and remove the cover (Figure 2).
6.
Remove the Donor Roll from the Developer Housing (Figure 3).
WARNING
Any Film Remover on the contacts must be completely dry before the machine power is
switched on. Otherwise, a fire may result.
7.
Remove the outboard bearing from the Donor Roll (Figure 3).
8.
Using firm strokes with a Scotch-brite pad, clean the Donor Roll thoroughly.
NOTE: The Donor Roll has a ceramic coating and is difficult to damage.
9.
Wipe the Donor Roll clean with a damp cleaning cloth to remove residual contamination.
10. Wipe the Donor Roll with a dry cleaning cloth to remove all remaining moisture.
11. Using pumice paper, clean the carbon brush wear mark from the Donor Roll Shaft (Figure
4).
12. Reinstall the outboard bearing onto the Donor Roll.
13. Reinstall the Donor Roll, ensuring the following:
Each Donor Roller bearing's anti-rotation tab is engaged in the housing cutout (Figure 5).
14. Reinstall the Developer Housing top cover and the T10 screws (6) (Figure 1).
15. Reinstall the Toner Dispenser onto the Developer Housing (REP 09-4).
16. Reinstall the Developer Housing (REP 09-2).
Repairs and Adjustments
May 2003
4-304
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
17. Enter [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], select the [Xerographic Routines] tab, and
run the Set-Up.
18. Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
Dev.
Housing
top cover
Donor
Roll
T10 screws (6)
Mag. Roll
recessed
Figure 2 Top Cover Removal
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-305
REP 09-13
outboard bearing
1
Hold the Mag Roll gear down, and
lift the Donor Roll gear up and away
from the housing.
2
Lift the Donor Roll out of the
Developer Housing.
REP 09-13
May 2003
4-306
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-307
REP 09-13
REP 09-13
May 2003
4-308
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2.
3.
4.
5.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
Figure 1 Clip
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-309
REP 10-1
1
Disconnect
P94.
3
Pull the
PFT out of
the IOT
2
Unhook the
front PFT
locating pin
(up, right,
then down).
Figure 2 Removal
front locating pin
Replacement
1.
2.
Insert the left rear locating pin into the locating hole and position the PFT gear on top
of the drive gear at the rear wall of the IOT cavity (Figure 3 and Figure 4).
b.
Figure 3 Installation
WARNING
Be sure to reinstall the PFT Clip. The PFT Clip is required for safety, to prevent the PFT
from being removed accidentally.
3.
4.
5.
Check/adjust top edge registration (IB-OB), side 2, Small Paper (ADJ 8-1C).
b.
Check/adjust top edge registration (IB-OB), side 2, Large Paper (ADJ 8-1D).
c.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
REP 10-1
May 2003
4-310
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
drive
gear
locating hole
Connect
P94.
Figure 5 Connector
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-311
REP 10-1
Figure 6 Clip
REP 10-1
May 2003
4-312
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Any optional input device from the left side of the machine (Bypass Tray or HCF/
Bypass Tray)
b.
c.
d.
Xerographic Module
e.
3.
4.
Remove the
Area 4 Bracket.
Remove the baffle from the left side of the Duplex Transport:
Figure 1 Area 4 Bracket
NOTE: In the following step, lifting the Duplex Transport may provide more clearance for
removing and installing the baffle.
WARNING
Take care not to cut yourself on the top edge of the left frame opening in the next
step. This edge has not been deburred on frames built before June 8, 1998, and
may be sharp.
If the white fastener is present: follow the instructions in Figure 3.
Disconnect
P97.
Unlatch the left front corner of the Duplex Transport (Figure 5).
7.
Disengage the spring hook at the right front corner of the Duplex Transport (Figure 6).
8.
Disengage the right front corner of the transport from the IOT frame (Figure 7).
9.
Pull the Duplex Transport straight out the front of the IOT.
1
Disconnect P74.
3
With Tag
#14: Disconnect third
connector.
Figure 2 Connectors
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-313
REP 10-2
1
Pull the
white fastener to
release
the baffle.
2
Lift the
Duplex
Transport.
3
Rotate and remove the baffle.
Figure 3 With the White Fastener
REP 10-2
May 2003
4-314
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Push this black
tab to the left
while pulling out
on the baffle, to
release the baffle.
2
Lift the Duplex
Transport.
3
Rotate and
remove the
baffle.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-315
REP 10-2
REP 10-2
May 2003
4-316
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
4.
1
Move the right end
of the transport to
the right.
5.
Engage the spring hook at the right front corner of the transport Figure 13).
6.
Do not connect the third connector (Figure 14) unless the machine has TAG 014. Without
TAG 014, a different connector carrying 24 Volts may be in the same location in the machine,
which will damage the Duplex Transport.
7.
8.
9.
Position the Area 4 Bracket in the machine, engaging the front and rear locating pins
(Figure 15).
b.
b.
Xerographic Module
c.
If replacing the Duplex Transport with a new one, perform the following:
a.
Enter [Paper tab , IOT Paper Path Setup] and run [Duplex Feed Time] setup.
b.
Check/adjust top edge registration (IB-OB), side 2, Small Paper (ADJ 8-1C).
c.
Check/adjust top edge registration (IB-OB), side 2, Large Paper (ADJ 8-1D).
d.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
2
Lift the transport locating tab out
of the T-slot in the IOT frame.
Duplex
Transport
left rear
locating
point
Replacement
1.
2.
Insert the Duplex Transport straight into the front of the IOT.
b.
Ensure the right rear lower corner is resting on top of the IOT right frame flange.
c.
Engage the locating point on the Registration Transport at the left rear (Figure 8).
Install the baffle onto the left side of the Duplex Transport.
WARNING
Take care not to cut yourself on the top edge of the left frame opening in the next
step. This edge has not been deburred on frames built before June 8, 1998, and
may be sharp.
If the white fastener is present:
a.
Position the baffle, ensuring the rear locating tab is positioned correctly (Figure
9).
b.
If the white fastener is NOT present: Install the baffle according to Figure 10.
3.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-317
REP 10-2
correct position
of locating tab
LEFT SIDE
OF IOT
REP 10-2
May 2003
4-318
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Insert the baffle between this
tab and the main body of the
Duplex Transport.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-319
REP 10-2
2
Lower the transport locating tab
into the T-slot in the IOT frame.
3
Move the right end
of the transport to
the left.
REP 10-2
May 2003
4-320
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Connect
P97.
1
Connect
P74.
3
With Tag
#14: Connect third
connector.
Figure 14 Connectors
rear locating
pins
front locating
pins
rear locating
holes
Figure 15 Area 4 Baffle
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-321
REP 10-2
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the OCT, or undock the Finisher (REP 12-12) or MFF (REP 12.10.01).
3.
REP 10-3
May 2003
4-322
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: A Decurler is
shown here. An Exit
Baffle (Finisherequipped machine
only) has no gears,
rollers, or clutch.
2
Remove the T20
screws (2).
1
Decurler
machines only:
Disconnect the
connector.
3
Lift the Decurler
or Exit Baffle
straight up.
4
Pull the Decurler or Exit Baffle
straight out.
Figure 1 Removal
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-323
REP 10-3
Replacement
1.
Insert the bottom first, then pivot the top in and hook it to the IOT frame.
b.
Exit Baffle only: Install and tighten the T20 screws (2). Skip steps c - e.
c.
d.
Install the T20 screws (2) loosely, allow the decurler to hang freely, ensuring that the
Decurler and IOT gears mesh correctly.
e.
Finisher-equipped machines, with disabled Decurler (TAG 022) or Exit Baffle only:
Ensure that the jumper is installed on the Decurler harness in the IOT, and that the jumper/harness is positioned correctly:
NOTE: The jumper must be installed to complete the Decurler control circuit that is not
used with the disabled Decurler or Exit Baffle. Also, if the jumper/harness is positioned
incorrectly, it can interfere with the Fuser drawer closing.
a.
Pull out the Fuser drawer and remove the Fuser Module.
b.
Inside the IOT, ensure that the jumper is installed and is positioned correctly (Figure
3).
connector (Decurler
machines only)
Figure 2 Installation
REP 10-3
May 2003
4-324
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Slide out the Inverter Drawer and remove the Fuser Module.
3.
Disconnect the Inverter Drawer connector from the IOT, and free the harness (two T20
screws).
4.
5.
Separate the Inverter baffles from the Inverter frame (Figure 1).
6.
7.
Remove the two T20 screws securing the drives bracket to the Inverter, and remove the
ground lug. Some inverters will also have a spacer in the location indicated; if so, save the
spacer to reuse in Installation (Figure 3).
8.
Release the latch on the Exit Roll and begin to slide the shaft out of the roll (Figure 4).
9.
Release the latch on the Feed/Reverse Roll and begin to slide the shaft out of the roll, in
the same manner as for the Exit Roll (Figure 4).
10. Slide the Inverter Drive Assembly out just far enough to access the solenoid connector,
and disconnect the solenoid connector (Figure 5).
11. Slide the Inverter Drive Assembly out the rest of the way (Figure 6).
The jumper/connector
must not be positioned
away from the frame wall,
where it may interfere
with the Fuser drawer
closing.
12. If replacing the Exit Roll or the Feed/Reverse Roll, remove the desired roll (Figure 7).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-325
REP 10-4
May 2003
4-326
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
4
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-327
REP 10-4
1
Unlatch the Exit
Roll from the shaft.
T20 screw
T20 screw and ground lug
2
Begin to slide the
shaft out of the roll.
3
Repeat for the Feed/
Reverse Roll.
REP 10-4
May 2003
4-328
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Slide the drive
bracket out just far
enough to access the
solenoid connector.
2
Disconnect the
solenoid connector.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-329
REP 10-4
1
Slide the roll to the right.
2
Remove the roll out the
bottom of the baffle.
REP 10-4
May 2003
4-330
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
3.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
5.
6.
2
Move the idler up.
1
Loosen the T20
idler screw 1/4turn only.
4
Remove the belt.
3
Tighten the screw.
May 2003
4-331
REP 12-1
Disconnect the DC connector and the ground faston from the solenoid.
2
Disconnect the
connector from
J4 on the Finisher Controller
PWB.
2
Remove the Top
Module Assembly.
Figure 2 Connectors
Replacement
REP 12-1
May 2003
4-332
Remember to reconnect the interlock switch when reinstalling the Finisher Top Cover.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
Press the Pause/Resume Switch to lower the Stacker Tray, and open the Stapler Access
Door.
2.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
WARNING
Support the Stacker Tray when removing the Stacker Drive Motor, and then lower the
tray gently. Otherwise, the Stacker Tray will drop quickly, possibly causing damage or
personal injury.
3.
3.
4.
5.
If replacing the Service Tray Assembly with a new one, perform the following:
a.
1
Disconnect the
motor connector.
CAUTION
Observe the correct harness routing carefully before removing the harness, to ensure a
correct replacement.
b.
6.
Disconnect the five connectors from the Finisher Controller PWB, and disconnect
the ground wire from the Stacker Drive Motor bracket (Figure 2).
Remove the main harness from the cable clamp on the Finisher main frame.
CAUTION
Support the Service Tray carefully when removing it -- it may fall out.
CAUTION
Take care not to allow the Stack Height Sensor/Stack Too High Sensor to become bent by contact with the Entrance Baffle when removing or installing the Service Tray (see Figure 3).
7.
8.
If replacing the Service Tray Assembly with a new one, remove the following items to be
reinstalled on the new Service Tray Assembly:
a.
b.
c.
3
2
Remove the T20
screws (2) and
the ground wire.
Figure 1 Removal
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-333
2
Pinch the hook-tabs
together and unsnap the
Tamper Button from the
Tamper Arm.
1
Remove the long
T20 screw (hidden).
REP 12-3
May 2003
4-334
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
J1
Figure 2 Connectors
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-335
REP 12-3
Replacement
1.
1
Remove the T20
Screws (2).
If replacing the Service Tray Assembly with a new one, install the following items removed
from the old Service Tray Assembly:
a.
b.
c.
Take care not to allow the Stack Height Sensor/Stack Too High Sensor to become bent by contact with the Entrance Baffle when removing or installing the Service Tray (see Figure 4).
2.
3.
If replacing the Service Tray Assembly with a new one, perform the following:
a.
b.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
Entrance
Baffle
Stack Height
Sensor/Stack
Too High Sensor
-- see CAUTION
2
Remove the Service Tray Assembly.
Figure 3 Service Tray Removal
REP 12-3
May 2003
4-336
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Install the T20
Screws (2).
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
Carefully observe the correct harness routing before proceeding, to ensure a correct replacement.
5.
Entrance
Baffle
Stack Height
Sensor/Stack
Too High Sensor
-- see CAUTION
1
Engage the two mounting
"forks" with the two mounting
pins in the Finisher.
Figure 4 Installation
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-337
BOTTOM
VIEW
2
Disconnect the
ground faston.
3
Unsnap the connector body from
the bracket.
4
Disconnect the
connector.
Figure 1 Connectors
3
Remove the Moving Stapler.
1
Cut the tie-wrap.
Figure 2 Removal
REP 12-4
May 2003
4-338
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
CAUTION
Route the harnesses carefully, as observed earlier, to ensure free movement of the Moving
Stapler and to avoid harness damage.
1.
2.
3.
If replacing the Moving Stapler with a new one, perform the following:
a.
b.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
1
Insert the shaft
end into the rack
as shown.
Figure 3 Installation
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-339
REP 12-4
Disconnect the
connector
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
BOTTOM VIEW
Figure 1 Removal
REP 12-5
May 2003
4-340
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
b.
c.
4.
Remove the nip 1/2 Drive Belt from the Nip 1 Drive Shaft Pulley (Figure 1).
5.
Remove the E-ring, the pulley, and the rear bushing from the Nip 1 Drive Shaft (Figure 2).
CAUTION
Remove the front E-ring and bushing from the Nip 1 Drive shaft (Figure 3).
7.
8.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-341
REP 12-6
2
Move the idler
down.
1
Loosen the T20
idler screw 1/4turn only.
4
Remove the belt
from the Nip 1
Drive Shaft Pulley.
REP 12-6
May 2003
4-342
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CAUTION
Observe the correct orientation of the pulley
before removing it.
Remove the Ering, the pulley,
and the rear bushing.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-343
REP 12-6
Replacement
Remember to reconnect the Pause/Resume Switch when reinstalling the Finisher Front
Cover.
REP 12-6
May 2003
4-344
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
b.
c.
4.
5.
Remove the E-ring, the pulley, and the rear bushing from the Nip 2 Drive Shaft (Figure 2).
CAUTION
Remove the front E-ring and bushing from the Nip 2 Drive shaft (Figure 3).
7.
8.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-345
REP 12-7
2
Move the idler
down.
1
Loosen the T20
idler screw 1/4turn only.
3
Tighten the screw.
4
Remove the belt.
REP 12-7
May 2003
4-346
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CAUTION
Observe the correct orientation of the pulley
before removing it.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-347
REP 12-7
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
b.
c.
4.
5.
Replacement
Remember to reconnect the Pause/Resume Switch when reinstalling the Finisher Front
Cover.
May 2003
4-348
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Disconnect the DC connector and the ground faston from the solenoid.
Separate the
pivot arms and
remove the
Transport Baffle.
2
Lift the
Transport
Baffle.
3
Loosen the T20 screws (2)
securing the pivot arms.
Figure 2 Removal
Replacement
Remember to reconnect the interlock switch when reinstalling the Finisher Top Cover.
Figure 1 Connector
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-349
REP 12-8
Press the Pause/Resume Switch to lower the Stacker Tray, and open the Stapler Access
Door.
2.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
3.
4.
5.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
7.
f.
g.
b.
c.
CAUTION
Do not set the Exit Baffle down with the Static Eliminator facing downward -- this can deform
the Static Eliminator bristles.
8.
Disconnect the two connectors from the Finisher Controller PWB (Figure 3).
CAUTION
Remove the front mounting screws for the Disk Baffle (Figure 4).
10. Remove the rear mounting screws for the Disk Baffle (Figure 5).
11. Remove the Disk Baffle Assembly (Figure 6).
REP 12-9
May 2003
4-350
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Remove front
T20 screw.
2
Remove rear T20
screw.
3
Remove the Exit
Baffle.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-351
REP 12-9
J9
J3
Figure 3 Connectors
REP 12-9
May 2003
4-352
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-353
REP 12-9
Replacement
CAUTION
Be sure to hold the Disk Baffle upward when tightening the screws securing the baffle. This
will help prevent the baffle from interfering with the Canard Wing during operation.
NOTE: If installing a new Disk Baffle Assembly, installing the screws may require more torque
than expected. This is normal, because the holes are not pre-threaded and the self-tapping
screws have to cut new threads in the new Disk Baffle holes.
Remember to reconnect the Pause/Resume Switch when reinstalling the Finisher Front
Cover.
Remember to reconnect the interlock switch when reinstalling the Finisher Top Cover.
REP 12-9
May 2003
4-354
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2.
3.
WARNING
b.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
1
Disconnect the
motor connector.
Figure 1 Removal
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-355
REP 12-10
Unsnap the
Tamper Button
from the Tamper
Arm.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Do not set the Exit Baffle down with the Static Eliminator facing downward -- this can deform
the Static Eliminator bristles.
6.
Remove the rear Disk Baffle mounting screws and the rear Disk Shaft E-ring and bushing
(Figure 4).
7.
Remove the front Disk Baffle mounting screws and the front Disk Shaft E-ring and bushing (Figure 5)
8.
9.
REP 12-11
May 2003
4-356
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-357
REP 12-11
1
Remove front
T20 screw.
2
Remove rear T20
screw.
3
Remove the Exit
Baffle.
REP 12-11
May 2003
4-358
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Remove the T20
screws (2).
1
Remove the T20
screws (2).
NOTE: For
Disk Shaft
installation, the
spring (inside)
must be on top
of the bushing.
2
Remove the E-ring
and bushing.
Figure 4 Rear Screws, E-Ring and Bushing
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Remove the Ering and bushing.
May 2003
4-359
REP 12-11
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Lower Right Cover from the Finisher PL 8.2: Unlatch the two hand-operated
1/4-turn fasteners.
3.
Unlatch the slide-latch, located inside the Lower Right Cover: Loosen the thumbscrew or
T20 screw, slide the latch all the way out, and retighten the thumbscrew to prevent the
latch from sliding in accidentally.
4.
Ensure that the hitch-pins have been removed from the tops of the spring-loaded castors
(right two castors), to activate the spring-loading to aid in lifting the Finisher (next step).
5.
While preventing the bottom of the Finisher from moving away from the IOT, carefully lift
the Finisher just far enough to unhook only the top two docking hooks from the IOT,
and carefully pull outward on the top of the Finisher to unhook the top two hooks, leaving
the bottom two hooks engaged into the IOT.
WARNING
Use extreme care in performing the following three steps. If all four Finisher docking
hooks are unhooked from the IOT while the right castors' spring-loading is still active,
the Finisher will become extremely unstable. The top of the Finisher will then tend to tilt
to the left while the bottom rolls to the right, possibly resulting in the Finisher falling and
causing equipment damage or personal injury.
6.
Deactivate the spring-loading of the two right castors: Press down with your foot on the
base of the Finisher to compress the springs and gain access to the pin holes, and insert
the two hitch-pins.
7.
Carefully tilt the top of the Finisher away from the IOT until the bottom two docking hooks
are disengaged, then carefully move the Finisher slightly away from the IOT and stand it
upright on its four castors.
Replacement
Remember to reconnect the Pause/Resume Switch when reinstalling the Finisher Front
Cover.
Remember to reconnect the interlock switch when reinstalling the Finisher Top Cover.
WARNING
Do not attempt the following step (unhooking the bottom two docking hooks) without
first having performed the previous step (deactivating the spring-loading of the right
castors). (Refer to the WARNING above.)
8.
If you wish to operate the machine with the Finisher undocked from the IOT, insert an
interlock cheater into the interlock switch on the right side of the IOT.
9.
If you do not wish to operate the Finisher with it undocked, disconnect the Finisher connector from the IOT.
Replacement
NOTE: If you are installing the Finisher as part of an upgrade from an OCT, you must first order
a new Exit Baffle (PL 6.1A) and install it in place of the Decurler (see REP 10-3).
1.
2.
3.
If replacing the Finisher Assembly with a new one, enter the new tamping value into NVM:
a.
May 2003
4-360
Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool] and download the machine NVM.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
b.
c.
Scroll (or Search) to location [0] (zero), [tamperHomeSetup], and change the value
to match the number printed on the label on the underside of the new Finisher's Top
Cover Door.
Figure 1 Connector
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-361
REP 12-12
2.
b.
3.
4.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2
Move the idler
down.
1
Loosen the T20
idler screw 1/4turn only.
4
Remove the belt.
Figure 1 Removal
REP 12-13
May 2003
4-362
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
1.
2.
Reinstall and tension the Nip 3/4 Drive Belt (REP 12-14).
Install and tension the Nip 1/2 Drive Belt (Figure 2).
2
Loosen the T20
idler screw 1/4turn only, allowing
the spring-loaded
idler to tension the
belt, then retighten
the screw.
1
Position the belt
as shown.
Figure 2 Installation
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-363
REP 12-13
2.
3.
WARNING
b.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2
Move the idler up.
1
Loosen the T20
idler screw 1/4turn only.
4
Remove the belt.
3
Tighten the screw.
Figure 1 Removal
REP 12-14
May 2003
4-364
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
1.
Install and tension the Nip 3/4 Drive Belt (Figure 2).
2
Loosen the T20
idler screw 1/4-turn
only, allowing the
spring-loaded idler
to tension the belt,
then retighten the
screw.
1
Position the belt
as shown.
Figure 2 Installation
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-365
REP 12-14
Lubricate
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
Remove the Nip 3/4 Idler and the Nip 1/2 Idler (Figure 1).
5.
6.
a.
Remove the roller from the idler shaft of the Nip 3/4 Idler.
b.
c.
Remove the roller from the idler shaft of the Nip 1/2 Idler.
b.
c.
7.
Reinstall the Nip 3/4 Idler and the Nip 1/2 Idler (Figure 2).
8.
9.
REP 12-15
May 2003
4-366
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Disconnect the spring.
2
Remove the T20
idler screw.
Disconnect the
spring.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-367
REP 12-15
3
Reinstall the T20
idler screw. Do
not tighten the
screw.
4
Reconnect the
spring.
REP 12-15
May 2003
4-368
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Loosen the T20
idler screw 1/4-turn
only, allowing the
spring-loaded idler
to tension the belt,
then retighten the
screw.
1
Position the belt
as shown.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-369
REP 12-15
2
Loosen the T20
idler screw 1/4turn only, allowing
the spring-loaded
idler to tension the
belt, then retighten
the screw.
1
Position the belt
as shown.
REP 12-15
May 2003
4-370
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
a.
b.
7.
Disconnect the offset link from the Top Tray Offset Drive Gear (large white gear) Figure 1.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-371
REP 12-16
REP 12-16
May 2003
4-372
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
1.
Ensure the flanges of the 2 upper guide rollers rest on the top surface of the upper
guides.
b.
Ensure the flanges of the 2 lower guide rollers rest on the top surface of the lower
guide rail.
NOTE: If any of the offset drive components for the Finisher Top Tray are damaged,
replace the Top Module Assembly (PL 8.3).
2.
Reinstall the offset link onto the Top Tray Offset Drive Gear.
3.
1.
Disconnect the Convenience Stapler Harness from the back of the Convenience Stapler.
2.
Remove the bottom plate from the Convenience Stapler (Figure 1).
3.
Remove the Convenience Stapler batteries (if the stapler is the model with rechargeable
batteries) and remove the Convenience Stapler jack from the cover (Figure 2).
4.
1
Remove the screws (3).
NOTE: When reinstalling the 5a Baffle, be careful not to damage or dislodge the actuator
for the Top Tray paper Path Sensor and the actuator for the Top Tray Full Sensor.
4.
5.
Reinstall the Finisher Top Cover (remember to reconnect the interlock switch).
6.
7.
2
Carefully separate the
bottom plate just enough
to access the connector
for the stapler.
3
Disconnect the stapler
connector from the
PWB.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-373
3
Disconnect the battery
connectors.
Remove the
batteries.
1
Remove the nut and
set it aside. It will be
reused in Replacement.
REP 12-17
May 2003
4-374
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Disconnect the
connectors.
2
Remove the harness
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Check the operation of the Convenience Stapler by removing the Staple Cartridge and
closing the Convenience Stapler Cover. The red LED should be illuminated.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-375
REP 12-17
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
2.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
3.
Open the Stapler Access door to gain access to the Moving Stapler.
4.
Remove the screws that secure the Lead-in Baffle to the Moving Stapler (Figure 1).
5.
Remove the 7 mm
screws.
REP 12-18
May 2003
4-376
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Hold the Canard Wing and
the nickel plated registration
edge in the raised position.
2
Remove the Lead-In Baffle.
Figure 2 Removal
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-377
REP 12-18
Replacement
1.
1
Hold the Canard Wing and
the nickel plated registration
edge in the raised position
Bracket
2
Install the 7 mm screws (2).
NOTE: Do not tighten at this
time.
2
Carefully move the new
Lead-In Baffle into position.
3.
REP 12-18
May 2003
4-378
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Push down and hold the Lead-In Baffle
against the white plastic block and outward.
Lead-In Baffle
2
Tighten the screws.
Close the Stapler Access Door. Ensure the Lead-In Baffle does not interfere with the top
of the Stapler Access Door when closing the door. When installed correctly, the Lead-In
Baffle should be flush with the top surface of the Stapler Access Door (Figure 6).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
5.
If the Lead-In Baffle interferes with the closing of the Stapler Access Door, or is not flush
with the top surface of the door, loosen the 2 mounting screws and repeat Step 3.
6.
If not already done, mark off Tag 031 on the Finisher Change Tag Matrix.
May 2003
4-379
REP 12-18
1
Remove the screws (3).
CAUTION
Some Convenience Staplers will contain rechargeable batteries. Do not remove the batteries,
they will remain disconnected in the Convenience Stapler. The batteries will be correctly disposed of when the machine is returned for remanufacturing.
1.
2.
Disconnect the Convenience Stapler Harness from the back of the Convenience Stapler.
3.
4.
Remove the connectors from the Convenience Stapler PWB. (Figure 1).
3
Remove the stapler
connector from the
PWB.
2
Carefully separate the bottom plate just enough to
access the connector for
the stapler.
4
Remove the bottom plate
and disconnect the remaining connectors from the
PWB.
Figure 1 Removing the Connectors from the Convenience Stapler PWB.
REP 12-19
May 2003
4-380
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
1.
Install the Convenience Stapler PWB and reconnect the stapler connector P/J 3, and the
power connector, P/J 4.
NOTE: Note: The Convenience Stapler PWB does not contain the battery charging circuitry. The jacks J1 and J2 have been removed.
2.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
3.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
4.
2.
5.
a.
NOTE: The customer cannot use the Convenience Stapler off-line. After installing the
Convenience Stapler PWB in a stapler that was previously battery operated, inform the
customer the Convenience Stapler will not operate unless it is connected to the machine.
b.
Front Cover
WARNING
Support the Stacker Tray when removing the Stacker Drive Motor, and then lower the
tray gently. Otherwise, the Stacker Tray will drop quickly, possibly causing damage or
personal injury.
3.
4.
Remove both the front and the rear Stacker Drive Belt Clamps (REP 12-21).
5.
6.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-381
a.
Remove the K-clip securing the top Stacker Drive Belt Pulley to the shaft, and slide
the pulley off of the shaft.
b.
Remove the K-clip securing the top Stacker Drive Belt Pulley to the shaft, and slide
the pulley off of the shaft.
b.
upper pulley
upper pulley
Replacement
REP 12-20
1.
Install the Stacker Tray Drive Belts and the upper pulleys and K-clips.
2.
3.
Install the front and rear Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamps, and level the Stacker Tray (REP
12-21).
May 2003
4-382
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
b.
Front Cover
WARNING
If the Stacker Drive Motor was not already removed, support the Stacker Tray when
removing the Stacker Drive Belt Clamps, and then lower the tray gently. Otherwise, the
Stacker Tray will drop quickly, possibly causing damage or personal injury.
3.
Remove the Front Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamp (Figure 1).
4.
Remove the rear Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamp (Figure 2):
Replacement
1.
Install the front and rear Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamps and T20 screws.
2.
3.
4.
3
Remove the front
Stacker Tray Drive
Belt Clamp.
1.
Remove any paper from the Stacker Tray and allow the Stacker Tray to raise to the home
position (all the way up, with no paper in the tray -- press the Pause/Resume Switch as
required).
2.
Observe whether the Stacker Tray is approximately level (parallel with the Stapler Access
Door).
3.
Figure 1 Front Clamp Removal
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Press the Pause/Resume Switch so that the Stacker Tray begins to lower, then open the
Finisher Top Cover Door to stop the Stacker Tray approximately 3 inches (75 mm) below
the home position.
4.
Switch off the machine power, and then close the Finisher Top Cover Door.
5.
May 2003
4-383
a.
b.
Front Cover
REP 12-21
6.
Count the number of teeth showing on the Stacker Tray Dive Belt between the Stacker
Tray Drive Belt Clamp and the bottom of the upper Stacker Drive Pulley in the front of the
Finisher (Figure 3).
7.
Count the number of teeth on the Stacker Tray Dive Belt between the Stacker Tray Drive
Belt Clamp and the bottom of the upper Stacker Drive Pulley in the rear of the Finisher
(Figure 4).
8.
If the number of teeth is the same in the previous two steps, the tray may be warped or
damaged. Repair or replace the Stacker Tray as required.
9.
If the number of teeth is not the same in the previous two steps, do the following:
a.
b.
In the front of the Finisher, remove the T20 screw securing the Stacker Tray Drive
Belt Clamp, and disengage the clamp from the Stacker Tray support.
c.
Slide the belt out of the clamp, move it the required number of teeth up or down to
equal the position in the rear, and slide it back into the clamp.
d.
Reengage the clamp to the tray support and reinstall the T20 screw.
10. Recheck the number of teeth front an rear and readjust as required.
11. Switch on the machine power, allow the Stacker Tray to raise to the home position again,
and check the levelling again. If the Stacker Tray is still significantly unlevel, the tray
may be warped or damaged. Repair or replace the Stacker Tray as required
Stop counting
teeth here.
Start
counting
teeth
here.
Stop counting
teeth here.
Figure 4 Rear Clamp Installation
Start counting
teeth here.
Stacker Tray
support.
T20 screw.
REP 12-21
May 2003
4-384
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Press the Pause/Resume Switch to lower the Stacker Tray, and open the Stapler Access
Door.
2.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
3.
4.
5.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
f.
g.
b.
c.
CAUTION
Do not set the Exit Baffle down with the Static Eliminator facing downward -- this can deform
the Static Eliminator bristles.
7.
8.
9.
Dismount the Finisher Entrance Sensor from the Disk Baffle, to avoid damaging the sensor actuator during the rest of the procedure (Figure 3).
NOTE: You do not need to disconnect the connector from the sensor.
10. Remove the two screws (slotted 7mm) securing the Fixed-Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid to
the Disk Baffle (Figure 3).
11. Move the solenoid out of the way, and remove the gate actuator link (Figure 4).
12. Remove the two K-clips, and remove the right-hand gear (Figure 4).
13. Lift the gate to align the left-hand gears notch with the bracket for clearance, and remove
the left-hand gear (Figure 5).
14. Remove the Fixed-Stapler Safety Gate (Figure 5).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-385
REP 12-22
1
Remove front
T20 screw.
2
Remove rear T20
screw.
3
Remove the Exit
Baffle.
REP 12-22
May 2003
4-386
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
K-clips (2)
righthand
gear
solenoid
screws (2)
gate
actuator
link
solenoid
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-387
REP 12-22
left-hand
gear
Fixed-Stapler
Safety Gate
notch
switch/solenoid
bracket
Replacement
Remember to reinstall the Finisher Entrance Sensor (Figure 3) before reinstalling the Disk
Baffle Assembly.
REP 12-22
May 2003
4-388
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Press the Pause/Resume Switch to lower the Stacker Tray, and open the Stapler Access
Door.
2.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
3.
4.
5.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
f.
g.
b.
c.
CAUTION
Do not set the Exit Baffle down with the Static Eliminator facing downward -- this can deform
the Static Eliminator bristles.
7.
8.
9.
Dismount the Finisher Entrance Sensor from the Disk Baffle, to avoid damaging the sensor actuator during the rest of the procedure (Figure 3).
NOTE: You do not need to disconnect the connector from the sensor.
10. Remove the two screws (slotted 7mm) securing the Moving-Stapler Safety Gate Solenoid
to the Disk Baffle (Figure 3).
11. Move the solenoid out of the way, and remove the gate actuator link (Figure 4).
12. Remove the two K-clips, and remove the right-hand gear (Figure 4).
13. Lift the gate to align the left-hand gears notch with the bracket for clearance, and remove
the left-hand gear (Figure 5).
14. Remove the Moving-Stapler Safety Gate (Figure 6).
NOTE: The foam washers, for noise reduction, are not present on older Finishers. If the
foam washers are present, be sure to keep them in place.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-389
REP 12-23
1
Remove front
T20 screw.
2
Remove rear T20
screw.
3
Remove the Exit
Baffle.
REP 12-23
May 2003
4-390
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
solenoid
screws (2)
K-clips (2)
right-hand
gear
gate
actuator
link
solenoid
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-391
REP 12-23
Moving-Stapler
Safety Gate
left-hand
gear
notch
switch/solenoid
bracket
REP 12-23
May 2003
4-392
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
Remember to reinstall the Finisher Entrance Sensor (Figure 3) before reinstalling the Disk
Baffle Assembly.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-393
REP 12-23
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
DO NOT loosen the third screw on the tamper arm or rotate the arm position on the slide (Figure 1). The arm position on the slide has been set up at the factory for optimum tamping performance and should not be changed.
4.
Remove the cable clamp (one T20 screw and one T10 screw).
b.
c.
Unhook the spring end of the cable from the tamper, and remove the cable.
Replacement
CAUTION
DO NOT loosen the third screw on the tamper arm or rotate the arm position on the slide (Figure 1). The arm position on the slide has been set up at the factory for optimum tamping performance and should not be changed.
1.
Connect the spring end of the cable to the tamper, and route the cable to the right as
shown (Figure 2).
2.
Install the cable clamp and the screws (one T10 and one T20), but leave the screws loose
(Figure 2).
3.
Move the tamper all the way to the left (Figure 2).
4.
Route the cable around the right end of the tamper, and behind the capstan (Figure 3).
5.
Wind the cable counterclockwise around the capstan, from the bottom up, 2-1/2 times.
6.
Align the cable ball with the indent in the capstan. Rotate the capstan while letting the
cable slip on the capstan, until the ball aligns with the indent, and ensure that the ball is
seated in the indent (Figure 1).
7.
Route the ball end of the cable around the left end of the tamper, and hook the ball end
into the slot (Figure 1).
8.
9.
a.
With the tamper all the way to the left, the ball should be on the top cable-wind on the
capstan.
b.
Move the tamper to the right until the capstan has rotated one full turn. The ball
should now be on the middle cable-wind, with one wind above it and one wind below
it.
c.
If the cable is not wound correctly on the capstan or binds when the tamper is moved
right and left, go back to step 2 and repeat the procedure as required.
Tighten the cable clamp screws (one T10 and one T20) (Figure 1).
10. Move the tamper left and right several time and observe if the cable loosens. If so, loosen
and retighten the cable clamp screws (one T10 and one T20).
Repairs and Adjustments
May 2003
4-394
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
cable clamp
T20 screw
CAUTION: DO NOT
loosen this third
screw.
T10 screw
ball end of
cable in
slot
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-395
REP 12-24
T20 screw
cable clamp
T10 screw
CAUTION:
DO NOT
loosen this
third screw.
1
Route the cable
around the right
end of the
tamper.
spring
end of
cable
2
Route the cable
behind the capstan.
REP 12-24
May 2003
4-396
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Front Door
b.
Rear Cover
c.
Right Front
3
Remove the belt
form the belt clamp.
NOTE: When the Main Tray Elevator Motor is removed, the Main Tray will move to the
down position. This will take the load off the Elevator Belts and make them easier to
remove.
3.
4.
Remove the Main Tray Elevator Belt, both sides are removed the same (Figure 1).
2
Remove the T20
screw.
1
Loosen the belt tensioner.
Replacement
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1.
2.
During the belt installation, make sure the placement of the belt holder is the same distance from the top pulley on both sides (Figure 2).
May 2003
4-397
REP 12.01.01
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
May 2003
4-398
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
REAR VIEW
Offset Motor
(M50)
2
Remove two
T20 screws
(front screw
shown).
1
Remove two
7mm nuts.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-399
REP 12.01.02
Disconnect motor
(M50) connector.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
Remove the four (7mm) nuts that hold the Offset Panel to the MFF (Figure 2). and (Figure
3).
4.
3
Remove the Main Tray.
1
Disconnect
sensor (S53)
connector.
Replacement
NOTE: The Offset Panel may have to be moved back and forth to allow proper alignment of
the Offset Cam and the Offset Panel.
1. Install in the reverse order of the removal.
1
Remove the
K-clip.
2
Remove the two T20 screws.
May 2003
4-400
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
REAR VIEW
Offset Motor
(M50)
Remove two
7mm nuts.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-401
REP 12.01.03
Main Compiler
front backstop
Top Rail
cam follower
slot
Offset Panel
Bottom Rail
Remove two
7mm nuts (front
nut shown).
Figure 4 Offset Panel and Rails
Replacement
1.
2.
Install the Offset Panel so that the Offset Cam is properly located in the Cam Locator
Position (Figure 4).
a.
b.
c.
d.
With the rail studs located in the bottom holes, move the Offset Panel back and forth
until the cam is located properly in the cam locator position.
e.
f.
REP 12.01.03
May 2003
4-402
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Hold the tray from falling when removing the motor, to prevent damage to the lower limit switch.
3.
4
Slide the motor off of the
shaft (see CAUTION).
3
Remove the two T20
screws.
Be sure to loosen the drawer connector bracket screws before installing the Booklet Maker
Assembly, and retighten them afterward when the connectors are mated. Otherwise, the connectors may be misaligned, resulting in intermittent connections or connector damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the rear screws (T10) from each Booklet Maker slide (left side: Figure 1; right
side: Figure 2).
5.
Remove the two front and one left-center slide screws (5.5 mm) (left side: Figure 1; right
side: Figure 2).
6.
Slide the Booklet Maker Drawer fully forward. The left side rail will disengage as shown in
7.
Standing on the right side of the Booklet Maker, grasp the front and rear handles, slide the
Booklet Maker forward slightly, and lift it off of the slides (Figure 3).
8.
Place the Booklet Maker on a flat surface (top of MFF or nearby table). The Booklet
Maker will need to be close enough to hook up the troubleshooting cable, (if required).
9.
Retract the drawer slides into the machine, to avoid a tripping hazard.
10. Loosen the four T20 drawer connector bracket screws on the back of the Booklet Maker
(Figure 5).
1
Disconnect the
two motor electrical connectors.
Replacement
1.
Raise the tray near the top before reinstalling the motor.
2.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-403
front screw
(5.5 mm)
REP 12.02.01
May 2003
4-404
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
rear
handle
front
handle
locator
slot
locator
stud
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-405
REP 12.02.01
6.
Install the front screw (5.5 mm) on each rail, and the left-center screw (5.5 mm).
7.
Install the rear screw (T10) on each slide (see Figure 2 for accessing the right rear screw
hole.
8.
Slide the Booklet Maker all the way back in and latch Area 5a.
9.
Tighten the four T20 drawer connector bracket screws on the MFF, through the rear of the
MFF.
If the NVM label is not on the Booklet Maker left frame, remove the Booklet Maker
Front Cover:
i.
b.
Remove the Crease Blade Knob (5.5 mm screw, or clip -- do not lose the clip).
iii.
iv.
Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool], and download the machine NVM.
c.
d.
Scroll or [Search] to the following locations, double-click on each one, enter the values indicated below, select [Write NVM] and select [OK]:
Loosen
four T20
screws.
Location 501 (BM Fold to Center): Enter the value for location 501 or NVM10
on the label.
Location 502 (BM Staple to Fold): Enter the value for location 502 or NVM11
on the label.
Location 503 (BM BM Tamper Stroke): Enter the value for location 503 or
NVM12 on the label.
Location 504 (Z-Fold First to LE): Enter the value for location 504 or NVM13
on the label.
Location 507 (BM Home to Compile): Enter the value for location 507 or
NVM19 on the label.
NOTE: Ignore the value for NVM20 (if present) on the label. This value is not
used.
Replacement
CAUTION
Be sure to loosen the drawer connector bracket screws before installing the Booklet Maker
Assembly, and retighten them afterward when the connectors are mated. Otherwise, the connectors may be misaligned, resulting in intermittent connections or connector damage.
1.
Remove the Booklet Maker Front Handle (two slotted or 5.5 mm screws).
ii.
e.
Location 508 (C-Fold First to LE): Enter the value for location 508 or NVM21
on the label.
2.
3.
4.
Standing on the right side of the Booklet Maker drawer, grasp the front and rear handles
and lift it onto the two posts on the right rail, positioning the Booklet Maker between the
rails (Figure 6).
5.
Engage the left side rail: Start the Booklet Maker's locator stud into the front of the rail's
locator slot, then gently slide the Booklet Maker in while holding the left rail all the way
out, until the left rear rail hook engages the Booklet Maker frame and the screw holes
align.
REP 12.02.01
May 2003
4-406
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
2.
Using the Crease Blade Knob, retract the Crease Blade to allow easy access to the four
mounting screws.
3.
posts
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-407
2
Remove four 5.5 mm screws
and remove the Crease
Blade.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
3.
Remove the Booklet Maker Front Handle (two slotted or 5.5 mm screws).
b.
Remove the Crease Blade Knob (5.5 mm screw, or clip -- do not lose the clip).
c.
d.
4.
5.
Remove the four T20 screws (two front and two rear).
CAUTION
Do not pivot the Crease Roll exit bracket downward when removing it. Pivoting it downward can dislodge the Crease Roll Bearings.
b.
Flex the Booklet Maker frame slightly to disengage the locating features, pull the
Crease Roll exit bracket out parallel (do not pivot it out), and remove it.
6.
7.
Remove each Crease Roll from the Booklet Maker: Slide the roll rearward, disengage the
front end, slide the roll forward and remove it.
1
Remove two 5.5 mm screws
and disconnect the ground
wires.
Replacement
CAUTION
When replacing or installing the stepper motors used in the MFF, make sure you use the spring
tensioning devises to assure for proper belt tension. Too much or too little tension will effect the
performance of the motors.
1.
2.
If installing a new Crease Blade, perform the Crease Blade Adjustment (ADJ 12.02.01).
May 2003
4-408
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
3
Remove the
snap rings
and bearings (front
and rear).
Upper Crease
Roll
Lower Crease
Roll
2
Remove the
bracket (front
and rear; two
T20 screws
each).
Crease
Roll Exit
Bracket
1
Remove the
spring (front
and rear).
Replacement
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1.
2.
If the Crease Blade is suspected of causing the Crease Roll replacement then perform
the ADJ 12.02.01 Crease Blade Adjustment.
3.
4.
5.
May 2003
4-409
REP 12.02.03
3.
4.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
b.
Remove the Crease Roll Motor Encoder Sensor from the bracket (leave it connected
to the wiring harness).
b.
c.
d.
e.
1
Remove the
plastic rear
handle grip.
2
Remove the three T20
bracket mounting
screws.
REP 12.02.04
May 2003
4-410
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
3.
4.
5.
b.
Remove the idler gears from the Booklet Maker frame (two E-rings and one link).
Remove the
sensor.
3
2
Remove the E-ring and
remove the encoder
wheel/coupling.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-411
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
3.
Remove the Booklet Maker Front Handle (two slotted or 5.5 mm screws).
b.
Remove the Crease Blade Knob (5.5 mm screw, or clip -- do not lose the clip).
c.
d.
4.
5.
Reinstall the Crease Blade Knob temporarily and fully extend the Crease Blade.
6.
Prepare to remove the Crease Blade Drive Shaft and Motor (Figure 1).
7.
a.
Remove the snap-rings and cams on both ends of the Crease Roll Drive Shaft.
b.
Remove the T20 retaining screw retaining the front shaft bearing.
Crease
Blade Cam
(snap ring)
bearing
retainer
Disconnect the Crease Blade Motor electrical connector and any tie-wraps.
b.
Support the Crease Blade Motor and Encoder and remove the Crease Blade Drive
Shaft toward the front of the Booklet Maker.
Replacement
NOTE: The Encoder/coupling is the same part used on the Crease Roll Drive Motor. The coupling portion is not used here and faces the motor during replacement.
1.
REP 12.02.06
May 2003
4-412
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
2.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
3.
3.
Remove the Crease Blade Motor (M67) (REP 12.02.06). The shaft, Encoder Sensor
(S70) and Encoder come off with the motor.
1
Remove four
5.5 mm
screws.
2
Move the
assembly to
the right to
clear the
bearing, and
remove the
assembly.
3
Remove the flapper.
Replacement
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1.
2.
Rotate the Booklet Paper Path Drive Belt clockwise until the Booklet Flapper Solenoid
(L61) arm catches the clutch detente and stops the flappers (Figure 2).
May 2003
4-413
3.
Install the Flappers Assembly so that the Flappers stop outside the paper path with the
top paddle in a vertical position. Move the paddles one gear tooth at a time as required,
rotating towards your position (Figure 3).
Flapper Solenoid/Clutch
REP 12.02.08
May 2003
4-414
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
3.
4.
Position the tampers near their outermost position, so that the edge of the Tamper Rack
Bracket (Figure 1: bracket) is located between the first and second teeth of the Front
Tamper Rack (Figure 1: front rack ).
5.
6.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-415
Tamper
Assembly
bracket
front
rack
bracket
1
Disconnect M62 electrical
connector.
Replacement
NOTE: In case the tamper racks are removed from the assembly, each rack has a guide tab
built in to allow for proper assembly into the tamper rack guide.
1.
If the tamper racks were removed, start both tamper racks into the tamper rack guide
together from opposite sides, so they engage the Booklet Tamper Gear simultaneously to
ensure correct front and rear tamper alignment.
2.
Verify that each tamper rack is against the Tamper Assembly bracket (Figure 2).
3.
4.
REP 12.02.09
May 2003
4-416
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
1.
Start both tamper racks into the tamper rack guide together from opposite sides, so they
engage the Booklet Tamper Gear simultaneously to ensure correct front and rear tamper
alignment.
WARNING
2.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
3.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
3.
4.
Remove the four motor bracket screws (5.5 mm) and separate the motor from the
tamper rack guide (Figure 1).
b.
Remove the Booklet Tamper Gear (one E-ring) from the Booklet Tamper Motor.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-417
REP 12.02.10
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
3.
4.
2
Remove the
backstop slide
shaft support
bearing.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
a.
b.
If replacing the Backstop Assembly with a new one, disconnect each of the Booklet
Backstop Solenoids' electrical connectors, at the opposite end of the harness from
solenoid.
1
Remove two 5.5 mm screws.
REP 12.02.11
May 2003
4-418
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
CAUTION
When replacing or installing the stepper motors used in the MFF, make sure you use the spring
tensioning devices to assure for proper belt tension. Too much or too little tension will effect the
performance of the motors.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
3.
1.
4
Remove the
M63 motor.
5
Disconnect the
M63 electrical
connector.
3
Remove the
belt from the
motor pulley.
1
Remove the tension spring.
2
Remove four
5.5 mm
screws.
Figure 1 Booklet Backstop Motor
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-419
REP 12.02.12
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
3.
If removing the Backstop Drive Belt only, loosen the two idler bracket screws (Figure 1),
then skip to step 9.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the Booklet Backstop Assembly from the belt (REP 12.02.11).
7.
b.
Remove the two 5.5 mm screws and remove the idler bracket.
8.
Remove the Booklet Backstop Belt from the idler shaft: Remove one E-ring from one end
of the shaft, slide the shaft over in the bracket, and remove the belt from the shaft.
9.
10. Remove the Booklet Backstop Belt or Drive Belt from the Booklet Backstop Drive Shaft:
Remove the E-ring from the inboard end of the shaft, slide the shaft forward, and remove
the belt from the shaft.
Figure 1 Booklet Backstop
REP 12.02.13
May 2003
4-420
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
tensioner links
connected to the
idler shaft (2
places).
idler bracket
5.5 mm screws (2
places).
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
3.
Remove the Booklet Maker Front Handle (two slotted or 5.5 mm screws).
b.
Remove the Crease Blade Knob (5.5 mm screw, or clip -- do not lose the clip).
c.
d.
4.
Remove the Rear Booklet Stapler cover (one 5.5 mm screw) (Figure 1).
5.
Remove the Stapler Latch Front Bushing (PL 8.44) (one K-clip).
6.
7.
8.
9.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-421
Stapler Module
Closed Sensor (S79)
REP 12.02.15
May 2003
4-422
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-423
REP 12.02.15
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
3.
Remove the Booklet Maker Front Handle (two slotted or 5.5 mm screws).
b.
Remove the Crease Blade Knob (5.5 mm screw, or clip -- do not lose the clip).
c.
d.
4.
Remove the front Booklet Stapler cover (one 5.5 mm screw) (Figure 1).
5.
Remove the Stapler Latch Front Bushing (PL 8.44) (one K-clip).
6.
7.
8.
9.
Replacement
1.
2.
May 2003
4-424
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Stapler Module
Closed Sensor (S79)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-425
REP 12.02.16
REP 12.02.16
May 2003
4-426
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
Replacement
1.
2.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-427
Tri-Folder
Drive Belt
on Clutch
(CL 80)
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
3.
4.
5.
6.
De-tension the Tri-Folder drive belt (T10 screw) and remove the belt from the pulleys.
NOTE: The belt is captured by the Booklet Exit drive assembly.
b.
7.
Disconnect the two solenoids' electrical connectors: Tri-Fold Diverter Gate Solenoid
(L80) and Tri-Fold Curl Gate Solenoid (L81).
b.
Remove the four Tri-Folder mounting screws (T20, two front and two rear), and
remove the Tri-Folder Assembly out the front of the MFF.
Tri-Folder Drive
Belt tensioning
idler screw (T10)
Tri-Folder
Drive Belt on
Tri-Fold
crease roll
shafts
L80
L81
REP 12.04.01
May 2003
4-428
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
S81
2.
3.
De-tension the Tri-Folder drive belt (T10 screw) and remove the belt from the pulleys (Figure 1).
NOTE: The belt is captured by the Booklet Exit drive assembly.
4.
If replacing the belt with a new one, remove the four T20 bracket screws and pull out the
Booklet Exit drive assembly, to free the belt (Figure 1)
Replacement
1.
2.
Install and tension the Tri-Folder Drive Belt according to REP 12.04.02.
3.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-429
Tri-Folder
Drive Belt
on Clutch
(CL 80)
T20 bracket
screws (4).
Tri-Folder Drive
Belt tensioning
idler screw (T10)
Crease Rollers
Tri-Folder
Drive Belt on
Tri-Fold
crease roll
shafts
Replacement
1.
Position the belt, and leave the tensioner screw loose (Figure 1).
2.
Remove both Tri-fold Crease Springs (front and rear) (Figure 1 and Figure 2).
3.
Raise the Tri-fold Idler Roller to prevent it from contacting the Crease Rollers while the
drive belt is being tensioned (Figure 2).
4.
Rotating the Tri-Folder Drive Clutch clockwise, ensure that the tensioning idler slides
freely, then tighten the idler bracket screw (T10) (Figure 1).
5.
Lower the Tri-fold Idler Roller, and reinstall the Tri-fold Crease Springs (front and rear)
(Figure 1 and Figure 2).
REP 12.04.02
May 2003
4-430
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Remove two T20
screws.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Front Door
b.
Rear Cover
c.
Top Cover
3.
4.
Move the Compiler Tray out of the way, and disconnect the Tamper Motor (M44) electrical
connector and ground wire (Figure 1).
5.
Remove the
Tamper Assembly.
Remove two
T20 screws.
Replacement
CAUTION
When replacing or installing the stepper motors used in the MFF, make sure you use the spring
tensioning devises to assure for proper belt tension. Too much or too little tension will effect the
performance of the motors.
1.
2.
2
Lift the tray off
and move it out
of the way.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-431
REP 12.05.01
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Front Door
b.
Rear Cover
c.
d.
3.
4.
5.
Before removing the Compiler Backstop Assembly, take a look at the linkage and position
mechanism as the Main Stapler moves forward and back in the MFF. This will help during
the install or if the linkage comes apart.
6.
Remove the Compiler Backstop upper components (Figure 2 -- front shown; rear removes
the same).
7.
Remove the Compiler Backstop lower components (Figure 3 -- front shown; rear removes
the same).
REP 12.05.02
Remove two
T20 screws.
2
Lift the tray off
and move it out
of the way.
May 2003
4-432
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
3
Slide the shaft to the rear,
lift, and remove the shaft
with the lower backstop
components attached.
2
Disconnect two
links.
1
Remove two
T10 screws.
Figure 2 Removal of upper portion of the Compiler Backstop Assembly (front shown)
1
Observe the position of the
springs and lower backstop components (front and rear).
2
Remove the K-clip.
Replacement
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1.
Install in the reverse order of the removal. Ensure the spring and backstop lower components are located correctly as observed during Removal.
May 2003
4-433
REP 12.05.02
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
3
Remove the Main Tray.
3
Remove two 5.5 mm screws.
Replacement
CAUTION
Ensure that the M49 Motor connector (Figure 2) is flat against the frame. Otherwise, the Main
Tray Offset Panel ribs may contact the connector during offsetting and damage the connector
and harness.
1
Remove the
K-clip.
2
Remove the two T20 screws.
REP 12.05.03
May 2003
4-434
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
a.
Front Door
2.
b.
Rear Cover
c.
3.
4.
b.
c.
3
Remove the three
front T20 screws from
underneath.
NOTE: The tamper drive belt has no tensioner. The tensioner spring is for the tamper belt.
Replacement
1.
2.
4
Lift the cover and disconnect the Pause/
Resume Switch connector.
1
Remove the T20
screw and remove the
Top Tray.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-435
Eject Housing
stop bracket
Eject Housing
position screw
Crash Bar
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control], select Main Tray Elev Motor (Down), and
lower the Main tray all the way.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
2.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
3.
4.
Position the Eject Housing to approximately the middle of the gear racks.
The Eject Housing can be raised by grasping it and lifting. If the Eject Housing needs to
be lowered while power is off, turn the Eject Housing position screw clockwise to lower
the housing (Figure 1).
5.
Remove the Eject Housing stop bracket (one T20 screw) (Figure 1).
6.
Observe the correct positioning of the Crash Bar before removing it, then remove the
Crash Bar (Figure 1): Flex the Crash Bar to disengage the bottom pivot points, then pivot
the Crash Bar to disengage it at the top.
7.
If replacing the Eject Housing with a new one, cut the tie wraps and disconnect the Eject
Housing electrical harness from the housing (Figure 1).
8.
Replacement
1.
Position the Eject Housing, ensuring that the front and rear gears engage the gear racks
simultaneously.
2.
3.
REP 12.07.01
May 2003
4-436
a.
Position the top front pivot pin into the Crash Bar Switch actuator.
b.
c.
Flex the Crash Bar and position the two bottom pivot pins into their holes on the
Eject Housing.
Check that the Eject Housing is installed correctly and moves on the gear racks correctly.
Place two pieces of paper in the paper path under the front and rear of the Eject Housing,
and lower the Eject Housing by turning the position screw clockwise. When the housing
bottoms out, check that both the front and rear of the exit drive nip grip the paper. If not, lift
the housing to the top of the racks, recheck for even gear/rack engagement, and repeat
this step.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: Lowering the Eject Housing and the Main Tray as follows will allow room to remove the
Crash Bar.
1.
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control], select Main Tray Elev Motor (Down), and
lower the Main tray all the way.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
2.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
3.
4.
5.
Pop off the Eject Housing Cover and Remove the Compiler Flapper Home Sensor (S40)
(PL 8.34).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
Remove the Compiler Flappers: Remove the four 5.5 mm screws securing the two Flapper Bridges and remove the bridges and the flappers (PL 8.34)
May 2003
4-437
NOTE: Lowering the Eject Housing and the Main Tray as follows will allow room to remove the
Crash Bar.
1.
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control], select Main Tray Elev Motor (Down), and
lower the Main tray all the way.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
2.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NOTE: Before disengaging the Compiler Upper Eject Shaft from the gear train, observe the
position of the Compiler Flappers. The gears will need to be reengaged in the same position as
before to ensure that the flappers and the Compiler Flapper Home Sensor flag are synchronized.
7.
CAUTION
Certain components in this procedure are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
Dismount each of the four adjoining PWBs (T20 screws and standoffs) and disconnect them from the MFF Control PWB.
b.
Disconnect all connectors from the MFF Control PWB, and dismount and remove the
PWB (T20 screws and standoffs).
Replacement
1.
Install the PWB and the remaining components in the reverse of Removal.
2.
Ensure the MFF software version corresponds with the software version currently on the
machine:
Remove the rear (belt-side) E-ring from the Compiler Upper Eject Shaft, slide the shaft
forward, and remove the belt.
a.
b.
Refer to the Software Version Compatibility Table at the back of the Troubleshooting
section of the latest Software Upgrade Kit Installation Instructions.
c.
If necessary, use the appropriate Software Upgrade Kit to perform a Wizard software
upload, selecting only the Main Controller platform.
Replacement
As observed during Removal, align the Compiler Upper Eject Shaft gears so as to ensure that
the Compiler Flapper Home Sensor flag blocks the sensor when the flappers are fully out of the
paper path.
3.
Upload the MFF NVM from the Machine Resident Diskette (MRD) to the machine
(GP4 -- select Service: [Mark Service], Module: [MFF]).
Perform the following adjustments, and be sure to save the Machine NVM to the
MRD afterward (GP4):
OR
4.
May 2003
4-438
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Switch off the machine power, wait 20 seconds, and switch on the machine power.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Open the MFF Front Door and remove the Left Front Cover (three T20 screws).
3.
Release the docking latches, and disconnect the MFF/IOT interface connector (Figure 1)
4.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-439
REP 12.10.01
1
Disconnect the
MFF/IOT Interface
Connector.
2
Remove the two
T20 screws and
pivot the all the
way latches down.
FRONT
REAR
REP 12.10.01
May 2003
4-440
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove two T20 screws securing the Upper Master Lock bracket (Figure 2).
7.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-441
REP 12.11.01
REP 12.11.01
May 2003
4-442
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-443
1
Disconnect the
Master Lock Coupling: Remove the
two small K-clips
and remove the
two pins.
3
Remove the two
T20 screws and
remove the Lower
Master Lock.
2
Remove the three
T20 screws (one
on the side frame
not shown).
FRONT
REAR
REP 12.11.02
May 2003
4-444
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
2
Remove the two flathead screws
and remove the outer guide.
1
Remove the two Erings and remove
the link shaft.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-445
REP 12.11.03
c.
Rear Cover
3.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly (REP 12.13.01) for easier access to the
Main Stapler Carriage Assembly.
4.
The flag for the Stapler Position Sensor (S43) is located on the underside of the stapler carriage. Use caution not to damage sensor flag during the Main Stapler removal.
Remove the Offset Motor cover (Figure 1) to access the Main Stapler electrical harness.
The harness is attached to the frame with tie wraps or twist ties. If replacing the carriage
with a new one, free the harness by cutting tie wraps as required.
5.
WARNING
6.
CAUTION
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
There is a bronze bearing that is captured by the Main Stapler Carriage Assembly and the
smaller support shaft runs through. As the shaft is pulled out the bearing will fall out.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
7.
2.
8.
Slide the carriage support shafts to the rear to disengage them at the front, then lift and
remove Main Stapler Carriage Assembly out the front of the MFF.
9.
If replacing the Main Stapler Carriage Assembly with a new one, remove the Main Stapler
from the carriage (REP 12.12.03).
a.
Front Door
b.
REAR VIEW
Offset Motor
(M50)
2
Remove two
T20 screws
(front screw
shown).
1
Remove two
7mm nuts.
REP 12.12.01
May 2003
4-446
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE:
The tensioning
mechanism
captures 5 teeth
of the belt.
Remove two
K-clips.
2
Disconnect the tensioning
mechanism from the MFF.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Figure 3 Removal of Main Stapler shafts front K-clips and front belt support
May 2003
4-447
REP 12.12.01
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
2.
3.
3.
Replacement
4.
From the rear of the MFF, disconnect the stapler harness from the Stapler Cover.
1.
5.
2.
6.
7.
8.
May 2003
4-448
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Remove the three 7 mm
screws.
Replacement
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1.
2.
May 2003
4-449
REP 12.12.03
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the four Buffer/Compiler Module rail screws: first the two T20 flathead screws
near the rear (one on each rail), and then the two 5.5 mm cross-head screws near the
front (one on each rail) (Figure 1).
CAUTION
Take extreme care not to damage any of the many connectors, motors, and solenoids on the
Buffer/Compiler Module when lifting, removing, and setting it down.
6.
Standing on the right side of the Buffer/Compiler Module with the module tilted back,
grasp the front handle, slide the module forward until it stops, grasp the rear handle (Figure 2) and lift it off of the slides.
7.
8.
Retract the drawer slides into the machine, to avoid an injury hazard.
REP 12.13.01
May 2003
4-450
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
3.
2
Remove
the drive
belt.
1
De-tension the drive
belt.
Buffer/Compiler Module
rear handle
Nip 4 shaft
5
Remove the K-clip
and the bearing
(hidden) and
remove the Nip 3
shaft.
3
Remove
the K-clip
and the pulley.
4
Remove the
bearing
retainer.
May 2003
4-451
REP 12.13.04 Nip 6/7 Outer Guide Assembly, Nip 6/7 Inner
Guide
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
WARNING
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
1.
3.
2.
If removing the inner guide, remove the Nip 6/7 drive belt (Figure 1).
3.
4.
Remove the Nip 6/7 Outer Guide and/or the Nip 6/7 Inner Guide (Figure 3).
3
Remove the K-clip and the pulley.
4
Remove the bearing retainer (hidden).
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
If removing the Nip 6/7 Outer Guide only, pop only the outer guide off of the pivot
pins.
If removing the Nip 6/7 Inner Guide, pop both guides off of the pivot pins.
5.
If replacing the Nip 6/7 Outer Guide with a new one, remove the pulleys from the Nip 6
and 7 shafts (one E-ring each).
6.
If replacing the Nip 6/7 Inner Guide with a new one, remove the metal Nip 7 paper guide
(two T20 screws and one ground wire).
2
Move the rear
handle out of the
way (two T20
screws).
1
Loosen the idler
and remove the
drive belt.
May 2003
4-452
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-453
REP 12.13.04
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
3.
Remove the
bearing
retainer.
Replacement
When installing the Entrance Sensor (S20) Bracket (Figure 2), before tightening the screws,
move the bracket toward the rear of the Buffer/Compiler Module until the sensor flag clears the
Nip 6/7 Inner Guide. After tightening the screws, open and close the Nip6/7 Outer Guide and
ensure that the flag clears teh cutout in the Nip 6/7 Inner Guide.
3
Remove the K-clip
and the bearing
(hidden).
4
Open the area
5b4 baffle and
remove the Nip 8
shaft.
May 2003
4-454
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Disconnect the
solenoid arm.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
3.
4.
3
Remove two
5.5mm screws (hidden) and remove
the Nip 8 Release
Solenoid.
1
Disconnect the L31
electrical connector.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-455
REP 12.13.06
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
3.
3.
Disconnect the electrical connections and remove the fan/shroud assembly (Figure 1).
4.
2
Remove the Nip 9
Drive Belt.
2
Remove one T20
screw.
3
Remove the K-clip
and remove the Nip
9 Clutch.
1
Disconnect the
motor and fan electrical connectors.
1
Loosen this T20
screw to loosen the
Nip 9 Drive Belt.
3
Slide the shroud
forward and lower it
to remove the fan/
shroud assembly.
May 2003
4-456
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Loosen the idler and
remove the drive belt.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
b.
Remove the two T20 screws securing the motor bracket to the MFF rear frame and
remove the motor.
Replacement
CAUTION
When replacing or installing the stepper motors used in the MFF, make sure you use the spring
tensioning devises to assure for proper belt tension. Too much or too little tension will effect the
performance of the motors.
1.
3
Remove two 7mm
screws and remove
the motor.
Replacement
CAUTION
When replacing or installing the stepper motors used in the MFF, make sure you use the spring
tensioning devises to assure for proper belt tension. Too much or too little tension will effect the
performance of the motors.
1.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-457
2
Move the connector
bracket out of the way. The
blue connector may need
to be removed from the
bracket.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
3.
Remove Buffer/Compiler drawer connector bracket, to allow access to the M31 motor
(Figure 1).
4.
b.
Remove the three T20 screws securing the motor bracket to the Buffer/Compiler
Module, and remove the motor part way.
c.
1
Remove the four
T20 screws
Replacement
CAUTION
When replacing or installing the stepper motors used in the MFF, make sure you use the spring
tensioning devises to assure for proper belt tension. Too much or too little tension will effect the
performance of the motors.
NOTE: When installing the Drawer Electrical Connector plate, make sure the holes in the plate
are properly located on the standoff shaft, before tightening the screws.
1.
REP 12.13.10
May 2003
4-458
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
3.
4.
Don not lose the two support bearings during the motor removal.
CAUTION
a.
3.
b.
c.
Replacement
CAUTION
When replacing or installing the stepper motors used in the MFF, make sure you use the spring
tensioning devises to assure for proper belt tension. Too much or too little tension will effect the
performance of the motors.
1.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-459
6
Remove the tension spring (hidden), then remove
the motor assembly.
5
Slide the motor
assembly part way
off of the shaft.
1
Disconnect the M45
electrical connector.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
3.
Push down on the 4-Bar and remove the front two screws securing the Exit Drive Assembly (Figure 1).
4.
5.
Remove the rear three screws securing the Exit Drive Assembly (Figure 2).
CAUTION
Carefully note the correct harness routing before cutting any tie-wraps.
6.
If removing the Exit Drive Assembly completely (e.g. to replace the assembly with a new
one):
a.
b.
Cut the four tie wraps bundling the harnesses (Figure 2).
c.
Disconnect the three connectors for the Exit Drive Assembly (Figure 2).
d.
Note the orientation of the ground wires, then remove the screw securing the three
ground wires (Figure 2).
7.
Lower the front of the Exit Drive Assembly, carefully noting how the assembly fits on the 4Bar, then disengage it at the rear and remove it.
3
Disconnect the
electrical connector.
Replacement
CAUTION
When replacing or installing the stepper motors used in the MFF, make sure you use the spring
tensioning devises to assure for proper belt tension. Too much or too little tension will effect the
performance of the motors.
NOTE: Slide the motor assembly and white gear on at the same time. Remember to hook the
spring back on and to install the two bearings while installing the motor assembly.
1.
May 2003
4-460
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
three tie-wraps
T20 screw
securing the
three ground
wires
four tie-wraps
sensor
connector
ground faston
motor connector
solenoid
connector
Replacement
CAUTION
When replacing or installing the stepper motors used in the MFF, make sure you use the spring
tensioning devices to assure for proper belt tension. Too much or too little tension will effect the
performance of the motors.
1.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-461
REP 12.13.13
2 connectors
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
3.
Carefully note the correct harness routing before cutting any tie-wraps.
4.
If removing the 4-Bar Assembly completely (e.g. to replace the assembly with a new one):
a.
Cut the five tie wraps bundling the harnesses (Figure 1).
b.
Disconnect the two connectors for the 4-Bar Assembly (Figure 1).
5.
6.
7.
Remove the 4-Bar Assembly from the Rear Link (PL 8.28): Remove the T20 screw at the
outer pivot, and remove the 4-Bar Assembly from the Rear Link.
five tie-wraps
REP 12.13.14
May 2003
4-462
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
3.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Front Handle (two 5.5 mm screws) and remove the
Buffer/Compiler Module Front Cover (four 5.5mm screws).
4.
5.
b.
Slide the shaft rearward, flexing the baffle to allow the rollers to clear the baffle cutouts, and remove the front end of the shaft from the Buffer/Compiler Module frame,
then slide the shaft forward and remove the rear end of the shaft.
2
Remove the two
T20 screws.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-463
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
3.
4.
5.
b.
Remove the two T10 flathead screws securing the solenoid to the bracket.
REP 12.13.16
May 2003
4-464
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
WARNING
L30 (hidden)
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
3.
4.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-465
1
Remove the E-ring
and disconnect the
solenoid link arm.
L40
2
Remove the two 5.5 mm
screws and remove the
solenoid.
REP 12.13.17
May 2003
4-466
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
3.
Remove the 4-Bar Exit Drive Assembly part-way. Leave the Exit Drive harnesses attached
to the Buffer/Compiler Module, and do not not cut any tie-wraps (REP 12.13.13).
4.
Remove either the front two or front four Curl Guard Fingers and Knuckles, as
required.
b.
Remove either one or two Belt Guards, as required (one screw each).
c.
Remove either one or two Compile Belts, as required, sliding the belt(s) off of the
front of the Exit Drive Assembly.
T20
screws
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-467
REP 12.13.18
REP 12.13.19
May 2003
4-468
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
3.
4.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2
Remove Compiler Belt
Covers (2).
3
Remove the middle
Curl Guard Bearing.
1
Remove Curl Guard
Knuckles and Fingers (6)
by pulling them off the
shaft.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-469
REP 12.13.20
5.
Remove the motor/solenoid assembly, pulley, and bearing retainer (Figure 2).
1
2
Remove T20
screws (2).
Remove motor/solenoid
assembly and belt.
4
Remove the bearing
retainer.
3
Remove e-ring and pulley.
REP 12.13.20
May 2003
4-470
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
6.
1
Remove the T20
screw, then remove
the bearing retainer,
the antistatic brush,
and the ground wire.
2
Remove the bushing and the bearing.
4
Move the shaft towards
the rear to disengage it,
then remove the Exit
Drive Shaft.
3
Remove Compile Belts.
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ensure that the Compile Belts are positioned over the idlers on the small shaft.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-471
REP 12.13.20
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Remove the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.13.01).
3.
Replacement
CAUTION
Dress the harness leading to S46 properly back through the baffle in order to avoid pinched
wires. Ensure that the wires are not pinched when putting the Buffer/Compiler Module Assembly back together.
REP 12.13.21
May 2003
4-472
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
Scanner Top Frame with Document Glass Frame attached (REP 14-5)
d.
Remove the retainer clips (5) on the Video Cable and the Cable Cap (Figure 1).
b.
Remove the screw securing the connector cover on the Image Module, and disconnect the connector.
c.
Remove the Top Rear Cover and the lower left rear cover (covering the card cage) of
the IOT.
d.
Remove the cable cover at the top of the Main Control PWB.
e.
f.
Guide the Video Cable through the IOT/IIT interface and remove the cable from the
machine.
g.
Loosen the screws (4) securing the clamps to the scan carriage cables (Figure 2).
h.
i.
With TAG 018: If replacing the Image Module Kit with a new one, be sure to remove the ferrite
from the old Scanner Video Cable, on top of the Card Cage, and reinstall the ferrite onto the
new Scanner VIdeo Cable in the same location. This ferrite is required for reducing electromagnetic emissions (EME), to meet regulatory requirements.
With TAG 018: If replacing the Image Module Kit with a new one, remove the ferrite from the
old Scanner Video Cable, on top of the Card Cage, and reinstall the ferrite onto the new Scanner VIdeo Cable in the same location.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-473
REP 14-1
Remove the
Cable Cap
Remove the
retainer clips (5).
REP 14-1
May 2003
4-474
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CAUTION
Make certain, when connecting the Video Cable connector at the Image Module, that it is not
caught under the lip of the module casting. If it is, it then flexes the PWB inside the module,
and indirectly flexes the Full Width Array underneath. This results in image distortion similar to
a lens streak (possibly white lines).
6.
7.
Move the Image Module to the left wall of the Scanner cavity and make sure that the
rounded bend in the cable just contacts the left wall. If the bend does not contact the wall,
or if there is excessive contact causing a bend in the cable between the Image Module
and the 180 degree light crease, readjust the 180 degree light crease so that the proper
conditions (bend below connector just contacting the left wall and no bends in the cable
between the Image Module and the 180 degree light crease) are met.
8.
Move the Image Module to the center position and check the 90 degree fold. If necessary,
readjust the position of the fold so that the cable run to the rear of the machine is centered
in the cutout.
9.
Once the conditions established in the above two steps are both met, flatten the 180 and
90 degree folds in their final position and install the five cable retainer clips.
b.
c.
Loosen the
front T20
screws (2).
14. Reinstall the Cable Cover at the Main Control PWB, making sure that the cable is under
the wire mesh seal.
15. Route the Video Cable through the IOT following the route of the Video Cable that was
removed.
Figure 2 Screws
Replacement
1.
a.
Using the old video cable as a guide for the location of folds and bends, lay the new cable
in place with the folds and bends lightly creased in the approximate location of the old
cable.
2.
Rotate the Scan Carriage capstan so that the Drive Cable tension springs are approximately 6 inches from the left end of the Scanner.
3.
Position the new Image Module so that the Drive Cable Tension springs are centered
between the Drive Cable clamps (Figure 3).
4.
Position the cables under the cable clamps (4) making sure that the cable at the left rear
clamp is positioned between the posts (Figure 3).
5.
Plug the Video Cable into the Image Module. Install the connector cover and secure with
the screw.
17. If replacing the Image Module with a new one, enter [IIT tab , Scanner Calibration] and
invoke a [Full] calibration.
18. If replacing the Image Module with a new one, perform the following:
a.
b.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
NOTE: Ensure that the connector cover is installed in the correct orientation, otherwise it
could be installed upside-down.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-475
REP 14-1
cable
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
post
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
c.
Scanner Top Frame with Document Glass Frame attached (REP 14-5)
b.
c.
Lift the tabs on both ends of the connector to the Lamp Power Supply, and disconnect the connector.
Remove the Illumination Lamp Module from the Image Module (Figure 1).
Figure 3 Installation
May 2003
4-476
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
c.
7.
1
Remove the T20
screws (2).
If replacing the Illumination Lamp Module with a new one, perform the following:
a.
b.
c.
Make several test copies. If significant background appears on the copies, burn in
the lamp by switching it on for 15 minutes in [Copier Sys tab , Component Control].
NOTE: Until the new lamp is burned-in, some background may appear on copies
for a short period after the new lamp is installed. A small amount of background will
probably disappear on its own, by the time the Scanner completes it first full calibration.
2
Remove the Illumination Lamp
Module from the
Image Module.
d.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
Figure 1 Removal
Replacement
CAUTION
Do not fold or crease the ribbon cable of the Illumination Lamp Module. Although the old cable
may be creased, a new cable should not be.
1.
Using the screws (2) removed, install the Illumination Lamp Module. Make sure the Illumination Lamp Module is biased to the left against the screws before tightening them.
2.
Reconnect the Illumination Lamp Module cable to the Lamp Power Supply, making sure
that the cable is oriented properly.
3.
4.
5.
Check for contamination on the underside of the document glass including the calibration
strip area. Clean the underside of the document glass if necessary, following Scanner
Cleaning Procedure (REP 14-3).
6.
Scanner Top Frame with Document Glass Frame attached (REP 14-5)
b.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-477
REP 14-2
reflector
lens
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
lamp aperture
1.
2.
AGC tab
3.
Removal
WARNING
Cleaning Materials
Clean
WARNING
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
a.
Remove the T20 screws (2) securing the rear of the Document Glass Frame (Figure
1).
b.
Lift the Document Glass Frame at the rear corners, using the finger notches (2) provided.
c.
Lift the Document Glass Frame, disengaging the front tabs (2) from the notches, and
remove the Document Glass Frame.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
b.
c.
Scanner Top Frame with Document Glass Frame attached (REP 14-5)
4.
Inspect the dust filter. If it is dirty, replace the NOHAD Filter Kit PL 9.1 Item 1.
5.
Moisten a clean towel with Platen Glass, Lens and Mirror Cleaner.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Wipe the tops of the white Document Glass Glide Buttons (3).
11. Turn the Document Glass Frame upside down.
12. With a clean area of towel moistened with Platen Glass, Lens and Mirror Cleaner, wipe
the underside (now showing) of the CVT document glass and the manual document
glass. Be sure to clean the glass area over the calibration strip.
13. Reinstall the following components:
a.
Scanner Top Frame with Document Glass Frame attached (REP 14-5)
b.
c.
14. With a clean area of towel moistened with Platen Glass, Lens and Mirror Cleaner, wipe
the top side of the CVT document glass and the manual document glass.
15. Lower the Document Feeder.
Repairs and Adjustments
May 2003
4-478
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CAUTION
If the Scanner Main Cover is in place when installing the Document Glass Frame, be careful to
hook the tabs under the Scanner Top Frame, not under just the cover. Otherwise, the Document Glass Frame will be too high at that corner, resulting in the scan carriage squeaking
against the Scanner Top Frame.
4.
Start the screws by hand. If the holes do not align easily, do not attempt to start the
screws on an angle. Instead you can bias the Scanner Main Cover and Document Glass
Frame to align the holes as follows: Insert the tip of a flat blade screwdriver in the slot
between the Scanner Main Cover and Document Glass Frame at either the front or the
rear of the Document Glass Frame as appropriate, and gently turn the screwdriver until
the holes align, then carefully start the screws by hand.
5.
Once both screws are started threading by hand, then tighten them securely with a T20
Torx driver.
NOTE: With some new Document Glass Frames, you may hear a "crunch" or apparent
cracking sound when tightening the screws. This is not cause for alarm, but if this occurs
perform the following: Remove the Document Glass Frame as before and carefully
remove any small pieces of glass which may have chipped off of the corners (outside of
the scanning area), then reinstall the Document Glass Frame as before.
6.
If replacing the Document Glass Frame with a new one, perform the IIT Registration and
Magnification setup (ADJ 14-2).
May 2003
4-479
Figure 1 Screws
Replacement
CAUTION
Perform the installation as follows to ensure proper alignment of the Document Glass and to
avoid damage.
1.
Clean the Document Glass as necessary, according to the Scanner Cleaning Procedure
(REP 14-3).
2.
Hold the Document Glass Frame by the edges to keep the glass clean.
3.
Position the Document Glass Frame on the scanner carefully, starting with the front locating tabs and then lowering the rear into position.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
REP 14-4
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
4.
4.
5.
Remove the Scanner Top Frame with Document Glass Frame attached
If a metal plate is present under the UI, covering the two 1/4-turn fasteners for the Scanner Main Cover, remove the metal plate (one T20 screw).
WARNING
Take care not to cut yourself on the edges of the Scanner Top Frame. These edges
can be sharp -- especially the inside edges.
a.
b.
Lift the Scanner Top Frame off of the scanner and remove it.
Replacement
1.
Orient the Scanner Top Frame with the caution labels facing forward and the locating
holes (2) at the rear, and position the holes over the locating pins on the scanner.
2.
Ensure that the white Document Glass Glide Buttons (3) on the scan carriage are not
caught under the Scanner Top Frame.
3.
4.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
Remove the snap-on ferrite from the user interface harness and feed the harness
down through the hole in the Scanner Main Cover.
b.
Release the two 1/4-turn slotted fasteners, lift the Scanner Main Cover at the front,
and slide it forward to release it at the rear.
Replacement
CAUTION
Be sure to pull the UI harness all the way through the hole in the Scanner Main Cover before
fastening the Scanner Main Cover 1/4-turn fasteners. Otherwise, the wires may be pinched
under the cover, causing machine malfunctions.
Remember to reinstall the ferrite on the user interface harness before installing the User Interface Assembly.
May 2003
4-480
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
j.
k.
Switch OFF the machine power, wait approximately 20 seconds, and switch ON the
machine power.
l.
1.
m.
n.
o.
Switch OFF the machine power, wait approximately 20 seconds, and switch ON the
machine power.
2.
Copy a blank sheet of paper from the Document Glass at 100% magnification with Auto
Paper not selected, and ensure that no black borders appear on the copy (perform ADJ
14-2 as required).
Raise the Document Feeder.
3.
If replacing an existing pad, peel off the old pad and remove any residual foam by hand.
4.
If installing the pad as part of a Document Glass Cover replacement, first install the Document Glass Cover and raise the cover.
5.
Peel the two protective strips off of the adhesive on the back of the new pad provided in
this kit. These are the two long white strips along the long edges of the pad only.
CAUTION
Take care not to adhere the pad to the cover prematurely or allow the adhesive to contact the
glass or other surfaces. The adhesive is exposed during the next few steps while the pad is
being positioned.
6.
Place the new pad on the Document Glass, with the adhesive side up and the cutout area
of the foam toward the right (nearest the Document Feeder.
7.
Ensure that the pad is registered on the glass, offset approximately 1mm from the left and
rear registration edges.
NOTE: Do not lower the cover yet.
8.
9.
Make a copy of the pad, at 100% magnification with Auto Paper not selected.
b.
Check the copy for any black borders. If any black borders appear on the copy, move
the pad slightly to just eliminate any black borders (not all the way against the registration edges).
c.
Recheck/readjust as necessary.
Without moving the pad, carefully lower the Document Glass Cover onto the pad without
bending the cover, then press down evenly to adhere the pad to the cover.
10. If replacing a white pad with a gray pad or vice versa, program the machine to recognize
the change, as follows:
NOTE: If switching to a grey pad, this will allow automatic document size sensing with
theDocument Glass Cover down. If switching to a white pad, this will cause the machine
to prompt the customer to raise the Document Glass Cover as required for automatic document size sensing.
a.
b.
Select [More].
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-481
REP 14-7
WARNING
It is extremely important to ensure that all power is removed from the machine before
servicing the Illumination Lamp Power Supply. Otherwise, severe machine damage and
possible personal injury could occur due to electrical arcing.
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Raise the Document Feeder, leaving the Document Glass Cover down.
2.
3.
3.
a.
a.
b.
b.
c.
c.
Scanner Top Frame with Document Glass Frame attached (REP 14-5)
d.
4.
4.
5.
Remove the lamp ribbon cable retainer clip next to the Lamp Power Supply.
5.
6.
Lift the tabs on both ends of the lamp connector to the Lamp Power Supply, and disconnect the connector.
7.
8.
Lift the right side of the power supply PWB, and slide the PWB to the right.
b.
3
Remove the T20 screws (3)
and remove the motor.
1
Disconnect the
connector.
2
Lift the end of
the spring off of
the post.
Figure 1 Removal
May 2003
4-482
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
CAUTION
When installing the motor, do not tension the belt by grasping the motor cylinder -- grasp the
motor frame (bracket) instead. The motor shaft can bend, resulting a scanner malfunction.
1.
Position the Scan Carriage Motor and the ground clip in the Scanner (Figure 2).
2.
Tension the belt and connect the motor connector (Figure 3).
3.
If replacing the Scan Carriage Motor with a new one, perform the IIT Registration and
Magnification Setup (ADJ 14-2).
2
Position the
ground clip on
the motor as
shown.
3
Install the T20
screws (3), but
leave them 1/4
turn loose.
1
Position the
motor with the
shaft pulley
inside the belt
4
Hook the spring onto the post.
Figure 2 Installation
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-483
REP 14-9
2
Tighten the T20
screws (3).
3
Connect the connector.
1
Rotate the Capstan 3-4 turns to
allow the belt to "find home."
REP 14-9
May 2003
4-484
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
plastic screws (4
places)
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
If the machine is equipped with the Removable Disk Drive Option (external cabinet
holding the disk drives in removable carriers):
a.
b.
ii.
iii.
Lift the Disk Drive out of the carrier, and disconnect the power and data harnesses from the drive. Also remove any adapter used to connect the data cable
-- it may need to be reused.
iv.
Remove the four standoffs from the bottom of the drive -- they must be reused.
v.
3.
4.
240/255/265:
1.
Remove the front (non-Main-Control-PWB side) Card Cage cover (loosen or remove two
T20 screws on top).
2.
Save and reuse the 4 plastic screws and 4 plastic spacers for mounting the ESS Disk.
3.
Dismount the ESS Disk (4 plastic screws), and save the plastic mounting hardware (Figure 1).
4.
Disconnect the power and data cables from the ESS Disk (Figure 2).
460/470:
1.
2.
b.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-485
REP 16-1
ESS Disk
Data Cable
ESS Disk
Power Cable
Figure 2 Connectors
REP 16-1
May 2003
4-486
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Disconnect the video cable from the card cage, and free
the video cable from its restraints on the fan housing.
1
Remove the video connector
cover (two T20 hex-head screws).
4
Disconnect the fan
connector.
3
Remove the T20 roundhead screw.
6
5
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-487
REP 16-1
1
Disconnect the
power and data
cables from the ESS
Disk Drive (outer
drive).
2
Press and hold the
top clip upward and
the bottom clip
downward, and slide
the Disk Drive out.
Replacement
REP 16-1
1.
If the machine is equipped with the Removable Disk Drive Option (external cabinet
holding the disk drives in removable carriers): Replace the disk drive in the reverse of
removal. This completes the replacement.
2.
460/470: If replacing the drive with a new one, remove the upper and lower mounting
plates from the old drive (two Phillips-head screws each), and install them onto the new
drive.
May 2003
4-488
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CAUTION
(240/255/265): Take care not to overtorque or cross-thread the plastic mounting screws -- they
can break if not used carefully.
3.
Install the ESS Disk Drive in the reverse order of removal (240/255/265: Reuse the plastic
mounting hardware).
4.
If replacing the ESS Disk Drive with a new one, you must load the level of ESS Software
to match the software level currently in the machine, using the Alternate Boot method in
the Software Upgrade Kit instructions.
5.
If replacing the ESS Disk Drive with a new one, restore the customers Network Connectivity settings, using the Machine Administrator Tools pathway on the UI. Obtain the correct settings from a previous Configuration Report or from the System Administrator, and
consult the System Administrator documentation as required to reenter the settings correctly. Lastly, print a final Configuration Report (in Tools: [System Settings]/[Configuration
Report]/[Print Configuration Report now]) and leave this sheet with the machine or with
the System Administrator.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-489
REP 16-1
screws (3)
CAUTION
Changing the ESS PWB results in a new MAC address for the built-in Ethernet interface.
Inform the SA that the new MAC address can be obtained from the Configuration Report, if
required.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
CAUTION
Certain components in this procedure are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
240/255/265:
1.
Remove the front (non-Main-Control-PWB side) Card Cage cover (loosen or remove two
T20 screws on top).
2.
3.
Remove the following optional items, if present: Image Processing Accelerator (IPA)
PWB, Token Ring PWB, or 100 Mb Ethernet PWB (REP 16-4 for any or all of these).
4.
5.
If replacing the ESS PWB with a new one, remove any of the following items, if present:
a.
b.
b.
6.
screw
460/470
1.
2.
b.
b.
3.
If replacing the ESS PWB with a new one, remove the ESS SDRAM DIMM(s) from the
ESS PWB (REP 16-7).
4.
REP 16-2
May 2003
4-490
screws (3)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Release these
two white
standoffs and
remove the
ESS PWB.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-491
REP 16-2
2
Disconnect the video cable from the card cage, and free
the video cable from its restraints on the fan housing.
1
Remove the video connector
cover (two T20 hex-head screws).
4
Disconnect the fan
connector.
6
5
REP 16-2
May 2003
4-492
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-493
REP 16-2
2
Remove the
T10 hex-head
screws (3).
1
Remove the
filler bracket
(if present)
(one T20
hex-head
screw).
Riser PWB
3
Remove the T10
hex-head screw.
4
Lift the ESS PWB,
removing its bottom
edge connector from the
Riser PWB, and remove
the ESS PWB
Replacement
3.
CAUTION
b.
Take care to align the ESS PWB as instructed below, before attempting to seat the back connectors to the Main Control PWB.
c.
240/255/265
1.
a.
b.
2.
Position the ESS PWB part-way onto the two white standoffs (do not seat the PWB
all the way onto the standoffs yet).
Seat the ESS PWB back connectors to the Main Control PWB carefully (Figure 7).
REP 16-2
4.
May 2003
4-494
460/470
Reinstall all components in the reverse of Removal.
standoff
screws (4)
standoff
screws (3)
Figure 7 Installation (continued) -- 240/255/265
May 2003
4-495
REP 16-2
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
CAUTION
Certain components in this procedure are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the front (non-Main-Control-PWB side) Card Cage cover (loosen or remove two
T20 screws on top).
5.
6.
Remove the ESS DRAM SIMM's, starting with the lowest SIMM:
NOTE: If increasing ESS RAM and not replacing a defective ESS DRAM SIMM, skip this
step, and leave the existing SIMMs in place.
a.
b.
c.
REP 16-3
May 2003
4-496
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Figure 1 Removal
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-497
REP 16-3
REP 16-3
May 2003
4-498
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
1.
Install the ESS DRAM SIMM's, starting with the topmost SIMM:
NOTE: If increasing ESS RAM, install the additional SIMMs (either two 16MB or two
32MB SIMMs) in the bottom two slots.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
If increasing ESS RAM: When the machine power is switched on, the new configuration
will be detected. To check that the new configuration has been detected, print out a new
configuration report. In the Device Profile section of the report, the ESS RAM Size should
now reflect the total amount of ESS RAM (64MB or 96 MB).
NOTE
If increasing ESS RAM,
install the additional
SIMMs in the bottom 2
slots.
Figure 3 Installation
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-499
REP 16-3
REP 16-3
May 2003
4-500
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Disconnect the Token Ring network cable (if present) from the IOT.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the front (non-Main-Control-PWB side) Card Cage cover (loosen or remove two
T20 screws on top).
6.
7.
Remove the Token Ring PWB (Figure 1) or IPA PWB (Figure 2) or 100 Mb Ethernet PWB
(Figure 3).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-501
REP 16-4
1
Remove the screws (2).
3
Remove the
Token Ring PWB
from the Card
Cage
2
Pull out on the left
end of the Token
Ring to disconnect it
from the PCI Bus
Adapter PWB.
REP 16-4
May 2003
4-502
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Remove the screws (2).
3
Remove the IPA
PWB from the
Card Cage
2
Pull out on the left
end of the IPA PWB
to disconnect it from
the PCI Bus Adapter
PWB.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-503
REP 16-4
1
Remove the
screws (2).
3
Remove the 100 Mb
Ethernet PWB from
the Card Cage.
2
Pull out on the left
end of the 100 Mb
Ethernet PWB to
disconnect it from
the PCI Bus
Adapter PWB.
REP 16-4
May 2003
4-504
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
CAUTION
Ensure that the rubber gasket around the end of the Token Ring or IPA PWB or 100 Mb Ethernet PWB stays in position when inserting the PWB into the cutout.
1.
Install the Token Ring PWB, connecting J1 and J2 on the Token Ring PWB with J496A
and 496B on the PCI Bus Adapter PWB (Figure 4), or install the IPA PWB, connecting J1
and J2 on the IPA PWB with J495A and 495B on the PCI Bus Adapter PWB (Figure 5), or
install the 100 Mb Ethernet PWB, connecting J1 and J2 on the 100 Mb Ethernet PWB with
J497A and 497B on the PCI Bus Adapter PWB Figure 6.
NOTE: In order for the PWB to fit onto the connectors, the PWB must be worked far
enough into the knockout hole to align with the connectors properly.
2.
3.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-505
REP 16-4
1
Insert the
right end of
the PWB
into the
middle cutout.
2
Align the hole
with the
locating pin.
3
Press on the
left side the
Token Ring
PWB to seat
the connectors.
REP 16-4
May 2003
4-506
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Insert the
right end of
the PWB
into the
lower cutout.
2
Align the hole
with the
locating pin.
3
Press on the
left side the
Token Ring
PWB to seat
the connectors.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-507
REP 16-4
1
Insert the
right end of
the PWB
into the
upper cutout.
2
Align the hole
with the
locating pin.
3
Press on the
left side the 100
Mb Ethernet
PWB to seat
the connectors.
REP 16-4
May 2003
4-508
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the front (non-Main-Control-PWB side) Card Cage cover (loosen or remove two
T20 screws on top).
5.
Swing out the Disk Support Bracket (one 1/4-turn T20 fastener).
6.
Remove the Token Ring PWB and/or Image Processing Accelerator (IPA) PWB (REP 164).
7.
Remove the PCI Bus Adapter PWB, while noting the correct orientation (Figure 1).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-509
REP 16-5
1
Remove the #1
phillips-head
screws (8).
2
Remove the
adapter PWB.
Figure 1 Removal
REP 16-5
May 2003
4-510
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
1.
Orient the adapter PWB correctly, as observed when removing the PWB.
2.
Carefully align the two adapter PWB connectors with the corresponding connectors on
the ESS PWB, and seat the connectors securely.
3.
4.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
CAUTION
Certain components in this procedure are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
Disconnect the server interface cable from the Bykal Remote PWB at the IOT Card Cage.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the front (non-Main-Control-PWB side) Card Cage cover (loosen or remove two
T20 screws on top).
6.
7.
Remove the connector nuts from the Bykal Remote PWB connector (P12) on the outside
of the Card Cage (Figure 1).
8.
Remove the Bykal Remote PWB, while noting the correct orientation (Figure 2):
May 2003
4-511
a.
b.
Remove the T20 screws (4) securing the Bykal Remote PWB.
c.
Carefully pull the PWB outward, disconnecting it from the Main Control PWB, then
move it to the left to remove it from the Card Cage cutout.
T20
screws
(4)
connector nuts
connector
nuts
removed
P3/J10
Replacement
1.
Note the location of the two connectors on the back of the Bykal Remote PWB and the
two mating connectors on the back of the Main Control PWB (Figure 3).
CAUTION
Do not attempt to seat the Bykal Remote PWB connection to the Main Control PWB until
instructed to do so, after ensuring correct alignment. Otherwise, dame to both PWBs can
result.
2.
REP 16-6
Insert the edge connector into the Card Cage cutout (P12, as marked on the outside
of the Card Cage), then pivot the PWB in, but do not attempt to seat the connectors
to the Main Control PWB yet.
b.
Align the screws holes, and reinstall the T20 screws (4), loosely.
c.
Now seat the Bykal Remote PWB connection securely to the Main Control PWB.
d.
Tighten the screws, and double-check that the PWBs connectors are seated
securely together.
e.
3.
Reinstall the connector nuts (2) onto the Bykal Remote PWB connector (P12) on the outside of the Card Cage.
4.
May 2003
4-512
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
back of Bykal
Remote PWB
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
CAUTION
Certain components in this procedure are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
Figure 3 Installation
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-513
2
Disconnect the video cable from the card cage, and free
the video cable from its restraints on the fan housing.
1
Remove the video connector
cover (two T20 hex-head screws).
4
Disconnect the fan
connector.
6
5
REP 16-7
May 2003
4-514
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Replacement
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1.
2.
May 2003
4-515
REP 16-7
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
May 2003
4-516
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Disconnect the video cable from the card cage, and free
the video cable from its restraints on the fan housing.
1
Remove the video connector
cover (two T20 hex-head screws).
4
Disconnect the fan
connector.
3
Remove the T20 roundhead screw.
6
5
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-517
REP 16-8
1
Remove the T20
screw.
Riser PWB
2
Lift the IPA PWB, removing its
bottom edge connector from
the Riser PWB, and remove
the IPA PWB.
REP 16-8
May 2003
4-518
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2.
3.
4.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
CAUTION
a.
b.
5.
6.
Certain components in this procedure are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2
Disconnect the video cable from the card cage, and free
the video cable from its restraints on the fan housing.
1
Remove the video connector
cover (two T20 hex-head screws).
4
Disconnect the fan
connector.
3
Remove the T20 roundhead screw.
6
5
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-519
REP 16-9
1
Remove the T20
screw.
2
Lift the Token Ring PWB,
removing its bottom edge connector from the Riser PWB,
and remove the Token RIng
PWB.
Figure 2 Remove the Card Cage Cover
REP 16-9
Riser PWB
May 2003
4-520
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
plastic screws (4
places)
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
If the machine is equipped with the Removable Disk Drive Option (external cabinet
holding the disk drives in removable carriers):
a.
b.
ii.
iii.
Lift the Disk Drive out of the carrier, and disconnect the power and data harnesses from the drive. Also remove any adapter used to connect the data cable
-- it may need to be reused.
iv.
Remove the four standoffs from the bottom of the drive -- they must be reused.
v.
3.
4.
240/255/265:
1.
Remove the front (non-Main-Control-PWB side) Card Cage cover (loosen or remove two
T20 screws on top).
2.
Save and reuse the 4 plastic screws and 4 plastic spacers for mounting the Image Disk Drive.
3.
Dismount the Image Disk Drive (4 plastic screws), and save the plastic mounting hardware (Figure 1).
4.
Disconnect the power and data cables from the Image Disk Drive (Figure 2).
460/470:
1.
2.
b.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-521
REP 19-1
ESS Disk
Data Cable
ESS Disk
Power Cable
Figure 2 Connectors
REP 19-1
May 2003
4-522
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Disconnect the video cable from the card cage, and free
the video cable from its restraints on the fan housing.
1
Remove the video connector
cover (two T20 hex-head screws).
4
Disconnect the fan
connector.
3
Remove the T20 roundhead screw.
6
5
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-523
REP 19-1
2
Disconnect the
power and data
cables from the
Image Disk Drive
(inner drive).
3
Press and hold the
top clip upward and
the bottom clip
downward, and slide
the Disk Drive out.
1
ST: Disconnect the power and
data cables from the ESS Disk
Drive (outer drive).
Replacement
REP 19-1
1.
If the machine is equipped with the Removable Disk Drive Option (external cabinet
holding the disk drives in removable carriers): Replace the disk drive in the reverse of
removal. This completes the replacement.
2.
460/470: If replacing the drive with a new one, remove the upper and lower mounting
plates from the old drive (two Phillips-head screws each), and install them onto the new
drive.
May 2003
4-524
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CAUTION
(240/255/265): Take care not to overtorque or cross-thread the plastic mounting screws -- they
can break if not used carefully.
3.
Install the Image Disk Drive in the reverse order of removal (240/255/265: Reuse the plastic mounting hardware).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-525
REP 19-1
REP 19-1
May 2003
4-526
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
4.
5.
The purpose of this procedure is to check DADF skew semiautomatically using the IIT Skew
Check diagnostic routine, and as necessary to adjust it mechanically using the DADF skew
adjustment screw.
NOTE: Do not perform this procedure until after ensuring the skew on copies made from the
manual document glass is within specification.
Perform this procedure when directed by a RAP or REP or after replacing any of the following
components:
DADF Assembly
Preparation
1.
2.
Check
1.
Load ten or more same-size blank sheets LEF in the Document Feeder.
2.
3.
If the Document Feeder skew is out of adjustment, a PWS message box will appear
indicating so, and indicating the number and direction of adjustment screw turns. If
so, perform the Adjustment.
b.
If the Results window indicates that the Document Feeder skew check passed, the
DADF skew is within specification.
4.
Select [Exit].
5.
b.
Loosen the screw holding the Locator Pin, at the right front corner of the DADF (PL
2.1B Item 12).
c.
Align the Locator Pin to approximately center in the receiving hole in the Scanner
Top Frame (not just the Scanner Main Cover), and retighten the screw.
d.
e.
f.
460/470 with TAG 115 only: Perform ADJ 05-3 DADF/Document Glass Cover
Latch.
Adjustment
1.
2.
Without TAG 115: Remove the Scanner Rear Cover PL 3.1 (three T20 screws).
3.
19.04.xxx and higher software: Turn the DADF skew adjustment screw (Figure 1) in the
amount and direction indicated in the PWS message box during the check.
19.02.xxx and lower software: Turn the DADF skew adjustment screw (Figure 1) in half
the amount indicated in the PWS message box during the check, in the direction indicated
in the PWS message box during the check.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-527
ADJ 05-1
g.
[Exit] NVM Tool, [Exit] Diagnostic Navigator, and end the session by selecting
another session in the Session Manager window. Answer [Yes] to the question: "Do
you wish to reset the machine?"
PURPOSE
7.
Go to Step 15.
The purpose of this procedure is to set up the CVT Carriage Position to ensure that the Electronic Hole Removal (EHR) feature functions as well as possible across the full range of common punched-hole patterns on originals. The EHR feature reduces the occurrence of the
punched holes on originals being reproduced as filled black circles on copies. Presence of the
EHR feature is identified by TAG 296 on machines with Atlanta Gold Main Control PWBs (with
TAG 015, without TAG 077), by TAG 080 on machines with Atlanta Platinum Main Control
PWBs (240/255/265 with TAG 077), and by TAG 285 on 460/470 machines.
8.
Decrease the CVT Carriage Location NVM value by 25 (Scan Service, Location 53):
Preparation:
Obtain EHR Test Pattern 82E12900 (punched test pattern, included in the EHR Kit)
a.
b.
From the NVM Tool menu bar, select [Machine], then [Download]. Answer [Yes] to
the question: "Initiate NVM download?"
c.
d.
e.
f.
Double-click and change the [Current Value] of Location 53 to the new value, then
select [Write NVM].
g.
[Exit] NVM Tool, [Exit] Diagnostic Navigator, and end the session by selecting
another session in the Session Manager window. Answer [Yes] to the question: "Do
you wish to reset the machine?"
Adjustment
CAUTION
Be sure to perform this setup exactly as instructed, even if all holes on the test pattern already
are removed from the copy. This will fine-tune the CVT Carriage Position to ensure the best latitude of hole removal.
9.
Go to Step 11.
10. Decrease the CVT Carriage Location NVM value by 75 (Scan Service, Location 53):
a.
b.
From the NVM Tool menu bar, select [Machine], then [Download]. Answer [Yes] to
the question: "Initiate NVM download?"
1.
2.
If using metric copy paper: Select the next paper size wider than A4 (e.g. B4 or A3). Continue to use this size copy paper for the remainder of this procedure.
c.
NOTE: A4 paper is narrower than the 8.5 x 11-in. (216 x 279 mm) test pattern, and may
give false indications of hole removal.
d.
e.
f.
Double-click and change the [Current Value] of Location 53 to the new value, then
select [Write NVM].
g.
3.
Using the punched test pattern, make a copy from the Document Feeder with the test pattern fed LEF.
4.
If all holes #1 through #5 on the test pattern do appear as complete, solid black circles on
the copy made in step 3, go to step 10.
[Exit] NVM Tool, [Exit] Diagnostic Navigator, and end the session by selecting
another session in the Session Manager window. Answer [Yes] to the question: "Do
you wish to reset the machine?"
If not all holes #1 through #5 on the test pattern appear as complete, solid black circles on
the copy made in step 3. (none or only some do), continue with step 5.
11. Using the punched test pattern, make a copy from the Document Feeder with the test pattern fed LEF.
If holes #2 and #4 on the test pattern do appear as complete, solid black circles on the
copy made in step 3, continue with step 6.
12. If holes #2 and #4 on the test pattern do appear as complete, solid black circles on the
copy made in step 11, continue with step 13.
If holes #2 and #4 on the test pattern do not appear as complete, solid black circles on the
copy made in step 3, go to step 8.
If holes #2 and #4 on the test pattern do not appear as complete, solid black circles on the
copy made in step 11, go to step 22.
5.
6.
Increase the CVT Carriage Location NVM value by 25 (Scan Service, Location 53):
13. Increase the CVT Carriage Location NVM value by 40 (Scan Service, Location 53):
a.
a.
b.
From the NVM Tool menu bar, select [Machine], then [Download]. Answer [Yes] to
the question: "Initiate NVM download?"
b.
From the NVM Tool menu bar, select [Machine], then [Download]. Answer [Yes] to
the question: "Initiate NVM download?"
c.
c.
d.
d.
e.
e.
f.
Double-click and change the [Current Value] of Location 53 to the new value, then
select [Write NVM].
f.
Double-click and change the [Current Value] of Location 53 to the new value, then
select [Write NVM].
ADJ 05-2
May 2003
4-528
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
g.
[Exit] NVM Tool, [Exit] Diagnostic Navigator, and end the session by selecting
another session in the Session Manager window. Answer [Yes] to the question: "Do
you wish to reset the machine?"
b.
From the NVM Tool menu bar, select [Machine], then [Download]. Answer [Yes] to
the question: "Initiate NVM download?"
c.
d.
e.
f.
Double-click and change the [Current Value] of Location 53 to the new value, then
select [Write NVM].
g.
[Exit] NVM Tool, [Exit] Diagnostic Navigator, and end the session by selecting
another session in the Session Manager window. Answer [Yes] to the question: "Do
you wish to reset the machine?"
d.
e.
f.
Double-click and change the [Current Value] of Location 53 to the new value, then
select [Write NVM].
g.
[Exit] NVM Tool, [Exit] Diagnostic Navigator, and end the session by selecting
another session in the Session Manager window. Answer [Yes] to the question: "Do
you wish to reset the machine?"
23. Using the punched test pattern, make a copy from the Document Feeder with the test pattern fed LEF.
24. If 1 or more of the holes #1 through #5 on the test pattern appear as complete, solid black
circles on the copy made in step 23, repeat steps 23 and 24 once, to ensure that the problem is not a one-time occurrence before proceeding. If 1 or more complete holes still
appear on the copy, continue with step 25.
If none of the holes #1 through #5 on the test pattern appear as complete, solid black circles on the copy made in step 23, go to Required Final Steps.
25. If this is the first time through this CVT Carriage setup process without success, continue
with step 26.
If this is the second time through this CVT Carriage setup process without success, go to
IQ-1 to troubleshoot the problem. After resolving the problem, return to this procedure and
go back to step 1.
26. Enter 5067 for the CVT Carriage Location NVM value (Scan Service, Location 53):
18. Using the punched test pattern, make a copy from the Document Feeder with the test pattern fed LEF.
19. If holes #2 and #4 on the test pattern do appear as complete, solid black circles on the
copy made in step 18, continue with step 20.
If holes #2 and #4 on the test pattern do not appear as complete, solid black circles on the
copy made in step 18, go to step 22.
20. Increase the CVT Carriage Location NVM value by 35 (Scan Service, Location 53):
a.
b.
From the NVM Tool menu bar, select [Machine], then [Download]. Answer [Yes] to
the question: "Initiate NVM download?"
c.
d.
e.
Double-click and change the [Current Value] of Location 53 to 5067, then select
[Write NVM].
f.
[Exit] NVM Tool, [Exit] Diagnostic Navigator, and end the session by selecting
another session in the Session Manager window. Answer [Yes] to the question: "Do
you wish to reset the machine?"
a.
b.
From the NVM Tool menu bar, select [Machine], then [Download]. Answer [Yes] to
the question: "Initiate NVM download?"
c.
d.
1.
e.
2.
f.
Double-click and change the [Current Value] of Location 53 to the new value, then
select [Write NVM].
Be sure to save the NVM to the Machine Resident Diskette (MRD) before closing the call
(GP4).
g.
[Exit] NVM Tool, [Exit] Diagnostic Navigator, and end the session by selecting
another session in the Session Manager window. Answer [Yes] to the question: "Do
you wish to reset the machine?"
May 2003
4-529
b.
From the NVM Tool menu bar, select [Machine], then [Download]. Answer [Yes] to
the question: "Initiate NVM download?"
c.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
ADJ 05-2
Check
Test the latch by opening the latch (separating the Document Glass Cover from the DADF) and
closing it. If the latch does not operate satisfactorily, perform the Adjustment.
Adjustment
1.
Unlatch the latch and separate the Document Glass Cover from the DADF.
2.
Remove the front bottom cover from the Document Glass Cover, exposing the latch
mounting screws (Figure 1).
3.
If the latch is misaligned, loosen the two T20 latch mounting screws, move the latch as
appropriate, and retighten the screws (Figure 1).
4.
If the latch engages too loosely or with too much effort, loosen the two screws securing
the striker (on the DADF), move the striker up or down as appropriate, and retighten the
screws (Figure 2).
5.
6.
When the adjustment is complete, reinstall the front bottom cover onto the Document
Glass Cover (two T20 screws).
latch screws
cover screws
ADJ 05-3
May 2003
4-530
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
striker screws
striker
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-531
ADJ 05-3
ADJ 05-3
May 2003
4-532
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-533
ADJ 8-1
NOTE: In addition to the adjustments accomplished in the IOT Registration Setup routine, this
series also directs you to specific NVM locations which can be adjusted using NVM Tool. This
option enables you to optimize individual paper trays' side 2 registration, on large paper and
small paper separately.
NOTE: When [Offset] is selected in this routine, the test pattern image is automatically offset
5mm toward the lead edge and 5mm toward the top edge of the paper, to eliminate the need to
use a scale to measure registration. Figure 1 shows a correctly-registered print with the [Offset]
selected. This offset is reversed when [Offset] is deselected, or is automatically reversed upon
exiting the routine. Figure 2 shows a correctly-registered print with the [Offset] deselected.
ADJ 8-1
May 2003
4-534
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2.
3.
ADJ 8-1C IOT Top Edge Registration (IB-OB), Side 2, Small Paper
4.
ADJ 8-1D IOT Top Edge Registration (IB-OB), Side 2, Large Paper
5.
ADJ 8-1E IOT Lead Edge Registration for Small Heavy Weight Paper (19.02 and Higher
Software Only)
6.
ADJ 8-1F IOT Lead Edge Registration for Large Paper (19.02 and Higher Software Only)
7.
ADJ 8-1G IOT Lead Edge Registration for Large Heavy Weight Paper (19.02 and Higher
Software Only)
May 2003
4-535
top edge
5.0mm
lead edge
5.0mm
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
ADJ 8-1
The purpose of this procedure is to use the IOT Registration Setup diagnostic routine to check/
adjust the IOT registration in the process direction (left-to-right on a LEF portrait page), as
measured at the lead edge. Registration in the process direction need only be set using one
paper tray, because one NVM location determines this registration for all trays.
Perform this procedure when directed by a RAP or REP or after replacing any of the following
components:
Registration Transport
ROS
long
vertical line
at lead
edge
Preparation
1.
2.
3.
Select the [IOT System Registration] tab and wait for the routine to receive the initial test
data.
4.
Select [Offset]
5.
6.
7.
8.
Check
1.
2.
Remove the prints from the output tray and hold one face-up, with the lead edge to the
right and the top (OB) edge at the top.
3.
Observe the long vertical line closest to the lead edge. Lead edge registration is within
specification if this line is as close as possible to the lead edge (less than one line width
away), but still visible. If no long vertical line appears between the lead edge and the
nearest "ladder" of short horizontal lines, the vertical line is too far to the right, off the
paper. Figure 1 shows a correctly-registered print with the [Offset] selected.
4.
5.
If lead edge registration is within specification, [Exit] the routine to make any NVM
changes effective.
6.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
7.
If you are performing the entire IOT Registration Setup Series, go to the next check in the
series: ADJ 8-1B IOT Top Edge Registration (IB-OB), Side 1.
ADJ 8-1A
May 2003
4-536
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Adjustment
1.
PURPOSE
Select the left- or right-arrow once for each 0.2mm (40 ppm machine) or 0.30mm (65 ppm
machine) of desired adjustment: With the test print face-up with the lead edge to the right
and the top (OB) edge at the top,
the left-arrow moves the image to the left, whereas
the right-arrow moves the image to the right.
2.
The purpose of this procedure is to use the IOT Registration Setup diagnostic routine to check/
adjust the IOT registration in the inboard-outboard (IB-OB) direction (top-to-bottom) on side 1
of the print, as measured at the top edge of a LEF portrait page. Side 1 is either a simplex print
or the front side of a duplex print. Registration in the IB-OB direction for side 1 must be set
separately for each paper tray, because a separate NVM location determines this registration
for each tray. Depending on the number of trays present or suspect, this will require from one
to six separate check/adjustments for a complete setup.
NOTE: This IOT Registration Setup Series for 240/255/265/460/470 is significantly different
from the IOT Registration Setup Series for 480/490. If you need to check/adjust registration on
a 480/490 machine, switch to the 480/490 EDOC.
Perform this procedure when directed by a RAP or REP or after replacing any of the following
components:
Bypass Tray or HCF/Bypass Tray feed components: Check/adjust only for Tray 5 or Tray
6, as appropriate.
Preparation
NOTE: This procedure assumes that the correct hallPeriodRef and imageFastScanReg values for the ROS have been entered into NVM, either in manufacturing or according to REP 061.
1.
Load 8.5 x 11 in. or A4 paper LEF in all the affected trays, ensuring that the side guides
are adjusted tight against the stack.
2.
3.
Select the [IOT System Registration] tab and wait for the routine to receive the initial test
data.
4.
Select [Offset].
5.
6.
Check
1.
Select the first, next, or desired tray for which top edge registration is to be checked.
NOTE: Either select the specific tray for which top edge registration is suspect, or select
the next tray (if present) in the following sequence: Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, Tray 5
(Bypass Tray), Tray 6 (HCF).
2.
3.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-537
Remove the prints from the output tray and hold one face up, with the lead edge to the
right and the top (OB) edge at the top.
4.
Observe the 15mm horizontal lines closest to the top edge (the one line between the sideways number "17" and the top edge, for example). Top edge registration is within specification if the topmost line in each column is at the top of the paper. Figure 1 shows a
correctly-registered print with the [Offset] selected.
NOTE: If the image is too high on the page, the line between the "17" and the top edge of
the image will be off the page (invisible). If the image is too low on the page, there will be
space visible between that line and the top edge of the paper.
5.
If top edge registration (side 1) is not within specification for the tray selected, perform the
Adjustment.
6.
If top edge registration (side 1) is within specification for the tray selected, repeat the
Check for the next of any remaining trays.
7.
If top edge registration (side 1) is within specification for all trays, [Exit] the routine to
make any NVM changes effective.
8.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
9.
If you are performing the entire IOT Registration Setup Series, go to the next check in the
series: ADJ 8-1C IOT Top Edge Registration (IB-OB), Side 2, Small Paper.
ADJ 8-1B
May 2003
4-538
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Adjustment
1.
Select the up- or down-arrow once for each 0.1mm of desired adjustment: With the test
print face-up with the lead edge to the right and the top (OB) edge at the top,
the up-arrow moves the image up (in the OB direction), whereas
the down-arrow moves the image down (in the IB direction).
NOTE: The change in the number displayed in the Position window in the routine may
seem opposite to the movement of the image. As you move the image up, the number
goes down, and vise verse.
2.
Inverter
Duplex Transport
Preparation
NOTE: Side 1 must be checked/adjusted for Tray 1 before Side 2 can be checked.
1.
Ensure that the Duplex Feed Timing has been set up ([Paper tab , IOT Paper Path
Setup]).
2.
Load 8.5 x 11 in. or A4 paper LEF in Tray 1, ensuring that the side guides are adjusted
tight against the stack.
3.
4.
Select the [IOT System Registration] tab and wait for the routine to receive the initial test
data.
5.
Select [Offset].
6.
7.
8.
Check
1.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2.
Remove the prints from the output tray and hold one face up, with the lead edge to the
right and the top (OB) edge at the top.
3.
Observe the 15mm horizontal lines closest to the top edge (the one line between the sideways number "17" and the top edge, for example). Top edge registration is within specification if the topmost line in each column is at the top of the paper. Figure 1 shows a
correctly-registered print with the [Offset] selected.
May 2003
4-539
NOTE: If the image is too high on the page, the line between the "17" and the top edge of
the image will be off the page (invisible). If the image is too low on the page, there will be
space visible between that line and the top edge of the paper.
4.
If top edge registration (side 2) for small paper is not within specification for Tray 1, perform the Adjustment.
5.
If top edge registration (side 2) for small paper is within specification for Tray 1, you may
then select other trays and check them also. However, do not adjust for other trays
within this routine.
CAUTION
After checking/adjusting top edge registration (side 2) for small paper from Tray 1, do not adjust
for other trays within this routine, since this will then misadjust for tray 1. This routine affects
one NVM location which applies the adjustment to all trays equally. The NVM locations for
each tray may then be adjusted individually using NVM Tool, as specified later in this procedure.
6.
7.
If you wish to adjust top edge registration (side 2) for small paper for individual trays, do
the following:
a.
Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool] and download the machine NVM.
b.
c.
Select Module: [F1IOT] or [F2IOT] for Trays 1-4, or [SMH] or [HCF] for Tray 5 or 6.
NOTE: The required change in the NVM value may seem opposite to the resulting movement
of the image. To move the image down (away from the top edge), the value must be
increased. To move the image up (toward the top edge), the value must be decreased.
d.
Scroll (or Search) for the location listed below for the desired tray, and change the
NVM value by 1 for each 0.1 mm of required adjustment:
Tray 1: Location 278
Tray 2: Location 279
Tray 3: Location 280
Tray 4: Location 281
Tray 5: Location 151
Tray 6: Location 152
e.
Select another Module as required and change any other desired tray's NVM value
as above.
f.
8.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
9.
If you are performing the entire IOT Registration Setup Series, go to the next check in the
series: ADJ 8-1D IOT Top Edge Registration (IB-OB), Side 2, Large Paper.
ADJ 8-1C
May 2003
4-540
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Adjustment
1.
Select the up- or down-arrow once for each 0.1mm of desired adjustment: With the test
print face-up with the lead edge to the right and the top (OB) edge at the top,
The up-arrow moves the image up (in the OB direction), whereas
the down-arrow moves the image down (in the IB direction).
NOTE: The change in the number displayed in the Position window in the routine may
seem opposite to the movement of the image. As you move the image up, the number
goes down, and vise verse.
2.
Inverter
Duplex Transport
Preparation
NOTE: Side 1 must be checked/adjusted for Tray 4 before Side 2 can be checked.
1.
Ensure that the Duplex Feed Timing has been set up ([Paper tab , IOT Paper Path
Setup]).
2.
Load 11 x 17 in. or A3 paper in Tray 4, ensuring that the side guides are adjusted tight
against the stack.
3.
4.
Select the [IOT System Registration] tab and wait for the routine to receive the initial test
data.
5.
Select [Offset].
6.
7.
8.
Check
1.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2.
Remove the prints from the output tray and hold one face up, with the lead edge to the
right and the top (OB) edge at the top.
3.
Observe the 15mm horizontal lines closest to the top edge (the one line between the sideways number "17" and the top edge, for example). Top edge registration is within specification if the topmost line in each column is at the top of the paper.
May 2003
4-541
NOTE: If the image is too high on the page, the line between the "17" and the top edge of
the image will be off the page (invisible). If the image is too low on the page, there will be
space visible between that line and the top edge of the paper.
4.
If top edge registration (side 2) for large paper is within specification for Tray 4, you may
then select other trays and check them also. However, do not adjust for other trays
within this routine.
CAUTION
After checking/adjusting top edge registration (side 2) for large paper from Tray 4, do not adjust
for other trays within this routine, since this will then misadjust for tray 4. This routine affects
one NVM location which applies the adjustment to all trays equally. The NVM locations for
each tray may be then adjusted individually using NVM Tool, as specified later in this procedure.
5.
6.
If you wish to adjust top edge registration (side 2) for large paper for individual trays, do
the following:
a.
Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool] and download the machine NVM.
b.
c.
Select Module: [F1IOT] or [F2IOT] for Trays 1-4, or [SMH] or [HCF] for Tray 5.
NOTE: The required change in the NVM value may seem opposite to the resulting movement
of the image. To move the image down (away from the top edge), the value must be
increased. To move the image up (toward the top edge), the value must be decreased.
d.
Scroll (or Search) for the location listed below for the desired tray, and change the
NVM value by 1 for each 0.1 mm of required adjustment:
Tray 1: Location 274
Tray 2: Location 275
Tray 3: Location 276
Tray 4: Location 277
Tray 5: Location 150
e.
Select another Module as required and change any other desired tray's NVM value
as above.
f.
7.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
8.
If you are performing the entire IOT Registration Setup Series, this completes the series.
Adjustment
1.
Select the up- or down-arrow once for each 0.1mm of desired adjustment: With the test
print face-up with the lead edge to the right and the top (OB) edge at the top,
The up-arrow moves the image up (in the OB direction), whereas
the down-arrow moves the image down (in the IB direction).
NOTE: The change in the number displayed in the Position window in the routine may
seem opposite to the movement of the image. As you move the image up, the number
goes down, and vise verse.
2.
May 2003
4-542
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: When [Offset] is selected in the IOT System Registration routine, the test pattern image
is automatically offset 5mm toward the lead edge and 5mm toward the top edge of the paper,
to eliminate the need to use a scale to measure registration. This offset is reversed when [Offset] is deselected, or is automatically reversed upon exiting the routine. Figure 1 shows a correctly-registered print with the [Offset] deselected.
top edge
5.0mm
lead edge
5.0mm
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-543
ADJ 8-1E
NOTE: When removing the prints from the output tray, be sure to note which is the lead
edge. The test pattern number "17" appears sideways at the top corner near the trail (left)
edge.
Preparation
Load the customers desired heavy weight paper in Tray 1.
2.
Remove the prints from the output tray and hold one face-up, with the lead edge to the
right and the top (OB) edge at the top.
3.
Observe the long vertical line closest to the lead edge. Lead edge registration is within
specification if this line is as close as possible to the lead edge (less than one line width
away), but still visible. If no long vertical line appears between the lead edge and the
nearest "ladder" of short horizontal lines, the vertical line is too far to the right, off the
paper. Figure 2 shows a correctly-registered print with the [Offset] selected.
Check
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
4.
6.
Select [Exit].
5.
7.
Inspect the lead edge registration on the copies as compared to Figure 2. If the lead edge
registration is unsatisfactory, perform the Adjustment.
If lead edge registration is within specification, [Exit] the routine to make any NVM
changes effective.
6.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.
Add to the Current Value to move the image right, or subtract to move the image left, 1 for
each 0.35 mm (75 ppm) or 0.42 mm (90 ppm) of desired movement, end enter the result
for the New Value.
5.
Select [Modify].
6.
Select [Exit].
7.
2.
3.
Select the [IOT System Registration] tab and wait for the routine to receive the initial test
data.
4.
Select [Offset]
5.
6.
7.
8.
Check
1.
ADJ 8-1E
May 2003
4-544
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Adjustment
1.
Select the left- or right-arrow once for each 0.35 mm (75 ppm) or 0.42 mm (90 ppm) of
desired adjustment: With the test print face-up with the lead edge to the right and the top
(OB) edge at the top,
the left-arrow moves the image to the left, whereas
the right-arrow moves the image to the right.
2.
long
vertical line
at lead
edge
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-545
ADJ 8-1E
ADJ 8-1F
May 2003
4-546
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: When [Offset] is selected in the IOT System Registration routine, the test pattern image
is automatically offset 5mm toward the lead edge and 5mm toward the top edge of the paper,
to eliminate the need to use a scale to measure registration. This offset is reversed when [Offset] is deselected, or is automatically reversed upon exiting the routine. Figure 1 shows a correctly-registered print with the [Offset] deselected.
top edge
5.0mm
lead edge
5.0mm
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-547
ADJ 8-1F
NOTE: When removing the prints from the output tray, be sure to note which is the lead
edge. The test pattern number "17" appears sideways at the top corner near the trail (left)
edge.
Preparation
Load the customers desired large paper in Tray 1.
2.
Remove the prints from the output tray and hold one face-up, with the lead edge to the
right and the top (OB) edge at the top.
3.
Observe the long vertical line closest to the lead edge. Lead edge registration is within
specification if this line is as close as possible to the lead edge (less than one line width
away), but still visible. If no long vertical line appears between the lead edge and the
nearest "ladder" of short horizontal lines, the vertical line is too far to the right, off the
paper. Figure 2 shows a correctly-registered print with the [Offset] selected.
Check
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
4.
6.
Select [Exit].
5.
7.
Inspect the lead edge registration on the copies as compared to Figure 2. If the lead edge
registration is unsatisfactory, perform the Adjustment.
If lead edge registration is within specification, [Exit] the routine to make any NVM
changes effective.
6.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.
Add to the Current Value to move the image right, or subtract to move the image left, 1 for
each 0.35 mm (75 ppm) or 0.42 mm (90 ppm) of desired movement, end enter the result
for the New Value.
5.
Select [Modify].
6.
Select [Exit].
7.
2.
3.
Select the [IOT System Registration] tab and wait for the routine to receive the initial test
data.
4.
Select [Offset]
5.
6.
7.
8.
Check
1.
ADJ 8-1F
May 2003
4-548
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Adjustment
1.
Select the left- or right-arrow once for each 0.35 mm (75 ppm) or 0.42 mm (90 ppm) of
desired adjustment: With the test print face-up with the lead edge to the right and the top
(OB) edge at the top,
the left-arrow moves the image to the left, whereas
the right-arrow moves the image to the right.
2.
long
vertical line
at lead
edge
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-549
ADJ 8-1F
ADJ 8-1G
May 2003
4-550
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: When [Offset] is selected in the IOT System Registration routine, the test pattern image
is automatically offset 5mm toward the lead edge and 5mm toward the top edge of the paper,
to eliminate the need to use a scale to measure registration. This offset is reversed when [Offset] is deselected, or is automatically reversed upon exiting the routine. Figure 1 shows a correctly-registered print with the [Offset] deselected.
top edge
5.0mm
lead edge
5.0mm
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-551
ADJ 8-1G
NOTE: When removing the prints from the output tray, be sure to note which is the lead
edge. The test pattern number "17" appears sideways at the top corner near the trail (left)
edge.
Preparation
Load the customers desired large heavy weight paper in Tray 1.
2.
Remove the prints from the output tray and hold one face-up, with the lead edge to the
right and the top (OB) edge at the top.
3.
Observe the long vertical line closest to the lead edge. Lead edge registration is within
specification if this line is as close as possible to the lead edge (less than one line width
away), but still visible. If no long vertical line appears between the lead edge and the
nearest "ladder" of short horizontal lines, the vertical line is too far to the right, off the
paper. Figure 2 shows a correctly-registered print with the [Offset] selected.
Check
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
4.
6.
Select [Exit].
5.
7.
Inspect the lead edge registration on the copies as compared to Figure 2. If the lead edge
registration is unsatisfactory, perform the Adjustment.
If lead edge registration is within specification, [Exit] the routine to make any NVM
changes effective.
6.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.
Add to the Current Value to move the image right, or subtract to move the image left, 1 for
each 0.35 mm (75 ppm) or 0.42 mm (90 ppm) of desired movement, end enter the result
for the New Value.
5.
Select [Modify].
6.
Select [Exit].
7.
2.
3.
Select the [IOT System Registration] tab and wait for the routine to receive the initial test
data.
4.
Select [Offset]
5.
6.
7.
8.
Check
1.
ADJ 8-1G
May 2003
4-552
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Adjustment
1.
Select the left- or right-arrow once for each 0.35 mm (75 ppm) or 0.42 mm (90 ppm) of
desired adjustment: With the test print face-up with the lead edge to the right and the top
(OB) edge at the top,
the left-arrow moves the image to the left, whereas
the right-arrow moves the image to the right.
2.
long
vertical line
at lead
edge
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-553
ADJ 8-1G
test pattern
number
PURPOSE
top edge
OB
The purpose of this procedure is to fine-tune the image-to-paper skew by varying the angle of
the Registration Transport in relation to the photoreceptor.
Perform this procedure only if directed here from 08-C Skewed Image RAP.
Preparation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check
1.
2.
Remove the print from the output tray and hold it face up, with the lead edge to the right
and the top (OB) edge at the top.
3.
Measure the lead edge registration at the IB (bottom) and OB (top) corners (Figure 1).
4.
b.
c.
A negative Skew means the image is skewed CCW on the paper (OB
lead
edge
IB - OB = Skew
5.
6.
If the Skew is still outside of the desired range after trying the full range of this Adjustment, use the 08-C RAP to diagnose the problem further.
IB
ADJ 8-2
May 2003
4-554
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Adjustment
1.
Determine the amount (number of increments) and direction (left or right) of the adjustment required:
a.
Divide the Skew by 0.3mm, then round off to the nearest whole number, to determine
the number of increments:
b.
Examples:
If Skew = - 1.0mm, adjustment = 3 increments to the right.
Registration
Transport
3.
4.
Skew
Adjustment
Lever
NOTE: The amount of adjustment from one Adjustment Position Hole to the next equals
one increment of adjustment. You may confirm the position of the Skew Adjustment Lever
by visually aligning the hole in the lever with the rear of one of the Adjustment Position
Holes. You may also confirm and hold the position by inserting a large (thick) paper clip
through the holes.
a.
b.
c.
Rotate the Skew Adjustment Lever in the amount and direction of the desired adjustment.
d.
Tighten the screw, while holding the Skew Adjustment lever in the desired position.
FULL LEFT
1/2 LEFT
CENTER
1/2 RIGHT
FULL RIGHT
5.
Adjustment
Locking
Screw (T20)
6.
7.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-555
ADJ 8-2
ADJ 8-2
May 2003
4-556
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
a.
Open the Finisher Top Cover Door and change the value on the NVM label (on the
underside of the door) to reflect the new value.
b.
Before closing the call, be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4).
Perform this procedure when directed by a RAP or REP or after replacing any of the following
components:
Moving Stapler
Adjustment
1.
Enter [Finishing tab , Finisher Setup] (in Diagnostics Navigator: [Finishing] tab, [Finisher
Setup]).
2.
In the Finisher Adjustment window, select [Perform Tamper Position Adjustment] and
select [Start].
3.
In the setup welcome window, select [8.5 x 11] or [A4] as appropriate, and select [Next].
4.
Insert the long edge of the sheet of paper into the disk fingers, ensuring that the sheet is
all the way into the bottom of the fingers.
5.
Slide the sheet toward the front of the machine, keeping the sheet against the registration
edges, until it is biased against the retractable registration edge on the stapler.
6.
7.
Measure the tamping distance from the inboard (rear) edge of the sheet to the tamper.
NOTE: Measure to the plastic edge of the tamper face, not to the pad).
8.
Enter the measurement, to the nearest 0.5 mm, in the field indicated in the setup window
on the PWS, and select [Next].
9.
Enter [Finishing tab , Finisher Setup] (in Diagnostics Navigator: [Finishing] tab, [Finisher Setup]) again.
b.
Select [Tamper Position Adjustment has already been performed and a slight modification is needed], and select [Start].
c.
Increase or decrease the tamping value in the field, or use the arrow buttons to move
tamper more or less toward the rear.
NOTE: Increasing the tamping value (moving the tamper toward the rear) results in
less tamping of the sets. Decreasing the tamping value (moving the tamper
toward the front) results in more tamping of the sets.
d.
Select [Modify].
e.
f.
Exit Diagnostics.
g.
Recheck/readjust as necessary.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-557
ADJ 12-1
Tamper Arm
Adjustment
1.
2.
Slide the Tamper Arm, by hand, to the set-up position. Ensure the locating features on the
Service Tray line up with the locating features on the Tamper Arm (Figure 1).
3.
Loosen the two T20 Tamper Arm mounting screws, rotate the Tamper Arm clockwise
within the locator tabs (underneath), then tighten the screws (Figure 2)
4.
Slide the Tamper Arm through it's full length of travel. The Tamper Arm should move the
full distance in both directions smoothly without binding (Figure 3). If not, repeat the previous step.
5.
6.
When reinstalling the Tamper Button, rotate the button slightly clockwise, then tighten the
screw (Figure 4).
7.
Position a sheet of heavy paper (e.g. 110 lb. or 200 gsm) to check the position of the
Tamper Arm and Tamper Button (Figure 5).
a.
Insert the long edge of the sheet of paper into the disk fingers, ensuring that the
sheet is all the way into the bottom of the fingers.
b.
Slide the sheet toward the rear of the machine, keeping the sheet against the registration edges, until it is biased against the Tamper Button.
8.
Check the Tamper position (Figure 5). If the Tamper is not in the correct position as
shown, return to step 6 to adjust the position of the Tamper Button.
9.
ADJ 12-2
May 2003
4-558
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Tamper Arm
mounting
screws
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-559
ADJ 12-2
Position a
test sheet.
ADJ 12-2
May 2003
4-560
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
12. Rotate the Crease Blade Knob to cam the Crease Blade to its full extension (the green
arrow on the knob will be facing downward).
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to align and position the Crease Blade to ensure straight,
accurate booklet creasing.
13. Using a finger in each Crease Blade adjustment hole (Figure 7), move both ends of the
Crease Blade in until the blade stops against the setup tools on both sides.
14. Ensuring the Crease Blade remains in contact with the setup tools on both ends simultaneously, tighten the five accessible Crease Blade clamp screws (Figure 7).
15. Using the Crease Blade Knob, retract the Crease Blade.
Adjustment
18. Reassemble and reinstall the Booklet Maker in the reverse of the removal and disassembly.
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
2.
Remove the Booklet Maker Front Handle (two slotted or 5.5 mm screws).
b.
Remove the Crease Blade Knob (5.5 mm screw, or clip -- do not lose the clip).
c.
d.
3.
Reinstall the Crease Blade Knob and the Crease Roll Lever temporarily.
4.
5.
Remove the Crease Roll Motor and the Rear Handle bracket, to access the rear screws
for the Crease Roll exit bracket (Figure 2).
6.
a.
Remove the Crease Roll Motor Encoder Sensor from the bracket (leave it connected
to the wiring harness).
b.
c.
d.
Slide the Crease Motor and the Rear Handle bracket off and move them aside (still
attached to the Crease Motor Encoder wiring harness).
Remove the four T20 screws (two front and two rear).
NOTE: Do not pivot the Crease Roll exit bracket downward when removing it. Pivoting it downward can dislodge the Crease Roll Bearings.
b.
Flex the Booklet Maker frame slightly to disengage the locating features, pull the
Crease Roll exit bracket out parallel (do not pivot it out), and remove it.
7.
Rotate the Crease Roll Release Lever CCW to release the Crease Roll nip.
8.
Rotate the Crease Roll Lever CW until the Upper Crease Roll just rests on the Lower
Crease Roll (Figure 4)
9.
Position both Crease Blade Setup Tools on the Crease Roll Shafts, on both ends of the
Crease Rolls (Figure 5).
10. Lift the Crease Roll Gate, and use the rear handle grip to hold gate in the up position (Figure 6).
11. Loosen all ten Crease Blade clamp screws (Figure 7).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-561
ADJ 12.02.01
1
Remove the
plastic rear
handle grip.
2
Remove the three T20
bracket mounting
screws.
ADJ 12.02.01
May 2003
4-562
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Remove the
sensor.
Crease
Roll Exit
Bracket
3
2
Remove the snap ring
and remove the encoder
wheel/coupling.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-563
ADJ 12.02.01
CORRECT
(Crease Rolls
just touching)
INCORRECT
(Crease Roll nip
fully closed)
INCORRECT
(Crease Roll nip
fully open)
Figure 4 Setting the Crease Rolls for the Crease Blade Setup
ADJ 12.02.01
May 2003
4-564
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Crease Blade
adjustment holes
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-565
ADJ 12.02.01
CAUTION
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
Remove the Booklet Maker Assembly from the MFF (REP 12.02.01).
3.
4.
Remove the appropriate Booklet Stapler Cover (one 5.5 mm screw) (Figure 1).
Ensure the machine power is switched off whenever connecting or disconnecting the Drawer
Extension Harness.
WARNING
2.
c.
13. Cam the stapler back out and remove the setup tool.
Adjustment
1.
b.
5.
6.
Position the Anvil Setup Tool in the appropriate Booklet Stapler (Figure 2).
7.
Observe the alignment holes in the face of the Anvil (Figure 3). During the setup, these
holes must mate with the setup tools alignment pins (Figure 2).
a.
Connect the Booklet Maker to the MFF using the Drawer Extension Harness.
b.
Open the Booklet Maker Entrance Baffle (5d1 jam area), insert two sheets of 20 lb or
80 gsm paper into the booklet compiler area, and hold onto the sheets.
c.
d.
Enter [Finishing tab, Finisher Tests, Booklet Maker tab], under Booklet Components,
select [Booklet Staplers], then select [Front Stapler] or [Rear Stapler] as appropriate
and make several staples, moving the paper after each to be sure to staple in a new
location.
e.
Switch off and disconnect the machine power and remove the Drawer Extension
Harness.
f.
Inspect the staples for clinch quality. If the clinch quality is unsatisfactory, repeat the
Adjustment as required.
CAUTION
Do not remove the Anvil Mylar Guide. The adhesive will not re-adhere properly if the guide is
reinstalled, and if the guide is dislodged it may become an obstruction. Also, if the guide is not
installed, the paper may stub on the Anvil or the baffles. In either case, booklet quality problems and 12-801 or 12-117 faults will result.
8.
9.
On the back of the Anvil, prepare the Anvil for the setup (Figure 4):
a.
Loosen the screws, then ensure the Anvil screws are just tight enough to hold the
Anvil in place, but loose enough to allow the Anvil to be moved by hand.
b.
As a starting point for the setup, position the Anvil so that both Anvil alignment
guides are centered in the openings.
10. Rotating the stapler idler gear as shown in Figure 5, slowly cam the stapler in until the
setup tool contacts the Anvil. If the Anvil is nearly aligned, it may then self-align and its
alignment holes will engage the setup tools alignment pins. If not, carefully move the
Anvil by hand or with a narrow tool to align the holes with the pins.
NOTE: The alignment holes and pins are hidden at this point. Position the outer edges of
the Anvil so that it appears centered with respect to the stapler, and feel for the engagement of the alignment holes with the alignment pins.
11. Once the setup tools alignment pins engage the Anvils alignment holes, continue camming the stapler in until the setup tool is clamped firmly between the stapler and the Anvil.
12. Tighten the Anvil screws (Figure 4):
a.
Hold one screw firmly with your finger while tightening the other screw only partially,
to prevent the Anvil from rotating when the first screw is turned.
ADJ 12.02.02
May 2003
4-566
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2
Press the setup
tool firmly in place.
1
Insert the setup
tool into the throat
of the stapler as
shown.
alignment pins
Area 5b4 handle
Booklet Stapler
Covers
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-567
ADJ 12.02.02
Anvil alignment
guides
Anvil alignment
holes
ADJ 12.02.02
May 2003
4-568
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Check
Check the booklet tamping against Booklet Set Registration Specifications.
Adjustment
1.
Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool], and download the machine NVM.
2.
3.
4.
Enter a new value as appropriate: Increase the value to increase the tamping stroke, or
decrease the value to decrease the tamping stroke.
5.
6.
7.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-569
Purpose
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to position the booklet staples and crease relative to the edge
of the sheet. Do not attempt use this procedure to align the staples to the crease -- instead use
ADJ 12.02.05 Booklet Crease Position to align the crease to the staples. For ease of performing this adjustment, ensure the crease and the staples are aligned to each other, using ADJ
12.02.05 Booklet Crease Position as required, before performing this procedure. Provided the
stapled-booklet crease and staple positions already coincide, this procedure may be used to
align the unstapled-booklet crease position relative to the edge of the sheet.
The purpose of this procedure is to position the booklet crease relative to the booklet staple
position. Do not attempt to use this procedure to align the crease relative to the edge of the
sheet directly, for either a stapled or an unstapled booklet. Instead, use this procedure as
required to align the crease to the staples of a stapled booklet, then use ADJ 12.02.04 Booklet
Staple Position as required to align the combined staple/crease position relative to the edge of
the sheet.
The Booklet Compiling, Stapling, and Folding series of adjustments must be performed in the
following sequence:
The Booklet Compiling, Stapling, and Folding series of adjustments must be performed in the
following sequence:
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
Check
Check
1.
1.
2.
Mark the booklets to indicate the top flap as they sit in the output tray.
2.
Mark the booklets to indicate the top flap as they sit in the output tray.
3.
3.
Observe the position of the trail edge of the top flap relative to the trail edge of the bottom
flap. The edges should align within 0.5 mm. If not, measure the distance between the
edges and perform the Adjustment.
Observe the position of the crease relative to the staples. The crease line should be positioned on the staples. If not, measure the distance from the crease to the staples and perform the Adjustment.
Adjustment
Adjustment
1.
Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool], and download the machine NVM.
1.
Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool], and download the machine NVM.
2.
2.
3.
3.
4.
4.
Enter a new value as appropriate: Increase the value to lower the stapling and creasing
backstop positions and thus lengthen the lower flap of the booklet as it sits in the output
tray, or decrease the value to raise the stapling and creasing backstop positions and thus
lengthen the upper flap of the booklet as it sits in the output tray. An NVM change of 5 will
move the staple/crease position approximately 1.1 mm.
Enter a new value as appropriate: Increase the value to raise the creasing backstop
position and thus lengthen the upper flap of the booklet as it sits in the output tray (so the
staples are further toward the upper flap), or decrease the value to lower the creasing
backstop position and thus lengthen the lower flap of the booklet as it sits in the output
tray (so the staples are further toward the lower flap). An NVM change of 5 will move the
crease position approximately 0.6 mm.
5.
5.
6.
6.
7.
7.
May 2003
4-570
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Purpose
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to ensure correct alignment of the Crease Roll Gate so that
the Crease Roll Gate Home Sensor is actuated.
The purpose of this procedure is to align the Booklet Maker drawer so that it opens and closes
correctly and the drawer connector connects correctly.
Check
Check
1.
2.
Observe the alignment mark on the Booklet Maker front frame and the corresponding mark on
the MFF front frame (Figure 1). If the marks do not align, perform the Adjustment.
3.
4.
Observe the Crease Roll Gate Home Sensor window: It should display, "Blocked
Unblocked Blocked." If not, perform the Adjustment.
Adjustment
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Open the MFF Front Door, Open Area 5a, and slide out the Booklet Maker drawer.
2.
Remove the Booklet Maker Front Handle (two slotted or 5.5 mm screws).
b.
Remove the Crease Blade Knob (5.5 mm screw, or clip -- do not lose the clip).
c.
d.
3.
4.
Slide the Crease Roll Gate all the way up and hold it, ensuring that both the front and rear
ends of the gate are fully at the top of their travel.
5.
While holding the Crease Roll Gate up, reinstall the Crease Roll Gate Front Gear (one Ering).
6.
mark on MFF
frame
mark on Booklet
Maker frame
Adjustment
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-571
Loosen the three T20 screws securing the MFF right side rail to the MFF (Figure 2)
Repairs and Adjustments
2.
3.
2.
3.
Check
1.
Open the MFF Front Door and insert the Interlock Cheater.
2.
Enter [Copier Sys tab , Component Control], and select the [Finisher] tab.
3.
Under Outputs, select [Booklet Backstop Motor (Letter)] or [Booklet Backstop Motor
(A4)], depending whether 8.5 x 11 in. or A4 paper is available, respectively.
4.
Select [Output On]. The Booklet Backstop will begin to move up to the compiling position
and back down to the home position repeatedly.
5.
When the Booklet Backstop is up in the compiling position, remove the Interlock Cheater
to stop the backstop in the compiling position.
6.
Slide out the Booklet Maker and open the Booklet Maker Entrance Baffle (5d1 jam area).
7.
Insert a sheet of 8.5 x 11 in. or A4 paper (the same size as selected in 3) SEF into the
booklet compiler area, ensuring that the bottom edge rests on the Booklet Backstop and
the top edge is flat against the inside of the Booklet Entrance Right Baffle (Figure 1).
8.
Observe the position of the top edge of the sheet relative to the compiling position scale
(Figure 1). The top edge of the sheet should align with the 0 (zero) mark on the A scale,
within one scale mark (1.5 mm). If not, perform the Adjustment.
May 2003
4-572
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
compiling position
scale (A)
Booklet Entrance
Right Baffle
The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the position of the first crease on a Tri-Fold output
(Z- or C-configuration fold). The first-crease distance on a Z-configuration fold is the distance
from the Top edge of the sheet to the crease that is closest to the bottom edge of the sheet.
The first-crease distance on a C-configuration fold is the distance from the bottom edge of the
sheet to the crease that is closest to the bottom edge of the sheet (i.e. the length of the inside
flap).
Check
Check the first fold length against the Tri-Fold Specifications.
Adjustment
1.
Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool], and download the machine NVM.
2.
3.
For Z-configuration fold, [Search] to location "Z-Fold First to LE" and double-click on it.
4.
For C-configuration fold, [Search] to location "C-Fold First to LE" and double-click on it.
a.
Multiply by 8.8 the desired change in the first-crease distance in millimeters, and
then round off to the nearest whole number. The result is the amount of required
NVM change.
b.
For Z-configuration fold, increasing the NVM value will increase the first-fold distance and decreasing the NVM value will decrease the first-fold distance.
For C-configuration fold, decreasing the NVM value will increase the first-fold distance and increasing the NVM value will decrease the first-fold distance.
5.
6.
7.
Adjustment
1.
Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool], and download the machine NVM.
2.
3.
4.
Enter a new value as appropriate: Increase the value to raise the compiling backstop
position, or decrease the value to lower the compiling backstop position. An NVM change
of 5 will move the staple/crease position approximately 0.6 mm.
5.
6.
7.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-573
adjustment screw
(T20)
Check
Check the second fold length against the Tri-Fold Specifications.
Adjustment
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
Remove the Booklet Maker Exit front cover (three T20 screws).
2.
3.
a.
b.
Move the backstop up to decrease the second fold length, or down to increase the
second fold length. Each graduated mark represents a change of approximately one
millimeter.
c.
4.
ADJ 12.04.02
May 2003
4-574
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Purpose
Purpose
The Purpose of this procedure is to align and position the Compiler Tamper to allow for proper
paper tamping.
The Purpose of this procedure is to align and position the Main Stapler relative to the Compiler
Backstop to allow for proper stapling.
Check
Check the Compiler Tamping against Set Registration Specifications - Stapled Sets and/or
Stack Specifications - Stapled and Unstapled Sets.
Preparation
Adjustment
WARNING
1.
Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool], and download the machine NVM.
2.
3.
4.
Enter a new value as appropriate: Increase the value to increase the tamping stroke, or
decrease the value to decrease the tamping stroke.
The machine power must be switched off and the MFF power cord disconnected, to
avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage. Switching off the
machine power alone will not remove power from the MFF.
1.
2.
Fold the piece of 11 x 17 inch (A3) paper lengthwise, so that it is 3 to 4 inches wide. Leave
one edge exposed, this will be used as a straight edge.
5.
6.
Check
7.
1.
Place the paper so that the straight edge touches both Compiler Backstops and lays
across the Main Stapler stapling area (Figure 1).
2.
Observe the straight edge of the paper: The Main Stapler's backstops, and the retractable Compiler Backstops should align. The alignment of the Main Stapler backstop and
the Compiler Backstop should be within +/- 0.5 mm.
Compiler backstops
Main Stapler
May 2003
4-575
Adjustment
1.
Loosen the three Main Stapler screws (7mm), move the Stapler in the direction required,
and tighten the three screws (Figure 2).
Purpose
2.
The Purpose of this procedure is to position the Main Stapler staple relative to the top edge of
the sheet.
Prerequisite
Ensure that the Main Stapler Carriage Assembly is installed correctly and the belt is tensioned
correctly (REP 12.12.01), before performing this procedure.
Check
Check the staple position against the Staple Position Specifications - Main Stapler.
Adjustment
1.
Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool], and download the machine NVM.
2.
3.
4.
Enter a new value as appropriate: Increase the value to move the staple closer to the
top edge of the sheet, or decrease the value to move the staple farther from the top edge
of the sheet. An NVM change of 3 will move the staple approximately 1 mm.
5.
6.
7.
2
Move the stapler up or down
and tighten the screws.
1
Loosen three 7 mm screws.
May 2003
4-576
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Image Module
Check
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
3.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Rotate the scan carriage capstan to move the Image Module to the left wall of the Scanner cavity. Both stops on the Image Module should contact the ribs on the left wall of the
Scanner Cavity (Figure 1). If not, perform the Adjustment.
5.
b.
c.
d.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
4-577
ADJ 14-1
stop
rib
stop
rib
ADJ 14-1
May 2003
4-578
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Adjustment
1.
Rotate the scan carriage capstan pulley so that the Image Module is approximately 6
inches (150mm) from the left wall of the Scanner cavity.
PURPOSE
2.
Loosen the two front cable clamp screws (T20), plus the right rear cable clamp screw.
3.
Slide the Image Module against the ribs on the left wall of the Scanner cavity.
4.
If the cable tension springs are not centered between the cable clamps, do the following:
5.
6.
a.
b.
While holding the Image Module gently against the ribs, rotate the capstan to center
the springs between the clamps.
c.
The purpose of this adjustment is to use the IIT registration and magnification setup diagnostic
routine to adjust the IIT registration and magnification semiautomatically.
Perform this procedure when directed by a RAP or REP or after replacing any of the following
components:
CVT Motor
Retighten the left rear screw, making sure that the cable coming off the pulley is
straight both horizontally and vertically.
Image Module
Hold the Image Module gently against the ribs making sure that both stops on the Image
Module make contact with the ribs.
Tighten the left front cable clamp making sure that the cable coming off the capstan pulley
is straight both horizontally and vertically.
7.
8.
Rotate the capstan to move the Image Module to the center position and then return it to
the left wall. Check that both stops on the Image Module contact the ribs. If not, repeat
the Adjustment and recheck/readjust as necessary.
Preparation
CAUTION
Clean the Document Glass thoroughly before starting the setup. The glass must be completely
clean in order for the setup to function correctly.
Clean the glass thoroughly, according to the Scanner Cleaning Procedure (REP 14-3).
Adjustment
1.
2.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
a.
Measuring a sheet of paper: After reading the initial set of instructions in the routine,
select [Start] and follow the next set of instructions.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
After the setup completes, run test copies and check for any obvious errors in registration
or magnification. If any occur, restart the setup as explained above and proceed carefully.
4.
May 2003
4-579
5.
With V3.00 (L0.17.1) or later software, this procedure is now complete. With any earlier
software, continue.
6.
Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool] and download the machine NVM.
7.
8.
Scroll (or Search) to Location [40], [CVT Velocity Corr] and check the value in that location:
9.
a.
If the value is not between -40 and +40, assume the setup failed. Repeat the Adjustment and proceed carefully
b.
If the value is between -40 and +40, proceed to the next step.
17. [Exit] NVM Tool (select [Exit] in the [File] menu), [Exit] the Diagnostic Navigator, and close
the session.
Double-click on Location [40] and change the value to adjust CVT magnification:
For a 40 ppm machine, subtract 9 from the [Current Value], enter that new value in
[Current Value] and select [Write NVM].
For a 65 ppm or 55 ppm machine, subtract 5 from the [Current Value], enter that
new value in [Current Value] and select [Write NVM].
NOTE: Examples for a 65 ppm or 55 ppm machine: If the NVM value was +20, the new
value after subtracting 5 would be +15. If the NVM value was +2, the new value after subtracting 5 would be -3. If the NVM value was -10, the new value after subtracting 5 would
be -15. The important thing to remember is subtracting the fixed value from a negative
number always results in a number which is MORE NEGATIVE. (For example, -15 is
MORE NEGATIVE than -10.)
10. Scroll (or Search) to Location [41], [Carr Velocity Corr] and check the value in that location:
a.
If the value is not between -20 and +20, assume the setup failed. Repeat the Adjustment and proceed carefully
b.
If the value is between -20 and +20, proceed to the next step.
If the value is not between 2300 and 2700, assume the setup failed. Repeat the
Adjustment and proceed carefully
b.
If the value is between 2300 and 2700, proceed to the next step.
13. Scroll (or Search) to Location [5], [CVT Slow Scan Registration] and check the value in
that location:
a.
If the value is not between 600 and 1000, assume the setup failed. Repeat the
Adjustment and proceed carefully
b.
If the value is between 600 and 1000, proceed to the next step.
14. Scroll (or Search) to Location [6], [Platen Fast Scan Registration] and check the value in
that location:
a.
If the value is not between 100 and 200, assume the setup failed. Repeat the
Adjustment and proceed carefully
b.
If the value is between 100 and 200, proceed to the next step.
15. Scroll (or Search) to Location [7], [Platen Slow Scan Registration] and check the value in
that location:
a.
If the value is not between 50 and 200, assume the setup failed. Repeat the Adjustment and proceed carefully
b.
16. Be sure to save the NVM to Floppy (GP4), either now or before closing the call.
Repairs and Adjustments
ADJ 14-2
May 2003
4-580
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
5. Parts List
Overview
Introduction .....................................................................................................................
Subsystem Information ...................................................................................................
Symbology ......................................................................................................................
5-3
5-4
5-5
Parts Lists
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
DADF
PL 2.1A DADF (1 of 5) ....................................................................................................
PL 2.1B DADF (2 of 5) ....................................................................................................
PL 2.2 DADF (3 of 5).......................................................................................................
PL 2.3 DADF (4 of 5).......................................................................................................
PL 2.4 DADF (5 of 5).......................................................................................................
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-23
Imaging
PL 3.1 Document Glass, Scanner (1 of 2) ......................................................................
PL 3.2 Document Glass, Scanner (2 of 2) ......................................................................
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-31
Xerographics
PL 5.1A Xerographic Components (1 of 2) .....................................................................
PL 5.1B Xerographic Components (2 of 2) .....................................................................
PL 5.2 ROS .....................................................................................................................
5-32
5-33
5-34
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
5-38
5-39
5-40
5-41
5-42
Electrical
PL 1.1A Electrical Components (1 of 12) ........................................................................
PL 1.1B Electrical Components (2 of 12) ........................................................................
PL 1.2A Electrical Components (3 of 12) ........................................................................
PL 1.2B Electrical Components (4 of 12) ........................................................................
PL 1.3A Electrical - 240/255/265 (5 of 12) ......................................................................
PL 1.3B Electrical - 240/255/265 (6 of 12) ......................................................................
PL 1.3C Electrical - 460/470 (7 of 12) .............................................................................
PL 1.4A Electrical - Atlanta Gold 240/255/265 W/Out Tag 077 (8 of 12) .......................
PL 1.4B Electrical - Atlanta Platinum 240/255/265 W/Tag 077 (9 of 12) ........................
PL 1.4C Electrical - Atlanta Platinum 460/470 (360 NLX) (10 of 12) ..............................
PL 1.5 Electrical Components (11 of 12) ........................................................................
PL 1.6 Electrical Components (12 of 12) ........................................................................
5-35
5-36
5-37
5-43
5-44
5-45
5-46
OCT/Convenience Stapler
PL 8.1 OCT/Convenience Stapler ...................................................................................
5-47
Finisher
PL 8.2 Finisher Covers....................................................................................................
PL 8.3 Finisher Components (1 of 5) ..............................................................................
PL 8.4 Finisher Components (2 of 5) ..............................................................................
PL 8.5 Finisher Components (3 of 5) ..............................................................................
PL 8.6 Finisher Components (4 of 5) ..............................................................................
PL 8.7 Finisher Components (5 of 5) ..............................................................................
5-48
5-49
5-50
5-51
5-52
5-53
May 2003
5-1
5-54
5-55
5-56
5-57
5-58
5-59
5-60
5-61
5-62
5-63
5-64
5-65
5-66
5-67
5-68
5-69
5-70
5-71
5-72
5-73
5-74
5-75
5-76
5-77
Parts List
5-78
5-79
5-80
5-81
5-82
5-83
5-84
5-85
5-86
5-87
5-88
5-89
5-90
5-91
Noise/Ozone/Heat/Air/Dirt (NOHAD)
PL 9.1 Machine Cooling & Filters....................................................................................
5-92
Common Hardware
Common Hardware .........................................................................................................
Parts List
5-93
May 2003
5-2
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Introduction
Other Information
Overview
Abbreviations
The Parts List section identifies all part numbers and the corresponding location of all spared
subsystem components.
Abbreviations are used in the parts lists and the exploded view illustrations to provide
information in a limited amount of space. The following abbreviations are used in this manual:
Table 1 Definitions
Organization
Abbreviation
Parts Lists
Each item number in the part number listing corresponds to an item number in the related
illustration. All the parts in a given subsystem of the machine will be located in the same
illustration or in a series of associated illustrations.
Electrical Connectors and Fasteners
Meaning
A3
A4
A5
AD
Auto Duplex
AWG
DT65/DP65
DocuTech 65 DocuPrint 65
EMI
Common Hardware
GB
Giga Byte
The common hardware is listed in alphabetical order by the letter or letters used to identify
each item in the part number listing and in the illustrations. Dimensions are in millimeters
unless otherwise identified.
KB
Kilo Byte
MB
Mega Byte
MM
Millimeters
MOD
This section contains the illustrations and descriptions of the plugs, jacks, and fasteners used
in the machine. A part number listing of the connectors is included.
MFF
MultiFunction Finisher
NOHAD
PL
Part List
P/O
Part of
R/E
Reduction/Enlargement
REF:
Refer to
SCSI
W/
With
W/O
Without
Table 2 Operating Companies
Operating Companies
Abbreviation
Meaning
AO
Americas Operations
USMG
USO
XCL
XE
Xerox Europe
Symbology
Symbology used in the Parts List section is identified in the Symbology section.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-3
Parts List
Introduction
Subsystem Information
If a part or assembly has an associated repair or adjustment procedure, the procedure number
will be listed at the end of the part description in the parts lists e.g. (REP 5.1, ADJ 5.3)
Brackets
A bracket is used when an assembly or kit is spared, but is not shown in the illustration. The
item number of the assembly or kit precedes the bracket; the item numbers of the piece parts
follow the bracket.
Tag
The notation "W/Tag" in the parts description indicates that the part configuration has been
updated. Check the change Tag index in the General Information section of the Service Data
for the name and purpose of the modification.
In some cases, a part or assembly may be spared in two versions: with the Tag and without the
Tag. In those cases, use whichever part is appropriate for the configuration of the machine on
which the part is to be installed. If the machine does not have a particular Tag and the only
replacement part available is listed as "W/Tag," install the Tag kit or all of the piece parts. The
Change Tag Index tells you which kit or piece parts you need.
Whenever you install a Tag kit or all the piece parts that make up a Tag, mark the appropriate
number on the Tag matrix.
Parts List
May 2003
5-4
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Symbology
A Tag number within a circle pointing to an item number shows that the part has been changed
by the tag number within the circle (Figure 1). Information on the modification is in the Change
Tag Index.
A Tag number within a circle having a shaded bar and pointing to an item number shows that
the configuration of the part shown is the configuration before the part was changed by the Tag
number within the circle (Figure 2).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-5
Parts List
Symbology
A tag number within a circle with no apex shows that the entire drawing has been changed by
the tag number within the circle (Figure 3). Information on the modification is in the Change Tag
Index.
A tag number within a circle with no apex and having a shaded bar shows that the entire
drawing was the configuration before being changed by the tag number within the circle (Figure
4).
Parts List
Symbology
May 2003
5-6
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
101K41803
101K41815
101K42937
101K42947
101K42901
101K42912
2
3
110E07000
110E08780
5
6
7
110K13360
110K08682
123E01301
891E27421
891E33411
891E34811
891E34821
892E26900
892E08790
892E08760
892E27860
892E07570
892E08770
892E07560
892E07540
892E07550
892E27870
892E08780
048E51441
048E51461
048E59840
048E59850
048E59830
048E51451
048E51490
048E51471
10
Description
UI Control Panel Assembly (NASG)
(240/255/265) (W/TAG 082, TAG 089,
TAG 095, TAG 099) (REP 02-1)
UI Control Panel Assembly (XE) (240
ST) (255/265) (W/TAG 082, TAG 089,
TAG 095, TAG 099) (REP 02-1)
UI Control Panel Assembly (NASG)
(460/470) (W/TAG 115, TAG 129, TAG
133, TAG 140) (REP 02-1)
UI Control Panel Assembly (XE)
(460/470) (W/TAG 115, TAG 129, TAG
133, TAG 140) (REP 02-1)
UI Control Panel Assembly (NASG)
(460/470) (W/TAG 102) (W/O TAG 115)
(REP 02-1)
UI Control Panel Assembly (XE)
(460/470) (W/TAG 102) (W/O TAG 115)
(REP 02-1)
Instant OFF Switch
Front Door Interlock Switch (W/TAG
011)
Power ON/OFF Switch (W/TAG 115)
Power ON/OFF Switch (W/O TAG 115)
UI Control Panel (P/O PL 1.1A Item 1)
Backlight (240/255/265) (W/O TAG 082)
UI Keypad Overlay (NASG)
(240/255/265)
UI Keypad Overlay (XE) (240/255/265)
UI Keypad Overlay (Spanish) (NASG)
(240/255/265)
UI Keypad Overlay (Portuguese)
(NASG) (DC/ST)
UI Keypad Overlay (French) (NASG)
(240/255/265)
UI Keypad Overlay (Portuguese)
(NASG) (460/470) (W/O TAG 115)
UI Keypad Overlay (English) (NASG)
(460/470) (W/O TAG 115)
UI Keypad Overlay (French) (NASG)
(460/470) (W/O TAG 115)
UI Keypad Overlay (Portuguese)
(NASG) (460/470) (W/TAG 115)
UI Keypad Overlay MN (460/470) (W/O
TAG 115)
UI Keypad Overlay (Spanish) (NASG)
(460/470) (W/TAG 115)
UI Keypad Overlay (English) (NASG)
(460/470) (W/TAG 115)
UI Keypad Overlay MN (460/470)
(W/TAG 115)
UI Keypad Overlay (French) (NASG)
(460/470) (W/TAG 115)
UI Keypad Overlay (Spanish) (NASG)
(460/470) (W/O TAG 115)
Logo (NASG) (240DC)
Logo (240ST)
Logo (255DC)
Logo (255LP)
Logo (255 ST)
Logo (265 DC)
Logo (265 LP)
Logo (265 ST)
UI Processor PWB (P/O PL 1.1A Item 1)
(W/TAG 082) (REP 02-2)
UI LCD Module (P/O PL 1.1A Item 1)
(W/TAG 082) (REP 02-3)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-7
Parts List
PL 1.1A
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
101K40981
600K75280
600K75270
162K51610
Parts List
PL 1.1B
May 2003
5-8
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
101K40501
101K42660
101K40491
101K40511
117E17820
117K22761
098S04470
098S04469
3
4
105K26690
117K18429
5
6
105K13095
105K24861
7
8
105K18311
117K28610
117K25305
9
10
11
12
117K22913
098S04279
105K24881
162K68110
13
606K07440
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-9
Parts List
PL 1.2A
Part
Description
160K39551
162K23144
162K29610
162K22642
162K22651
105K17930
8
9
708W03501
600K76080
10
600K76050
600K76060
Parts List
PL 1.2B
May 2003
5-10
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
160K40901
2
3
600K88170
162K37912
162K56780
162K28521
162K37930
162K21913
9
10
11
003E40760
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-11
Parts List
PL 1.3A
Part
Description
1
2
733W03696
733W03678
3
4
160K30190
160K37510
160K39411
160K54540
160K50230
8
9
162K44890
162K59700
Parts List
PL 1.3B
May 2003
5-12
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
160K88962
733W14691
604K00370
600K88170
121E17800
160K73490
160K73110
113K02860
8
9
10
11
162K58940
162K58950
162K58970
962K03340
162K58961
12
13
162K58980
133E59650
14
15
030K68351
16
17
18
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-13
Parts List
PL 1.3C
Part
160K39309
600K81900
2
3
117K28232
160K37503
160K08504
160K09002
733W05744
133E50060
117K28272
152S05901
152S05903
152S05906
152S05907
152S05909
152S05910
152S05911
152S05912
152S05913
733W06562
733W06557
10
11
160K59430
12
606K07132
Parts List
PL 1.4A
Description
Main Control PWB (Gold) (240/255/265)
(NOTE: Machines W/O TAG 015 order
Item 1 and Kit 606K06710) (W/TAG 065,
TAG 073, TAG 074, TAG 089) (W/O TAG
077) (REP 03-4)
Platinum Upgrade Kit (Use if 160K39309
is not available) (W/TAG 095)
PCI Link Cable (DT65)
Auto Segmentation PWB (IPSI Daughter
PWB) (Not Spared) (W/O TAG 015, TAG
042) (REP 03-2)
Accessory PWB (NASG) (REP 03-3)
Accessory PWB (REP 03-3)
Rotation SRAM SIMM (240/255/265)
(DT65) (REP 03-5)
EPC DRAM SIMM (16MB) (REP 03-6)
EPC DRAM SIMM (32MB)
(240/255/265) (W/O TAG 077) (REP
03-6)
Sixth Sense Phone Cord (ACO/NASG)
Sixth Sense Phone Cord (French)
Sixth Sense Phone Cord (Dutch)
Sixth Sense Phone Cord
(Norwegian/Finnish)
Sixth Sense Phone Cord (Swedish)
Sixth Sense Phone Cord (Danish)
Sixth Sense Phone Cord (Russian)
Sixth Sense Phone Cord (Swiss)
Sixth Sense Phone Cord (Belgian)
Sixth Sense Phone Cord (Austrian)
NVM RAM Chip (32KB) (240/255/265)
(W/TAG 015) (W/O TAG 077) (REP
03-7)
NVM RAM Chip (128KB) (240/255/265)
(W/TAG 036)
Connector (Low Profile Gold) (Not
Spared)
Card Cage Front Cover (Not Spared)
Electronic Hole Removal PWB (DC)
(W/TAG 296)
Electronic Hole Removal Kit (W/TAG
296)
May 2003
5-14
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
160K65433
2
3
117K28232
160K64610
160K37503
160K08504
133E59650
160K60133
117K28272
606K07290
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-15
Parts List
PL 1.4B
Part
Description
160K80762
160K71892
160K37503
160K08504
606K07431
160K72401
160K65342
160K73838
160K73336
133E59650
133E61830
10
Parts List
PL 1.4C
May 2003
5-16
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
1
2
162K29434
3
4
162K14268
110E07780
5
6
160K72974
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
160K43300
162K38220
162K39001
162K38982
162K40850
103K01030
604K04261
604K04250
15
604K05690
16
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-17
Parts List
PL 1.5
Part
Description
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
160K28652
162K07274
162K14282
113K02047
113E16841
600K75681
10
11
12
13
14
708W04001
160K54102
127K40900
130E06980
Parts List
PL 1.6
May 2003
5-18
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
PL 2.1A DADF (1 of 5)
Item
Part
Description
022S06755
022S06688
048K53292
802K41360
050K44913
050K53570
130K53461
050K39506
004K00914
004K01192
9
10
031E08720
019K04352
11
12
011E07631
13
14
15
125E02181
600K89640
16
17
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-19
Parts List
PL 2.1A
PL 2.1B DADF (2 of 5)
Item
Part
Description
048K53378
130E06851
130E10610
001K56397
8
9
606K06880
10
11
12
13
14
006E42535
003K10012
130E02271
15
16
17
18
019E27452
031K05390
19
604K16900
Parts List
PL 2.1B
May 2003
5-20
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
PL 2.2 DADF (3 of 5)
Item
Part
Description
022K56016
3
4
108R00149
108R00151
130K53461
7
8
015K27374
9
10
006K17191
11
12
130E06851
600K76000
13
121E10383
14
15
16
17
18
19
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-21
Parts List
PL 2.2
PL 2.3 DADF (4 of 5)
Item
Part
Description
2
3
162K11386
4
5
6
7
160K44432
423W02349
423W01349
606K07220
10
11
606K06890
12
13
14
604K04490
15
Parts List
PL 2.3
May 2003
5-22
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
PL 2.4 DADF (5 of 5)
Item
Part
Description
5
6
7
055K24065
055K24075
600K67893
604K08490
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-23
Parts List
PL 2.4
Part
Description
062S02384
062S02389
062S02385
048K36825
802K22690
002E62856
802E20820
801K00301
017K03361
017K01747
001K58228
600K75950
7
8
Parts List
PL 3.1
May 2003
5-24
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
600K54633
600K54643
2
3
003E27481
4
5
117K18438
105K17072
122K01635
9
10
11
12
130K53461
162K37971
604K13050
13
14
15
604K04490
16
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-25
Parts List
PL 3.2
Part
050K35159
050K53000
050K46211
2
3
108R00148
108R00150
007K12921
5
6
7
055K25741
055K23983
022K51135
022K50958
802E19480
048K53341
10
11
12
13
14
001K58033
096E62511
096E62521
096E62531
096E62501
600K89760
130K53452
15
16
17
18
103K01210
038E16214
022K53414
606K07030
19
20
21
22
038K10882
23
24
038K13120
109R00658
038E15922
038E22950
Parts List
PL 4.1A
Description
Paper Tray Assembly (460/470) (W/O
TAG 115) (REP 07-2,ADJ 8-1B)
Paper Tray Assembly (240/255/265)
(W/O TAG 115) (REP 07-2,ADJ
8-1B)
Paper Tray Assembly (460/470)
(W/TAG 115) (REP 07-2,ADJ 8-1B)
Paper Tray (P/O PL 4.1A Item 1)
Paper Feed Roll Cartridge (NASG)
Paper Feed Roll Cartridge (XE)
Paper Feed Drives Plate (NOTE: This
part is preconfigured for a 40 PPM
machine. A jumper must be removed
from this part for it to function correctly in
a 65 PPM machine) (REP 07-1)
Lower Guide (W/TAG 002, TAG 066)
Upper Guide Assembly (W/TAG 066)
Vertical Transport (REP 08-1,ADJ
8-1B)
Registration Transport Assembly (REP
08-2,ADJ 8-1A)
Paper Tray Front Cover (W/TAG 115)
Paper Tray Front Cover (W/O TAG
115)
Paper Tray Rail (Left and Right)
Paper Tray 1 Label (W/O TAG 115)
Paper Tray 2 Label (W/O TAG 115)
Paper Tray 3 Label (W/O TAG 115)
Paper Tray 4 Label (W/O TAG 115)
Paper Tray Slide KIt (2 slides/kit)
Wait Station Sensor
Upper Guide (P/O PL 4.1A Item 6,PL
4.1A Item 20)
IOT Paper Heater (XE) (W/TAG 299)
Duplex Guide
Paper Tray Feed Head
2/4 Hole Paper Feed Guide Kit (W/TAG
066)
Lower/Upper Guide Assembly (P/O PL
4.1A Item 20)
Lower/Upper Guide (P/O PL 4.1A Item
18)
Paper Tray Slide (P/O PL 4.1A Item
1,PL 4.1A Item 22)
Front Side Guide (240/255/265
DT/DP65)
Front Side Guide (460/470)
Tabs Tray Insert Kit
Rear Side Guide (blue)
Rear Side Guide (green) (460/470)
May 2003
5-26
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
2
3
4
5
130E07610
604K03950
604K04180
7
8
9
10
604K03960
11
12
13
14
121E16950
15
16
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-27
Parts List
PL 4.1B
Part
Description
606K06921
5
6
7
600K89530
Parts List
PL 4.1C
May 2003
5-28
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
059K29130
022K57980
802K21630
802K21620
3
4
5
6
026K01260
110E07780
048K74071
048K57030
7
8
9
048E43630
050P02096
103K01130
103K01120
10
11
12
048K72722
13
048K74061
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-29
Parts List
PL 4.2A
Part
055E43601
022K64440
022K79371
5
6
108R00148
108R00150
050K46440
050K34966
007K12600
127K41132
10
160K45082
600K70770
11
600K75870
12
13
030K67141
809E30770
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
606K06911
606K07181
21
Parts List
PL 4.2B
Description
Part of HCF/Bypass Tray Assembly
(REF: PL 4.2A Item 1)
HCF Paper Handling Baffle (W/TAG
H006 W/O TAG H004)
HCF Feeder (W/TAG H005, TAG H006)
(REP 08-5)
Bypass Tray Feeder (W/TAG H005,
TAG H006) (REP 08-4)
Bushing (P/O PL 4.2B Item 1)
Paper Feed Roll Cartridge (NASG)
Paper Feed Roll Cartridge (XE)
Bypass Input Tray (W/TAG 115) (REP
07-6)
Bypass Input Tray (W/O TAG 115) (REP
07-6)
HCF Bypass Tray Feed Motor (Includes
Belt) (NOTE: W/O Tag H009 must also
replace Item 10 and mark off Tag H009)
(W/TAG H002, TAG H009) (REP 08-3)
HCF Elevator Motor Assembly (W/TAG
115) (REP 07-5)
HCF PWB (H4D) (W/Jumper) (460/470)
(NOTE: E2Y is a HCF W/O Front Door.
H4D is a HCF W/Front Door) (REP 07-9)
HCF PWB (E2Y) (W/Jumper) (NOTE:
E2Y is a HCF W/O Front Door. H4D is a
HCF W/Front Door) (REP 07-9)
HCF Feed Improvement Kit (W/TAG
079, TAG H007)
Retard Bracket (W/TAG H007)
HCF Feed Spring, Nominal Force
(NOTE: For use with normal to heavyweight papers) (W/TAG H007)
HCF Feed Spring, Low Force (P/O PL
4.2B Item 20) (W/TAG H112)
Drive Actuator (P/O PL 4.2B Item 3,PL
4.2B Item 11)
Lift Actuator (P/O PL 4.2B Item 3,PL
4.2B Item 11)
Solenoid (P/O PL 4.2B Item 3,PL 4.2B
Item 11)
Solenoid Bracket (P/O PL 4.2B Item 3)
HCF Feeder Cover (P/O PL 4.2B Item
3)
HCF 4 Hole Kit (W/TAG H004)
HCF Feed Improvement Kit ((NOTE:
This kit is for light weight paper only and
may reduce Feed Roll Cartridge life.)
(W/TAG H112)
Torsion Shaft (P/O PL 4.2B Item 4)
May 2003
5-30
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
059K28900
022K57990
3
4
5
108R00148
108R00150
048E47050
026K01260
050P02096
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-31
Parts List
PL 4.3
Part
Description
113R00621
113R00623
113R00620
113R00622
113R00624
064K01550
4
5
025E03096
606K06950
Parts List
PL 5.1A
May 2003
5-32
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
604K00702
604K00712
3
4
130K54161
094K04442
6
7
8
053K03600
093K03411
093K02922
9
10
130K59510
11
12
13
606K07240
14
15
16
600K88070
17
18
19
20
21
22
600K88840
604K00171
604K00620
23
24
25
26
27
604K13680
28
29
Description
Developer Housing Kit (REP 09-2)
Developer Housing High Altitude Kit
Developer Housing Support Rail (Not
Spared) (REP 09-10)
BTAC Sensor (REP 09-3)
Dry Ink Dispenser (W/O Low Toner Bottle Sensor) (DC/ST) (REP 09-4)
Dry Ink Dispenser (W/Low Toner Bottle
Sensor) (DT65), (LP only) (Not Spared)
(Order the Toner Bottle Sensor - Item 20
and the Dry Ink Dispenser W/O the Sensor - Item 4))
Developer Housing (P/O PL 5.1B Item
1)
Dry Ink Cartridge (Not Spared)
Developer Collector Tube
Developer Collector Bottle (NASG)
(240/255/265/DT65/460/470)
Developer Collector Bottle (XE)
(240/255/265/DT65/460/470)
Developer Collector Sensor
Bottle of Developer Material (P/O PL
5.1B Item 18)
Developer Housing Trickle Cap (P/O PL
5.1B Item 1)
High Altitude Gear Kit (W/TAG 292)
Donor Roll Gear (P/O PL 5.1B Item 1,PL
5.1B Item 12)
Donor/Magnet Roll Gear (P/O PL 5.1B
Item 1,PL 5.1B Item 12)
Magnet Roll Drive Gear 32/29T (P/O PL
5.1B Item 1,PL 5.1B Item 27)
Developer Housing Top Cover Kit
(W/TAG 088)
Developer Housing Top Cover (P/O PL
5.1B Item 16)
Developer Material Replacement Kit
Donor Roll Kit
Toner Bottle Sensor
Donor Roll (P/O PL 5.1B Item 19)
Donor Roll Bearing (P/O PL 5.1B Item
19) (2 Places)
Donor Roll Contact (P/O PL 5.1B Item
19)
Donor Roll Seal Inboard (P/O PL 5.1B
Item 1,PL 5.1B Item 20)
Donor Roll Seal Outboard (P/O PL 5.1B
Item 1)
BTAC Mounting Bracket (P/O PL 5.1B
Item 1)
Developer Balanced Sump Gears
(W/TAG 278)
Pickup Auger Gear (70/49T) (P/O PL
5.1B Item 27)
Mix Auger Gear (63T) (P/O PL 5.1B Item
27)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-33
Parts List
PL 5.1B
PL 5.2 ROS
Item
Part
Description
1
2
600K75400
062K08922
062K09261
Parts List
PL 5.2
May 2003
5-34
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
022K70283
022K78683
600K70692
3
4
019E40980
022K59526
5
6
300K63850
600K75203
103K01140
103K01340
9
10
809E45820
11
12
012E07562
600K87870
13
14
121E14391
15
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-35
Parts List
PL 6.1A
Part
Description
2
3
4
121E16940
007E52380
8
9
055K32600
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
809E13571
023E14361
19
20
21
22
604K03980
604K03990
015K26032
23
059K29800
Parts List
PL 6.1B
May 2003
5-36
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
022K37486
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-37
Parts List
PL 6.1C
Part
Description
604K13441
2
3
130K53461
121E14401
Parts List
PL 6.1D
May 2003
5-38
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
PL 6.2A Fusing (1 of 3)
Item
Part
Description
109R00330
109R00334
109R00328
109R00332
109R00345
109R00341
109R00343
109R00339
109R00347
109R00329
109R00333
109R00344
109R00340
109R00346
109R00327
109R00331
109R00342
109R00338
050K52934
3
4
5
010E03825
010E03935
003E38990
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-39
Parts List
PL 6.2A
PL 6.2B Fusing (2 of 3)
Item
Part
Description
2
3
4
5
108K00711
113E16831
130K65890
6
7
604K00181
604K18150
10
019K03399
019K05410
11
604K05601
604K18160
Parts List
PL 6.2B
May 2003
5-40
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
2
3
4
600K87920
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
809E45820
007E37431
007K08262
007K08272
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-41
Parts List
PL 6.2C
PL 6.3 Inverter
Item
Part
Description
3
4
160K59672
130E06851
059K29800
9
10
121E14391
11
12
13
14
022K51950
15
16
17
18
009E67421
005K04227
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
604K00241
604K00250
809E13571
809E12211
121E14401
27
Parts List
PL 6.3
May 2003
5-42
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
604K17010
604K12840
068K07634
068K07054
068K16354
068K16366
068K20040
423W00548
423W00448
423W00248
9
10
600K67481
11
12
13
14
15
16
600K71820
17
Description
Developer Drive Motor
(255/265/460/470) (W/TAG 006,
TAG 055, TAG 071) (REP 04-1,ADJ
8-1A)
Developer Drive Motor (240)
(W/TAG 006, TAG 055, TAG 281)
(REP 04-1,ADJ 8-1A)
Developer Gear Bracket (240)
(REP 04-3)
Developer Gear Bracket (255/265)
(DT65) (460/470) (REP 04-3)
Fuser Drive Motor (240) (W/TAG
056) (REP 04-2)
Fuser Drive Motor (255/265)
(DT65) (460/470) (W/TAG 056)
(REP 04-2)
Decurler/OCT Drive Bracket
(240/255/265) (DT65) (W/TAG 030)
(W/O TAG 090) (REP 04-4)
Fuser Drive Gear (P/O PL 7.1 Item
15)
Retaining Ring (P/O PL 7.1 Item
15)
Decurler Drive Belt (120T)
(240/255/265) (DT65) (NOTE: Not
required for machines with Tag 083,
Exit Baffle) (W/O TAG 090) (REP
04-5)
Developer Drive Belt (6mm) (161T)
(240 W/Tag 281, 255/265/460/470)
(REP 04-6)
Developer Drive Belt (6mm) (163T)
(240) (W/O TAG 281) (REP 04-6)
Developer Drive Motor Gear Kit
Gear (P/O PL 7.1 Item 9) (50T
Plastic Gear. To obtain the metal
gear order the Developer Drive
Motor)
Gear (P/O PL 7.1 Item 9) (60T)
Retaining Ring (P/O PL 7.1 Item 9)
Gear (41T) (P/O PL 7.1 Item 9)
Gear (P/O PL 7.1 Item 9) (31T)
Fuser Drive Gear Kit
Decurler Drive Gear (P/O PL 7.1
Item 3)
Decurler Drive Belt Tensioner (P/O
PL 7.1 Item 3)
NOTE:
NOTE:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-43
Parts List
PL 7.1
Part
Description
802K21841
048K17716
2
3
4
5
6
003E30593
029E19172
003E54460
048E03664
8
9
10
048K17726
021E07180
017K01972
11
017K01982
12
13
014E26262
050P02096
Parts List
PL 7.2
May 2003
5-44
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
048K17743
802K01070
048K17732
802K01060
048E10243
802E01240
048E10253
802E01250
048K42873
802K21010
802K21250
048K32362
802K01050
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-45
Parts List
PL 7.3
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
5
048K73840
802K07380
048E59750
030K62730
6
7
8
9
10
030K68490
003E41720
098K87320
606K07310
Parts List
PL 7.4
May 2003
5-46
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
022K59060
162K07645
160K31522
029K01629
048E26154
8
9
10
11
12
13
801K12100
030K62720
050K40040
019K04330
048K57900
029E27200
162K16722
14
15
160K32371
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-47
Parts List
PL 8.1
Part
802E01230
048E28420
802E20270
048E28472
050E17851
4
5
6
050E11366
050E21640
048K56873
048E28482
802E01220
048E28440
802E01200
048E28400
802E52950
802E01210
9
10
11
12
048E28391
802E52960
017K02252
017K02240
048E28461
802K21370
802K21390
13
14
15
802K54880
048E31071
048E41730
038K12760
038K11682
16
050K50733
050K44940
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
050K41760
160K32240
110E08350
110E04251
604K12850
Description
Lower Rear Cover (W/TAG 115 or NF3)
Lower Rear Cover (W/O TAG 115)
Lower Rear Right Cover (W/TAG 115 or
NF3)
Lower Rear Right Cover (W/O TAG 115)
Finisher Top Tray (green) (W/TAG 115 or
NF3)
Finisher Top Tray (white) (W/O TAG 115)
Finisher Top Tray (dark gray)
Lower Right Cover
Upper Right Cover
Upper Rear Cover (W/TAG 115 or NF3)
Upper Rear Cover (W/O TAG 115)
Finisher Top Cover (green) (W/TAG 115
or NF3)
Finisher Top Cover (W/O TAG 115)
Finisher Top Cover (white)
Finisher Top Cover Door (green) (W/TAG
115 or NF3)
Finisher Top Cover Door (W/O TAG 115)
Finisher Top Cover Door (white)
Right Casters
Left Casters
Top Gutter Cover
Front Cover Assembly (green) (W/TAG
115 or NF3)
Front Cover Assembly (blue) (W/O TAG
115)
Front Cover Assembly (gray)
Lower Left Rear Trim
Upper Left Rear Trim
Tamper Button (W/TAG 115 or NF3)
(W/TAG F023,)
Tamper Button (W/O TAG F023, TAG
115)
Stacker Tray (PE1) (NOTE: W/TAG 115
or NF3. Product Code PE1 indicates
Smart Tray Finisher, W/Tag F024)
Stacker Tray (W/TAG F027 W/O TAG
115)
Stacker Tray (W/O TAG F027, TAG 115)
Safety Guard (Not Spared)
Pause/Resume Switch
Stacker Tray Rear Upper Limit Switch
Switch Mounting Bracket (Not Spared)
Leaf Spring (Not Spared)
Interlock Switch
Front Cover (P/O PL 8.2 Item 12)
Thin Stapled Sets Tray Kit
Parts List
PL 8.2
May 2003
5-48
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
801K06632
2
3
4
5
6
7
023E16920
030K57626
130K53461
007E37183
030K71300
019E35692
019E38020
023E23220
9
10
11
12
020E23532
023E23810
038K11727
048K72737
13
14
15
16
130K66330
160K44456
960K10060
17
18
413W29457
19
20
21
600K88761
22
23
606K07360
24
25
26
055E39672
27
28
055E39681
29
30
604K04100
31
32
33
34
600K89781
Description
Top Module Assembly (W/TAG F033)
(REP 12-1)
Nip 3/4 Drive Belt (REP 12-14)
Stacker Drive Motor (REP 12-2)
Disk Home Sensor (Q2)
Disk Drive Gear (72T)
Disk Drive Motor (REP 12-10)
Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamp (rear)
(When replacing Item 7, (rear), you must
also replace PL8.5 Item 7 (front)) (W/O
TAG F027, TAG 115) (REP 12-21)
Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamp (rear)
(W/TAG 115 or NF3. When replacing
Item 7 (rear), you must also replace
PL8.5 Item 7 (front)) (W/TAG F027)
(REP 12-21)
Stacker Tray Drive Belt (rear) (When
replacing Item 8 (rear), you must also
replace PL8.5 Item 8 (front)) (REP
12-20)
Stacker Tray Drive Pulley
Nip 1/2 Drive Belt (REP 12-13)
Finisher Transport Baffle (REP 12-8)
Disk Baffle Assembly (NOTE: Includes
Safety Gate Solenoids) (W/TAG F009,
TAG F014, TAG F017, TAG F028) (REP
12-9)
Disk Shaft (Reference Item 31) (REP
12-11)
Disk Baffle (P/O PL 8.3 Item 12)
Finisher Entrance Sensor (Q1)
Finisher Controller PWB (W/TAG F007,
TAG F026) (W/O TAG 115)
Finisher Controller PWB (W/TAG 115 or
NF3) (W/TAG 115)
Top Module Frame (P/O PL 8.3 Item 1)
Nip3 Drive Shaft Bearing (2), Nip4 Drive
Shaft Bearing (2), Disk Shaft Bearing (2)
Nip3 Drive Shaft Gear (P/O PL 8.3 Item
1)
Nip4 Drive Shaft Gear (P/O PL 8.3 Item
1)
Top Tray Backwall Kit (W/TAG F033)
(REP 12-16)
Static Eliminator Kit (W/TAG F112)
Static Eliminator Power Supply (P/O PL
8.3 Item 22)
Static Eliminator Harness (P/O PL 8.3
Item 22)
Exit Baffle (P/O PL 8.3 Item 22)
Moving - Stapler Safety Gate (REP
12-23)
Fixed - Stapler Safety Gate (REP 12-22)
Disk Finger (P/O PL 8.3 Item 31) (4
Places)
Torsion Spring (P/O PL 8.3 Item 31) (4
Places)
Transport Baffle Idler Kit (Contains 2
Idler Rolls)
Disk Fingers Kit
Idler Spring (P/O PL 8.3 Item 30)
Idler Roller (P/O PL 8.3 Item 30)
Idler Shaft (P/O PL 8.3 Item 30)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-49
Parts List
PL 8.3
Part
Description
130K53461
006K14606
3
4
130K66330
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
055K25130
019E35701
125E02322
125E02524
012E07473
007K12110
413W49457
Parts List
PL 8.4
May 2003
5-50
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
050K50765
050K53921
014K04099
014K07830
015K56074
015K36814
015K57493
130K53461
5
6
7
110E08350
110E05870
019E38020
023E23220
9
10
020E23532
130E08200
11
12
802K41941
048K73404
110E07350
13
014K08031
14
15
127K24432
091K13030
16
17
18
19
606K07390
604K03760
20
21
22
23
809E53490
Description
Service Tray Assembly (460/470)
(W/TAG 115 or NF3) (REP
12-3,ADJ 12-1)
Service Tray Assembly (W/O TAG
115) (REP 12-3,ADJ 12-1)
Fixed Stapler (6UP) (W/TAG 115)
(REP 12-5)
Fixed Stapler (REP 12-5)
Moving Stapler (W/TAG 115 or
NF3) (REP 12-4,ADJ 12-1)
Moving Stapler (W/O TAG 115)
(REP 12-4,ADJ 12-1)
Moving Stapler (REP 12-4,ADJ
12-1)
Stapler Position Home Sensor
(Q4), Kicker Home Sensor (Q5),
Stacker Tray Full Sensor (Q8),
Tamper Home Sensor (Q3) (ADJ
12-1)
Stacker Tray Upper Limit Switch
Stacker Tray Lower Limit Switch
Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamp
(front) (When replacing Item 7
(front), you must also replace PL8.3
Item 7 (rear)) (W/TAG F027)
Stacker Tray Drive Belt (front)
(When replacing Item 8 (front), you
must also replace PL8.3 Item 8
(rear))
Stacker Tray Drive Pulley
Stack Height Sensor (Q16), Stack
Too High Sensor (Q15)
Stapler Access Door (W/TAG F040)
Stapler Access Door (6UP)
Stapler Access Door Interlock
Switch
Finisher Set Separator (W/Tag 115
or NF3, Tag F041) (NOTE: 6UP
models W/O Tag 115 order Item 19,
604K03760)
Transport Drive Motor
Stapler Lead In Baffle (W/TAG 031)
(REP 12-18)
Front Bail Arm (P/O PL 8.5 Item 18)
Rear Bail Arm (P/O PL 8.5 Item 18)
Bail Arm Kit (W/TAG F111)
Finisher Set Separator Kit (W/O
TAG 115)
Tray (REF: PL 8.2 Item 16)
Adhesive Film (P/O PL 8.5 Item 19)
Bail Arm Spring (2 places)
Stapler Frame (Not Spared)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-51
Parts List
PL 8.5
Part
Description
1
2
3
600K75260
6
7
Parts List
PL 8.6
May 2003
5-52
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
606K07472
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-53
Parts List
PL 8.7
Part
Description
1
2
3
802K41832
802K60741
802K60960
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
050K54461
802E43330
802E43630
802E44890
802K61260
802E43291
802E43310
802E43300
029E19172
017K03880
050K54751
004K07010
120E08322
19
20
Front Door
Rear Cover
Top Cover Assembly (REP
12.06.01)
Top Tray (P/O PL 8.20 Item 16)
Top Tray Extension (P/O PL 8.20
Item 16)
Main Tray Assembly
Rear Right Side Cover
Right Booklet Exit Cover (FEC)
Right Side Lower Cover (EVW)
Right Front Cover
Left Front Cover
Rear Left Side Cover
Upper Left Cover
Front Door Hinge Pin
Top Cover (P/O PL 8.20 Item 3)
Caster
Top Output Tray
Left Cover Gasket
Front Door Interlock Switch
Actuator
Spring (Not Spared)
Actuator Cover (Not Spared)
Parts List
PL 8.20
May 2003
5-54
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
801K13361
801K13351
038K15104
038K15234
802K55273
050K55070
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-55
Parts List
PL 8.21
Part
Description
960K11071
2
3
4
5
6
160K96882
160K96871
160K96891
160K96901
160K79522
7
8
9
10
105K26501
053K04310
498K03530
Parts List
PL 8.22A
May 2003
5-56
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
962K12433
962K12414
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-57
Parts List
PL 8.22B
Part
Description
962K10830
962K12480
962K16512
962K01751
IOT/MFF Harness
Interface PWB Harness
AC Power Harness
DC Power Harness
Parts List
PL 8.22C
May 2003
5-58
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
2
3
038K15021
5
6
809E45700
809E43940
10
11
12
13
14
022K79591
038K15031
023E23660
15
020E38410
16
17
18
19
020E30340
007E70240
802K60941
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
809E43970
022K79901
010K03430
010K03443
013E81150
413W30854
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-59
Parts List
PL 8.23
Part
Description
2
3
038K15041
5
6
809E45700
9
10
809E43940
11
12
022K79901
13
013E81150
Parts List
PL 8.24
May 2003
5-60
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
127K41170
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
020E38890
809E48380
020E38410
023E23670
962K16794
127E10300
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-61
Parts List
PL 8.25
Part
Description
038K15313
809E44840
130K67591
9
10
11
038K15011
019E51501
12
13
120E92240
127K43170
14
121K33540
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
023E23640
023E23650
020E38850
020E38860
125E00430
809E45560
962K16822
013E81150
Parts List
PL 8.26
May 2003
5-62
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
2
3
4
5
6
038K15060
830E89700
038E30041
050E20600
121K33530
7
8
050E21880
121K33210
10
11
011E13890
12
13
120E23211
14
15
809E44280
121K33201
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
059K34580
809E43961
013P90359
055E52400
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-63
Parts List
PL 8.27
Part
Description
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
029E37880
012E13030
022E25820
008E07030
809E44490
028E15120
10
11
12
029E38410
059K34410
13
14
15
16
020K12630
023E23630
17
18
19
20
125E00430
809E48140
012K05740
413W30854
Parts List
PL 8.28
May 2003
5-64
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
3
4
130E09710
125K03860
130K67572
809E44280
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
809E44261
019E61611
17
18
19
20
055K33993
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
125E00430
962K16810
801K13960
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-65
Parts List
PL 8.29
Part
Description
127K43528
604K16871
604K13380
121K33651
9
10
023E24630
11
12
13
130K67894
059K34600
Parts List
PL 8.30
May 2003
5-66
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
127K43510
5
6
007E74120
007E73700
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-67
Parts List
PL 8.31
Part
Description
127K43790
2
3
029K03830
4
5
6
802K61900
962K12401
7
8
9
10
013E21560
11
12
13
14
038E28620
830E78861
15
16
038E29251
008R12912
Parts List
PL 8.32
May 2003
5-68
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
2
3
4
5
022E25830
013E23100
019E55801
107E22570
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-69
Parts List
PL 8.33
Part
Description
2
3
604K13400
107E22570
8
9
013E81150
10
11
12
13
14
809E43970
962K01671
125K03840
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
110E13561
007E70260
802K55640
110E13810
22
23
Parts List
PL 8.34
May 2003
5-70
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
107E22600
5
6
7
8
9
10
120E23130
125K03472
11
12
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-71
Parts List
PL 8.35
Part
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
110E08780
055K33842
020E30340
110E08000
8
9
10
11
12
127K43180
13
14
005E13460
15
16
809E45530
17
Parts List
PL 8.36
May 2003
5-72
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
120K02702
2
3
4
120K02690
038K15222
6
7
8
809E53000
050E21870
050E20590
9
10
130K67572
121K33461
11
011E13720
12
13
14
013P90359
125E00430
604K18550
15
16
17
18
023E23440
005E13460
809E45530
020E38410
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
020E30340
809E44450
120E23160
809E43950
120E23420
413W30854
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-73
Parts List
PL 8.37
Part
Description
2
3
4
5
6
010K03472
010K03443
802K60951
10
107E22600
Parts List
PL 8.38
May 2003
5-74
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
055K34090
4
5
6
7
006K28660
130K67602
125K03831
8
9
020E39990
013E12610
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-75
Parts List
PL 8.39
Part
Description
127K44330
3
4
5
6
023E24580
121K33271
022K78851
7
8
809E31200
9
10
11
013E12610
020E39990
12
13
14
15
16
17
962K12444
604K17660
Parts List
PL 8.40
May 2003
5-76
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
4
5
022E26670
059K30860
013E12610
10
11
12
007E69030
13
121K33310
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-77
Parts List
PL 8.41
Part
Description
3
4
5
012E13020
809E25100
8
9
802K54312
10
11
121K33432
12
13
006K28670
023E23300
14
15
127K43770
16
17
809E48440
023E23140
18
19
20
21
22
107E22600
125K03593
604K13370
Parts List
PL 8.42
May 2003
5-78
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
007K13180
007K13190
10
11
12
127K43330
13
14
007E69040
15
107E22600
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-79
Parts List
PL 8.43
Part
Description
4
5
6
7
8
9
020E38512
809E44010
016E17731
809E48830
008E06850
130K67640
10
029K03232
11
12
802E42770
13
14
15
055E51870
Parts List
PL 8.44
May 2003
5-80
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
015K62191
3
4
127K43600
7
8
413W30654
107E22600
10
014E47460
11
12
13
14
032E19330
15
16
17
18
013E81150
012E12730
008E06840
19
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-81
Parts List
PL 8.45
Part
Description
2
3
4
006K26093
006K26103
9
10
809E42861
11
127K43610
12
13
014E47460
107E22600
14
15
16
413W31054
17
18
604K13200
Parts List
PL 8.46
May 2003
5-82
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
2
3
050E20330
020E38700
020E38080
007E68951
007E69081
007E69070
10
11
127K43020
107E22600
12
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-83
Parts List
PL 8.47
Part
Description
055K33861
059K30880
5
6
7
8
802K53670
802E52460
Parts List
PL 8.48
May 2003
5-84
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
3
4
013E81150
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
809E44810
130K67562
962K12493
120E92240
809E44030
12
13
14
125K03531
15
130K67551
16
17
059K30880
18
19
20
21
22
23
050E20621
24
25
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-85
Parts List
PL 8.49
Part
Description
2
3
005K11381
4
5
6
7
023E23290
023E23370
809E48380
Parts List
PL 8.50
May 2003
5-86
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
121K33471
3
4
121K33491
020E38480
5
6
7
8
9
809E44040
130E03991
011E13832
604K17650
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-87
Parts List
PL 8.51
Part
Description
050K54562
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
050E20850
107E22600
127K43321
007E69000
013E12610
12
604K13210
13
14
15
Parts List
PL 8.52
May 2003
5-88
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
023E23270
3
4
5
6
7
8
020E23532
020E31100
022E25810
130K67620
802E52701
9
10
11
802E52370
802E52360
12
13
14
15
010K03481
019E62280
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-89
Parts List
PL 8.53
Part
Description
023E23270
2
3
4
5
020E23532
020E31100
022E25810
110E13590
107E22570
127K40980
127K40990
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
008E06950
010K03481
130K56430
16
17
019E62280
Parts List
PL 8.54
May 2003
5-90
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Part
Description
604K13391
4
5
6
7
8
038K15072
038K15082
019K06163
10
11
12
809E44450
019K06283
13
14
107E22570
15
050E22290
16
17
18
130E09710
962K17381
127K41820
19
20
023E23720
21
22
022K79570
23
24
25
019E52521
962K12471
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
5-91
Parts List
PL 8.55
Part
Description
1
2
600K54550
054K06045
3
4
5
6
054K10564
054K02803
054K03333
8
9
10
11
12
13
127K25820
127E09711
053E04182
053E06671
Parts List
PL 9.1
May 2003
5-92
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Common Hardware
Item
Part
Description
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
AN
AO
AP
AR
AS
AT
AU
AV
AW
AX
BB
CC
DD
EE
600K57932
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
FF
GG
HH
JJ
KK
LL
MM
NN
PP
RR
SS
TT
UU
VV
WW
XX
YY
ZZ
May 2003
5-93
Parts List
Common Hardware
Parts List
Common Hardware
May 2003
5-94
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-6
6-7
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-16
6-17
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-21
6-21
6-22
6-22
6-24
6-25
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-29
6-30
6-30
6-31
6-31
6-32
6-33
6-33
6-34
6-34
6-35
6-36
6-44
6-45
6-50
6-51
6-55
6-57
6-58
6-59
6-60
6-61
6-65
PWS Diagnostics
NVM ...............................................................................................................................
Paper ..............................................................................................................................
IIT ...................................................................................................................................
Self Tests .......................................................................................................................
Configuration ..................................................................................................................
Copier Sys ......................................................................................................................
Faults/Counters ..............................................................................................................
Finishing .........................................................................................................................
Marking ...........................................................................................................................
ESS/Network ..................................................................................................................
ESS Alternate Boot Tool .................................................................................................
6-67
6-68
6-71
6-74
6-77
6-79
6-81
6-82
6-84
6-85
6-87
6-89
6-115
6-125
6-129
IOT Tags
Finisher Tags
HCF Tags
MFF TAGS
Glossary of Terms
Glossary of Terms ..........................................................................................................
May 2003
6-1
6-173
General Procedures
General Procedures
May 2003
6-2
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Purpose
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to connect the PWS to the machine to enable correct communication between the two devices.
The purpose of this procedure is to provide the correct procedure for use of the molex connector probing tool.
Ensure the machine is connected to a correct power source and the machine main power
is switched on.
2.
3.
Connect the serial cable between the PWS serial port and the serial port connector on top
of the machine.
4.
5.
6.
Ensure the correct Comm port is selected when the connection selection window
appears.
1.
2.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-3
General Procedures
GP1 , GP2
Purpose
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is explain how to save or restore the machine NVM on the
machine resident diskette (MRD).
The purpose of the ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) Field Service Kit is to preserve the inherent
reliability and quality of electronic components handled by Field Service personnel. The kit
should be used whenever handling circuit boards and any ESD sensitive components. To prevent further damage, use the kit when handling the circuit boards being returned for repair.
2.
b.
2.
CAUTION
You must ensure that Service is set to [All]. Otherwise, only the NVM locations in the service
displayed will be saved to the floppy.
3.
4.
Ensure the machine resident diskette is in the floppy drive of the PWS.
5.
6.
Select Drive A:
7.
Select [OK]
8.
3.
a.
b.
Connect the snap end of the grounding cord to the snap on the static dissipative
work surface mat, and the plug end to the metal frame on the machine.
c.
Connect the large snap end of the coiled cord to the top snap on the grounding cord.
d.
Connect the small snap end of the coiled cord to the snap on the adjustable cloth
wrist strap or the ESD digital wrist-watch.
e.
Place the adjustable cloth wrist strap or ESD digital wrist-watch snugly on your wrist.
Circuit boards and ESD sensitive components can now be handled without causing any
ESD related damage. Place any of these components which are removed from the
machine on the static dissipative work surface.
2.
Ensure the machine resident diskette is in the floppy drive of the PWS.
3.
b.
c.
d.
In the File Type box, select [All Files *.*]. This will cause all files on the disk (including those with .BNF extensions) to be displayed.
NOTE: Files containing a .BNF extension are given a default filename at call-close.
The default file name is NVM_XXX.BNF. (Where, XXX is a variable number that is
automatically incremented from the last call. A higher number indicates a more
recent call.)
e.
View the list and click on the desired filename. The filename will appear in the File
name box. Select [OK].
f.
Select [Machine] [Upload] [Yes] to upload the file to the machine. When the message NVM Successfully Written appears, select [OK].
4.
5.
Switch the machine power Off, then On in order for the NVM changes to take effect.
For more help on this routine, go to [NVM tab , NVM Tool], and click on Help.
General Procedures
GP4, GP5
May 2003
6-4
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
For Document Feeder Paper Feed Roll Cartridge replacement do the following:
Purpose
This procedure outlines the process for resetting the Life Counters for the Paper Feed Roll
Cartridges.
1.
With the Feeder Replacement window displayed on the Touch Screen, open the Document Feeder Top Cover, replace the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge, then close the
Document Feeder Top Cover.
2.
The Touch Screen will display a window requesting confirmation of replacement of the
DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. Select Confirm .
3.
4.
For Tray 5 and or Tray 6 Paper Feed Roll Cartridge replacement do the following:
1.
2.
In the CRU Information window, highlight the appropriate Paper Feed Roll Cartridge from
the list.
3.
Select [Replace].
4.
A popup window will display the message Do you want to reset the counters for this
feed roll? Select [Yes].
5.
6.
1.
With the Feeder Replacement window displayed on the Touch Screen, open the HCF Top
Cover, replace the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge, then close the HCF Top Cover.
2.
The Touch Screen will display a window requesting confirmation of replacement of the
Tray 5 Paper Feed Roll Cartridge, the Tray 6 Paper Feed Roll Cartridge, or the replacement of the Paper Feed Roll Cartridges in Tray 5 and Tray 6. Select the appropriate
choice.
3.
4.
For Tray 1 , Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 Paper Feed Roll Cartridge replacement do the following:
NOHAD Filters
1.
With the Feeder Replacement window displayed on the Touch Screen, pull out the Tray,
replace the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge, then push in the Tray.
2.
The Touch Screen will display a window requesting confirmation of replacement of the
Paper Feed Roll Cartridge in the Tray, and confirmation the paper in the Tray was
changed. Select the appropriate responses.
3.
4.
Perform the following steps to reset the counters, then select the link to Counters Display:
1.
2.
In the Diagnostic Data window, highlight NOHAD Filter Life (ID 15) from the list.
3.
Select [Reset].
4.
5.
2.
Press the Access button on the keypad to enter the login screen.
3.
Enter the password using the keypad, then select Enter on the Touch Screen.
4.
Select Go to Tools.
5.
On the Touch Screen, select More , Supplies Management , and Feed Roll Cartridge
Replacement .
2.
3.
4.
Select Go to Tools .
5.
On the Touch Screen, select More , Supplies Management , and Feed Roll Cartridge
Replacement .
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-5
General Procedures
GP6
Purpose
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to document how to activate the Start print button on the
User Interface (UI) Control Panel when in diagnostic mode.
The purpose of this procedure is to determine the direction of the grain in any paper stock
Procedure
Procedure
1.
2.
During the paper making process, the majority of the paper fibers align themselves parallel with
one another, and it is this parallel alignment of fibers which is called the "grain" of the paper.
Depending on how the paper is cut to the finished size, it will either be "grain long" (the grain is
parallel to the long edge), or "grain short" (the grain is parallel to the short edge).
3.
4.
When diagnostic mode is exited, a message will appear on the machine UI Display, asking whether the machine should be reset. Answer [YES].
NOTE: If the machine is not reset, the Start print button will not be active for 10 minutes
after diagnostics is exited.
To determine the direction of the grain in a sheet of paper, crease the paper and observe the
creased edge. Paper creases easily and smoothly parallel to the grain, while creases across
the grain tend to have a rough or ragged appearance. Refer to Figure 1 for illustrations of both
types of creases.
General Procedures
GP7 , GP8
May 2003
6-6
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Xerographic Bond
17 x 22
Offset
25 x 38
Cover
20 x 26
Index
25.5 x 30.5
The weight and substance of the uncut reams of papers are used together to establish the
paper specification, such as 20 lb Bond, or 110 lb Index. In other Op Co's (such as RX and
FX), the paper specifications are stated in grams per square meter (gsm), such as 80gsm
Bond.
It is important to understand the different compositions of the papers themselves, along with
different uncut ream sizes, results in a marked inconsistency of weight designations. For
example, 20 lb Xerographic Bond is approximately equal to 50 lb Offset paper.
Figure 1 was developed to help identify equivalent weights of different paper stocks. It shows
a scale for each type of paper listed in Table 1, and the scales are marked so the indicated
weights are relative to the gsm scale at the top of the chart. Drawing a vertical line on the chart
identifies the equivalent weights of several paper stocks, determined by where the vertical line
intersects each scale.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-7
General Procedures
GP9
General Procedures
GP9
May 2003
6-8
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Purpose
Good
Fair
Not Recommended
Mylar Reinforced
(LEF)
The purpose of this procedure is to provide information on which paper trays provide the best
performance for various size and stock papers.
Procedure
Excellent
Good
Fair
Not Recommended
Transparencies
Tab Stock
Table 2 Tray 5
Table 3 Tray 6
2, 3, 4, 5, 7 hole
drilled
Labels (LEF)
GBC (LEF)
Table 4 Duplex
Letterhead
Never Tear
Labels (SEF)
Pre-printed forms
Mylar Reinforced
Quality Carbonless
Envelopes
Good
Fair
Not Recommended
8.5 x 11 (A4)
11 x 17 (A3)
Labels (LEF)
GBC (LEF)
Excellent
Good
Fair
Carbonless
Removable strip
transparencies
(SEF)
Letterhead
GBC (SEF)
11 x 17 or A3
Transparencies
Pre-printed forms
Carbonless
2, 3, 4, 5, 7 hole
drilled
Mylar Reinforces
(SEF)
Quality Carbonless
Tab Stock
Pre-printed forms
Never Tear
Paper Backed
Transparencies (LEF
bound edge trailing)
Letterhead
GBC (SEF)
Labels (SEF)
Quality Recycle
Transparencies
Not Recommended
Labels (LEF)
Envelopes
Good
8.5 x 11 (A4)
Fair
Not Recommended
11 x 17 (A3)
Envelopes
GBC (LEF)
Carbonless
Paper Backed
Transparencies (LEF
bound edge trailing)
2, 3, 4, 5, 7 hole
drilled
Quality Carbonless
Window Stock
Pre-printed forms
Never Tear
Drafting Film
Letterhead
GBC (SEF)
Labels (SEF)
Labels (LEF)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-9
General Procedures
GP10
3.
Check the rear of the machine is at the desired distance from the wall (5 inches or 127mm
is the minimum). If not, repeat the [Moving the Machine Out from the Wall] and the [Moving the Machine Back into Operating Position] procedures to try to steer the machine to
the desired rear clearance.
4.
Once the desired rear clearance is gained, grasp the top corners of the IOT (or Finisher)
at either the left or right end of the machine as required and push the machine end-to-end
to the desired left-to-right position.
5.
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to use a safe method to move the machine to gain access to
the rear for service. The specified method is required in order to avoid personal injury and
machine damage, and to accommodate the fact that only the right casters of the IOT pivot (the
left IOT casters are fixed in a left/right orientation).
NOTE: In this procedure, it is assumed the machine's operating position is with a wall or other
barrier behind it, with approximately the recommended minimum 5 inches (127 mm) clearance
at the rear. This barrier is referred to here as the wall.
WARNING
Whenever possible, push forward, away from the front of your body (not sideways) to
move the machine. This method uses your body's strongest muscles, minimizing the
risk of personal injury.
WARNING
Any time the machine must be moved in the end-to-end direction (left-to-right or rightto-left) on carpet, it is recommended that you get help from a second person. The force
required for this task can exceed the recommended maximum for a single person.
2.
Facing the right end of the machine, grasp the IOT or the Finisher by the top right corner
(not the DADF).
CAUTION
Do not push on the Document Feeder to move the machine. Pushing on the Document Feeder
can misalign it or cause other damage.
3.
Carefully push the machine to your left, pivoting the right end away from the wall, until it is
far enough from the wall to allow you to step behind the machine.
4.
5.
Step behind the machine and, with your back braced against the wall, continue pushing
the right end of the machine away from the wall until the required service clearance is
gained.
Grasping the top corners of the IOT (or Finisher) at either the left or right end of the
machine as required, push the machine end-to-end to position the left rear corner of the
IOT approximately 5 inches (127 mm) from the wall, or at the customer's desired position
for the rear of the machine.
2.
Push on the front of the machine at the right end to pivot the machine back parallel with
the wall.
General Procedures
GP12
May 2003
6-10
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
4.
5.
Remove the screw from the location shown, mate the lever with the bottom of the length
guide, and reinstall the screw into the bottom of the guide (Figure 4).
6.
Ensure the length guide and the lever (size-sensing mechanism) operate smoothly.
7.
8.
NOTE: Though the machine can feed paper as large as 12 x 18, the largest image the scanner can scan is 11.7 x 17.
b.
Enter the Tools pathway. (Press the [Access] key and enter the customers Tools
password, or log into the Auditron screen if present and select [Tools Pathway].)
c.
d.
1.
e.
2.
Select the tray which you are converting back from 12 x 18 inch and select [Change
Stock Size]
3.
4.
Remove the screw from the bottom of the length guide, and reinstall it in the location
shown (Figure 1).
h.
5.
i.
NOTE: After removing the length guide, give it to the customer and inform them they must
keep the guide if they ever wish to convert the tray back to normal operation.
Select the tray which you are converting back from 12 x 18 inch and select [Change
Description].
j.
k.
6.
7.
f.
Select 8.5 x 11 inch LEF paper, then select [Save] and select [Close].
g.
b.
Enter the Tools pathway. (Press the [Access] key and enter the customers Tools
password, or log into the Auditron screen if present and select [Tools Pathway].)
c.
d.
e.
f.
Select the tray which you are converting to 12 x 18 inch and select [Change Description].
g.
Select [Dedicated].
h.
i.
Select [Measurements], ensure that [Units] is set to inches (not mm), and select
[Close].
j.
k.
Select the tray which you are converting to 12 x 18 inch and select [Change Stock
Size].
l.
Select [Custom Size] and enter [12.0] for the width (cross-process direction) and
enter [18.0] for the length (process direction).
m.
Obtain the length guide (removed from the paper tray when it was converted to 12 x 18
inch) from the customer.
2.
Remove the Paper Tray Assembly which is to be converted back from 12 x 18 inch.
3.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-11
General Procedures
GP13
1
Remove the T20
screw from the
bottom of the
length guide.
3
Reinstall
the screw
here to
secure the
lever in this
position.
2
Pivot the lever to
align this hole with
the hole in the bottom of the tray.
General Procedures
GP13
May 2003
6-12
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1
Press the
release button.
2
Lift, rotate, and
remove the
guide.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-13
General Procedures
GP13
1
Insert the guide
as shown.
3
Ensure the
guide is under
tabs as shown.
2
Rotate the guide
into position.
General Procedures
GP13
May 2003
6-14
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
3
Install the screw
and tighten until
it stops.
1
Remove the
T20 screw.
2
Pivot the lever as necessary and
insure the boss on the bottom of
the paper guide is inserted through
the slot in the lever.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-15
General Procedures
GP13
8.
Purpose
The purpose is to switch the machine's Installation Phase (Install Phase, or mode) from the
normal Install Complete phase to a different phase, and/or switch to Install Complete phase
from another phase. The possible Install Phases are as follows:
Either answer [Yes] to resetting the machine or switch off the machine power after exiting
Diagnostics.
2.
Select [Configuration].
3.
Fic phase is only used in manufacturing or during VALO operation -- it is not to be used by
Field Service personnel.
4.
Select [System].
5.
Under [Install Phase], pull down the menu and select [Install Complete].
Customer Install phase is the state in which the machine is delivered to the customer.
Upon the first power-up by the customer or by delivery personnel, the full Installation Wizard sequence of UI screens leads the installer through an initial IOT setup for the customers configuration and location. Upon completion of the Installation Wizard, the
machine transitions automatically to Install Complete phase.
6.
7.
[Exit] Diagnostic Navigator and close the current session to take the machine out of Diagnostics.
Customer Setup phase is the state to which the machine transitions automatically if the
operator accepts a detected configuration change displayed on the UI, if the new configuration requires a setup (e.g. Trays 5 and 6 top edge registration if a HCF/Bypass Tray is
added). A sequence of UI screens (a subset of the Installation Wizard screens) leads the
operator through the necessary setup. Upon completion of the setup, the machine transitions automatically to Install Complete phase.
Either answer [Yes] to resetting the machine or switch off the machine power after exiting
Diagnostics.
to switch the machine to Customer Install phase to have it go through the Installation Wizard,
to switch the machine from Customer Install phase to Install Complete phase if the Installation Wizard cannot be completed, or
2.
Select [Configuration].
3.
4.
Select [System].
5.
Under [Install Phase], pull down the menu and select the desired phase, such as [Customer Install] .
NOTE: For 3.0 (L0.17.1) or later software, be sure to set both the [Install Phase (System)]
and the [Install Phase (Main Controller)].
6.
7.
[Exit] Diagnostic Navigator and close the current session to take the machine out of Diagnostics.
NOTE: Answer [No] to downloading NVM.
NOTE: The machine must now be reset or powered off in order for the selected installation phase to take effect.
General Procedures
GP14
May 2003
6-16
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Purpose
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to provide a means to allow connection of a third-party device
to the machine.
There are eight copy/print meters (Billing Counters) in this machine. The copy/print meters
available in the Counters area are listed in Table 1.
Each meter display can be individually enabled or disabled by changing a bit in NVM.
Machines are shipped from manufacturing with only meter C13 enabled, but the customer can
request the other meters be enabled. Changing the NVM bit(s) can occur on-site by a CSE.
See Meters Display Enable/Disable Procedure.
1.
2.
Connect the device to the machine by following the instructions provided with the device.
The Foreign Interface connector P7/J6 is located in the recessed area at the rear of the
machine.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
If the Billing Counters are reset for any reason (e.g. the NVM RAM Chip or Software/NVM
Module is replaced, or all machine variable NVM is initialized), you must report the meters
being reset according to Meters Reset Reporting Procedure.
Table 1 Copy/Print Meters
Select [External Auditron] to enable communications between the machine and the external device.
Meter
#
Meter Name
NVM Service
C13
C1
[Copy Service]
C10
Copy 11x17 A3
Sheets Displayable
[Copy Service]
C7
C4
[Copy Service]
NOTE: Sheets and images removed during jam clearance actions or sheets and images
purged after jam clearance are not included.
NOTE: Meter C13 is always enabled. This appears in NVM Tool as Copy Marked Images Displayable.
Compound images (e.g., N-up, annotated images, merged images) will count as a single
image
Composite Feature selection resulting in two separate outputs will be counted in each
appropriate counter.
The print meters available in the ESS Counters area are listed in Table 2.
Table 2 ESS Print Meters
NOTE: 1 Known blank pages are not counted as images (e.g., blank transparency dividers,
odd last sheets of 1-2 sided copy jobs, etc.
Meter Name
NVM Service
NOTE: 2 Blank sheets and banner sheets will be included in these counts
[Print Service]
[Print Service]
[Print Service]
[Print Service]
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-17
General Procedures
GP15 , GP17
NVM Service
Purpose
[xfer Service]
[xfer Service]
If the Auditron Administrator access code number (PIN) has been corrupted or the Administrator cannot remember the previously set access code, the default PIN can be set from the PWS
until a new code can be entered by the Administrator. The purpose of this procedure is to reset
the Auditron Administrator access code to the default setting. The default PIN is 1111 .
NOTE: Resetting the Auditron Administrator access code to the default setting will not change
or remove any previously entered customer account PIN numbers.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
To add a billing meter to the display, in the Display column, click the No box at the appropriate line.
1.
From the PWS, launch the Diagnostic Navigator. Select [Local]. After a short wait, the
Diagnostic Navigator window will be displayed.
4.
The box will change to Yes and will be Xed to show it is selected.
2.
5.
To remove a copy/print meter from the display, click the Yes box at the appropriate line.
The box will change to No and will be not be Xed.
3.
4.
Answer [Yes] to the question: This will reset the Auditron Administrator PIN to the
default value. Are you sure? .
5.
6.
6.
Repeat step 4 (if necessary) and step 5 for each meter to be enabled/disabled.
7.
Perform the following procedure to reset the Auditron Administrator Access Code:
From Diagnostic Navigator, select the [Faults/Counters] tab and select [ESS Counters
Display].
2.
3.
To add a billing meter to the display, in the Display column, click the No box at the appropriate line.
4.
The box will change to Yes and will be Xed to show it is selected.
5.
To remove a copy/print meter from the display, click the Yes box at the appropriate line.
The box will change to No and will be not be Xed.
6.
Repeat step 4 (if necessary) and step 5 for each meter to be enabled/disabled.
7.
General Procedures
GP17, GP18
May 2003
6-18
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2.
Inspect all of the systems covers, trays, front door, panels, labels, and bezels. Replace
any that are damaged or missing.
3.
Inspect the PWS serial and parallel ports on the machine for damage or bent pins.
Replace the PWS Cable (PL 1.2A) as required.
4.
Clean the Platen Glass and other Scanner components per REP 14-3.
5.
The system may only be used as a demo or for a customer satisfaction replacement (like-forlike).
6.
7.
Clean the Upper and Lower Paper Guides and sensors, and the Vertical Transport rollers
(PL 4.1A ).
8.
Clean any paper dust from Paper Tray Wait Station Sensor (S1), Registration Sensor (S2)
on the Registration Transport Assembly (PL 4.1A) and Prefuser Sensor (S3) on the Prefuser Transport (PL 6.1A).
Clean the sensors in the Inverter (S4 and S5).
265 LP
240/255 DC
9.
IOT
IOT
IOT
HCF
HCF
11. Inspect the Developer Housing for damage or leaking developer. Replace the Developer
Housing PL 5.1B as necessary.
Finisher
Finisher
OCT or Finisher
12. On the PWS, enter the Diagnostic Navigator and select the [Faults / Counters] tab, and
then [Faults]. Check the last 40 faults and the fault counter. Perform any necessary service action.
Shelf
--
Shelf (optional)
Stapler
--
Stapler (optional)
13. Install all mandatory system retrofits (found in manual and electronic format). Check the
Change/Tag Matrixes of the IOT and the input/output devices for all the appropriate tags.
If necessary, obtain and install the most current tags to bring the system up to the correct
tag level.
The System must also meet the following criteria to qualify for CBU Dust-off (Category A):
14. Check for skew and perform the ADJ 05-1 DADF Skew adjustment procedure, if necessary.
Must meet a minimum build configuration (IOT Serial Number can be no lower than 2UP074008 (265 DC) (serial number for ST, LP, 240 and 255 are TBD).
IOT CRUs
1.
Inspect the Dry Ink Cartridge. Install a new Dry Ink Cartridge PL 5.1B if it is less than 1/3
full.
NOTE: Any system that does not meet the above criteria must flow through Category B
(extended dust-off process at the XCC) or Category C (returned for re-manufacturing at the
Focus Factory Site).
2.
Inspect the Developer Collector Bottle. Install a new Developer Collector Bottle PL 5.1B if
it is more than 2/3 full.
3.
The following is an overview of the tasks that will be performed during CBU dust-off:
4.
On the machine UI, press the [Machine Status] key and then select the [Supplies] tab on
the touch screen.
5.
Check the indication for the Xerographic Module (PL 5.1A Item 1). Replace the module if
the indication is over 25,000 copies.
6.
Check the indication for the Fuser Module (PL 6.2A ). Replace the module if the indication
is over 125,000 copies.
Install all mandatory system retrofits (found in manual and electronic format).
Follow standard Call Close procedures: Run a matrix of copies. Record the metereadings. Record the call and state what was done to the system.
Order replacements for any of the following loose items that are missing:
power cord
phone cord
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
DADF
1.
2.
Replace the DADF Paper Feed Roll Cartridge (PL 2.2), and reset the life counter (GP6).
3.
Inspect the Document Restack Guide (PL 2.1A Item 9) for damage, and replace as necessary.
Replace the Bypass Tray and HCF Paper Feed Roll Cartridges (PL 4.2B Item 6 or PL 4.3
Item 2) and all Paper Tray Paper Feed Roll Cartridges (PL 4.1A Item 3). Be sure to reset
the life counters (GP6).
May 2003
6-19
General Procedures
GP19
2.
Inspect all paper trays for damage. Replace the Paper Tray(s) PL 4.1A as necessary.
In LO17 SW, when performing a Dust Off, the NVM values that cause a full wizard to be run when Uninstall phase is set to Customer Install are not reset,
resulting in the Tray 5/6 registration setups not being run.
To ensure the wizard will prompt the correct setups, reset the NVM values to 0
as indicated in Table 2.
Finisher
1.
Inspect the Service Tray Assembly (PL 8.4) and Top Module Assembly (PL 8.3) for damage. Replace as necessary.
2.
3.
Inspect the Staple Cartridges. Hold the cartridge up to the light. If it is less than half full,
replace the cartridge.
OCT
1.
Inspect the OCT Stacking Fingers (PL 8.4) for damage, and replace as necessary.
2.
Accessory Shelf
1.
Inspect the Accessory Shelf (PL 8.1) for damage. Replace as necessary.
2.
Convenience Stapler
1.
Inspect the Convenience Stapler (PL 8.1) for damage. Replace as necessary.
2.
Inspect the Staple Cartridge. Hold the cartridge up to the light. If it is less than half full,
replace the cartridge.
ST or LP
1.
b.
c.
Select [Start].
Service
Module
Location
Value
Machine Phone
Number Setup
DC Platform Manager
None
28
ModuleHasBeenSetup
Mark
F2IOT/F1IOT
96
ModuleHasBeenSetup
Mark
96
ModuleHasBeenSetup
Mark
96
ModuleHasBeenSetup
Mark
SMH
96
5.
6.
NOTE: System packaging and delivery will be determined by the carrier's relocation process.
2.
Ensure a Configuration Report will print out. Troubleshoot and repair as necessary.
3.
4.
Install any mandatory ESS retrofits. Check the Change/Tag Matrixes of the IOT for all the
appropriate tags. If necessary, obtain and install the most current tags to bring the ESS
up to the correct tag level.
Run test copies and evaluate the image quality. If image quality does not meet specifications, go to the IQ-1, IQ Entry RAP.
2.
3.
4.
Perform the following to reset the install wizard for customer install:
a.
From the PWS, launch the Diagnostic Navigator. Select [Local]. After a short wait,
the Diagnostic Navigator window will be displayed.
b.
Select [Configuration], and then [System, Imaging and IOT Configuration]. Click on
[Install Phase].
c.
To enable Customer Install, select [Customer Install] or [Customer Setup]. To disable Customer Install, select [Install Complete].
d.
e.
If the machine has a version of LO17 installed, perform the following (if any other
version LO15, LO18, go to the next step):
General Procedures
GP19
May 2003
6-20
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Purpose
Purpose
These machines comply with the federal guidelines for energy conservation. Part of that compliance involves an automatic control to cut back on electrical power consumption during periods of inactivity.
The purpose of this procedure is to place the User Interface into a state in which it will accept a
software download (upload, from the PWS' perspective). This is required whenever uploading
software to the UI as part of a UI replacement, but is not normally required for a full system
software upgrade. However, this procedure can be used when the UI fails to respond during a
software upgrade, such as if the parallel cable is not connected securely.
Procedure
There are two stages of Power Saver available: Low Power Mode and Off.
Procedure
If the machine is inactive for a pre-determined amount of time, it will automatically enter
Low Power Mode, which switches off some outputs of the LVPS and lights the Power
Saver indicator on the UI.
1.
2.
Ensure the parallel and serial cables are connected securely to both the PWS and the
machine.
If the machine remains inactive for an additional pre-determined amount of time, it is automatically switched completely off.
3.
Press and hold the C and # buttons simultaneously, and switch on the machine power.
Wait approximately ten seconds, then release the C and # buttons.
NOTE: During Low Power Mode, power is delivered to the Main Control PWB and the UI in
order to maintain the ability to sense when the customer uses the UI, or actuates an interlock
switch. This action causes the machine to automatically go into Standby Mode. However,
because the Fuser cools when the machine is in Low Power Mode, the first job after a Power
Saver interval will be delayed until the Fuser warms up.
The UI should now respond normally, as described in the software upgrade instructions or the
UI replacement procedure REP 02-1. If not, repeat the above procedure.
The time intervals for both Power Saver modes are to be adjusted by the customer only,
using the User Interface. Refer the customer to the Reference Guide, Power Saver Administration, for the instructions for changing the Power Saver settings.
The default settings and adjustment ranges for each machine version are shown in Table 1.
KEY: LPM = Low Power Mode
Table 1 Power Saver Adjustment Intervals
Machine Time Until
Entering LPM
(minutes)
Warm-up
(LPM to
Standby)
(seconds)
Time From
LPM to Off
(minutes)
DC 240
Default; 15
Range; 15 - 225
DC 255
Default; 15
Range; 15 - 120
DC 265
Default; 15
Range; 15 - 120
DT65/
DP65
Default; 15
Range; 15 - 120
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-21
General Procedures
GP20 , GP21
Purpose
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to connect the PWS to the ESS Serial port and enable correct
communication between the two for the purpose of monitoring the boot process or to access
the operating system to perform maintenance activities.
The purpose of this procedure is to access the ESS Alternate Boot menu for maintenance
activities.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
The following is required:
1.
2.
When the Alternate Boot Tool opens click the Upload Forth Code button in the Alternate
Boot dialog to open the Windows terminal emulator with the correct communication settings.
If not already done, create a Windows HyperTerminal file for reading the ESS TTY data. If
done, go to step 2.
a.
In Windows, select the [Start] button, then [Programs]. Select the Accessories Program Group.
b.
Select HyperTerminal.
c.
After HyperTerminal has started, the New Connection dialog will request that you
choose a name for the profile you are creating. Choose something that will allow
you to remember it, such as DC265.
d.
In the Connect using pull-down window, select [Direct to COM 1], then OK.
e.
In the Port Settings box, change the Baud Rate to 9600, Data Bits should be 8, Stop
Bits=1, Parity=None, Flow Control=Xon/Xoff, and then OK
f.
The file just saved should be opened whenever the PWS needs to be connected to
the ESS Serial port.
2.
3.
Connect the serial cable between the PWS serial port and the ESS Serial Port Connector.
Use the Null Modem adaptor with the standard PWS Serial cable.
4.
NOTE: While using the Terminal Program, it may be necessary to use the scroll bars at
the side of the window to view some of the system responses.
3.
Position the mouse cursor inside the Terminal program window and click once to bring
that application to the front. Power the machine on and observe the activity in the window.
5.
When the ESS system has started and is about to run self-test, hit any key to interrupt the
test.
6.
When the message appears, Type any key to interrupt self-test, hit any
key to interrupt the test. A screen menu (Main) will appear. Use the arrow keys to select
Administrative Options (you may need to scroll to see the whole menu) and press
[ENTER]. In the next menu displayed (again you may need to scroll to see it), select
Invoke the Command Line Prompt and press [ENTER].
7.
At the ok, type setenv load-base 0xF00000 [ENTER]. You should see the message: load-base= 15728640
6.
Observe the ESS boot on the PWS screen or on the captured text file set-up above.
When the Select Software Version window appears, select the version the machine is
running, then select [OK].
Connect the serial cable between the PWS serial port and the ESS Serial Port Connector.
Use the Null Modem adaptor with the standard PWS Serial cable.
8.
Type: dl [ENTER] You should see the message: Ready for download.
then
2.
9.
3.
4.
10. In the Terminal window select the Transfers menu, then select the Send Text File option.
The Send Text File dialog will open, at the bottom of the dialog use the drop list menu to
list ALL FILES and find the altboot.fth on the Lakes Software CD-ROM. NOTE the path to
this file is normally [CDROM_drive_letter] / inst / [software_version] / ESS / diskimage /
altboot.fth. Once the file is selected, click the [OK] button to download it to the ESS.
General Procedures
GP22 , GP23
May 2003
6-22
Send file
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: Ensure the machine software CD-ROM is in the PWS CD-ROM Drive, and the
ESS Parallel cable is connected between the PWS and the ESS.
Unless there are any checksum errors, the screen should read:
START PARALLEL DOWNLOAD NOW
If there are any errors, the program will abort and it will be necessary to repeat the procedure starting at step 4.
11. Use your mouse and click once on the Alternate Boot dialog to bring it to the front, select
the Upload System Kernel button. The status textbox will read Please select file to
upload. Press the Browse button to locate the file on the Lakes Software CD-ROM. This
file is typically named ekpXXXXX.sre, where XXXXX is the Lakes software version. Consult your release documentation and/or software install instructions for details.
12. After the file is selected, the status message should read ESS Upgrade can begin. Press
the Upload button. You may wish to minimize all windows except the Alternate Boot dialog and Terminal window for the duration of the download.
13. You will see text messages going by in the Terminal window and after about 1.5 minutes,
the transfer will complete and the kernel will load and display the following menu:
5.
The Select Software Version dialog window will appear. In most cases the present software version should be selected. The available versions that are on the CD are listed in
the lower section of the window. The actual install path is near the top. If the default version is not correct, click the Browse button to navigate to another version.
6.
The Parallel Boot Code - Intel Platform dialog window will appear. In the Filename area,
the parallel bot code path and filename should appear and will be format like PBCV2P71.
BIN. Click [Upload]
7.
The Parallel / Serial menu will be displayed. Select 2) Download Lynx Mini-Kernel.
8.
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
8) Format
ESS
ESS
q) Quit
14. Click once on the Upload System Kernel window to bring it to the front then on the Exit
button to close it.
2.
3.
After approximately 30 seconds, a message will appear in the terminal window, Press
any key to access Alternate Boot Menu . When this message appears, press
any key on the PWS keyboard.
4.
The Alternate Boot Menu will appear. Ensure the System ID is Lakes. If the System ID is
Hodaka, go to , GP39 , Changing the System ID and return here.
Select 3) Parallel / Serial Boot.
NOTE: Do not press the Enter key.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-23
General Procedures
GP23
test /memory
type test /memory [Enter] - tests the integrity of the ESS memory. Ok prompt is returned
if test passes. A failure will be indicated by a message. This test has little value. It won't catch
all memory failures.
The purpose of this procedure is to access the ESS command line and identify the available
diagnostics. These diagnostics are part of the Open Firmware which is resident on the ESS
PWB. They can be used to help verify correct operation of the ESS PWB and communications
to the network. These are only available on 255/265 machines with the PowerPC based ESS.
type probe-scsi [Enter] - identifies devices attached to the SCSI bus. An ok prompt without any information about the hard disk would indicate a failure.
Initial Actions
watch net
type watch net [Enter] - checks the network connection. A series of . . . . . . . . . . . . indicates packets are being received from the network. X indicates bad packets. No information
indicates a connection problem.
2.
When the Alternate Boot Tool opens click the Upload Forth Code button in the Alternate
Boot dialog. When the Select Software Version dialog opens, select [OK] to open the
Windows terminal emulator with the correct communication settings.
probe-scsi
NOTE: If you get an error message the Terminal program can't find the file, clear the error
message by clicking [OK], then use the File menu Open command to browse for the altrboot.trm file to set up the correct terminal profile.
NOTE: While using the Terminal Program, it may be necessary to use the scroll bars at
the side of the window to view some of the system responses.
3.
Position the mouse cursor inside the Terminal program window and click once to bring
that application to the front. Power the machine on and observe the activity in the window.
4.
When the ESS system has started and is about to run self-test, hit any key to interrupt the
test. A screen menu will appear. Use the arrow keys to select Administrative Options
(you may need to scroll to see the whole menu) and press [ENTER]. In the next menu
displayed (again you may need to scroll to see it), select Invoke the Command Line
Prompt and press [ENTER].
5.
The ok prompt is now available (you may need to scroll to see this).
test net
type test net [Enter] - checks that data can be received and verified via internal loopback.
If pass, the ok prompt will return. If it fails, a message will be displayed indicating a failure.
test /nvram
type test /nvram [Enter] - tests the integrity of the ESS nvram. Ok prompt is returned if
test passes. A failure will be indicated by a message
Memory Test
type showstack [Enter], after the ok prompt appears, type 10000 1D905C0 mem-bitstest [Enter] - tests the integrity of the ESS memory. Ok prompt followed by a 0 is returned if
test passes. A failure will be indicated by a memory address indicating the location of the failure.
General Procedures
GP24
May 2003
6-24
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Purpose
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to document special commands that are available in the ESS
terminal window.
The purpose of this procedure is to set the Greenwich Mean Time Offset (GMT Offset) correctly in the machines memory. The GMT Offset is the difference between the machines local
time and the time in Greenwich, England (called Greenwich Mean Time, or Zulu time).
Combined with the local time and date which are also set in the machines memory, the
machine has a complete time setting which is based on a global standard.
Procedure
1.
2.
startess
3.
4.
5.
Under [GMT Offset], pull down the menu and select the correct number for the machines
time zone (Table 1).
stopess
type stopess [Enter] - Stops the DC240/255/265 ESS
info
6.
7.
[Exit] Diagnostic Navigator and close the current session to take the machine out of Diagnostics.
NOTE: The machine must now be reset or powered off in order for the selected installation phase to take effect.
Either answer [Yes] to resetting the machine or switch off the machine power after exiting
Diagnostics.
Table 1 GMT Offsets
GMT
Offset
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
-12
Eniwetok
-11
Samoa
-10
Hawaii
-9
Alaska
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
Mid-Atlantic
-1
Cape Verdes
+1
+2
+3
May 2003
6-25
General Procedures
GP25 , GP26
+4
+5
Islamabad, Karachi
+6
Almaty, Dhaka
+7
Bangkok, Jakarta
+8
+9
Osaka, Tokyo
+10
+11
+12
Procedure
Before Visiting the Customer Site
1.
Call ahead to the customer to schedule the downgrade. Confirm the System Administrator has removed the ST from the network and notified all users the machine is no longer
available for print jobs.
2.
Order the DC Front Door Insert (logo) and UI logo (PL 7.2), and bring them when visiting
the customer site.
3.
Bring the Version 5.03 or higher Software Upgrade Kit and associated required items to
bring listed in that kits instructions, when visiting the customer site.
Verify the machine software version is 5.03 or higher. If not, upgrade the software,
excluding the ESS software.
2.
Using the PWS, change the Install Phases and the System Configuration as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Under [Install Phase (System)] and [Install Phase (Main Controller)], pull down each
menu and select [Customer Install].
f.
Under [System Configuration], pull down the menu and select [Digital Copier].
g.
h.
[Exit] Diagnostic Navigator and close the current session to take the machine out of
Diagnostics.
NOTE: Answer [No] to downloading NVM.
General Procedures
GP26 , GP27
3.
Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Power Cord.
4.
ESS Disk Drive (REP 16-1) and its power and data cables.
b.
c.
Network Cable.
d.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Place a note on the machine stating that it is now a copier only. Ensure the Machine
Administrator understands the change, and that they will reinforce with the users the
machine is now a copier only.
May 2003
6-26
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
9.
Close the call (e.g. on FWSS) as a XI (Xerox Initiated -- not charged to the customer), and
revise the service records to reflect the machine is now a DC copier.
10. Materials removed should be returned by your normal parts return process.
Procedure
CAUTION
Before troubleshooting a software upload failure, ensure you have carefully followed the appropriate Machine Software Upgrade Procedure in the Software Kit Installation Instructions.
Each version of the Machine Software Upgrade Procedure identifies potential causes of software upload failures unique to that version of software, and the corrective action(s) to take
when those failures occur.
If the Machine Software Upgrade Procedure has been carefully followed, and the cause of the
software upload failure still has not been identified, read through the items in the following list
to determine if any of the causes listed here apply to your PWS or the DC265-family product
being upgraded.
1.
2.
3.
The response time of the PWS CD drive may be too slow for the system to tolerate.
Remedy: If there is room on the C:\ drive, copy the contents of the machine software CD
to the C:\ drive and install the software from that location.
4.
Electrical noise can enter the system through the parallel cable(s). Complicating this
problem is the inability of the Main Control PWBs without Tag 015 (also called "Atlanta 96"
PWBs) to correctly filter high levels of noise.
Remedies:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
a.
Ensure the parallel cable(s) are firmly seated into their connectors, and are placed
away from sources of electrical noise (i.e., power supplies, monitors, and motors).
b.
The recommended IOT parallel cable is now 600T2155 (6' long) instead of
600T2065 (the original 10' cable). (This cable is used on all machines.)
The recommended ESS parallel cable is now 600T2037 (6' long) instead of
600T2066 (the original 10' cable). (This cable is used only on DCS 265/255/
240 ST/LP machines.)
5.
Main Control PWBs without Tag 015 (also called "Atlanta 96" PWBs) do not correctly filter high levels of electrical noise.
May 2003
6-27
General Procedures
GP27 , GP28
6.
Remedy: If you have implemented all items on this list and still experience repeated software upload failures on machines without Tag 015, upgrade the machine to a newer version of Main Control PWB to reduce the susceptibility to electrical noise. The newer
versions of Main Control PWBs are also called "Atlanta Gold" PWBs, and the Tag numbers associated with those PWBs are 015, 042, 052, and 065. You will get the latest
available version when you order the part number in the EDOC.
Problem uploading ESS Software after replacing ESS Hard Disk Drive.
Remedy: Some ESS Hard Disk Drives manufactured by Quantum, with part numbers
121E15370, were shipped with 3 jumpers installed instead of one.
NOTE: This procedure can be performed by either the Key Operator or by the CSE.
Refer to Figure 1. Verify there is only one jumper on the connector and it is installed
as shown in Figure 1.
Do the following:
1.
2.
Ensure the Document Input Tray Side Guides are touching the paper and the document is
inserted fully to the stops (to the right) of the Document Input Tray.
3.
Enter Tools.
4.
In Tools, select System Settings , More ,and Document Scanner Size Sensing .
5.
In the Document Scanner Size Sensing screen, check the scrolling list of document sizes.
6.
If there is a size that matches the document loaded in the Document Input Tray, select the
appropriate size on the Touch Screen, then select the Save button. Exit Tools.
7.
In order for the DADF to sense the document correctly, remove the document from the
Document Input Tray then load the document in the Document Input Tray.
8.
If there is a not a size that matches the document loaded in the Document Input Tray, do
the following:
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is setup the Document Feeder to sense standard and custom
document sizes.
a.
b.
c.
Enter the X dimension size of the document in millimeters using the Keypad, then
press the X dimension button.
d.
e.
In order for the DADF to sense the document correctly, remove the document from
the Document Input Tray then load the document in the Document Input Tray.
If a custom size cannot be entered via Tools, the DADF NVM may have become corrupted. Go
to Resetting the Document Feeder NVM to initialize the DADF NVM and setup the IIT Registration and Magnification.
Figure 1 Jumpers
7.
General Procedures
GP28 , GP29
1.
Enter [NVM tab , IOT Variable NVM Initialization]. Select [DADF], then select [Start].
2.
3.
4.
5.
May 2003
6-28
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Purpose
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to change the machine AC line frequency to match the line
frequency of the source of AC power.
The number of thin stapled sets that will be produced before the machine will automatically pause.
Procedure
What will happen after the machine pauses; it will either automatically resume or remain
paused (for machines without a Finisher Empty Sensor in the Stacker Tray)
Procedure
CAUTION
Only attempt to change the Line Frequency and Line Voltage when the AC supply is KNOWN
to be different from the present settings.
Do the following to change the Line Frequency:
NOTE: This procedure can be performed by either the Key Operator or by the CSE.
1.
Do the following:
2.
In the [System] tab, find the Line Frequency section in the lower center of the window.
1.
Enter Tools.
3.
Click on the pull down arrow. Select the appropriate Line Frequency.
2.
4.
Click OK if done.
1.
3.
2.
In the [System] tab, find the Line Voltage section in the lower right of the window.
4.
Set the [Number of sheets in a Thin Stapled Set] to a number between 5 and 20.
3.
Click on the pull down arrow. Select the appropriate Line Voltage.
5.
Set the [Number of Thin Stapled Sets before Finisher unload] to a number between 20
and 1000
4.
NOTE: Setting the number to a value greater than 30 may result in, poor stacking, misstapled sets, or poor set registration.
6.
Set [After the printer pauses to unload Thin Set] to one of the following options (machines
without a Finisher Empty Sensor):
NOTE: The following may occur in machines with software versions earlier than LO.17.6
(5.05): A Finisher Unload Message can come up at anytime for the customer, if the Finisher
Tray has not moved during any of the jobs. For example, if the customer runs 29 small jobs that
don't cause the trays to step down, and then someone comes up to run a 5 set job, the unload
message will be displayed after the first set goes into the finisher. The machine will not complete the final 4 sets of the job until the 1 minute timer times out, or the customer uses the finisher tray pause button to cycle the tray down/up, or the finisher tray moves up, depending on
the size of the set. If the customer is running a large number of thin sets, the problem can occur
only for the first unload message. After the first unload message, the next unload message will
be 30 sets later (or at whatever value it is set in TOOLS.)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-29
General Procedures
GP30 , GP31
Purpose
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to clear the machine network settings. This procedure can be
used when a machine is being removed from an account or when the customers network is
reconfigured such that the machine would need to be reinstalled on the network.
Kinko's wants the following two features enabled when their machines are installed.
1.
The copy count signal going to the Foreign Interface Connector must be programmed to
"double-count" when copies are made on large size papers. (Large size papers are
defined as greater than 380mm (15") long.)
2.
1.
In Diagnostics Navigator, select the [Configuration] tab and select [Network Configuration
Initialization].
These features can be enabled by the CSE on DC265 copiers with L0.17.5 (V5.03) software
and higher.
2.
Select [Start].
Procedure
Procedure
Ensure the following features are enabled on all Kinko's machines.
a.
2.
Launch the Diagnostic navigator and select: [NVM], [NVM Tool], [Machine], [Download].
3.
4.
Go to Location "0".
5.
6.
When this feature is enabled, the Foreign Interface Connector will receive 1 pulse for
each copy made on paper that has a dimension of less than 380mm, and 2 pulses for
each copy made on paper that has a dimension of 380mm or more.
NOTE: Enabling this option DOES NOT change the normal Xerox billing for the product.
b.
2.
3.
Changing this timer minimizes the job carry-over problem when a user walks away with
only a portion of his or her job completed.
General Procedures
GP32 , GP33
May 2003
6-30
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Purpose
Purpose
To enable a new software option, a password must be entered. This password is generated
real-time on the PWS.
The purpose of this procedure is to provide the procedure for running the ESS Memory Test.
The ESS Memory Test is available only with L18 or later software.
Procedure
Initial Actions
When installing or removing a software option using the PWS, a screen will appear indicating
that a password is required. While connected to a machine, a machine unique identifier is
used to generate a real-time password.
1.
Note the unique machine identifier on the first screen. This will be used later.
1.
2.
2.
3.
When the Alternate Boot Tool opens click the ESS Memory Test button in the Alternate
Boot dialog to open the Windows terminal emulator with the correct communication settings.
4.
Select [OK].
5.
Another window will appear. In the Machine Unique Identifier field, enter the number that
appeared on the first screen.
6.
7.
A password will appear in the Password field. Type the Password in the password field
on the first screen.
8.
NOTE: While using the Terminal Program, it may be necessary to use the scroll bars at
the side of the window to view some of the system responses.
3.
Position the mouse cursor inside the Terminal program window and click once to bring
that application to the front. Power the machine on and observe the activity in the window.
4.
When the message appears, Type any key to interrupt self-test, hit any key
to interrupt the test (do two times). A screen menu (Main) will appear. Use the arrow
keys to select Administrative Options (you may need to scroll to see the whole menu) and
press [ENTER]. In the next menu displayed (again you may need to scroll to see it),
select Invoke the Command Line Prompt and press [ENTER].
5.
At the ok setenv load-base 0xF00000 [ENTER]. You should see the message:
load-base= 15728640
6.
Type: dl [ENTER] You should see the message: Ready for download.
then type ^D
7.
8.
In the Terminal window select the Transfers menu, then select the Send Text File option.
The Send Text File dialog will open. Navigate to the Lakes Software CD-ROM. NOTE the
path to this file is normally [CDROM_drive_letter] / inst / [software_version] / ESS / diskimage / ess_mem_test.txt. Once the file is selected, click the [OK] button to download it to
the ESS.
9.
As the test runs, you will see messages indicating total memory detected, how long the
test should take to complete, and a Test Successful message and an ok prompt when
complete.
Send file
10. If there are errors, you will see an indication of where the problem was detected.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
1.
2.
May 2003
6-31
General Procedures
GP34, GP35
3.
4.
After approximately 30 seconds, a message will appear in the terminal window, Press
any key to access Alternate Boot Menu . When this message appears, press
any key on the PWS keyboard.
The Alternate Boot Menu will appear. Select 3) Parallel / Serial Boot.
The purpose of this procedure is to provide a method for retrieving ESS logs for submission to
engineering the purpose of investigating software problems.
The Select Software Version dialog window will appear. In most cases the present software version should be selected. The available versions that are on the CD are listed in
the lower section of the window. The actual install path is near the top. If the default version is not correct, click the Browse button to navigate to another version.
Purpose
3.
4.
After several minutes, a FTP Status Monitor window will appear while the file is transfering.
5.
6.
The Parallel Boot Code - Intel Platform dialog window will appear. In the Filename area,
the parallel boot code path and filename should appear and will be format like
PBCV2P71. BIN. Click [Upload]
When complete, a DCS40-65 PWS Message Box will appear with the message Compressed debug log saved as c:\xrxdata\cases\xxxxxxxx\debug.log. The xxxxxxxx varies
depending on the case number.
6.
7.
The Parallel / Serial menu will be displayed. Select 1) Display Diagnostic Menu.
8.
9.
As the test runs, you will see memory locations scroll on the screen as they are checked,
and a Memory Test Pass message and an ok prompt when complete.
10. If there are errors, you will see an indication of where the problem was detected.
General Procedures
GP35 , GP36
May 2003
6-32
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to provide a method for retrieving ESS Power On Self Test
results.
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to provide a method for accessing the ESS Diagnostic Menu.
2.
3.
After approximately 30 seconds, a message will appear in the terminal window, Press
any key to access Alternate Boot Menu . When this message appears, press
any key on the PWS keyboard.
4.
The Alternate Boot Menu will appear. Select 3) Parallel / Serial Boot.
1.
Connect the serial cable between the PWS serial port and the ESS Serial Port Connector.
Use the Null Modem adaptor with the standard PWS Serial cable.
2.
3.
4.
5.
After approximately 30 seconds, a message will appear in the terminal window, Press
any key to access Alternate Boot Menu . When this message appears, press
any key on the PWS keyboard.
6.
The Alternate Boot Menu will appear. Select 3) Parallel / Serial Boot.
NOTE: Ensure the machine software CD-ROM is in the PWS CD-ROM Drive, and the
ESS Parallel cable is connected between the PWS and the ESS (240/255/265) or Riser
PWB (460/470).
7.
The Select Software Version dialog window will appear. In most cases the present software version should be selected. The available versions that are on the CD are listed in
the lower section of the window. The actual install path is near the top. If the default version is not correct, click the Browse button to navigate to another version.
8.
The Parallel Boot Code - Intel Platform dialog window will appear. In the Filename area,
the parallel boot code path and filename should appear and will be format like
PBCV2P71. BIN. Click [Upload]
1) Test Memory
9.
The Parallel / Serial menu will be displayed. Select 1) Display Diagnostic Menu.
The Parallel Boot Code - Intel Platform dialog window will appear. In the Filename area,
the parallel boot code path and filename should appear and will be format like
PBCV2P71. BIN. Click [Upload]
7.
The Parallel / Serial menu will be displayed. Select 1) Display Diagnostic Menu.
8.
The Select Software Version dialog window will appear. In most cases the present software version should be selected. The available versions that are on the CD are listed in
the lower section of the window. The actual install path is near the top. If the default version is not correct, click the Browse button to navigate to another version.
Diagnostic Menu
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-33
General Procedures
GP37 , GP38
Purpose
Initializing the Xerographic NVM will reset those settings to their default values, providing a
new baseline from which to set up the Xerographic processes. This is sometimes done after
new software is installed which has changed the default values.
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to provide a method to change the Alt-Boot system ID from
Hodaka to Lakes.
Procedure
Connect the serial cable between the PWS serial port and the ESS Serial Port Connector.
Use the Null Modem adaptor with the standard PWS Serial cable.
2.
3.
4.
5.
After approximately 30 seconds, a message will appear in the terminal window, Press
any key to access Alternate Boot Menu . When this message appears, press
any key on the PWS keyboard.
6.
If the ESS has version 2.9 or higher BIOS and the System ID has not yet been set, a window will appear briefly, allowing you to select the System ID. If so, type L for Lakes and
skip to step 8.
Otherwise, when the Alternate Boot Menu appears, select 4) Change System ID.
NOTE: Do not press the Enter key.
7.
8.
In the Alt-Boot menu, select 5) Reboot System . The System ID should now be Lakes.
Open the front door of the machine to prevent an automatic Xerographic Setup, and leave
it open.
2.
3.
When the message Do you wish to download NVM appears, select [No].
4.
Select the Category : [Xerographics] and select [Start]. Select [Yes] to the confirmation to
continue.
5.
Select [OK] to dismiss the notification to power off and power on the machine, but do not
power off and on the machine at this time.
NOTE: The machine will be powered off/on later.
6.
Select [Exit].
7.
Now that Xerographic NVM has been reinitialized, the ROS values need to be re-entered.
Observe the bar code label on the ROS.
a.
From under the third bar code, record the three digits that appear after the letter L
(this is the imageFastScanReg).
b.
From under the second bar code, record the four or five digits that appear after the
letter H (this is the hallPeriodRef).
c.
From under the second bar code, record the number (a zero, decimal point, and four
digits) that appears between the letter E and the leter H (this is the exposureCalibration).
8.
Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool]. Select the [Machine] menu, then [Download].
9.
General Procedures
GP39 , GP40
May 2003
6-34
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
b.
c.
d.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Measure the height of the paper buckle for all 10 sheets. Measure from the surface of the
Registration Transport to the top of the buckle (see Figure 1).
5.
The buckle height measurement for all 10 sheets of paper should be between 20 mm and
30 mm and should be relatively consistent for all 10 sheets.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-35
General Procedures
GP40, GP41
5.
Ensure the Fuser Return label is removed from all Fuser Module cartons.
Inspect and rebuild or return the Fuser Module by following the attached procedure (Fuser
Inspection.pdf) and using the newly spared parts listed below as required. This Fuser inspection and rebuild procedure can also be found in the Fuser Web Repair Kit listed below.
If the Fuser Module can be rebuilt, leave the newly rebuilt Fuser Module in the machine.
Repackage the good Fuser Module from the machine and put it back into the customer's
stock.
NASG - If the Fuser Module cannot be rebuilt, return the Fuser Module using the UPS
Label or Canadian Post Label from the Fuser Return Label Kit.
XE - If the Fuser Module cannot be rebuilt, return the Fuser Module using the local return
process.
If ANY such damage exists, the Fuser Module cannot be rebuilt in the field.
Go to step 27 and return the Fuser Module as a failed part.
With the Stripper door still open, check whether the Web is more than half used: The
Web take-up roll is the very bottom roller in the Fuser Module. A new Web will have
wrapped only a few times around the take-up roll, leaving about an inch (25 mm) of space
above the bottom Fuser Module frame. A completely used Web will have taken up nearly
all of that space, nearly contacting the bottom Fuser Module frame.
If the Web is more than half used, take note that you will need to replace the Web
assembly AND the CRUM as described later.
NOTE: One purpose of the CRUM is to monitor Web consumption and to signal the customer to replace the Web before the Web expires.
6.
With the Stripper door still open, inspect for any damage to the Stripper assembly
(broken or missing fingers, springs, baffles etc.).
If the Stripper assembly is damaged, take note that you will need to replace the Stripper
assembly as described later.
7.
Test for continuity of the Fuser Lamp circuit, using the AC connector on the rear of
the Fuser Module (Figure 3):
DC Fuse
DC Thermistor
If there is no continuity across the outside terminals of the AC connector, do the following:
Stripper Assembly
a.
Ensure the Fuser Lamp is connected. Remove the Fuser handle (two E-rings) and
the Fuser top cover (four hook tabs) to access the Fuser Lamp.
b.
If the Fuser Lamp is connected and there is still no continuity across the outside terminals of the AC connector, the Fuser Module cannot be rebuilt in the field. Go to step 27
and return the Fuser Module as a failed part.
Press the [Machine Status] button on the UI, and select the [Supplies] tab.
b.
WARNING
Test the DC Thermal Fuse, using the large black DC connector at the rear of the Fuser
Module (Figure 3):
The machine power must be switched off and the power cord disconnected, to avoid the
electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
Measure the resistance across pins 7 and 8 (the third and fourth pins from the top).
The resistance should read zero (+.5) Ohms.
2.
If the resistance across pins 7 and 8 is greater than 5 Ohms, take note that you will
need to replace the DC Thermal Fuse as described later.
WARNING
Allow the Fuser to cool sufficiently to avoid burning yourself while working on the
Fuser.
3.
4.
9.
Test the DC Thermistor, using the large black DC connector at the rear of the Fuser
Module (Figure 3):
a.
Set the Ohmmeter to the DC 200K Ohm range or 400K with a Fluke Meter.
b.
Measure the resistance across pins 9 and 10 (the top two pins).
Ensure the Inverter/Fuser latch hook is not broken off at the right rear of the
Fuser Module (Figure 1).
b.
Unlatch and pivot the Stripper door out (open Area 3c) (Figure 2).
c.
Inspect the Heat Roller and Pressure Roller while turning the green jam clearance
knob on the front of the Fuser Module.
At room temperature, the DC Thermistor resistance should read approximately 10.5 K Ohms.
a.
Look for damage to the roller surfaces, or the gears. Turn the green jam clearance
knob and check for binding of the fuser rollers' bearings.
General Procedures
GP42
May 2003
6-36
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CAUTION
Observe the correct harness routing before and while removing the DC Thermistor and the DC
Thermal Fuse.
15. Remove both the DC Thermistor and the DC Thermal Fuse:
a.
If the Stripper assembly date is in the range 6/99 - 9/99, take note that you will need
to replace the Stripper assembly as described later.
Free the DC Thermistor harness from the harness restraints, while observing the
correct harness routing.
b.
If the Stripper assembly date is earlier than 6/99 or later than 9/99, and the Stripper
assembly is not damaged, you will NOT need to replace the Stripper assembly.
Insert a narrow tool such as a small screwdriver as shown to release the hook tab
(hidden), and slide the DC Thermistor out (Figure 9).
c.
Dismount the DC Thermal Fuse in the same manner as the Thermistor, while
observing how both the Fuse harness and the Thermistor harness are routed and
restrained around the Fuse mounting (Figure 10)
Check the date on the Stripper assembly (if not damaged) (Figure 4):
If the DC Thermal Fuse already failed the electrical test in step 8, skip to step 12.
Check the Fuser manufacturing date above the 126KXXXXX part number on the
Fuser Module bar code label, to help determine if the DC Thermal Fuse must be
replaced (Figure 5):
If the Fuser manufacturing date is EARLIER THAN Nov. '99, take note that you will
need to replace the DC Thermal Fuse as described later.
16. Using a new DC Thermal Fuse and/or a new DC Thermistor as determined earlier,
install the DC Thermal Fuse and DC Thermistor in the reverse of removal, carefully
routing and restraining the harnesses as before.
17. If the Web is NOT more than half used (as determined in step 5), go to step 19.
If the web is more than half used (as determined in step 5), continue.
CAUTION
If the Fuser Module has PASSED ALL of the checks above, go to step 23.
If the Stripper assembly, the Web assembly and CRUM, the DC Thermal Fuse, and/or the
DC Thermistor must be replaced (as determined in steps 5 through 9), continue and
replace the required component(s).
10. If the Stripper assembly must be replaced (as determined in step 6), replace the
Stripper assembly: Unlatch and pivot the Stripper assembly out (open Area 3c), remove
the E-ring from the rear pivot pin, and remove the Stripper assembly. Install the new Stripper assembly in the reverse of removal.
Be sure to install the CRUM in the correct position in the main DC connector - it is physically possible to install it in the wrong position.
18. Remove the CRUM from the main DC connector and replace it with the new CRUM
provided in the Fuser Web kit. Ensure the CRUM is in the correct position in the DC
connector (Figure 11).
NOTE: Be sure to install the CRUM in the correct position in the main DC connector - it is
physically possible to install it in the wrong position.
CAUTION
11. If the Web, the DC Thermistor, and the DC Thermal Fuse are ALL okay (as determined in steps 5, 8, and 9), go to step 23.
Be sure to reconnect the DC Thermal Fuse and the DC Thermistor in the correct locations
in the main DC connector - it is physically possible to connect them in reversed positions.
If these connectors are reversed, a 10-301 fault will result.
Otherwise, continue.
12. Remove the Web assembly:
a.
Lay the Fuser Module on its right side (left side up).
b.
Insert the tip of a small screwdriver or needle-nose pliers into each latch and slide it
inward (Figure 6).
c.
Lift and pivot the Web assembly out and remove it (Figure 7).
19. Reconnect the DC Thermal Fuse connector (orange wires) into the pins 7 and 8
position in the main DC connector (Figure 8).
NOTE: Be sure to reconnect the DC Thermal Fuse and the DC Thermistor in the correct
locations in the main DC connector - it is physically possible to connect them in reversed
positions. If these connectors are reversed, a 10-301 fault will result.
13. Remove the main DC connector, with the CRUM, from the Fuser Module (Figure 8):
a.
Press each of the two locking tabs to release the connector as shown.
b.
Pull the connector out carefully while pivoting it as required to clear the CRUM past
the connector opening in the Fuser Module frame.
c.
Disconnect the DC Thermal Fuse connector and the DC Thermistor connector from
the main DC connector, and remove the main DC connector from the Fuser Module.
14. If the Thermal DC Fuse and DC Thermistor are okay (as determined in steps 8 and 9)
and only the Web and CRUM need to be replaced (as determined in step 5), go to step
18.
If the DC Thermistor AND/OR the DC Thermal Fuse need(s) to be replaced (as determined in steps 8 and 9), continue.
20. Reconnect the DC Thermistor connector (black wires) into the pins 9 and 10 position in the main DC connector (Figure 8).
21. Reposition the main DC connector into the Fuser Module in the reverse of removal.
Be sure that it "clicks" into position.
CAUTION
If installing a new Web assembly in the next step, be sure you have also installed a new
CRUM (step 18).
If re-installing the same Web assembly removed earlier, be sure you still have the same
CRUM installed (NOT replaced it with a new one in step 18).
22. Install the Web assembly:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-37
If the Web is NOT more than half used as determined earlier, reinstall the same
Web assembly.
General Procedures
GP42
If the Web IS more than half used as determined earlier, install the new Web
assembly provided in the Fuser Web kit.
a.
Ensure the aligning hook on the rear (non-gears) end of the Web assembly engages
the pin in the Fuser Module (Figure 12).
b.
Insert the Web assembly, keeping the front (gears) end parallel with the rear end,
and pivot it into position in the reverse of removal.
c.
Engage the two latches outward in the reverse of removal, securing the Web assembly in place.
23. Fill out the Fuser Maintenance Label provided in the Fuser Web kit: Include the date,
the Fuser Module Image Count recorded at the beginning of this procedure, and the parts
used.
24. Attach the Fuser Maintenance Label to the front of the Fuser Module, to the lower
left of the green knob (Figure 13).
25. Reinstall the Fuser Module and switch on the machine power.
26. Test the Fuser: Make 50 prints and look for any print quality defects that indicate Fuser
problems. If any appear, continue to troubleshoot and repair or return the Fuser Module.
Heat Roller
27. If returning the Fuser Module, repackage the Fuser Module in the original box or the
box from the new Fuser Module if possible, attach the correct Return Label to the box.
Web take-up roll
(hidden)
Web
Inverter/Fuser
latch hook
General Procedures
GP42
May 2003
6-38
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
AC connector
DC connector
year in center;
arrow points to
month
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-39
General Procedures
GP42
date, above
126KXXXXX
part number
latches (2)
General Procedures
GP42
May 2003
6-40
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
DC Thermistor
connector
(black wires)
DC connector
locking tabs (2)
DC Thermal
Fuse connector
(orange wires)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-41
General Procedures
GP42
tool
tool
DC Thermal Fuse
DC Thermistor
DC Thermistor
(already dismounted)
General Procedures
GP42
May 2003
6-42
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-43
General Procedures
GP42
Procedure
Do the following to enable the Auto Version Handler feature:
1.
Launch C:\Xerox\PWS_D32\PREFTOOL\preftool32.exe
2.
3.
4.
General Procedures
GP42 , GP43
The old Multiple Version Handler has been changed so that after installation of PWS
L19.02.04x software, you cannot delete versions manually and are directed to use the new
Master Uninstaller.
Procedure
Instead of using Multiple Version Handlers Delete Version function to remove an old version
of PWS Diagnostics, use the Master Uninstaller as follows:
1.
2.
Select [Programs].
3.
4.
5.
May 2003
6-44
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2.
Connect the black meter lead to the IIT ground braid (Figure 1).
3.
Set the Fluke Meter to Ohms, and the Range to the 4M Ohms - remove from Auto Range
(Set the DMM to 200k Range). A good meter reading is less than .100 M Ohms (100,000
Ohms).
4.
Check between the IIT ground braid and the 7 areas indicated in (Figure 2).
5.
Check for continuity between the IIT ground braid and the Static Eliminator (Figure 3).
6.
Check for continuity between the IIT ground braid and the Scanner Frame (Figure 4).
7.
If you exceed the 100,000 Ohm limit on any of the test points, initially rotate the shaft and
check again. If the check is still high follow the ground path back to the IOT frame to see
at what point you loose ground. The Retaining Tab connection is a common weak link for
the ground path. Disassemble/Reassemble of the components may be required.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-45
General Procedures
GP44
General Procedures
GP44
May 2003
6-46
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Check #3 Take
Away Roll Shaft
Check #5 Inverter/
Exit Shaft
Check #2 Registration
Roll Shaft
Check #1 Right
CVT Roll Shaft
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-47
General Procedures
GP44
General Procedures
GP44
May 2003
6-48
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-49
General Procedures
GP44
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is ensure the upgrade kits are installed in the correct sequence.
Procedure
1.
Conversions
Do you have one of these conversion kits (Identified by Product code on the Box) delivered at the site?
If you have T8R (PCI-BUS Adaptor 240/255/265), F1D (100Mb Ethernet PWB 240/
255/265), F4D (IPA PWB 240/255/265), F0D (Token Ring 240/255/265), install T8R
first
If you have both UD6 (Token Ring PWB, 460/470/480/490 ST) and UD7 (IPA PWB,
460/470/480/490 ST), install UD6 first.
Proceed to Step 6.
6.
Install the hardware kit T7V, DH1, VE5, VE7, CNR, or FVD
b.
c.
d.
Proceed to Step 3.
Proceed to step 7.
7.
Yes - Go to Step 4.
No - Go to step 5.
F7D or F8D - for Document Centre 265 ST. Install this kit on the ESS PWB.
F2C for Document Centre 265 without TAG 077. Install this kit on the Main Control
PWB
98K81990
If machine is a Document Centre 265DC/ST, install this kit on the Main Control
PWB.
Proceed to Step 5.
5.
NOTE: You must perform the entire conversion procedure before proceeding to Step
3.
4.
No - Go to Step 3.
3.
Yes - Go to Step 2.
2.
General Procedures
NOTE: If the instructions cannot be found but you know the customer wants the options
enabled, ensure the hardware and memory are installed, then go to GP34 for instructions
on how to enable the option(s).
Proceed to Step 8.
8.
Software Upgrades
GP45
May 2003
6-50
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CAUTION
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to determine whether a particular 460/470 ST machines
requires the Software Upgrade Tool 600T02212 in order to upgrade Main Controller software,
and to ensure the tool is used correctly.
NOTE: This is only necessary on a 460/470 ST machine with a 360 Atlanta Main Control PWB.
NOTE: Disregard the workarounds provided in the original Bulletin #428.
When installing software onto a 460/470 ST machine with a Main Control (Atlanta) PWB that
has part number 160K73622 through 160K7362X or part number 160K71891 through
160K7189X * without using the Software Upgrade Tool, the Main Controller software upload
will fail during the "Writing Flash Memory" stage at 57, 58 or 59 Blocks complete. The PWS
then displays a "Supload 32" window, with a message "Checksum Error on Machine Code" in
it. (* NOTE: Main Control PWB's labeled with part numbers 160K73622 through 160K7362X
were installed in the factory, whereas Main Control PWB's with part numbers 160K71891
through 160K7189X were installed as field spares.) Also at that time, there is no PWS communication with the machine and the Software/NVM Module cannot be saved by using the "Installing Main Controller Software Only: Forced Upload Method", described in the software upgrade
kit instructions. You must replace the Software/NVM Module.
Certain components in this procedure are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
3.
CAUTION
DO NOT attempt to pre-install the capacitor into the Connector Cap and install the cap and
capacitor onto the Debug connector at the same time!!! The capacitor legs will not align with
the connector correctly, and will contact the wrong connector positions!!!
4.
Obtain one of the capacitors provided in this kit. Remove the capacitor from the strip by
cutting the capacitor leads adjacent to the tape to separate the capacitor from the tape
Figure 4. Do not pull the leads out of the tape, because the tape residue on the leads can
impair electrical contact, resulting in a software upload failure.
5.
Form the legs of the capacitor so that they align with the two guide holes in the Connector
Cap, and insert the capacitor legs all the way into the guide holes until they make contact
with the Debug connector.
NOTE: The Connector Cap is designed to guide the capacitor legs into positions 51 and
60 on the Debug connector.
6.
The root cause of the problem is noise affecting a clock signal. This is only a problem on 460/
470 ST machines that have a 160K7362X or 160K7189X Main Control PWB in them. It is not
related to software levels or market region. It only affects the loading of the Main Control PWB
software, at any level.
Before installing software to the Main Controller on a 460/470 ST machine, determine if the
Main Control (Atlanta) PWB in the machine is a 160K7362X or 160K7189X PWB as follows:
Remove the card cage access panel (Figure 1) and identify which chip is installed in the
location indicated in Figure 2 on the Main Control PWB. You will need to look down and to
the left through the access opening with a flashlight.
2.
If the chip indicated in Figure 2 is marked "Bengal 2", the Main Control PWB is a
160K7362X or 160K7189X PWB and you must use the 460/470 Software Upgrade Tool
kit 600T02212, and follow the instructions in that kit or the procedure below.
3.
If the chip indicated in Figure 2 is marked "Bengal" (not Bengal 2), the Main Control PWB
is not a 160K7362X or 160K7189X PWB, therefore install the software normally.
Switch ON the machine power, and begin the Machine Software Upgrade Procedure in
the Software Upgrade kit instructions.
If the Main Controller software upload fails during the "Writing Flash Memory" stage at 5759 Blocks complete with a Supload 32 error message "Checksum Error on Machine
Code", do the following: (1) Switch OFF the machine power. (2) Double-check the Software Upgrade Tool is installed correctly. (3) Force-upload the PRE-UPGRADE LEVEL of
software back onto the Main Control PWB: Perform "Installing Main Controller Software
Only: Forced-Upload Method" in the Software Upgrade Kit instructions' Troubleshooting
section. (4) Re-attempt the Wizard upload to the Main Controller: Perform "Installing Main
Controller Software Only: PWS Wizard Method " in the Software Upgrade Kit instructions'
Troubleshooting section. (5) Go to "Required Actions After PWS Wizard-Method Software
Upload" in the Software Upgrade Kit instructions and proceed from there.
1.
Install one plastic Connector Cap, provided in the kit, onto the Debug connector on the
Main Control PWB (Figure 3).
7.
After completing the software upload, switch OFF the machine power and remove the
capacitor and the Connector Cap.
May 2003
6-51
General Procedures
WARNING
The machine power must be switched off and disconnected, to avoid the electrical hazard of personal injury or machine damage.
1.
Switch OFF the Machine power and disconnect the power cord.
2.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
GP46
General Procedures
GP46
May 2003
6-52
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-53
General Procedures
GP46
Debug connector
Cut the legs here.
General Procedures
GP46
May 2003
6-54
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
CAUTION
The PWS software version selected must be 19.02.xxx, even if the machine software version is
older (19.0.xxx or L19.01.xxx). Ignore the PWS Software Mismatch message when you launch
Diagnostic Navigator. DO NOT check the "auto switch to match machine software" box.
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to save copies of Scan to File templates created through CentreWare and the machine's embedded HTTP (Web) server, and restore them on the machine
after an Alternate Boot procedure is performed to reload ESS software.
4.
5.
6.
Prerequisites
7.
Insert the MRD or other floppy disk into the PWS floppy disk drive.
8.
Select [OK] in the MRD message box on the PWS. FTP Status Monitor window is opened
and the templates will be retrieved from the ESS and saved on the floppy disk in a file
named "s2ftempl.out." Wait until you see the message, "Operation Completed. Scan to
File Templates have been saved to the MRD."
9.
The MRD or other floppy disk will be used to save the Scan to File templates. Ensure the
MRD diskette is available. If not, a floppy disk is needed to continue with the following
procedure.
NOTE: The log-in password is not displayed in the Default Repository settings or the
Template Pool settings on the machine UI. The customer's System Administrator (SA) will
have to re-enter the password later, if one is required
2.
3.
DC480/490: Print a configuration report from the machine UI. (The SA will re-create
the Default Repository from the configuration report at the end of the restore procedure.):
This procedure is used to restore the Scan to File templates from the "s2ftempl.out" file, saved
on the MRD or other floppy, onto the machine after an Alternate Boot procedure has been performed.
NOTE: Ensure that Remote Testing Access for Network Controller is enabled as instructed
above in the Procedure for Saving Scan to File Templates.
a.
b.
1.
c.
Select [Print Configuration Report now], and wait for the report to print out.
2.
d.
Ensure the Scan to File option has been re-enabled using the Software Option Wizard,
then reboot all three platforms. When the machine has fully rebooted, exit the Software
Option Wizard. (This should already have been done as part of the Software Upgrade
procedure "Required Final Steps.")
3.
4.
DC460/470: Record the Default Repository and Template Pool settings manually in
Tools on the machine UI. (Those settings will be re-entered by the SA at the end of
the restore procedure.):
a.
b.
Select [More], select [More] again, and select the [Network Scanning] tab.
c.
d.
e.
For IP and IPX if available: Select [Template Pool Settings] and record the settings.
f.
b.
5.
6.
Insert the MRD or other floppy disk containing the file "s2ftempl.out" into the PWS floppy
disk drive.
7.
Select [OK] in the MRD message box on the PWS. The FTP Status monitor is opened
and the file will be transferred from the PWS to the ESS. Wait until you see the message,
"Operation Completed. Scan to File Templates have been restored from the MRD."
8.
9.
Select [More].
10. In the ESS/Network tab, ensure the [Banner, Error, and Confirmation Sheets] radio button
is selected so the Scan to File confirmation sheet is enabled.
c.
d.
Select [More].
e.
f.
g.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-55
a.
Close the current case by right-clicking another case and selecting [Set as Active
Case].
b.
Answer [No] to the dialog box asking if you want to download NVM.
c.
d.
Answer [No] to the dialog box asking if you want to reset the machine.
General Procedures
GP47
13. Disable the Network Service Access Control feature using Tools on the UI:
a.
b.
Select [More], select [More] again, and select [Service Access Control].
c.
Select the [Network Authenticated Access] button, so the button is now de-selected.
d.
Select [Next]
e.
14. Have the SA re-enter the machine's Default Repository setup and Template Pool setup as
required:
For 19.0.xxx or 19.01.xxx machines: The SA may use the Tools pathway on the
machine UI, they may access the machine's web page using a web browser, or they
may use CentreWare Scanning Services software. They will also need to enter the
log-in passwords, if required.
For 19.02.xxx machines: On the machine UI, select the [Network Scanning] tab,
then select [Update Template List]. The original list of templates should appear in the
template list.
For 19.0.xxx or 19.01.xxx machines: On the machine UI, select the [Network
Scanning] tab, then select [More Scan Features], then select [Update Template List].
The original list of templates should appear in the template list.
b.
Select [More].
c.
d.
Select [More].
e.
f.
g.
17. Have the SA check to ensure the Scan to File is working before you leave the account.
General Procedures
GP47
May 2003
6-56
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: When using Paper Tray 5, you must use reverse order tab stock.
Purpose
The purpose is to provide a procedure for creating tabs.
Xerox mylar tabs are recommended as they provide excellent quality and are a
firmer tab, which can mean more reliable tab printing.
Load the correct number of tabs in sequence. For example, if you need 6 tabs and
are using a bank of 5 tabs, you will have to add the 6th tab to the bank and eliminate
the next 4 tabs from the stack.
Load tab stock in Paper Trays 2, 3 or 4 when using the Tab Tray Insert or load stock
in Paper Tray 5.
Do not use the Print To Edge option as this may create a black line at the top of the
tab.
Introduction
Some companies have a need to create index tabs to separate and organize information in
reports, handbooks, etc. Xerox provides the Tab Creation solution for companies with occasional requirements for Tab Creation. Document Centre Tab Creation allows you to copy on 9 x
11-inch223 x 297mm, blank tabs, on an as needed basis, using the Xerox Document Centre
490/480/470/460 DC/ST models. This solution provides a special Tab Tray Insert for use in
Paper Trays 2, 3, or 4. The Tab Tray Insert allows the Document Centre to hold a box of tab
stock. Tab Creation includes the Tab Tray Insert and step by step instructions on how to load
blank index tab stock in the Document Centre to produce printed tab output. A minimum
amount of tab stock can be loaded in Paper Tray 5 without the Tab Tray Insert.
You cannot print on both sides of the tab. The solution is for one-sided output only.
The registration of the image on the tabs may vary depending on the Document
Centre system that you are using. You may have to adjust the image shift or tab
matrix to achieve correct registration on your system.
Automatic job recovery is not available when copying or printing on tab stock.
Tab printing may not provide the same image quality and/or paper handling performance as plain paper.
Tab Creation works similarly to the way you copy or print documents on special stock
using the Document Centre 490/480/470/460 DC/ST models. Refer to the Reference
Guide (Paper & Stock chapter) that accompanied your Document Centre. Programming
the Document Centre and installing the Tab Tray Insert in Paper Trays 2, 3, or 4 are the
key actions required when using the Tab Creation solution.
You can enable tab creation on the Document Centre by installing a special Tab Tray
Insert in Paper Trays 2, 3 or 4. Tab stock can be loaded in Paper Tray 5 if you do not have
the Tab Tray Insert. When using the Tab Tray Insert from Paper Trays 2, 3, or 4, the Document Centre User Interface will prompt you to confirm media settings. When using Paper
Tray 5, you need to set the paper size to 9 x 11-inch (223 x 297mm). Tab Master documents can then be placed in the Document Feeder. Make selections for Output destination and Image Adjustments using the User Interface touch screen as outlined in the Tab
Creation Instructions. You must manually collate the completed tabs within your copied or
printed sets.
Procedure
Making Tabs
1.
NOTE: If using punched stock, ensure that the punched side is in the feeding edge position.
When using the Tab Tray Insert
Depending on the tab stock type, you might have to manually order the tab stock before
making specific programming selections to ensure successful tab creation. It is important
to note that the Tab Creation solution does not provide job recovery. In other words, if the
tab stock jams or misfeeds in the Document Centre, you will need to clear the jam, replenish and re-order the tabs, and then you must rerun the job. The Document Centre system
will not automatically re-order the tabs or resume the job.
2.
Please familiarize yourself with the following information to ensure successful tab creation
on the Document Centre.
Straight Collated tabs such as 5-bank white or color mylar tabs are recommended.
Xerox tab stock is recommended for the best performance (i.e. order number
3R4417 white; 3R5709 clear).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
a.
b.
Place the tab stock in the Tab Tray Insert. Adjust the paper guide-post to accommodate the tab stock size.
c.
Make sure the straight edge side of the tab stock is on the feeding edge and the tab
side of the stock is on the trailing edge. The top tab must be toward the rear of the
machine. The bottom tab must be toward the front of the machine.
Load tab stock using the Tab Tray Insert or use Paper Tray 5
3.
May 2003
6-57
a.
Place the tab stock with the tab end facing away from the machine. Adjust the paper
guides to accommodate the tab stock size.
b.
Make sure that the top tab in the sequence is toward the rear of the machine and the
bottom tab is toward the front of the machine.
The Document Centre will ask you to confirm paper size of the tray selected. If the
size is not 9 x 11-inch, change the setting to 9-inches for the short edge of the paper
and 11-inches for the long edge of the paper.
b.
Select Confirm.
General Procedures
GP48
Place the tab masters document or tab originals into the Document Feeder with the
tabs on the trailing edge in a left to right sequence. The imaged side of the tab original should be face up in the Document Feeder.
4.
Select the following options from the Document Centre User Interface:
a.
Purpose
The purpose is to provide a procedure for setting the amount of decurling performed when the
UI button, Max Decurler Enabled, is selected.
b.
c.
On the Margin Shift screen, use the left horizontal arrow key to shift the margin 0.5
inches to the left.
d.
Select Save.
For more information about the Exit Decurler, go to Print Transportaion, Exit Decurler in the
Principles of Operation section of this manual.
The Exit Decurler requires IOT software level 07.09.04.XXX or higher .
NOTE: Margin Shift settings may vary depending on your tab and font. Validate this
setting by printing a sample tab to ensure the image is correctly positioned on the tab
before running the full tab job.
5.
Make the following output selections from the Document Centre User Interface
a.
Go to the Basic Copying Tab. Under Output options, select Top Tray - Collated;
under Paper Supply options, select Paper Tray 2, 3, or 4 if using the Tab Tray Insert
or select Paper Tray 5.
b.
Using the number keypad, select the number of tab sets that you are making. Then
press Start.
Introduction
Decurler operation is selectable through SA tools. In tools select [System settings], [More],
then select [Decurler Settings]. The decurler feature screen has three UI soft buttons to select
operation as follows:
NOTE: On a 460/470 machine there is no E-Sensor. The machine operation is the same
as when AutoDecurling Disabled is selected.
Auto Decurler Disabled - Make the Disabled selection to turn the machines automatic
decurling capability off. Decurling will be set to minimum.
If you do not have access to the internet, use the following process to create a template
document with one tab on each 8.5 x 11-inch (A4) page. The spacing of the tabs will vary
depending on the font size that you use. As a rule of thumb, the tabs are spaced about 2
inches apart. You will have to experiment with the creation of the tabs in the document to
make sure that they correspond to the appropriate tab that will be printed.
Max Decurler Enabled - Select Maximum to allow the machine to maximize the output
copy decurling capability.
When you have completed the document, you should have one tab on each page of the
document. For example, if you will be using five tabs, you should have a document with
five pages, and tab data imaged on each page.
Procedure
NOTE: The amount of decurling performed when Max Decurler Enabled is selected can
be adjusted by the CSE via NVM, as explained in this procedure.
1.
2.
4.
5.
Change the amount of decurling for Simplex jobs and or Duplex jobs:
6.
Inserting Tabs
2.
General Procedures
GP48, GP49
a.
b.
b.
Type the new value in the [Current Value] field using these options:
c.
Use the Build Job feature to insert colored stock into the documents to identify tabs location during copying.
Manually remove the colored sheet markers and insert the tabs.
3.
Build Job allows you to combine multiple, individually programmed job segments from
either the Document Centre Glass or the Document Feeder into a single copy job. You
can use the Build Job feature when creating the document and insert colored stock into
the document where a tab belongs. Once the sets are created, you can then replace the
colored stock with the respective tab.
1.
Auto Decurler Enabled - Select Auto Decurler Enabled to allow a 480/490 machine to
automatically minimize curl on output copies, based on the humidity level sensed by the
E-Sensor. This is the default selection.
1 = Low Decurling
2 = Medium Decurling
3 = Maximum Decurling
7.
8.
May 2003
6-58
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: This version of the Network Controller Image Overwrite Enablement software is
under evaluation for National Information Assurance Partners/Common Criteria certification. Customers interested in complying with this certification must disable HTTP after the
Network Controller (ESS) disk overwrite has been enabled. Customers who do not
require compliance with this certification can leave HTTP enabled. HTTP must be reenabled before the ESS disk overwrite can be disabled. (To enable/disable HTTP: (1)
Enter the Tools pathway on the UI, select [Connectivity and Network Setup], [Network
Setup], [TCP/IP Options]. (2) Ensure TCP/IP is enabled: Select [TCP/IP Settings], [Protocol and Media], [Enable], [Save], [Close]. (3) Select [HTTP/IPP], [Enable] or [Disable],
[Save], [Close], [Exit Tools].) Customers interested in complying with this certification
must also disable Network Scanning and Job Based Accounting, and any network protocols that are defaulted off must stay off.
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to enable the Image Overwrite Security Option, to support
certain governmental and other accounts' security policies requiring the ability to cleanse all
image/job data from all hard disks.
Before this option can be enabled, the customer must order this option through Xerox sales
and receive the Image Overwrite Security Kit.
Prerequisite
The machine and the PWS must have 19.04.xxx or higher software.
Procedure
1.
Enter Diagnostic Navigator, [NVM] tab, open [NVM Tool], and download NVM from the
machine.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Close NVM Tool, [Exit] Diagnostic Navigator, and take the machine out of Diagnostics
mode.
6.
Switch OFF the machine power, wait approximately 20 seconds, and switch the machine
power back ON. (The machine must be reset in order for this NVM change to take effect.)
7.
Provide the CD-ROM, the Customer Letter, the "Quick Install Card," and the Image Overwrite Security Introduction to the Customer/SA.
8.
9.
a.
You (the CSE) have enabled the Image Overwrite Security option on the Document
Centre's Main hard disk drive (the only hard disk drive on a Digital Copier or DT/DP
IOT).
b.
ST: Action is required on the SA's part to enable the feature on the Document Centre's Network hard disk drive. The necessary instructions are provided on the Quick
Install Card, and the necessary files are contained on the CD-ROM.
c.
The instructions for using the Image Overwrite Security feature (once enabled) are
contained in the Image Overwrite Security Introduction.
feature,
the
SA
sends
the
file
feature,
the
SA
sends
the
file
overwrite
If the ESS Image Overwrite Security feature must be disabled temporarily for Service purposes and re-enabled afterward, the CSE can have the customer/SA send the disable
file and later the enable file again. In case the customer/SA's CD-ROM is unavailable, the
above files are also available to the CSE on the 19.04.xxx or higher machine software
CD-ROM in the following directory (where XX_XXX is the specific software release number): 7_19_XX_XXX\ESS\DiskOverwrite\ .
Additional Information
If a 19-300 , 19-301 , or 19-302 fault occurs during Image (Main) Disk overwrite, go to
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-59
General Procedures
GP50
If a 19-304 fault occurs during Image (Main) Disk overwrite, go to the 03-338 RAP to troubleshoot the problem.
NOTE: It is left to the customer's discretion to determine how to handle a disk overwrite
failure. This allows the customer to follow the government or company standards during a
failure (e.g. if required by their policy, the customer may have the CSE replace the drive
with a new one and give the old drive to the customer to be destroyed). Otherwise, the
customer may elect to continue to use the Document Centre as is.
If a PWS session is opened while the Main Image Disk overwrite is in progress and an
intrusive diagnostic routine is attempted, the routine will be rejected with the message,
Failed to Enter Routine: Not in Diag Mode. NO further diagnostic routines or customer
jobs can be run until the system is powered off and on.
During the Main Image Disk overwrite operation, the white power off button will be
ignored.
If SW Verify is run on a system with the ESS Image Overwrite feature enabled, it will fail
with a bad checksum for start_Lakes. This is expected. Please run SW verify before the
ESS Image Overwrite Security software is enabled.
If ESS software is loaded on a system that has ESS Image Overwrite enabled, it will be
disabled after the upgrade. This is because ESS software has the feature disabled as
default. ESS Image Overwrite will need to be re-enabled after ESS software is loaded.
General Procedures
GP50, GP51
Prerequisite
The machine must have 19.05.xxx or higher software.
Procedure
Refer to the Delivery/Removal Carrier MFF Installation Manual, stored as a PDF file mff drc
instructions.pdf on the EDOC CD-ROM, in the directory installation_manual.
May 2003
6-60
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
a.
Run C-configuration and Z-configuration Tri-fold jobs with 20 lb. / 80 gsm or equivalent weight paper.
Purpose
b.
If the customer uses A4 paper and TAG M011 is not marked off on the MFF Change Tag
Matrix, follow the Tri-fold Setup Procedure for A4 Paper, and mark off Tag #011 on the MFF
Change Tag Matrix.
As the output exits the finisher and stacks onto the Booklet Tray, label the top pane
as a reference for each job as shown in Figure 2.
c.
Open the Tri-fold sheets, measure the fold lengths indicated in Figure 3, and compare them to the specifications in Figure 3. Use "TOP" as a reference, labeled from
the previous step. If any dimensions are incorrect, adjust the fold lengths as follows.
If the customer uses 8.5x11-inch paper, follow the Tri-fold Setup Procedure for 8.5 x 11 Inch
Paper.
d.
e.
NOTE: If the customer requires Tri-Fold output using both 8.5x11-inch and A4 paper, the TriFolding must be set up for A4 paper. The customer will then experience unequal fold lengths
on 8.5x11-inch paper, but this compromise is necessary in order to avoid A4 paper wrinkling,
double folding, overlapping, or jamming in the Tri-Folder.
Compare dimension C from the output to that in Figure 3 and determine the
length the output dimension is off by and whether it must be increased or
decreased. For example, if the output measured is 89.5 mm, the fold length is
off by 1.5 mm (91 mm - 89.5 mm), and must be increased.
ii.
Take the length that the output is off by in millimeters and multiply it by 8.8 to
determine the NVM adjustment. (In the example, 1.5 mm multiplied by 8.8 is
13).
iii.
iv.
v.
To increase dimension C, subtract the value obtained in step ii. from the current
value and enter the result as a new value. (In the example, if the current value
is +26, change the value to +13.
vi.
To decrease dimension C, add the value obtained in step ii. to the current value
and enter the result as a new value. (For another example, if dimension C is
92.5 mm (must be decreased by 1.5 mm, i.e. 13 in NVM) and the current NVM
value is +26, change the value to +39.
vii.
Adjust the middle fold (second crease) length mechanically on the Trifolder module (Figure 1):
a.
Remove the Booklet Maker Exit cover (three T20 or 5.5 mm screws).
b.
c.
d.
NOTE: The position shown is a starting point. To verify the middle fold (second crease)
length, run Tri-fold jobs and measure the output as in step 3. Each graduation in Figure 1
indicates approximately 1 mm of adjustment. To increase the middle fold length, lower the
backstop tab; to decrease the middle fold length, raise the backstop tab.
NOTE: If wrinkling, double folding, or overlapping occurs, the middle fold may have to be
increased.
2.
i.
d.
Enter Diagnostics Navigator, [NVM] tab, [NVM tool], and download the machine
NVM.
Select Service: [Mark Service], and select Module: [MultiFunctionFinisher].
f.
Compare dimension Z from the output to that in Figure 3 and determine the
length the output dimension is off by and whether it must be increased or
decreased. For example, if the output measured is 184 mm, the fold length is
off by 1.0 mm (185 mm - 184 mm), and must be increased.
ii.
Take the length that the output is off by in millimeters and multiply it by 8.8 to
determine the NVM adjustment. (In the example, 1.0 mm multiplied by 8.8 is 9).
iii.
iv.
v.
To increase dimension Z, add the value obtained in step ii. to the current value
and enter the result as a new value. (In the example, if the current value is -96,
change the value to -87).
vi.
To decrease dimension Z, subtract the value obtained in step ii. from the current value and enter the result as a new value. (For another example, if dimension Z is 186 (must be decreased by 1.0 mm, i.e. 9 in NVM) and the current
value is -96, change the value to -105).
vii.
ii.
ii.
NOTE: Each of these NVM settings is a starting point. To verify the outer fold (first
crease) lengths, run Tri-fold jobs and inspect the output as in step 3.
3.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-61
General Procedures
GP52
Adjust the middle fold (second crease) length mechanically on the Tri-folder module (Figure 1):
a.
Remove the Booklet Maker Exit Front Cover (three T20 or 5.5 mm screws).
b.
c.
d.
NOTE: The position shown is a starting point. To verify the middle fold (second crease)
length, run Tri-fold jobs and measure the output as in step 3. Each graduation in Figure 1
indicates approximately 1 mm of adjustment. To increase the middle fold length, lower the
backstop tab; to decrease the middle fold length, raise the backstop tab.
2.
ii.
Take the length that the output is off by and multiply it by 8.8 to determine the
NVM adjustment. (In the example, 1.0 mm multiplied by 8.8 is 9).
iii.
iv.
v.
To increase dimension C, subtract the value obtained in step ii. from the current
value and enter the result as a new value. (In the example, if the current value
is +4, change the value to -5.)
vi.
To decrease dimension C, add the value obtained in step ii. to the current value
and enter the result as a new value. (For another example, if dimension C is 98
mm (must be decreased by 1 mm, i.e. 9 in NVM) and the current value is +4,
change the value to +13.)
vii.
NOTE: If wrinkling, double folding, or overlapping occurs, the middle fold may need to be
increased.
Compare dimension Z from the output to that in Figure 4 and determine the
length the output dimension is off by and whether it must be increased or
decreased. For example, if the output measured is 196 mm, then the fold length
is off by 1.0 mm (197 mm - 196 mm), and must be increased.
ii.
Take the length that the output is off by and multiply it by 8.8 to determine the
NVM adjustment. (In the example, 1.0 mm multiplied by 8.8 is 9.)
iii.
a.
iv.
v.
To increase dimension Z, add the value obtained in step ii. to the current value
and enter the result as a new value. (In the example, if the current value is -26,
change the value to +17.)
vi.
To decrease dimension Z, subtract the value obtained in step ii. from the current value and enter the result as a new value. (For another example, if dimension Z is 198 (must be decreased by 1.0 mm, i.e. 9 in NVM) and the current
value is -26, change the value to -35.)
vii.
b.
c.
d.
Enter Diagnostics Navigator, [NVM] tab, [NVM tool], and download the machine
NVM.
Select Service: [Mark Service], and select Module: [MultiFunctionFinisher].
Set the Z configuration NVM value:
i.
ii.
ii.
4.
NOTE: Each of these NVM settings is a starting point. To verify the outer fold (first crease)
lengths, run Tri-fold jobs and inspect the output as in step 3.
3.
Run C-configuration and Z-configuration Tri-fold jobs with 20 lb. / 80 gsm or equivalent weight paper.
b.
As the output exits the finisher and stacks onto the Booklet Tray, label the top pane
as a reference for each job as indicated in Figure 2.
c.
Open the Tri-fold sheets, measure the fold lengths indicated in Figure 4, and compare them to the specifications in Figure 4. Use "TOP" as a reference, labeled from
the previous step. If any dimensions are incorrect, adjust the fold lengths as follows.
d.
e.
Compare dimension C from the output to that in Figure 4 and determine the
length the output dimension is off by and whether it must be increased or
decreased. For example, if the output measured is 96 mm, the fold length is off
by 1 mm (97 mm - 96 mm), and must be increased.
General Procedures
GP52
May 2003
6-62
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
adjustment screw
(T20)
TOP
TOP
Finisher
Finisher
Booklet Tray
typical setting for
A4 paper
C-configuration
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Booklet Tray
Z-configuration
May 2003
6-63
General Procedures
GP52
TOP
Middle
Fold
94 mm
TOP
Z
185 mm
(91 mm + 94 mm)
C
91 mm
TOP
C-configuration
Middle
Fold
94 mm
Middle
Fold
100 mm
91 mm
C
97 mm
General Procedures
GP52
Z
197mm
(97mm + 100 mm)
TOP
C-configuration
Z-configuration
Middle
Fold
100 mm
97 mm
Z-configuration
May 2003
6-64
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Switch on the machine power and accept the configuration change displayed on the UI.
4.
Machine Software Version 19.04.xxx and Higher Only: Set the Exit Decurler Configuration NVM value:
a.
Enter [NVM tab , NVM Tool] and download the machine NVM.
b.
c.
d.
Double-click on the Value, change the Current Value to 0 (zero), and select [Write
NVM], and [OK].
e.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-65
General Procedures
GP53
General Procedures
GP53
May 2003
6-66
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NVM
CAUTION
You must ensure that Service is set to [All]. Otherwise, only the NVM locations in the service displayed will be saved to the floppy.
a.
b.
c.
NOTE: In this procedure, any references to SMH are to be interpreted to mean Bypass Tray.
NOTE: When saving NVM, the filename should reflect the current machine software
level. Example: 1_10.bnf (for L1.10 a.k.a. L0.15.6 software). It is recommended to
remove any down-rev filenames to avoid filling up the diskette with multiple nvm
files.
Procedure
CAUTION
Running this routine will reset several NVM locations to default settings. This may affect some
setup procedures, and cause fault codes in some instances. If a bulletin that required NVM
changes had been previously implemented since the last software upgrade, the bulletin may
need to be reapplied.
1.
3.
Select Category
High Capacity Disk Finisher
d.
Select Drive A:
e.
Select [OK]
Double-click the row which contains the location or NVM name to be changed.
b.
Another dialog box appears (Edit NVM Value). The fields which appeared in the
table are also located here. The current value is the only editable field.
c.
When changed, [Write NVM] will save the new value. [Set Nominal] will set the current value to its nominal value.
Paper Path
Xerographics
Paper Registration
SMH / HCF
d.
Scanner
e.
DADF
4.
To upload the active NVM file to the machine: Select [Machine] [Upload].
Image Processing
5.
Select [Start] to begin the routine. Selecting [Exit] will exit the routine. Standard Status
and Results windows are available for indication on routine progress.
For more help on this routine, go to [NVM tab , IOT Variable NVM Initialization], and click on
Help.
c.
A (File Open) dialog window will appear. NVM Data files have a.nsf extension.
Locate the desired NVM file to be restored (uploaded).
d.
Select [OK].
For more help on this routine, go to [NVM tab , NVM Tool], and click on Help.
Purpose
Purpose
The NVM Tool will enable the capability to download machine NVM to the PWS, save the NVM
to a file, restore NVM from a file, and to read or modify NVM values.
Procedures
2.
b.
NVM Tool
1.
a.
The purpose of this routine is to initialize the NVM values stored on the ESS PWB.
For more help on this routine, go to [NVM tab , ESS Variable NVM Initialization], and click on
Help.
a.
Select [Machine] [Download]. A status bar will appear indicating the progress of the
download.
Purpose
b.
When the download is complete, a window will appear with a table view of machine
NVM. Once the download is complete, the following actions may be performed:
The purpose of this routine is to back up the Network information stored on the ESS.
For more help on this routine, go to [NVM tab , Backup ESS NVM], and click on Help.
To save the NVM to the Machine Resident Diskette or other floppy diskette:
May 2003
6-67
General Procedures
NVM
For more help on this routine, go to [NVM tab , Restore ESS NVM], and click on Help.
Paper
System Registration Setup
Purpose
This routine will allow the user to adjust the IOT and IIT System, image-to-paper registration.
IOT System Registration Setup
Refer to the following adjustment procedures for IOT Registration setup instructions:
ADJ 8-1, IOT Registration Setup Series, including:
ADJ 8-1A, IOT Lead Edge Registration (Process Direction)
ADJ 8-1B, IOT Top Edge Registration (IB - OB), Side 1
ADJ 8-1C, IOT Top Edge Registration (IB - OB), Side 2, Small Paper
ADJ 8-1D, IOT Top Edge Registration (IB - OB), Side 2, Large Paper
ADJ 8-1E, IOT Lead Edge Registration for Small Heavy Weight Paper (19.02 and Higher
Software Only)
ADJ 8-1F, IOT Lead Edge Registration for Large Paper (19.02 and Higher Software Only)
ADJ 8-1G, IOT Lead Edge Registration for Large Heavy Weight Paper (19.02 and Higher
Software Only)
The IOT System Registration Setup screen offers the following selections and information:
Setups: There are three types of Setups offered: x-reg, y-reg (Side 1), or y-reg (Side 2).
Size: There are two standard paper sizes that may be selected for the specified tray:
8.5x11-20# or A4-75gsm.
Paper Weight (19.03 and Higher Software Only): This is used to select Normal or Heavy
paper.
Directional Buttons: The directional buttons (shown as arrows) allow the directional
adjustment of the selected registration. The x-reg setup allows left and right directional
adjustments. The y-reg setup (Sides 1 & 2) allows up and down directional adjustments.
The current position of the registration is indicated in the Setup Status window.
Starting the Setup: Selecting [Start Job] will save the current position of the selected registration and start a five page registration test pattern job. Once the setup has been
started, the text on the Start Job button will change to Stop Job. Selecting the Stop Job
button will interrupt the setup process. Upon completion (either by selecting the Stop Job
button or by allowing the setup to continue to completion), the Stop Job button text will
change back to Start Job.
General Procedures
NVM , Paper
Results: Lists the results of the setup which have already completed.
May 2003
6-68
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Starting the Setup: Selecting [Start] will start the next step of the setup.
Procedure
For more help on this routine, go to [Paper tab , System Registration Setup], and click on Help.
NOTE: If a Jam occurs during the running of this routine, stop collecting data beyond and
including the jam and clear all jams in the required areas. Repeat the test when requested.
1.
Purpose
The IOT Paper Path Setup routine allows the CSE to set the nominal buckle-height value for
Duplex Feed Time, Paper Width, and SMH (Bypass Tray) Feed-time.
From the PWS, launch the Diagnostic Navigator. Select [Local]. After a short wait, the
Diagnostic Navigator window will be displayed.
2.
Select [Paper]
3.
Procedure
Select [IOT Paper Path Timing]. The IOT Paper Path Timing screen will be displayed.
Select the following:
1.
From the PWS, launch the Diagnostic Navigator. Select [Local]. After a short wait, the
Diagnostic Navigator window will be displayed.
a.
Tray - Paper Tray to be tested (Choices are Trays 1, 2, 3, 4, SMH (Bypass Tray), or
HCF)
2.
Select [Paper].
b.
3.
Select [IOT Paper Path Setup]. The IOT Paper Path Setup screen is displayed.
Interval - Time interval for which test results will be displayed as follows (The default
is ALL):
4.
Select the desired setup from the choices listed in the [Setups] box:
5.
a.
Duplex Feed Time Setup - sets the duplex buckle to its nominal value. This setup is
run whenever the Registration Transport or Duplex Transport is replaced.
b.
(This feature is not yet available) Paper Width Setup - enables the ON LINE consistency check of the paper passing over the Registration Sensor. This setup is run
whenever the Registration Transport is replaced.
c.
SMH (Bypass Tray) Feed Time Setup - sets the Bypass Tray buckle to its nominal
value.
TE@S1 - With a sheet of paper stopped at the Wait Station Sensor, this test
measures the time interval from Feed Clutch on, to Trail Edge at Wait Station
Sensor.
TO S2 - Total time (lead edge to trail edge) the sheet is at the Registration Sensor.
TO S3 - Total time (lead edge to trail edge) the sheet is at the Prefuser Sensor.
TO S4 - Total time (lead edge to trail edge) the sheet is at the Inverter Entrance
Sensor.
Select the desired paper size from the [Size] box (8.5x11 or A4)
TE@S4 - LE@S5 - Time interval between the Trail Edge at the Inverter
Entrance Sensor and the Lead Edge at the Inverter Exit Sensor (inverted
mode).
NOTE: If the correct sized paper is not loaded in the selected tray, a message is displayed to load the correct sized paper.
(This feature is not yet available) If the desired setup includes label stock, perforated
stock, or envelopes, the SMH (Bypass Tray) buckle can be set to a value of 10 mm less
than nominal. This will optimize the buckle height for this feature. Click on the [Adjust
SMH Buckle] box to enable this feature.
S5 Inv - Dup - Total time (lead edge to trail edge) the sheet is over the Inverter
Exit Sensor going to the Duplex Transport (inverted mode).
7.
Select [Start Job]. The [Start Job] button text will change to [Stop Job]. Select it again to
stop the job, or wait for a [Job Complete] status indication.
S5 Byp - Exit - Total time (lead edge to trail edge) the sheet is over the Inverter
Exit Sensor going to the Decurler (non-inverted mode).
8.
Status and related information are displayed in their respective boxes on the screen.
9.
Upon completion of the job, select [Start Job] to repeat the routine, or select [Exit] to
return to the Diagnostic Navigator.
6.
S5 Inv - Exit - Total time (lead edge to trail edge) the sheet is over the Inverter
Exit Sensor going to the Decurler (inverted mode).
c.
4.
For more information on this routine, go to [Paper tab , IOT Paper Path Setup], and click on
Help.
Results Window
Purpose
This routine allows the CSE to monitor critical timing values within the paper path. It also
allows access to timing information from machine memory and the monitoring of critical timing
events, both remotely and on site.
The results window displays the test results for the selected interval. To view the
results in a table format, select [Table]. When finished reviewing the data, select
[Exit] to return to the IOT Paper Path Timing screen.
5.
For more help on this routine, go to [Paper tab , IOT Paper Path Timing], and click on Help.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-69
General Procedures
Paper
This checks the alignment of the LED sensor array. A 10-726 will be displayed if this test
fails.
Purpose
The purpose of this routine is to provide a means to run the Fuser Drives test from the PWS.
This test will display Machine Status, Diagnostic Status, and any existing or encountered faults.
Group 2 Tests
NOTE: A machine without a Decurler will always fail this test.
1.
From the PWS, launch the Diagnostic Navigator. Select [Local]. After a short wait, the
Diagnostic Navigator window will be displayed.
2.
3.
Select the [Fuser Drives Test] icon. The Fuser Drives Test screen is displayed.
Procedure
Print Test
This test will dynamically check the sensor in run mode. Duplex prints will be made using
the registration test pattern. The number of prints and paper tray are selectable from the
PWS.
NOTE: The [Start Test] and [Exit] buttons displayed in the Fuser Drives Test screen are
shown in two different states; Enabled (dark outline, black text) and Disabled (light outline, gray text). The button cannot be selected when disabled.
4.
When the [Start Test] button becomes enabled, click on it to start the routine. At this time,
the [Start Test] button changes to disabled and the [Exit] button changes to enabled.
NOTE: Selecting the [Exit] button before the test is completed, will cause a test-inprogress warning to be displayed. The option is given to cancel or exit.
5.
At the completion of the test, the results are displayed in the [Results] box. Passed or
Failed is displayed in the [Status] box. In the event of a failure, specific faults are also displayed in the [Status] box.
6.
For more help on this routine, go to [Paper tab , Fuser Drives Test], and click on Help.
Communications Test
This test will determine if the sensor is communicating with the Main Control PWB. If not,
a 10-720 fault will be displayed.
The LEDs intensity is checked in this test. If it fails, a 10-724 will be displayed.
General Procedures
Paper
May 2003
6-70
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
IIT
Scanner Calibration
Purpose
Purpose
The purpose of the Scanner Calibration routine is to perform a Full Calibration or a Partial Calibration.
The purpose of the DADF Clutch/Solenoid Tests is to test the electrical and mechanical operation of the following Document Feeder Components:
Procedure
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [Full] or [Partial], then
select [Start].
IIOC Turnaround
2.
While the test is running, [Calibrating] will be displayed in the Status window. The text
will flash until the test is complete. The [Start] button will be disabled until the test is completed.
The Exit Clutch and Inverter Clutch Test checks the mechanical operation of the Exit
Clutch and the Inverter Clutch
3.
When the calibration test is complete, the Status window will display the message [Complete].
Feed Clutch Nudger Solenoid Test checks the mechanical operation of the DADF Feed
Clutch and the DADF Nudger Solenoid.
4.
Observe the Results window. The message [White Lamp On calibration passed/failed]
and or [Black Lamp Off calibration passed/failed], will be displayed. Associated fault
code(s) for the failed component(s) will be displayed in the Faults window.
The DADF Registration Gate Solenoid Test checks the mechanical operation of the
DADF Registration Gate Solenoid.
Full Calibration will invoke the same routine performed at power up, which includes lamp
on (white) and lamp off (black) tests.
Partial Calibration will perform a lamp off (black) test only.
For more help on this routine, go to [IIT tab , Scanner Calibration], and click on Help.
Procedures
To perform the IIOC Turnaround Test, do the following:
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [IIOC Turnaround] then
select [Start Test].
2.
When all the components have been tested, the Status window will display the message
[IIOC Turnaround completed].
3.
Observe the Results window. A passed or failed message for each component tested
will be displayed. Associated fault code(s) for the failed component(s) will be displayed in
the Faults window.
To perform the Exit Clutch and Inverter Clutch Test, do the following:
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [Exit Clutch and Inverter
Clutch] then select [Start Test].
2.
When the Exit Clutch and Inverter Clutch have been tested, the Status window will display the message [Exit Clutch and Inverter Clutch completed].
3.
The Results window will display a passed or failed message for the Exit Clutch and for
the Inverter Clutch. Associated fault code(s) for the failed component(s) will be displayed
in the Faults window.
Each motor is tested by energizing the motor and checking for encoder feedback. If no
encoder feedback is measured, the test result for that motor will be [failed].
The Exit Clutch Drive Belt is tested by energizing the DADF Feed Motor, the DADF Exit Clutch,
and the DADF Inverter Clutch and then checking for encoder feedback from the CVT Motor.
To perform the Feed Clutch and Nudger Solenoid Test, do the following:
Procedure
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [Feed Clutch Nudger
Solenoid] then select [Start Test].
When the Motors and the CVT Drive Belts have been tested, the Status window will display the message [Tests complete].
2.
When the Feed Clutch and the Nudger Solenoid have been tested, the Status window
will display the message [Feed Clutch Nudger Solenoid completed].
Observe the Results window. A passed or failed message for each of the IIT Motors and
for the CVT belts will be displayed. If the CVT and Scanner (RIS) Motor common feedback signal is missing, the message [CVT and RIS motor common feedback leg failed]
will be displayed. Associated fault code(s) for the failed component(s) will be displayed in
the Faults window.
3.
Observe the Results window. A passed or failed message for the Feed Clutch and for
the Nudger Solenoid will be displayed. Associated fault code(s) for the failed component(s) will be displayed in the Faults window.
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [Start Test].
2.
3.
For more help on this routine, go to [IIT tab , IIT Motor Tests], and click on Help.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [DADF Registration
Gate Solenoid].
2.
Follow the instructions in the Information window, then select [Start Test].
May 2003
6-71
General Procedures
IIT
3.
When the DADF Registration Gate Solenoid Test has been tested, the Status window
will display the message [DADF Registration Gate Solenoid completed].
4.
Observe the Results window. A series of passed or failed messages (one for each document fed) for the Registration gate will be displayed.
5.
Associated fault code(s) for a failed DADF Registration Gate, will be displayed in the
Faults window.
Jam Time is the time in milliseconds, if exceeded for a particular timing interval, a
jam will be declared.
6.
To view data for a particular sensor, scroll to that sensor in the Display Selection Window.
7.
To view the same timing data for the sensor in a histogram format, select Histogram.
For more help on this routine, go to [IIT tab , DADF Document Timing Test], and click on Help.
For more help on this routine, go to [IIT tab , DADF Clutch / Solenoid Tests], and click on Help.
Purpose
Purpose
The purpose of DADF Document Timing is to feed documents through the DADF document
path at full speed and measure the following feed times:
Lead Edge at Q1 (Input Tray Exit Sensor) - the time measured between when the DADF
Feed Motor was energized to when the LE of the document arrives at the Input Tray Exit
Sensor.
Lead Edge at Q2 (DADF Reg. Gate Sensor) - the time measured between the LE of the
document arriving at the Input Tray Exit Sensor to when the LE of the document arrives at
the DADF Reg. Gate Sensor.
Lead Edge at Q3 (CVT Start of Scan Sensor) - the time measured between when the LE
of the document arrived at the DADF Reg. Gate Sensor to when the LE of the document
arrives at the CVT Start of Scan Sensor.
The purpose of DADF Sensor Tests is to determine whether or not actuation of the DADF Document Path Sensors, the Document Input Tray Sensors, the Document Feeder Top Cover Sensor, and the DADF Interlock Switch, is sensed by the control logic.
The following tests are available for selection in the Test Selection window.
Procedure
Lead Edge at Q4 (DADF Exit/Invert Sensor) - the time measured between when the LE of
the document arrived at the CVT Start of Scan Sensor to when the LE of the document
arrives at the DADF Exit/Invert Sensor.
1.
2.
Select [Start], then follow the instructions displayed in the Instructions window.
Time Over Q2 (DADF Reg. Gate Sensor) - the time measured between when the LE of
the document arrived at the DADF Reg. Gate Sensor to when the LE of the document
leaves the DADF Reg. Gate Sensor.
3.
Time Over Q3 (CVT Start of Scan Sensor) - the time measured between when the LE of
the document arrived at the CVT Start of Scan Sensor to when the LE of the document
leaves the CVT Start of Scan Sensor.
View the results of the DADF Sensor Tests in the Results window. If the control logic
detected the actuation of the sensors/switch, the question mark to the left of the sensors/
switch name will be replaced by a check mark.
4.
If you want to retest a particular sensor or switch, select [Clear Results], then run the test
again.
Time Over Q4 (DADF Exit/Invert Sensor) - the time measured between when the LE of
the document arrived at the DADF Exit/Invert Sensor to when the LE of the document
leaves the DADF Exit/Invert Sensor.
For more help on this routine, go to [IIT tab , DADF Sensor Tests], and click on Help.
Procedure
Purpose
1.
After placing the correct paper in the Document Input Tray as directed by the instructions,
select [Start].
The purpose of the Scanner Lamp Profile diagnostic routine is to provide selections for the following tests:
2.
A popup window will display the message [Please place documents in the Document
Feeder]. Select [OK] to start the test.
Lamp Off test - this test measures the response of the Image Module when the Illumination Lamp is off.
3.
When all the documents have been fed, the Status Window will display the message
[Test Complete], and a graph will display the timing data for Lead Edge At Q1 (Input Tray
Exit Sensor).
Lamp On test - this test measures the response of the Image Module when the Illumination Lamp is on in order to check the Illumination Lamp output for uniformity.
4.
The individual document feeds are displayed on the X axis with their corresponding times
in milliseconds displayed on the Y axis
1.
5.
2.
3.
After the test is successfully started, the Status window will display the message [Test in
progress]. The [Start] button changes to a [Stop] button. The test runs until the [Stop] button is selected.
Low is the low limit time, in milliseconds, for a particular timing interval
Procedure
High is the high limit time, in milliseconds, for a particular timing interval
Nominal is the nominal time, in milliseconds, for a particular timing interval
General Procedures
IIT
May 2003
6-72
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [Lamp Off] or [Lamp
On].
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
4.
While the test is running, [Calibrating] will be displayed in the Status window. The text
will flash until the test is complete. The [Start] button will be disabled until the test is completed.
4.
Observe the Results window. The message [AGC tab passed] or [AGC tab failed], will
be displayed.
5.
Associated fault code(s) for the failed test will be displayed in the Faults window.
5.
When the test is stopped, the Status window will display the message [Stopped].
6.
1.
7.
Test data is displayed using Gray Level (Y-axis) and Cluster Number (X-axis). The lamp
has been divided into 20 Clusters, with Cluster 1 at the rear of the machine and Cluster 20
at the front of the machine. Each cluster is divided into 8 pixels from which a gray level
data point is obtained, representing the 8 pixels/cluster.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [Carriage Parking], then
select [Start].
2.
While the test is running, the Status window will display the message [Test started...
please wait], then the message [Test in progress...]
3.
When the Carriage Parking Test is completed, the Status will display the message
[Complete]
4.
5.
Associated fault code(s) for the failed test will be displayed in the Faults window.
8.
9.
In the Lamp Off test, the black line indicates the maximum value for the clusters, and the
bright green line is the test data or Image Module response. The test passes if the data
(green line) is flat and does not exceed the maximum value.
In the Lamp On test, the black lines indicate the minimum and maximum values and the
gray line represents the nominal value for the clusters. The bright green line is the test
data or Image Module response. The test passes if the data (green line) is flat and falls
between the minimum and maximum value.
NOTE: Once the Scan Carriage is parked, the machine must be powered off immediately
for the Scan Carriage to remain in the correct position for shipping. If more than 10 seconds elapse, the Scan Carriage will return to the unparked position.
10. To view any faults that may have occurred during the test, select [Faults].
For more help on this routine, go to [IIT tab , Scanner Lamp Profile], and click on Help.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [Scan Carriage], then
select [Start].
Purpose
2.
The purpose of the Scanner Tests diagnostic routine is to provide selections for the following
Scanner tests.
While the test is running, the Status window will display the message [Test started...
please wait], then the message [Test in progress...]
3.
When the Scan Carriage Test is completed, the Status will display the message [Complete]
Scanner Tests
Lamp Operation - this test determines whether or not the Illumination Lamp is functioning.
AGC Tab - this test checks for a dirty or missing AGC Tab.
4.
Carriage Parking - this routine moves the Scan Carriage to the correct position for shipping.
Observe the Results window. The message [PSOS sensor and drives passed] or
[PSOS sensor and drives failed], will be displayed.
5.
Associated fault code(s) for the failed test will be displayed in the Faults window.
Scan Carriage - this test checks the mechanical drives for the Scan Carriage and the
operation of the PSOS Sensor.
For more help on this routine, go to [IIT tab , Scanner Tests], and click on Help.
Procedures
Purpose
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [Lamp Operation], then
select [Start].
The purpose of the IIT Skew Check diagnostic routine is to provide selections for the following
IIT Skew Checks
2.
While the test is running, the Status window will display the message [Test started...
please wait], then the message [Test in progress...]
DADF Document - this routine is used to measure the skew of the Document Feeder in
relation to the Scanner. The information is used to adjust DADF Skew.
3.
When the Lamp Operation Test is completed, the Status will display the message [Complete]
4.
Observe the Results window. The message [Lamp on passed] or [Lamp on failed], will
be displayed.
Image Module (not yet implemented) - this routine is used to measure the skew of the
Image Module in relation to the Scanner frame. The information is used to adjust Image
Module Skew.
Procedure
5.
Associated fault code(s) for the failed test will be displayed in the Faults window.
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [DADF Document].
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [AGC Tab], then select
[Start].
2.
Load paper in the Document Input Tray as directed to by the text in the Instructions
window.
2.
While the test is running, the Status window will display the message [Test started...
please wait], then the message [Test in progress...
3.
While the DADF Document Skew Check is running, the Status window will display the
message [#X is XX mrad] as each sheet is fed through the Document Feeder.
3.
When the AGC Tab Test is completed, the Status will display the message [Complete]
4.
When the DADF Document Skew Check is completed, observe the Results window.
The average skew will be displayed in mrad (milliradians).
May 2003
6-73
General Procedures
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
IIT
5.
Associated fault code(s) for the failed DADF Document Skew Check will be displayed in
the Faults window.
For more help on this routine, go to [IIT tab , IIT Skew Check], and click on Help.
Self Tests
Video and Controls POST
Purpose
The Video & Controls Power On Self Test (POST) routines consist of low level initialization and
validation exercises to verify the Main Control, RCM, SCAM, HP or SP, and attached peripheral integrity or to detect a malfunction. This test automatically will take place at system startup or it can be enabled by a service representative via the PWS either on site or remotely.
Procedure
Procedure
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [Start].
2.
A popup window will display the message [Has the lamp been changed?]. Select [Yes]. If
[No] is selected a popup window with the message [Please change the lamp and run
again].
3.
If [Yes] is selected, a popup window will display the message [Has the Scanner been calibrated?].
4.
1.
From the PWS, launch the Diagnostic Navigator. Select [Local]. After a short wait, the
Diagnostic Navigator window will be displayed.
2.
3.
Select [Yes].
a.
Power On Self Test Results (default) - This is the initial screen displayed. It displays the results from the last power on self test. The results can be re-read by
selecting [Refresh].
b.
Main Controller Tests (1) -These are Main Control PWB tests, including:
DRAM Test
The Results window will display the message [New reset value stored: 0, when the
counter has been set to zero.
5.
NVM Test
Options Present Test
If the Scanner Calibration routine has been not been performed, do the following
PBus Test
After the routine is completed, select [Exit] to return to the Lamp Life Reset routine.
In the Lamp Life Reset routine, select [Start], to zero the Lamp Usage Counter. The
Results window will display the message [New reset value stored: 0], when the
counter has been set to zero.
6.
c.
Main Controller Tests (2) - These are more Main Control PWB tests, including:
IPS1 RAM Test
Any associated fault code(s) declared during the Lamp Life Reset will be displayed in the
Faults window.
IP ASIC Test
SCVM RAM Test
For more help on this routine, go to [IIT tab , Lamp Life Reset], and click on Help.
Ping Tests - These test send a message which requires a response from the tested
item. Ping test can be performed on the following:
User Interface
Image Processing
IIT
4.
General Procedures
Select the tab for the desired test and perform the following procedure:
a.
Select the desired test checkbox(es) from the list provided at the left side of the
screen.
b.
c.
Upon completion, the pass/fail results will be displayed next to the test name. Any
faults encountered and the associated fault codes are displayed in the Faults window.
5.
6.
May 2003
6-74
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
For more help on this routine, go to [Self Tests tab , Video and Controls POST], and click on
Help.
Purpose
NOTE: This test is not available on machines with TAG 077 Main Control PWB.
The purpose of the Video Path Diagnostics routine is to provide selections for the following
video tests.
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [SVCM Digital Test A/B],
then select [Start].
2.
While the test is running, the Status window will display the message [Video Test in
Progress].
3.
When the SVCM Digital Test A/B is completed, the results will be [Passed] or [Failed].
SCVM Digital Test A/B (Atlanta Gold Main Control PWB with TAG 015 Only)
4.
Associated fault code(s) for the failed test will be displayed in the Faults window.
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [ESS / ATLANTA Test],
then select [Start].
2.
While the test is running, the Status window will display the message [Video Test in
Progress].
Procedure
To perform the EPC Memory Test, do the following:
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [EPC Memory Walking
Test] then select [Start].
3.
When the ESS / ATLANTA Test is completed, the results will be [Passed] or [Failed].
2.
A popup window will display the message [Memory test will take more than 15 minutes.
Do you want to continue?]. Select [Yes] to start the test.
4.
Associated fault code(s) for the failed test will be displayed in the Faults window.
3.
The test results will be [Passed] or [Failed]. If the test fails, the status area will display the
SIMM socket number and the memory location where the failure occurred. The total
amount of memory tested, out of the total memory available, will be displayed in the MB
Tested window.
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [IPA Daughter Card
Test], then select [Start].
2.
While the test is running, the Status window will display the message [Video Test in
Progress].
Associated fault code(s) for the failed test will be displayed in the Faults window.
4.
3.
When the IPA Daughter Card Test is completed, the results will be [Passed] or [Failed].
4.
Associated fault code(s) for the failed test will be displayed in the Faults window.
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [VCM IPS1 Loop Test],
then select [Start].
For more help on this routine, go to [Self Tests tab , Video Path Diagnostics], and click on
Help.
2.
While the test is running, the Status window will display the message [Video Test in
Progress].
3.
When the VCM IPS1 Loop Test is completed, the results will be [Passed] or [Failed].
Purpose
4.
Associated fault code(s) for the failed test will be displayed in the Faults window.
The purpose is to provide an automated method to test the functionality of the IIOC Busses
and IIOC PWB's. It also tests the electrical condition of the output components which are controlled by the IIOC PWB's.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [IPS1 Bypass Daughter
Card Test] then select [Start].
2.
While the test is running, the Status window will display the message [Video Test in
Progress].
3.
When the IPS1 Bypass Daughter Card Test is completed, the results will be [Passed] or
[Failed].
4.
Associated fault code(s) for the failed test will be displayed in the Faults window.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-75
General Procedures
Self Tests
8.
The IIOC Self Tests are the most-used tests in the RAPs. There are two tests which can be
run: Type 1 and Type 2.
The Type 1 test checks for the presence of the working voltage (typically +24VDC) from
the IIOC PWB through an output component (such as a clutch or solenoid or motor), and
back to the IIOC PWB. If the test fails, it means the voltage is not sensed: therefore there
is an open circuit in the wiring or the load, or there is a short circuit to DC COM.
The Type 2 test checks for the working voltage (typically +24VDC) to go to 0 VDC when
the output component is momentarily switched on. If the test fails, it means the voltage
did not go to 0 VDC, therefore there is either a short circuit across the load or the IIOC
PWB is defective. (A short circuit across the load provides maximum current flow through
the circuit and the IIOC PWB cannot gate the entire current flow to DC COM.)
1.
From the PWS, launch the Diagnostic Navigator. Select [Local]. After a short wait, the
Diagnostic Navigator window will be displayed.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the individual tests desired from the checkboxes in the Diagnostic Turn Around
boxer select [Select All] to run all available tests.
6.
Select [Start].
7.
When the test completes, the pass/fail result are displayed in the Test Status box adjacent
to the test name. Any faults encountered during the test are displayed in the Faults box.
8.
Input components are not checked. There is no way to predict the state of an input device
(such as a sensor or switch), so the test results would be unpredictable. The only diagnostic routine which can reliably test all input components is Component Control.
The Type 2 test is not functional for the IIT. Due to the quickness of the Type 2 test, and
communication delays between the IIT and the Main Control PWB, IIT Type 2 tests usually give erroneous failure indications. Using Component Control is the only reliable way
to test the full functionality of IIT components.
1.
From the PWS, launch the Diagnostic Navigator. Select [Local]. After a short wait, the
Diagnostic Navigator window will be displayed.
2.
3.
Select [IIOC Controller Tests]. The IIOC Controller Tests screen is displayed. This screen
contains three tabs; IIOC Self Tests, IIOC Bus Controller Tests, and Serial Controller
Tests. The default tab is IIOC Self Tests.
4.
Select the individual tests desired from the checkboxes in the Diagnostic Turn Around
box, or select [Select All] to run all available tests.
5.
6.
Select [Start].
7.
When the test completes, the pass/fail result are displayed in the Test Status box adjacent
to the test name. Any faults encountered during the test are displayed in the Faults box.
8.
For more help on this routine, go to [Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests], and click on Help.
From the PWS, launch the Diagnostic Navigator. Select [Local]. After a short wait, the
Diagnostic Navigator window will be displayed.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the individual tests desired from the checkboxes in the Diagnostic Turn Around
box, or select [Select All] to run all available tests.
6.
Select [Start].
7.
When the test completes, the pass/fail result are displayed in the Test Status box adjacent
to the test name. Any faults encountered during the test are displayed in the Faults box.
General Procedures
Self Tests
May 2003
6-76
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Configuration
Current Mode
Power Saver Enabled
Purpose
The purpose of this routine is to provide a means for the CSE to access the electronic tag information and enter, store and retrieve hardware upgrade information contained in the machine's
Non-Volatile Memory (NVM).
If the machine configuration is changed between service calls the CSE will be instructed to
load the tag matrix information, using the PWS during the current service call entry.
Procedure
1.
From the PWS, launch the Diagnostic Navigator. Select [Local]. After a short wait, the
Diagnostic Navigator window will be displayed.
2.
Select [Configuration].
3.
4.
5.
7.
b.
c.
Enter the tag number and tag description in the appropriate fields.
d.
Select [OK].
e.
Billing Meter
Transfer Blade
Decurler
Duplex Decurler
Appearance Tuning
Fuser Type - indicates the type of fuser roll (hard roll, soft roll)
Paper Trays
External Feeders - indicates what external feeders are installed (HCF, SMH, none)
Resettable Meter
Number of Internal Paper Trays - indicates the number of internal trays in the IOT
The PWS will list the current tag number and tag description for the selected module. The
PWS also will match the NVM location and NVM value to the description of the tag.
6.
Tray Attributes - brings up the Paper Tray Configuration window that indicates the size,
weight, color, and type of paper stock in each tray
Finishing Devices - Indicates the type of output device for each position (Basic Disk Finisher, High Capacity Finisher, Mail box 20 Bin, OCT)
Detected Configuration - indicates the detected configuration based on the most recent
power-on sequence.
Software
Indicates the software level for each platform.
Platform
b.
Click on the tag to be removed. The tag entry will become highlighted.
c.
Select [Delete Tag]. The PWS will ask [Are you sure you want to delete this tag?].
Select [Yes].
d.
Platform Configuration
IOT
IIT
UI
For more help on this routine, go to [Machine Configuration and Tag Matrix], and click on Help.
ESS
Accessory Card
Purpose
The purpose of this routine is to view and change various machine configuration parameters.
Platform Options
Foreign Interface
Time
System
Time Display Format - toggle between 12 hour and 24 hour format for system time
machine.
GMT Offset (Hours) - to view or change the offset from Greenwich Mean Time on the
machine.
Install Phase
Customer Install
Customer Setup
Install Complete
Auto Configuration
Power Saver
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
For more help on this routine, go to [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], and click on
Help.
May 2003
6-77
General Procedures
Configuration
Procedure
Purpose
1.
The Paper Tray Configuration routine is intended to provide the CSE with a means to view and
modify attributes of all paper trays in the system.The initial screen is read only, and contains a
sub-set of the total information available on the tray(s).
From the PWS, launch the Diagnostic Navigator. Select [Local]. After a short wait, the
Diagnostic Navigator window will be displayed.
2.
Select [Configuration].
3.
Select [CRUs]. The CRUs screen will open. This screen contains three tabs, allowing the
CSE to view or modify the CRU configuration:
Module -Displays a descriptive identification for the tray or feeder. (Tray 1, Tray 2, HCF
etc.)
a.
CRU Information; lists all CRUs registered in the machine. Selecting a specific CRU
from the list and clicking on the [Details] button will cause additional information
about the specific CRU to be displayed.
Length -Displays the length designation of the media in the tray or feeder.
4.
After the desired modifications are made, select [Apply] to initiate changes.
Width -Displays the width designation of the media in the tray or feeder.
5.
Weight -Displays the weight designation of the media in the tray or feeder.
For more help on this routine, go to [Configuration tab , CRUs], and click on Help.
Color -Displays the color setting of the media in the tray or feeder.
Version Information
Purpose
Procedure
The purpose is to verify the current Diagnostics software level selected on the PWS.
Procedure
1.
From the PWS, launch the Diagnostic Navigator. Select [Local]. After a short wait, the
Diagnostic Navigator window will be displayed.
2.
Select [Paper Tray Configuration]. The Paper Tray Configuration screen is displayed.
3.
Double-click the row containing the tray to which the desired configuration changes are to
be made. The Modify Attributes - Tray screen for the specified tray is displayed. Changes
can now be made to the length, width, weight, type, media color, and media type configuration settings.
2.
3.
4.
4.
Select [Apply] to enable changes. Select [Cancel] to ignore changes and return to the
Paper Tray Configuration screen.
Network Configuration
5.
Whenever the Modify Attributes - Tray screen is closed with the [Apply] button, the Paper
Tray configurations are automatically re-read.
6.
If the operation fails while modifying a tray attribute, an error message will be displayed.
7.
1.
From the PWS, launch the Diagnostic Navigator. Select [Local]. After a short wait, the
Diagnostic Navigator window will be displayed.
Purpose
Network Configuration is used to verify the network configuration data stored on the ESS. You
may run this utility after a UI configuration was performed to check what was entered at the UI
with what was stored as well as other troubleshooting functions.
For more help on this routine, go to [Configuration tab , Paper Tray Configuration], and click on
Help.
For more help on this routine, go to [Configuration tab , Network Configuration], and click on
Help.
Software Upgrade
Purpose
Purpose
This feature offers the user the ability to upgrade the machine software configuration.
Network Configuration Initialization is used to initialize the network configuration data stored on
the ESS.
CAUTION
Due to the variances in procedures for upgrading specific software, explicit upgrade instructions are supplied in the applicable Software Upgrade Kit. It is important to follow the step-bystep procedures exactly as instructed.
For more help on this routine, go to [Network Configuration Initialization], and click on Help.
CRUs
Purpose
Purpose
Software Option Wizard is used to manage the installation and enablement of machine
optional features.
The purpose of this routine is to allow the CSE to view or modify configuration of the system
CRUs.
Procedure
General Procedures
Configuration
May 2003
6-78
Scan to File
LAN Fax
Job Accounting
Copier Sys
Communication Tests
Purpose
Action
The purpose of this test is to check the communication between various electrical components
in the machine.
Install
Remove
Enable
Procedure
Disable
The CRUM test checks the ability of the Main Control PWB to communication with the
CRUMs in the Fuser Module and the Xerographic module.
The LCN test detects if the LCN UART passes or fails an external turnaround test. This
test verifies all components up to the isolation transformer on the accessory PWB.
If there is a failure on the Reset Line, the Main Control PWB reports a communication failure. The SCB test distinguishes between a Comm failure or a Reset failure. The SCB
test has three elements. 1) Communication Test 1 tests the communication between the
Main Control PWB and the SCAM PWB. 2) Communication Test 2 tests the communication between the Main Control PWB and the RCM and DSSF. 3) The Reset Test continuously toggles the Pitch Reset line between '1' and '0' for 12 second intervals.
The UI test checks the ability of the Main Control PWB to communication with the UI.
Note the unique machine identifier on the first screen. This will be used later.
2.
3.
4.
Select [OK].
5.
Another window will appear. In the Machine Unique Identifier field, enter the number
that appeared on the first screen.
6.
7.
A password will appear in the Password field. Type the Password in the password
field on the first screen.
8.
For more help on this routine, go to [Copier Sys tab , Communications Test], and click on Help.
For more help on this routine, go to [Configuration tab , Software Option Wizard], and
click on Help.
Component Control
Purpose
The purpose of this routine is to allow most input components and output components to be
checked for electrical and mechanical function.
With this test, input components can be switched on or off, and output components can be
switched on steady, cycled on and off, or switched off steady. In addition, various input and
output selections can be added together (stacked), giving a wide range of functionality to this
diagnostic routine.
For more help on this routine, go to [Copier Sys tab , Component Control], and click on Help.
Status
Purpose
The purpose of this routine is to provide a means to view the current machine status.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-79
General Procedures
Procedure
Displays any faults encountered while performing the SCSI bus polling process.
1.
From the PWS, launch the Diagnostic Navigator. Select [Local]. After a short wait, the
Diagnostic Navigator window will be displayed.
Model
2.
Select [Copier Sys] tab, [Status] icon. The Status screen will appear, displaying the following:
Disk SIze
Date
Manufacturer
3.
a.
System Status
b.
Completed
c.
d.
Last 40 Faults
Displays the dive model number as reported during the polling process.
Displays drive size in megabytes.
Displays the SCSI BIOS date of the device
Displays the drive manufacturer
To exit, click on the box at the upper right-hand corner of the Status screen and select
[Close] from the pop-up menu.
For more help on this routine, go to Diagnostics Navigator, select the [Copier Sys] tab, select
[System Status], and click on Help.
Revision Level
Purpose
The purpose is to provide a means to reset the administrator PIN. If the Auditron Administrator
access code number (PIN) has been corrupted or the Administrator cannot remember the previously set access code, the default PIN can be set from the PWS until a new code can be
entered by the Administrator. The purpose of this procedure is to reset the Auditron Administrator access code to the default setting. The default PIN is 1111.
1.
Procedure
1.
From the PWS, launch the Diagnostic Navigator. Select [Local]. After a short wait, the
Diagnostic Navigator window will be displayed.
2.
3.
4.
Answer [Yes] to the question: This will reset the Auditron Administrator PIN to the
default value. Are you sure? .
5.
6.
For more help on this routine, go to [Copier Sys tab , Reset Administrator PIN], and click on
Help.
2.
Press [Start].
3.
The Image Disk will begin to format. The progress indicator will display the percentage complete as the disk is formatted. Depending on the size of the disk, this may
take up to 20 minutes.
4.
Status
Faults
2.
Select [Start].
3.
The Image Disk will be queried to get the bad block information and will be displayed
at the bottom right corner of the window.
4.
The SCSI Faults button can be selected to get a list of SCSI faults.
5.
Procedure
The following tabs are available in this routine:
Status
When first invoked, message will indicate that it is executing while it polls the SCSI
bus for devices. When finished it will indicate complete.
Faults
General Procedures
Copier Sys
May 2003
6-80
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Faults/Counters
Counters Display
Faults
Purpose
Purpose
The Faults dialog is intended to provide a single location to view key fault and fault counter
data from the machine. There are two selections available for selection in the Faults screen,
Last 40 Faults and Fault Counters.
Procedure
The Last 40 Faults is the default selection in the Faults screen. The faults are sorted by time
with the most recent fault at the top of the list. The display is updated when the dialog is first
brought up or when the Refresh button is selected. The following information is displayed for
each fault:
The Faults dialog is intended to provide a single location to view key counter data provided by
the machine. To facilitate navigation through the large number of counters, the data is divided
into several tabs. Each of the tabs listed below provide some additional filtering of the data:
The Diagnostic Data tab displays the service related counters that are use to calculate
the Mean Events Between Jams for all XX-1XX faults.
The Billing tab displays the counters used to track paper usage for billing purposes.
These counters are not modifiable by the CSE.
The Billing Display Setup tab provides a means by which the CSE can enable or disable
the local UI capability of displaying a particular counter.
Procedure
In Diagnostic Data, the display is updated when the dialog is first brought up. The following
information is displayed:
Id - the counter ID
Copy Count
For paper jams, an asterisk will precede the fault name. To view the paper size that was being
used when a jam occurred, double click on the fault name. This information for Document
Feeder jams will be available in a future software release.
In Fault Counters, the display is updated when the dialog is first brought up or when the
Refresh button is selected. The following information is displayed:
Value - the number of times the counter has been incremented since the Diagnostic Data
counters were reset
The following two options are used to filter the large number of Diagnostic Data counters:
Filter By To display the counters for a particular service (Mark, Scan, etc. or All), a
combo box with a list of all valid services is provided. By selecting a service in the Filter
By combo box, only the counters for the selected service will be displayed.
Display Counters with Zero Value To display only the counters that have a non-zero
value, click the Display Counters with Zero Value check box (the default is to show all
counters).
Id - the counter ID
Code - The chain, link, and extension of the fault code associated with the counter
Value - the number of times the counter has been incremented since the counters were
reset
The following will facilitate navigation through the large number of fault counters:
In Billing, the display is updated when the dialog is first brought up. The following information
is displayed:
Filter By Chain To display the counters for a particular chain, a combo box with a list of
all valid chains is provided. By selecting a chain in the Filter By Chain combo box, only the
counters for the selected chain will be displayed.
Id - the counter ID
Display Counters with Zero Value To display only the counters that have a non-zero
value, click the Display Counters with Zero Value check box (the default is to show all
counters).
The Rates button is used to view more information about a jam counter (XX-1XX faults).
Select the fault counter, then select the Rates button. A dialog box will display jam
counter information, events counter information, and mean events between jams.
The Sort button, when selected, will sort all the fault counters in the list by chain and
then by link.
For more help on this routine, go to [Faults/Counters tab , Faults], and click on Help.
To display the counters for a particular service (Mark, Scan, etc. or All), a Filter By combo box
with a list of all valid services is provided. By selecting a service in the Filter By combo box,
only the counters for the selected service will be displayed.
In Billing Display Setup, the following information is displayed:
Id - the counter ID
Display - shows the display for each counter as either enabled (the Yes checkbox
selected), or disabled (the Yes checkbox not selected)
By clicking on the Yes checkbox, the display of each counter at the local UI, can either be
enabled (the Yes checkbox selected), or disabled (the Yes checkbox not selected). A command to change the counter display is sent when the machine is reset at the close of the service call.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-81
General Procedures
Faults/Counters
For more help on this routine, go to [Faults/Counters tab , Counters Display], and click on
Help.
Finishing
Stack Height/Elevator Diagnostic Test
Purpose
The purpose of the Stack Height/Elevator Diagnostic Test is to provide selections for a Single
Cycle Test or a Continuous Cycle Test.
The Single Cycle Test energizes the Stacker Tray Drive Motor to drive the Stacker Tray
down until it reaches the Stacker Tray Full Sensor. After reaching the Stacker Tray Full
Sensor the Stacker Tray is driven up until it actuates the Stack Height Sensor. When the
Stack Height Sensor is actuated, the Stacker Tray Drive motor is deenergized and the test
is complete. The time it takes the Stacker Tray to drive down to the Stacker Tray Full Sensor and then back up to actuate the Stack Height Sensor is shown in the Results window.
The Continuous Cycle Test energizes the Stacker Tray Drive Motor to drive the Stacker
Tray down until it reaches the Stacker Tray Full Sensor. After reaching the Stacker Tray
Full Sensor the Stacker Tray is driven up until it actuates the Stack Height Sensor. When
the Stack Height Sensor is actuated, the Stacker Tray Drive motor is energized in the
reverse direction to begin another cycle. This will continue until the [Stop] button is
selected. The time it takes the Stacker Tray to drive down to the Stacker Tray Full Sensor
and then back up to actuate the Stack Height Sensor for each cycle is shown in the
Results window.
Procedures
To perform the Stack Height / Elevator (Single Cycle) Test, do the following:
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [Single Cycle], then
select [Start].
2.
When the [Start] button is selected, a popup dialog box will display the message [Please
remove all paper from Stacker Tray prior to starting test.].
3.
Ensure all paper is removed from the Stacker Tray, then select [OK] to close the dialog
box.
4.
Select [Continue] to start the test. The Status window will display the message [Started].
5.
When the test is complete, observe the Results window. The following information will
be displayed:
a.
6.
b.
The time in milliseconds the Stacker Tray took to make one complete cycle
c.
The maximum allowable time in milliseconds for the Stacker Tray to make one complete cycle
Associated fault code(s) for the failed component(s) will be displayed in the Faults window.
To perform the Stack Height / Elevator (Continuous Cycle) Test, do the following:
General Procedures
Faults/Counters , Finishing
1.
When the Status window displays the message [Ready], select [Continuous Cycle], then
select [Start].
2.
When the [Start] button is selected, a popup dialog box will display the message [Please
remove all paper from Stacker Tray prior to starting test.].
3.
Ensure all paper is removed from the Stacker Tray, then select [OK] to close the dialog
box.
4.
Select [Continue] to start the test. The Status window will display the message [Started].
The test will continue to run until the [Stop] button is selected.
May 2003
6-82
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
5.
6.
After selecting [Stop] to stop the test, observe the Results window. The following information will be displayed for each complete cycle of the Stacker Tray:
Procedure
To Run the Main Tray Offset / Position Test, do the following:
1.
On test entry, the system will read and display the Sensor State.
The time in milliseconds the Stacker Tray took to make one complete cycle
2.
The maximum allowable time in milliseconds for the Stacker Tray to make one complete cycle
3.
Associated fault code(s) for the failed component(s) will be displayed in the Faults window.
4.
5.
6.
For more help on this routine, go to [Finishing tab, Finisher Tests], and click on Help.
7.
If using Single Step mode, the tray will stop at the next position.
8.
If using Continuous mode, tray will continue stepping until Stop is selected.
For more help on this routine, go to [Finishing tab, Finisher Tests], and click on Help.
Purpose
The purpose of the Finisher Setup Diagnostic Routine is to adjust tamping to ensure that stapled sets are evenly tamped
The Perform Tamper Position Adjustment selection leads to a series of screens that
semiautomatically check and adjust the tamping to the machine specification.
The Tamper Position Adjustment has already been performed and a slight modification is needed selection allows a direct change to the tamping value, for fine tuning.
Procedures
See ADJ 12-1 for the procedure for using this diagnostic routine.
For more help on this routine, go to [Finishing tab , Finisher Setup] (in Diagnostic Navigator:
[Finishing] tab, [Finisher Setup]), and click on Help.
Single Step:
Steps the tray to the next position when Continue is selected. Position sequence is A to
B, B to C, C to D, D to A and repeats.
Continuous Cycle:
Steps the tray continuously when Continue is selected. The tray pauses for .5 seconds at
each position. The tray stops when Stop is selected.
Sensor Monitor:
The state of the Position Sensor will be monitored at all times except while continuous
mode is running.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-83
General Procedures
Finishing
Marking
IQ Test #2
IQ Test #3
IQ Test #4
Purpose
IQ Test #5
To provide a means to print out known images to help setup, verify, and troubleshoot image
quality.
IQ Test #6
f.
Perpendicular Lines
Procedure
2 On 2 Off
1.
2 On 30 Off
From the EDOC, select the highlighted text [Print Test Pattern].
b.
The PWS software will start and the Print Test Pattern dialog window will be displayed.
c.
8 On 56 Off
1" Off 1" On
1.75" Lead Edge
3.
Select the appropriate test pattern. The left side of the window is the Select Pattern subwindow.
8.5" x 11"
11" x 17"
Seven categories of patterns are available, each with one or more options. The Pattern
Preview button near the bottom of the window allows a thumbnail preview of the test pattern. The test pattern categories are:
a.
A3
A4
Common/General
One-sided (Simplex) or two-sided (Duplex) selections are available in the Plex subwindow.
The quantity of test patterns to be printed can be selected by typing in the quantity in
the Quantity field. The up/down arrows may also be used to change the quantity. A
maximum of 999 can be entered.
4.
25% Halftones
Face Up (Default)
75 DPI
Face Down
106 DPI
Collation
CAUTION
Collated (Default)
Do not use the 212 DPI pattern to make image quality evaluations. This is a stress
document and will be not be defect free on most machines.
Uncollated
Labeling/Page Numbering
50% Halftones
106 DPI
5.
When the job starts, a Status window appears. Included is a System Status, Completed, Current Status List, and Last 40 Faults dialog boxes. The Fault History button will place the fault history in the Last 40 Faults box.
CAUTION
Do not use the 212 DPI or 424 DPI patterns to make image quality evaluations.
These are stress documents and will be not be defect free on most machines.
424 DPI - Reserved for engineering investigations only
d.
Parallel Lines
8 On 56 Off
e.
General Procedures
Marking
Black Bands
1" On 1" Off
NOTE: The routine can be exited at any time before the Start Test button is selected, by
selected Exit.
2.
g.
For more help on this routine, go to [Marking tab , Print Test Pattern], and click on Help.
Xerographics Diagnostics
Purpose
The purpose of Xerographic Diagnostics, is to provide tools to assist in setting up, troubleshooting, and repairing the Xerographics in the machine.
May 2003
6-84
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Procedure
1.
Upon entering Xerographic Diagnostics, three folder tabs appear at the top of the window.
Xerographics Routines is the default window. The following selections are available:
Xerographics Routines
New Parts Setup
1.
Exerciser
b.
The Exerciser is used to diagnose failures in the Xerographics system. Select [Start]
to run the routine.
Status, Results, and Faults windows are available.
Set-Up
3.
a.
The Set-Up routine adjusts the process control parameters for optimum Image Quality.
b.
Purpose
The ESS Online/Offline dialog is used to change the state of the ESS connection to the IOT.
This can be used to stop ESS communication with the IOT during service so no print jobs will
be processed.
Procedure
2.
b.
The PWS software will start and the ESS Online/Offline dialog window will be displayed.
c.
Select [Start] to switch the ESS from offline to online, or vise verse.
For more help on this routine, go to [ESS/Network tab , ESS Online/Offline], and click on Help.
ESS Online/Offline
ii.
3.
1.
This routine does not time out. Select [Stop] when the measurements are complete.
i.
The PWS software will start and the ESS Logs dialog window will be displayed.
c.
For more help on this routine, go to [ESS/Network tab , ESS Logs], and click on Help.
a.
b.
4.
a.
2.
4.
b.
Disable
a.
Purpose
Procedure
Xerographic Routines
a.
ESS Logs
ESS Logs are useful for troubleshooting as well as event tracking.
ESS/Network
The Developer Housing Install routine is used whenever the Developer Housing is replaced.
The ESS Software verification routine tests the software for the ESS. In case of a missing file
or directory, you have invalid permissions, a bad check sum, or the ESS process is not running, you will have the option to fix the problem or abort the routine.
CAUTION
Do not run this routine unless a new Developer Housing has been installed. Running it on an existing Developer Housing will damage the Developer Housing.
ii.
For more help on this routine, go to [ESS/Network, ESS Software Verification Tool], and click
on Help.
For more help on this routine, go to [Marking tab , Xerographic Diagnostics], and click on Help.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-85
General Procedures
Marking , ESS/Network
Shutdown
Purpose
To provide a means to print out either a configuration report; or known images to help setup,
verify, and troubleshoot ESS/Network image quality problems.
All
3.
Retrieve From
ESS
Procedure
1.
2.
File
4.
a.
From the EDOC, select the highlighted text [ESS Test Jobs].
b.
The PWS software will start and the ESS Test Jobs dialog window will be displayed.
c.
Last X
Time
5.
6.
7.
For more help on this routine, go to [ESS/Network tab , ESS Error Log], and click on Help.
3.
NOTE: The routine can be exited at any time before the Start Job button is selected, by
selected Exit.
This routine will invoke an ESS network test that verifies network connection information for the
selected protocol.
Two job parameter types are available, each with two or more options.
Size Four paper size options are available in the Size sub-window.
Purpose
Procedure
8.5" x 11"
1.
11" x 17"
A3
A4
Composition Selects the appropriate
From the EDOC, select the highlighted text [Get Network Connectivity Data].
b.
The PWS software will start and the Get Network Data dialog window will be displayed.
c.
PS
HP-PCL
NOTE: In HP-PCL, there will be a slight edge deletion.
4.
2.
3.
For more help on this routine, go to [ESS/Network tab , ESS Test Jobs], and click on Help.
For more help on this routine, go to [ESS/Network tab , Get Network Data], and click on Help.
Echo Test
Purpose
This routine will invoke an ESS network test using the protocol selected.
Purpose
Procedure
The purpose of the ESS Error log is to display the log of all ESS errors on the PWS.
1.
Procedure
1.
2.
From the EDOC, select the highlighted text [ESS Error Log].
b.
The PWS software will start and the ESS Error Log dialog window will be displayed.
c.
General Procedures
ESS/Network
b.
The PWS software will start and the Echo Test dialog window will be displayed.
c.
2.
Select the desired protocol to be tested. Only protocols that are enabled are selectable.
Others will be grayed out.
3.
For more help on this routine, go to [ESS/Network tab , Echo Test], and click on Help.
May 2003
6-86
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Purpose
Purpose
This routine is used to review or modify the printing of Banner, Error, and Confirmation sheets
for Scan and FAX functions.
Procedure
1.
The ESS Alternate Boot Tool is a separate application and is not part of the Diagnostic Navigator. The Alternate Boot Tool is used to help diagnose and repair certain ESS memory, hard
disk, and/or software problems.
For more information, launch the Alternate Boot Tool and select Help.
a.
From the EDOC, select the highlighted text [Banner, Error, and Confirmation
Sheets].
Procedure
b.
The PWS software will start and the Banner, Error, and Confirmation Sheets dialog
window will be displayed.
For the detailed procedure for using the Alternate Boot Tool for loading ESS Software, refer to
the appropriate release of Software Upgrade Kit Installation Instructions.
c.
2.
3.
Select the radio buttons to make selections for Scan to File Confirmation Sheets and Lan
Fax Confirmation Sheets.
4.
Allows a thorough test of ESS memory to be started from the PWS with one button click. If
there is a failure in memory, a message will indicate which SIMM is faulty. For detailed information on running this test go to the GP35 Running the ESS Memory Test.
For more help on this routine, go to [Banner,Error and Confirmation Sheets], and click on Help.
2.
From the EDOC, select the highlighted text [ESS/Network tab, ESS Terminal Window].
b.
The PWS software will start and the ESS Terminal Window will be displayed.
c.
For more help on this routine, go to [ESS/Network tab , ESS Terminal Window], and click on
Help.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-87
General Procedures
ESS/Network ,
General Procedures
ESS/Network ,
May 2003
6-88
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Product Specifications
Market Region
IOT Type
NE1
ESG/DMO-E/
FXAP
65 ppm ST 220V
Product Codes
Select area of interest:
NE4
NASG/DMO-W
55 ppm DC 110V
NE5
55 ppm DC 220V
ESG/DMO-E/
FXAP
NE8
NASG/DMO-W
55 ppm ST 110V
NE9
ESG/DMO-E/
FXAP
55 ppm ST 220V
Market Region
IOT Type
E2C
NASG/DMO-W
40 ppm DC 110V
E1D
ESG/DMO-E
40 ppm DC 220V
1UP
NASG/DMO-W
40 ppm ST 110V
E2D
ESG/DMO-E
40 ppm ST 220V
E0E
FX
40 ppm ST 100V
Product Code
Description
E3Y
Bypass Tray
H4D
Product Code
Description
Offset Catch Tray
2UP
NASG/DMO-W
65 ppm DC 110V
H2F
E6D
ESG/DMO-E/
FXAP
65 ppm DC 220V
6UP
Finisher
NF3
DCE
EVW
E5E
KFX
65 ppm DC 220V
E4E
FX
65 ppm DC 100V
E6E
TFX
65 ppm DC 100V
E5C
NASG/DMO-W
65 ppm LP 110V
E5D
ESG/DMO-E
65 ppm LP 220V
H6E
NASG/DMO-W
DocuTech 65 110V
H7E
ESG/DMO-E
DocuTech 65 220V
3UP
NASG/DMO-W
65 ppm ST 110V
E8D
ESG/DMO-E
65 ppm ST 220V
R4F
NASG/DMO-W
55 ppm DC 110V
R6F
ESG/DMO-E
55 ppm DC 220V
Product Code
Description
T6C
NASG/DMO-W
55 ppm LP 110V
T7C
ESG/DMO-E
55 ppm LP 220V
E4Y
Accessory Shelf
R5F
NASG/XCL/ACO
55 ppm ST 110V
T6W
DT Accessory Shelf
R7F
ESG/DMO-E
55 ppm ST 220V
E6Y
Convenience Stapler
F2C
F5C
F4C
F7D
Product Code
Market Region
IOT Type
ND8
NASG/DMO-W
65 ppm DC 110V
F8D
ND9
ESG/DMO-E/
FXAP
65 ppm DC 220V
F4D
NE0
NASG/DMO-W
65 ppm ST 110V
F0D
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-89
General Procedures
Product Specifications
Description
F1D
T8R
T7V
DH1
T6V
W3T
W4T
W5T
FD6
UV9
FD7
FD8
H0H
H5E
L2H
F9C
F9D
UD7
UD6
VE5
VE7
VE8
VE9
General Procedures
Product Specifications
May 2003
6-90
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Table 6 Capabilities
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions (W x D x H):
Feature
Capabilities
Maximum sheets
per set:
Weight:
Manual:
Convenience Stapler
Copying Services
Capabilities
Refer to Table 6 for a listing of the capabilities available for the various features.
Table 6 Capabilities
Feature
Capabilities
Scanning
Document Feeder: Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
(DADF); 50 sheets (240/255/265) or 75
sheets (460/470) / 1-N processing with
top feed 40/65 scans per minute
Type:
Optics:
Image Shift
Auto R/E
Auto Registration
Auto Center
Auto Signatures
Proof Set
Accounting Services
Auditron on Copier configuration
User Interface
Printing and
Copying
Rated Speed simplex
Finishing
Offsetting Catch
Tray:
Finisher Stacker
Tray:
(Unstapled)
Finisher Stacker
Tray:
(Stapled)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-91
General Procedures
Product Specifications
Table 6 Capabilities
Table 6 Capabilities
Feature
Capabilities
Feature
Paper Supply
Quantity
Sizes
Capabilities
Orientation
Name
Inches (W x L)
MM (W x L)
A6 (1, 2)
4.13 x 5.83
5 x 7 (1)
5x7
Output Tray
SEF
Dim. (mm)
105 x 148
105
127 x 177.8
127
B6 JIS (1)
5.06 x 7.17
128.5 x 182
A5 (2)
5.38 x 8.27
148 x 210
LEF
Stapled Edge
X
X
Top Tray
128.5
210
Staple
Dual
+
+
A5
5.38 x 8.27
148 x 210
148
Statement
8.5 x 5.5
216 x 140
140
B5 JIS
7.17 x 10.12
182 x 257
257
B5 JIS
7.17 x 10.12
182 x 257
182
Executive
7.25 x 10.12
184 x 267
267
Executive
7.25 x 10.12
184 x 267
184
16K (Taiwan)
7.64 x 10.51
194 x 267
16K (Taiwan)
7.64 x 10.51
194 x 267
8 x 10
8 x 10
203 x 254
8 x 10
8 x 10
203 x 254
Letter
8.5 x 11
216 x 279
Letter
8.5 x 11
216 x 279
Letter Cover
9 x 11
229 x 279
Letter Cover
9 x 11
229 x 279
A4
8.27 x 11.69
210 x 297
A4
8.27 x 11.69
210 x 297
A4 Cover
8.78 x 11.69
223 x 297
A4 Cover
8.78 x 11.69
223 x 297
Spanish (RX)
8.46 x 12.4
215 x 315
215
Foolscap (RX)
8.15 x 13
215 x 330
215
General Procedures
Product Specifications
X
X
X
X
X
267
194
254
203
279
216
279
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
May 2003
6-92
229
297
210
297
223
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Orientation
Output Tray
Staple
Name
Inches (W x L)
MM (W x L)
220 x 330
8.66 x 13
220 x 330
Legal
8.5 x 14
216 x 356
216
B4 (JIS)
10.12 x 14.33
257 x 364
257
8K (Taiwan)
10.51 x 15.2
267 x 388
267
A3
11.69 x 16.54
297 x 420
297
Ledger
11 x 17
279 x 432
279
12 x 18
12 x 18
305 x 457
305
Labels
Transparency
LEF
Stapled Edge
X
8.5 x 11
SEF
Dim. (mm)
Top Tray
Dual
220
not recommended
216 x 279
279
210 x 297
297
NOTE: + Indicates availability of tray and stapling options for paper size. Papers must be 4 in.
(102 mm) to 12 in. (305mm) in the cross process direction.
NOTE: 1 SEF only, IOT paper handling limitation is process direction 5.83 in. (148 mm) to 18
in. (457.2mm)
NOTE: 2 Simplex only - IOT paper handling limitations due to Inverter paper path.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-93
General Procedures
Product Specifications
Inches (W x L)
MM (W x L)
Orientation
A4
8.27 x 11.69
210 x 297
SEF, LEF**
Letter
8.5 x 11
216 x 279
SEF, LEF**
Foolscap
8.15 x 13
215 x 330
SEF
Legal
8.5 x 14
216 x 356
SEF
Ledger
11 x 17
279 x 432
SEF
A3
11.69 x 16.54
297 x 420
SEF
NOTE: Booklet Maker (Folded and Stapled) - 15 sheets or less of 80 gsm (20lbs) or equivalent
thickness e.g. 12 sheets of 80 gsm (20lbs) with one cover of 200 gsm.
NOTE: Booklets (Folded only) - 5 sheets or less of 80gsm (20lbs) or equivalent thickness.
NOTE: ** A4 LEF and 8.5 x 11" LEF is for Banner sheets only
General Procedures
Product Specifications
May 2003
6-94
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
11 - 15
12
unlimited
6 - 10
20
unlimited
1-5
30
unlimited
Stack Quality - The maximum X and Y scatter as measured in Figure 1, is 25.0 mm or less.
Within Set Registration (unstapled sets) - Measure dimension X and Y as shown in Figure 2.
Refer to Table 10 for within unstapled set registration specifications.
X scatter
Nth sheet
(>50)
1st sheet
Y scatter
Maximum Scatter
Paper
Main Tray
8.5 x 11 in (A4)
20 lb. (80 gsm)
95% of Sets
X
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
4.0 mm.
Y
13.0 mm.
Main Tray
6.0 mm.
20.0 mm.
Top Tray
8.5 x 11 in (A4)
20 lb. (80 gsm)
undefined
40.0 mm.
Top Tray
undefined
undefined
May 2003
6-95
General Procedures
Product Specifications
For dual stapled sets, the distance of the staple from the edge of the set is indicated in Figure
3. The other staple position specifications are dependent upon paper size. Measure dimension X and dimension Y (Figure 3) and refer to Table 11.
Table 11 Booklet Dual Staple Position for standard Paper Sizes
Paper
Dimension
Total Set
Name
Y Scatter
X Scatter
X Scatter
Inches (W x L)
Stapled Edge
LEF
SEF
B5
7.17 x 10.12
182 x 257
8 x 10
8 x 10
203 x 254
8 x 10 - SEF
8 x 10
203 x 254
Letter
8.5 x 11
216 x 279
Letter - SEF
8.5 x 11
216 x 279
Letter Cover
9 x 11
229 x 279
Letter Cover
9 x 11
229 x 279
Letter Tab
9 x 11
229 x 279
A4
8.27 x 11.69
210 x 297
A4 - SEF
8.27 x 11.69
210 x 297
A4 Cover
8.78 x 11.69
223 x 297
127 mm.
63.50 mm.
105 mm.
54.0 mm.
A4 Cover - SEF
8.78 x 11.69
223 x 297
A4 Tab/Cover
8.78 x 11.69
223 x 297
Spanish (RX)
8.46 x 12.4
215 x 315
Foolscap (RX)
8.15 x 13
215 x 330
Legal
8.5 x 14
216 x 356
B4 (JIS)
10.12 x 14.33
257 x 364
252 x 358
126 mm.
SB4 (FX)
Side view of sheets in tray
MM (W x L)
Orientation
63.00 mm.
A3
11.69 x 16.54
297 x 420
Ledger
11 x 17
279 x 432
12 x 18
12 x 18
305 x 457
General Procedures
Product Specifications
May 2003
6-96
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
X
Center of Staple
Center of Staple
Dual Staple
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-97
General Procedures
Product Specifications
For single stapled sets measure dimension X and Y at the stapled corner (refer to Figure
4).
For dual stapled sets measure dimension X and Y at the worst stapled corner (refer to
Figure 4).
0.4 mm
(max)
0 mm
(min.)
Paper Weight
99.7% of Sets
100% of Sets
1.5 mm.
1.5 mm.
3.0 mm.
3.0 mm.
6.0 mm.
6.0 mm.
3.0 mm.
6.0 mm.
6.0 mm.
8.0 mm.
8.0 mm.
1.5 mm
(max)
13.5 mm
2.0 mm.
2.0 mm.
3.0 mm.
3.0 mm.
6.0 mm.
6.0 mm.
3.0 mm.
6.0 mm.
6.0 mm.
8.0 mm.
8.0 mm.
1.5 mm
(max)
Crown Length
For dual stapled sets take measurements X and Y at the stapled corner that shows the worst in-set registration.
General Procedures
Product Specifications
May 2003
6-98
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Measure the booklet staple position at X1, X2, X3, and X4 (refer to Figure 6). Refer to Table 13
for staple location specifications.
NOTE: The measurement for X4 (distance between staple position and fold line) is 0mm - 1.5
mm for all paper sizes
Calculate Y
X3
X1
X4
Fold Line
X2
99.7%
ofBooklets
95% of
Booklets
99.7%
ofBooklets
X at ambient conditions.
30.0 mm
35.0 mm
22.0 mm
Y B zone
1.0 mm
2.5 mm
1.2 mm
25.0 mm
3.1 mm
1.5 mm
3.0 mm
1.8 mm
3.6 mm
X1
X2
X3
A4 - SEF
40 mm +/-2.0 mm
120 mm +/-2.0 mm
Letter - SEF
43 mm +/-2.0 mm
120 mm +/-2.0 mm
139.5 mm +/-1.5 mm
Foolscap - SEF
42 mm +/-2.0 mm
120 mm +/-2.0 mm
115 mm +/-1.5 mm
Fold Line
148.5 mm +/-1.5 mm
Legal - SEF
43 mm +/-2.0 mm
120 mm +/-2.0 mm
178 mm +/-1.5 mm
Ledger - SEF
83.5 mm +/-2.0 mm
120 mm +/-2.0 mm
210 mm +/-1.5 mm
A3 - SEF
74.7 mm +/-2.0 mm
120 mm +/-2.0 mm
216 mm +/-1.5 mm
Z1
Z2
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-99
General Procedures
Product Specifications
For booklet top to bottom edge registration specification, measure dimension X with the
booklet opened as in Figure 8.
For booklet lead edge registration specification, measure dimension Y with the booklet
opened as in Figure 9.
95% of Booklets
99.7% of Booklets
1.0 mm
2.0 mm
1.0 mm
2.0 mm
2.0 mm
3.0 mm
2.0 mm
3.0 mm
General Procedures
Product Specifications
May 2003
6-100
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
C Configuration
Direction of Output
Side 1 Image
(inside)
Z Configuration
Side 1 Image
Direction of Output
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-101
General Procedures
Product Specifications
Tri-Folded sheet A4 or 8.5 x 11" must fit into a DL (European standard) sized envelope
and a #10 standard envelope and meet the skew specification as shown in Figure 11.
Folded sheet will not have double folds or creases to any section of the document.
Center section of tri-folded sheet must be greater than either side section to avoid overlapping.
Specifications in Figure 12 Tri-Fold Z Configuration, and Figure 13 Tri-Fold C Configurationapply at centerline of page.
With the Booklet Tray Stop in the up position, tri-folded sheets should be stacked such
that they are on top of each other or staggered with out being captured within another trifolded sheet and remain on the tray.
Table 16 Tri-Fold Paper Sizes and Weights
Paper Type and Size
Orientation
Name
Inches (W x L)
Weights
(gsm)
MM (W x L)
Letter
8.5 x 11
216 x 279
LEF
60-90
A4
8.27 x 11.69
210 x 297
LEF
60-90
General Procedures
Product Specifications
May 2003
6-102
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
+ / - 1.5 mm
+ / - 1.5 mm
Fold Skew
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-103
General Procedures
Product Specifications
Top
Finisher
Booklet Tray
A4 Tri-Fold Specification
200.0 mm +/- 2.0 mm
Top
Center Line
Top
Not Specified
Not Specified
General Procedures
Product Specifications
May 2003
6-104
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Top
Finisher
Booklet Tray
8.5 x 11 in. Tri-Fold Specification
A4 Tri-Fold Specification
Top
Top
Center Line
Not Specified
Not Specified
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-105
General Procedures
Product Specifications
Paper curl specification - 12 mm height maximun, any edge, any corner. Refer to Figure 14
for measuring the amount of curl.
NOTE: Under certain environmental conditions and job modes, paper stack(s) may have to be
inverted to achieve the above specification.
12.0 mm
Metric
8 to 18 in. in feed
direction, 5.5 to 12
in. in cross feed
direction
Paper Specifications
Stock Sizes
279 x 216mm
229 x 279mm
8 x 10 in. SEF
8 x 10 in. LEF
General Procedures
Product Specifications
x
x
x
x
Refer to Table 17 for a listing of the tray size capabilities for the various types of paper.
Duplex
May 2003
6-106
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
US Size
Metric
279 x 229mm
216 x 356mm
Ledger 11 x 17 in.
297 x 420mm
A3 SEF 297 x
420mm
A5 SEF 148 x
210mm
Duplex
Paper
Size
Designation (US)
Size
(Metric)
LEF
A5
5.83x8.27
148x210
A5
5.83x8.27
148x210
Statement
5.5x8.5
140x216
Statement
5.5x8.5
140x216
B5 - JIS
7.17x10.12
182x257
B5 - JIS
7.17x10.12
182x257
Executive
7.25x10.5
184x267
Executive
7.25x10.5
184x267
16 K Taiwan
16 K Taiwan
203x254
A5 LEF 210 x
148mm
8.78 x 11.69 in.
8x10
8x10
8x10
203x254
Letter
8.5x11
216x279
Letter
8.5x11
216x279
184 x 267mm
Ltr Cover
9x11
229x279
267 x 184mm
X
X
X
X
229x279
229x279
A4
8.27x11.69
210x297
A4
8.27x11.69
210x297
A4 Cover
8.78x11.69
223x297
223x297
223x297
X
X
X
X
Dual
O
Dual
Dual
X
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
Finishe Smart
r Top
Tray
Tray
Staplin
g
9x11
8.78x11.69
OO
X
9x11
8.78x11.69
OO
Ltr Tab
A4 Tab
Finishe OCT
Tray
r
Stacker
Tray
Ltr Cover
A4 Cover
SEF
Dual
Dual
215x315
O
O
Dual
Dual
Dual
Foolscap-RX 8.5x13
215x330
220x330
8.66x13
220x330
Legal
8.5x14
216X356
Portrait,
Dual
Dual
NOTES:
1 - No Duplex or Inversion
2 - LEF only
3 - SMH recommended (SMH = Bypass Tray)
Table 18 Output Device Capabilities
Paper
Size
Designation (US)
Size
(Metric)
LEF
SEF
Finishe OCT
r
Tray
Stacker
Tray
Finishe Smart
r Top
Tray
Tray
Staplin
g
A6
4.13x5.83
105x148
5x7
5x7
127x177.8
B6 - JIS
5.06x7.17
128.5x182
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
B4 -JIS
10.12x14.33 257x364
8K Taiwan
10.51x15.28 267x388
A3
11.69x16.54 297x420
Ledger
11x17
279x432
12 x18
12x18
305x457
notes 2 and
3
notes 2 and X
3
Envelopes
Labels
May 2003
6-107
General Procedures
Product Specifications
Stock Weights
The machine can accept stock weights from 16 to 110 pound bond or 56 to 203 gsm. However, for optimal performance, use 20 to 24 pound or 75 to 90 gsm paper and avoid lower
weight stock.
Special Stocks
Pre-printed Forms and Letterheads: Pre-printed stock performs the same as other stock of
the same size and weight (follow tray labels for loading orientation). Embossed letterheads
may degrade paper handling, and may show image deletions near the embossed area on
either side of the sheet.
Pre-drilled Stock: Pre-drilled stock (standard hole patterns) perform the same as other stock
of the same size and weight (follow tray labels for loading orientation).
Perforated Stock: Perforated stock (e.g. GBC-brand, with rectangular holes the full length of
the edge) should be fed with the perforations parallel to the feed direction, preferably at the
rear of the tray.
General Procedures
Product Specifications
May 2003
6-108
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
IOT with MultiFunction Finisher - The minimum space requirements are shown in Figure 16.
Dimensions A, B, and C vary with the options included and are listed in Table 20.
NOTE: US and Canada only: If installed in a hallway or exit route, allow 44 in. (1118mm)
more in front to meet fire code requirements.
Output Device
Shelf
Top View
Input Device
FRONT
(See
NOTE)
Minimum height of
ceiling or overhang: 78 in. (1981
mm) above floor
(See NOTE)
Output Device
None
OCT
OCT
None
Finisher
Finisher
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-109
General Procedures
Product Specifications
5 in.
(127 mm)
28 in (711 mm)
69 in.
(1752 mm)
10 in.
(254 mm)
36 in.
(914 mm)
26 in
(660mm)
17 3/4 in.
(451 mm)
General Procedures
Product Specifications
May 2003
6-110
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Output Device
HCF/Bypass Tray
MFF - Professional
HCF/Bypass Tray
MFF - Standard
DC Voltage Tolerances
Refer to Table 21 for a listing of the electrical power requirements for the machine. A MFF
requires an additional power source the same as that required for the IOT (15.0 A in NASG).
75 ppm Machine
Voltage
Voltage Specification
+36 VDC
NASG
+24 VDC
XE
+5 VDC
+12 VDC
-12 VDC
50 Hz
50 Hz
50 Hz
50 Hz
*NASG Only: A 55 ppm or 65 ppm machine requires a 20 A outlet, whereas a 40 ppm machine
may use either a 15 A or a 20 A outlet. An MFF may use either a 15 A or a 20 A outlet. A 15 A
outlet and a 20 A outlet are illustrated below.
15 A
Environmental Data
Environmental specifications are as follows:
Humidity: 15 - 90%
Noise:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Country
Switch
SW1
Switch
SW2
Switch
SW3
Austria
0010
1111
0011
Belgium
1011
0100
0011
China*
0000
1111
0011
Czech Republic
1110
0100
0011
Denmark
0000
1111
0011
Finland
0000
1100
0011
France
0000
0011
0011
Germany
1100
1100
0101
Greece
1000
1100
0011
May 2003
6-111
General Procedures
Product Specifications
Switch
SW1
Switch
SW2
Switch
SW3
Hungary*
0010
1111
0011
Ireland
1000
1111
0011
Italy
0100
1111
0011
Morocco
0000
0011
0011
Netherlands
0000
1111
0011
Norway
0000
0100
0011
Poland
0110
1111
0011
Portugal
0000
0111
0011
Romania
1100
1100
0101
Russia
0010
1111
0011
Spain
0000
1111
0011
Sweden
0000
1111
0011
Switzerland
0010
1111
0101
Turkey
0010
1111
0011
United Kingdom
0000
1111
0011
General Procedures
Product Specifications
May 2003
6-112
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Table 24 lists the machine System Software versions released as of the time of this publication.
For each system-level software version listed, the corresponding software versions for the specific platforms within the system are given, including PWS and EDOC versions.
This space is reserved to attach bulletins announcing any future software releases before the
next EDOC revision.
Tag #
Release
Main Controller /
MFF
UI
ESS
PWS Diagnostics
EDOC
Aug. 2002
136 / M009
07.19.05.026
19.05.026 / 12.20
19.05.024
19.05.021
19.05.025
v0.040 or v0.041
April 2002
135
07.19.04.039
19.04.039
19.04.037
19.04.034
19.04.037
v0.040
March 2002
133
07.19.04.038
19.04.038
19.04.037
19.04.034
19.04.037
v0.040
Sept. 2001
129
07.19.02.503
19.02.503
19.02.503
19.02.503
19.02.503
v0.040
July 2001
125
07.19.02.051
19.02.051
19.02.049
19.02.050
19.02.050
v0.039 or v0.040
May, 2001
124
7.19.01.504
07.19.01.504
07.19.01.504
07.19.01.502
07.19.01.503
v0.038A or v0.039
April, 2001
113
7.19.01.503
07.19.01.503
07.19.01.502
07.19.01.502
07.19.01.503
v0.038A or v0.039
Oct. 2000
111
7.02
L0.19.0.52
L0.19.0.56
L0.19.0.56
L0.19.0.26
v0.038A or v0.039
June, 2000
102
7.01
L0.19.0.28
L0.19.0.27
L0.19.0.28
L0.19.0.26
v0.038A
May, 2000
101
7.00
L0.19.0.27
L0.19.0.27
L0.19.0.26
L0.19.0.26
v0.038A
June, 2000
099
6.08
L0.18.6.07
L0.18.6.04
L0.18.6.05
L0.18.6.06
v0.038
March, 2000
287
5.22
L0.17.9.32
L0.17.9.32
L0.17.9.32
L0.17.9.21
v0.038
December, 1999
095
6.04
L0.18.1.26
L0.18.1.25
L0.18.1.24
L0.18.5.19
v0.038
December, 1999
288
5.18
L0.17.9.28
L0.17.8.66
L0.17.8.63
L0.17.9.21
v0.038
November, 1999
094
6.03
L0.18.1.24
L0.18.1.24
L0.18.1.24
L0.18.1.23
v0.038
September, 1999
089
5.11
L0.17.8.67
L0.17.8.66
L0.17.8.63
L0.17.8.67
v0.037 or v0.038
July, 1999
087
5.08
L0.17.8.65
L0.17.8.65
L0.17.8.63
L0.17.8.64
v0.036 or v0.037
June, 1999
086
5.07
L0.17.8.64
L0.17.8.63
L0.17.8.63
L0.17.8.64
v0.036 or v0.037
April, 1999
293
5.06
L0.17.8.11
L0.17.8.05
L0.17.8.12
L0.17.8.06
v0.036 or v0.037
January, 1999
074
5.05
L0.17.6.08
L0.17.6.05
L0.17.6.08
L0.17.6.04
v0.036 or v0.037
November, 1998
073
5.03
L0.17.5.08
L0.17.5.07
L0.17.5.08
L0.17.5.06
v0.035 or v0.036
September, 1998
070
5.01
L0.17.4.10
L0.17.4.10
L0.17.4.10
L0.17.4.10
v0.035 or v0.036
August, 1998
None
1.31
L0.15.8.02
L0.15.8.01
NA
L0.15.8.01
v0.034 or v0.035
June, 1998
061
1.30
L0.15.8.01
L0.15.8.01
NA
L0.15.8.01
v0.034 or v0.035
April, 1998
041
1.21
L0.15.7.19
L0.15.7.15
NA
L0.15.7.17
v0.034
December 1997
029
1.12
L0.15.6.16
L0.15.6.15
NA
L0.15.6.15
v0.033
October 1997
019
1.11
L0.15.6.14
L0.15.6.15
NA
L0.15.6.15
v0.033
September 1997
021
1.1
L0.15.6.14
L0.15.6.14
NA
L0.15.6.14 or
L0.15.6.15
v0.032 or v0.033
Table 25 (for pre-860 Atlanta Main Control PWB) and Table 26 (for pre-860 Atlanta Main Control PWB) list the IOT (Main Control PWB) Checksums for software versions released as of the
time of this publication. To view the checksums of the software currently installed in the Main
Control PWB, enter [System, Imaging, and IOT Configuration], select the [Software] tab, and
double-click on [SCS]. You can then compare the machine's IOT (SCS) Checksums to those
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-113
General Procedures
Product Specifications
Table 25 Software Levels and Checksums (Pre-860 Atlanta Main Control PWB)
Boot Sector
Run Time
Application
Boot Loader
07.19.05.026
07.82.16
D8965B85
66EE547
263AE3D2
N/A
1C0E4D6B
07.19.04.039
07.81.06
4A543F83
66EE547
263AE3D2
N/A
1C0E4D6B
26E3CB91
07.19.04.038
07.81.06
4A2C90C2
66EE547
263AE3D2
N/A
1C0E4D6B
26E3CB91
07.19.02.503
07.80.06
32E2A409
66EE547
263AE3D2
N/A
1C0E4D6B
26E3CB91
07.19.02.051
07.80.06
332DF896
66EE547
263AE3D2
N/A
1C0E4D6B
26E3CB91
26E3CB91
26DC6B31
07.19.01.504
07.78.08
27D789BD
66EE547
26474106
N/A
1B776E3B
07.19.01.503
07.78.07
24BB4A2F
66EE547
26474106
N/A
1B776E3B
26E3CB91
B9CD2640
66EE547
2582C494
N/A
154501B7
26E3CB91
B24FD7AC
66EE547
257264F0
N/A
1545418B
26E3CB91
B18489BE
66EE547
257264F0
N/A
1545418B
26E3CB91
77C9022
66AC67D
254719D8
N/A
1545418B
26CB69B6
F277C173
66B0553
23ED9B6D
N/A
14FC1F16
26C8FEEA
8CE34112
66AC67D
2503AE67
N/A
1504AC70
26CB69B6
F14A9B91
66B0553
23ED9B6D
N/A
14EA0367
26C8FEEA
72A3940D
66AC67D
2503AE67
N/A
1504AC70
26D3174D
EBF625C8
66B0553
23ED9B6D
N/A
14EA0367
26D0AC81
ECA26151
66B0553
23ED9B6D
N/A
14EA0367
26D0AC81
ECA26420
66B0553
23ED9B6D
N/A
14EA0367
26D55F1F
C3050D9E
66B0553
239E13FC
N/A
136A53AF
26DE4045
L0.17.6 (V5.05)
07.72.04
F28A7EC1
5F339A7
220C4776
13F270E6
13698027
26835E69
L0.17.5 (V5.03)
07.72.02
E577D9C1
5F339A7
211B9E85
13F270E6
13698027
2682D038
L0.17.4 (V5.01)
7.71.02
B300B46C
5F339A7
211B9E02
NA
1364C2BB
2682D038
64DF52ED
39A28B6
19000125
13DCCF22
1343E5FD
2682C837
L0.15.7 (V1.21)
7.65.42
5FE6B6DE
39A28B6
19000125
13DCCF22
1343E5FD
2682C837
35E23F3C
39A28B6
1878D8A1
135E37D0
12E24420
265FAAB5
L0.15.6.15 (V1.11
or V1.1)
350949D6
39A28B6
1878D8A1
135E37D0
12E24420
265FAAB5
7.65.37
Table 26 Software Levels and Checksums (860 Atlanta Main Control PWB)
Run Time
Application
Boot Loader
Boot Sector
IPS1
IIT
07.19.05.026
07.82.16
EC648248
1E63403
1C0E4D6B
26180815 or
26DC6B31 or
26C5B429
07.19.04.039
07.81.06
D35D9447
1E63403
1C0E4D6B
260E76CB or
26E3CB91 or
26E33424
07.19.04.038
07.81.06
D6ED5A14
1E63403
1C0E4D6B
260E76CB or
26E3CB91 or
26E33424
General Procedures
Product Specifications
May 2003
6-114
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
7.19.02.503
Bulletins
7.19.05.026
Reduces Light Prints and Toner Blow-Out (TBO) image quality problems on 480/490.
7.19.04.039
7.19.04.038
7.19.02.503
07.19.02.051
07.19.01.504
07.19.01.503
L0.19.0.56 (V7.02)
L0.19.0.28 (V7.01)
L0.19.0.27 (V7.00)
L0.18.6.07 (V6.08)
07.19.02.051
07.19.02.051 SOFTWARE HIGHLIGHTS
07.19.01.504
07.19.01.504 SOFTWARE HIGHLIGHTS
L0.17.9.32 (V5.22)
07.19.01.503
L0.18.1.24 (V6.03)
L0.17.8.67 (V5.11)
L0.17.8.65 (V5.08)
Mandatory for 480 DC/ST (NASG); situational for 460/470 DC/ST (NASG) and 460/470/
480 DC/ST (XE) to correct one of the problems listed below:
L0.17.8.64 (V5.07)
L0.17.8.12 (V5.06)
Intermittent 08-115.06, 08-101.06, 08-105.06 faults when the machine is left on for long
periods of time. (Refer to Bulletin #423.)
L0.17.6.08 (V5.05)
480 only (07.19.01.020 software): 08-101.06 and 08-115.06 faults after 100 - 150K cycles
on the HCF feeder CRU due to incorrect HCF CRU Life Factor. (Refer to Bulletin #421.)
L0.17.5.08 (V5.03)
UI "Blue Screen"
7.19.05.026
7.19.05.026 SOFTWARE HIGHLIGHTS
"Dots of Death": UI only displays only a series of dots and the machine does not cycle up.
Cover inserted in middle of Build Job when front and back covers selected and more than
256 images
L0.19.0.56 (V7.02)
7.19.04.039
Same as 19.04.038, but contains a correction for one NVM default. Mark Service location
35 (hcfAquire), if initialized in 19.04.038, would cause misfeeds (08-101.06 faults) and
false Tray 6 out of paper statuses.
L0.19.0.56 (V7.02) software has been cut into XE Manufacturing only for the 460/470
products.
L0.19.0.56 (V7.02) software is required for the Flicker solution (TAG 105).
7.19.04.038
7.19.02.038 SOFTWARE HIGHLIGHTS
L0.19.0.28 (V7.01)
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-115
General Procedures
Upgrade your PWS with the following software, which are included in the L0.19.0.27
(V7.00) kit *:
L0.19.0.28 (V7.01) software has been cut into Manufacturing for the 460/470 products.
a.
All CSEs servicing the new 460/470 machines are being sent the L0.19.0.28 (V7.01) kit
630K11661 (301K03480 for Service Agents)
b.
1.
*CAUTION: Your PWS must have the 8.0 or higher ("Next Generation") base software installed before installing V7.00 PWS Diagnostics or servicing the 460/470
products.
Upgrade your PWS with the following software, which are included in the L0.19.0.28
(V7.01) kit *:
2.
* NOTES:
*CAUTION: Your PWS must have the 8.0 or higher ("Next Generation") base software installed before installing V7.00/7.01 PWS Diagnostics or servicing the 460/
470 products.
2.
Use the enclosed L0.19.0.28 (V7.01) machine software to upgrade any 460/470
machine currently running L0.19.0.27 (V7.00) software, if required to correct the following problems in L0.19.0.27 (V7.00):
03-331 faults (Atlanta resets) when the System Administrator enters Network
Configuration settings
Use the PWS to service the new 460/470 machines, but no machine upgrades to
this software level should be required.*
If the customer keeps both a Xerographic Module and a Fuser Module on site,
be sure to reduce the Reorder Message Trigger to the minimum setting of one
day, and set the Reorder Method to "Customer" as follows:
Enter the UI Tools pathway, select [More] (if required), then [Supplies Management], then [Warning Message Notices]. Select [Time to Reorder], decrease the
value to 1, and select [Save]. Then, select [Replacement Method], select [Customer Replaced], and select [Save].
This will help to reduce wasted module life, and the associated service cost, as
much as possible.
If the customer keeps both a Xerographic Module and a Fuser Module on site, be
sure to reduce the Reorder Message Trigger to the minimum setting of one day, and
set the Reorder Method to "Customer" as follows:
L0.18.6.07 (V6.08)
(Text from Bulletin 396)
L0.18.6.07 (V6.08) SOFTWARE HIGHLIGHTS
A major source of excessive service cost on all machines in the field to date is wasted
Xerographic and Fuser Module life. Customers are changing modules while significant life
remains - thousands of copies in many cases - because the UI messages that prompt
customer replacement are displayed prematurely. This latest software calculates the
Xerographic and Fuser Module usage rate much more accurately, timing the replacement
messages as closely as possible to the module's actual end-of-life.
Currently U.S. Only: Sixth Sense (RDT) Callout for billing may be enabled, on a machine
that is already enabled for Sixth Sense and is connected to an active phone line. The
Software Upgrade Kit instructions will direct you when and how to set up RDT Callout on
U.S. Sixth Sense machines.
Enter the UI Tools pathway, select [More] (if required), then [Supplies Management],
then [Warning Message Notices]. Select [Time to Reorder], decrease the value to 1,
and select [Save]. Then, select [Replacement Method], select [Customer Replaced],
and select [Save].
This will help to reduce wasted module life, and the associated service cost, as
much as possible.
L0.19.0.27 (V7.00)
All CSEs in Europe servicing the new 460/470 products are being supplied the L0.19.0.27
(V7.00) software kit by their NTS or local management.
The L0.19.0.27 (V7.00) software kit is available for order by any U.S. CSEs who are
required to service the 460/470 demo machines. The kit part number to order is
630K11660 for CSEs (301K03219 for Service Agents).
General Procedures
The ESS Software Verification diagnostic tool does not work in L0.18.6.06 (V6.08) Diagnostics software. DO NOT USE THE ESS SOFTWARE VERIFICATION (or "ESS Software Verify") tool in this software version.
May 2003
6-116
MANDATORY
The following two MANDATORY new versions of software are being released for Document Centre 240/255/265 to address the above two problems:
L0.18.6.07 (V6.08) (Tag #099), releasing now: MANDATORY for the following
machines:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
L0.17.9.32 (V5.22) (Tag #287), released March, 2000: MANDATORY for All ST and
LP machines that are not already at L0.18.xx (V6.03 or V6.04) software that will NOT
receive the new features of Network Scanning, Network Faxing, or Network
Accounting. Exception: Machines that already have at least 64 MB ESS RAM may
be upgraded from L0.17 to L0.18.6.07 (V6.08) instead (see above), depending upon
direction from your NTS or local management.
NOTE: The reason for not upgrading all ST/LP's from L0.17 to L0.18.6 is that an ESS
RAM upgrade to at least 64 MB would be required, which costs approximately $200 US
per machine. Machines with L0.17 software that already have at least 64 MB ESS RAM
may be upgraded to L0.18.6.07 (V6.08) instead of L0.17.9.32 (V5.22), depending upon
direction from your NTS or local management.
Upgrading the machine from L0.17 to L0.18.6.07 (V6.08) software will DELETE
any Internal Auditron account information. If a machine with L0.17 software has
any Internal Auditron accounts, you must use the Auditron Report Software to
save the Internal Auditron account information before the software upgrade and
to restore it afterward.
Before performing the software upgrade, disable any external Auditron device,
and then re-enable it after the software upload.
L0.17.9.32 (V5.22)
1.
2.
Upgrade your PWS with the following software, which are included in the L0.18.6.07
(V6.08) kit:
PWS DLL Patch, only if required to correct the DLL problem in L0.18.1.25 PWS
Diagnostics that caused PWS lock-ups (see Bulletin #386).
* IMPORTANT:
Set the PWS Diagnostics version to correspond with the CURRENT machine
software version, for the NVM download and save to MRD, before the software
upgrade. (NOTE: This also applies to upgrades to all other software versions).
ST/LP: Do not attempt to use PWS Wizard method to upgrade the ESS to
L0.18.6.07 (V6.08) software -- use the Alternate Boot method instead, according to the instructions. The PWS Software Upgrade Wizard does not work for
the ESS in this software version.
A major source of excessive service cost on all machines in the field to date is wasted
Xerographic and Fuser Module life. Customers are changing modules while significant life
remains - thousands of copies in many cases - because the UI messages that prompt
customer replacement are displayed prematurely. This latest software calculates the
Xerographic and Fuser Module usage rate much more accurately, timing the replacement
messages as closely as possible to the module's actual end-of-life.
The following two MANDATORY new versions of software are being released for Document Centre 240/255/265 to address the above two problems:
L0.17.9.32 (V5.22) (Tag #287), releasing now: MANDATORY for All ST and LP
machines that are not already at L0.18.xx (V6.03 or V6.04) software that will NOT
receive the new features of Network Scanning, Network Faxing, or Network
Accounting. Exception: In Europe only, machines that already have at least 64 MB
ESS RAM may be upgraded to L0.18.6 instead (when available), depending upon
direction from your NTS or local management.
L0.18.6, expected late April 2000: MANDATORY for the following machines:
All machines that are already at L0.18.xx (V6.03 or V6.04) software
If the customer keeps both a Xerographic Module and a Fuser Module on site,
be sure to reduce the Reorder Message Trigger to the minimum setting of one
day, and set the Reorder Method to "Customer" as follows:
Enter the UI Tools pathway, select [More] (if required), then [Supplies Management], then [Warning Message Notices]. Select [Time to Reorder], decrease the
value to 1, and select [Save]. Then, select [Replacement Method], select [Customer Replaced], and select [Save].
This will help to reduce wasted module life, and the associated service cost, as
much as possible.
Upgrade your PWS with the following software, all of which are included in the
L0.17.9.32 (V5.22) kit:
Versions L0.17.9.21 (V5.22) Diagnostic software.
Versions L0.18.5.19 (V6.06) Diagnostic software. *
Auditron Report 3.0 software.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-117
General Procedures
2.
Changes the lube stripe frequency and patch size, and enables planned future Xerographic Module hardware improvements, all of which will increase Xerographic Module
life by up to 30%, resulting in significantly lower Xerox service costs.
For Customers receiving L0.18 software for the first time, the introduction of this software
supports the launch of the new features: Network Scanning, Network Faxing, and Network Accounting. Fully enabling these features requires additional hardware and enablement kits. The enablement kits are either pre-installed in each new L0.18 machine
ordered with these options, or are shipped separately to the customer, based on their
Sales order.
With L0.18.1.26 (V6.04) software and with a Finisher, the default output tray for copy
mode is the Stacker Tray. However, upgrading to L0.18.1.26 (V6.04) software will not
change this setting automatically:
IMPORTANT:
a.
b.
c.
It is CRITICAL to switch the machine power off and back on after this software upgrade, for the intended IIT changes to take effect. A complete
restart of the machine logic is required in order to move the new software
code to the SCVM chip.
Unlike with L0.18.1.24 (V6.03) software, upgrading from L0.17 to L0.18.1.26 (V6.04)
software will not change the default copy output from the Stacker Tray to the Top
Tray.
If upgrading from L0.18.1.24 (V6.03) to L0.18.1.26 (V6.04) software and the customer has not changed the default from the Top Tray to the Stacker Tray, this setting
is not changed back to the Stacker Tray automatically. The customer can still change
the default tray back to the Stacker Tray if they so choose, by using Customer Tools
on the UI.
The L0.18.1.26 (V6.04) kit contains a PWS Software "Album" CD-ROM, which contains
the following software:
d.
e.
The L0.17.9.32 (V5.22) kit contains a PWS Software "Album" CD-ROM, which contains the following software:
The L0.17.9.28 (V5.18) kit contains no PWS software CD-ROM. You must use the
L0.18.1.26 (V6.04) kit to install L0.17.9.21 (V5.18) Diagnostic software onto the PWS.
All support for L0.15 software on Digital Copiers is being phased out as of 1 January
2000.
General Procedures
May 2003
6-118
1.
Upgrading the machine to L0.17.9.28 (V5.18) software will DELETE any extended
Internal Auditron account information. If the machine has any Internal Auditron
accounts and has 128K of NVM RAM (Tag #036 or Tag #077), you must use the
Auditron Report Software to save the Internal Auditron account information before
the software upgrade and to restore it afterward.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
2.
The ESS software has not changed since V5.07 (the ESS software is still
L0.17.8.63), so you may de-select the ESS platform in the Software Upgrade Wizard
if upgrading from L0.17.8.64 (V5.07) or higher. This will save time and avoid the
unnecessary risk of a ESS software upload failure.
3.
It is CRITICAL to switch the machine power off and back on after this software
upgrade, for the intended IIT changes to take effect. A complete restart of the
machine logic is required in order to move the new software code to the SCVM chip.
L0.18.1.24 (V6.03) software is released for Document Centre 240/255/265 to support the
limited worldwide launch of L0.18 software and its new options of Network Scanning, Network Faxing, and Network Accounting.
4.
Before performing the software upgrade, disable any external Auditron device, and
then re-enable it after the software upload.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
5.
At this time, L0.18.1.24 software should be installed ONLY on machines where the customer has ordered any of the new options of Network Scanning, Network Faxing, and/or
Network Accounting.
2.
The customer/SA must use CentreWare 5.1 or higher, in order for their clients to utilize L0.18.1.26 (V6.04) machine software fully, and to avoid problems of incompatibility between the new machine software and earlier versions of CentreWare.
3.
The new CentreWare is included with the option enablement kits delivered to all new
L0.18 customers, and can be downloaded from www.centreware.com when available.
4.
Therefore, until further notice, DO NOT upgrade any machine from L0.17 to L0.18 unless
you are dispatched to enable the software and new option(s) PER CUSTOMER SALES
ORDER. Then, be sure to follow the instructions in the option enablement kits (delivered
to the customer's site) before installing the new machine software.
L0.17.8.67 (V5.11)
(Text from Bulletin 369)
L0.17.8.67 (V5.11) SOFTWARE HIGHLIGHTS
The Xerographic Exerciser now operates correctly with an Atlanta Platinum Main Control
PWB (TAG 077).
The toner concentration NVM Values are now correct for machines at altitudes below
4000 ft. (1200 m).
5.
Before performing the software upgrade, disable any external Auditron device, then
re-enable it after the software upload.
The problem of large single-sided jobs sometimes resulting in 08-105.06 faults and
sheets being misdirected into the duplex paper path, has been fixed.
6.
The problem of 8.5 x 13 in. (216 x 330 mm) documents in the DADF causing 03-338 Main
Controller crashes ("Atlanta resets"), has been fixed.
The 32-bit (Windows '95) PWS software is now able to re-establish communication with a
55 ppm machine after the NVM RAM Chip is replaced.
L0.18.1.24 (V6.03)
(Text from Bulletin 373)
NOTE: There is no 16-bit (Windows for Workgroups) version of L0.17.8.67 PWS software. The 16-bit PWS operating system is no longer being supported.
With L0.18.1.24 software, and with a Finisher, the default output tray for copy mode is
now the Top Tray. Customers can change the default tray back to the Stacker Tray if they
so choose, by using Customer Tools on the UI.
For Customers receiving L0.18 software for the first time, the introduction of this software
supports the launch of the new features: Network Scanning, Network Faxing, and Network Accounting. Fully enabling these features requires additional hardware and enablement kits, which are either pre-installed in each new L0.18 machine or shipped separately
to the customer, based on their Sales order.
After the machine is upgraded to L0.18.1 or higher software, the customer's System
Administrator can perform subsequent software upgrades via their network from a client
PC. Availability of these subsequent software upgrades will be communicated directly to
the customer by e-mail.
Existing L0.18 customers (Customer Field Test Phases 1 and 2) will benefit from the final
"hardening" improvements over Customer Field Test software L0.18.1.22 (V6.02).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-119
The UI message to order a new Xerographic or Fuser Module appears a shorter time in
advance of the CRU end-of-life (the default number of days has been decreased), reducing premature CRU replacements. Upgrading to the new software will overwrite the current setting with this new Reorder Message Trigger value:
For NASG Market Region machines: the default has changed from 5 days to 4 days.
For XE, XCL, and DMO Market Region machines: the default has changed from 5
days to 3 days.
General Procedures
NOTE:
When using the Serif PagePlus application, some graphic images would not print. With
this new release, these images will print correctly.
When printing in booklet format onto 11x17-inch paper, some pages would not format correctly, causing blank pages in the booklet. These jobs should now print correctly.
The machine would not connect in a Cabletron SecureFast switched ethernet environment. These problems have been addressed in this release.
Postscript resources could not be stored onto the hard disk of the machine, preventing the
resource from being recalled for future use. This release has corrected this problem.
Sweden: 10 days
Norway, Finland, Italy: 5 days
PWS FIXES:
To change the Reorder Message Trigger setting (number of days before CRU endof-life when the Reorder message appears):
HCF Interlock name changed in Component Control, so as not to mislead and cause
incorrect parts replacement.
1.
Enter [Configuration tab , CRUs] and select the [CRU Messages] tab.
2.
Double-click in the "Reorder Message Trigger" field, and change the value as
required.
NETBIOS had been displayed as available for Echo Test and unavailable for Get Network
Data. This is now fixed.
Additional Highlights:
3.
ST/LP: A new version of CentreWare, 4.1 SP2, is available to operate with this new
machine software. The customer can download the new CentreWare from www.centreware.com.
The IOT now must cycle up and down 5 times (was 3 times) without delivering sheets,
before the job is automatically deleted.
L0.17.8.65 (V5.08)
(Text from Bulletin 362)
This software is identical to L0.17.8.64 (V5.07) software, except that it now supports the
Atlanta Platinum Main Control PWB (with TAG 077) in addition to the Atlanta Gold Main Control
PWB (with TAG 015, without TAG 077).
L0.17.8.64 (V5.07)
(Text from Bulletin 359)
In order to enable the xerographic fixes included in this software, you must initialize the
xerographic NVM and reenter the three ROS NVM values. For High Altitude machines
(with TAG 297), you must also set the machineAltitude NVM value for the machine's location. Follow the software upgrade kit instructions carefully to ensure the correct NVM
changes are made.
For a High Altitude machine (with TAG 297, or being upgraded to Tag #297 Developer
Housing): You must ensure the TAG 292 Developer Housing Gears are installed at the
same time that L0.17.8.64 (V5.07) software is installed. Either install the new High Altitude Developer Housing Kit that includes the Tag #292 gears, or install the Tag #292
Gears for High Altitude Developer Housing Kit in combination with the earlier High Altitude Developer Housing, when upgrading to this new software level. These two Tag #292
kits will be announced in a separate communication.
Worm-like image quality defects (Jumping-Gap Arcing, and Air Breakdown), occurring primarily at high altitudes, have been addressed. High Altitude (TAG 297) machines must
have new Developer Housing Gears (TAG 292) installed concurrently with this software refer to CAVEATS.
Problems have been addressed that led to frequent xerographic setups at all altitudes.
These setups would interrupt the job in progress and could take as long as 10 minutes to
complete. Setups were associated with 09- series xerographic faults.
NOTE: After this software is installed, manipulating the "special eleven" NVM values
(TAG 294, described in Bulletin 347) for these Xerographic problems no longer applies.
The software automatically adjusts Xerographic settings, including those for the specified
altitude for a High Altitude machine.
You must ensure the PWS Diagnostics version is set to L0.15 for the software upgrade
from L0.15 to L0.17.8.64 (V5.07). Follow the software upgrade kit instructions carefully to
ensure that you are using the correct PWS software version.
You must disable and disconnect any external Auditron device before beginning the software upgrade to L0.17.8.64 (V5.07). Follow the software upgrade kit instructions carefully
to ensure the external Auditron device is disable/disconnected and reconnected/reenabled at the appropriate times.
ESS IMPROVEMENTS:
Large job handling is further improved. Some jobs of 15,000 pages and more would hang
as scheduling and generate 03-338 faults.
A thin line would sometimes print near a graphic in a PostScript job. Improvements have
been made to help eliminate this problem.
General Procedures
May 2003
6-120
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
19-407 or 19-408 faults are declared with some middle function jobs. When the job
requires a 270 degree rotation and the rotation is broken into a 90 degree rotation and a
180 degree rotation because tumble duplex is selected and SE document handler feed
onto LE output is selected on a system with a 1 GB (slower) Image Disk. Upgrade the
customer with the 2 GB Image Disk (PL 1.3A) to alleviate this problem.
Refer to the Release Notes, included in the V5.07 software kit, for information on additional caveats (known problems) with L0.17.8.64 (V5.07) software.
Refer to the Release Notes, included in the V5.06 software kit, for information on additional caveats (known problems) with L0.17.8.12 (V5.06) software.
L0.17.8.12 (V5.06)
(Text from Bulletin 351)
A) MACHINE PROBLEMS CORRECTED BY L0.17.8.12 (V5.06) SOFTWARE
The system may crash during a very large print job (>1000 pages); for example: when out
of paper, when tray switching is required, or when a jam occurs.
If the system crashes during a very large print job (>1000 pages), after rebooting it then
may then restart the job at page 1, or may cancel printing the job (incorrect job recovery).
A thin line appears across the page near graphics in PostScript jobs.
The system crashes when source routing is enabled in very large Token Ring network
environments.
The system crashes when attempting to print high resolution embedded TIFF images.
You must ensure the PWS Diagnostics version is set to L0.15 for the software upgrade
from L0.15 to L0.17.8.12 (V5.06). Follow the software upgrade kit instructions carefully to
ensure that you are using the correct PWS software version.
You must disable and disconnect any external Auditron device before beginning the software upgrade to L0.17.8.12 (V5.06). Follow the software upgrade kit instructions carefully
to ensure the external Auditron device is disable/disconnected and reconnected/reenabled at the appropriate times.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-121
General Procedures
L0.17.6.08 (V5.05)
You must disable and disconnect any external Auditron device before beginning the software upgrade to L0.17.6 (V5.05). Follow the software upgrade kit instructions carefully to
ensure the external Auditron device is disable/disconnected and reconnected/re-enabled
at the appropriate times.
ESS Caveats
Customer Safety: L0.17.5 (V5.03) and higher software improves the finisher operation to
prevent the remote chance the customer can have their hand pinched above the Stacker
Tray when removing stacks of prints.
CSE Safety: ST/LP: The problem of the machine continuing to print after entering diagnostics has been corrected with L0.17.5 (V5.03) and higher software. The CSE will no
longer need to ensure the front door interlock circuit is opened (door open, no cheater) in
order to prevent the machine from continuing to print after entering diagnostic mode.
However, it is still good safety practice, before entering diagnostics, to allow the job that is
currently marking to run to completion and delete any jobs displayed on the UI.
This machine software release takes full advantage of the new CentreWare release, version 4.1 SP1, which the customer can download from the CentreWare web site (www.centreware.com).
Several enhancements have been incorporated to improve overall reliability and reduce
the occurrence of paper and document jams.
Finisher Unload Message: When a small number of thin stapled sets are run and
removed, the thin set counter now correctly reports the number of sets, and the machine
does not declare the finisher is full with less then the required numbers of sets.
The problem of Second Side Registration NVM resetting to "0" during I/O configuration
has been corrected. When a configuration mismatch occurs (for example, when reattaching an external feeder or output device), the two duplex side 2 registration NVMs (locations 8 and 65 in Mark Service) would be set to 0. This caused the side 2 top edge
registration (IB-OB) to be incorrect.
A number of different system reset/crash situations were corrected, including for low EPC
memory mode with memory sweep
The Echo Test and the Get Network Data test, performed on the machine UI, only function
intermittently.
You must disable and disconnect any external Auditron device before beginning the software upgrade to L0.17.6 (V5.05). Follow the software upgrade kit instructions carefully to
ensure the external Auditron device is disable/disconnected and reconnected/re-enabled
at the appropriate times.
The system will sometimes crash on large PCL jobs, resulting in a 03-331 fault for ESS,
or a 03-338 fault for the Main Control PWB.
The Configuration Report incorrectly reports the IPX frametype to be 802.2 when Token
Ring is selected as the NetWare physical media. The frametype in use is actually Token
Ring and it is displayed correctly in the UI Tools in Network Setup.
The only method to set the AppleTalk zone name to use the default zone on the network
is to use the [Default All] button on the UI Tools in Network Setup. There is no '*' character available to set the zone name to this directly.
Occasionally, a job will remain "Scheduling" in the queue indefinitely. If this occurs, delete
the job from the queue, switch the machine power off using the white button, and switch it
back on.
Requesting a new Configuration Report via the PWS will occasionally cause the ESS to
crash, requiring a power-off/power-on to recover. Workaround: Request a Configuration
Report via UI Tools instead.
Other Caveats
If the Machine Administrator PIN number is changed at the machine UI, the machine must
be reset before the change will take effect. Until the machine is reset, remote applications
such as CentreWare Internet Services and CentreWare Network and Administration Services cannot authorize operations using the new PIN.
ESS Improvements
The problem of the printer not responding to the network when in low power mode has
been corrected.
The Postscript Interpreter has improvements to address problems with particular True
Type fonts printing incorrectly.
You must ensure the PWS Diagnostics version is set to L0.15 for the software upgrade
from L0.15 to L0.17.6 (V5.05). Follow the software upgrade kit instructions carefully to
ensure that you are using the correct PWS software version.
General Procedures
May 2003
6-122
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
5.
Software upgrade instructions are not being followed completely, resulting in numerous
calls to Field Engineering.
STATUS: The upgrade instructions have been simplified, and then verified in a field test.
2.
3.
STATUS: This problem is driven by not having the Finisher Interlock correctly seated. Use
the following procedure to recover:a) Switch Off the machine power.b) Correctly re-mount
the Finisher, ensuring the interlock is actuated correctly.c) Switch On the machine
power.d) Continue the Install Wizard.e) Reset the second side registration when done.
Second side NVM resets to "0" during I/O configuration. This means that anytime the I/O
configuration of the machine is changed, side 2 NVM will be reset to "0", resulting in the
Side 2 Top Edge Registration being out of spec.
STATUS: This problem will be fixed with the L0.17.6 software release. Until then, there is
no easy workaround for this problem. You can expect to see an increase in UM's from rigger installs. Also, anytime an I/O device is removed and reconfigured during troubleshooting, the CSE must reset the Side 2 Top Edge Registration. In the interim, in order to
prevent a recall, verify the Side 2 Top Edge Registration is in spec before leaving the
account.
UI lockup during Wizard: When the disk finisher is not mounted correctly and its interlock
is not seated correctly during the Install/Wizard, the message "Ensure the input and output devices are installed correctly, or call for service" will appear on the local UI. If the
Rigger proceeds with the Install Wizard without following the below recovery procedure,
the Install Wizard will continue until the System Install is complete, the UI will reset and
not advance past the opening "Document Centre" frame. If the Rigger then Power-Off/
Power-On the machine without following the below recovery procedure the local UI will
not advance past the "Document Center" opening screen.
6.
22-303.05 is a new fault code without a description or RAP in EDOC v0.036. This new
fault code was generated to fix a problem in L0.15.8 software where the machine just
hangs up. The conditions that cause this fault fall into the following categories:
A Finisher Unload Message can come up at anytime for the customer, if the Finisher Tray
has not moved during any of the jobs. For example, if the customer runs 29 small jobs
that don't cause the trays to step down, and then someone comes up to run a 5 set job,
the unload message will be displayed after the first set goes into the finisher. The machine
will not complete the final 4 sets of the job until the 1 minute timer times out, or the customer uses the finisher tray pause button to cycle the tray down/up, or the finisher tray
moves up, depending on the size of the set. If the customer is running a large number of
thin sets, the problem can occur only for the first unload message. After the first unload
message, the next unload message will be 30 sets later (or at whatever value it is set in
TOOLS.)
b) The stack of originals contains at least one original that is at least 2 inches smaller than
the others, and the user did not select "Mixed Size Originals".
c) The DADF feeds multiple originals in a 'shingle' feed (or multiple feed) condition, or
feeds the originals too slowly in the CVT region, or does not feed at all.
The above conditions will cause the following:- A 22-303.05 fault to be declared,- The job
is automatically deleted by the system, and- A pop-up on the UI stating "The job was
deleted because a document was larger than expected. Try flattening the document and
either rescan it through the Document Feeder or scan it from the Document Glass". The
message on this pop-up can be confusing to the operator and CSE, since there are many
other causes of this fault in addition to folded originals.
STATUS: Refer to Bulletin # 334 for more information about this fault.
4.
Atlanta 96 Main Control PWB Related S/W Upgrade Failures: This upgrade is hardware
and process related. Atlanta 96 is susceptible to noise problems, and the Atlanta Gold
PWB was introduced to address these problems.
STATUS: The new upgrade instructions mention that you might experience problems
when upgrading Atlanta 96 PWB's. At this time, it is recommended that you do not
upgrade Atlanta'96 PWB's. If you need to upgrade an Atlanta 96 PWB, and experience
problems with the upgrade, install an Atlanta Gold PWB and then perform the software
upgrade. There will be more information available in another bulletin that will be sent out
shortly.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-123
General Procedures
L0.17.5.08 (V5.03)
The product configuration now includes GMT Offset (Greenwich Mean Time Offset),
which is the difference between the machine's local standard time and the standard time
in Greenwich, England. This value is set during the Installation Wizard, and can also be
set in Diagnostic Navigator ([Configuration] tab, [System, Imaging and IOT Configuration],
[Time] tab. The correct GMT Offset settings for all time zones are listed in the customer
Installation and Start-Up Guide, and also in GP26 of EDOC V0.036 (expected November
1998).
DCS40-65 Diagnostics software now includes a 32-bit version, for use only with the Windows '95 PWS (when Windows '95 PWS becomes available). The 32-bit version may be
installed in combination with existing 16-bit versions, but version switching then requires
using two different Multiple Version Handlers (the existing 16-bit Multiple Version Handler
plus a new 32-bit Multiple Version Handler). Once all machines that you service are at
L0.17.4 (V5.01) or higher, you may then delete all 16-bit versions (using the [Delete Version] function in the 16-bit Multiple Version Handler), and install all 32-bit versions. This
will then eliminate the need for the 16-bit Multiple Version Handler.
The software improves the finisher operation to prevent the remote chance the customer
can have their hand pinched above the Stacker Tray when removing stacks of prints.
"Out of Memory" Machine internal memory is better managed, reducing "Out of Memory"
errors and improving the ability to handle a large number of jobs or a large copy count.
L0.17.5 (V5.03) may also be used on ST/LP machines to resolve "Out of Memory".
The problem of the machine continues to print after entering diagnostics, (CSE Safety)
has been corrected with this software. The CSE will no longer need to ensure the front
door interlock circuit is opened (door open, no cheater) in order to prevent the machine
from continuing to print after entering diagnostic mode. However, it is still good safety
practice, before entering diagnostics, to allow the job that is currently marking to run to
completion and delete any jobs displayed on the UI.
Consecutive 19-403 faults requiring power-off/power-on for lack of memory are now limited to two, after which the customer is asked to delete the job. (This is a temporary partial fix to reduce PO/PO's until the root cause is found.)
The Job Interrupt feature has been improved, allowing users to interrupt a job that is
being processed rather than having to wait until it is completed. All copier features are
available to the interrupt users.
The possibility of seeing the process control patch printed on the front edge of the sheet
has been eliminated.
Finisher stapled sets operability is improved over L0.15, including UI messages to help in
handling of odd size papers.
Build Job capability is increased and partial job segment recovery is improved over L0.15.
The customer may now request to have a specific internal tray (1-4) set as the default tray
from which to feed banner sheets. This is set in Diagnostic Navigator as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Change the value (nominal=0) to a number from 1-4, corresponding to the desired
tray.
7.
General Procedures
This software release is not accompanied by a new CentreWare release. ST and LP customers must receive the next release of machine software (L0.17.6, expected in January
1999) in order to receive a new CentreWare release.
If a diagnostic session is started without the serial cable connected, wait until the "Maximum Retransmits exceeded" message disappears (ten seconds after it appears) before
connecting the cable. Otherwise, an "Error Opening Session" message will appear and
you will need to restart the session.
When upgrading a Digital Copier from L0.15 to V5.03 (L0.17.5) software, the PWS Diagnostics version must first be set to L0.15 for the NVM backup and the software upgrade,
and later switched to L0.17.5 after the Main Controller has been upgraded to L0.17.5.
Follow the software upgrade kit instructions carefully to ensure that you are using the correct PWS software version.
The Novell or IPX Network Connectivity Test available in Tools still can give misleading
results as follows:
- False fail: The primary file server will not be discovered if it is more than one hop away.
- False pass: If the primary server is discovered, then the UI will indicate the device is
connected to the queue even though it may not be logged into the server.
May 2003
6-124
The network diagnostic test still may fail with the following message "The test cannot be
completed." If this occurs, reboot the machine and attempt to run the test again.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-125
General Procedures
Tools
Tool Number
Description
600T01824
Flashlight
600T41300
Part Number
Description
600T02037
600T01988
Nutdriver, 5.5mm
600T02029
Digital PhoneAdapter
600T91616
Interlock Cheater
600T80325
Lap LinkCable
600T40903
600T02040
Cable Lock
600T40902
600T02155
600T40906
600T02046
600T41502
Rule, 6 Inch
600T02058
Serial Cable
600T40210
Screwdriver, Stubby
600T01903
Soft Pouch
300K63850
600T01820
Vacuum Cleaner
600T02063
600T01832
Vacuum Filters
600T02047
82E12191
600T02145
82E12320
600T91926
82P01187
600T91927
600T02161
600T91928
600T41402
600T91929
600T02073
113E40060
600K75681
7 mm Nut Driver
600T02034
600T02223
600T02232
Description
600T02020
DMM, Fluke
600T42001
ESD Kit
600T41620
IDC Tool
600T02030
Meter Leads
600T02059
600T02039
600T01831
600T02079
600T02127
Description
499T00355
None
Description
600T02043
600T41901
Brush
600T02062
General Procedures
May 2003
6-126
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Machine Consumables
Table 5 Consumables
Table 5 Consumables
Description
Part Number
Market Region
Other
109R341
ACO
Non-Sold
Description
Part Number
Market Region
Other
Xerographic Module
113R131
NASG/XCL
Sold
Fuser Module
40ppm 200v
109R331
XE
Sold
Xerographic Module
113R132
NASG/XCL
Non-Sold
Fuser Module
40ppm 200v
109R332
XE
Non-Sold
Xerographic Module
113R133
XE
Sold
109R333
XE
Sold
Xerographic Module
113R134
XE
Non-Sold
109R334
XE
Non-Sold
Xerographic Module
113R266
FX Domestic/APO Sold
Fuser Module
65ppm 100v
109R336
FX Domestic/APO Sold
Xerographic Module
113R174
ACO
Sold
Fuser Module
65ppm 200v
109R337
FX APO
Xerographic Module
113R175
ACO
Non-Sold
108R148
NASG/XCL
Xerographic Module
113R290
FX Domestic/APO Sold
108R150
XE/ACO
6R01007
NASG/XCL
2 Pack
6R01006
NASG/XCL
6 Pack
NASG/XCL
6R90321
XE
6 Pack
XE/ACO
Fuser Module
40ppm 115v
109R327
NASG/XCL
Sold
109R328
NASG/XCL
Non-Sold
All
Fuser Module
40ppm 115v
All
Non-Sold
109R329
NASG/XCL
Sold
109R330
NASG/XCL
Non-Sold
All
1 Pack
Fuser Module
40ppm 115v
109R342
ACO
Sold
8R12898
All
3 Pack
Fuser Module
40ppm 115v
109R343
ACO
Non-Sold
8R12897
All
8 Pack
109R344
ACO
Sold
109R345
ACO
Non-Sold
Fuser Module
40ppm 200v
109R338
ACO
Sold
Fuser Module
40ppm 200v
109R339
ACO
Non-Sold
109R340
ACO
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Sold
600K88840
Sold
Description
43P81
600T91872
May 2003
6-127
General Procedures
Description
43P48
Formula A Cleaner
43P45
Film Remover
8R90176
600S4372
Cleaning Cloth
43P46
Pumice Paper
43P74
70P81
70P87
Lubricant, metal-to-metal
General Procedures
May 2003
6-128
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
F - Finisher Tags
If the machine configuration is changed between service calls, the CSE will be instructed to
load the tag matrix information during the current service call entry. For more information or to
view the tag placement/removal procedures refer to [Configuration tab , Machine Configuration
and Tag Matrix].
Procedure
Information included within each tag is as follows:
Manufacturing Serial Number - Lists the first serial number of the factory built machines
with the modification installed.
Kit Number - Lists the part number of the kit required to install the modification.
Reference - Lists the Parts List where the kit or modification part can be found.
The term N/A anywhere in the tag information identifies anything that is Not Applicable or Not
Available.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-129
General Procedures
General Procedures
May 2003
6-130
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
001
TAG:
004
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 4.1A
REFERENCE:
PL 6.2A
TAG:
002
TAG:
005
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 4.1A
REFERENCE:
PL 6.1A
TAG:
003
TAG:
006
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
NAME:
N/A
PURPOSE:
Replacement Developer Drive Motor (F1 P/N 15K30321) (F2 P/N 15K30331)
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 5.1B
REFERENCE:
PL 7.1
May 2003
6-131
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
V0.042
N/A
Duplex Transport
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
Inverter
General Procedures
TAG:
007
TAG:
010
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
USCO, UK, FX
PURPOSE:
NAME:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.1A
TAG:
008
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
N/A
2UP57698, E6D88173
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 6.1A
Not assigned.
KIT NUMBER:
REFERENCE:
TAG:
011
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
Dual Decurler
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.1A, PL 1.2A
TAG:
012
M
USE:
all markets
TAG:
009
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
NAME:
N/A
PURPOSE:
Not assigned.
KIT NUMBER:
REFERENCE:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
5 Ohm resistor added between the LVPS and the SCAM PWB for 36V output
surge protection. (Surge current from LVPS causes 09-370, 372, 374, and 376
faults.) NOTE: This tag is needed only on machines without Tag 011. The Tag
011 LVPS has this resistor built-in. Superseded by TAG 011.
N/A
REFERENCE:
General Procedures
May 2003
6-132
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
013
TAG:
016
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
NAME:
New Donor Roll bearings (in Developer Housing) changed to improve gap. Was
causing 09-338, 318 faults.
PURPOSE:
Change CVT Skis, P/O CVT Drive On Glass Kit to correct the problem of image
bands on halftone originals in DADF mode. Superseded by TAG 060.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 5.1B
REFERENCE:
PL 2.4
TAG:
014
TAG:
017
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
PURPOSE:
NAME:
A sensor is added to the Duplex Transport to detect the outboard edge of each
sheet in order to improve Top Edge Registration. Requires version 1.1 or higher
software.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 6.1A
PURPOSE:
The TEER Sensor in the Duplex Transport was changed to improve top edge
registration on A4 paper.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 6.1A
018
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
all markets
015
CLASS:
USE:
N/A
PURPOSE:
NAME:
N/A
TAG:
TAG:
NAME:
N/A
N/A
N/A
PURPOSE:
Replace Atlanta 95/96 Main Control PWB with Atlanta Gold Main Control
PWB. ALSO REQUIRES TAG 018.
Reduce Main Control PWBA noise (EME) with Atlanta Gold. This kit, which is
required in addition to the PWB when replacing Atlanta '96 with Atlanta Gold,
also includes the NVM RAM Chip.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
606K06710
REFERENCE:
PL 1.4A
REFERENCE:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-133
General Procedures
TAG:
019
TAG:
022
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
NAME:
Fix User Interface language problem in version 1.1 (L0.15.6.14) software (see
TAG 021). This kit also includes improved PWS software. Supersedes TAG
021. Superseded by TAG 029.
PURPOSE:
Preset curl level for FInisher-equipped machines by locking the decurler at one
setting and disconnecting it from software control. Corrects curl control problems causing finishing problems. Superseded by Exit Baffle (no TAG).
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
600K67670
REFERENCE:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 6.1A
TAG:
020
TAG:
023
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
FX only
N/A
PURPOSE:
NAME:
New Anti-Kickback Pad to correct excessive kick-back of the last sheet in the
DADF input tray.
PURPOSE:
Software Upgrade to Version 1.20 (L0.15.7.14) for FX machines only. Supersedes TAG 019 and TAG 021. Superseded by TAG 029.
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 2.1A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
021
TAG:
024
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
NAME:
N/A
PURPOSE:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
May 2003
6-134
N/A
EME Changes
KIT NUMBER:
General Procedures
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
Decurler Disconnection
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
025
TAG:
028
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
FX only
USE:
all markets
N/A
Size Sensing
PURPOSE:
N/A
PURPOSE:
EME changes to the Photoreceptor Drives Module (P/N 64K01222 and higher).
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 5.1A
TAG:
026
TAG:
029
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
PURPOSE:
Install a ground wire on the CVT Motor to correct CVT Motor encoder faults.
Superseded by TAG 084.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
027
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
N/A
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
REFERENCE:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NAME:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
030
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 7.1
May 2003
6-135
2UP059719,E6D883836,E8D898003,E2C020053,E10858028+
PURPOSE:
NAME:
2UP058491, E6D883657
General Procedures
TAG:
031
TAG:
034
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.5
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 6.1A
035
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
all markets
032
CLASS:
USE:
N/A
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
605K09091
REFERENCE:
PL 6.1A
TAG:
033
CLASS:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
605K09100
REFERENCE:
PL 6.2A
TAG:
036
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
NAME:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
Increase NVM RAM, increasing number of possible Auditron accounts from 500
to 1800.
KIT NUMBER:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
REFERENCE:
PL 1.4A
May 2003
6-136
N/A
PURPOSE:
General Procedures
N/A
USE:
Not assigned
N/A
TAG:
TAG:
NAME:
N/A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
037
TAG:
040
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
2UP060926, E6D884209
PURPOSE:
NAME:
Install mylar fingers onto the Takeaway Roll Idler Baffle to limit jams of curled
originals.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 2.1B
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 6.1A
TAG:
038
CLASS:
TAG:
041
XL only
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
CISPR B Changes
PURPOSE:
NAME:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
039
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 2.3
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
042
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
NVM socket fix and Ultra SCSI enablement. Superseded by TAG 052.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.4A
May 2003
6-137
N/A
PURPOSE:
N/A
N/A
Enabled Decurler
General Procedures
TAG:
043
TAG:
046
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
NAME:
Enable feeding of small (e.g. 5.5 x 8.5 in.) paper from Trays 1-4. Superseded
by TAG 063.
KIT NUMBER:
606K06921
REFERENCE:
PL 4.1A
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 4.1A
047
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
044
CLASS:
USE:
2UP060926, E6D884209
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
605K09180
REFERENCE:
PL 1.3B
TAG:
045
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
606K06950
REFERENCE:
PL 5.1A
TAG:
048
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
N/A
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
NAME:
2UP060926, E6D884209
PURPOSE:
Correct the "degraded mode" problem which can occur when coming out of
Power Saver. Supplies power to the Image Disk from the ESS PWB connector
on the low voltage harness, instead of from the Main Control PWB. Superseded
by TAG 051.
N/A
TAG:
TAG:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
NAME:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
605K09220
REFERENCE:
PL 2.2
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
General Procedures
May 2003
6-138
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
049
TAG:
052
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
FX only
USE:
all markets
NAME:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
Enables Loading ESS software via Main Control PWB. Supersedes TAG 042.
Superseded by TAG 065.
KIT NUMBER:
REFERENCE:
TAG:
050
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
Inspect AC Distribution Panel for loose terminals on Relay K2, and mark off
Tag. (Replace AC Distribution Panel if relay terminals are loose.)
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.2A
TAG:
051
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.4A
TAG:
053
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
NAME:
N/A
Enables ESS PWB power while maintaining "degraded mode" fix. Supersedes
TAG 044
Replace AC Distribution Panel with one containing new relay. Required for AC
convenience outlet for PWS.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.2A
TAG:
054
CLASS:
USE:
FX only
N/A
PURPOSE:
REFERENCE:
PL 1.3A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
May 2003
6-139
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
V0.042
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
PURPOSE:
NAME:
2UP060926, E6D884209
N/A
N/A
General Procedures
TAG:
055
TAG:
058
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
USE:
all markets
NAME:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 7.1
TAG:
056
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
PURPOSE:
2UP060800 - 2UP061999
PURPOSE:
Extend Developer Housing life span from approximately 500k prints to machine
end-of-life.
KIT NUMBER:
REFERENCE:
PL 5.1B
TAG:
059
CLASS:
USE:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
635K04741
REFERENCE:
PL 7.1
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
057
TAG:
060
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
NAME:
N/A
Aluminum ROS
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
600K67892
REFERENCE:
PL 5.2
REFERENCE:
PL 2.4
General Procedures
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
May 2003
6-140
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
061
TAG:
064
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
PURPOSE:
NAME:
Software Upgrade to Version 1.30 (L0.15.8.01); supersedes TAG 041. Superseded by TAG 073.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.3A
065
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
all markets
062
CLASS:
USE:
N/A
NAME:
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
ST/LP only: SCVM Chip change prevents Scanner faults at power-up if host is
connected to ESS parallel port. Supersedes TAG 052.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.1A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.4A
TAG:
063
TAG:
066
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
NAME:
N/A
PURPOSE:
NAME:
New Paper Tray Switch Actuators to enable small and A4 size sensing. Supersedes TAG 043.
PURPOSE:
Misfeed sensor location changed on trays 1-4 Upper Guides. Avoids 08-115
faults with 2- or 4-hole paper.
606K06921
KIT NUMBER:
606K07030
REFERENCE:
PL 4.1C
REFERENCE:
PL 4.1A
May 2003
6-141
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
V0.042
N/A
2UP065838, E4E020482
TAG:
TAG:
NAME:
N/A
General Procedures
TAG:
067
TAG:
070
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
USE:
N/A
PURPOSE:
NAME:
Software Upgrade to Version 3.03 (L0.17.1.25). Supersedes TAG 059. Superseded by TAG 068.
N/A
PURPOSE:
Software Upgrade to Version 5.01 (L0.17.4.10). Supersedes TAG 068. Superseded by TAG 073.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
068
TAG:
071
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
USE:
N/A
PURPOSE:
NAME:
Software Upgrade to Version 5.00 (L0.17.3.10). Supersedes TAG 067. Superseded by TAG 070.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 7.1
TAG:
072
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
TAG:
069
CLASS:
USE:
FX only
LVPS change
PURPOSE:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
General Procedures
N/A
NAME:
N/A
Inverter Change
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 6.2A
May 2003
6-142
N/A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
073
TAG:
076
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
NAME:
Software Upgrade to Version 5.03 (L0.17.5.08). Supersedes TAG 061 and TAG
070. Superseded by TAG 074.
KIT NUMBER:
635K06782
REFERENCE:
PL 1.4A
TAG:
074
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
NAME:
635K06784
REFERENCE:
PL 1.4A
The Viewing Label facilitates cleaning the CVT Document Glass, and the Dirt/
Streaks Label reduces the amount of dirt transferred from the document to the
CVT Glass and causing streaks on copies. Each kit contains 6 of each label,
sufficient for 6 machines.
KIT NUMBER:
600K75950
REFERENCE:
PL 3.1
TAG:
077
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
NAME:
Software Upgrade to Version 5.05 (L0.17.6.08). Supersedes TAG 073. Superseded by TAG 086.
KIT NUMBER:
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
600K81900
REFERENCE:
PL 1.4A , PL 1.4B
TAG:
078
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
075
CLASS:
USE:
NAME:
N/A
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
600K67893
REFERENCE:
PL 2.4, PL 1.4B
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 2.1B
May 2003
6-143
N/A
PURPOSE:
Single-Ski Drive-On-Glass Roll Kit. Required for Electronic Hole Removal TAG
296, TAG 080, or TAG 285). Supersedes TAG 060.
PURPOSE:
TAG:
General Procedures
TAG:
079
TAG:
082
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
NAME:
Change HCF stack height NVM, as part of HCF feed performance improvement. 600K75870 also installs TAG H007; 606K07180 also installs TAG H112
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
600K75870; 606K07180
KIT NUMBER:
TBD
REFERENCE:
PL 4.2B
REFERENCE:
PL 1.1A
TAG:
080
TAG:
083
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
Electronic Hole Removal (EHR) for Atlanta Platinum Main Control PWB
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.4B
TAG:
081
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
NAME:
N/A
NAME:
Improved UI flash RAM. New UI Assembly may not be loaded with software
lower than L0.17.5 (V5.03, TAG 073).
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
600K75201
REFERENCE:
PL 6.1A
TAG:
084
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
REFERENCE:
PL 1.1A
General Procedures
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
606K07220
REFERENCE:
PL 2.3
May 2003
6-144
Exit Baffle
PURPOSE:
UI Change
PURPOSE:
N/A
UI Cost-down
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
085
TAG:
088
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
NAME:
600K75202
REFERENCE:
PL 6.1A, PL 6.2C
TAG:
086
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
630K10941
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
087
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
PL 5.1B
TAG:
089
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
Software Upgrade to Version 5.11 (L0.17.8.67). Supersedes TAG 087. Superseded by TAG 288.
KIT NUMBER:
630K10943
REFERENCE:
TAG:
090
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
NAME:
KIT NUMBER:
630K10942
REFERENCE:
N/A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Cost-down. In machines equipped with Exit Baffles (for use with Finishers)
instead of Decurlers, the Decurler Drive Bracket and Decurler Drive Belt are not
required.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 7.1
May 2003
6-145
N/A
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
600K88070
REFERENCE:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
KIT NUMBER:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
Fix incorrect magnetic seal orientation, that was one of many causes of pencilline-like smears.
PURPOSE:
Eliminate the problem of the entrance baffle coming loose in jam clearance,
and interfering with the Inverter Drawer. Supersedes TAG 083.
KIT NUMBER:
NAME:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
NAME:
General Procedures
TAG:
091
TAG:
094
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
NAME:
PURPOSE:
600K88170
REFERENCE:
PL 1.3A, PL 1.3C
TAG:
092
CLASS:
USE:
KIT NUMBER:
630K11383
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
095
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
NAME:
H6E016802, H7E030294
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
Software Upgrade to Version 6.04 (L0.18.1.26). Refer to Bulletin #382. Superseded by TAG 099 .
KIT NUMBER:
630K11384
REFERENCE:
TAG:
096
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
TAG:
093
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
NAME:
PURPOSE:
Screw added, plus center tab height changed to reduce the bow of the bottom
plate.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 6.1A
General Procedures
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
May 2003
6-146
N/A
N/A
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
Monitor Feet
PURPOSE:
Software Upgrade to Version 6.03 (L0.18.1.24). Refer to Bulletin #373. Superseded by TAG 095.
N/A
PURPOSE:
4.5 GB Common Hard Disk Drive installed in the Image Disk location. When
this Tag is present, the same drive can be installed in either the Image Disk
location or the ESS location, provided the correct jumper is removed for the
ESS Disk Drive per the kit instructions.
KIT NUMBER:
NAME:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
097
TAG:
100
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
PURPOSE:
NAME:
New Main Control PWB to resolve image quality problem when Electronic Hole
Removal (EHR) is enabled (TAG 080).
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
600K89760
REFERENCE:
PL 4.1A
101
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
all markets
098
CLASS:
USE:
H6E017455, H7E030294
NAME:
PURPOSE:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
630K11660
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
099
CLASS:
TAG:
102
all markets
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
N/A
PURPOSE:
Software Upgrade to Version 6.08 (L0.18.6.07). Refer to Bulletin #396. Supersedes TAG 095.
KIT NUMBER:
635K09281
REFERENCE:
N/A
NAME:
KIT NUMBER:
630K11661
REFERENCE:
PL 1.4C
May 2003
6-147
PURPOSE:
V0.042
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
TAG:
TAG:
NAME:
N/A
General Procedures
TAG:
103
TAG:
108
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
NAME:
PURPOSE:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.3A, PL 1.3C
TAG:
104
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.5
TAG:
111
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
Eliminate interference between PWS Cable and 480 Document Glass Cover/
Document Output Tray, while maintaining cable commonality with 240/255/265/
460/470.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.2A
KIT NUMBER:
630K12050
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
112
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
TAG:
105
NAME:
CLASS:
PURPOSE:
USE:
XE
N/A
Anti-Flicker Circuitry
PURPOSE:
N/A
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
NAME:
N/A
MSCAM PWB
PURPOSE:
9.1 GB Common Hard Disk Drive installed in the Image Disk location. For
replacing either the Image Disk Drive or the ESS Disk Drive upon failure.
Replaces 50-pin 4.5 GB HDD (with 68 to 50-pin adapter) with a 68-pin 9.1 GB
HDD (with pre assembled 68 to 68-pin terminator). For NLX card cages only.
KIT NUMBER:
NAME:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
604K04250
REFERENCE:
PL 1.5
KIT NUMBER:
606K07440
REFERENCE:
PL 1.2A
General Procedures
May 2003
6-148
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
113
TAG:
119
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
Issues the 07.19.01.503 software to the 460/470 and enables Smart Tray (NF3)
Finisher to run on a 460/470.
PURPOSE:
Adds ground wires and ground clips to IOT interface harness for counterbalance grounding to address ESD problem in DADF.
KIT NUMBER:
604K04250
KIT NUMBER:
604K0xxxx
REFERENCE:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
114
TAG:
120
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
NASG
USE:
all markets
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.5
PURPOSE:
Removes the left side (HCF) interlock in Manufacturing and inserts an inline
splice in its place to address high abort rates.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
122
CLASS:
USE:
All
all markets
115
CLASS:
USE:
N/A
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
N/A
NAME:
TAG:
TAG:
NAME:
N/A
N/A
NAME:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
N/A
May 2003
6-149
N/A
IDE ESS Disk Drive requires different data cable and Riser PWB, and BIOS
v2.91 or higher on the ESS PWB. Upgrading to this configuration is not currently supported. Replace Tag 122 parts with Tag 122 parts only, and replace
non-Tag 122 parts with non-Tag 122 parts only.
General Procedures
TAG:
123
TAG:
128
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
All
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
New interface harness accommodates new decurler that can be used with a
MFF on 470/480/490.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 6.1A
PL 6.2A
TAG:
129
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
TAG:
124
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
131
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
TAG:
125
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
General Procedures
N/A
NAME:
NAME:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
Inverter with metallized Mylar grounding strip and new harness to prevent IIOC
failures due to static discharge.
PURPOSE:
The 330 processor chip on 360 and 860 NLX Main PWBA has gone EOL. Manufacturing will cut-in 860 NLX 331 as the replacement. Field will continue to use
current config on machines w/o this tag due to software and hardware dependencies and reman efforts.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
N/A
May 2003
6-150
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
133
TAG:
140
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
N/A
NAME:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.1A
TAG:
135
TAG:
141
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
N/A
NAME:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
139
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
Intel Flash U6H1 is no longer available and has been replaced with AMD part
with new Bios..
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.3C
TAG:
278
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
PURPOSE:
Intel Flash U6H1 is no longer available and has been replaced with AMD part
with new Bios.
NAME:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 1.3C
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
N/A
ESS PWB
NAME:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
UI Costdown Part
N/A
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this kit is to balance the sump mass in the developer housing.
The modification consisting of a change of three gears will help copy quality
issues in the field.
KIT NUMBER:
604K13680, 604K702
REFERENCE:
PL 5.1B
May 2003
6-151
General Procedures
TAG:
279
TAG:
284
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
N/A
Decurler Kit
PURPOSE:
NAME:
Decurler kit is designed to remove the curl from paper as it exits the IOT. It
works with the Disk Finisher and the MultiFunction Finisher on Document Centre 460/470.
KIT NUMBER:
604K13440
REFERENCE:
PL 6.1D
PURPOSE:
Fixes problem with secure prints spontaneously reprinting 2-3 days after job
submitted. Refer to Bulletin #424.
KIT NUMBER:
630K12150
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
285
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
TAG:
281
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
NAME:
PURPOSE:
604K12840
REFERENCE:
PL 7.1
TAG:
283
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
606K0xxxx
REFERENCE:
N/A
General Procedures
PL 1.4C
TAG:
286
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
May 2003
6-152
N/A
N/A
PURPOSE:
Applies two shims and a stronger nudger roll spring to each of the four paper
drawers. Shims will fix paper side guides in position for specific widths and
NVM values will be adjusted to optimize feed performance.
KIT NUMBER:
606K07430
REFERENCE:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
NAME:
N/A
PURPOSE:
The 40 ppm unique motor is no longer available. The new spare is a DC 265
motor that has been geared down for 40 ppm, and is provided in a kit along with
the required new Developer Drive Belt.
KIT NUMBER:
NAME:
N/A
N/A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
287
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
Software Upgrade to Version 5.22 (L0.17.9.32). Refer to Bulletin #387. Supersedes TAG 288.
KIT NUMBER:
630K10945
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
288
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
Software Upgrade to Version 5.18 (L0.17.9.28). Refer to Bulletin #382. Supersedes TAG 089. Superseded by TAG 287 .
KIT NUMBER:
630K10944
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
289
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
May 2003
6-153
N/A
N/A
PURPOSE:
V0.042
N/A
PURPOSE:
NAME:
N/A
General Procedures
TAG:
290
TAG:
293
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
N/A
USE:
all markets
N/A
N/A
PURPOSE:
NAME:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
291
CLASS:
USE:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
292
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
KIT NUMBER:
REFERENCE:
630K10940
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
294
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
Speed up Donor Roll on High Altitude Developer Housing only (with TAG 297).
Requires minimum Software Version 5.07 (L0.17.8.64, TAG 086).
Reduce 09-318 faults and frequent image quality set-ups. Part of High Altitude
Kit (TAG 297). Not used when L0.17.8.64 (V5.07, TAG 064) software is
installed.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
295
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
PL 5.1B
REFERENCE:
N/A
May 2003
6-154
N/A
TBD
General Procedures
N/A
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
NAME:
KIT NUMBER:
PURPOSE:
NAME:
N/A
N/A
PURPOSE:
TAG:
NAME:
TBD
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
296
TAG:
299
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
USCO only
USE:
all markets
N/A
Electronic Hole Removal (EHR) for Atlanta Gold Main Control PWB
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
606K07132
PL 1.4A, PL 2.4
TAG:
297
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
PURPOSE:
Adds a paper heater for the IOT paper trays. (Also includes components
required to modify the circuitry inside the AC Distribution Panel, if needed.)
KIT NUMBER:
REFERENCE:
PL 1.2B, PL 4.1A
TAG:
300
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
NAME:
PURPOSE:
Resolve Air Breakdown IQ defects at high altitudes (above 4000 ft. or 1300 m).
Requires minimum L0.17.8.64 (V5.07, TAG 086) or higher software and TAG
292 Gears for Developer Housing. (Kit includes Developer Housing with TAG
292 gears.)
KIT NUMBER:
600K71993
REFERENCE:
PL 5.1B
TAG:
298
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
N/A
N/A
NAME:
NAME:
REFERENCE:
NAME:
Adds circuitry to the IOT to provide power for the optional HCF Paper Heater.
(Also includes components required to modify the circuitry inside the AC Distribution Panel, if needed.)
KIT NUMBER:
REFERENCE:
PL 1.2B, PL 4.2A
N/A
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
600K70690
REFERENCE:
PL 6.1A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-155
General Procedures
General Procedures
May 2003
6-156
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
F001
TAG:
F004
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
S/N 6UP147100
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
REFERENCE:
PL 8.5
TAG:
F002
TAG:
F005
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
PURPOSE:
New Finisher Controller PWB (P/N 160K44451 and higher) with redesigned
mounting bracket.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.3
TAG:
F003
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
NAME:
S/N 6UP147213
Set Separator
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.5
TAG:
F006
CLASS:
Safety Guard
PURPOSE:
USE:
S/N 6UP147100
S/N 6UP147213
Set Separator
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
REFERENCE:
May 2003
6-157
General Procedures
TAG:
F007
TAG:
F010
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.3
TAG:
F008
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
S/N 6UP147525
S/N 6UP147213
PURPOSE:
Change to eliminate incorrect profile for first sheet of dual stapled set.
S/N 6UP148073
Tamper Button
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.2
TAG:
F011
CLASS:
USE:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
NAME:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
PURPOSE:
REFERENCE:
PL 8.3
KIT NUMBER:
REFERENCE:
TAG:
F009
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
S/N 6UP147590
Safety Guard
PURPOSE:
Change spring on Safety Guard, P/O Disc Baffle Assembly (P/N 48K72253).
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.3
General Procedures
TAG:
F012
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
Install new Service Tray Assembly (P/N 50K40281) to reduce Tamper Motor
noise.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.5
May 2003
6-158
S/N 6UP147598
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
F013
TAG:
F016
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
All
USE:
All
S\N 6UP152492
PURPOSE:
NAME:
Rework spring to correct pin popping out when offsetting full tray of large paper.
PURPOSE:
New Bales and Cushions (ramps) in Service Tray, to soften Disk Finger "snap."
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.4
REFERENCE:
PL 8.5
TAG:
F014
TAG:
F017
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
All
USE:
All
S/N 6UP148368
PURPOSE:
NAME:
S/N 6UP150301
S/N 6UP150282
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
REFERENCE:
TAG:
F015
TAG:
F018
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
N/A
USE:
FX
N/A
PURPOSE:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-159
S/N 6UP150282
Harness
General Procedures
TAG:
F019
TAG:
F022
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
FX
USE:
FX only
S/N 6UP150282
Harness Dressing
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
F020
TAG:
F023
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
Harness
PURPOSE:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
F021
CLASS:
USE:
FX only
N/A
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
NAME:
S/N 6UP147213
Limit misregistration of large sheet sets. Frame change required, making old
parts obsolete.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.2
TAG:
F024
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
REFERENCE:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
May 2003
6-160
S/N 6UP155563
KIT NUMBER:
General Procedures
S/N 6UP150301
PURPOSE:
NAME:
N/A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
F025
TAG:
F028
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.5
TAG:
F026
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
S/N 6UP204514
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.3
TAG:
F027
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
S/N 6UP154860
NAME:
S/N 6UP206480
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
6UP209078
PURPOSE:
Noise reduction foam added to Disk Baffle (48K72732). Requires TAG F017
Moving Stapler (15K36811).
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
TAG:
F029
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.5
TAG:
F030
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
Added second switch (110E08350) and harness (not spared), to reduce risk of
operators hand being wedged between stack and Disk Baffle as Stacker Tray
raises.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.2.
May 2003
6-161
N/A
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
General Procedures
TAG:
F031
TAG:
F034
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
6UP-749381
PURPOSE:
NAME:
Stapler Lead-In Baffle changed, to avoid interference with the Moving Stapler
staple cartridge that was causing poor stapling.
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.5
REFERENCE:
PL 8.3
TAG:
F032
TAG:
F036
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
6UP-757751
PURPOSE:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
F033
TAG:
F037
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
NAME:
6UP-774056
PURPOSE:
New Top Tray Back Wall, increases Top Tray capacity to 250 sheets
KIT NUMBER:
600K88760
REFERENCE:
PL 8.3
General Procedures
N/A
PURPOSE:
Spacer added between switch and frame, to reduce interference to Disk Shaft
return.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
May 2003
6-162
6UP-795815, NF3-008089
KIT NUMBER:
6UP-783330
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
F040
TAG:
F110
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
606K07470
REFERENCE:
PL 8.5
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
F042
TAG:
F111
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
N/A
NAME:
Stacker Tray
NAME:
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
Different Bail Arms, to increase the possible number of small stapled sets.
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
606K07390
REFERENCE:
PL 8.2
REFERENCE:
PL 8.5
TAG:
F109
TAG:
F112
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
NAME:
N/A
PURPOSE:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
606K07360
This kit cannot be installed with TAG F112 Active Static Eliminator.
REFERENCE:
PL 8.3
606K07472
REFERENCE:
N/A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-163
N/A
To cool sheets exiting from the Finisher, in order to reduce in-set registration
problems due to sticky sheets. This kit also ensures sheets do not go over the
disk fingers.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
Paper Cooling
To reduce static electricity on prints that are output to the Stacker Tray, in dry
conditions where the standard brush (passive) static eliminator is not sufficient.
General Procedures
General Procedures
May 2003
6-164
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
H001
TAG:
H004
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
USE:
all markets
NAME:
New HCF PWB (160K43481) ensures a 6-ream stack will not overload the
motor design.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 4.2B
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
606K06911
REFERENCE:
PL 4.2B
H005
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
all markets
H002
CLASS:
USE:
S/N H4D234816
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 4.2B
TAG:
H003
CLASS:
USE:
N/A
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 4.2B
TAG:
H006
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
A new HCF Paper Feeder to improve paper feeding performance. Install HCF
Feeder Assembly 22K53319 or higher plus TAG H007 kit, and mark off HCF
Tags 5 & 7.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 4.2A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NAME:
S/N H4D513847
PURPOSE:
Manufacturing only
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 4.2B
May 2003
6-165
PURPOSE:
Adds a mylar shield to the HCF/Bypass Tray Feed Motor (7K10011). The shield
guides the HCF Elevator Motor harness so it does not catch on the Feed Motor
bracket as The HCF Tray is lowered which results in an open interlock condition.
S/N H4D237786
TAG:
TAG:
NAME:
HCF PWB
PURPOSE:
NAME:
S/N H4D229421
General Procedures
TAG:
H007
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
KIT NUMBER:
600K75870
REFERENCE:
PL 4.2B
TAG:
H009
CLASS:
USE:
NASG, XE
N/A
PURPOSE:
When motor is replaced, it requires a new HCF PWB on a pre-Tag H009 HCF
due to firmware requirements. PWB can be replaced by itself.
KIT NUMBER:
604K04540
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
H112
CLASS:
USE:
all markets
H4D-52234
N/A
PURPOSE:
HCF Feed Performance Improvement for lightweight paper only. Will reduce
Feed Roll Cartridge life to approximately 40,000 feeds. Kit also installs TAG
079.
KIT NUMBER:
606K07180
REFERENCE:
PL 4.2B
General Procedures
May 2003
6-166
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
M001
TAG:
M004
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
USE:
All markets
Compiler Tray
PURPOSE:
The new tray raises the position of the Set Eject Sensor, S91 allowing the sensor to detect darker tones, reducing the number of 12-128 faults.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.55
NAME:
Not used.
PURPOSE:
Not used.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
M005
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
All markets
TAG:
M002
CLASS:
USE:
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
New baffle added to 4-Bar Exit Drive Assembly to prevent the Compile Belt
from adhering to baffle.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.22A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
M003
TAG:
M006
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
USE:
All markets
NAME:
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NAME:
ESD protection.
N/A
NAME:
PURPOSE:
Warpage of the curl guard enables belts to catch and cause 12-118's as well as
making the Critical Parameter of exit shaft to compile height vary. A tywrap was
added to prevent warpage.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
May 2003
6-167
General Procedures
TAG:
M007
TAG:
M010
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
USE:
All markets
NAME:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
The screw bosses that secure the upper baffle top cover of the 4-Bar
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
M008
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
Assembly and the Nip 9 idler roll crack, allowing the upper baffle assembly
to fail and causing 12-118 compiler entry jams. Installing a new 4-Bar Assembly with this Tag introduces improved screw bosses.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.28
TAG:
M011
CLASS:
NAME:
USE:
All markets
PURPOSE:
Add a bearing and related hardware to 4-Bar Exit Drive Assembly to prevent
curlguard from warping.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
M009
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
NAME:
PURPOSE:
All
For customers who use A4 paper, this setup produces even folds in TriFold jobs.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
GP52
TAG:
M012
CLASS:
R
All markets
NAME:
USE:
PURPOSE:
MFF Version 12.20 Software, part of IOT Software 07.19.05.026 for MFF
launch
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
General Procedures
N/A
NAME:
PURPOSE:
Prevents the Curl Guard Solenoid clip from becoming deformed and falling off
when the solenoid gets hot (during very long single-staple jobs) causing extremenly poor compiling.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.30
May 2003
6-168
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
M013
TAG:
M016
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
USE:
All markets
N/A
NAME:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
Corrects a problem with the middle hole of 3 hole paper catching on the 4-Bar
Position Sensor (S45) flag, causing 12-239 and/or misresgistered sets.
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TBD
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
M017
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
All markets
TAG:
M014
CLASS:
USE:
NAME:
TBD
TBD
NAME:
PURPOSE:
PURPOSE:
Clip on tamper slide drive belt can interfere with the Compile Fingers, causing
12-240 faults.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
N/A
TAG:
M018
R
USE:
All markets
TAG:
M015
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
N/A
NAME:
PURPOSE:
Increase speed of Booklet Paper Path Motor (M60) to prevent low frequency
vibrations which cause a humming sound.
KIT NUMBER:
604K17660
REFERENCE:
PL 8.40
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
N/A
TBD
N/A
NAME:
PURPOSE:
Tri-Fold skew occurs when the Tri-Folder backstop bends/sags since the
inboard side is not supported. This field tag is for a kit that will shim the IB side
of the backstop to minimize and control skew. Superseded by TAG M020.
KIT NUMBER:
604K17650
REFERENCE:
PL 8.51
May 2003
6-169
General Procedures
TAG:
M019
TAG:
M022
CLASS:
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
USE:
All markets
N/A
NAME:
NAME:
PURPOSE:
Decreased tray travel to 2000 to 2100 sheets for 11 inch, 20 lb. paper results in
tray capacity for A4, 80 gsm being marginal. This change removes 5 mm from
the Main Tray Full Sensor (S52) flag feature of the belt clamp. This increases
tray travel enough to satisfy the A4, 80 gsm requirement of 2000 sheets.
IMPORTANT: The TAG M019 belt clamp spared part should not be used in a
pre-TAG M019 machine.
PURPOSE:
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.53, PL 8.54
TAG:
M020
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
PL 8.30
TAG:
M023
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.42
TAG:
M024
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
TAG:
M021
NAME:
CLASS:
PURPOSE:
USE:
All markets
N/A
NAME:
LVPS Shuts-Down when MFF Front Door is open for more than 5 Minutes.
PURPOSE:
LVPS shuts down when MFF front door is open for over 5 minutes. A UI message finisher door open will not change even if the front door is closed. Communication faults will result during this condition. The LVPS will recover only
after POPO manually or automatically with Atlanta reset or power save.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.22A
General Procedures
N/A
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.45
May 2003
6-170
FEC-016033 & UP
PURPOSE:
N/A
PURPOSE:
REFERENCE:
604K16871
REFERENCE:
NAME:
KIT NUMBER:
These new Compiler Belts fix a condition where the belts stick to the drive pulley and bind in the curl guard. The new belts also fix the problem of poor inset
registration caused by tacky belt surfaces.
KIT NUMBER:
NAME:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
TAG:
M027
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
New Drive Shaft for Nip 1 and 2 replaces 022K79721. New shaft has 6mm
outside diameter to prevent breakage.
KIT NUMBER:
604K18550
REFERENCE:
PL 8.37
TAG:
M028
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
N/A
PURPOSE:
New MFF software cut-in for manufacturing. New version 12.53 replaces
12.20.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.22A
TAG:
M029
CLASS:
USE:
All markets
N/A
N/A
PURPOSE:
New tray prevents registration problems due to static build up when running
stapled set.
KIT NUMBER:
N/A
REFERENCE:
PL 8.55
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-171
General Procedures
General Procedures
May 2003
6-172
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Glossary of Terms
Table 1 contains the terms and phrases that are used throughout the Service Documentation.
Table 1 Glossary of Terms
Term
Description
CVT
CW
Term
Description
DADF
A3
DSS
A4
Decurler
A4 Cover
Detack
Corotron
A5
DIAG NAV
Diagnostic Navigator
ACT
DIP Switch
DMM
Digital Multimeter
Dog Ear
DPI
DRAM
EDOC
Electronic Documentation
ELOG
Atlanta PWB
Auditron
B4
B5
EME
Electromagnetic Emissions
BBS
EPC
EPROM
Bit
Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. A ROM that can be erased and then
programmed again with new software.
ESD
BSD
BUS
CBU
ESS
Electronic subsystem
CCW
Executive
CD
Circuit Diagram
CD-ROM
FAX
Charge
Scorotron
CPM
FIC
CQ
FSMA
FWA
CRU
FWA/VBB
CRUM
FX
Fuji Xerox
GSM
HCF
CSE
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-173
General Procedures
Glossary of Terms
Description
Term
Description
HVPS
OEM
Hz
OPCO
Operating Company
IB
P/N
Part Number
P/R
(See Photoreceptor)
PBX system
PFT
IIOC
IIT
Install Wizard
IOT
IPS1
IQ defects
ISDN
Pixel
Document
Glass
IVCM
PO/PO
Power Off/Power On
LAN
POST
LCD
PPM
LE
Lead Edge
PROM
LED
PS
PostScript
Ledger
PTC
PWB(A)
LEF
PWPM
Legal
PWS
Letter
R/E
Reduction/Enlargement
RAM
Random Access Memory. A digital memory circuit from which information can be
accessed or where software information
can be stored.
Letter Cover
LVPS
MFF
Multi-Function Finisher
RAP
Moire
RCM
RDT
RIS
ROM
NOHAD
Read Only Memory. A digital memory circuit that is designed to contain permanent
software information.
NVM
ROS
OB
RS422
TBD
RX
SA
System Administrator
SCAM PWB
MRD
OCT
General Procedures
Glossary of Terms
May 2003
6-174
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Description
SCB
SCSI
SCVM
SEF
SELV
SIMM
Skew
SMH
T and M
Tag Matrix
TBD
TBO
TE
TEER Sensor
TOC
Table Of Contents
UI
User Interface
UM
Unscheduled Maintenance
USCO
VAC
VBB
VCM
VDC
XL
x-reg
y-reg
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
6-175
General Procedures
Glossary of Terms
General Procedures
Glossary of Terms
May 2003
6-176
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
7. Wiring Data
Plug/Jack Locations
Plug / Jack Index.............................................................................................................
Plug / Jack Locations ......................................................................................................
MFF Plug Jack Locations ................................................................................................
PWB Drawings ................................................................................................................
IIOC PWB Locations .......................................................................................................
7-3
7-6
7-27
7-32
7-39
Wirenets
Wirenet Drawings ............................................................................................................
MFF Wirenet Drawings ...................................................................................................
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
7-55
7-111
May 2003
7-1
Wiring Data
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-2
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Locate the source Plug/Jack in the left column of the Index. Select P/J to go to a specific P/J.
Select -+Figure to go to the figure in which the P/J is located.
PJ
Description
Figure
J45
Figure 21
J49
Fuser AC
Figure 3
J59
Figure 20
Figure 3
Description
Figure
A14P1/J80
Decurler IIOC
Figure 4
A1B1P1/J3
Figure 8
J69
A7P1/J75
Figure 4
J81
Inverter IIOC
Figure 3
A8P1/J79
Figure 4
J87A
Figure 21
B1P1/J4
Figure 8
J105
Figure 20
J110
Figure 20
J9/J4
Figure 1
J16/P9
Figure 2
P/J1
B2P1/J2
Figure 8
B2P1/J7
DADFPWB
Figure 6
B4P1/W8A3
Figure 14
B5P1/W3A1
Figure 14
Charge Grid
Figure 3
Charge
Scorotron
Figure 3
Detack
XRU - Detack
Figure 3
Fuse
Figure 20
Figure 5
P/R Ground
Transfer
XRU - Transfer
Figure 3
J1
Moving Stapler
Figure 11
J1
Figure 20
J2
Fixed Stapler
Figure 11
J2
Figure 3
J3
Figure 3
J3
Figure 20
J4
Figure 20
J5
Figure 20
J5
J7
J7
Figure 16
J9
Figure 2
J15
Figure 12
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P/J1
Finisher Communications
Figure 10
P/J1
DADFPWB
Figure 6
P/J2
Figure 1
P/J2
P/J2
DADFPWB
P/J3
P/J3
P/J3
DADFPWB
Figure 6
P/J4
Figure 1
P/J4
Figure 10
P/J4
DADFPWB
Figure 6
P/J5
P/J5
P/J5
Figure 2
P/J5
DADFPWB
Figure 6
May 2003
7-3
Figure 6
Figure 10
Wiring Data
PJ
Description
PJ
Description
Figure
P/J6
Figure 10
Stapler Position Motor,
Retractable Reg. Edge Solenoid, Stapler Position Home
Sensor, and Kicker Home
Sensor
Figure
P/J121
Figure 20
P/J123
Figure 20
P/J6
DADF PWB
Figure 6
P1
Figure 10
P/J7
Figure 1
P2
Figure 17
P2
Figure 18
P/J7
Figure 10
P2
Figure 13
P2
Figure 9
P/J7
Figure 5
P2
Dual Decurler
Figure 19
P/J8
Distribution PWB
Figure 1
P3
Figure 18
P4
Figure 10
P4
Tamper Motor
Figure 11
P4
Figure 18
P5
Pause/Resume Switch
Figure 18
P5
Figure 20
P6
P/J8
IIOC Bus 2
Figure 10
P/J8
Sensor
Figure 5
P/J9
Figure 10
Figure 10
P/J10
Figure 1
P/J11
Figure 1
P/J10
P/J11
P8
Figure 10
P9
Kicker Motor
P10
Figure 11
Figure 7
P11
Figure 7
P12
Figure 7
P13
Figure 7
P14
DADFPWB
Figure 6
Figure 6
P/J12
P/J12
P15
P16
DADFPWB
Figure 6
P/J13
Figure 1
P17
Figure 6
P/J14
Figure 1
P18
P/J15
Figure 1
P/J15
Figure 2
P19
DADFPWB
Figure 6
P/J50
Developer Housing
Figure 9
P20
DADFPWB
Figure 6
P/J55
Figure 3
P21
DADFPWB
Figure 6
P/J74
Preregistration Solenoid
Figure 3
P22
Figure 6
P/J87
Figure 8
P23
Figure 7
P24
Figure 7
TEER Sensor
Figure 3
P25
Figure 6
P41
Figure 1
P/J116
Wiring Data
Figure 1
P6
May 2003
7-4
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
PJ
Description
Figure
PJ
Description
P48
AC Distribution Module - to
Power On Switch
Figure 1
P3/J2
Figure 16
P3/J5
HCF Sensors
Figure 5
Figure 21
P4/J3
Figure 2
P8/J3
Figure 21
P7/J6
Figure 2
P17/A7A5
Figure 9
P60
Xerographic Module - DC
Figure 3
P17/A8A5
Figure 9
P61
Fuser DC
Figure 3
P20/J10
Figure 8
P69
Figure 12
P72
Figure 9
P77
Duplex Decurler
Figure 3
P87
Figure 21
P89
Figure 9
P92
P45
P45A
P21/J1
Figure 8
P25/J5
Figure 8
P26/J6
Figure 8
P28/J8
Figure 8
P29/J9
P31/J11
Figure 8
P42/J2
LVPS
Figure 1
P43/J3
Figure 1
P45/J5
Figure 1
P46/J6
Figure 1
P105
P109
P125
Figure 20
P1/J2
Figure 5
P1/J3
Figure 5
P51/W8A2
Figure 15
P52/W8A1
Figure 15
Figure 16
P53/W8A1
Figure 15
P57/W8A3
Figure 14
P1/J6
Figure 2
P58/W8A4
Figure 14
P1/J6
Figure 5
P62/W3A1
Figure 14
P1/J8
HCF PWB
Figure 5
P64/J301
Figure 1
P1/J8
DADFPWB
Figure 6
P65/J1
Transfer/DetackPS
Figure 8
P1/J13
P66/J1
Transfer/DetackPS
Figure 8
P67/JI
Charge HVPS
Figure 2
P1/J84
Figure 5
P73/W8A4
Figure 14
P2/J1
Figure 5
P83/W3A1
Figure 14
P2/J1
Figure 5
P87/J14
P2/J1
Figure 17
P2/J1
Figure 5
P93/W8A3
Figure 14
P94/W8A5
Figure 3
P2/J7
Figure 2
P97/W8A5
Figure 3
P3/J2
Figure 2
P100/W8A2
Figure 15
P1/J5
Figure 20
Figure
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-5
Wiring Data
Description
Figure
S4
Figure 8
S5
Figure 8
S6P1/W8A4
Figure 14
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-6
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P/J15
P/J14
P/J2
P/J13
P/J1
P64/J301
P41
P48
P/J3
P92
P/J4
P/J10
P46/J6
P45/J5
P/J5
P/J12
P/J11
J9/J4
P43/J3
P42/J2
P/J12
P/J8
P/J7
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-7
Wiring Data
J5
J16/P9
P67/JI
J9
P/J15
P87/J14
P8/J3
P7/J6
P5/J4
P3/J2
P1/J13
P2/J7
P4/J3
P1/J6
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-8
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Transfer
Detack
P/R Ground
P/J74
P94/W8A5
P97/W8A5
J49
P61
P/J55
J3
J2
Charge Grid
Charge Scorotron
P60
P77
P/J116
J81
J69
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-9
Wiring Data
A14P1/J80
A7P1/J75
A8P1/J79
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-10
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P1/J84
P1/J8
P1/J3
P1/J4
P1/J2
P1/J6
P/J8
P3/J5
P2/J1
P2/J1
P/J7
HCF Elevator
Motor Ground
Figure 5 HCF
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-11
Wiring Data
P/J2
P/J1
P16
P21
P18
P15
P20
P25
P1/J8
P/J6
P/J5
P/J3
P/J4
B2P1/
P19
P17
P22
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-12
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P12
P24
P10
P11
P13
P23
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-13
Wiring Data
P65/J1
P21/J1
P66/J1
B2P1/J2
A1B1P1/J3
B1P1/J4
P109
P/J87
S4
P20/J10
P25/J5
S5
P29/J9
P31/J11
P28/J8
J7
P26/J6
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-14
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P72
P/J50
P89
P2
P17/A7A5
P17/A8A5
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-15
Wiring Data
P1
P4
P/J2
P/J3
P/J4
P/J5
P/J1
P/J6
P/J12
P/J7
P/J11
P/J8
P/J10
P/J9
P6
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-16
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P9
J1
P4
J2
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-17
Wiring Data
Finisher/IOT Connector
P2
P69
J15
Stapler Position
Motor
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-18
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P58/W8A4
B4P1/W8A3
P57/W8A3
P73/W8A4
P93/W8A3
S6P1/W8A4
B5P1/
W3A1
P62/W3A1
P83/W3A1
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-19
Wiring Data
P51/W8A2
P52/W8A1
P100/W8A2
P53/W8A1
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-20
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
ESS PWB
J7
P3/J2
P1/J5
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-21
Wiring Data
P2
P2/J1
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-22
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Finisher Front
P3
P5
P4
P2
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-23
Wiring Data
Decurler
P2
Figure 19 Decurler
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-24
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P/J123
J59
P/J121
P125 Connects to J4
J110
P5 Connects to J5
P105
J105
J3
P8
Fuse
P6
J4
J1
J5
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-25
Wiring Data
P45A
J45
P45
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-26
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P-EJT
P/J141
P145
P/J111
P/J126
P145B
May 2003
7-27
Wiring Data
P-STPWB/J-STPWA
P/J92
P573
P/J567
P/J578
P/J565
P/J577
P1
P41
P/J35
P1 (LVPS)
P3
P-STLG/J-STLG
P2
P54
REC 2
REC 1
P/J439
P/J411
P/J256
P/J257
P666
P666A
P666B
P999
P903
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-28
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P411
P203
P201
P202
P403
P101
P103
P102
P410
P401
P404
P402
P406
P405
P407
P408
P400
P409
P6
P302
P4
P5
P2
P1
P301
P303
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-29
Wiring Data
P55
P-EJT-JP
P142
J-EJT-JP
May 2003
7-30
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
P563
P605
P562
May 2003
7-31
Wiring Data
PWB Drawings
Index
Go to the appropriate PWB Drawing:
Wiring Data
PWB Drawings
May 2003
7-32
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
PWB Drawings
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-33
Wiring Data
PWB Drawings
Wiring Data
PWB Drawings
May 2003
7-34
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-35
Wiring Data
PWB Drawings
Wiring Data
PWB Drawings
May 2003
7-36
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-37
Wiring Data
PWB Drawings
Wiring Data
PWB Drawings
May 2003
7-38
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-39
Wiring Data
W8A5
W21A1
Plug/Jack
Input/Output Description
J1/P97
J2/P97
J3/P94
J4/P94
J4/P1
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-40
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-41
Wiring Data
W3A1
W8A3
W8A4
W25A1
Plug/Jack
Input/Output Description
J1/P62
J2/B5P1
J3/P83
J4/P83
Registration Clutch
J1/P57
J2/B4P1
J3/P119
J4/P93
J2/P58
J3/PS6P1
NOHAD Thermostat
J4/P73
J2
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-42
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
DC 255 ONLY
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-43
Wiring Data
W8A1
W8A2
Plug/Jack
Input/Output Description
J1/P52
J2/P52
J3/P53
J4/P53
J1/P51
J2/P51
J3/P100
J4/P100
Fuser Fan
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-44
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-45
Wiring Data
A4A2
Plug/Jack
Input/Output Description
J2/P7
J4/P9
J1/P1
J2/P1
J3/P3
J4/P3
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-46
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-47
Wiring Data
Plug/Jack
Input/Output Description
J1&J2/P1
J3&J3/P2
A7A2
J1&J2/P1
J3&J3/P2
A7A3
A7A4
A7A5
J2/P2
J4/P4
J1/P15
J2/P13
J3/P11
J4/P9
J1&J2/P17
J3/B3P1
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-48
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-49
Wiring Data
Plug/Jack
Input/Output Description
J1&J2/P1
J3&J3/P2
A8A2
J1&J2/P1
J3&J3/P2
A8A3
A8A4
A8A5
J2/P2
J4/P4
J1/P15
J2/P13
J3/P11
J4/P9
J1&J2/P17
J3/B3P1
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-50
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-51
Wiring Data
Plug/Jack
Input/Output Description
A7A1
J1/P13
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-52
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-53
Wiring Data
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-54
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Wirenet Drawings
Introduction
The wirenet drawings in this section show the distribution of all AC and DC voltages, DC
Return voltages, and the IIOC SID/SOD/CLK signals used throughout the Document Centre
240/255/265/460/470 and DocuTech65/DocuPrint65 machines. The wirenet drawings are
designed to interface with the Circuit Diagrams and the RAPs. If a voltage is missing from the
circuit diagram, or you are directed to the wirenet drawings from a RAP, locate the component
that is missing the voltage and follow the circuit back to the source of the voltage or return voltage.
Index
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Figure 54 IIOC Bus 2 and Bus 4 SID/SOD/CLK Distribution (Without Tag F027) 1 of 2
Figure 55 IIOC Bus 2 and Bus 4 SID/SOD/CLK Distribution (With Tag F027) 2 of 2
May 2003
7-55
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-56
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-57
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-58
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-59
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-60
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-61
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-62
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-63
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-64
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-65
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-66
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-67
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-68
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-69
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-70
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-71
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-72
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-73
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-74
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-75
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-76
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-77
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-78
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-79
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-80
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-81
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-82
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-83
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-84
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-85
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-86
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-87
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-88
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-89
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-90
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-91
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-92
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-93
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-94
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-95
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-96
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-97
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-98
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-99
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-100
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-101
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-102
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-103
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-104
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-105
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-106
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-107
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-108
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Figure 54 IIOC Bus 2 and Bus 4 SID/SOD/CLK Distribution (Without Tag F027) 1 of 2
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-109
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
Figure 55 IIOC Bus 2 and Bus 4 SID/SOD/CLK Distribution (With Tag F027) 2 of 2
Wiring Data
Wirenet Drawings
May 2003
7-110
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Index
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-111
Wiring Data
MFF Drawings
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-112
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-113
Wiring Data
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-114
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-115
Wiring Data
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-116
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
MFFWirenetFig6a
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-117
Wiring Data
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-118
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-119
Wiring Data
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-120
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-121
Wiring Data
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-122
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
7-123
Wiring Data
Wiring Data
May 2003
7-124
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
10-3
10-11
10-15
10-17
10-29
10-37
10-51
10-67
10-73
10-87
10-97
10-109
10-111
10-131
10-139
May 2003
10-1
Principles of Operation
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-2
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Machine Overview
Introduction
The Document Centre 240/255/265 consists of a family of products, such as, copiers, printers,
faxes, and multifunction devices. It is designed to provide multiple functionality as one system.
The entire system can provide digital copying, fax, LAN printing and host printing capabilities at
a speed of 40 pages per minute for DC240, 55 pages per minute for DC255 or 65 pages per
minute for DC265.
Bypass Tray
Finisher
Convenience Stapler
Bypass Tray
Convenience Stapler
Finisher
DADF
IOT
High Capacity
Feeder (HCF)
Figure 1 Document Centre 240/255/265
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-3
Principles of Operation
Machine Overview
Principles of Operation is written on a BSD chain by chain basis. This is done because the
Block Schematic Diagrams (BSDs) form a good outline for describing machine operation.
The User Interface (Figure 3) is a soft control-panel consisting of a display unit, plastic overlays, key caps, indicators, and the electronics associated with these components.
The purpose of the User Interface is to provide communication between the user and Machine
Run Control. The User Interface transmits operator commands to Machine Run Control, and
displays messages and graphics in response to commands from Machine Run Control.
User Interface
Principles of Operation
Machine Overview
May 2003
10-4
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Machine Run Control is the electronics and software that controls the operating cycle of the
machine. Machine Run Control receives status information from all subsystems within the
machine and controls the operation of the subsystems. Machine Run Control provides the following major functions:
Start Power provides mechanical drive to various subsystems at required speeds and torque
levels.
Determination of prescans and other subsystem setup requirements, and issuing commands or switching on/off components to accomplish them.
Provide the timing information and sequence instructions to all subsystems during run.
Start Power (Figure 4) consists of two Main Drive Motors, (the Developer Drive Motor, the
Fuser Drive Motor) and the main gear train. These components supply drive to the main copier
subassemblies responsible for paper transport and imaging. Several other subassemblies,
such as the Document Feeder the Paper Trays and the Bypass Tray / High Capacity Feeder,
contain their own drive motors and systems that operate independent of the main drive system.
Figure 3 Drives
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-5
Principles of Operation
Machine Overview
Imaging Chain 6
The Document Feeder (DADF) (Figure 6) feeds one or two-sided documents from a positioned
stack, registers the document on the CVT (Constant Velocity Transport) platen for scanning,
and then removes the document and transports it to the Exit Tray.
The Document Feeder can automatically feed up to 50 documents (up to 75 documents on
Document Centre 460/470), one at a time, across the scanner. The documents can range in
size from 5.5 x 8.5 (A5) to 11 x 17 (A3). The lengths of documents within one set can vary a
maximum of 2 mm.
The scanner scans the document, and the Video Buffer Board combines the optical
image for each scan line into an electrical, analog voltage data.
The SCVM (Scanning Control and Video Module) portion of the Main Control PWB converts the analog video data into digital data.
IPS1area of the Main Control PWB processes the digital data and creates a histogram to
analyze the scanned image and make necessary corrections. It also can perform several
image rendering functions, such as the application of filters, screens, thresholds and error
diffusion.
IPS2 area of the Main Control PWB fine tunes the pixel data and generates laser output
signals which are sent to the ROS Control Module
The RCM (ROS Control Module) converts the laser output signals into rasterized light
pulses for each scan line. It then controls the laser so each line is exposed on the photoconductor, creating an electrostatic image pattern representing the processed video data.
Document Feeder
Principles of Operation
Machine Overview
May 2003
10-6
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Paper Supply provides paper or other copy material such as transparencies to a ready-to-feed
position.
The Paper Transportation (Figure 9) moves paper or other copy material from the selected
paper supply source, positions the material correctly in the Registration Assembly, and sends
the material to the Transfer Assembly to accept the image from the photoreceptor.
The Paper Supply (Figure 7) consists of four Paper Trays. An optional Bypass Tray / High
Capacity Feeder is available to increase the paper supply capacity and to feed special materials such as transparencies and thick paper.
Photoreceptor
Bypass Tray
(Tray 5)
Registration
Transport
Paper Trays 1
through 4
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-7
Principles of Operation
Machine Overview
Charges the photoreceptor so it can be exposed with the document image data to create
a latent electrostatic image on the photoreceptor.
Develops the latent electrostatic image with a process that deposits toner on the charged
image areas.
Transfers the developed image from the photoreceptor to the paper or other copy material. The transport of the material through this area is also included.
Strips the unfused copy from the Photoreceptor so it can be transported to the fusing station.
Cleans the residual toner from the photoreceptor to prepare for the next charging cycle.
Xerographic Module
Principles of Operation
Machine Overview
May 2003
10-8
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Fuser Module
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-9
Principles of Operation
Machine Overview
Finisher
The Offsetting Catch Tray (OCT) (Figure 14) will support printer operation at both 40 and 65
ppm and stack up to 250 sheets of 75gsm paper. It will accommodate paper sizes from A6
(SEF) to 12" x 18" in the weight range of 56 gsm to 203 gsm. Output is stacked face down in
the tray and alternate sets may be offset from one another by 30 mm to provide set separation.
Finisher
Top Tray
Offsetting
Catch Tray
Finisher
Main Tray
IOT
Figure 10 IOT with Finisher
Connectivity - Chain 18
Finisher
The Finisher (Figure 15) is an output device that receives the fused copies and prepares them
for delivery to the operator.
A network interface is a device which allows the machine to communicate on the network. The
Document Centre 240/255/265 ST/LP can be equipped with several different network interfaces to allow it to be connected to various types of networks
The Finisher offers dual stapling capabilities and two output trays. The Main Tray, can accept a
capacity of 2000 sheets, while the other, the Finisher Top Tray, can accept 250 sheets. The
Main Tray and the Offsetting Top Tray offsets the sets so they are separated.
460/470 ESS
The finisher can finish the completed sets by either stapling them or offsetting unstapled sets.
The finished sets are then delivered to an output tray for stacking or offsetting.
9.1 GB, 7200 RPM Wide SCSI-2 System Hard Disk Drive
Integrated 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface Category 5 cable (or better) is required
A maximum of three Finishers can be connected to one machine, with a separate bypass
transport connecting any Mailbox Finisher to another Finisher or to another finishing device.
Principles of Operation
Machine Overview
May 2003
10-10
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Standby Power
Overview
The Standby Power subsystem receives and distributes AC electrical power, and generates
and distributes DC electrical power. This subsystem also contains interlock circuits to monitor
the IOT Front Door and the input and output devices attached to the machine.
Power Switches
The Power On/Off Switch is located on the right side of the machine (Figure 1). This switch is
white in color and is a two-position rocker switch. Pushing the switch actuator towards the rear
switches the power on. Pushing the switch actuator towards the front initiates a controlled
shutdown of the machine.
The Instant Off Switch is located behind the IOT Front Door (Figure 1). This switch is red in
color and is a single-position rocker switch. Actuating this switch results in an immediate
power-off condition of the machine.
NOTE: Using the Instant Off Switch has no detrimental effect on a digital copier, but its use on
printers is discouraged. The ESS needs to be shut down in a controlled sequence, and using
this switch does not allow that sequence to occur.
Instant Off
Switch
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-11
Principles of Operation
Standby Power
AC Power
All AC wiring (except the two wires to the Power On/Off Switch) is located at the rear of the
machine. The AC components are the AC Distribution Panel, the Power On/Off Switch, the
Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS), and the heater rod in the Fuser Module.
DC Power
All DC power is generated by the Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) (Figure 3). The LVPS is
designed to operate satisfactorily within the ranges of 85 to 264 VAC, and 47 to 83 Hz. Therefore, only one LVPS is needed to meet the operating requirements of all OpCos, world-wide.
The LVPS produces five different DC voltages. Those voltages, their distribution from the
LVPS, and their uses are shown in Table 1.
Table 1 LVPS Output Voltages
J4
J6
LVPS
J2, J3
(Distribution J5 (SCAM J7 EPSV
Connector (Card Cage)
PWB)
(IIT) PWB) (FX Only)
+5.15 VDC
+12 VDC
Logic Voltage
-12 VDC
Logic Voltage
+24 VDC
+36 VDC
X
X
Grounds
The ground wire of the AC Input Power Cord is attached to the metal case of the AC Distribution Module.
Distribution PWB
The DC Common (DC Com) return lines for all voltages are connected to a common electrical
bus in the LVPS. The metal case of the LVPS is also connected to that common electrical bus.
An electrical connection between the LVPS and the AC Distribution Module completes the
grounding circuit for the DC Common circuits.
Distribution PWB
Copiers have two power saver modes: a Low Power Mode, and Power Off.
Printers have three power saver modes: Low Power Mode 1, Low Power Mode 2, and
Power Off.
The Distribution Board PWB (Figure 3) plugs in directly to the LVPS. (Wire harnesses distribute
the power from the LVPS to the Card Cage, the IIT, and the SCAM PWB.) DC power is distributed from the Distribution PWB to most other components in the machine, including the IIOC
buses.
The purpose of the power saver modes is to automatically shut down specific outputs of the
LVPS (up to and including complete power off) during periods of inactivity.
Refer to GP20 for a complete explanation of the power saver Modes.
Principles of Operation
Standby Power
May 2003
10-12
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Interlocks
The LVPS outputs of +5.15 VDC and +/-12 VDC are continuously supplied to the Distribution
PWB and the Card Cage whenever power is switched on (and the machine is not in a power
saver mode.) However, the LVPS outputs of 24 VDC and 36 VDC are controlled by interlocks.
The IOT Front Door Interlock Switch has two separate circuits.
One circuit is used by itself to provide a logic signal to the software to inhibit machine
function when the IOT Front Door is opened.
The other circuit is used in series with the left and right side interlock switches to interrupt
the +36 VDC output of the LVPS if either the IOT Front Door is opened, or an input device
or output device is not securely attached to the IOT.
Power Supplies
The Distribution Board supplies +36 VDC to several high voltage power supplies in the
machine. These power supplies are covered in more detail in the information provided for the
Chain to which the specific power supply is applicable.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-13
Principles of Operation
Standby Power
Principles of Operation
Standby Power
May 2003
10-14
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
User Interface
Overview
The User Interface (Figure 1) contains a touch-sensitive LCD display, a hard button panel (a
key panel), and several LED indicators.
The touch-sensitive LCD display and the key panel allow the user to communicate with
the machine software.
The machine provides feedback to the user by displaying various messages in the LCD
display, and by lighting the LEDs.
Feature
Buttons
Touch Screen
Pathway
buttons
Keypad
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-15
Principles of Operation
User Interface
Pathways PWB
The LCDM (Figure 2) is a black and white display, providing up to 16 gray scales at a 640 x
240 pixel resolution. It consists of a touch screen, backlit by a cold cathode fluorescent lamp.
The Pathways PWB (part of the UI assembly) includes 6 switches, 6 LEDs, 6 resistors and a
harness that connects the board to the UI Processor PWB. The switches and LEDs on this
board provide the signals that control different pathways on the Liquid Crystal Display.
The LCDM communicates between the user and the machine control two ways. Light emitting
diodes (LEDs) indicate machine and feature status, while switches activated by keycaps are
used to identify customer selections.
The LEDs and switches are mounted to two PWBs, which are controlled by UI Processor
PWB. This PWB communicates directly with the main machine controls via the Main Control
PWB.
Core PWB
The Core PWB (part of the UI assembly) includes 28 switches, 13 LEDs, 13 resistors and a
harness that connect the board to the Processor PWB. The switches and LEDS on this board
provide controls for the UI system, such as the numeric keypad, start, stop, etc.
Inverter Module
The Inverter module (part of the UI assembly) controls the intensity of the CCFL backlight. The
processor board sends 5 VDC input signals to the inverter, which converts the signals to the
voltage needed to obtain that level from the CCFL. The Processor PWB can also send a signal
to reduce the brightness or shut off the CCFL lamp to increase the life of the CCFL lamp.
Principles of Operation
User Interface
May 2003
10-16
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-17
Principles of Operation
Card Cage
The card cage contains all the machine control and video modules used by the machine. There
are four modules combined into one functional board called the Main Control PWB:
The card cage is mounted to the back of the machine with hinges. This design allows the card
cage to swing open if access is needed to the components located on the machine side of the
card cage.
The power and control signals are distributed from the card cage to machine components via
two power harnesses, two ribbon cables and two video cables. +24 DC power is controlled by
IIOCs. Go to topic IIOC for more information.
Accessory PWB
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-18
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
It communicates with the IIOCs by sending control signals and receiving signals from the
devices.
It communicates with the User Interface through a Serial Command Bus (SCB).
Scanner operations
The SCVM uses a microcontroller to control the operation of scanner components and
servo control for the scanner. It also processes and controls the scanner calibration process.
Video circuit.
The video circuit of the SCVM receives image data from the Full Width Array via the Video
Buffer Board. It then adjusts the video data for the needed analog offset and gain correction as determined by UI selections.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-19
Principles of Operation
SCAM PWB
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-20
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Power Up Self-Test
IIOC
The LCPM and SCVM portions of the Main Control PWB run self-tests of the RAM, FLASH,
NVM and other resources on the PWB at power-up.
IIOC (Integrated Input/Output in a connector) is a low intelligence IC Driver in a single integrated circuit is integrated into a connector. IIOC is the Integrated Input/Output Control bus. It
is a multiplexing communication bus. It provides the ability to accommodate a large amount of
I/O while minimizing the amount of physical wires. This bus has 5 wires, 24V, 24V RET, Clock,
SID, and SOD. The clock supplies a +15 VDC reset pulse followed by 32 +5 VDC pulses, then
a +15 VDC reset pulse to start the cycle over. SID and SOD are + 5 VDC logic level lines for
the input and output respectively. This connector is attached to a five wire BUS that includes
time division multiplexed signals and power.
an external turnaround which tests the IIOC modules, harnesses and inputs/outputs of
electrical components.
Communication Channels
The Main Control PWB communicates over several channels; the UI, SCAM, and RCM (Ros
Control Module). These channels use Universal Asynchronous Receive Transmit circuits or
busses (UARTs) to communicate with the CPU on the Main Control PWB. (MCB).
Serial Input Data (SID) to the module. This can be programmed to provide from 8 to 32
Inputs/Outputs.
Serial Output Data (SOD) from the module. The number of data bits is determined by the
SID.
Synchronous Clock and Frame Pulse signal (CLK). Operation is limited to between
25KHz and 100KHz. The reset pulse is +15 VDC with the clock at +5 VDC.
DC COM
There are four IIOC BUS Controllers on the Main Control PWB
Image
Disk Drive
BUS 0 Controller.
An 03-800 fault code indicates a failure of the Bus 0 Controller Chip on the Main
Control PWB.
An 03-340 indicates the system cannot communicate with IIOC Bus 0. All other IIOC
Buses are functional. This indicates there may be a short circuit in the BUS 0 IIOC
harness.
BUS 1 Controller.
An 03-820 fault code indicates a failure of the Bus 1 Controller Chip on the Main
Control PWB.
An 03-341 indicates the system cannot communicate with IIOC Bus 1. All other IIOC
Buses are functional. This indicates there may be a short circuit in the BUS 1 IIOC
harness.
BUS 2 Controller.
An 03-840 fault code indicates a failure of the Bus 2 Controller Chip on the Main
Control PWB.
An 03-342indicates the system cannot communicate with IIOC Bus 2. All other IIOC
Buses are functional. This indicates there may be a short circuit in the BUS 2 IIOC
harness.
BUS 4 Controller DADF IIOC. Failure of the BUS 4 Controller will generate a 05-331 fault
The signals IIOC BUS x output (SID), IIOC BUS Clock (CLK), and IIOC BUS Reset are generated by the BUS Controllers on the Main Controller PWB and sent to the Distribution PWB.
The Distribution PWB provides the +24 VDC and DC COM for each IIOC BUS, distributes the
SID and CLK signals to each BUS, and passes the Serial Output Data (SOD) from the BUS
back to the BUS Controllers.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-21
Principles of Operation
Each IIOC Module consists of the IIOC Housing, the IIOC PWB, and the Input/Output Connectors (Figure 8). The IIOC Module is connected to the IIOC harness via IDC connectors on the
bottom of the IIOC Housing.
Enable two high current drivers to drive two outputs (solenoid, clutch, motor).
The input state data is sent back via the SOD line to the Main Control PWB.
Within Bus 0, 1 and 2, each IIOC PWB is uniquely controlled by the matrix of pins which touch
the PWB from the IIOC Housing (Figure 9).
Enable two high current drivers to drive two outputs (solenoid, clutch, motor).
Enable one low current driver to drive one output (LED, SSR).
The five large pins in the IIOC Housing make the connection between the IIOC harness
and the IIOC PWB. All five large pins must touch the IIOC PWB.
The seven small pins in the IIOC Housing are the programming pins (Table 1):
The input state data is sent back via the SOD line to the Main Control PWB.
A IIOC in 2 Bit mode has Pin 1 and Pin 2 up (both pins contacting the IIOC PWB)
A IIOC in 3 Bit mode has Pin 1 or Pin 2 up (one pin contacting the IIOC PWB)
Enable two high current drivers to drive two outputs (solenoid, clutch, motor).
Enable two low current drivers to drive two low current output (LED, SSR).
Pin 2 and Pin 3 configure the IIOC for 2 Bit Mode, 3 Bit Mode, or 4 Bit Mode.
A IIOC in 4 Bit mode has Pin 1 and Pin 2 down (both pins not contacting the IIOC
PWB)
See Figure 5 for a layout of a 2 input / 2 output IIOC in 2 Bit, 3 Bit and 4 Bit mode.
Each IIOC module has a unique address, determined by which programming pins (4,
5, 6, and 7) are bent down into the IIOC Housing and DO NOT touch the IIOC PWB.
PWB Contact
Purpose
Gnd
Logic Ground
C2
C1
A4
Address on BUS
A3
Address on BUS
A 4 Output IIOC Module is used for motors that require breaking or are required to run in the
forward and reverse direction. This type of IIOC Module is used for the Tray 1/2 Feed Motor,
the Tray 3/4 Feed Motor, and the HCF/Bypass Tray Feed Motor.
A2
Address on BUS
A1
Address on BUS
Go to Table 2 to view the specific Module # and Pin # combinations for BUS 0
A 4 Input IIOC Module is used for IIOC Module A7A1 (size sensing for Paper Tray 1), IIOC
Module A7A2 (size sensing for Paper Tray 2), IIOC Module A8A1 (size sensing for Paper Tray
3), and IIOC Module A8A2 (size sensing for Paper Tray 4),
IIOC Hardware
There are four IIOC BUS harnesses (the DADF IIOC BUS does not have a dedicated harness).
IIOC BUS 0 is split into IIOC BUS 0 (ES) and IIOC BUS 0. Each IIOC BUS originates at the
Distribution PWB and consists of one or more IIOC Modules. Figure 7 is an example of a typical IIOC harness.
IIOC BUS 0 (ES) - IOT Front Door, Toner Bottle, Toner Dispenser, Xerographic components, Fuser Fan, Card Cage Cooling Fan, LVPS Cooling Fan, NOHAD Thermostat,
Duplex Transport.
Module
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
NOTE: Components on this BUS are energized when the machine is in the Energy Saver
mode.
IIOC BUS 1 - Tray 3/4 Drives Plate, Registration Transport, Inverter, HCF PWB, ROS/
Developer Cooling Fan.
IIOC BUS 4 - DADF. The DADF IIOC PWBs are mounted directly to the DADF PWB
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-22
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Go to Table 3 to view the specific Module # and Pin # combinations for BUS 1.
Table 3 IIOC Housing Pin Connections BUS 1
Module
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
A4A1 (Inverter)
A4A2 (Inverter)
A14A1
W21A1
Improved harness manufacturing cost and quality (fewer wires/more automation, reduces
final line debug time, smaller wire bundles to assemble).
Improved field cost (reduced time to diagnose and repair, reduced unit cost of spared
assemblies).
IIOCs provides fault isolation in the field via diagnostic turnaround tests. These tests can:
Detect if an input load is not connected (if the load is energized in the standby state)
IIOC Diagnostics
There are two types of IIOC Turnaround tests used to diagnose IIOC failures of individual IIOC
Modules:
[Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests], [Type 1] - A Type 1 test failure indicates the energizing voltage through an output component was not sensed by the IIOC PWB. Check
the output components and the associated wiring for an open circuit or a short circuit to
DC COM. If there is no problem with the wiring, the IIOC PWB most likely has failed.
[Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests], [Type 2] - A Type 2 test failure indicates the energizing voltage through the output component was not gated to zero by the IIOC PWB.
Check the output components and the associated wiring for a short circuit across the
load. If there is not a short circuit across the load, the IIOC PWB most likely has failed
Go to Table 4 to view the specific Module # and Pin # combinations for BUS 2.
Table 4 IIOC Housing Pin Connections BUS 2
Module
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
A7A1 (Finisher)
W1A1 (OCT)
[Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests], [IIOC Chain Controller Tests], [Main Controller].
This diagnostic routine tests the BUS 0 Controller, BUS 1 Controller and BUS 2 Controller
on the Main Controller PWB.
[Self Tests tab , IIOC Controller Tests], [Serial Controller Tests], [IIT]. This diagnostic routine tests the BUS 4 Controller on the Main Controller PWB.
Two +5VDC power supplies for driving sensors or external low power logic.
WDT (watch dog timer) - detects whether or not the reset/framing pulse is being
received, the clock is being detected, and the chip logic is generating address detection
TCO (thermal cutout) - protects the chip from excessive temperatures such as those
caused by excessive loads.
SCP (short circuit protection) this is provided for the four output drivers as well as the
SOD driver and the +5 VDC output driver.
Reduced wire harness cost (minimizes number and size of connectors, minimizes PWB
to component wiring, minimizes power supply to PWB wiring).
Reduced electronics cost (reduced power supply requirements, enables lower EME, minimizes spare I/O requirements).
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-23
Principles of Operation
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-24
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-25
Principles of Operation
IIOC Harness
SID
SOD
CLK
+24 VDC
DC COM
Micro
Switch
DC Motor
Solenoid
Sensor
IIOC
Module
Solenoid
LED
DC Motor
IIOC
Module
Push Button
Switch
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-26
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Chip
IIOC PWB
I/O Connector
These pins connect the IIOC harness
to the IIOC PWB.
IIOC Harness
IIOC Housing
IDC Connector
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-27
Principles of Operation
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-28
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Start Power
Developer Drive
Motor
Introduction
The Start Power starts the machine operation after the Start button is pressed. The Mechanical
power for this chain consists of the Developer Drive Motor, the Fuser Drive Motor and the
related Drive Control circuits which provide machine timing.
+36 VDC
ENABLE
+5 VDC (ES)
ENABLE
The Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) supplies +36 VDC and 36V RET (DC COM) directly to
the Servo Control and Analog Module (SCAM) PWB. When the Front Door Interlock Switch,
the Left Side Interlock Switch, and the Right Side Interlock Switch are closed, the signal, IOT
Interlocks Closed (H) +24 VDC is sent to the LVPS. This signal enables the generation of +36
VDC.
NOTE: TAG 114 is a 460/470 manufacturing tag that removes the Right Side Interlock Switch
and inserts an inline splice in its place.
TAG 120 is a 460/470 manufacturing tag that removes the Left Side Interlock Switch and
inserts an inline splice in its place.
Fuser Drive
Motor
SCAM PWB
Figure 1 SCAM PWB Developer Drive Motor and Fuser Drive Motor
The +5 VDC (ES) and 5V RET (DC COM) are supplied to the SCAM PWB by the LVPS via the
Distribution PWB. The ENABLE signal and the PWM signal for the drive motors are generated
by the SCAM PWB.
See Figure 1 for the location of the SCAM PWB, the Developer Drive Motor, and the Fuser
Drive Motor
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-29
Principles of Operation
Start Power
The mechanical power of the machine is provided by two main drive motors, the Developer
Drive Motor and the Fuser Drive Motor. These motors supply drive to the main gear train,
which drives the following paper transport and imaging subassemblies.
Developer Drive Motor
The Developer Drive Motor supplies drive to components on the left side of the machine:
Vertical Transport
Registration Transport
Duplex Transport
Developer Housing.
The remaining subassemblies contain separate motors and drive systems that operate independent of the main drive motors and gears. These subassemblies include the Document
Feeder, the Paper Trays, the Bypass/High Capacity Feeder (Bypass / HCF) and the Photoreceptor Drives.
Developer
Drive Belt
Developer
Gear Bracket
Principles of Operation
Start Power
May 2003
10-30
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Decurler
Inverter
Exit Rollers
Fuser Assembly
Decurler
Drive Belt
Decurler/OCT Drive
Bracket
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-31
Principles of Operation
Start Power
Decurler/OCT
Drive Belt
Duplex
Module
Developer Drive Motor
Pre Fuser
Transport
Decurler/OCT
Drives
Photoreceptor
Drive Module
Fuser
Preregistration
Transport
Cleaner
Photoreceptor
Drive Motor
Start Power
May 2003
10-32
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Decurler/OCT
Drive Belt
Duplex
Module
Developer Drive Motor
Pre Fuser
Transport
Decurler/OCT
Drives
Photoreceptor
Drive Module
Fuser
Preregistration
Transport
Cleaner
Photoreceptor
Drive Motor
May 2003
10-33
Principles of Operation
Start Power
Motor Off
Voltage
Motor On
If the load on the motor increases, the motor on time (% duty cycle) is increased to maintain
the motor at a constant velocity.
Time
2.
3.
If all three motors were energized at the same time, the current demand would exceed the
capacity of the Low Voltage Power Supply, causing it to shut down.
Principles of Operation
Start Power
May 2003
10-34
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Motor Speed
40 PPM machines
Motor velocity is adjusted based upon a pre-set ROS rpm timing parameter hallPeriodRef.
The NVM value for hallPeriodRef and the NVM value MotorVelocityAdjustment are used to
ensure the Photoreceptor belt is at the correct speed. The Developer Drive Motor speed and
the Fuser Drive Motor speed must be adjusted proportionally to the speed of the Photoreceptor
Drive Motor.
Tips:
CAUTION
To correctly tension Developer Drive Motor or Fuser Drive Motor, you must follow the procedures exactly as written. Performing belt tensioning with the developer housing
engaged can cause a bound developer housing since an excessive amount of material
will be deposited on the developer rolls when turned at a low rate of speed. Should this
occur - you will need to replace the developer housing
CAUTION
A saturation fault is usually an indicator there is a binding of a component driven by the motor.
CAUTION
You should never unplug servo motors while the power is on (even if the interlock is
open). Since 5VDC is always at the motor, you may damage the motor unless the power
is off. Typically a damaged motor will appear bound up or the encoder will no longer function.
The approved lubricant for plastic gears and plastic to metal contact areas is 70P81 - Dow
#44. Other lubricants may cause deterioration of the plastic.
The fuser motor runs approximately 30 seconds every 20 minutes. This is normal and is
necessary since the fuser nip never releases. Without this, the pressure roll and fuser
rolls could fuse together.
Gradual load increases (i.e. contaminated idlers- etc.) will cause saturation type faults
whereas hard load faults (i.e. bound drives) will generally result in encoder faults.
A motion system hardware fault is usually an indicator the motor has stalled or voltage to the
motor has been interrupted.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-35
Principles of Operation
Start Power
Principles of Operation
Start Power
May 2003
10-36
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Document Transportation
Document Input
Tray Side Guides
Overview
The Document Feeder feeds one or two-sided documents from a positioned stack, moves the
document across the scanner and then transports the document into the Document Output
Tray. The Document Feeder can automatically feed up to 50 documents (up to 75 documents
for Document Centre 460/470), one at a time, across the scanner. The documents can range in
size from 5.5 x 8.5 (A5) to 11 x 17 (A3). The lengths of documents within one set can vary by
a maximum of 2 mm.
The Document Feeder (Figure 1) can feed either one-sided or two-sided originals. When twosided originals are copied, the front (top) side is copied first. The originals are then turned over
and returned to the platen for scanning of the back side. The originals are then turned over a
second time so they return to their original orientation. The original is then exited to the Document Output Tray.
Document
Input Tray
All scanning is accomplished using a 1 to N sequence. This means that the first page fed and
scanned is the first page copied
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-37
Principles of Operation
Document Transportation
DADF PWB
Principles of Operation
Document Transportation
May 2003
10-38
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
When the Document Feeder is closed, a magnet located in the Scanner Main Cover actuates
the reed switch in the DADF Interlock Switch (Figure 5). This sends a low signal to IIOC 2 on
the DADF PWB. This signal indicates a ready condition and allows power to be supplied to the
Feed and CVT Motors. If the switch is not actuated, a high signal is generated indicating the
Document Feeder is raised. This removes power to the motors and generates a 05-310 error
code if the condition occurs during the copy cycle.
Document Feeder
Top Cover Sensor
DADF Interlock
Switch
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-39
Principles of Operation
Document Transportation
Document Feeding
The Retard and Feed Rolls separate the top sheet from the document input stack, and feed it
into the paper path. The document is then transported to the CVT Platen by the Takeaway
Rolls, Registration Rolls and Pre-CVT Rolls. While the document is transported, it is detected
by several sensors. A Registration Gate also aligns the document at the Registration Rolls.
The CVT Rolls drive the document at a constant velocity across the CVT Platen, where the
image is scanned. Then, the Exit Rolls transport the document into the Output Tray.
Figure 5 shows the relative positions of the document feed components. These components
are discussed in more detail on the following pages.
During duplex operation, the operation is slightly different. After the first side is scanned and
the document begins to exit into the Output Tray, the Exit Rolls reverse rotation. This causes
the document to invert and return through the paper path so the second side can be scanned.
Finally, the document is inverted again to return it to the original orientation, and sent through
the paper path a third time. This time, no scanning occurs and the document exits into the Document Output Tray in its original orientation.
Document
Loaded Sensor
Registration Gate
Sensor
Paper Feed
Roll Cartridge
Document Output
Tray
DADF Exit/Invert
Sensor
Principles of Operation
Document Transportation
May 2003
10-40
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
DADF Feed
Motor
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-41
Principles of Operation
Document Transportation
Actuator for
Input Tray
Sensor 2
Document Input
Tray Side Guides
Two side guide sensors determine the front to back size of the document. The sensors detect a
flag mounted to the bottom of each movable guide. As the guide moves, the flag blocks and
unblocks the sensors. The feeder uses the signals from both Side Guide Sensors to determine
the front to back paper size.
The state of the two Input Tray sensors, Input Tray Sensor 1 and Input Tray Sensor 2, is controlled by 2 actuators located in the Document Input Tray (Figure 7). These sensors determine
the size of the document in the process direction. If document is placed on top of an actuator,
the actuator depresses and the state of the sensor changes. The document may actuate none,
one or both of the actuators. The combined state of both sensors and the NVM setting determines the process direction size of the paper.
Actuator for
Input Tray
Sensor 1
Figure 7 Input Tray Sensor Actuators and Document Input Tray Side Guides
Principles of Operation
Document Transportation
May 2003
10-42
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOTE: These sizes are present in the paper handling matrix but are not comprehended here:
5x7, B6 (128x182mm), 12x18
Input Tray Sensor 2
Input Tray
Sensors (Slow
Scan)
Possible paper
Size
Side Guide
Sensors (Fast
Width Length
Scan)
(mm) (mm)
(Fast (Slow Sensor Sensor
Scan) Scan) 1
2
A5 (SEF)
5.5x8.5 (SEF)
148
140
210
216
hi
hi
hi
hi
6x9 (SEF)
B5 ISO (SEF)
B5 (SEF)
7.25x10.5 (SEF)
152
176
182
184
229
250
257
267
lo*
lo*
lo
lo
hi
hi
hi
hi
8.5x5.5 (LEF)
A5 (LEF)
216
210
140
148
hi
hi
hi
hi
8x10 (SEF)
8x10.5 (SEF)
8.27x10.63 (SEF)
8.46x10.7 (SEF)
8.46x10.83 (SEF)
8.5x11 (SEF)
9x11 (SEF)
9x12 (SEF)
A4 (SEF)
8.46x12.4 (SEF)
203
203
210
215
215
216
229
229
210
215
254
267
270
273
275
279
279
305
297
315
lo
lo
lo
lo
lo
lo
lo
lo
lo
lo
hi
hi
hi
hi
hi
hi
hi
hi
hi
hi
8x13
8.27x13
8.5x13
8.5x14
203
210
216
216
330
330
330
356
lo
lo
lo
lo
lo
lo
lo
lo
B5 ISO (LEF)
B5 (LEF)
10x8 (LEF)
10.5x7.25 (LEF)
10.5x8 (LEF)
11x8.5 (LEF)
250
257
254
267
267
279
176
182
203
184
203
216
hi
hi
hi
hi
hi
hi
hi
hi
hi
hi
hi
hi
11x9 (LEF)
279
229
hi
hi
SB4 (SEF)
B4ISO (SEF)
B4 (SEF)
11x17 (SEF)
252
250
257
279
358
353
364
432
lo
lo
lo
lo
lo
lo
lo
lo
A4 (LEF)
297
420
hi
hi
A3 (SEF)
297
420
lo
lo
hi
lo
lo
hi
hi
hi
lo
lo
Factory Default
Size by OPCO
Sensor Sensor
1
2
USCO XCL XL FX
*These will detect only if the paper zone is set to a special size.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-43
Principles of Operation
Document Transportation
Document Loaded
Sensor
DADF Registration
Gate Sensor
Principles of Operation
Document Transportation
May 2003
10-44
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
DADF Exit/Invert
Sensor
CVT Start of
Scan Sensor
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-45
Principles of Operation
Document Transportation
Document Feeding
When the Document Feeder (Figure 11) is ready to begin the feed cycle, the Nudger Solenoid
and DADF Feed Clutch energize:
The Nudger Solenoid moves the Nudger Roll against the stack of documents and unlocks
the Input Gate, so that it moves out of the way (Figure 12).
The DADF Feed Clutch engages and the DADF Feed Motor energizes. This supplies
drive to the Feed Roll which transfers drive to the Nudger Roll gear train.
A semi-active Retard Roll provides the nip for the Feed Roll. The Retard Roll contains a wrapspring slip clutch, which develops slip torque as documents feed. When a single sheet is in the
nip, the motion of the Drive Roll drives the Retard Roll in the feeding direction. When two
sheets are fed into the nip, however, the torsion spring unwinds, causing the Retard Roll to
reverse direction and push the lower sheet back towards the stack (Figure 12).
The Feed Clutch serves as a drive coupling and is only engaged at zero velocity. The
clutch disengages when the document arrives at the Input Tray Exit Sensor.
Feed Roll
Nudger Roll
DADF Inverter
Clutch
DADF Exit
Clutch
Retard Roll
Nudger Solenoid
Principles of Operation
Document Transportation
May 2003
10-46
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The Feed Roll drives the document until it reaches the Takeaway Rolls and the Input Tray Exit
Sensor detects the leading edge of the document. Refer to Figure 13. The following will occur:
The Nudger Solenoid deenergizes, which cause the Nudger Roll to release and the Input
Gate to lower. This prevents more paper from feeding.
The Registration Gate Solenoid energizes, lowering the Registration Gate into the paper
path at the Registration Rolls.
After a short timing window, the Feed Clutch deenergizes, removing drive from the Feed
Rolls.
Takeaway
Roll Idler
Input Tray
Exit Sensor
Now, the Takeaway Rolls have full control of the document and drive it to the Registration
Gate. When the leading edge reaches the Registration Gate Sensor (Figure 14), two things
occur:
A timing window begins while the document registers against the gate to remove skew by
producing a buckle in the document. When the timing window expires, the Registration
Gate Solenoid deenergizes to raise the gate. The registered document can now continue
moving through the feed path.
The Exit Clutch energizes, providing forward drive to the DADF Exit Rolls. The DADF Exit
Rolls receive drive from a dedicated belt driven by the CVT Motor.
Takeaway
Roll
DADF Exit
Rolls
Figure 13 Cross Section View of a Document at the Input Tray Exit Sensor
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
DADF Registration
Gate
Registration
Gate Sensor
Registration
Roll
May 2003
10-47
Principles of Operation
Document Transportation
Document Exit
The document continues until the lead edge is detected at the CVT Start of Scan Sensor (Figure 15). This signal starts the scanning operation. The CVT Motor drives the Right-CVT Roll,
which transports the document to the CVT Drive-on Glass Roll, which rotates above the Image
Module for scanning. The document continues to the Left-CVT Rolls. Since the rolls driving
the document are controlled by the same timing belt and the CVT servo motor, the velocity of
the paper is constant.
During a one-sided copy job, the Left-CVT Roll transports the document past a passive
diverter, causing the DADF Inverter Gate to move up. After the document passes, the DADF
Inverter Gate drops down. The document then continues past the DADF Exit/Inverter Sensor to
the DADF Exit Rolls and into the Document Output Tray (Figure 16). The signal from the DADF
Exit/Inverter Sensor is used for jam detection purposes only during the simplex operation.
CVT Drive on
Glass Roll
DADF
Exit Roll
Right CVT
Roll
Left CVT
Roll
DADF Exit/
Invert Sensor
CVT Start of
Scan Sensor
Principles of Operation
Document Transportation
May 2003
10-48
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Now, the invert operation begins. The Exit Clutch deenergizes, uncoupling the DADF Exit Roll
from the CVT Motor. The Inverter Clutch energizes, applying reverse drive from the gear train
of the Feed Motor. This causes the DADF Exit Rolls to reverse rotation and transport the document back to the DADF Inverter Gate. The DADF Inverter Gate, which is now in the down position, diverts the document into the inverter path until it reaches the Takeaway Rolls (Figure 18).
The document continues through the normal feeder path.
After the second side is scanned, the document re-enters the invert path and makes a third
pass through the document feeder. This time, however, the image is not scanned and the document exits into the Document Output Tray in its original orientation.
Takeaway Roll
Document
Output Tray
DADF Exit/Inverter
Sensor
DADF Exit/Inverter
Sensor
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-49
Principles of Operation
Document Transportation
IIOC Turnaround Test: Used to test the electrical integrity of the Feed Clutch, Exit Clutch,
Inverter Clutch, Reg. Gate Sol., and Nudger Solenoid.
Exit Clutch and Inverter Clutch: This tests utilizes drive from the Feed motor and encoder
feedback from the CVT motor to test the Exit and Inverter Clutches and the related drive
belts.
Feed Clutch and Nudger Solenoid: This tests utilizes drive from the Feed motor and
encoder feedback from the feed motor to detect load conditions when the Feed Clutch or
the Nudger Solenoid is engaged.
DADF Registration Gate Solenoid: This test should be used after first passing the electrical test in the IIOC test. This test will only catch gross mechanical failures of the Registration gate
This routine will display a graphic representation of time. The available graphs are as
listed below. Min., Max and nominal times should be available in later versions of PWS
software.
LE @ Q1,Q2,Q3 or Q4
Time over Q2,Q3 or Q4
All
This test provides a one time only test until the screen is reset. This can be used for a
quick test of the sensors, but component control - with numerous actuations possible,
should be used for troubleshooting most sensor problems, particularly intermittences.
Note that many of the sensors can be interchanged with another sensor, of the same part
number, for troubleshooting purposes.
This routine is used to set IIT magnification and CVT speed (thereby setting CVT magnification in the slow scan direction). The first portion of this test tells the machine the location of the platen surround and attains a precise measurement of the piece of paper. The
second portion of this test utilizes that same sheet of paper and paper of the same size, to
set CVT speed (therefore magnification).
Principles of Operation
Document Transportation
May 2003
10-50
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
In the Document Feeder mode, the Image Module remains in one fixed position while the
Constant Velocity Transport (CVT) in the Document Feeder transports the document over
the platen.
In the Manual Platen mode, the document remains in a fixed position on the platen, while
the Image Module moves across the platen.
In the Calibration mode, the Image Module movement is controlled by the copier. During
this mode, values such as the Start of Scan (SOS) positions are determined.
Frame
Scanner Components
The Scanner consists of five subsystems: (Figure 1)
Image Module Optics - illuminates and focuses the image onto the Full Width Array.
Full Width Array - acquires the image information and sends it to the Video Buffer
Boards (VBB) video/control circuits.
Video Buffer Board Control Circuitry - receives analog image data from the Full Width
Array and converts it into digital image data.
Drive - (not shown in Figure 1) moves the Image Module when needed
Image Module
Optics
Video Buffer
Board
Full Width
Array
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-51
Principles of Operation
Reflector
Lamp
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-52
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-53
Principles of Operation
Projection System
The projection system uses a platen and a lens to focus the document image on the full width
array.
Lens
The lens is self-focusing and contains a two-row, full-width, gradient-index array, with a
surface of 482 mm (Figure 4). The lens magnification is not affected by changes in height
above the platen (however, focus is affected). This feature provides equal magnification of
flat and raised objects (like books). During the scanning process, the lens magnifies the
image very slightly and projects it onto the full width array.
Lens
Figure 4 Lens
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-54
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
40-Pin Connectors
Image Sensors
The image sensors are contained within 20 chips mounted end to end on the ceramic circuit
board. Each chip covers 400 pixels per inch. This provides a total of 4,960 pixels on an imaging
surface of 315 mm (12.4 in.). The sensors on each chip are approximately 1/400 in. square
(this is why the scanner scans at 400 X 600 instead of 600 X 600).
A glass filter covers the full width array so the projected image is focused directly on the sensors.
Full Width Array Circuit Board
Each chip communicates via its own channel to the Full Width Array circuit board. This ceramic
board transforms the originals image into an electronic, analog signal that is transmitted over
two, 40-pin connectors to the Video Buffer Board. The chips send pixel data for one scan line
at a time.
Glass Filter
Image
Sensor
Pixel 1
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-55
Principles of Operation
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-56
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Video Electronics
The video electronics receive the analog images from the Video Buffer Board and amplify,
sample and hold, calibrate and convert the data into 8-bit, digital image data. This image
data describes a 600 dpi image.
The SCVM transmits the 8-bit image data to the IPS1. The IPS1, which is also part of the
Main Controller Board, then generates image processing signals and transmits them to
the ROS.
Control Electronics
The control electronics provide signals that move the Image Module, regulate the illumination, calibrate the video circuits, and control the Document Feeder. They also generate
timing signals, such as the start of image, scanner ready, etc.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-57
Principles of Operation
Frame
The scanner frame (Figure 7) is an enclosed unit that mounts the scanner components and
provides the mechanical interface to the copier. It also sets up and maintains the optical alignment and focus, ensures correct registration of the Image Module (IM) to the document, prevents stray light / contamination from reaching the image sensors and positions the IM
correctly against the platen.
Spacers
Capstan
Illumination
Lamp Module
Image Module
Start of Scan
(SOS) Sensor
Drive Cables
(wire cable)
Figure 8 Spacers
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-58
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
AGC Patch
The Image Module (IM) includes an Automatic Gain Control (AGC) tab on the IM above the last
outboard pixel of the full width array. This white reference patch provides a signal reference for
the video control system.
Scan Carriage
Motor
The video control system monitors the signals generated by the last pixel as it scans the AGC
tab during a normal scan operation. It then averages the last 16 signals, and compares the
average to a reference value to determine any changes in illumination. If a change is detected,
the video control system adjusts the gain of the video signal to maintain a uniform output signal
level.
Calibration Strip
A white calibration strip is located at the left side of the platen, under the platen bezel. This strip
stretches from the front to the back of the bezel, providing a scannable area for the full width of
the Image Module Array.
The calibration strip provides a uniform reference for the video control system, which uses it to
calibrate the video data. Calibration is necessary because tolerance variations in the scanner
may result in different video data. The calibration procedure scans the calibration strip, compares the signals to the reference values, and then calculates a calibration value to ensure
consistent video data.
Scanner Drive
The Scanner includes only one motor, the Scan Carriage Motor. This motor is controlled by a
driver which receives input from the SCVM portion of the Main Control PWB to coordinate
motor operation with the scan operation (Figure 9).
The motor uses a belt and pulleys to transfers drive to the capstan. The capstan then uses two
wire-cables and a system of pulleys to move the Image Module.
The operation of the Scan Carriage motor varies, depending on the required scan mode. See
the following pages for a detailed description of the Scan Carriage motor operation for each
scan mode.
Wire Cables
Timing Belt
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-59
Principles of Operation
Scanning Operations
Analog Image data is collected, converted into digital data and sent to the ROS for imaging.
At the end of the cycle, the scanner lamp deenergizes. The Image Module remains in the
CVT position.
Power-Up
When the main power is turned on, the scanner initializes its components and prepares for
scanning. This process requires that the following operations occur:
Warm-Up
Power is supplied to the lamp heater and fan. The Scan Carriage motor energizes and
moves the Image Module to a position between the CVT position and the left edge of the
CVT platen. (This position, called the lamp warm up location, prevents the lamp illumination from being visible during the power-up sequence). The lamp profile software checks
for lamp stability as it reaches the desired operating temperature.
The normal scanning speed is 40 or 65, A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 in. documents per minute, depending
upon the model. The scanning speed can vary, however, if enlargement of the document is
required, see the following table for the approximate changes in scan speed based on reduction or enlargement requirements.
Table 1 Document Feeder Scan Mode Speeds
Reduction/Enlargement
Requirements
Scan Speed
25 - 100%
full speed
Calibration
101 - 200%
half speed
The scanner enters the calibration mode. During this process, the Scan Carriage motor
moves the Image Module to the calibration strip, the lamp illuminates and a video image
of the white calibration strip is projected onto the full width array. The video control electronics analyze these signals and calculate pixel offset and gain values. At the end of the
calibration, the Scan Carriage motor moves the IM to the CVT position at the right edge of
the scanners travel.
Self Test
The copier runs several self tests to check the scanner readiness. These checks include
the movement of the Image Module, the operation of the Start of Scan (SOS) sensor,
etcetera.
Ready
The lamp and the Scan Carriage motor deenergize. The Image Module remains at the
CVT position unless the DADF is raised off the platen. This action initiates a preparation
for a manual platen job. The Image Module moves to the left of the manual platen and
awaits a start scan request.
The cycle begins when documents are present in the Document Feeder, and the Document Feeder is closed.
The Constant Velocity Transport of the Document Feeder moves the document over the
Image Module.
Electronic edge detection signals tell the full width array when to start and stop collecting
image data from good quality, white border documents. For other documents, the software calculates the expected arrival and departure time based on the Input Tray switch
settings and the width detected by the CVT sensor.
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-60
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Calibration Mode
In the manual scan mode, the Image Module moves while the original remains in a fixed position on the platen. This mode handles scanning of books, oversize originals and fragile documents. The manual scan mode is initiated when the Document Feeder is opened.
In the calibration mode, the Image Module moves back and forth under the calibration strip
while the lamp cycles on and off. The video control circuitry then compares the signals to a reference, and calculates a calibration correction value. This process compensates for tolerance
variations within the scanners components.
The Image Module moves from the default CVT position to the platen start-of scan-position at the left edge of the manual platen. During this operation, called retrace, the Scan
Carriage motor energizes and moves the Image Module slowly at first, and then at full
velocity until the Image Module activates the Start of Scan (SOS) sensor.
The Scan Carriage motor ramps down to stop the Image Module, and then reverses
direction.
At the START print signal, the scanner lamp energizes and the Scan Carriage motor
ramps up until the Image Module reaches scan velocity. This must occur before the Image
Module deactivates the SOS sensor.
IPS1(part of MCB) uses the change in SOS state and the carriage position to determine
when to start and stop the collection of image data.
Image data is collected, converted into digital data and sent to the ROS for imaging.
Scanning begins at the upper, left corner of the platen and covers the same area as the
paper in the selected tray.
The Image Module continues moving at the scan velocity until the scan is complete.
The motor ramps down to stop the Image Module, then reverses direction.
The retrace function is repeated to return the Image Module (IM) to the platen start-ofscan (SOS) position.
Additional manual scans will start from the platen start-of scan position. If a START print
signal is not received within a predetermined time (about 90seconds), the Scan Carriage
motor returns the IM to the CVT position.
The normal scanning speed is 40 or 65, A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 in. documents per minute, depending
upon the model. The scanning speed can vary, however, if enlargement of the document is
required. See the following table for the approximate changes in scan speed based on reduction or enlargement requirements.
Table 2 Manual Scan Mode Speeds
Reduction/Enlargement
Requirements
The calibration mode is automatically initiated during the power-up sequence of the copier.
Calibration is also performed at predetermined time intervals when the copier is running. If the
time interval expires during a job, the copier waits until the job is complete before entering the
calibration mode. The operator or service representative can also initiate the calibration mode
when needed.
Calibration Sequence
The following events occur during the calibration mode:
The Image Module begins in the CVT position. Before calibration can start, the Image
Module must move to the calibration strip located to the left of the SOS sensor. This operation is similar to the retrace operation in the manual scanning mode, except the Image
Module does not stop when it reaches the SOS sensor.
The Scan Carriage motor energizes and moves the Image Module slowly at first, and then
at full velocity until the Image Module activates the Start of Scan (SOS) sensor.
The Scan Carriage motor reduces the speed of the Image Module and moves it slowly
until it reaches the calibration strip.
The Scan Carriage motor oscillates to move the Image Module back and forth while the
lamp is cycled on and off. This continues until all the calibration data is collected.
The oscillation allows the video control circuitry to calculate the calibration correction values while it collects data from the calibration strip. It also ensures that random samples
are considered during the calibration.
When calibration is complete, the Scan Carriage motor moves the Image Module back to
the CVT position.
Since the full calibration procedure is time-consuming, both a full and partial calibration are
used to calibrate the machine during operation. The calibration sequence is the same for both
processes, but the partial calibration does not calculate all the algorithms. Instead, it performs
a fast, incremental calibration algorithm.
Scan Speed
25 - 100%
full speed
101 - 200%
half speed
201 - 400%
quarter speed
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-61
Principles of Operation
Image Processing
The IPS1(part of the Main Control PWB) receives 8-bit digital image data from the scanners
SCVM (also part of the Main Control PWB), which describes an image at a resolution of
400x600x8. IPS1 processes this information and provides image sensing, image rendering
and image registration functions. The image sensing and image registration functions support
the scanning process. The image rendering function manipulates the image data before it
sends it to be output.
Image sensing
IPS1 determines the beginning and end of the scanned image. This process differs if the
Image Module is in the Document Feeder (CVT) or the manual Platen Scan mode.
Image Rendering
When IPS1 processes the image data, it can perform several image rendering functions, such
as the application of filters, screens, thresholds and error diffusion.
If auto-segmentation is active (it is in auto/defaults), each pixel of the data is automatically considered part of a continuous tone, black or white, edge, or halftone, and decisions are made as
to how to reproduce each pixel. Halftone threshold frequencies can be programmed in lines
per inch for each type image. IPS1 then applies the appropriate threshold to the image data.
IPS1 can also process an image using two dimensional filtering, two dimensional scaling, TRC
modification, image suppression and halftoning. The halftoning is applied through the application of thresholding, screening or error diffusion methods. Error diffusion is frequently used with
hard screens to increase the flexibility and effectiveness of halftoning an image.
IPS1 then processes the scanned images to create the desired copy resolution. If desired, the
processed image can be rotated or annotated.
Once the images are processed, they are compressed and stored in the Electronic Pre-Collation memory (EPC).
When the photoreceptor is ready for the next image, IPS1 decompresses the image data and
sends it to IPS2 (also on MCB). IPS2 fine-tunes the pixel data and generates laser output signals, which it sends to the ROS Control Module. See Figure 10 for an overview of the image
process flow.
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-62
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
8
Input
Scanner
2
90Degree Rotate/
Annotate/ Merge
IPS-1
2
Compress
Image
Disk
2
EPC DRAM
2
MCB
Decompress
IPS-2
ROS/IOT Engine
Output
Copy
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-63
Principles of Operation
The image is output using a Raster Output Scanner (ROS). The ROS converts the 8-bit electronic image data from the Main Control PWB into rasterized light pulses for each scan line.
The laser then exposes the photoreceptor. The laser light intensities are controlled continuously to provide consistent print quality.
Four LEDs are located on the IIT Lamp Power Supply. These provide a quick visual reference
for troubleshooting. The function of each LED is printed on the PWB and are explained here.
Starting from left to right (from the front), the first LED is ENBL and should be lit when the lamp
enable signal is present (when the Lamp is on). The second LED is the 24VLMP and is lit when
power is available to the Lamp. The third LED is 24VHTR and is on whenever 24V is available
to the Lamp Heater. The fourth LED is HTR and is lit whenever the Lamp Heater is on.
The ROS consists of the following main components and the hardware to mount them:
ROS Control Module PWB that the Motor Polygon Driver (MPD)
Diag. Nav.\IIT \ Scanner Calibration: This routine allows the forcing of a full or partial calibration.
Diag. Nav.\IIT \ IIT Motor Tests: This routine allows testing of the Scan Carriage
Mot.,CVT motor, Feed Motor and CVT belts via driven encoders. NOTE: Motors operate
at their slowest speed, since this is where most failures will occur.
The ROS Control Module (RCM) is a PWB that contains a microprocessor and software stored
in ROM. These electronic components control the speed of the Motor Polygon, the laser output, the system synchronization and the communications over the Serial Command Bus
(SCB).
Diag. Nav.\IIT \ Scanner Lamp Profile: This routine provides a graphic display of the Illumination lamps light output (with limits shown); with lamp off or on.
NOTE: The initial displayed screen may show a ramp at the end - this should be ignored
on the first read.
EPC Memory Walking Test: Test takes approximately 19 minutes. This test forces
bits (1s and 0s) through the digital image path and compares them before and after
the transition. Can detect faulty SIMM or memory chips
VCM _IPS1 Loop Test: This is almost instantaneous. This tests ASICs,IPS1,and
VCM data paths on the Main Control PWB.
Once the MPA is up to speed, the RCM supplies power to the two lasers. An internal photodiode provides feedback to the RCM so the RCM can set the laser levels to previously established calibration points.
IPS1 bypass daughter card test: Used only if VCM and IPS1 loop test fails and the
machine has a daughter card. Since new Main Control PWBs dont have daughter
cards - this test is not presently available.
When the lasers reach their operating output, the MPA and lasers operate so feedback loops
and timing can be set. The timing is set when one of the laser beams is detected by the ROS
SOS. This signal synchronizes the MPA and times the laser level feedback. The RCM sends
the synchronization and laser level data over the video cable to the Video Control Module
(VCM).
When the ROS software determines that the MPA and both lasers are at their operating levels,
the RCM sends a READY TO PRINT signal over the Serial Command Bus to the main controller board.
SCVM Digital Test: This test is almost instantaneous and tests the SCVM portion of
the Main Control PWB.
ESS Main Controller test: A known image on the ESS is sent to the EPC memory on
the Main Control PWB and then sent back to the ESS. NOTE: Not available as of DC
launch - Printers only
AGC Tab: Approximately 30 second test which includes a scan. This looks at and
calibrates to the AGC tab. Verifies presence and cleanliness of the AGC tab.
Carriage Parking: Quickly moves IM off home and then return IM to home.
Scan Carriage: Turns lamp on and provides approximately 1/3 of a scan to verify
motor, cables and SOS operation.
Principles of Operation
When an image is ready, the VCM sends video and pixel clock data to the RCM. The RCM
uses this data to modulate the current supplied to each laser and change the output intensity of
each laser to correspond with the VCM data.
May 2003
10-64
Diag. Nav.\IIT \ IIT Skew Check: This check monitors the edge of originals as they are
fed through the DADF and determines the average skew and then displays the appropriate action to correct the skew. i.e. turn the adjustment screw 1/4 turn clockwise.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Diag.Nav.\IIT \ Lamp Life Reset: This allows a means for the CSE to notify the machine
that the lamp has been changed. If Lamp Life is reset without changing the lamp, Image
Quality problems may occur (generally digital background). If an old MRD is reloaded,
the IOT may believe the lamp is much newer than it actually is and again, digital background may occur.
NOTE: Keeping the MRD current is very important!
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-65
Principles of Operation
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-66
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Paper Supply
Paper Trays
Overview
The Paper Supply consists of four Paper Trays (Figure 3). Trays 1 thorough 4 are supplied with
all machines, while Trays 5 (Bypass) and 6 (HCF) are optional. Trays 1 thorough 4 are
accessed through the front of the machine. Access to the Trays is not inhibited during operation.
The Paper Supply for this copier consists of up to four Paper Trays, and an optional High
Capacity Feed Tray/ Bypass Tray (Figure 1).
This chapter describes the Paper Supply System up to the point where the paper or other copy
material is ready to feed.
Bypass Tray
(Tray 5)
The Trays accommodate sheet sizes of 133mm(5.5) to 305mm (12) in a cross-feed direction,
and 203 mm (8) to 457 mm (18) in a feed direction. Each Tray holds 550 sheets of paper. The
recommended paper weight is 20-lb/80 gsm stock. Pre-formatted paper (i.e. three hole punch)
is loaded face up, with the bind-edge to the right
Paper Trays
1 through 4
High Capacity Tray
(Tray 6)
Figure 1 Paper Trays
Figure 2 IOT Paper Tray
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-67
Principles of Operation
Paper Supply
Switch State
No. Paper/Description
Feed Direction
Cross-Feed Direction A
Tray Out
N/A
N/A
D
0
8.5 x 11
216
279
8.5 x 11
279
216
A4
210
297
A4
297
210
8 x 10
203
254
8 x 10
254
203
A4 Covers
223
297
A4 Covers
297
223
9 x 11
229
279
10
9 x 11
279
229
11
A5
210
148
12
5.5 x 8.5
216
140
13
8.5 x 14
356
216
14
A3
420
297
15
11 x 17
432
279
Principles of Operation
Paper Supply
May 2003
10-68
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Stack Position
The position of the paper stack is determined by the status of the Stack Height Sensor after the
Nudger Solenoid energizes. The Nudger Solenoid is linked to a shaft containing the Nudger
Roll and the Actuator. As the solenoid retracts, the nudger lowers and the Actuator moves (Figure 5.
If the Stack Height Sensor is uncovered, the elevator motor energizes to move the stack
up. As the paper stack pushes against the Nudger Roll, the Nudger Roll and shaft move
upward. This causes the Actuator at the back of the shaft to move also, blocking the sensor (located on the Drives Plate). The machine uses the signal from the Stack Height Sensor to deenergize the elevator motor.
If the Stack Height Sensor is covered, the Nudger Solenoid retracts so the Actuator just
uncovers the Stack Height Sensor.
Paper Feed
Roll Cartridge
Nudger Solenoid
Actuator
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-69
Principles of Operation
Paper Supply
Bypass Tray
Assembly
Bypass Tray
Feeder
High Capacity
Feeder
HCF/Bypass
Tray Feeder
Principles of Operation
Paper Supply
May 2003
10-70
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Side
Guides
The Bypass Tray has a semi-active Friction Retard Feeder with a shared Drive Motor. An
Acquisition Roll Lift Mechanism energizes a Solenoid, which drops the roll onto the stack of
materials. When the Solenoid is deenergized, the roll lifts out of contact with the stack.
A Paper Present Sensor detects whether or not material is loaded. The quantity of material in
the Bypass Tray is not measured. A Sensor does, however detect if the material exceeds 9
inches in the feed direction.
The Bypass Tray has a 50-sheet capacity and handles sheet sizes ranging from 102 mm(4) to
305mm (12) in the cross-feed direction, and 140mm (8.5) to 457mm (18) in the feed direction. The Side Guides, which are positioned by the operator, detect the size of the paper. Preformatted paper is loaded face down, with the bind-edge to the left (i.e. three hole punch).
Paper Size
Sensor
Paper Present
Sensor
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-71
Principles of Operation
Paper Supply
Principles of Operation
Paper Supply
May 2003
10-72
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Paper Transportation
Overview
Registration Transport
This section describes the transportation of paper from the Paper Trays or Bypass Tray to the
Registration Assembly. This process includes the acquisition, staging, feeding and registering
of the paper so the paper is ready for imaging.
The Paper Transportation function, shown below in Figure 1, includes the following subassemblies:
Registration Assembly
Vertical Transport
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-73
Principles of Operation
Paper Transportation
The clutches move freely in opposite directions. When the Feeder Motor rotates in a clockwise
direction, a belt engages the top clutch and drive is transferred to the feedhead coupling in the
top Paper Tray. When the motor reverses direction, the bottom clutch engages, transferring
drive to the feedhead coupling in the bottom Paper Tray. Drive is then transferred to the drive
shaft and Feed Roll in the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge.
These functions, as well as the drive that supports them, are discussed in detail on the following pages.
Nudger Roll
Feed Roll
Retard Roll
Principles of Operation
Paper Transportation
May 2003
10-74
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Paper Feeding
The feeding operation is basically the same for all paper fed using the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. There is, however, a slight difference between the feeding of the first sheet of a job, and
the subsequent sheets of the same job. This section describes both sequences.
Nudger Roll in the
paper feed position
Nudger Roll in
the reset position
Wait Station
Feed Roll
Nudger Roll
Retard Roll
Wait Station Sensor
Nudger Solenoid
Figure 4 Acquisition Area
When the Wait Station Sensor detects the leading edge of the paper, the feeder motor
deenergizes and the paper stops moving. The paper remains at this waiting area until the
feed command is issued. The amount of waiting time varies between paper trays,
because the distance from each wait station to the photoconductor is different. Figure 5
illustrates the acquisition and rest positions of the Nudger Roll.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
At the end of the job, the Nudger Solenoid does not energize after the last sheet exits the drive
nip. This allows the operator to open the paper tray between jobs because paper is not sitting
at the wait station.
May 2003
10-75
Principles of Operation
Paper Transportation
Paper Detection
In the paper path, reflective sensors are used to detect the presence of paper. A reflective sensor measures the amount of reflectivity at a specific point in the copier. The presence and
absence of paper is determined by a change in the status of this sensor:
The Retard Roll pushes back the sheets under the top sheet of the stack so only the top sheet
is fed. A semi-active Retard Roll provides this function in the Paper Feed Roll Cartridge. The
Retard Roll, which receives drive through contact with the Feed Roll, also provides the nip for
the Feed Roll (Figure 6)
When no paper is present, no light is reflected back to the sensor causing a lo signal.
When paper is present, light is reflected back to the sensor causing a hi signal.
While the Retard Roll rotates to drive the top sheet, a wrap-spring clutch within the roll accumulates tension. This tension creates a reverse torque that causes the roll to periodically
reverse direction for a moment. This action kicks the sheets under the top sheet back into the
paper tray
Feed Roll
Paper feed
direction
Retard Roll
Principles of Operation
Paper Transportation
May 2003
10-76
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Tray 5 Feed
Clutch
Tray 6 Feed
Clutch
Drives
The Feed Roll Cartridges function similarly to the ones in the paper trays; they separate
the top sheet from the rest of the stack, feed the paper to the wait station and drive the
paper into the paper path. These functions, as well as the drive that supports them, are
discussed in detail on the following pages.
The HCF/Bypass Tray contains one 24 VDC motor that provides drive for both Feeder
Assemblies (Figure 7). The motor accomplishes this by reversing direction and switching
between two mechanical clutches. The clutches then transfer drive to the Feeder Assemblies via a Feedhead Coupling.
HCF/Bypass
Tray Feed
Motor
HCF PWB
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-77
Principles of Operation
Paper Transportation
Interlocks
The stand-alone Bypass Tray (Figure 8) uses a slightly different drive system, that includes
only a motor. The Bypass Tray Feed Motor transfers drive in one direction only via a gear set to
a one-way clutch to the drive shaft. The one-way clutch provides easy jam clearance. The
motor is controlled by a control board located at the rear of the Bypass Tray Assembly, not an
IIOC.
The HCF/Bypass Tray has two interlocks that cause the removal of 24 VDC from the HCF/
Bypass Tray.
The Bypass interlock prevents opening the Bypass during operation. If the Bypass is
opened, the interlock switch actuator arm breaks the signal at the interlock sensor. This
change in state causes logic control to remove 24 VDC from the Bypass Tray.
The HCF generates a similar signal if the height of the elevator or paper is too high. The
elevator or paper will actuate a crossbar at the top of the HCF cavity. When the crossbar
pivots, an actuator arm moves up, breaking the signal at the interlock sensor. This change
in state causes logic control to remove 24 VDC from the HCF/Bypass Tray (Figure 9)
The Bypass Tray Stand-alone does not include an interlock switch. Instead, the operator
pushes a button to open the cover, which signals that the Bypass Tray is open and not
ready for operation.
Clutch
Switch
Actuator
Gear set
Principles of Operation
Paper Transportation
May 2003
10-78
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Registration
Transport
Bypass Tray Paper
Feed Roll Cartridge
Bypass Tray
HCF Paper
Feed Roll
Cartridge
HCF
Vertical
Transport
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-79
Principles of Operation
Paper Transportation
Encoder
Strip
Beam Sensor
Principles of Operation
Paper Transportation
May 2003
10-80
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Length Sensors
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-81
Principles of Operation
Paper Transportation
Vertical Transport
The Vertical Transport Assembly consists of a baffle device, several sensors and drive Rolls
(Figure 13 and Figure 14).
The purpose of the Vertical Transport Assembly is to transport the paper from the wait station
of the Paper Trays to the Registration Assembly. It does not transport materials from the HCF/
Bypass Tray.
For a short time, both the feeder Feed Roll and the vertical transport Rolls drive the paper
at the same time. Since these Rolls are controlled by different motors, they may not be
driving the paper at the same speed. A pivoting baffle in the baffle area compensates for
these differences in speeds:
If the main drive motor is faster than the feeder motor, the baffle pivots to create a
shorter paper path.
If the main drive motor is slower than the feeder motor, the baffle pivots to provide
room for the paper to buckle slightly
The feeder motor deenergizes when the trailing edge of the paper clears the Wait Station
Sensor. Now, only the vertical transport Rolls drive the paper to the registration Rolls.
Vertical Nip
Rolls
Baffle
area
Vertical
Transport
Tray 1
Wait Station
Sensor
Tray 2
Wait Station
Sensor
Tray 3
Wait Station
Sensor
Tray 4
Wait Station
Sensor
Principles of Operation
Paper Transportation
May 2003
10-82
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Registration Transport
The purpose of the Registration Assembly is to receive the sheet of copy material from either
the Vertical Transport or the HCF/Bypass Tray, remove any skew, and register the sheet so it
aligns correctly with the image on the photoconductor. The Registration Transport (Figure 15)
then feeds the sheet at the correct time to receive the image. The Registration Transport components are shown in Figure 16.
Preregistration Roll
Registration Roll
Vertical Transport
Registration Transport
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-83
Principles of Operation
Paper Transportation
Drive
The Registration Assembly receives drive from the Developer Drive Motor, via a series of
gears.
From Duplex
Transport
Preregistration
Nip Roll
Registration Roll
From HCF/
Bypass Tray
The solenoid energizes after the previous sheet has passed the nip, and before the next sheet
arrives.
Registration Transport
The Registration Transport consists of: (Figure 17)
Registration Roll
Drive/Nip Rolls
Registration Clutch
Registration Sensor
Pre-transfer baffles
Principles of Operation
Paper Transportation
Vertical Transport
Preregistration
Drive Roll
Registration
Sensor
May 2003
10-84
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The function of the Registration Transport is to receive the sheet of copy material from any of
the paper supply sources, deskew the sheet, and register the sheet prior to feeding it to the
Photoreceptor Transfer Area (Figure 18).
When paper arrives at the Registration Roll, it is traveling at 305 mm per second. The paper
presses against the stalled Registration Roll and forms a buckle for the purpose of deskewing.
Sheets are transported at a speed of 302.5mm per second through the Assembly by Drive/Idler
Rolls (Figure 19).
A Clutch on the Registration Drive Shaft engages the Registration Roll and drives the sheet to
the Photoreceptor Transfer Area. This process occurs at a specified time interval that ensures
lead-edge registration to the PITCH RESET image after deskew.
A Registration Sensor detects early or late sheet arrival, jams, and Registration Clutch deactuation when the sheet leaves the Registration Assembly. Clutch engagement is synchronized to
the appropriate PITCH RESET signal and arrival of a sheet at the Registration Sensor. Isolated
Pre-Transfer Baffles flatten and guide the sheet to the Transfer Zone.
From Duplex
Transport
Paper
Buckle
Registration Roll
From HCF/
Bypass Tray
Vertical Transport
Preregistration
Nip Roll
Registration
Sensor
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-85
Principles of Operation
Paper Transportation
Principles of Operation
Paper Transportation
May 2003
10-86
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Marking
Detack
Xerographics overview
The primary functions of the xerographic module are to:
Provide a charged Photoreceptor which can then be exposed with the document image
data to create a latent electrostatic image on the Photoreceptor
Develop the latent electrostatic image with a process that deposits toner on the image
areas
Transfer the developed image from the Photoreceptor to paper or other copy material
Strip and move the unfused copy from the Transfer Station so that it can be transported to
the fusing station
Clean the residual toner from the Photoreceptor in preparation for the next charging cycle
Erase
Transfer
Clean
This chapter describes the electrical and mechanical components that perform these functions,
the Process Controls which control the functions to obtain the desired level of image quality,
and the Diagnostics available for troubleshooting and adjustments.
The major sections of this chapter are:
Development
Photoreceptor
Charging
Development
Transfer
Photoreceptor cleaning
Charge
ROS
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-87
Principles of Operation
Marking
Charging
Charge Scorotron
The Charge Scorotron (Figure 2), located within the Xerographic Module, provides a uniform
charge level to the Photoreceptor in preparation for imaging. Unlike the Corotron, the
Scorotron uses a Grid to regulate the voltage applied to the photoreceptor.
The Charge HVPS (Figure 3) supplies -6000 Vdc (-6 kV) to the Charge Scorotron Pins and a
nominal bias voltage of 550 Vdc to the Grid.
Charge HVPS
The Pins emit current, while the grid absorbs 80% of the current and applies a charge to the
photoreceptor. There should be no voltage difference between the grid and the photoreceptor.
These similar voltages prevent current from being attracted to the photoreceptor. The grid bias
voltage is controlled by process control algorithms, and is adjusted as necessary.
The Scorotron plugs directly into the Power Supply, and transfers power via a conductive strip.
Principles of Operation
Marking
May 2003
10-88
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Development
Toner Supply
The primary function of the development system is to apply toner to the electrostatic image on
the Photoreceptor. Because this is a Discharged Area Development (DAD) process, the electrostatic image on the Photoreceptor is negative. The lesser negatively charged areas of the
Photoreceptor develop into the visible image. The fully charged areas of the Photoreceptor
remain clear of toner.
The purpose of the Toner Supply is to deliver toner from the Toner Cartridge to the Developer
Assembly as required by process controls (Figure 5).
The Hybrid Jumping Development (HJD) design uses a conductive magnetic brush to load
toner onto a Donor Roll. Image development occurs by attracting toner from the AC-biased
Donor Roll onto the Photoreceptor
Toner is dispensed into the outboard end of the Auger #1 channel, where it is mixed with the
developer material. The developer is then transported to the inboard end of the housing,
where it flows into Auger #2 via a cut-out between the channels. As the developer in Auger #2
moves toward the front of the machine, it is attracted to the Mag Roll. The attracted developer
is picked up and trimmed at the same time. The rotation of the Mag Roll transports the developer to the nip area between the Mag Roll and the Donor Roll, where a solid coverage of toner
is deposited onto the Donor Roll. The rotation of the Donor Roll transports toner to the Photoreceptor development region where it is jumped onto the latent image on the photoreceptor
using an AC bias.
Toner Cartridge
The Toner Cartridge Unit is located above the Developer Housing. The cartridge slowly rotates,
which causes the toner material to move through the Cartridge. At the end of the Cartridge is a
Paddle Wheel that scoops up the material and dumps it onto the Extracting Auger. The Extracting Auger transports the toner to the Dispenser Sump. The Developer Auger them delivers
replenisher from the Sump to the Developer at the required rate.
The Toner Cartridge is cylindrical with a spiral rib molded in the side. It holds 2.4 liters of toner
and carrier, which equals approximately a 20,000 copy capacity when running an average 6%
coverage area. It is loaded horizontally in the guides above the developer. The cartridge is
pushed on to the Extracting Auger. There are seals between the Cartridge and the Extracting
Auger that prevent leakage of toner.
A trickle system is used to replenish the Sump. When utilizing this scheme, a small amount of
carrier is included with the toner in the Toner Cartridge. The trickle system usually eliminates
the need for a Service Representative to change the developer, since new carrier is added to
the Sump whenever toner is required. An overflow system maintains a constant developer volume in the Sump. The developer flows out of the housing and falls down a tube into a storage
container called a Developer Collector. There is a 3-pin Sensor that detects whether the bottle
is full or missing. When the output signal on the Trickle Bottle Sensor is Low, the bottle is not
full. When the signal is High, the bottle is either full or not in the machine.
It should be noted that there is a single configuration of developer housing for all of the Document Centre 240/255/265 DC/LP/ST machines. However, there is a unique developer housing
for machines that are installed at an altitude of 4000ft/1200m or higher. This high altitude
developer housing differs from the standard developer housing in the following ways:
The high altitude developer housing is spaced .001 closer to the photoreceptor than a
standard housing
The high altitude housing has a donor roll with a tighter tolerance on its runout
The high altitude housing has a donor roll that rotates 30% faster
Whenever a high altitude housing is present, there is an NVM value that must be set to indicate
what the local altitude is. Machines that have had the High Altitude Kit installed at VALO are
set to 6000ft. This should be changed as necessary to match the local altitude.
NOTE: The NVM value must be set using the altitude in feet. If the altitude is known in meters,
multiply by 3 to get an equivalent value in feet.
High altitude developer housings should only be installed on machines that are 4000ft/1200m
or higher, otherwise Image Quality will be degraded.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-89
Principles of Operation
Marking
Toner
Car-
Donor Roll
Auger #1
Auger #2
Developer
Housing
Principles of Operation
Marking
May 2003
10-90
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Transfer
Transfer Corotron
The Transfer Corotron (Figure 7), located within the Xerographic Module, places a high positive charge on the paper as it passes beneath it. This charge causes the negatively charged
toner to transfer from the photoreceptor to the paper. To maintain copy quality, the power supply adjusts the transfer coronode current continuously in response to the load (paper, transparencies, environmental zone, and other factors).
transfer the toner image from the Photoreceptor to the copy material
remove the copy material, with its image, from the Photoreceptor Detack function.
In the digital copier, a Pretransfer Guide (Figure 6) directs the paper onto the photoreceptor.
The transfer corotron (Figure 7) then places a charge on the paper as it passes beneath the
corotron.
Transfer Corotron
Pretransfer Guide
Figure 5 Transfer
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-91
Principles of Operation
Marking
Paper Stripping
After transfer of the toner image, the copy material must be removed from the photoreceptor.
This function, called paper stripping, is accomplished by the Stripper Roll and the Detack
Corotron. The Stripper Roll is 25.25 mm in diameter.
Detack Corotron
The Detack Corotron, located within the Xerographic Module (Figure 8), is a single-array pin
device. The shield of the Corotron is grounded. The Detack Corotron is located at the top of the
Stripper Roll, 25.5mm after the Transfer Corotron. A lace cover prevents the paper from getting
caught in the Corotron.
Detack Corotron
Stripper
Roll
Principles of Operation
Marking
May 2003
10-92
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Photoreceptor Cleaning
Cleaning Operation
NOTE: All components in the Cleaning Assembly are completely contained within the Xerographic Module.
Once the image has been transferred and the paper is returned to the paper path, residual
toner remains on the photoreceptor. The Cleaner Assembly removes this toner and prepares
the photoreceptor for another image cycle.
The Cleaner Assembly includes the Blade Assembly, Cleaning Blade, Brush Assembly, Flicker
Bar Assembly, Drive Assembly, Seal Assemblies, and a Waste Toner Container. There is no
sensor in the Cleaner Assembly.
Cleaning Brush
Lamp
Once the toner and particles are removed from the photoreceptor, a Lamp erases the voltage remaining on the photoreceptor. This function attempts to achieve a uniform 0 Vdc on
the photoreceptor before it begins a new cycle. The Lamp consists of red LEDs that are
powered continuously by 24 Vdc from the Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS).
Cleaning Blade
The residual toner is scraped off the Photoreceptor by a Cleaning Blade made of urethane rubber. The angle of the blade to the Photoreceptor surface has been selected to
provide effective cleaning and no filming. The blade is always against the Photoreceptor
and is not retracted as it is in some products. The Blade contains a pivot mechanism,
which allows for some deflection, and compensates for location tolerance between the
photoreceptor and cleaner. If the Cleaner is not completely parallel to the photoreceptor,
the blade will pivot to provide the correct angle.
The end of the blade is also spring-loaded so it applies constant pressure to the photoreceptor. A lever and torsion spring combination causes a retractor lever to move, releasing
the spring-loaded tension of the blade. The blade can then be removed.
Cleaning Brush
The scraped off toner is picked up by the Cleaning Brush, which is driven by the Photoreceptor (P/R) motor. The Flicker Bar Assembly then dislodges the toner and fibers in the
Cleaning Brush, causing them to fall into the Chute and Waste Toner Container located
under the Cleaner. The waste container can hold approximately 1900 gm of waste toner.
The Cleaner Assembly is totally isolated by seals on three sides and the cleaning blade.
This prevents the release of airborne toner into the copier. The entrance seal is a polyurethane flap, and the two side seals at the end of the blade are polypropylene fiber brushes.
Low Area Coverage Copy Runs
If a long run occurs with low area coverage, the photoreceptor can become too clean, creating friction between the photoreceptor and blade. To prevent this situation, the copier
creates a toner band in the inter-document zone once every 4 copies.
Waste Toner
Container
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-93
Principles of Operation
Marking
Process Controls
Overview
Electrostatic Convergence - adjusts all the actuators to obtain correct density of the
patches
A closed-loop process control system is utilized to maintain excellent and consistent image
quality as the environment changes and as the machine components age. The term, closed loop, indicates that image quality is constantly being checked as the machine runs, and that
information is fed back to the system to determine what adjustments need to be made.
The factors that can cause variation in image quality and create a need for continuous adjustment are:
The amount of time it takes for the Xerographic Setup to complete varies, depending on the
machine condition. It can take as little as a couple of minutes to as long as 20 minutes. 40ppm
machines will take longer than 65ppm machines. If the machine cannot setup due to some
machine problem, a fault code will occur and will be logged. The machine will still be available
to the customer.
ROS Output
During normal run, image quality is being monitored. Before every job, the BTAC Sensor is calibrated. Also, once every revolution of the photoreceptor, three process control patches are
created in the inter-document zone and measured by the BTAC. At every job cycle-out, a toner
control patch is made. These patches are not transferred to the paper, they occur between
pages. Based on the measurements of these patches, the process controls will make adjustments to optimize image quality and maintain the correct toner concentration of the developer.
Part life
Altitude
Process control patches of differing densities are generated by the system. All measurements
of these patches are made by the BTAC (Black Toner Area Coverage) Sensor. Sophisticated
software routines then adjust the various xerographic settings (actuators) based on those measurements.
There are two basic modes for process controls: Setup Mode (Xerographic Setup) and Runtime Image Quality Control.
The toner dispensing is controlled by an IIOC device which signals the Developer Dispense
Motor to energize or not energize based on the need. The need is determined by the continual
monitoring of the patches, but also by counting the number of pixels being processed by the
image processing systems.
Also, if the customer is unhappy with the machine image quality, a setup can be initiated by the
customer via the UI Tools menu.
Principles of Operation
Marking
May 2003
10-94
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Transfer/
Detack HVPS
Charge
HVPS
Developer
HVPS
BTAC Sensor
Figure 10 Xerographic Power Supplies
Charge HVPS
The Charge HVPS uses interlocked 36 VDC and supplies current for the Charge Scorotron
pins and a voltage to bias the Charge Scorotron grid. The output of the supply is enabled by a
digital signal from the SCAM PWB. The bias to the grid is also controlled by an analog output
of the SCAM PWB, based on requirements of the Process Control system.
In the event of an overcurrent or overvoltage condition is sensed by the supply, the HVPS will
shut down and a signal is sent to the SCAM PWB and a fault is declared.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-95
Principles of Operation
Marking
Transfer/Detack HVPS
The Transfer/Detack HVPS is a single field replaceable unit, but consists of two separate
PWBs. The Transfer HVPS uses interlocked 36 VDC to produce current for the Transfer
Corotron wire. The output of the supply is enabled by a digital signal from the SCAM PWB and
the level is fixed, but different for 40ppm machines. A digital signal from the SCAM PWB is sent
to the Transfer HVPS on 40ppm machines to set the correct level.
New Parts Setup is only used when certain xerographic components are replaced. The Toner
Dispense Fill routine ensures that the toner pipeline is full before the process controls try to
adjust the image density. The Developer Housing install ensures that new developer material is
conditioned correctly before the process controls attempt to setup the xerographics.
The Detack HVPS also uses interlocked 36 VDC to produce an AC voltage superimposed on a
DC bias for the Detack Corotron pins. The output of the supply is enabled by a digital signal
from the SCAM PWB.
In the event of an overcurrent or overvoltage condition is sensed by either supplies, the HVPS
will shut down and a signal is sent to the SCAM PWB and a fault is declared
Developer HVPS
The Developer HVPS uses interlocked 36 VDC and produces two outputs to bias the Developer Mag Roll and Donor Roll. The Donor Roll output consists of an AC bias superimposed on
a DC bias. The Mag Roll output also consists of an AC bias superimposed on a DC bias, which
is in turn, superimposed onto the Donor Roll bias.
Both outputs are enabled by a digital signal from the SCAM PWB. Three analog outputs from
the SCAM PWB control the Donor and Mag DC levels and the Donor AC amplitude. These levels are determined by the process controls system.
In the event of an overcurrent condition due to a short from the Donor to ground, mag to
ground, or Donor to Mag, the HVPS will shut down and a signal is sent to the SCAM PWB and
a fault will be declared.
Diagnostics
Xerographic Exerciser
The Xerographic Exerciser is an automated diagnostic tool that can help determine the cause
of xerographic problems. The Exerciser runs a series of tests where xerographic parameters
are manipulated, and by using the BTAC Sensor, analyzing the response of the control
patches. Based on these results, the Exerciser will display a pass or fail message, with recommended parts to replace. The routine will complete within 2 minutes.
The Xerographic Exerciser is not effective for all xerographic problems. The BTAC Sensor is
fixed and only views a narrow area of the image, it can only diagnose a limited number of
image quality defects. The analysis of the data also depends on an active xerographic fault
code. In addition, the Exerciser cannot diagnose some xerographic fault codes. Because of
this, the routine should only be run when directed to by the RAPs.
Power Supply Tests
The Power Supply Tests are similar to Component Control. They allow the Charge, Developer,
and the Transfer/Detack HVPSs to be energized so that measurements can be made with the
Digital Multimeter.
Principles of Operation
Marking
May 2003
10-96
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Prefuser
Transport
Duplex Transport
Overview
This section presents the details of the Prefuser Transport, Fuser Module, Inverter, Dual
Decurler, and Duplex Transport. The Prefuser Transport moves the stripped, unfused copies
from the photoreceptor to the Fuser Module. The Fuser Module permanently bonds the toner
image into the copy paper by means of heat and pressure.
Diverter
Gate
After a sheet of paper has been imaged and fused, it will exit the product or be directed by the
Inverter to the Duplex Transport to be imaged again. When the paper is imaged only on one
side, it will exit the product either face up or face down. When the paper is to be imaged again,
it will be directed to the Duplex Transport to be copied on the reverse side of the paper.
To
Decurler
Prefuser Transport
Fuser Module
Inverter
Dual Decurler
Duplex Transport
Inverter
Fuser Module
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-97
Principles of Operation
Prefuser Transport
The Prefuser Transport (Figure 2) acquires the lead edge of the stripped, unfused sheet from
the Photoreceptor. It then transports the sheet to the Fuser by Transfer Belts. The Transfer
Belts operate at slightly higher than process speed, which forms a buckle on the paper as it
enters the Fuser.
Gear (Driven by
the Fuser Motor)
Belt (1 of 4)
The Prefuser Transport is located after the detack corotron in the paper path. The left side of
the transport actually contacts the detack corotron. The front of the transport rests on top of the
fuser at the front of the transport.
The Prefuser Transport consists of 4 belts that rotate around a vacuum plenum, idler shaft and
drive shaft. The drive shaft connects to a gear at the back of the transport, which is driven
directly by the Fuser Drive Motor.
A reflective sensor (PFT Sensor) is located in the center of the plenum. This sensor generates
timing signals used for jam detection purposes.
PFT Sensor
Drive Shaft
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-98
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The transport also includes a 24 VDC, 11 watt blower that draws air out of the plenum, pulling
the paper against the belts with vacuum. This blower operates continuously while the copier is
powered on. The blower is grounded via a ground strip or brush located at the rear of the transport (Figure 3).
Ground Strip
Prefuser
Transport Fan
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-99
Principles of Operation
Fuser Module
The Fuser Assembly (Figure 4) receives paper from the prefuser transport and applies heat
and pressure to permanently adhere the toned image to the paper.
The paper is guided by an entrance baffle into the nip of the fuser roll and pressure roll. The
pressure roll is a soft roll, located on top of the harder fuser roll. The two rolls, which contact
each other continuously, are held in position by 2 compression springs. The nip created by the
two rolls is expected to be 5.6mm 0.3 mm (DC265) or 5.2mm + 0.3mm (DC240) at the center
of the rolls. The nip at each end of the roll should within 0.4 mm of each other. All fuser components are spared as part of the Fuser Customer Replaceable Unit.
The fuser roll receives drive from a gear set driven by the Fuser Drive Motor and transfers the
drive to the pressure roll. The fuser roll also contains a quartz-halogen lamp that heats the
fuser roll to a temperature of approximately 375 degrees Fahrenheit. A thermistor and 2 nonresettable thermal fuses protect the copier from over-temperature conditions. These are discussed in more detail in the heating and temperature control discussion later in this section.
Static is dissipated in the fuser assembly by a non-contacting static brush, which is grounded
through the ground circuit. The fuser roll is grounded through the core and the bearings to the
frame.
Baffle
The fuser roll assembly also includes an oil-impregnated web that cleans toner from the fuser
roll while supplying the fuser roll with a small amount of oil. The web is driven through gear
reduction from the fuser drive gears. At this time the web is not replaceable separately but may
be as fuser life improves.
As the fused paper exits the rolls, a set of strippers separate the paper from the fuser roll and
direct it into the paper path. These strippers prevent the paper from wrapping around the fuser
roll.
CRUM values
The end of life of the Fuser Module is monitored by a CRUM (Customer Replaceable Unit Monitor) for approximately 250,000 copies (this may change as improvements are made to the
fuser). Fuser life, however, will vary depending upon the types of jobs run. Since the fuser components are turning during print and therefore web is being used, life will vary. If a Customer
ran only 1 original for each copy and let the machine fully cycle between jobs, the web life may
be as low as 80K copies.
Functions of components and subassemblies
The Fuser Assembly performs the following significant functions. Each of these functions is
discussed in detail on the following pages.
A knob, located at the front of the Fuser Assembly, can be manually turned to drive the gear
set which drives the fuser roll and web. The purpose of this knob is to aid in jam clearance. The
knob, which can be turned in either direction, can rotate the fuser and pressure rolls and the
Fuser Drive Motor.
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-100
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A quartz-halogen lamp inside the Fuser Roll supplies the heat for the fusing process. Power is
provided to the lamp via connector strips instead of wires. The lamps power duty cycle is governed by a software feedback loop which uses a DC Thermistor to sense the surface temperature of the Fuser Roll. Temperature of the Lamp is controlled by logic control and protected
from a destructive overheat by an AC Thermal Fuse.
The Fuser Roll is lubricated with fuser oil, which acts as a release agent to prevent toner from
sticking to the roll. An oil-impregnated Web moves across the surface of the Roll to lubricate it.
The web is driven by gears within the Fuser CRU. The web is unique in that both sides of the
web are used to clean the fuser roll.
The thermistor contains a 5-volt, negative-temperature coefficient resistor. As the temperature increases, the resistance decreases. The signals are sent to the SCAM Board and
through an A/D (Analog to Digital) Converter. Logic control then reads the value and
adjusts the normal temperature. If the Thermistor senses an over-temperature condition,
the Lamp is automatically turned OFF. Both the range of change and the actual temperature are monitored by logic control.
An AC thermal fuse, which is non-resettable, is located 2 mm from the Fuser Roll. If this
fuse melts, the AC circuit opens, signalling an overtemperature condition and protecting
the machine from a damaging overheat.
As the fuser matures, it may be necessary to make the web assembly a separately spared
module. This has been planned and may be available in the future, but is not at this date.
For backup overtemperature protection, the Fuser Assembly also includes an OPP (Outside
Paper Path) fuse that touches the fuser roll outside the paper path. This non-resettable thermal
fuse is wired in series with the coil of the relay. If the thermal fuse circuit opens, the relay
removes all power to the machine.
Logic control monitors the warm-up rate. Operational temperature is 375 degrees F. If the correct temperature is not achieved within a specified time, Fuser fault 10-301 occurs and the system does not become operational. After the temperature reaches 350 degrees F during warmup, the rolls rotate until the correct temperature is reached.
The Standby temperature ranges between 350 - 400 degrees F. To maintain this temperature,
logic control energizes and deenergizes the Fuser. Power is conserved during Standby, which
means that some time to get back to a Ready temperature may be required.
There are several possible failures which can occur in the temperature control system. Table 1
shows the fault codes utilized to indicate these failures.
Table 1 Fuser Fault Codes
Fault Code
10-300
Condition
Fuser Thermistor circuit is open.
10-301
10-302
10-303
10-350
10-352
10-354
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The fuser assembly includes a web cleaning system to remove toner that has adhered to the
Fuser Roll during the fusing process. Since this web is driven by gear reduction from the fuser
roll drive, it moves constantly from a supply roll to a take-up roller. The web is part of the Fuser
Assembly CRU, and is expected to last the life of the Fuser CRU assembly.
May 2003
10-101
Principles of Operation
Inverter
The Inverter (Figure 5) moves paper from the Fuser to either the Decurler or to the Duplex
Transport through two decision gates:
Inverter Gate
Duplex Gate
The Inverter Gate is controlled by the Inverter Gate Solenoid, which is powered by 24VDC.
When energized, this Solenoid diverts sheets to the Reversing Nip Rollers and on to the
Inverter Exit Rollers.
The Reversing Nip Rollers are energized by the Inverter Nip Close Solenoid, which is 24VDC.
When this nip is closed, the forward drive of the Inverter is engaged. When the trail edge of the
sheet reaches the stop position, the reverse drive of the Inverter is engaged. This drives the
sheet out to the Exit Nip Rollers. The Inverter Reverse Solenoid is 24VDC.
The Duplex Gate is controlled by the Duplex Gate Solenoid. When energized, this Solenoid
diverts sheets to the Duplex Transport.
The Inverter Entrance Sensor and Exit Sensor start timing windows for both the gates and the
reversing mechanism. These sensors operate on 5VDC.
Inverter Entrance
Sensor
Duplex Gate
Dual Decurler
Inverter
Gate
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-102
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Decurler
The Decurler transports paper from the Duplex Decision Gate to the IOT exit. It forms a
mechanical bend in a direction opposite to the expected curl of an incoming sheet. Decurler
activation is an option offered on the KEY OP screen, assuming the decurler is enabled
(plugged in).
The Decurler provides two decurling positions, depending upon the output path of the sheet.
This is necessary because paper enters the Offsetting Catch Tray (OCT), Disk Finisher Top
Tray or Mailbox in a different orientation than paper entering the Disk Finisher Main Tray
(i.e.;Mailbox/Finisher Top Tray - image down, Finisher Main Tray - image up).
Dog Ears: If it is suspected that the dog ears are coming from the Decurler, remove the
entrance baffle from the Decurler and rerun - if dog ears are no longer present - replace the
Decurler assembly. If the dog ears persist, the cause probably lies elsewhere.
Troubleshooting Tips:
The Decurler consists of two sets of nip rollers. The first set of nip rollers on the entrance side
of the Decurler control the decurling of paper exiting the IOT oriented image down. The second
set of nip rollers on the exit side of the Decurler control the decurling of paper exiting into the
Disk Finisher Main Tray.
Each set of nip rollers contains one small nip roller (hard), which, when engaged, applies pressure to a larger roller (soft). This pressure creates a reverse-curl that straightens the paper.
The movement of the smaller rollers is controlled by a software-controlled clutch. The software
detects the KEY OP screen selections, the number of inversions used in the paper path, and
the normal setting area coverage to set the Decurler. The Decurler can switch positions during
a job if these parameters change.
The clutch has 3 positions:
When the clutch engages, it turns a cam shaft, which opens or closes the appropriate roll pair.
The Decurler receives drive via a belt from the Fuser Drive Motor.
On the input side of the Decurler, an entrance baffle applies pressure against the inverter to
prevent a gap between the Inverter and Decurler. The Decurler also includes a passive static
brush at the exit of the Decurler to remove any static before the paper exits into the output
device.
The Customer can change the operation of the decurler via the Customer tools, by selecting
the Machine Tests and Humidity Adjustment buttons. Choices are High, Normal and Low
decurling depending upon output device, paper, and humidity. Generally, for a Disk Finisher the
Low setting is appropriate. The High setting is needed for the OCT. The High setting is the only
setting that causes the Decurler to act on duplex sheets.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-103
Principles of Operation
Duplex Transport
The Duplex Transport (Figure 6) transports the sheets from the Inverter back to the Registration Nip so the side 2 image can be transferred to the second side. The Acceleration Zone,
which is beyond the Inverter, accelerates the paper to expedite its arrival at the Registration
Nip.
The transport belt receives the sheets from the Acceleration Nip and delivers them to the
Retiming Nip.
TEER Sensor
Transport Belt
Acceleration Zone
Retiming Nip
Acceleration Nip
Principles of Operation
Duplex Decurler:.....
May 2003
10-104
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Exit Decurler
The Exit Decurler (or TAG 279 Decurler) subsystem transports media from the Inverter exit nip
to the IOT exit. Its primary function is to apply a mechanical bending in the process direction
opposite to the curl direction of an incoming sheet. The direction and degree of bending can
be either, automatically selected and adjusted based on several variables, which are monitored
by machine software, or manually controlled.
As shown in Table 2 , the number of Decurler Position Sensor transitions sets cam position
after the Home sensor is actuated. The result is an amount of decurler nip roll penetration in
the upper or lower decurler paper path as shown.
Decurler operation is selectable through SA tools. In tools select [System settings], [More],
then select [Decurler Settings]. The decurler feature screen has three UI soft buttons to select
operation as follows:
Auto Decurler Enabled - Select Auto Decurler Enabled to allow the machine to automatically minimize curl on output copies. This is the default selection.
Auto Decurler Disabled - Make the Disabled selection to turn the machines decurling
capability off.
Max Decurler Enabled - Select Maximum to allow the machine to maximize the output
copy decurling capability.
NOTE: The amount of decurling performed when Max Decurler Enabled is selected can
be adjusted by the CSE via NVM.
The Document Centre 480 and 490 machines contain an Environmental Sensor (E-Sensor) to
monitor the amount of water present in the air which, when enabled allows all selections
above. If the E-Sensor is not enabled, automatic decurler settings are disabled.
The mechanism uses a solenoid-actuated gate to direct sheets into an upper or lower paper
path to apply the correct direction of post process bending. A five-position cam creates a nip
between a foam roll and the drive rolls with a precise penetration level thus creating the necessary reverse bending as the sheets pass through. Regardless of which paper path is selected,
the five cam settings correspond to a "Home" position where both upper and lower nips remain
open, a low penetration position for each nip and a high penetration position for each nip. A
+24 VDC motor (Decurler Cam Drive Motor), pulsing on and off in 7 msec intervals in one
direction only drives the cam. All cam position changes are initiated during the sheet's inter
document gap. The decurler nips are driven at constant speed by the Decurler Drive Belt.
This belt is driven by a gear on Main Drive Motor 2 and transfers drive to the Decurler Drive
Shaft on the IOT frame.
If the number of inversions is 1 the Decurler Gate Solenoid will be On and the sheets
will be directed to the lower paper path of the Decurler.
NOTE: The Low settings at cam position 2 and 4 are used when the High penetration is
required in the opposing path. Cam positions 2 or 4 are not used to achieve Low settings
because they consume more electrical power.
Table 2 Decurler Nip Roll Operation
Amount of
Upper Path Nip
Penetration
Amount of
Lower Path Nip
Penetration
Cam Position
Home Sensor
Position
Sensor
Home
Actuated
Actuated
Open
Open
De-actuated
Actuated + 1
transition
Medium
Low
De-actuated
Actuated + 2
transitions
High
Low
De-actuated
Actuated + 3
transitions
Low
Medium
De-actuated
Actuated +4
transitions
Low
High
Table 3 is used when the [Auto Decurler Enabled] button is selected on the UI. It shows the
four variables (Simplex/Duplex, Grains of Water, LEF/SEF, and # of inversions) that determine
the cam position required to achieve the appropriate Decurler nip setting automatically. If
"grains of water" input is not received, the Decurler defaults to "Manual OFF".
The machine software does not sense the expected sensor transitions from the Decurler
Home Sensor and the Decurler Position Sensor within 1000 msec of sending a move
command.
The value in NVM, [Mark Service] location 529, Exit Decurler Config Type is not set to 2
A 10-357 or a 10-358 Decurler Configuration Mismatch fault will be declared if the value in
NVM, [Mark Service] location 529, Exit Decurler Config Type is not set to 2 when an Exit
Decurler is installed.
The operation of the Decurler Gate Solenoid is determined by the number of times a sheet has
been inverted.
If the number of inversions is 0 or 2, the Decurler Gate Solenoid will be Off and the
sheets will be directed to the upper paper path of the Decurler.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-105
Principles of Operation
Table 3 Automatic Decurler Variables (used when Auto Decurler Enabled is selected)
Copy
Mode
Sheet
Orientation
Rel Humidity
(grains of water)
Number of
Inversions
Decurler Cam
Position - Disk Decurler Cam
Finisher
Position - MFF
Nip
Penetration
Level
Simplex
LEF
Less than 40
Low
Less than 40
Low
40 to 80
Med
Simplex
Duplex
Duplex
SEF
LEF
SEF
40 to 80
Med
Greater than 80
High
Greater than 80
High
Less than 60
Low
Less than 60
Low
60 to 100
Med
60 to 100
Med
High
High
N/A
Low
N/A
Low
N/A
Low
N/A
Low
Table 4 is used when the [Auto Decurler Disabled] or the [Max Decurler Enabled] button is
selected on the User Interface. It shows the Decurler Cam position and the Decurler Nip penetration levels achieved in the manual mode
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-106
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Table 4 Manual Decurler Variables (used when Max Decurler Enabled is selected)
Copy
Mode
Simplex
Duplex
Decurler Control
Setting
Decurler
Number of Cam
Inversions Position
Nip
Penetration
Level
Nip
Penetration
Amount
N/A
Low
0.2 mm
N/A
Low
0.2 mm
Low
0.2 mm
Med
0.5 mm
High
0.8 mm
Low
0.2 mm
Med
0.5 mm
High
0.8 mm
N/A
Low
0.2 mm
N/A
Low
0.2 mm
Low
0.2 mm
Med
0.5 mm
High
0.8 mm
Low
0.2 mm
Med
0.5 mm
High
0.8 mm
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-107
Principles of Operation
NOTE: To adjust the Decurler nip penetration when Maximum decurling is selected on the UI,
in NVM Tool, select [Mark Service]. To adjust the amount of nip penetration for Simplex mode,
modify the value in location 1164. To adjust the amount of nip penetration for Duplex mode,
modify the value in location 1165.
Decurler
Home
Sensor
Decurler
Position
Sensor
Decurler
Cam
Drive Belt
Decurler
Gate
Solenoid
Decurler Cam Drive
Motor
(not Shown)
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-108
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
NOHAD
Overview
The Noise, Ozone, Heat, and Dirt (NOHAD) system consists of:
NOHAD Thermostat
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-109
Principles of Operation
NOHAD
NOHAD Thermostat
Xerographic Blower
Principles of Operation
NOHAD
The NOHAD Thermostat is a normally closed temperature sensitive reed switch on 5VDC. It is
read at regular intervals in Standby, Power Save #1, and Run modes. When a consecutive
number of positive readings are detected, a high temperature fault occurs. The number of
faults are counted and recorded in fault registers. When 255 faults are recorded, the counting
stops and service is required.
When component control is first entered, all the Fans are deenergized except the PWB Cooling
Fan and the LVPS Cooling Fan. These fans not affected by component control. The other
Fans are energized to full speed operation when a code is entered. All Fans and the Blower go
to the appropriate duty cycle when the component control is exited.
May 2003
10-110
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Finishing
This tray can only handle paper that is 8 inches or more in the cross-process direction.
This tray has an optional offset function.
Overview
Finishing is accomplished by either the Offsetting Catch Tray, or an attached Finisher device.
These are discussed in more detail in the following paragraphs.
Finisher Top Tray - The Finisher Top Tray has a 250-sheet capacity. In addition to being
used as another output destination, this tray can be used as a sample, purge, or FAX output. Sheets enter the tray with the bound edge trailing, with the possible exception of
purged sheets. This tray can handle all paper sizes and is the only output location for
paper sizes smaller than 8 inches in the cross-process direction. This tray has an optional
offset function.
Offsetting
Catch Tray
Top Tray
Paper Path
from IOT
Disk
Stacker Tray
IOT
no staple
single staple
dual staple
The Finisher has two output trays; the Stacker Tray and the Finisher Top Tray (Figure 2).
Stacker Tray - This tray is the main output tray and has an 2000-sheet (unstapled) capacity. Stapled-set capacities are as follows:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-111
Principles of Operation
Finishing
Finisher Operation
The height of the elevator is controlled by the position of the bale, which rests on the stack during part of the disk rotation cycle. If the stack is too high a sensor becomes blocked and a signal is sent to the elevator motor to drive down. The elevator drives down until the sensor is
clear and then stops. There is no elevator height adjustment while sets are being compiled,
stapled or ejected. An elevator upper and lower limit switch stops the elevator in the event the
tray is driven too high or too low. A tray full sensor indicates when the elevator tray is filled to
maximum capacity.
Paper Transport
The Paper Transport Assembly receives paper from the IOT exit and transports them to an output tray. The main paper path is a straight-through path that consists of two drive nips. There is
a lower baffle that guides paper through this path. On the basic Disk Finisher there is also an
upper baffle that guides the paper. The High Capacity Disk Finisher does not have this upper
baffle on the main paper path.
The High Capacity Disk Finisher has a second paper path with a solenoid-operated gate. The
gate is normally open allowing paper to travel the straight path to the disks. When the gate
closes the paper travels to the top path. An upper and lower paper baffle guide the paper
through this path. The Q12 Sensor for the top paper path is in the lower baffle.
The Finisher paper transport is powered by the Transport Drive Motor, a +24 VDC stepper
motor. Power is distributed to all of the drive nips by pulleys, drive belts and gears.
The paper transport operates at two distinct speeds:
The Paper Transport subsystem receives sheets from the IOT exit and transports these sheets
to an output tray.
Finisher paper path sensors
The debounce strategy for the Finisher Entrance Sensor or the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor is
as follows: from a LE there is a lockout equal to {(PW-15mm)/velocity}ms before looking for a
TE & from a TE there is a lockout equal to 50ms before looking for the next LE.
Principles of Operation
Finishing
May 2003
10-112
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Power to the Moving Stapler is not available if the Moving Stapler Safety Gate (Figure 4)
is not in position. When the Safety Gate is in the down position, the gate actuates the
Moving Stapler Interlock Switch providing power to the Moving Stapler Motor.
Power to the Finisher is affected by the state of the following interlock switches (Figure 3).
Finisher Interlock Switch
Power to the Finisher is removed whenever this interlock is not actuated. Safety during
jam clearance is the main reason for this switch. All Finisher inputs and outputs are turned
off. All Finisher functions are delayed by 100 ms after the Finisher Interlock Switch is
actuated.
Power to the Fixed Stapler is not available if the Fixed Stapler Safety Gate (Figure 4) is
not in position. When the Safety Gate is in the down position, the gate actuates the Fixed
Stapler Interlock Switch, providing power to the Fixed Stapler Motor.
Moving Stapler
Safety Gate
Fixed Stapler
Safety Gate
Stacker Tray
Upper Limit
Switch
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-113
Principles of Operation
Finishing
The main paper path (Figure 6) is a straight through path. It consists of the Nip 1 Drive Rolls
and idlers, and the Nip 2 Drive Rolls and idlers. The nips are formed by 20 mm diameter elastomeric rolls and 20 mm diameter plastic idlers supported by leaf springs. The Nip 1 Drive Roll
and idlers are located 63 mm from the IOT frame and 51.5 mm from the outer finisher frame.
The Nip 2 Drive Rolls and idlers are located 72.7 mm downstream and are adjacent to the
Disks. A lower baffle guides paper through this path. The baffle also supports and locates the
Finisher Entrance Sensor. The sensor actuation point is located at 12.1 mm from Nip 1 for LE
actuation and is located at 27.6 mm from Nip 1 for TE actuation
The Main Paper Path drives consists of the following components (Figure 5):
Nip 2
Disk Fingers
Nip 1 / 2 Idler
Paper Path
from IOT
Disk
Stacker Tray
Disk Home
Sensor
Figure 6 Finisher Main Paper Path
Principles of Operation
Finishing
May 2003
10-114
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The Finisher Diverter Gate and the Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid (Figure 8)
The Finisher has a second paper path (Figure 8). This path has a solenoid operated Diverter
Gate. The gate is normally open allowing paper to travel the main paper path to the Disks. The
gate closes to allow paper to travel to the top path. The Finisher Diverter Gate Solenoid is
energized when the first sheet of the job sent to the top tray is 44mm before the gate or 44mm
after the IOT frame. It is turned off when the LE of the first sheet of the next main paper path
job is 44mm before the gate or 44mm after the IOT frame or when the last sheet of the last set
is at the Top Tray Paper Path Sensor. The top paper path also has two drive nips; Nip 3 and
Nip 4. Nip 3 is 122.7 mm downstream from Nip 1 and 97.7 mm from the Finisher Diverter Gate.
The nip configuration is the same as Nip 1. Nip 4 is 113 mm further downstream and is the exit
nip for the Finisher Top Tray. The exit nip is a corrugating nip. It consists of a 20 mm diameter
elastomeric roll with corrugating ridges. Common plastic idlers of 20 mm diameter are also
used. This top paper path has an upper paper baffle to guide the paper. This baffle pivots for
jam clearance access. A lower baffle also helps guide the paper through this path. Top Tray
Paper Path Sensor, is located in the lower baffle. The paper transport is powered by The
Transport Drive Motor. Pulleys and drive belts are used to distribute power to all of the nips. A
two sided belt is used to ensure that the nip adjacent to the disk rotates in the correct direction.
Nip 3 / 4 Idler
Nip 4
Top Tray
Full Sensor
Nip 1 / 2 Idler
Paper Path
from IOT
Nip 1
Diverter Gate
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-115
Principles of Operation
Finishing
For 65ppm:302.3mm/sec
For 40ppm:186mm/sec
It operates whenever the Finisher is initialized at start-up. The Motor moves the disks into
home position for the start of a print cycle. It also initializes when the copier is deenergized to
clear any sheet in the disk fingers and to allow easier jam clearance.
Once a print cycle has been initiated, paper enters the stationary disks and is driven to the end
of the disk finger slot.
Disk Home
Sensor
The disks receive pages from the paper transport and invert them during delivery to the lead
edge registration position. Support is provided by the disks to these pages during the tamping
operation. Motion of the bale bars is controlled via pins in the rotating disks and a cam profile in
the bale bar arm
The Disk mechanism consists of the following (Figure 9):
Two (2) Disks (not shown) which provide drive friction to the paper during inversion and
registration, and side shift friction during tamping. The disks have two fingers 180 degrees
apart.
Disk Drive Shaft and home flags which positions disks in the home position. There are
two home positions 180 degrees apart. The home position is 15.7mm of disk travel from
actuation of the Disk Home Sensor.
Disk Drive Gear which transmits motor power to the disk shaft
The Disk Home Sensor which detects when disks are in the home position
Principles of Operation
Finishing
May 2003
10-116
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Timing profile for 65 ppm and sheet greater than or equal to 229mm
When the LE of the sheet is at the Finisher Entrance Sensor plus 629ms, the Disk Motor turns
on. It accelerates to (186.0mm/s) within 5ms (1mm). It continues at 186.0mm/s for 590ms
(109.8mm) until the sheet reaches the registration edge and then continues for an additional
15mm and then stops. It turns on again at TE at Finisher Entrance Sensor plus 399ms for
sheets greater than 320mm. It must then accelerate and travel 71.8mm in 170ms max. and
stop at home. The Disk Motor stays off until the next LE at the Finisher Entrance Sensor plus
629ms. For greater than or equal to 229 sheets, less than or equal to 320mm, after the disk
stops. It turns on again when the LE is at the Finisher Entrance Sensor plus 1280 +240ms.
Timing profile for 40 ppm and sheet less than 229mm
When the LE of the sheet is at the Finisher Entrance Sensor plus 1031ms, the Disk Motor turns
on. It accelerates to process speed (186mm/s) within 5ms (1mm). It continues at process
speed for 590ms (109.8mm) until the sheet reaches the registration edge. At this point, the
disk motor stays at process speed for 161ms (30mm). It then must accelerate and return to the
disk home position within 250ms, which is a disk travel distance of 55.4mm. This return to
home profile must travel the first 16mm within 110ms to get past the collision point of the sheet
and the disk finger and then travel the remaining 39.4mm and stop within 140ms. The motor
stays off until the LE of the next sheet is at the Finisher Entrance Sensor plus 1031ms.
Timing profile for 40 ppm and sheets greater than or equal to 229mm
When the LE of the sheet is at the Finisher Entrance Sensor plus 1031ms, the Disk Motor turns
on. It accelerates to process speed (186mm/s) within 5ms (1mm). It continues at process
speed for 300ms and then stops within 10ms, to create a 25mm buckle in the sheet, which
takes 135ms. It then accelerates to process speed within 5ms (1mm) and continues for 285ms
until the sheet reaches the registration edge and then continues at process speed for 40ms
and then stops within 10ms. It turns on again at TE at the Finisher Entrance Sensor plus
515ms for sheets greater than 272mm. It must then accelerate and travel 71.8mm in 170ms
max and stop at home. The motor stays off until the LE of the next sheet is at the Finisher
Entrance Sensor plus 1031ms. For 229 greater than or equal to sheets less than or equal to
272mm, after the disk stops, it turns on again at LE at Finisher Entrance Sensor plus 1820 +
240ms.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-117
Principles of Operation
Finishing
Tamping
Overview
The Tamper mechanism aligns the copies for stapling. This mechanism is attached to the moving stapler frame. It consists of the Tamper Arm which contacts the edge of the paper, the
Tamper Motor, which is a stepper motor that provides power and motion to the Tamper Arm,
and the Tamper Home Sensor, which detects when the Tamper Arm is in the home position.
The Tamper Motor drives the Tamper Assembly to the home position prior to the start of a print
cycle. Home position of the Tamper is when the Tamper Home Sensor is blocked. The Tamper
is then moved to a second home position for each stapled set.
The Tamper mechanism translates sheets in the cross process direction to achieve side edge
registration for stapling and stacking. It works in conjunction with a retractable side registration
edge. This mechanism is attached to the moving stapler frame. It will be discussed later. For
single stapling and stacking, the tamping distance is 25mm. For dual stapling, the tamp distance varies with paper size and is based on the second staple position. The second staple
head is fixed
The Tamper mechanism consists of the following (Figure 10):
The Tamper is moved to a second home position for each stacked or stapled set. This position
is equal to paper edge location based on paper width minus 11mm. The Tamper is moved
350ms after the first sheet of the set reaches Finisher Entrance Sensor.
Home position is defined by the position of the Tamper face and is located 166.4mm from the
nominal center line of the paper path. Second home position for 12 or 304.8mm wide paper is
3mm away from home.
NOTE: In the following formulas, Q1 = Finisher Entrance Sensor.
The second home position can be calculated as:
DSecondHome=((304.8-PaperWidth) divided by 2 + 3) + NVM (tol. adjustment) for all
other sizes. If a second home position is calculated to be less than -3mm, then the move
should be limited to -3mm. This is the mechanical limits of the hardware
The maximum time to move between the furthest homes (53.8mm) is 280ms. The motor step
to linear displacement ratio is 200 steps=56.54mm or 0.2827 mm/step.
Also the maximum allowable homing time is 800ms.
Tamper Start Timing and Duration
Tamper Motor which is a stepper motor provides power and motion to the Tamper Arm
Tamper Home Sensor which detects when the Tamper Arm is in the home position
The Tamper has been moved to its second home position. The Tamper Motor is turned on for
each sheet of the set just before it reaches the registration edge.
For sheets less than 229mm in process direction: The on time is at LE at Q1 plus t5 -15ms 40ms with t5=(((x2+(128.2)+(110.8-6.1))/0.3023) +5ms+25ms) for 65ppm or LE at Q1 plus
945ms and at LE at Q1 + t5=(((x2+(128.2)+(110.8-1.0))/0.1860) +16ms+5ms) for 40ppm or LE
at Q1 +1626ms.
Tamper Motor
For 229mm less than or equal to sheet less than or equal to 320mm (65ppm): The on time is at
LE at Q1 plus 1280ms.
For 229mm less than or equal to sheet less than or equal to 272mm (40ppm): The on time is at
LE at Q1 + 1820ms.
For sheets greater than 320mm in process direction (65ppm): The on time is at TE at Q1+t4
with t4=(x2+6)/vel or TE at Q1+169ms.
Tamper
Arm
Tamper
Arm
Sensor
Principles of Operation
Finishing
May 2003
10-118
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The Tamper travels 25mm from the second home position to the registration point. It then
returns to the second home, until the next sheets arrival.The distance for tamping from the
second home position is given by the equation: DSingle = 25 mm
Tamping in Dual Staple Mode
In the dual staple mode, the Tamper is in the second home position. The Tamper Motor is energized for each sheet of the set at the same times as in the single staple mode. The tamper
function in this mode is to register sheets at the fixed stapler position. The distance to tamp
from the second home position for dual staple mode is equal to the distance of the stapler position to the second home position minus one fourth of the paper width.
After the Tamper has been moved to its second home position, the Tamper Motor is turned on
for each sheet of the set at the same times as in the single staple mode. The difference is the
tamper stroke.
The tamper function in this mode is to register sheets at the fixed stapler position. The centerline of the fixed stapler position is 132.9mm from the tamper home position. The staple position
for dual stapling is given as the PaperWidth/4 from the paper edges. The tamper stroke for any
paper size can be calculated.
The distance for tamping from the second home position is given by the equation: DDual =
((132.9 - (DSecondHome-NVM)) - 1/4PW)for all paper sizes except >279.4mm.
Simply stated the distance to tamp from second home for dual staple position is equal to the
distance of the stapler position to the second home minus one fourth of the paper width. The
maximum tamping distance is 47.4mm.
The maximum tamper position away from tamper home is about 82mm, and the furthest forward retractable side reg edge registration position is the position for dual staple registration of
11 or 279.4mm paper. To enable handling dual staple registration for paper sizes >279.4mm,
the retractable side reg edge is set at the 279.4mm position. This position is used when tamping sheets >279.4mm.
Therefore tamping for paper sizes >279.4mm varies by the following. TAMPING FOR DUAL
STAPLING MODE FOR SHEETS - 279.4mm<PW<=304.8mm: DDual* = [((342.45- (DSecondHome-NVM)) - PW)]mm.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-119
Principles of Operation
Finishing
Stapling
Stapler
Staple Positioning
Cassette-style Staplers are provided in the machine. This type stapler holds 5000 pre-cut staples in each cassette. The staples are driven up through the sets and clinched on the top of the
stack. The staple cartridges are identical whether used in the finisher or the Convenience Stapler.
There are two staplers in the Finisher (Figure 11): the Moving Stapler and the Fixed Stapler.
The Moving Stapler must be adjusted for positioning and registration. The Fixed Stapler is stationary and requires no positioning or registration adjustment.
Two Staple Motors provide the power to open and close the stapler jaws which drive, form, and
clinch the staples. The Moving Stapler Home Sensor and Fixed Stapler Home Sensor ensure
that the stapler has completed a stapling cycle and is ready to accept more copies. Two Staple
Present Sensors detect either that the cassette is low on staples, or if the cassette is present in
the machine.
Moving Stapler
The Single Staple cycle is initiated after the last sheet has travelled through the disks and the
disk mechanism is in the home position. The Staple Motor is deenergized when the Moving
Staple Home Sensor is blocked, indicating that the cycle is complete.
The Dual Staple cycle is initiated after the last sheet has travelled through the disks and the
disk is in the home position. The cycle is enabled when the Safety Switch is activated, indicating the safety gate for the Fixed Stapler is in place. The Stapler Motor is deenergized when the
Fixed Stapler Home Sensor is blocked, indicating the cycle is complete.
Both staplers are equipped with safety gates (Figure 12) to protect the customer from injury.
Fixed Stapler
Moving Stapler
Home Sensor
Gear Train
Moving Stapler
Safety Gate
Fixed Stapler
Safety Gate
The Stapler Mechanism goes to home position when the machine is energized. Home position
is at the single staple position for a 12-inch sheet. The stapler moves to the correct staple position based on the paper size and stapling mode.
Finishing
May 2003
10-120
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Registration Edge
The Registration Edge mechanism provides a lead edge registration position for compiling sets
as well as ejecting sets. It consists of a Registration Edge (Figure 14), which establishes the
lead registration edge for incoming sheets, and the Registration Edge Solenoid (Figure 13),
which drives the Registration Edge between the compile position and the eject position.
Retractable Registration
Edge Solenoid
Retractable
Registration
Edge
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-121
Principles of Operation
Finishing
Set Ejection
Completed single-sheets, stapled and unstapled sets are ejected into the Stacker Tray by the
Kicker.
The Kicker consists of the following (Figure 15):
Kicker, which is parked behind the lead registration edge for incoming sheets and moves
(kicks) the sheets or sets into the Stacker Tray.
Kicker Motor, drives the Kicker between the compile position and the eject position.
Kicker Home Sensor, detects when the Kicker is in the home position.
Kicker Home Sensor
Kicker Drive
Motor
Kicker
Principles of Operation
Finishing
May 2003
10-122
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Stacker Tray
Drive Motor
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-123
Principles of Operation
Finishing
Stacker Tray
Full Sensor
Principles of Operation
Finishing
May 2003
10-124
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Table 1 shows the possible conditions and appropriate actions when the sensors are checked.
Table 1 Stack Height Tray Sensor Conditions
Tray Full
Sensor
Stack Too
High Sensor
Stack Height
Sensor
Blocked
Blocked
Stack Height
Sensor
Status
Action
Blocked
Tray Too
High
Unblocked
Blocked
Correct
None
Stack Height
Unblocked
Unblocked
Tray Too
Low
Blocked
Tray Full
Finished Copies
Pivot Point
Stacker Tray
Upon entering Standby, the sensors are checked to ensure the tray is at the correct position for
accepting sheets for stapled or unstapled sets. (The Flag blocks the Stack Height Sensor and
the Stack Too High Sensor and the Tray Full Sensor are unblocked.)
The machine goes to run mode. In the stapled sets mode, 2 to 50 sheets are compiled in the
stapler throat. The Stack Too High Sensor and Stack Height Sensor are checked to determine
if the stacker tray should be driven down. If both sensors are blocked by the Flag, the Stacker
Tray Drive Motor energizes and lowers the tray, causing the Rear Bale Arm to pivot until the
Stack Too High Sensor is unblocked. This cycle must be completed before another copy
comes through.
A Top Tray capacity of 250 sheets (200 sheets for 5.5 in x 8.5 in (A5) paper).
The unstapled sets mode operates the same way except that when there is more than 25 copies in the stacked sets, they are compiled and ejected onto the stack in segments.
When the Tray Full Sensor and the blocked Stack Height Sensor determine that the tray is
almost full, the copier delivers all sets that are currently in progress. At this point there is room
for 56 more sheets in the tray. Up to that many sheets will be output to the Finisher if not in stapler mode.
In stapler mode, any small sets, up to 50 sheets, are printed and stapled, but no additional sets
are directed to the Finisher.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-125
Finishing
For 8.5 x 11" SEF and 8.5 x 14" Portrait Staple Mode, all 4 offsetting positions are used (Refer
to Figure 21):
The tray moves from Position A or Position B to Position D to compile the first set.
The tray then moves outboard to Position B where the set is stapled and ejected.
Top Tray
For the next set, the tray moves to Position C to compile the set.
The customer has the option to select where unstapled copy and print sets will be sent by
default. They may either be sent to the Top Tray or the Main Tray of the Finisher. Because of
this customer option, the Top Tray has been redesigned to reliably stack up to 250 copies. The
capacity is slightly less, 200 sheets, for 8.5 in x 5.5 in (A5) paper.
The tray then moves outboard to Position A where the set is stapled and ejected
The output (the completed, stapled sets) in this mode are placed in Position A and Position B as are all other sets following the above sequence.
When this mode is complete the tray will resume its normal operation using only Position
A and Position B for offsetting.
To change the default location for unstapled sets, enter [Tools]. In Tools, select [System Settings], [More], [More] to get to Screen 3 of 3. In Screen 3, select [Output Options], then select
[Output Location].
Main Tray Thin Stapled Set Capacity
The Stacker Tray has been redesigned to provide greater staple relief than the Document
Centre 255/265 Finisher. A magnet has been incorporated into the tray that ensures the stapled corner of single-stapled sets are at or below the level of the rest of the set. This increases
to 100 sets the maximum number of thin stapled sets the Stacker Tray can reliably stack.
To change the settings for thin stapled sets, enter [Tools]. In Tools, select [System Settings],
[More], [More] to get to Screen 3 of 3. In Screen 3, select [Output Options], then select [Thin
Stapled Sets].
Single Step: Steps the tray to the next position when [Continue] is selected. Position
sequence is A to B, B to C, C to D, D to A and repeats.
Continuous Cycle: Steps the tray continuously when [Continue] is selected. The tray
pauses for .5 seconds at each position. The tray stops when Stop is selected.
Number of Thin Sets before Finisher Tray unload. This can be 20 to 1000 sets. The
maximum recommended is 100. If greater than 100 is selected, set registration problems
may occur.
Tray Home Position: At the start of the Single or Continuous test, selecting [Start] will
cause the tray to move to the Home position (position A). After arriving at Home, the button will change from [Start] to [Continue].
Sensor Monitor: The state of the Stacker Tray Offset Sensor will be monitored at all
times except while continuous mode is running.
On test entry, the system will read and display the state of the Stacker Tray Offset Sensor.
2.
3.
4.
5.
For all jobs except 8.5 x 11" SEF and 8.5 x 14" Portrait Staple Mode, only 2 positions, A and B,
are used (Refer to Figure 20):
6.
7.
If using Single Step mode, the tray will stop at the next position.
8.
If using Continuous mode, tray will continue stepping until [Stop] is selected.
If the tray is in Position A at the start of the job, the Offset Motor is energized to move the
tray to Position B where the first set is compiled/stapled then ejected. The tray then
moves to Position A for the next job. The tray offsets between Position A and Position B
for successive jobs.
To run this test, in Diagnostic Navigator, select [Finisher], [Finisher Tests], [Main Tray/Offset
Position].
If the tray is in Position B at the start of the job, the Offset Motor is energized to move the
tray to Position A where the first set is compiled/stapled then ejected. The tray then
moves to Position B for the next job. The tray offsets between Position A and Position B
for successive jobs.
Principles of Operation
Finishing
May 2003
10-126
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Figure 21 8.5 x 11" SEF and 8.5 x 14" Portrait Staple Mode
Figure 20 All jobs except 8.5 x 11" SEF and 8.5 x 14" Portrait Staple Mode
Service Tray
In the Capstan Driven Tamper, the gear on the Tamper Motor and the gear rack on the Tamper
Arm have been replaced by the Tamper Capstan and the Tamper Arm Drive Cable. This was
done to reduce the noise generated during Tamper initialization and Tamper operation. The
Tamper operation is the same as the operation of the gear driven Tamper.
The Finisher Set Separator has been redesigned to improve set-to-set registration.
The Kicker now has a Collapsible Kicker Arm that enables the Moving Stapler a greater range
of movement. This was needed for the correct placement of staples when dual stapling on
landscape (SEF) sets and single stapling on landscape (SEF) sets.
The Canard Wing is now mounted to the Retractable Registration Edge. The Canard Wing is
raised during the portrait staple mode reducing the possibility of the stapled set being misregistered.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-127
Principles of Operation
Finishing
Tamper Arm
Drive Cable
Tamper
Capstan
Tamper Motor
Principles of Operation
Finishing
May 2003
10-128
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A cover for the Nip 1 idlers and Nip 3 Idlers has been added to prevent the idlers from becoming dislodged during jam clearance. When a Finisher Transport Baffle is ordered, it will have
this new cover.
The magnets that secured the Finisher Transport Baffle in the correct position against the Exit
Baffle have been removed. The Finisher Transport Baffle is now held in the correct position by
weights that are located just to the left of the Area 5 handle.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-129
Principles of Operation
Finishing
Principles of Operation
Finishing
May 2003
10-130
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Overview
Windows 95/98
The ESS (Electronic Subsystem) Hardware platform provides an Ethernet PCI Controller with
RJ45 connectivity for the Document Centre 240/255/265 LP/ST. Based on a PowerPC Microprocessor, the ESS performs many essential functions for the system.
Supported Network Interfaces
A network interface is a device which allows the machine to communicate on the network.
TheDocument Centre 240/255/265 ST/LP can be equipped with several different network interfaces to allow it to be connected to various types of networks. Here is a list of supported network interfaces for the DocumentCentre 240/255/265 ST/LP:
The use of CentreWare in this environment requires the Novell Client software to
perform printer discovery
TCP/IP (lpr) printing using Microsoft TCP/IP stack and a third party software such as
NIPRINT
The use of CentreWare in this environment requires the Novell Client 32 software to
perform printer discovery
Ethernet 10BaseT (built-in on the ESS PWB) 10 Megabits/second with twisted pair wires
through the RJ45 connector (10Base2 cabling can be used with external transceiver/
adapter) (10Base5 cabling can be used with external transceiver/adapter)
The use of CentreWare in this environment requires the Novell Client 32 software to
perform printer discovery
Macintosh OS 7.1/7.5/8.0
PPD
Ethernet 100BaseT (with add-on PWB available and L18 software) 100 Megabits/second
through RJ45 connector (Category 5 cabling required)
A Network Operating System (NOS), is software that controls the operation of the network and
manages everything that happens over the network. The NOS resides on a central file server
or servers. Customers use many kinds of network operating systems and the Document Centre 240/255/265 supports a large variety of NOSs. A protocol is an agreed-upon standard format for transmitting data between two devices. Many network devices can transmit data using
more than one protocol.
HP-UX Version 9.0 (or greater, with native tools support ONLY)
Here are the Network Operating Systems and protocols supported by the Document Centre
240/255/265:
IBM OS/2
OS/2 Warp 3 Peer to Peer printing using NetBEUI protocol and TCP/IP protocol
OS/2 Warp 4 Peer to Peer printing using NetBEUI protocol and TCP/IP protocol
Supported PDLs
Multiple Page Description Languages (PDLs) are supported by the ESS. The ESS is capable
of rendering jobs which may be composed of documents defined in one or more of the supported PDLs. An automatic emulation sensing capability allows the interpreter to interpret and
rasterize each document within a job. The ESS comes standard with PCL5E interpreter and
an Adobe PostScript Level 2 decomposer. Support for PostScript Level 3 and PCL6 is
planned for L18 software.
Image Quality
The available resolution modes for Postscript printing are (Fast Scan dpi x Slow Scan dpi x bits
per pixel) 600x600x1, 600x600x2, 1200x1200x1 and 1800x1800x1. PCL printing is a
600x600x1 dpi. PCL images at lower resolutions are converted by the print driver software.
Increasing the resolution will consume more EPC (Electronic Pre-collation) memory storage
per page. The performance (speed) of image decomposition is better at lower resolution. The
default resolution mode is 600x600x2 for Postscript and 600x600x1 for PCL. PCL images are
often chosen because they are faster to create.
Peer to Peer printing using NetBEUI protocol and TCP/IP protocol (TCP/IP not
included with Windows 3.11. Requires third party software)
Concurrency
TCP/IP (lpr) printing requires third party Winsock stack and lpr utility
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-131
Principles of Operation
Decomposing a job
Performance
The Lakes ESS is capable of decomposing PCL5E jobs and PostScript jobs at the rated speed
of 65/55/40 pages per minute (ppm).
Embedded Internet Server
An embedded Internet server is standard as part of the Document Centre 240/255/265 ST/LP
product. It is intended to provide features such as submission of print ready files, device status,
queue listings, and paper tray contents. Through the use of any industry standard browser
(Netscape 3.0 or greater, Internet Explorer 3.0 or greater), both system administrators and
standard users will be able to access information from and input data to the ST/LP via the web
browser. The URL for the device is its IP number used for addressing the machine over the
HTTP and TCP/IP protocols.
Because the Eagle chip uses a 64 bit memory interface, SIMMS must always be installed
in multiples of two. The ESS senses the type and speed of installed SIMMS and will configure the chip for the user installed size and speed of memory automatically.
NVRAM
The Non-Volatile RAM (NVRAM) provides 4KB of NVRAM for storage and configuration
information. This is provided through a device which combines the RAM with a battery
and a real-time clock. The NVRAM contains among other things, information about the
PWB serial number and information needed by the ROM at boot time.
Real-Time Clock (RTC)
The real-time clock is a portion of the NVRAM component. It supplies a battery backed
clock which continuously stores and updates the current time, even when the system
power is removed.
Storage
ESS Hardware
The ESS hardware provides a single PWB (the ESS PWB, Figure 1) which includes processor,
memory, and expansion capability.
The base ESS configuration reserves 16MB of RAM for a frame buffer. The additional 16 MB is used for everything else.
Hard Disk
(Figure 1) The standard configuration supports an internal SCSI-2 hard disk referred
to as fast SCSI. At various stages of development, the size has changed. Some
machines may still have a 1GB disk drive, newer machines are being built with a
2GB Quantum drive. The disk is partitioned into four partitions as follows:
/dev/sd0a
ESS PWB
/dev/sd0b
/dev/sd0c
/dev/sd0d
where a is the boot partition, b is the root partition, c is the usr partition, and d is the
tmp partition.
IOT Interface
The IOT interface consists of a dual backside IEEE P1386 type connector which connects
the PCI bus to the Main Control PWB.
Expansion Capability
Expansion is accomplished via the PCI Bus Extender PWB (Figure 3). Two IEEE P1386
type connectors on the front of the ESS PWB connect to the PCI Bus Extender PWB
which allows attaching up to three daughter boards.
Connectivity
The base configuration consists of three connectivity ports: one serial port (TTY port), a
P1284 Parallel port and a 10BaseT Ethernet interface. There are presently no plans to
provide an internal bidirectional driver to support the ESS parallel port.
Processor
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-132
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The base platform has one built in 10MBps Ethernet interface for connectivity with a host
in peer-to-peer and client/server networks applications. The interface conforms to IEEE
802.3 standard. An RJ45 connector is provided to enable interconnection with UTP category 5 wiring. A shielded RJ45 cable is shipped with printer and must be used for EME
compliance.
TokenRing is supported as an option to the base platform via a PCI TokenRing card
mounted on the PCI Bus Extender PWB (Figure 3). It provides two ring speeds: 4 and 16
mbps. The Token Ring driver provides the user with the ability to read the Token Ring
MAC address only when the device is connected to a ring. Token Ring will also allow the
user to set the Token Ring MAC address, ring speed and the routing type.
In the future ( L18 ), Fast Ethernet will be supported as an option to the base platform.
ESS DRAM
SIMMs (standard configuration shown,
two slots
empty)
Operating System
SESS Applications Software
SESS is an acronym for Strategic ESS. SESS was developed to have common ESS
architecture for the Document Centre products. SESS software is based on Smart technology. The Scalable Multifunction Microkernel Architecture Technology (Smart) consists
of a fully-integrated set of software components that have been optimized for quality and
market needs. The basic Microkernel supports Networking and Multifunctional facilities.
There are four major software subsystems in the Smart Microkernel:
Connectivity Services (CS) subsystem provides LAN client/server and peer to peer
connections, printing protocols, various protocol stacks, and their diagnostics.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-133
Principles of Operation
The Smart system supports multiple protocols stacks at the connectivity level. Each
Smart Dynamic Loadable Module (DLM) protocol stack is found in the /tmp/dlms directory.
APPLETALK
Booting
The AppleTalk protocols are implemented by the stacks as LynxOS streams. Two
programs must be executed in order to support printing. They are appletalkd and
atalk_pap processes. The appletalkd program is required to maintain the stack and
to support the protocol. The atalk_pap program must be executed in order to support printing. In general, these programs will be started automatically by the System
Controller if the dlm is enabled.
If printer fails to receive AppleTalk print jobs, make sure that the appletalkd and
atalk_pap processes are running by executing the command ps -ax at the tty operating system prompt.
When Lakes is powered on, control is immediately assumed by the Open Boot
PROM (OBP). The boot process is controlled by a number of configuration variables.
The configuration variables are stored in the system NVRAM. These variables determine the start-up machine configuration. NVRAM configuration variables can be
viewed using this command printenv and can be changed using the setenv
command before the operating system is booted. Next the countdown automatic
selftest boot process are shown. The OBP goes out to disk then loads and starts the
kernel lynx.os. The kernel starts up the initial master process which is responsible to
get the name of the startup script
(/bin/rc) to run.
BANYAN VINES
This Smart System provides support for the Banyan Vines protocols over Ethernet in
the LynxOS kernel. The vpsd and vps programs must be executed in order to support Banyan. Vpsd program maintains the Protocol stack and vps provides Banyan
Protocol Module capability. In general these programs will be started automatically
by System Control if the dlm is enabled.
1.
2.
If printer fails to receive Banyan jobs, make sure that the vpsd and vps processes
are running by executing the command ps-ax at the tty operating system prompt.
NETBIOS
This system provides support for NetBIOS/NetBEUI over Ethernet or Token Ring
and Netbios over IP over Ethernet in the LynxOS kernel. The llcd, netbiosd, and
netbios_print programs must be executed in order to support Netbeui over Ethernet
or Token Ring. The netbios_print program must be executed in order to support Netbios over IP over Ethernet. These programs will be started automatically by System
Control if the dlm is enabled.
If printer fails to receive NetBIOS jobs, make sure that the llcd, netbiosd,
netbios_print are running by executing the command ps-ax at the tty operating system prompt.
NOVELL
The SMart provides support Novell IPX/SPX protocols over Ethernet and Token Ring
in the LynxOS kernel. These protocols are enabled by the npsd program. The
release also provides Novell Pserver capability via the nps4 program. The programs
npsd and nps4 must be running in order to support the Novell PServer on the Microkernel. Generally these programs will be started automatically by System Control if
the dlm is enabled. Novell supports three distinct CSMA/CD frame types (802.3,
802.2, Ethernet_II) and may operate over Ethernet or Token Ring (802.5).
The npsd and nps4 processes must be running in order for the printer to function
properly on a Novell Network. They can be checked by executing the ps-ax command at the tty operating system prompt.
HTTP
The SMart system provides support for the Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP).
The http process must be running in order to support HTTP. In General, this program
will be started by System Control if the dlm is enabled.
The embedded http server supports any client tool that uses HTTP 1.0 ( Need
frames support and client Netscape Navigator 4.0, Microsoft Explorer 4.0). The http
process can be checked by executing the ps-ax command at the tty operating system prompt.
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-134
3.
4.
Warm reset: A warm reset resets an individual ESS process and then performs
the process start-up handshaking procedure.
Cold Reset: A cold reset stops all ESS processes and then performs the system start-up procedure, restarting all applications.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Refer to Figure 4.
1.
The client submits a print job to the 240/255/265 using the print drivers installed on the
clint workstation.
2.
In power saver modes, the ESS maintains the capability to receive and store jobs submitted by network clients. When a condition to exit power saver mode has occurred, for
example, when a print operation is requested from a network client, the ESS will send a
message to the IOT Main Control PWB (Atlanta) to exit power saver mode.
The job is received by the Protocol Module which forwards the job to the connectivity core
(DCH Connectivity Services) and the Document Manager (DM).
3.
The Document Manager spools the incoming job on the ESS Hard Disk.
4.
The print job is decomposed in the ESS and transferred to the Image Frame Store.
5.
The image is then transferred to the IOT Main Control PWB where it is processed similarly to all other images in the IOT.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-135
Principles of Operation
For AppleTalk, since a router must be present, the driver is opened and checked for
existence of RTMP (Router Table Maintenance Protocol) which is normally broadcast by all AppleTalk routers every 30 seconds.
For NetBIOS, a request to register a name is sent to the naming registration service.
ESS On-Board diagnostics are included as part of the firmware on the ESS PWB or are part of
the operating system. ESS On-Board diagnostics contains those routines that can only be
executed when the system is powering up and/or before the operating system is loaded. To
view the results of these diagnostics, one must access the serial port on the ESS. The base
ESS Platform supports manual diagnostics in off-line mode. In this mode, the ESS does not
accept job submissions from the network.
Parallel/Serial Interface
SCSI Controller
Get Network Data is very similar to the Echo test in its look and how it functions. It has
more capabilities for error messages in the results window and in a log file.
Get Network Data can be initiated from the machine UI. The log files will not be available
at the UI.
Get Network Data is not fully implemented in L17 software. Only IPX (Novell) and TCP/IP
(Unix) are functional. Even if other protocols are enabled, they will remain grayed out.
Do not confuse this behavior with Echo Test. In Echo Test, if these are grayed out, It is
because they are not enabled or configured properly.
Test Behavior -TCP/IP
The ESS collects data from all responding IP routers and lpd hosts in the local subnet. When the data is collected, a TFTP window will pop-up while data is transferring to the PWS.
When complete, a message will appear in the Results window indicating that the
selected protocol is present.
When the View Log button is selected, the following information is available in the
text file that is displayed:
MACHINE CONFIGURATION
Host Name
Several useful diagnostic routines are available from the Command Line Interface, such as:
IP Address
watch-net
Net Mask
probe-scsi
Broadcast address
Default Gateway
test /nvram
Interface
showstack
test /memory
Responders
More information on these tests is located in GP24 , ESS Command Line Diagnostics.
All devices discovered will be listed, along with their IP address, MAC address, and
Subnet Mask.
PWS Diagnostics
This is accomplished by sending an icmp echo (ping) request to the local broadcast
and then looking at the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) table. For every entry in
the list, the machine sends a directed request asking for the subnet mask.
The following diagnostic routines are available in the PWS Diagnostic Navigator, in the ESS/
Network tab (except for Network Configuration). All are available directly connected to the
machine or through a RDT connection.
Echo Test
Echo Test verifies that the ESS can communicate with the network. It is also available on
the machine UI in the Tools pathway. The test is implemented differently, depending upon
the Network protocol:
For IPX (Novell), first the system sends out a Get Nearest Server request. At least
one local server must have Get Nearest Server enabled. Once a connection is
established, an IPX Diagnostic Inquiry is made to broadcast.
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-136
This is a convenient way to check for the subnet mask if a systems administrator is
not available.
If data is missing, that host does not support the standard IP mask request.
Currently, (L17 SW) the host names are only available if a DHCP and DNS server
are available.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
For TCP/IP, an IP ping packet is sent to the broadcast address for which the machine is
configured. If no response is indicated, always ensure that the broadcast address is correct. In TCP/IP, the following scenarios will result in the following messages to be displayed:
If no other hosts or routers respond - TCP/IP protocol not found. Please check
printer network connections.
Test Pattern - The test pattern job has options for paper size and the PDL (Composition) type. This option can be useful if unusual IQ defects are occurring. It tests a
known good image through the PDL interpreter on the ESS. If for some reason the
known good image won't render properly, the ESS Software Verification routine can
be run to verify the integrity of the ESS software.
When the test is started, the routine will do various comparison checks between the
primary ESS Software partition and the manifest file. It will look for all directories,
and replace any missing ones. Any files that are known to be static, that is, never
changing, are checked and replaced if necessary. It also checks file permissions.
Dynamic files that are corrupt or missing, will be replaced with the same file with
default values. Created files that are missing or corrupted will result in a message
that the ESS must be rebooted. Created files include those that hold network configuration data.
If errors are found on the primary partition, one of two things will occur. A message
will be displayed that files were repaired, or if the damage is extensive, a message
will be displayed indicating that the ESS Software should be reloaded. The use of
this tool is described in the 16-C ESS Software Verification RAP.
Server Name
Port ID (if discovered over Ethernet, Token Ring, Fast Ethernet)
Server Network Operating System (version)
NDS Enabled
Number of Hops (always 1 in L17 SW)
Internal Network Number
Attached Network Number (s)
Only two messages are presently implemented in Get Network Data for Novell in L17 software. A server did respond, or no server responded. In L18 software, the following scenarios will result in the following messages to be displayed:
If no servers or routers respond - No servers responding. Please check printer network connections.
If the file server name defined in the ESS configuration is not found - Novell queue
server {server name} could not be located.
If the ESS is not attached to the file server - Lakes device not attached to server
{server name}.
If the ESS is attached to the server, but not attached to the print queue - Lakes
device not attached to queue {print queue name}.
If the ESS successfully connected to the defined Novell file server and print queue Lakes device is attached to queue {print queue name} on server {server name}.
NOTE: Currently (L17.5 software), this test will only work on a local network. It can
not go out beyond a router. If the printer is printing from a server across a router, the
test will fail.
NOTE: As of this writing, there were several error messages that came up when running this routine that should not. Bulletin 299 identifies some of them. Others that
indicate that file filename.off are missing are also incorrect. After running Verify ESS
Software, network configuration should be rechecked.
By default, retrieve by Last X is selected. This retrieves faults in order. If there are any
faults logged, it will come back with a Get Error Log Entries window. This details how
many faults are in the log. (The exact number retrieved can be set by changing the number of entries to retrieve field, but it defaults to 40 to be consistent with the IOT).
There are two types of test jobs available from the ESS Test Jobs area, the Power On/
Demo and Test Pattern.
For each line retrieved, you can select a row and the name of the fault will appear in the
description window.
Also, errors can be retrieved by time. If you wanted to retrieve errors that occurred on a
particular day, select Time. You will be given options on sorting by time and date range.
Power On/Demo - The Power On/Demo job will print the previous configuration
report, which is generated at every graceful power-down. If you prefer, a new one
will be created if Generate New Configuration Report is selected. This will take
slightly longer.
If you look at the Configuration Report, the first section is labeled Report Profile.
The Report Profile Date and Time is for when the data was gathered. If Generate
New Configuration Report was not selected, this date and time will be of the last
graceful power-down.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-137
ESS Logs
This routine is most helpful to software developers, but may help you understand intermittent failures.
There are 6 different logs available. They are described as follows:
State/Process Log - Any state changes of software processes are logged here.
Principles of Operation
Shutdown Fault Log - Information about shutdown faults that have occurred.
Error/Warning Log - Information about any errors or warnings that have occurred.
Debug Log - All of the above logs compressed into one log.
Logging can be disabled. This may be necessary in some rare cases since enabling logging can have a negative impact on ESS performance. This should not be expected
under normal circumstances. Logging should be left at default setting unless you are
requested by Field Engineering to change them.
ESS Online/Offline
When the PWS is connected to the machine, the machine enters diagnostic mode and
automatically puts the ESS offline. This is done to ensure that the machine will not start
up while it is being serviced. ESS Online/Offline provides a means for a Service Engineer
to prints jobs when in diagnostics.
NOTE: The machine will print any other jobs that are in the queue before the priority job.
You must remember to put the machine Offline to continue servicing.
Network Configuration
Network Configuration is available in the Configuration Tab in the Diagnostic Navigator.
The network configuration that is stored on the ESS can be displayed on the PWS.
Select View to display the Network Configuration. It also provides a means for a Service
Engineer to change network configuration values.
If, for some reason, the Configuration Report cannot be run, the same information is available on the Network Configuration routine.
A pop-up window appears called Edit ESS Configuration Values. Here you can change
the values for many of the configuration settings. When a value is changed, click on Write
Value, and the setting will be changed. This routine can be run remotely via RDT. Mistakes in configuration settings can be corrected this way
Principles of Operation
May 2003
10-138
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
460/470 ESS
ESS General Description
The ESS includes:
9.1 GB, 7200 RPM Wide SCSI-2 System Hard Disk Drive
Integrated 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface Category 5 cable (or better) is required
ESS Software
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-139
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
NOTE: All of the ESS components are located in the Card Cage at the rear of the printer/copier
(Figure 1). The Card Cage also contains the Main Control Board (MCB).
Image Hard
Drive
ESS DRAM
DIMM
433MHz Intel
Celeron
ESS Hard
Drive
SCSI-2 Hard
Drive Controller Interface
ESS PWB
(motherboard)
ESS PWB
Interface
Diagnostic
LEDs
Token Ring
PWB PCI Slot
Parallel Port
IPA PWB PCI
Slot
NOTE: The MCB PWB (Alanta Platinum 860NLX) was redesigned to accommodate the new
ESS and Card Cage design. The MCB PWB connects to the Riser PWB using a standard PCI
connector. The ESS PWB is connected to the MCB PWB through its mounting position. A connector on the back of the ESS PWB is mated to a connector on the back of the Main Control
PWB.
NOTE: A Card Cage Riser exists only if an ESS exists.
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
ESS
IPA PWB
May 2003
10-140
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
ESS Ports
Status
Monitor
CR1
Flashing - Activity
LAN
CR2
Green
pwr
Parallel Port - Used during software upgrades (Can also be used for Parallel printing.)
CR3
SCSI
CR4
Light Green
PMG
CR7
Red
+12v
CR8
Off
-12v
Token Ring is supported with an optional Token Ring PWB card. The card mounts into the PCI
bus slot on the Riser PWB in the ESS assembly.
CR9
Red
3.3v (CPU)
CR10
Red
5v
NOTE: A special adapter cable is not required with this card. Instead, an RJ45 port on the end
of the card will accept the customers Un-shielded Twisted Pair cable directly.
Table 3 Token Ring LAN Connector LEDs
Voltage
TH1
3.3v
TH2
+5v
TH3
+12v
TH4
-12v
TH5
-5v
TH6
gnd
TH7
gnd
TH8
gnd
TH9
gnd
LED Color
LED State
Green
Off
Indicates
Not inserted into the Token Ring
Green
On
Red
On (Steady State)
Red
On (Pulsing)
NOTE: The Red and Green LEDs on steady together signify the machine has joined the Token
Ring and is sending and receiving on the ring. If the machine does not print at this point, then
the machine is mostly likely not configured correctly for the customers protocol(s).
IPA PWB (Network Scanning)
Network Scanning is supported with an optional IPA PWB card. The card mounts into the PCI
bus slot on the Riser PWB in the ESS assembly. It also requires 96MB ESS Memory
NCP (Netware) and TCP/IP are supported on Ethernet or Token Ring.
NOTE: Faxing is supported with an IPA PWB.
The Alternate Boot is used to diagnose ESS problems and to load ESS software.
The standard configuration is an internal SCSI-2, referred to as fast SCSI. The disk is partitioned into four partitions as follows:
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-141
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
NOTE: The Alternate Boot Utility should be used when the ESS is down or unavailable with
Diagnostics Navigator and/or the PWS Wizard.
CAUTION
2.
When loading software the Alternate Boot Utility will delete all Scanning templates and FAX
Repository settings residing on the ESS.
3.
Connect the serial cable and Null Modem adaptor between the PWS serial port and the
ESS Serial Port Connector.
NOTE: See General Procedures (GP22 - Connecting the PWS to the ESS Serial Port, as
required.
The following equipment is required to connect the PWS to the ESS on the DC460/470
Table 4 is an example of n ESS Boot sequence. The left column is the text of the boot
sequence (the line numbers are for reference only. and do not appear in the boot sequence.).
The right column of the table describes the boot sequence.
NOTE: Note: The Null Modem for the DC240/255/265 cannot be used.
Table 4 ESS Boot sequence
Boot sequence
Description
Lines 1-8
Whats happening here:
System Information
-BIOS Version
-BIOS ID
-CPU Speed
-Post
-Loads BIOS
Critical checks:
-Ensure the system ID is set to Lakes.
-If there is no info here then you want to
check the 5V on the Riser PWB or
reseat the ESS PWB or replaced the
Riser PWB
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
Lines 9-22
Whats happening here:
-The ESS is trying to boot to partition
B and load the LynxOS.
Critical checks:
-If the boot sequence stops here, then
you would repair the partition using Alt
Boot.
-If the boot fails after the repair partition
then reload S/W.
May 2003
10-142
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Description
Lines 23-30
Whats happening here:
- The LYNX OS has taken over the boot
up and a File System check is being
performed on all partition.
Lines 31-50
Whats happening here:
-Loading the elt Driver for ESS to
Atlanta PWB communication,
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Critical checks:
- If the boot up sequence stops or if any
error messages appear in this section,
(lines 23- 30), (bad block on partition
). Run S/W verify using Alt Boot.
- Format HDD (Seagate and reload
SW), or suspect a bad HDD.
Critical checks:
-Suspect bad S/W and run S/W verify
using Alt Boot to fix.
May 2003
10-143
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
Description
Lines 51-77
Whats happening here:
- SCM driver is being loaded for ESS to
IOT communication.
- Loopback check for ESS PWB to
Atlanta PWB communication, (lines 59
to 77).
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
Critical checks:
- Connection between the Atlanta PWB
and ESS PWB.
-If SMC Driver cannot load, run SW
verify using Alt Boot.
May 2003
10-144
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Description
Lines 78-114
Whats happening here:
- Checking the PCI slots on the
Riser PWB for the IPA PWB.
- The IPA Driver is being loaded.
- Checking the RAM allocation for
scanning.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Critical checks:
- Reseat the IPA PWB.
- Replace the IPA PWB
- Replace the Riser PWB
May 2003
10-145
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
Description
Lines 115-131
Whats happening here:
- Checking for the Token Ring PWB.
- Loading the Token Ring driver.
Lines 132-147
Whats happening here:
- Log files are being saved.
- Start NFS services, WINs loads
- Load app (Start Lakes)
Line 152
Default gateway
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
Critical checks:
- Reseat the Token Ring PWB.
- Ensure that drop cable is good.
Driver will not load if we cannot insert
to the Ring (Phantom Current).
- Replace the Token Ring PWB.
- Replace the Riser PWB.
Lines 124-126
Trying to establish communication
between ESS/MCB
Critical checks:
- If boot fails here then reset NVRAM.
- Perform GoldenDisk
Reload ESS S/W.
May 2003
10-146
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Description
153. ****************************************************************
154. ***************** ESS System is 'OPERATIONAL' ********
155. ****************************************************************
156. ****************************************************************
157. **** ESS System 'SYNCHRONIZED' with SYSTEM MANAGER
****
158. ****************************************************************
159. ****************************************************************
160. ************* DIGITAL COPIER PLATFORM 'AVAILABLE'
*************
161. ****************************************************************
162. ****************************************************************
163. ******************* UI PLATFORM 'AVAILABLE' *******************
164. ****************************************************************
165. ds: ds_delete_obj() got out of range object handle 0, tid = 27
Contents
Help Button
ESS Logs
The PWS Wizard - See Kit Installation Instructions Part 3 of. 4. The serial and parallel
ports on top of the printer/copier are required for the Wizard.
ESS Online/Offline
Software Verification
The Alternate Boot Method Kit - See Kit Installation Instructions Part 4 of 4. The ESS
serial port and the ESS parallel port are used for this procedure.
Echo Test
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-147
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
Help Button
Echo Test
The help button when selected will give you information about the PWS window you are in. If it
is a test or a procedure, it will tell you how to perform the test or procedure.
For Novell, the system sends out a Get Nearest Server request. At least one server must have
Get Nearest Server enabled. Once a connection is established, an IPX Diagnostic Inquiry is
made to broadcast.
ESS Logs
For TCP/IP, the system sends an ICMP Echo request to broadcast.
State/Process Log - Any state changes of software processes are logged here
Shutdown Fault Log - Information about shutdown faults that have occurred. File name is
(Sdfault.log)
Error/Warning Log - Information about any errors or warnings that have occurred. File
name is (Errwarn.log)
Debug Log - All of the above logs compressed into one log
For AppleTalk, since a router must be present, the driver is opened and checked for existence
of RTMP (Router Table Maintenance Protocol) which is normally broadcast by all AppleTalk
routers every 30 seconds.
For Banyan Vines, the system sends a Vine IP echo to server.
For NetBIOS, a request to register a name is sent to the naming registration service.
NOTE: A request may be made by Field Engineering to obtain a Debug Log from a machine
that is experiencing intermittent ESS boot-up, Network connection, or another online related
problem(s). The Debug Log is accessed by opening the ESS/Network tab and then, pressing
ESS Logs icon. There will be a list of items that can be selected. The Debug Log is one of
them, and is usually the only file that needs to be retrieved and e-mailed to Field Engineering.
Do not forward any logs without first contacting a Document Centre Products Network Field
Engineer.
If some protocols are grayed out, it is because they are not enabled or configured correctly.
Online/Offline
The Online/Offline diagnostic switch is used to change the state of the ESS connection of the
IOT.
This feature will allow access to ESS command prompt while connected with the Diagnostic
Navigator. This tool will be available through either the PWS port on the IOT or the RDT
modem. This feature is password protected. To use this feature, the Remote Testing Access for
Network Controller on the local UI should enabled.
Review network statistics (arp cache, host table, route table, subnet mask, etc.)
These instructions allow you to view error messages and warnings issued during system operation, or you can view any error or shutdown events that occurred during system operation.
The Get Network Data is very similar to the Echo test in its look and how it functions. It has
more capabilities for error messages in the results window and in a log file.
CONFIGURATION:
Additional Troubleshooting
ESS Network Configuration is used to verify the network configuration data stored on the ESS.
You may run this utility after a UI configuration was performed to check what was entered at
the UI with what was stored as well as other troubleshooting functions.
NVM:
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
May 2003
10-148
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Network Configuration Initialization clears the ESS network information and restores it to
the default conditions.
Interpreter Profile - contains information as it relates to Printer Job Language (PJL) settings such as the Language Description and version. It also displays the resolution and
available memory
Language Description:PostScript
Language Level:3
Dust-off ESS NVM Initialization - ESS billing initialized, ESS system usage initialized, ESS
fault counters initialized, ESS diagnostic counters initialized, ESS SAKO settings initialized,
and All ESS dust-off nvm has been initialized.
Language Version:3010
Default Orientation:portrait
Default X-Orientation:600
Restore ESS NVM - This function is used to Restore the Network information stored on the
ESS.
Default Y-Orientation:600
Fault/Counters:
Current Y-Orientation:600
ESS Counters Display - The ESS Counters dialog is intended to provide a single location to
view key counter data. To facilitate navigation through the large number of counters, the data is
divided into several tabs. The default is Display All counter information.
Language Description:PCL
Configuration Report
Default Orientation:portrait
Current X-Resolution:600
Interpreter Memory:6500000
Language Level:6
Language Version:6
Default X-Orientation:600
Configuration Report
Default Y-Orientation:600
The printing of the configuration report confirms that the ESS has successfully booted.
Current X-Resolution:600
Current Y-Orientation:600
Device Profile - Shows specific information that pertains to the system that includes the
machine software versions, disk size, total memory installed, and the status of the IPA
PWB.
Device Name:
NE0000504
0.19.0.26.2
0. 19.0.27
used=276MB/total=4340MB
96MB
0. 19.0.28
32MB
DC470
UI Software Version:
Interpreter Memory:6500000
Report Profile - Date and Time that the report was printed
1-800-821-2797
Ethernet Profile - displays the physical hardware address for the printer. The Speed
determines if the printer is connected to a 10MBPS or a 100 MBPS network segment. The
default setting AUTO
Ethernet Card:
pci card
MAC Address:
00:90:27:eb:c0:bf
Speed:
auto
Token Ring Profile - Protocol Interfaces (TCP/IP, NetWare, etc) can only be configured
for Token Ring if the Token Ring Option has been installed. The MAC Address is the physical hardware address of the Token Ring card and will be displayed ONLY if physically
connected to a Token Ring Network. Otherwise, the MAC Address will appear as all 0s
The Network Administrator sets the Speed or it can remain set for Auto. Source Routing is
set for networks with multiple Rings where routing is a requirement.
Token Ring Card: pci card
available
Speed: auto
Document Defaults:
Size:x= 216mm, y= 279mm
TCP/IP
Type:System-Default
Color: Unspecified
Host Name - identifies the printer to users if the IP address and printer name is listed
in the Hosts file
Sides:1
Plex:simplex
Broadcast Address - determines what network segment the printer broadcasts its
services on
Copy Count:1
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-149
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
Subnet Mask- determines what network segment the printer is on. The Network
Administrator sets it
NDS Tree:-
Interface - determines how the machine is connected to the network over TCP/IP
(Ethernet or Token Ring).
Poll Interval:
Automatic Addressing - allows the printer to obtain its TCP/IP configuration from a
DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP Server. DHCP is the default setting.
SAP Rate:60
Line Printer Daemon (LPD) - is used with TCP/IP Printing. It can be Disabled, however, if it is disabled then the printer WILL NOT accept print jobs from workstations or
servers that submit print jobs using the LPR protocol.
NDS Context:-
Interface:ethernet
Primary File Server:FS1
LPD Port Number - can be changed to meet the network requirements and should
be provided/changed by the System Administrator ONLY.
AppleTalk Zone - determines what network segment (zone) the printer is installed on
AppleTalk Phase - determines what type of AppleTalk network the machine is connected to
TCP / IP Enabled:enabled
Host Name:DC470
IP Address:13.175.184.193
AppleTalk Enabled:disabled
Broadcast Address:13.175.187.255
Subnet Mask:255.255.252.0
AppleTalk Zone:*
Default Gateway:13.175.184.1
AppleTalk Phase:2
Interface:ethernet
Printer Type:LaserWriter
AppleTalk Interface:ethernet
Automatic Addressing:DHCP
LPD Enabled:enabled
HTTP Settings
Netware Settings
Print Server - The name given to the printer by the System Administrator. This will
see when the printer is logged onto the network. The Print Server pulls the print jobs
from the NetWare Print Queue
NDS Tree - name is used with NetWare 4.x, does not apply to NetWare 3.x.
NDS Context - determines where in the NDS Tree the Print Server object reside.
IPX Frame Type - determines which Frame Type to use when communicating with
the Novell Server. Choices are 802.2, 802.3, Ethernet_II, or 802.5 (Token Ring
only).
Poll Interval - determines how often the printer will poll the NetWare Print Queue for
jobs.
User Name and Print Service name - parameters setup by the Network Administrator that allows users to print to the printer
SAP Rate - determines how often the Print Server will advertise itself on the network.
User Name:
Primary File Server - is used with NetWare 3.x and 4.x (Bindery). Up to four Primary
File Servers can be configured
NOTE: The Embedded web server allows access to users as well as a network
administrator to modify specific device settings as well as submit jobs to be printed
via the internet
HTTP Port Enabled:enabled
Port Number:80
Max Connections:32
Banyan Vines -
Banyan Enabled:
Interface:
enabled
CALEB@DC265@XEROX
ethernet
NetBIOS
Netware Enabled:enabled
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
May 2003
10-150
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Workgroup - identifies what group of network resources the printer belongs in. Workgroup and Domain are synonymous in the Microsoft Networking Model
Media Type:standard
Media Color:white
Media Size:x=216mm, y=279mm
Media Name:MediumInTray_2
Media Type:standard
Media Color:white
NetBIOS Enabled:enabled
Host Name:LINCOLN
Media Name:MediumInTray_3
Printer Name:270ST
Media Type:standard
Workgroup:LAB
Media Color:white
Number Connections:30
Connection Timeout:100
Media Name:MediumInTray_4
Interface:IP/Ethernet
Media Type:standard
Parallel Port Settings - allows communications as well as printing via the Parallel Port on
the ESS ONLY
Media Color:white
Media Size:x=216mm, y=279mm
Media Trays - show the specific details about the paper trays that are installed on the
system
Media Trays:
Media Name:MediumInTray_1
Table 5 Power PC vs. Intel
Intel
Power PC
None
L19.xx (7.0)
DIMMs 128MB
DIMMs 128MB
Celeron CPU
Power PC 100Mzh
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-151
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
Power PC
None
Technical Overview
General Description
The ESS (Electronic Subsystem) is the portion of the machine that provides network connectivity and print job processing functions. The ESS is also known as the Embedded Print Controller.
The ESS is built around a 100MHz Power PC 603E processor and the basic configuration
includes:
32 MB of DRAM Memory
The ESS runs on a PowerPC version of the LynxOS operating system, which is based on
UNIX. The ESS is a standalone computer. If power was supplied, the ESS could boot and run
the operating system without being connected to Document Centre 265 at all.
ESS Components and Locations
The ESS has very few components. The following are the only replaceable parts:
ESS PWB
ESS Software
All of the ESS components are located in the Card Cage at the rear of the machine (Refer to
Figure 2).
ESS PWB
The Main Control PWB is located facing the outside of the machine. The ESS faces the inside
of the machine and can only be accessed if the card cage is open. The ESS PWB is connected to the Main Control PWB through its mounting position. A connector on the back of the
ESS PWB is mated to a connector on the back of the Main Control PWB.
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
May 2003
10-152
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Card Cage
ESS PWB
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-153
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
The cables for the Hard Disk Drive connect at the back of the drive. A 50 pin ribbon cable
transfers data to/from the ESS PWB and a 4 pin power connector supplies +5 VDC, +12 VDC,
-12 VDC, and ground. (Refer to Figure 3).
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
May 2003
10-154
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-155
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
Optional
Slots
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
May 2003
10-156
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
ESS Ports
Parallel Port
(IEEE)1284
Serial Port - This is where the PWS can be connected to and monitor the ESS using a terminal window.
Ethernet Network Port - RJ45 type connector for 10BaseT twisted pair ethernet
Token Ring (Optional) - Used for Token Ring networks. RJ45 connects to the Token Ring
PWB with an adaptor cable
Token
Ring (Not
shown)
Ethernet Network
Port (RJ45)
SCSI Port
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-157
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
Also, PWS diagnostics (covered in Module 8) is not effective, since the PWS interface is with
the Main Control PWB and needs communication with the ESS to function.
In this case, the PWS must be connected directly to the ESS serial port to monitor the boot process or run diagnostic commands. To connect to the ESS, a PWS serial cable 600T2058 and
a Null Modem Adapter 600T2073 are required. The complete procedure is included in the
EDOC, General Procedures, GP22 Connecting the PWS to the ESS Serial Port. Refer to it at
this time.
Once connected to the ESS, when the machine is switched on, text will scroll by on the PWS
screen as the ESS goes through its POST (Power On Self-Test) and boot process.
The ESS POST/Boot process can be broken down into five phases:
1.
Configuration Reporting
2.
Resource Testing
3.
4.
5.
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
May 2003
10-158
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
PWB mounts to the PCI Bus Extender PWB, and includes an adapter cable to interface with a
RJ45 connector.
May 2003
10-159
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
May 2003
10-160
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Image Processing
Accelerator PWB
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
10-161
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
Module summary
A Digital Copier (DC machine) can be upgraded to a full system (ST) machine in the field.
There are two versions of the DC to ST upgrade kit depending on the age of the machine.
The PCI Bus Extender Kit is required before installing a Token Ring PWB or an Image Processing Accelerator PWB.
Principles of Operation
460/470 ESS
May 2003
10-162
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-10
11-11
11-12
11-13
11-14
11-15
11-16
11-16
11-20
11-21
11-22
11-23
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
11-29
May 2003
11-1
Supplemental Training
Supplemental Training
May 2003
11-2
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Drivers
Purpose
HP-UX, IBM-AIX
custom PCL
The purpose of this differences module is to familiarize you with the changes that have come
about with the release of L0.18.xx/Ver.6 software, especially as it relates to the servicing of the
machine.
Driver Features
Major driver changes
Accounting field
Customer Solutions
The following are the major new features available in L18 software:
Once L18 software is installed, the customer will have the ability to upgrade the machine software.
Network Scanning
allows a walk-up user to scan an original, and send it off to a server, to e-mail, or to
an application on a workstation
LAN Fax
TIFF Printing
Connectivity Additions
100Mb Ethernet capability with option card (also known as Fast Ethernet)
PDL Support
Internet
Device Management - adds management of printer through the World Wide Web.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
11-3
Supplemental Training
Optional Kits
Before enabling any of these options you must assure that the machine has L18 software
installed.
NOTE: The kits marked below with an asterisk may already be installed depending on which
options the machine already has. For example, the PCI Bus Adapter PWB kit is required to
enable both the scan and fax options. So, for example, if a machine already has the fax option
installed, you will not have to install that kit when enabling the scan option.
2.
Install the 128K NVM RAM Chip kit (tag 036), unless the machine has an Atlanta
Platinum Main Control PWN, (tag 077).
3.
Open the Network Accounting Option enablement kit envelope and follow the
instructions to enable Network Accounting. This includes using the PWS to enter a
password that enables the option.
4.
5.
Give the customer software and documentation kits to the System Administrator.
6.
Emphasize to the System Administrator the importance of following the documentation to install the necessary software to enable Network Accounting.
2.
3.
Notify the customer's System Administrator that 100Mb Ethernet is enabled. They
may have To change a network setting to make it functional.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open the Network Scanning Option enablement kit envelope and follow the instructions to enable scanning. This includes using the PWS to enter a password that
enables the option.
6.
7.
Give the customer software and documentation kits to the System Administrator.
8.
Emphasize to the System Administrator the importance of following the documentation to install the necessary software to enable scanning.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open the LanFax Option enablement kit envelope and follow the instructions to
enable LanFax. This includes using the PWS to enter a password that enables the
option.
6.
7.
Give the customer software and documentation kits to the System Administrator.
8.
Emphasize to the System Administrator the importance of following the documentation to install the necessary software to enable LanFax.
Supplemental Training
May 2003
11-4
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Major Features
Documents can be stored to a server. Locations are determined as part of the system
administrators configuration process. Electronic documents are sent via an FTP connection over TCP/IP or IPX to a server. There, the documents can be accessed by users
using Windows/Netware tools.
Network Scanning
Network Scanning is an optional feature that must be purchased by the customer.
For more information about scanning features, go to More on Network Scanning.
Once the scan feature is purchased, it must be ensured that the machine hardware meets the
requirements of Network Scanning before enabling it in the software.
System Requirements
The additional ESS memory (ESS DRAM SIMMS) and IPA PWB are available as
Optional Kits. Their respective kit numbers are shown in Table 1:
Table 1 Optional Kits
Kit Name
Kit Number
IPA PWB
98S03002
98S03005
98S03006
Installation
Once the Network Scanning option is purchased and the hardware requirements are met,
the option must be enabled in software. It must be enabled via the PWS by the service
engineer. A password must be entered using a code obtained from the UI and then entering it into the PWS for the installation to be completed. See GP34, Entering Software
Options Password for more detail.
On the PWS, it can be enabled using [Configuration tab , Software Option Wizard]. It can
also be disabled or removed using this routine.
No additional software is necessary (assuming L18 SW already installed). Network Scanning software is loaded during boot-up using a DLM (Dynamically Loadable Module). To
ensure the functionality of Network Scanning, during ESS boot, the system is checked for
the correct amount of ESS DRAM, the existence of an IPA PWB on the ESS, and that
Network Scanning is enabled before the Network Scanning DLM is loaded. A fault code
will be declared if the required hardware is not detected.
Configuration
Configuration is usually performed by the customer or customers system administrator.
Network Scanning can be configured at the machine User Interface or remotely using the
CentreWare Network Scanning Admin Wizard.
Document Storage
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
11-5
Supplemental Training
Major Features
Scan to PC
Visioneer PaperPort
Scansoft TextBridge
240ST/255ST/265ST
Scan to E-Mail
Lotus Notes
Microsoft Exchange
CentreWare Software
- Scan Administration Wizard
- Scan Template Utility
- Document Management Agents (2)
Lakes Hardware
- IPA PWB
- 96MB ESS DRAM
LAN Fax
System Requirements
LAN Fax ix also an optional feature that must be purchased by the customer. It uses the same
basic functionality as network scanning and therefore has the same hardware requirements.
Additionally, Xerox is partnering with RightFAX to enable this feature.
For more information about LAN Fax features, go to More Information About LAN Fax
The customer will be required to have a RightFAX server, but the servicing of the server will not
be the responsibility of Xerox. Essentially, the LAN Fax image path is the same as Network
Scanning, except for the final destination of the file.
Supplemental Training
Major Features
May 2003
11-6
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The additional ESS memory (ESS DRAM SIMMS) and IPA PWB are available as
Optional Kits. Their respective kit numbers are shown below:
Table 2 Optional Kits
Kit Name
Kit Number
IPA PWB
98S03002
98S03005
98S03006
Once the LAN Fax option is purchased and the hardware requirements are met, the
option must be enabled in software. Presently, it must be enabled via the PWS by the
service engineer. A password must be entered for it to be completed successfully. The
password is generated in real-time on the PWS. See GP34, Entering Software Options
Password for more detail.
On the PWS, it can be enabled using [Configuration tab , Software Option Wizard]. It can
also be disabled or removed using this routine.
No additional software is necessary (assuming L18 SW already installed). LAN Fax software is loaded during boot-up using a DLM (Dynamically Loadable Module). During
boot, the system is checked for the correct amount of ESS DRAM, the existence of an IPA
PWB on the ESS, and that LAN Fax is enabled before the Network Scanning DLM is
loaded.
Additional Requirements
Configuration
A server must be available to temporarily store Fax documents before they are transferred to the RightFax server.
Installation
1. Program Job
2. Scan document
RightFAX Server
- Converts to CCITT GIV
- Transmits document
FAX instructions
Outgoing FAX
Transmission
NETWORK
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
11-7
Supplemental Training
Major Features
Treated as standard
incoming print job
RightFAX Server
Incoming FAX
Transmission
On the PWS, it can be enabled using [Configuration tab , Software Option Wizard]. It can
also be disabled or removed using this routine.
Job Based Accounting is an additional feature available to the customer for purchase. It gives
the customer the ability to control access to the machine and keep track of accounting information on a per job basis. It works on copy jobs, print jobs, FAX jobs, and Network Scanning
jobs.
Partnering with Xerox for the Job Based Accounting solution is Equitrac. Equitrac is supplying
the server and software to manage the information.
System Requirements
Machine Hardware Requirements
TAG 036, 128K NVM RAM Chip is required on the Main Control PWB
Installation
Once the Job Based Accounting option is purchased and the hardware requirements are
met, the option must be enabled in software. Presently, it must be enabled via the PWS
by the service engineer. A password must be entered for it to be completed successfully.
The password is generated in real-time on the PWS. See GP34, Entering Software
Options Password for more detail.
Ability to customize flexible costing formulas using the System 4 Cost Definitions Form.
Ability to generate fully customized reports (in quick view, summary or detail format) using
the System 4 Report Builder.
Ability to view logs of all system activity, including imports, exports, transactions, and
tasks.
Supplemental Training
Major Features
May 2003
11-8
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Ability to automatically schedule many system activities, using the System 4 Transaction
Interface Manager (TIM) module, including automatic report generation and automatic
backup operations.
Ability to view the status of all components of the control system, using the System Information Manager, including all local and remote systems, sites, and units.
Ability to operate concurrently with other operations; the system can print reports or transmit data while continuing to collect and store information from active terminals.
Ability to communicate over both LANs and WANs to support remote terminals and systems.
TCP/IP
Ethernet/Token Ring
Print
Copy
Fax
Scan
Win 95/98/NT
Mac 7.x, 8.x
Web UI
Customers PC
Equitrac Accounting
Database Server
ST or LP machines manufactured with version 6 software or those that have been upgraded to
version 6 are enabled for customer installation of machine software upgrades. Future software
upgrades will be made available to the customer on a CD or from a Xerox website. Instructions
for the customer upgrade will be provided with the software.
First, it will save you time. Be sure your customers are aware of this feature. Next, it may result
in a service call if the customer has problems. If you take a service call for a customer software
upgrade problem you may want to discuss the problem with the System Administrator and
watch them as they try an upgrade. If the problem isn't evident then you have the option of
upgrading software with the PWS, as usual.
The Process
The customer's System or Network Administrator either puts the software upgrade CD in their
PC or downloads the upgrade file from the web. They then open the CentreWare Internet Services home page via a browser using the machine web address (the IP address). Then, following the instructions provided with the software, the administrator sends the software file to the
machine. The upload takes 7 to 10 minutes. The machine will then automatically enter the software upgrade mode and upgrade its machine software. This takes about 45 minutes. The procedure can be repeated on another machine as soon as the software file is uploaded to the
first machine. One does not have to wait for each machine to upgrade itself before sending the
upgrade file to the next machine.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
You will continue to receive software upgrade kits that enable you to upgrade machine software using the PWS.
May 2003
11-9
Supplemental Training
Major Features
Diagnostics
Diagnostics Changes
In support of L18 software, the EDOC has been updated to include new and updated RAPs,
repairs, parts lists and other procedures.
L18 software has brought some new diagnostic features and some changes to existing diagnostic routines.
Listed below are some of the diagnostic changes that are available in L18 software:
Service Call Procedures SCP-04 Corrective Actions RAP updated to include Network
Scanning and LAN Fax problems.
TEER Diagnostics
16-B ESS Boot RAP updated to include ESS Memory Test and new ESS Software verify
from ESS Alt-Boot menu.
18-A Network Entry RAP updated to include 100Mb Ethernet, improved Token Ring
checkout using added checks in Echo Test, and also utilizing the new ESS Memory Test.
The ESS Memory Test is a new tool, launched from within the Alternate Boot Tool. It creates a TTY window to the ESS and runs extensive tests of the ESS DRAM. For more
information go to ESS Memory Test (L18 in General Procedures.
Diagnostics section of General Procedures updated to include new and changed diagnostic routines.
Go to the 16-B ESS Boot RAP and observe how the ESS Memory Test is being used.
Use the Back button on the browser to return here when done.
Repairs have been updated to show IPA PWB and 100Mb Ethernet PWB, REP 16-4
IQ-2 IQ Checkout RAP has been updated to utilize the new electronic test pattern for LP
machines.
IQ Specifications have been updated to include running the Test Pattern from within ESS
Test Jobs for checking IOT Specifications when appropriate.
TEER Diagnostics adds a series of tests designed to help diagnose TEER Sensor failures. For more information go to TEER Diagnostics (L18 Software Only) in General Procedures.
To view the routine, select [Paper tab, TEER Diagnostic].
Echo Test
For L18, additional features have been added. Token Ring and PCI Ethernet (100Mb
Ethernet PWB) have been added to the list of protocols. This will test the functionality of
the optional Network Interface cards.
To view the routine, select [ESS/Network tab , Echo Test].
Go to the 18-A Network Entry RAP and observe how the Echo Test is being used. Use
the Back button on the browser to return here when done.
Supplemental Training
May 2003
11-10
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Question 7
Checkpoint Questions
Any customer can upgrade their DC265 machine software (Think before answering).
Question 1
a.
True
b.
False
32MB
b.
64MB
c.
96MB
d.
128MB
True
b.
False
Question 2
Question 9
a.
IPA PWB
b.
A procedure for entering the Software Options password exists in the EDOC.
c.
a.
True
b.
False
True
b.
False
a.
True
b.
False
True
b.
False
Every time a customer orders one of the options enabled by L018 software, you will be called
to install it. (Think about this one).
a.
True
b.
False
Question 5
True
b.
False
True
b.
False
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
11-11
Supplemental Training
Glossary
CSMA/CD
Template
DLM
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format. A widely used raster graphics file format.
Transmission Report
Ethernet
IEEE 802.3 LAN Standard that uses the CSMA/CD access method and transmits at 10Mbps.
Fast Ethernet
Also known as 100BaseT. Allows transmission rates ten times faster than 10BaseT.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol. A standard method for transferring files from computer to computer.
HP-UX
Hewlett-Packards version of Unix
IBM-AIX
IBMs version of Unix
LAN
Local Area Network
PCL
Printer Control Language. A command language originally for the HP LaserJet printers.
PDL
Page Description Language. A high level language for defining printer output.
PrinterMap
PrinterMap is a desktop application that provides enterprise printer management with a proactive, single view topology map to manage multiple vendors printers
Scan Template
A template contains preprogramming applied by a user to a particular job. Templates are similar to Stored Jobs.
Supplemental Training
Glossary
May 2003
11-12
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
More Information
Scan to Application
Scan to Application allows users to integrate network scanning with third-party offerings
such as Lotus Notes/ Domino.doc, Optika eCentre, Adobe Capture and CTI Documentum.
The Optika eCentre solution was developed specifically for CentreWare Network Scanning services. It is another simple link into an integrated workflow and document management application. Optika eCentre provides a digital document repository for scanned
documents. An Optika eCentre agent resides on the server, looks for scanned images in
the repository and links them into Optika eMedia and FPMulti software.
When customers scan a hard copy document, they create an electronic file, which when saved
onto the network increases its value exponentially in terms of document management, file
sharing, re-use and re-purposing.
The Document Centre Adobe Capture solution, Scan to PDF via Adobe Capture, is targeted at all enterprises that have a need to capture documents as PDF files on an ongoing basis. The Adobe Capture client watches the repository on the NT server and
automatically processes the files placed at the server by the Document Centre.
CentreWare Network Scanning Services gives Xerox customers a powerful tool in transitioning
documents from the hard copy to digital formats.
Scan to Network Server
Sharing the knowledge becomes an easy exercise when documents are scanned to your
customers network server. Putting documents on a permanent network location enables
users to manually retrieve the documents to their desktop for OCRing, editing, incorporating into other documents and distributing to other workgroups. Documents placed on the
network server can be made private, shared with other users in a specific workgroup or
made accessible to anyone with access rights to the server.
To create a scanned file, the user loads a document or documents in the Document
Feeder and presses the Network Scanning button on the UI Display. They select a template on the UI that tells the machine how to process the scan and where to send it. Templates can be created or modified as necessary.
Scan to Desktop
Users can scan documents to their desktops directly into Visioneer PaperPort software.
By dragging and dropping the image file into compatible word processing, spreadsheet or
presentation programs (such as MS Word, Excel or PowerPoint), image files are automatically OCRd via TextBridge Pro 98, thus creating a document that can now be edited.
CentreWare Scanning to Desktop includes Scan Admin Wizard for setting up network
scanning, Template Utility for creating scan templates, Document Management Agent for
automatically monitoring and managing scan job processing, VisioneerPaperPort for
retrieving and manipulating scanned documents and TextBridge Pro98 for OCRing
scanned documents.
At the desktop, users can tap into a huge range of simplicity and functionality offered
through Visioneer PaperPort. The PaperPort application can be linked with over 185 different applications, including MS Word, MS Excel, Novell InForms, OmniForm, Adobe
PhotoDeluxe, Lotus Notes Mail, Quicken, Ami Pro and WordPerfect. This means that
almost anyone within the customers organization can have valuable access to the information they need.
Outgoing Fax
To send a fax the user loads a document or documents in the document feeder, uses the
keypad to dial in one or more numbers, selects the resolution to be transmitted and
presses START. If multiple documents are to be sent, the user must indicate whether
they are one or two sided. The document or documents are fed through the document
feeder and scanned. The resulting TIFF file along with the phone number is then
retrieved by what is known as an agent (a software routine on one of the customers servers). The server then forwards the file and phone number to a RightFax server. The
RightFax server converts the file for phone transmission and sends it to the appropriate
phone number. The RightFax server sends a transmission report to the Document Centre
for printing or display on the UI.
Incoming Fax
Incoming Faxes are received by the RightFax server and are either sent to the Document
Centre as a PCL print job or are distributed directly to end-user workstations.
CentreWare Network Scanning Services with DocuShare 2.0 provides users with the
capability to seamlessly store scanned documents from the Visioneer PaperPort desktop.
This means users can easily scan documents on the Document Centre and drag and drop
them using PaperPort to store them in DocuShare directly from the PaperPort desktop.
With this solution, the scanned documents, now on a users Intranet, can be easily shared
without going through a webmaster.
Scan to E-Mail
The Scan to E-mail function enables users to scan documents and deliver them directly to
the desktop of anyone with an E-mail address. The Scan to E-mail service supports standard E-mail applications, including MS Mail, Lotus Notes, MS Exchange and is compliant
with the widely adopted MAPI protocol. MAPI is defined as MAIL API a programming
interface that enables an application to send and receive mail over the Microsoft Mail
messaging system.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
11-13
Supplemental Training
More Information
Supplemental Training
Answers
May 2003
11-14
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Reverse Image
Mirror Image
460/470 Overview
The 460/470 is a significant upgrade to the Lakes family in terms of printing performance. The
Intel based ESS is the most significant change in the system. The 460/470 will be available as
both a Digital Copier (460 and 470 DC) and a Networked System (460 and 470ST). There will
not be a stand-alone Laser Printer (LP) model available. Both the DC and ST models will be
available at launch. As with other Document Centre products, a 460 and 470 DC can be
upgraded to a 460 or 470 ST.
The 460/470 will have the highest performance in the Document Center family. As a family,
copy jobs print with a resolution of 600 x 600 x 8. Network print jobs have a base resolution of
600 x 600, with other resolutions available. The ST Models support Ethernet, Token Ring and
various network protocols such as TCP/IP, Novell, AppleTalk, Banyon Vines, Windows and NT.
All ST products offer multiple scanning solutions, Network FAX with RightFax and Network
Accounting with EquiTrac. Each ST comes with an embedded HTTP (Internet) server and
Xerox CentreWare Software.
IOT / ESS
Driver install enhancments - Retain driver settings after upgrade (Windows 95/98
PS3)
Network Connectivity
Drivers Features
CA Unicentre
HP Openview
Tivoli
Card Cage
WINS Support
The Card Cage has been redesigned to accept the new ESS PWB and Main Control
PWB.
UI
Covers
Internet
Network Scanning
DADF
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Finisher
Top Tray now has 250 sheet capacity .
May 2003
11-15
Supplemental Training
Service Information
The Document Centre 460/470 is in many ways the same as a 240/255/265. The most significant change is the redesign of the Card Cage and the changes in the ESS Hardware.
The new ESS is designed around an Intel motherboard with a Celeron 366MHz processor. A 64MB DIMM is standard. The BIOS resides on the ESS motherboard. The motherboard interfaces to a Riser PWB, which provides a PCI Interface, MCB Interface, SCSI
Hard Drive Controller, and voltage regulation.
Here are the ten most important things a Customer Service Engineer needs to know about servicing a 460/470:
1.
There is a performance gain in printing due to the new ESS, there is no performance gain
in the 460/470 Digital Copier.
The new ESS uses the same operating system as before (Lynx), but the Alternate Boot
tool has changed.
2.
A new Null Modem Adaptor (113E40060) is required to service the ESS. The Intel ESS
has a serial port with the opposite gender from what the PowerPC ESS used.
10Mb and 100Mb ethernet capability are built on to the ESS PWB. Token Ring is available with a plug-in card. An IPA PWB is still a required option for Network Scanning.
3.
255 and 265 DC and STs can be converted to a 460/470 in the field.
The RJ45 Ethernet Connector on the ESS PWB has link lights that indicate network activity as well as speed (10Mb or 100Mb) (see Diagnostics).
4.
5.
The IPA PWB and the Token Ring PWB are physically different from their PowerPC ESS
versions.
6.
The same EDOC is used to service the 240/255/265/460/470. The EDOC is configurable,
or the differences will be noted within the procedure.
7.
8.
The customer has the ability to disable Electronic Hole Removal, if in some rare cases,
data is being deleted.
9.
Use the Link Lights on the ESS PWB Ethernet connector to help troubleshoot connectivity
problems.
10. Any repair procedures involving components within the card cage have changed.
Supplemental Training
Card Cage
May 2003
11-16
Parallel Port
Diagnostic LEDs
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
ESS DRAM
DIMM
ESS PWB
Slots Token
Ring PWB
and IPA
PWB
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
11-17
Supplemental Training
Card Cage
Accessory PWB
EHR PWB
EPC SDRAM
Card Cage
The Card Cage has physically changed somewhat. There is now an outer cover that slides
over an inner support frame where the PWBs are mounted. Refer to REP 03-11 for details .
Supplemental Training
Card Cage
May 2003
11-18
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Upgrade kits are available that include all the required hardware and software to replace the
existing ESS with the Intel-based ESS. Three different kits will be available to cover the following upgrade scenarios:
NVM Module Access
Cover
An existing 255DC or 265DC can be upgraded to a 460ST or 470ST with purchase and
installation of a DC to ST Upgrade Kit.
An existing 255ST or 265ST can be upgraded to a 460ST or 470ST with the purchase
and installation of a ST to ST Upgrade Kit.
An existing 460DC or 470DC can be upgraded to a 460ST or 470ST with the purchase
and installation of a DC to ST Upgrade Kit.
New Features
The 460/470 ST and L19 software include the Network Scanning, LAN Fax, and Job Based
Accounting features that were part of the L18 software upgrade. These features are a very
important component to the 460/470 products. If you have not yet read the L18 Differences
Update, you should do that now. It can be found here: L018/Version 6.x Differences Update
Overview.
Upgrading to a 460/470
In order to support Xerox committment to the modular, upgradable Document Centre platform,
several upgrade paths are available.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
11-19
Supplemental Training
Card Cage
Diagnostics
Global Browser Variables have been renamed and moved out of the Introduction. They
now are called Browser Configuration Variables and appear at the front of the EDOC.
The Browser Configuration Variables now contain a new item called Product Identifier.
This is new in L19 software and identifies the type of machine. In L19.1 software it is
planned that this will be automatically configured when connected to a machine. In L19.0,
it must be set manually by clicking on a machine type.
16-B ESS Boot RAP has been re-written for the 460/470.
GP22 , Connecting to the ESS Serial Port has been re-written for the 460/470.
GP23 , Accessing the Alternate Boot Menu has been re-written for 460/470
Some diagnostic tests that were part of the firmware in the old ESS are no longer available (watchnet, testnet)
GP35 , ESS Memory Test has been re-written for the 460/470.
GP37 , Accessing the ESS Diagnostic Menu is new for the 460/470.
The RJ45 Ethernet Connector on the ESS PWB has link lights that indicate network activity as well as speed (10Mb or 100Mb).
PL 1.4C has been added for the new Atlanta Platinum 360 NLX Main Control PWB
Principles of Operation for the ESS and Connectivity - Chain 16 & Chain 18 has been
updated to include the 460/470.
Diagnostics Changes
The 460/470 and L19 software did not bring about drastic changes in diagnostics. The one
area that was affected is the ESS Alternate Boot Tool.
Listed below are some of the changes that are evident in the 460/470:
Procedures for running ESS Alternate Boot Tool have changed. Refer to GP23 .
ESS POST results are no longer seen during ESS boot. Results are stored and accessed
through a diagnostics menu using Alternate Boot. See GP38 .
To connect to the ESS Serial port requires a different type null modem connector (gender
change).
The ESS will auto-configure to the highest speed (can be set manually in Connectivity and Network Setup)
There are green and amber LEDs on the connector indicate the following LAN conditions
Table 1 RJ-45 LAN Connector LEDs
LED Color
LED State
Indicates
Green
Off
10Mb/sec speed
selected
Green
On
100Mb/sec speed
selected
Amber
Off
Amber
On (Steady State)
Amber
On (Brighter and
pulsing)
Procedure for Running ESS Memory Test has changed. See GP35 .
Supplemental Training
Diagnostics
May 2003
11-20
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
c.
45/55 ppm.
d.
55/65 ppm
a.
40
b.
50
a.
UI Color change
c.
75
b.
d.
100
c.
d.
a.
True
b.
False
a.
b.
True
b.
False
c.
Celeron Ionizer
d.
Photon Counter
L18.2 / v6.8
b.
L19.0 / v7.0
The IPA PWB is no longer needed for Network Scanning in the 460/470..
c.
a.
True
d.
L24 / v12
b.
False
b.
They indicate network activity and speed (10Mb or 100Mb) at the ethernet port.
c.
d.
60/70 ppm
b.
46/47 ppm
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Question 10
What would you do if customer complained about deletions on certain documents copied from
DADF in the area where hole punches might be?
a.
b.
c.
Show customer how to disable Electronic Hole Removal in Customer Tools, System Settings
d.
b.
May 2003
11-21
Supplemental Training
c.
d.
Supplemental Training
May 2003
11-22
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
To change the settings for thin stapled sets, enter [Tools]. In Tools, select [System Settings],
[More], [More] to get to Screen 3 of 3. In Screen 3, select [Output Options], then select [Thin
Stapled Sets].
Finisher Improvements
The following are improvements in the Document Centre 460/470 Smart Tray Finisher.
A Top Tray capacity of 250 sheets (200 sheets for 5.5 in x 8.5 in (A5) paper).
For all jobs except 8.5 x 11" SEF and 8.5 x 14" Portrait Staple Mode, only 2 positions, A and B,
are used (Refer to Figure 1):
If the tray is in Position A at the start of the job, the Offset Motor is energized to move the
tray to Position B where the first set is compiled/stapled then ejected. The tray then
moves to Position A for the next job. The tray offsets between Position A and Position B
for successive jobs.
If the tray is in Position B at the start of the job, the Offset Motor is energized to move the
tray to Position A where the first set is compiled/stapled then ejected. The tray then
moves to Position B for the next job. The tray offsets between Position A and Position B
for successive jobs.
For 8.5 x 11" SEF and 8.5 x 14" Portrait Staple Mode, all 4 offsetting positions are used (Refer
to Figure 2):
The tray moves from Position A or Position B to Position D to compile the first set.
The tray then moves outboard to Position B where the set is stapled and ejected.
Top Tray
For the next set, the tray moves to Position C to compile the set.
The customer has the option to select where unstapled copy and print sets will be sent by
default. They may either be sent to the Top Tray or the Main Tray of the Finisher. Because of
this customer option, the Top Tray has been redesigned to reliably stack up to 250 copies. The
capacity is slightly less, 200 sheets, for 8.5 in x 5.5 in (A5) paper.
The tray then moves outboard to Position A where the set is stapled and ejected
The output (the completed, stapled sets) in this mode are placed in Position A and Position B as are all other sets following the above sequence.
When this mode is complete the tray will resume its normal operation using only Position
A and Position B for offsetting.
To change the default location for unstapled sets, enter [Tools]. In Tools, select [System Settings], [More], [More] to get to Screen 3 of 3. In Screen 3, select [Output Options], then select
[Output Location].
Single Step: Steps the tray to the next position when [Continue] is selected. Position
sequence is A to B, B to C, C to D, D to A and repeats.
Continuous Cycle: Steps the tray continuously when [Continue] is selected. The tray
pauses for .5 seconds at each position. The tray stops when Stop is selected.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
11-23
Tray Home Position: At the start of the Single or Continuous test, selecting [Start] will
cause the tray to move to the Home position (position A). After arriving at Home, the button will change from [Start] to [Continue].
Sensor Monitor: The state of the Stacker Tray Offset Sensor will be monitored at all
times except while continuous mode is running.
On test entry, the system will read and display the state of the Stacker Tray Offset Sensor.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
If using Single Step mode, the tray will stop at the next position.
8.
If using Continuous mode, tray will continue stepping until [Stop] is selected.
To run this test, in Diagnostic Navigator, select [Finisher], [Finisher Tests], [Main Tray/Offset
Position].
Figure 1 All jobs except 8.5 x 11" SEF and 8.5 x 14" Portrait Staple Mode
Supplemental Training
May 2003
11-24
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
Figure 2 8.5 x 11" SEF and 8.5 x 14" Portrait Staple Mode
Service Tray
In the Capstan Driven Tamper, the gear on the Tamper Motor and the gear rack on the Tamper
Arm have been replaced by the Tamper Arm Drive Cable and the Tamper Capstan. This was
done to reduce the noise generated during Tamper initialization and Tamper operation. The
Tamper operation is the same as the operation of the gear driven Tamper.
The Finisher Set Separator has been redesigned to improve set-to-set registration.
The Kicker now has a Collapsible Kicker Arm that enables the Moving Stapler a greater range
of movement. This was needed for the correct placement of staples when dual stapling on
landscape (SEF) sets and single stapling on landscape (SEF) sets.
The Canard Wing is now mounted to the Retractable Registration Edge. The Canard Wing is
raised during the portrait staple mode reducing the posibility of the stapled set being misregistered.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
11-25
Supplemental Training
Tamper Arm
Drive Cable
Tamper
Capstan
Tamper Motor
Supplemental Training
May 2003
11-26
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
A cover for the Nip 1 idlers and Nip 3 Idlers has been added to prevent the idlers from becoming dislodged during jam clearance. This change has also been incorporated into the Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470. When a Finisher Transport Baffle is ordered, it will have
this new cover.
The magnets that secured the Finisher Transport Baffle in the correct position against the Exit
Baffle have been removed. The Finisher Transport Baffle is now held in the correct position by
weights that are located just to the left of the Area 5 handle.
The Finisher Controller PWB firmware has been changed to support the 90 PPM timing
algorith and the two Turbo staplers.
Turbo configuration Moving Stapler . The stapler has a faster cycle time, enabling it to
operate with 90 PPM machines.
Turbo configuration Fixed Stapler. The stapler has a faster cycle time, enabling it to operate with 90 PPM machines.
In late 2001, the DCE Finisher will be available for use on Document Centre 460/470 machines
that have been upgraded to 07.19.02.0xx software.
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
11-27
Supplemental Training
Supplemental Training
May 2003
11-28
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
The ability to scan directly to the mail server via Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).
This eliminates the need for Centre Ware Scanning Distribution Service.
The ability to look up e-mail addresses in global or public address lists via Lightweight
Directory Access Protocol (LDAP).
User Authentication, which optionally enables the Document Centre to require user login
in order to access the Network Scanning, E-mail, and Fax functions.
The ability to create Data Management Fields inside individual scan templates.
Other Features
Build Job:
sample last segment
delete/re-scan last segment
Scan to file:
scan direct to PDF
edge/border erase
Smart-tray finisher:
stack up to 100 small sets
legal/landscape top-left stapling
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65
May 2003
11-29
Supplemental Training
Supplemental Training
May 2003
11-30
V0.042
Document Centre 240/255/265/460/470 DT65/DP65